1988_Optoelectronics_Designers_Catalog 1988 Optoelectronics Designers Catalog
User Manual: 1988_Optoelectronics_Designers_Catalog
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 954
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
.-------.:.:- Optoelectronics
Designer's
Catalog
,
..
1988-1989
O,S1RIBUT 0 8y
(1M1ltfM()
Hall-Mark Electronics Corporation
Co:
rt / .
1110 Ringwood
San Jose, CA. 95131
408/946-0900
--.....
.
.........-
Optoelectronics
Designer's
Catalog
To help you choose and design with HewlettPackard optoelectronic components, this catalog
includes detailed specifications for HP component
products. The products are divided into nine
sections:
High Reliability
Ink-Jet Components
Bar Code Components
Motion Sensing and Encoder Products
LED Light Bars and Bar Graph Arrays
LED Lamps
LED Displays
Fiber Optics
Optocouplers
How to Find the Right Information
The Table of Contents (pp. iii) indicates each of
the nine sections listed above by a thumb-tab. An
alphanumeric index (pp. iv) follows the Table of
Contents, and it lists every component
represented in this catalog.
"
. .
ji
;1
1 . /1
/l
JiP
.. '
.
At the beginning of each of the nine product
sections, there is a selection guide with basic
product specifications which allows you to quickly
select products most suitable for your application.
Following the product sections is a complete
listing of application bulletins and notes which are
frequently useful as design aids. The final section
is an appendix containing HP sales, service, and
authorized distributor locations.
How to Order
To order any component in this catalog or
additional applications information, call the HP
office nearest you and ask for the Components
representative. A complete listing of the U. S. sales '
offices is on pp. 11-13; offices located outside of
the U.S. are listed on pp. 11-6.
A world-wide listing of HP authorized
distributors is on pp. 11-2. These distributors can
offer off-the-shelf delivery for most HP
components.
Hewlett-PackardCotnponents:
A Brief Sketch
Quality and Reliability
Quality and reliability are two very important
concepts to Hewlett-Packard in maintaining the _
commitment to product performance.
History
In 1964, Hewlett-Packard established a new
division having the charter of developing and
producing state-of-the-art electronic components
for internal use. By 1975, both microwave and
optoelectronic devices contributed to the growing
business of Hewlett-Packard and the Components
Group was formed. Today there are three
divisions: the Optoelectronics division, Optical
Communications division and Microwave
Semiconductor division. In addition to these three
divisions there is a specialiZed team of people to
develop, manufacture and market bar code .
components.
At Hewlett-Packard, quality is integral to product
development, manufacturing and final
introduction. "Parts per million" (PPM) asa
measure of quality is used in HP's definition of
product assurance. And HP's commitment to
quality means that there is a continuQus process of
improvement and tightening of quality standards.
Manufacturing quality circles and quality testing
programs are important ingredients in HP
products.
The products of the Components Group are
vertically integrated, from the growing of LED
crystals to the development oCthe various onboard integrated circuits to package design.
Vertical integration insures that HP quality is
maintained throughout product development and
manufacturing.
Reliability testing is also required for the
introduction of new HP components. Lifespan
calculations in "mean-time-between-failure"
(MTBF) terms are published and available as .
reliability data sheets. HP's stringent reliability
testing assures long compOnent lifetimes and'
consistent product performance.
Over 5000 employees-are dedicated to HP
Components, including manufacturing facilities in
Malaysia and Singapore, factory and marketing
support in San Jose, California and a world-wide
sales force. Marketing operations for Europe are
located in Boeblingen, Germany.
/
Each field sales office is staffed with engineers
trained to provide-technical assistance. An
extensive communications network links field
with factory-to assure that each customer can
quickly attain the information and help needed.
ii
--~~~~~~~~-
~~~~-
-
~---
Table of Contents
Alphanumeric Index ........... ~ ................ : ................. : ................... , iv.
High Reliability ......................................................................... 1-1
Visible Product Screening Programs ............................................... 1~3
Hermetic Lamps Selection Guide ................................................. 1-7
Hermetic Displays Selection Guide .......... ; .................................... 1-9
Hermetic Optocoupler Screening Programs ..................................... 1-13
Hermetic Optocoupler Selection Guide ......................................... 1-18
Ink-Jet Components ... ; ............................... ~ ; ......................... '. " 2-1
Ink-Jet Components Selection Guide ............................................. 2-3.
Bar Code Components ...... ~ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 3-1
Bar Code Components Selection Guide ..................... : ..................... 3-3
Motion Sensing and Control .... ; ................................................ :.. 4. :1
Motion Sensing and .Control Selection Guide ................................. '.. 4-4
Light Bars and Bar Graph Arrays ................................................. 5-1
. Light Bars and Bar Graph Arrays Selection Guide ............................ 5-3
Solid State Lanips : .............................. , ................................... :.
6-L
Solid State Lamps Selection Guide ............ ; ...................... ; .......... ; 6,;.3
Hermetic Lamps . .'.: ............................ .'................................. 6-145"
Solid State Displays : ..... ; ..... : ...................... :.............................. 7-1'·
Solid State Displays Selection Guide ............................................. 7-4
Hermetic Displays ...... .' ....... , ................................................... ; .7-181·
Fiber Optics ................................................................................ '8-1 .
Fiber Optics Selection Guide ................. : ......................... ~ ........... 8-6,
Optocouplers ................ ; ...:................................................. :; ... ).. 9":'1
Optocouplers Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 9-4
Hermetic Optocouplers .: ............................................................·9.:.101
Applications Information ..... ; ...............................................':;.;. 10-1 .... .
Authorized Distributor and Representative Directory ................. : ....... 11:. 2
International Sales and Service Offices .......................................... 11-6
U.S. Sales and Service Offices ................................................... 11-13
iii
_ _-_._----
........... ..
Alphanutneric ·Index
HBCR-1800
HBCR-2.o.oO
HBCR-2010
HBCR-8100
HBCR-8300
......................... 3-31
...•..................... 3-37
......................... 3-43
.......................... 3-6
.......................... 3-6
HCPL-2211, OPT. 100 ................
HCPL-2212 ' .........................
HCPL-2212, OPT 010 ..•.... , ...... :..
HCPL-2212, OPT 100 ...... , .........
HCPL-2231 .........................
9-1.0
9-15
9-9
9-1.0
9-19
HBCR-8500
HBCR-8999
HBCS-11.o.o
HBCS-22.o.o
..................... ; ~ . .. 3-6
..... ,.......... .... . . . . .. 3-12
.......•.......•.....•..• 3-5.0
.•.....•..•.••.•...•...•. 3-19
.•...........•...•....•.. 3-19
HCPL-2231, OPT 010 .......... ;......
HCPL-2231, OPT 100 ...... '" . ; .... ;
HCPL-2232 ,. ',' ......................
HCPL-2232, OPT 010. . . . . . . . .. . . . . . ..
HCPL-2232, OPT 100 ................
9-9
9-1.0
9-19
9-9
9-1.0
HBCS~23.o.o
HBCS-24.o.o .............•....•....•. 3-19
HBCS-25.o.o ...............•......... 3-19
HBCS~2999 ..... ;................... 3-18
HBCS-4999 .••..•..•.......•........ 3-18
HBCS-5.o.o.o .....•..•.......••....... 3-13
HBCS-51.o.o
HBCS-52.o.o
HBC,S-53.o.o
HBCS-54.o.o
HBCS-55.o.o
.........................
... '......................
..........•....•.........
.•.....•..•...•.•.....•..
..••.•.••.............•..
HCPL-23.o.o
HCPL-23.o.o,
HCPL-23.oO;
HCPL-2400
HCPL-24.oO,
3~13
.........•.........•..... 9-23
OPT .01.0 ................. 9-9
OPT 10.0 .............•.. 9-10
............. , ........... 9-29
OPT 010 .•.......•..•...• 9-9
HCPL-24.oO, OPT 10.0 ' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 9-10
HCPL-2411 '......................... 9-29
HCPL-25.o2 .;....................... 9-57
HCPL-2502, OPT 010 .........•....... 9-9
HCPL-2502, OPT 100 .......•....•... 9-1.0
3-13
3-13
3-13
3-13
HBCS~61.o.o .......•....••. ,. . . . . . . .• 3-13,'
HBCS-63.o.o ..........•.••.•...•..... 3-13
HBCS-65.o.o ..•.....•.•.•......•..•. : 3-13
HBCS~7.o.o.o ..••.••..•......•..•..... 3-44
HBCS-7.o5.o ...•.••..........•....... 3-44
HCPL-2530 ................• ;....... 9-63
HCPL-2530, OPT .010 ...•..•...•..•... 9-9
HCPL-2530, OPT 1.00 ........ : .• : .•. ~ 9-10
HCPL-2531 ..... , ................... 9-63
HCPL-2531, OPT 010 , ......... , ...... 9-9
HBCS-71.o.o
HBCS-715.o
HCPL-193.o
HCPL-1931
HCPL-22.o.o
.............•.•.....•... 3-44
..•..........•...•••...• ~ 3-44
..•...•..••..•..•...•.•• 9-153
..••..........••....•... 9-153
••..•. , ••..... ,.......... 9-11
HCPL-2531,
HCPL-2601
HCPL"2601,
HCPL-2601,
HCPL-26.o2
OPT 100 ..........•..... 9-1.0
.............•........... 9-39
OPT .010 .............•••• 9-9
OPT 100 ...............• 9-10
..•....•.•.............•• 9-43
HCPL-22.o.o, OPT .01.0 .......•....•.... 9-9
HCPL-22.o.o, OPT 1.0.0 .....•••........ 9-1.0
HCPL-2201 ......................... 9-15
HCPL~2201. OPT 010 ..............•.. 9-9
HCPL"2201, OPT 100 ................ 9-1.0
HCPL-2602,
HCPL-2602,
HCPL-2611
HCPL-2612
HCPL-2630
OPT .01.0 •. ;.............. 9-9
OPT ,10.0 ..•..•. ,......... 9-10
......................... 9-39
..................... ; ... 9-43
............. , .......... ; 9-49
HCPL-2202 ......................... 9-15
HCPL-2202, OPT 010 ................. 9-9
HCPL-2202,OPT 100 ................ ,9~1.o
HCPL-2211 ......................... 9-.15
HCPL-2211, OPT 010 '" . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. 9-9
HCPL-263.o, OPT 010 .,............... 9-9
HCPL-263.o, OPT 1.00 ...•.•.•....•... 9-1.0
HCPL-2631 ..•.........•............ 9-53
HCPL-2631, OPT 01.0 •..............•. 9-9
HCPL-2631, OPT 1.00 ................ 9-10
New Products in BOLD Type,
iV
HCPL-2730 ......................•.. 9-71
HCPL-2730, OPT 010 ................. 9-9
HCPL-2730, OPT 100 ................ 9-10
HCPL-2731 .......................... 9-71
HCPL-2731, OPT 010 ................. 9-9
HDSP-0782 ........................
HDSP-0782TXV ....................
HDSP-0782TXVB ...................
HDSP-0783 ........................
HDSP-0783TXV ....................
7-190
7-190
7-190
7-190
7-190
HCPL-2731, OPT 100 ................ 9-10
HCPL-3700 ......................... 9-79
HCPL-3700, OPT 010 ................. 9-9
HCPL-3700, OPT 100 ................ 9-10
HCPL-4100 ......................... 9-85
HDSP-0783TXVB ...................
HDSP-0784 ........................
HDSP-0784TXV ....................
HDSP-0784TXVB ....................
HDSP-0791 ........................
7-190
7-190
7-190
7-190
7-190
HCPL-4100, OPT 010 ................. 9-9
HCPL-4100, OPT 100 ................ 9-10
HCPL-4200 ......................... 9-93
HCPL-4200, OPT 010 ................. 9-9
HCPL-4200, OPT 100 ................ 9-10
HDSP-0791TXV ....................
HDSP-0791TXVB ...................
HDSP-0792 ........................
HDSP-0792TXV ....................
HDSP-0792TXVB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
7-190
7-190
7-190
7-190
7-190
HCPL-4502
HCPL-4502,
HCPL-4502,
HCPL-4661
HCPL-5200
......................... 9-57
OPT 010 ................. 9-9
OPT 100 ................ 9-10
......................... 9-53
9-102
HDSP-0794 ........................
HDSP-0794TXV ....................
HDSP-0794TXVB ...................
HDSP-0860 ........................
HDSP-0861 ........................
7-190
7-190
7-190
7-163
7-163
HCPL-5201
HCPL-5230
HCPL-5231
HCPL-5400
HCPL-5401
........................
........................
............. ...........
........................
........................
........................
........................
........................
........................
9-102
9-108
9-108
9-114
9-114
HDSP-0862 ........................
HDSP-0863 ........................
HDSP-0881 ........................
HDSP-0881TXV ....................
HDSP-0881TXVB ...................
7-163
7-163
7-190
7-190
7-190
'
HCPL-5430
HCPL-5431
HCPL-5700
HCPL-5701
HCPL-5730
........................
9-120
9-120
9-126
9-126
9-130
HDSP-0882 ........................
HDSP-0882TXV ....................
HDSP-0882TXVB ...................
HDSP-0883 ........................
HDSP-0883TXV .......... ;.........
7-190
7-190
7-190
7-190
7-190
HCPL-5731
HCPL-5760
HCPL-5761
HCTL-1000
HCTL-2000
9-130
........................ 9-134
........................ 9-134
......................... 4-43
......................... 4-67
HDSP-0883TXVB ...................
HDSP-0884 . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . ..
HDSP-0884TXV ................. ;..
HDSP-0884TXVB ...................
HDSP-0960 ........................
7-190
7-190
7-190
7-190
7-163
HDSP-0760
HDSP-0761
HDSP-0762
HDSP-0763
HDSP-0770
........................
........................
........................
........................
........................
7-163
7-163
7-163
7-163
7-163
HDSP-0961 ........................
HDSP-0962 ........................
HDSP-0963 ........................
HDSP-0981 ........................
HDSP-0981TXV ............... ;....
7-163
7-163
7-163
7-190
7-190
HDSP-0771 ........................
HDSP-0772 ........................
HDSP-0781 ................... ;....
HDSP-0781TXV ....................
HDSP-0781TXVB ...................
7-163
7-163
7-190
7-190
7-190
HDSP-0981TXVB ...................
HDSP-0982 ........................
HDSP-0982TXV ....................
HDSP-0982TXVB ....... . . . . . . . . . . ..
HDSP-0983 ........................
7-190
7-190
7-190
7-190
7-190
New Products in BOLD Type.
v
HDSP-0983TXV ................. ;..
HDSP-0983TXVB ...........•..... ,.
HDSP-0984.. .. . . . ... . . . . .. . .. ... ..
HDSP-0984TXV ................ ; ...
HDSP-0984TXVB ...................
HDSP-2000
HDSP-2001
· HDSP-2002
HDSP-2003
HDSP-2010
7-190
7-190
7-190
7-190
, 7-190
HDSP-2450TXVB ...................
HDSP-2451 ........................
I;l DSP-2451 TXV ...............•....
HDSP-2451TXVB ...................
HDSP~2452 ........... ; ..... ; ......
...............••.... '" .. 7-46
......................... 7-46
.......................... 7-46
......................... 7-46
........................ 7-198
HDSP-2010TXV ....... ... . . . . .... ..
HDSP-2010TXVB ...................
HDSP-2111 ........................ ,
HDSP-2112 ........................ ;
HDSP-2300 ............... ; .........
7-235
,7c235
7-235
7-235
7-235
HDSP-2452TXV ................. , .. 7-235
.HDSP-2452TXVB .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 7-235
HDSP"2453 .......... :.•... ;.......... 7"235
HDSP-2453TXV ........'. . . .. . . . . . .. 7-235
HDSP-2453TXVB .. . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. 7-235
7~198
HDSP~2470
7-198
.7-19
7-19
7-50
........................ ,
................ ; . . . . .. . ..
HDSP-2472 ............... " ... : .. ...
HDSP-2490 .........................
HDSP-2491 .........................
7-68
7-68
7-68
7-56
7-56
HDSP-2301 ......................... 7-50
HDSP-2302 .......................•. 7-50
HDSP-2303 ......................... 7-50
HDSP-2310 ........................ 7-228
HDSP-2310TXV ..................... 7-228
HDSP-2492 ..........................
HDSP-2493 ........... ;.............
HDSP-3350 ........................
HDSP-3351 ........................
HDSP-3353 ................... ,. . ..
7-56
7-56
!:"lDSP-2310TXVB ...................
HDSP-2311 ..................... ;..
HDSP-2311TXV .................. ,.
HDSP-2311TXVB ...................
HDSP-2312 ..................... ; ..
HDSP-3356
HDSP-3400
HDSP-3400,
HDSP-3401
HDSP-3403
HDSP~2471
7-228
7-228
7-228
7-228
7-228
7~109
7-109
7-109
.... ,.... ... . .. .... ..... .7-109
.................. ...... 7-138
OPT S02 ............... 7-153
........................ 7~138
................... ;.... 7-138
HDSP-2312TXV .................... 7~228
HDSP-2312TXVB ................... 7-228
HDSP-2;313 .. ....................... 7-228
HDSP-2;313TXV ... ... .. . .. . . . . . ....• 7-228
HDSP-2313TXVB ...............•... ·7-228
HDSP~3403, OPT S02 ............... 7-153
HDSP-3405 ........................ 7-138
HDSP-3406 ...............•......•. 7-138
HDSP-3406, OPT S02 ............... 7-153
HDSP~3530 ............ ,....... .... 7-145
HDSP-2351 .............. ,.........
HDSP-2351TXV .....................
HDSP-2351TXVB ...................
HDSP-2352 ........................
HDSP-2352TXV ....................
HDSP-3530, OPT S02 ............... 7~153
HDSP-3531 .................... ;... 7-145
HDSP-3531, OPT S02 ................ 7-153
HDSP-3533 ........................ 7-145
HDSP-3533, OPT S02 ........... i. • • • 7-153
7-214
7-214
7-214
7-214
7-214
HDSP-2352TXVB .. . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. 7-214
HDSP-2353 ...................... ..7-214
HDSP-2353TXV .................... 7-214
HDSP-2353TXVB ................ ; .. 7-214
HDSP-2416 ........•......•......... 7-68
HDSP-3536
HDSP-3536,
HDSP-3600
HDSP-3600,
HDSP-3601
........................
OPT S02 ...............
....................... ,.
OPT S02 .. .. .. .. . .. . ...
.........................
· H DSP-2424 ......................... 7-68
HDSP-2432 •.................•......• ' 7-68
HDSP-2440 .................... ; .. , .. 7-68
· HDSP-2450 ...............••....... 7-235
HDSP-2450TXV .............. ,..... 7-235
HDSP-3603
HDSP-3603,
HDSP-3606
HDSP-3606,
HDSP-3730.
.......................... 7-121
OPT S02 ............•.. 7~153
....................... ;.7-121
OPT S02 ............... 7-153
. . . . . .. . . . ... .• . ... . . ... 7~145
New Products in BOLD Type.
vi
7-145
7-153
7"121
7-153
7-121
~-~
HD8P-3730, OPT 802 ... . . . . . . . . . . ..
HD8P-3731 ........................
HD8P-3731, OPT 802 ...............
HD8P-3733 ........................
HD8P-3733, OPT 802 ... .. . . . . . . . . ..
HD8P-4840
HD8P-4850
HD8P-5301
HD8P-5301,
HD8P-5303
7-153
7-145
7-153
7-145
7-153
-
.........................
.........................
........................
OPT 801, 802 .. . . . . . . . ..
........................
--~------
5-27
5-27
7-130
7-153
7-130
........................ 7-145
OPT 802 ............... 7-153
................... 7-138/7-145
OPT 802 ........... , . .. 7-153
............. ;..... 7-138/7-145
HD8P-5303, OPT 801, 802 ..........
HD8P-5307 .................... ;...
HD8P-5307, OPT 801,802 ...........
HD8P-5308 ........................
HD8P-5308, OPT 801, 802 ..........
7-153
7-130
7-153
7-130
7-153
HD8P-3901, OPT 802 ............... 7-153
HD8P-3903 ................... 7-138/7-145
HD8P-3903, OPT 802 ............. .. 7-153
HD8P-3905 ................... 7-138/7-145
HD8P-3906 ................... 7-138/7-145
HD8P-5321 ........................
HD8P-5321, OPT 802 ...............
HD8P-5323 ........................
HD8P-5323, OPT 802 ..... . .. . . . . . ..
HD8P-5501 ........................
7-130
7-153
7-130
7-153
7-130
HD8P-3906, OPT 802 . .. . . . . . . . .. . ..
HD8P-4030 ........................
HD8P-4031
HD8P-4033
HD8P-4036
7-153
7-145
7-145
7-145
7-145
HD8P-5501, OPT 801, 802 . . .. . . . . . ..
HD8P-5503 ........................
HD8P-5503, OPT 801,802 ..........
HD8P-5507 ........................
HD8P-5507, OPT 801, 802 ....... ;...
7-153
7-130
7-15.3
7-130
7-153
HD8P-4130
HD8P-4131
HD8P-4133
HD8P-4133,
HD8P-4136
........................
........................
........................
OPT 820 ...............
........................
7-145
7-145
7-145
7-153
7-145
HD8P-5508 ........................
HD8P-5508, OPT 801, 802 ..........
HD8P-5521 ........................
HD8P-5521, OPT 801, 802 .. .. . . . . ...
HD8P-5523 ........................
7-130
7-153
7-130
7-153
7-130
HD8P-4136,
HD8P-4200
HD8P-4201
HD8P-4203
HD8P-4205
OPT 820 ............... 7-153
................... 7-138/7-145
................... 7-138/7-145
................... 7-138/7-145
................... 7-138/7-145
HD8P-5523, OPT 801,802 ..........
HD8P-5531 ........................
HD8P-5531, OPT 802 ...............
HD8P-5533 ........................
HD8P-5533, OPT 802 ........ . . . . . ..
7-153
7-145
7-153
7-145
7-153
HD8P-4206
HDSP-4401
HDSP-4403
HD8P-4501
HD8P-4503
................... 7-138/("-145
......................... 7-95
......................... 7-95
......................... 7-95
......................... 7-95
HD8P-5537 ........................
HD8P-5537, OPT 802 ...............
HD8P-5538 ........................
HD8P-5538, OPT 802 ...............
HD8P-5551 ........................
7-145
7-153
7-145
7-153
7-109
HD8P-4600
HD8P-4601
HD8P-4603
HD8P-4606
HDSP-4701
.........................
.........................
.........................
.........................
.................... ,....
7-121
7-121
7-121
7-121
7-95
HD8P-5553
HD8P-5557
HD8P-5558
HD8P-5601
HD8P-5601,
........................
........................
........................
........................
OPT 802 ........... ;...
7-109
7-109
7-109
7-130
7-153
HDSP-4703
HD8P-4820
HD8P-4830
HD8P-4832
HD8P-4836
.........................
.........................
.....................•...
.........................
.........................
.7-95
5-27
5-27
5-27
5-27
HD8P-5603
HD8P-5607
HD8P-5607,
HD8P-5608
HD8P-5621
................ ;.......
........................
OPT 802 ... , ............
........ ;...............
........................
7-130
7-130
7-153
7-130
7-130
HD8P-3736
HD8P-3736,
HD8P-3900
HD8P-3900,
HD8P-3901
New Products in BOLD Type.
vii
~~-
HD8P-5623
HD8P-5701
HD8P-5703
HD8P-5707
HD8P-5708
.. ~ ~ . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . .. . ..
........................
........................
.;......................
........................
7-130
7-130
7-130
7-130
7-130
HD8P-7508, OPT 801,802 . . . . . ... . ..
HD8P-7511 ........................
HD8P-7513
HD8P-7517
HD8P-7518
7-153
7-109
7-109
7-109
7-109
HD8P-5721
HD8P-5723
HD8P-5731
HD8P-5733
HD8P-5737
......... :..............
............... ;........
........................
.............. ;.........
........................
7-130
7-130
7-145
7-145
7-145
HD8P-7801 .........................
HD8P-7801, OPT 802 ...............
HD8P-7802 ...................... ; ..
HD8P-7803 .........................
HD8P-7803, OPT 802 ...............
7-115
7-153
7-115
7-115
7-153
HD8P-5738
HD8P-6300
HD8P-6504
HD8P-6508
HDSP-6621
............... ,........
.... ;; ......... : .........
.... , ....................
.... ,.; ..................
..................... ~ , ..
7-145
7-90
7-84
7-84
7-60
HD8P-7804 ..................•......
HD8P-7807 ........................ :
HD8P-7807, OPT 802 ...............
HD8P-7808 .........................
HD8P-7808, OPT 802 ...............
7-115
7-115
7-153
7-115
1-153
HDSP-6624
HD8P-7301
HD8P-7301,
HD8P-7302
HD8P-7303
.........................
........ , ........... ; ....
OPT 801,802 ......... ~.
.........................
.........................
7-60
7-115
7-153
7-115
7-115
HD8P-8600
HD8P-8601
HD8P-8603
HD8P-8605
HD8P-8606
............ '; .. .. .. . .. ..
........................
........................
........................
........................
7-138
7-138
7-138
7-138
7-138
HD8P-7303, OPT 801,802 ...........
HD8P-7304 ................. '... .' ....
HD8P-7307 .........................
HD8P-7307, OPT 801,802 ...........
HD8P-7308 ..... ; ........ , ..........
7-153
7-115
7-115
7-153
7-115
HD8P-8820
HD8P-8825
HD8P-8835
HDSP-A101
HDSP-A103
.........................
.........................
.........................
........................
........................
5-33
5-33
5-33
7-103
7-103
HD8P-7308,OPT 801,802 . . . . . . . . ...
HD8P-7311 ........... ; .............
HD8P-7313 ........... ; ~ ............
HD8P-7317 ...... ; ..................
HD8P-7318 .........................
7-153
7-115
7-115
7-115
7-115
HDSP-A107
HDSP-A108
HDSP-E100
HDSP-E101
HDSP-E103
.......... ;.............
........................
..................... -.. '.
........................
........................
7-103
7-103
7-103
7-103
HD8P-7401
HD8P-7402
HD8P-7403
HD8P-7404
HD8P-7407
.........................
.........................
.........................
.........................
.......... ; ... ; ...... ~ ...
7-115
7-115
7-115
7-115
7-115
HDSP-E106
HDSP-H101
HDSP-H103
HDSP-H107
HDSP-H108
........................
.................... -... :
................... .'. ...
........................
.........................
7-103
7-103
7-103
7-103
HD8P-7408
HD8P-7501
HD8P-7501,
HD8P-7502
HD8P-7503
........... , ......... , ...
.........................
OPT 801,802 ...........
.........................
....................... :.
7-115
7-115
7-153
7-115
7-115
HDSP-N100
HDSP-N101
HDSP-N103
HDSP-N105
HDSP-N106
.................... : . ..
........................
..................... : ..
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
........................
7-103
7-103
7-103
7-103
7-103
HD8P-7503, OPT 801,802 ....... ~. ..
HD8P-7504 .........................
HD8P-7507 .........................
HD8P-7507, OPT 801, 802 ............
HD8P-7508 .................... : ....
7-153
7-115
7-115
7-153
7-115
HED8-0200
HED8-3000
HED8-3001
HED8-3050
HED8-5000
..................... : -:. 7-103
.......... '......... .- . . . .. 3-25
.................... : .... ' 3-30
......................... 3-25
.................... _... : 4-25
New Products in BOLD Type.
viii
7~103
7-103
HEDS-5010
4-25
HEDS-5100
4-25
HEDS-5110
4-25
HEDS-5200 ......................... 4-25
HEDS-5210 ......................... 4-25
HFBR-1522
HFBR-1523
HFBR-1524
HFBR-1531
HFBR-1532
8-13
8-13
8-13
8-13
8-13
HEDS-5300
HEDS-5310
HEDS-5500
HEDS-6000
HEDS-6010
.........................
.........................
.........................
.........................
4-25
4-25
4-19
4-33
4-33
HFBR-1533
HFBR-1534
HFBR-2204
HFBR-2208
8-13
8-13
8-78
8-90
8-98
HEDS-6100
HEDS-6110
HEDS-6200
HEDS-6210
HEDS-6300
.........................
.........................
.........................
...................' ......
.........................
4-33
4-33
4-33
4-33
4-33
HFBR-2402
HFBR-2404
HFBR-2406
HFBR-2412
HFBR-2414
8-78
8-37
8-37
8-37
8-37
HEDS-6310
HEDS-7500
HEDS-7501
HEDS-8923
HEDS-8924
4-33
......................... 4-41
................. ; ....... 4~41
......................... 4-25
......................... 4-25
8-37
HFBR-2416
HFBR-2501
8-60
HFBR-2502
8-60
HFBR-2503 ......................... ,8-60
HFBR-2521
8-13
HEDS-8925
HEDS-8926
HEDS-8927
HEDS-8928
HEDS-8929
.........................
.........................
.........................
.........................
.........................
HFBR-2522
HFBR-2523
HEDS-8931
HEDS-9000
HEDS-9100
HEDS-9200.
HEMT-1001
.......•................. 4-25
.......................... 4-7
................ , ........ 4-11
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. 4-15
........................ 6-116
HFBR~2202
4-25
4-25
4-25
4-25
4-25
8-13
8-13
8-13
8-13
8-13
HFBR~2524
HFBR-2531
HFBR-2532
8-13
HFBR-2533
HFBR-2534 ......................... 8-13
8-78
HFBR-4202
HFBR-4501 .......................... 8-13
HFBR-4503
8~13
HEMT-3301 ........................ 6-116
HEMT-6000 ........................ 6-120
8-37
HFBR"0400
8-37
HFBR-0410
8-13
HFBR"0501
HFBR-4505
HFBR-4506
HFBR-4511
HFBR-4513
HFBR-4515
HFBR-1202 ............ ;.; ..........
HFBR-1204
HFBR-1402
,' ...... .
HFBR-1404
HFBR-1412 ............ ,. ........ '......
HFBR-4593
HFBR-4595 .........................
HFBR-AUD100 ......................
HFBR-AUD1 KM .....................
HFBR-AUS100 ......................
..................
HFBR-1414
HFBR-1502
HFBR-1510
HFBR-1512
HFBR-1521
8-78
8-86
8-37
8-37
8-37
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . .. 8~37
...................... '" 8-60
.......................... 8-60
....................... '" 8-60
.......................... 8-13
.. .. ... ... . . . . . .. . . ... ..
~
8-13
8-13
8-13
8-13
8-13
8-13
8-60
8-57
8 e 57
8~57
HFBR-AUS1 KM ................•.... 8-57
HFBR-AWD005 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 8-57
HFBR-AWD010 ...................... 8-57
HFBR-AWD025 . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 8-57
HFBR-AWD050 ...................... : 8-57
New Products in BOLD Type.
ix
HFBR-AWD100
HFBR-AWS001
HFBR-AWSOOS
HFBR-AWS010
HFBR-AWS02S
......................
......................
......................
......................
..................... ;
8-57
8-57
8-57
8-57
8-57
HFBR-PNS1DM .....................
HFBR-PNSSDM. . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . ..
HFBR-PUDSOO ......................
HFBR-PUSSOO
HFBR-QLS001
8-13
8-13
8-13
8"13
8-13
HFBR-AWSOSO ...................... 8-57
HFBR-AWS100 ...................... 8-57
HFBR-AXS001
8-57
8~57
HFBR-AXS010
HFBR-BXS001
8-57
HFBR-QLSOOS
HFBR-QLS010
HFBR-QLS020
HFBR-QLS030
HFBR-QLS04S
8-13
8-13
8-13
8-13
8-13
HFBR-BXS010
8-57
8-57
HFBR-CXS001
HFBR-CXS010 ...................... ·8-57
HFBR-PLS001
8-13
HFBR-PLSOOS
8-13
HFBR-QLS060
HFBR-QNS001
HFBR-QNSOOS
HFBR-QNS010
HFBR-QNS020
......................
......................
................... ; ..
......................
..... ; ................
8-13
8-13
8-13
8-13
8-13
HFBR-PLS010 ....................... 8-13
HFBR-PLS020
8-13
8-13
HFBR-PLS030
8-13
HFBR-PLS04S
8-13
HFBR-PLS060
HFBR-QNS030 .................... ..
HFBR-QNS04S ......................
HFBR-QNS060 ................. ; . . ..
HFBR-QUSSOO ......................
HLCP-A100 .........................
8-13
8-13
8-13
8-13
5-15
.....................
.....................
.................. ;...
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
......................
8-13
8-13
8-13
8-13
HLCP-A100, OPT LOO, L01, L03, L04 ...
HLCP-A100, OPT S02 ................
HLCP-B100 .........................
HLCP-B100, OPT S02 . . . . . . . . . . . •. . ..
HLCP-C100 ..................... ; ...
5-51
5-53
5-15
5-53
5-15
HFBR-PMD020 ......................
HFBR-PMD030 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
HFBR-PMD04S ......................
HFBR-PMD060 .................... ;.
HFBR-PMDSDM ....................
8-13
8-'13
8-13
8-13
8-13
HLCP-C100, OPT L01, L02, L03,
L04, L06 ...........
HLCP-C100, OPT S02 ...............
HLCP-D100 .........................
HLCP-D100, .OPT S02 ...............
5-51
5-53
5-15
5-53
HFBR-PND001
HFBR-PNDOOS
HFBR-PND010
HFBR-PND020
HFBR-PND030
......................
......................
.................... ;.
......................
......................
8-13
8-13
8-13
8-13
HLCP-E100
HCLP-E100,
HLCP-F100
HLCP-F100,
HLCP-G100
.........................
OPT S02 ............ . . ..
.........................
OPT S02 ................
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
5-15
5-53
5-15
5-53
5-15
HFBR-PND04S ......................
HFBR-PND060 .................... ;.
HFBR-PNDSDM .....................
HFBR-PNS001
HFBR-PNSOOS
8-13
8-13
8-13
8-13
8-13
HLCP"G100, OPT S02 ...............
HLCP-H100 .........................
HLCP-H100, OPT L01, L02, L03,
L04, LOS, L06 .......
HLCP-H100, OPT S02 ...............
5-53
5-15
HFBR-PLS1DM
HFBR-PLSSDM
HFBR-PMD001
HFBR-PMDOOS
HFBR-PMD010
8~13
8~13
.............. ...... .
HFBR-PNS010
8-13
HFBR-PNS020
8-13
HFBR-PNS030 ...................... 8-13
HFBR-PNS04S ...................... 8-13
HFBR-PNS060 ...................... 8-13
5-51
5-53
HLCP-J100 ......................... 5-41
~"
HLMP-0103
HLMP-0300
HLMP-0301
HLMP-0354
New Products in BOLD Type.
x
........................ 6-144
......................... 6-95
......................... 6-95
........................ 6-146
HLMP-0363
HLMP-0364
HLMP-0365
HLMP-0366
HLMP-0380
...................... ;.
...................•. ;...
........................
.................. ;.....
........................
6-152
6-152
6-152
6-152
6-146
HLMP-1301,
HLMP-1301,
HLMP-1301,
HLMP-1302
HLMP-1320
OPT 001, 002 ........... 6-132
OPT 010, 101 ........... 6-137
OPT 104 ............... 6-138
......................... 6-60
6-65
HLMP-0381
HLMP-0391
HLMP-0392
HLMP-0400
HLMP-0401
........................ 6-146
.......... : .............. 6-152
........................ 6"152
......................... 6~95
......................... 6-95
HLMP-1321
HLMP-1340
HLMP-1350
HLMP-1385
HLMP-1400
6-65
6-98
6-64
6-60
6-60
HLMP-0454
HLMP-0463
HLMP-0464
HLMP-0465
HLMP-0466
........................
........................
........................
........................
........................
6-146
6-152
6-152
6-15;2
6-152
HLMP-1401
HLMP-1401,
HLMP-1401,
HLMP-1401,
HLMP-1402
6-60
OPT 001, 002 ........... 6-132
OPT 010, 101 ............ 6-137
OPT 104 ............... 6-138
......................... 6-60
HLMP-0480
HLMP-0481
HLMP-0491
HLMP-0492
HLMP-0503
........................ 6-146
........................ 6-146
.............. ' .......... 6-152
......................... 6-152
......................... 6-95
HLMP-1420
HLMP-1421
HLMP-1440
HLMP-1450
HLMP-1485
6-65
6-65
6-98
6-64
6-60
HLMP-0504
HLMP-0554
HLMP-0563
HLMP-0564
HLMP-0565
......................... 6-95
........................ 6-146
........................ 6-152
........................ 6-152
........................ 6-152
HLMP-1503
HLMP-1503,
HLMP-1503,
HLMP-1503,
HLMP-1520
........................ ,6-60
OPT 001,002 ........... 6-132
OPT 010, 101 ........... 6-137
OPT 104 .............. .6-138
......................... 6-65
HLMP-0566
HLMP-0580
HLMP-0581
HLMP-0591
HLMP-0592
........................
........................
........................
........................
............ : ...........
HLMP-1521 ..................... ~ ... 6-65
HLMP-1523
6-60
HLMP-1540
6-98
HLMP-1550
6-64
HLMP-1585
6-60
6-152
6-146
6-146
6-152
6-152
HLMP-0904 ........................ 6-146
HLMP-0930 ........................ 6-146
HLMP-0931 ........................ 6-146
HLMP-1000 ......................... 6-58
HLMP-1002 ......................... 6-58
HLMP-1002, OPT 001, 002
6-132
HLMP-1002,
HLMP-1071
HLMP-1080
HLMP-1100
HLMP-1100,
OPT 010, 101 ........... 6-137
......................... 6-58
......................... 6-58
........................ 6-106
OPT 010 ............... 6-1'37
HLMP-1120
HLMP-1200
HLMP-1201
HLMP-1300
HLMP-1301
6-106
6-58
6-58
6-60
6-60
HLMP-1600
HLMP-1600,
HLMP-1600,
HLMP-1601
HLMP-1620
OPT 001.002 ...........
OPT 010, 101 ...........
........................
............... ,........
6-106
6-132
6-137
6-106
6-106
HLMP-1620,
. HLMP-1620,
HLMP-1621
HLMP-1640
HLMP-1640,
OPT 001. 002 ...........
OPT 010,101 .. ; ........
........................
................ ,.......
OPT 001, 002
6-132
6-137
6-106
6-106
6-132
HLMP-1640, OPT 010, 101 ...........
HLMP-1641 ........................
HLMP-1660
HLMP-1661
HLMP-1674 '" .'.', ." .. '. . ~ . . . . . ~ .- . . . . .
6-137
6-106
6-110
6-110
6-110
.
New Products in BOLD Type,
xi
HLMP-1675
HLMP-1687
HLMP-1688
HLMP-1700
HLMP-1719
6-110
6-110
6-110
6-102
6-102
HLMP-2685,
HLMP-2700
HLMP-2700,
HLMP-2720
HLMP-2720,
OPT 802 ................ 5-53
.......................... 5-8
OPT 802 ................ 5-53
........................... 5-8
OPT 802 ................ 5-53
HLMP-1740
HLMP-1760
HLMP-1790
HLMP-1800
HLMP-1801
......................... 6-44
......................... 6-44
........................ 6-102
......................... 6-44
......................... 6-44
HLMP-2735
HLMP-2735,
HLMP-2755
HLMP-2755,
.......................... 5-8
OPT 802 ............. ; .. 5-53
.......................... 5-8
OPT LOO, L01, L03,
L04, L06 ........... 5-51
HLMP-1819
HLMP-1820
HLMP-1840
HLMP-1841
HLMP-2300
......................... 6-44
......................... 6-44
...... , .................. 6-44
......................... 6-44
.......................... 5-8
HLMP-2755,
HLMP-2770
HLMP-2770,
HLMP-2785
OPT 802 ................ 5-53
.......................... 5-8
OPT 802 ................ 5-53
.......................... 5~8
HLMP-2300,
HLMP-2300,
HLMP-2350
'HLMP-2350,
HLMP-2400
OPT LOO, L01, L03, L04 ... 5-51
OPT 802 ................ 5-53
.......................... 5-8
OPT 802 ................ 5-53
.......................... 5-8
HLMP-2785, OPT LOO, L01, L02, L03, L04,
L05, L06 ........... 5-51
HLMP-2785, OPT 802 ................ 5-53
HLMP-2800 .......................... 5-8
HLMP-2800, OPT 802 ................ 5-53
HLMP-2400,
HLMP-2400,
HLMP-2450
HLMP-2450,
HLMP-2500
OPT LOO, L01, L03, L04 ... 5-51
OPT 802 ............ ; ... 5-53
.......................... 5-8
OPT 802 ................ 5-53
.......................... 5-8
HLMP-2820
HLMP-2820,
HLMP-2835
HLMP-2835,
HLMP-2855
HLMP-2500,
HLMP-2500,
HLMP-2550
HLMP-2550,
HLMP-2598
OPT LOO, L01, L03, L04 ... 5-51
OPT 802 .....•.......... 5-53
.......................... 5-8
OPT 802 ................ 5-53
......................... 5-49
HLMP-2855, OPT LOO, L01, L03,
L04, L06 ........... 5-51
HLMP-2855, OPT 802 ................ 5-53
HLMP-2870 .......................... 5-8
HLMP-2870, OPT 802 ................ 5-53
HLMP-2599
HLMP-2600
HLMP-2600,
HLMP-2620
HLMP-2620,
..................... '.... 5-49
........................... 5-8
OPT 802 ................ 5-53
.......................... 5-8
OPT 802 ................ 5-53
HLMP-2885 .......................... 5-8
HLMP-2885, OPT LOO, L01, L02, L03, L04,
L05, L06 ........... 5-51
HLMP-2885, OPT 802 ................ 5-53
HLMP-2898 ......................... 5-49
HLMP-2635
HLMP-2635,
HLMP-2655
HLMP-2655,
.............. '............ 5-8
OPT 802 ................ 5-53
.......................... 5-8
OPT L01, L02, L03,
L04, L06 ............ 5-8
HLMP-2899
HLMP-2950
HLMP-2965
HLMP-3000
HLMP-3000,
HLMP-2655,
HLMP-2670
HLMP-2670,
HLMP-2685
HLMP-2685,
OPT 802 ................ 5-53
.......................... 5-8
OPT 802 ...........•.... 5-53
...................... , ... 5-8
OPT L01, L02,L03, L04,
L05, L06 ........... 5-51
HLMP-3000, OPT 010, 100 ........... 6-139
HLMP-3001 ......................... 6-69
HLMP-3001, OPT 001,002 ........... 6-132
HLMP-3001, OPT 010,100 ........... 6-139
HLMP-3002 ......................... 6-69
New Products in BOLD Type.
xii
.......................... 5-8
OPT 802 ................ 5-53
.......................... 5-8
OPT 802 ................ 5-53
.......................... 5-8
........................ . 5-49
......................... 5-20
......................... 5-20
...... '................... 6-69
OPT 001,002 ........... ' 6-132
HLMP-3002,
HLMP-3002,
HLMP-3003
HLMP-3003,
HLMP-3003,
OPT 001, 002 ........... 6-132
OPT 010, 100 ........... 6-139
......................... 6-69
OPT 001,002 ........ ; .. 6-132
OPT 010, 100 ........... 6-139
HLMP-3507, OPT 010, 100 ........... 6-139
HLMP-3517 ......................... 6-81
HLMP-3517, OPT 001, 002 ........... 6-132
HLMP-3517, OPT 010, 100 ........... 6-139
HLMP-3519 ;........................ 6-81
HLMP-3050
HLMP-3105
HLMP-3105,
HLMP-3105,
HLMP-3112
......................... 6-69
........................ 6-106
OPT 001,002 ........... 6-132
OPT 010, 100 ........... 6-139
........................ 6-106
HLMP-3519,
HLMP-3519,
HLMP-3553
HLMP-3554
HLMP-3567
OPT 001,002 ........... 6-132
OPT 010, 100 ........... 6-139
......................... 6-71
......................... 6-71
......................... 6-75
HLMP-3112,
HLMP-3112,
HLMP-3200
HLMP-3201
HLMP-3300
OPT 001, 002 ........... 6-132
OPT 010, 100 ........... 6-139
......... ;............... 6-75
......................... 6-75
......................... 6-71
HLMP-3568
HLMP-3590
HLMP-3600
HLMP-3600,
HLMP-3600,
......................... 6-75
......................... 6-98
........................ 6-106
OPT 001,002 ........... 6-132
OPT 010, 100 ........... 6-139
HLMP-3300, OPT 001, 002 ........... 6-132
HLMP-3300, OPT 010, 100 ........... 6-139
HLMP-3301 ......................... 6-71
HLMP-3301, OPT 001,002 ........... 6-132
HLMP-3301, OPT 010, 100 ........... 6-139
HLMP-3601 ........................
HLMP-3601, OPT 001,002 ...........
HLMP-3601, OPT 010, 100 ...........
HLMP-3650 ........................
HLMP-3650, OPT 001, 002 ....•.... ;.
6-106
6-132
6-139
6-106
6-132
HLMP-3315
HLMP-3316
HLMP-3350
HLMP-3351
HLMP-3365
.........................
.........................
.........................
.........................
................. :.......
6-81
6-81
6-75
6-75
6-75
HLMP-3650, OPT 010,100 .... : ......
HLMP-3651 ...............•........
HLMP-3651, OPT 001,002 ...........
HLMP-3651, OPT 010, 100· ...........
HLMP-3680 ........................
6-139
6-106
6-132
6-139
6-106
HLMP-3366
HLMP-3390
HLMP-3400
HLMP-3400,
HLMP-3400,
......................... 6-75
...................... : .. 6-98
......................... 6-71
OPT 001,002 .......... ; 6-132
OPT 010, 100 ........... 6-139
HLMP-3680, OPT 001. 002 ...........
HLMP-3680, OPT 010, 100 ...........
HLMP-3681 ........................
HLMP-3681, OPT 001,002 ...........
HLMP-3681, OPT 010,100 ...........
6-132
6-139
6-106
6-132
6-139
HLMP-3401
HLMP-3401,
HLMP-3401,
HLMP-3415
HLMP-3416
......................... 6-71
OPT 001, 002 ........... 6-132
OPT 010,100 ........... 6-139
......................... 6-81
......................... 6-81
HLMP-3750
HLMP-3750,
HLMP-3750,
HLMP-3762
HLMP-3850
......................... 6-98
OPT 001,002 ........... 6-132
OPT 010, 100 ........... 6-139
......................... 6-71
......................... 6-98
HLMP-3450
HLMP-3451
HLMP-3465
HLMP-3466
HLMP-3490
.........................
.........................
.........................
.........................
....................... ;.
6-75
6-75
6-75
6-75
6-98
HLMP-3850,
HLMP-3850,
HLMP-3862
HLMP-3950
HLMP-3950,
OPT 001,002 ........... 6-132
OPT 010, 100 ........... 6-139
......................... 6-71
......................... 6-98
OPT 001,002 ........... 6-132
HLMP-3502 ....................•. ;.. 6-71
HLMP-3502, OPT 001,002 ... ~ ........ 6-132
HLMP-3502, OPT 010, 100 ........... 6-139
HLMP-3507 ......................... 6-71
HLMP-3507, OPT 001,002 ........... 6-132
HLMP-3950,
HLMP-3962
HLMP-3962,
HLMP-3962,
HLMP-4000
OPT 010, 100 ........... 6-139
......................... 6-71
OPT 001,002 ........... 6-132
OPT 010,100 ........... 6-139
........................ 6-113
New Products in BOLD Type.
xiii
-_."..
----,-,,-".----~-------
--~-------
---~.--~----------------.-----"'-
HLMP-4100
HLMP-4101,
tjLMP-4700
HLMP-4700,
HLMP-4700,
.... , ....... ;...... : .. ~' . .. 6-28
..................... ;~; . ,6-28,
, .... , ...•...•.. ; .•.. ;'.. 6-102
OPT 001,002 ..... ; ..• ~. 6.132
OPT 010, 100 .... , . . . . . .6-139
HLMP-6500, OPT P01,P02 .... i • • • •• ~-130
HLMP-6505 ....... , .......•. , ..... ,.,. 6,32
HLMP~6600 .....•..•....•..•.•..... ; 6-110
HLMP-6600, OPT 010; 011 .......... , 67122
HLMP-6600, OPT 021, 022 ....... i .... 6-126
HLMP-4719
tjLMP-4719,
HLMP-4719,
HLMP-4740
HLMP-5029
..•....•..•.. " . . . . . •..... 6-102
OPT 001, 002 ...•...... ~ ,6-132
OPT 010, 100 ........... 6~139
"........................ 6~102
............ , ..•..•... ;.. 6-141
HLMP-6600, OPT P01, P02 ..........
HLMP-6620 ..... '.' .. '.' ...... " .....
HLMP-6620, OPT 010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
HLMP-6~20, OPT 011; 012 ...........
HLMP-6620, OPT 021,022 ...........
6-130
6-110
6-122
6-122
6-126
HLMP-6000 .......................... 6-38.
HLMP-6000, OPT 010 .... ,.......... 6-139
HLMP-6000,OPTOll,012 ........... 6-122
HLMP-6000. OPT 021,022 ......•..•.. 6-126
HLMP-6000, OPT P01,P02 .......... 6-130
HLMP-6620,
HLMP-6650,
HLMP-6653
HLMP-6653,
HLMP-6654
OPT POl, P02 ...... ,... 6-130
OPT 013 ............•.. 6-122
..., ...................•.. 6-43
OPT 013 ............... 6-122
......,................... 6-43
HLMP-6001
HLMP-6001,
HLMP-6001,
HLMP-6001,
HLMP-6203
, .............. :.......... .6-38
OPT 011,'012; .......... 6-136·
OPT 021, 022 ....••...... 6,-126
OPT P01, P02 ........... 6~130
,., .....,.... ;..... ; ..•.... J~-43
HLMP-6655
HLMP-6655,
HLMP-6656
HLMP-6656,
HLMP-6658
............... ,......... 6-43
OPT013 , . . .. . . . . . . . ... 6-122
..•..•.................... 6-43
OJ)T,013 ..... ~ . . . . . . . •• 67122
...................... ;.. 6,-43
HLMP-6203,
HLMP-6204
HLMP-6204,
HLMP-6205
HLMP-6205,
OPT 013 .. ; ..... ;'. .. . ... 6~38
............... , ........ ; .. 6-43
OPT 013 .. ;............. 6-1?2
.........,.. . . . . . . .. . . . . .. . 6-:-43
OPT 013 ............... 6~122
HLMP-6658, OPT 013 ............... 6-122
......................... 6-110
HLMP-6700, OPT 010 ............... 6~136
HLMP-6720 ......................... 6-110
HLMP-6720, OPT 010 ........... .•.. 6-136
HLMP-6206
HLMP-6206,
HLMP-6208
HLMP-6208,
HLMP-6300
........ ," ............. ; .. 6-43
OPT 013 ; ....... ; .. , .... 6-122
......................... 6-43
OPT 013 .... , .... ,.,. . .. .. 6~~22
........ ; ....•... ; ....•... 6~38
HI:.MP-6753 ............•......... ; .. 6-43
HLMP-6753, OPT 01.3 ........... ; .... 6-122
HLMP-6754 ...................... '... 6-43
HLMp-6754, qPT 013 .......•. " . . . .. 6-122
HLMP-6756, ........ ;' ...... ; ........ " 6-43
HLMP-6300,
HLrv'lP-6300,
HLMP-6300,
HLMP-6300,
HLMP-6305
OPT 010 ........... l ••• 6.136.
OPT 011,012 ... ~' ... , ... 6-122
OPT 021,.022 ............ 6-12~:
OPT P01, P02 ......... ; 6-130
.......................... 6.32
HLMP-6756,
HLMP-6758
HLMP-6758,
HLMP-6800
HLMP-6800,
HLMP-6400
HLMP-6400,
HLMP-6400,
HLMP-6400,
............• ; •.•....•.... 6_3~
OPT 010 .....• ;.....•. ;. 6~136,
OPT 011 ............. :... 6-122
OPT 021,022 ........ ,: .6-126
HLMP-6800, OPT 011, 012 .......... ,.:
HLMP-6800, OPT 021, 022 ...........
~LMP-6800, OPT POl, P02 ....... , ..
HI:.MP-6820 ........................
HLMP~6820, OPT010 ............ ;..
HLMP~6700
HLMP-6405 .......•. ; ..... :: ......... ;' 6-32
HLMP-6500 .............. ;.' .. '.... ,. '" !;i-38
I-:fLMP-6500, OPT 010 ............ ;.•.. 6-136
HlMP-6500, OPT 011, 012. i, •• ,; ••• " •• 6-122
HLMP-6500, OPT 021,02? .....•........ 6-126
New Products in BOLD Type,
OPT 013 ............... 6-122 '.
............ ; •......... ;.. 6-43
OPT 013. . .. . . . . . . . . . ... 6-122.
.................... ;. i . 6-110
OPT010 ................ 6.-136
6-122
6-126
6-130
6-110
6-122
HLMP-6820, ()PT 011, 012 ....... , : .... 6-122
HLMP-6~2Q, OPT 021, 022 .. , ........ : 6~126
HLMP-6820, OPT P01,:P02 .. ;.. , ..... 6.130
HLMP-6853 ......................... 6,-43
HLMp-6853, OPT 013 •.. , .... , .. :.•..•. 6-122
xiv
HLMP-6854
HLMP-6854,
HLMP-6855
HLMP-6855,
HLMP-6856
......................... 6-43
OPT 013 ............... 6-122
......................... 6-43
OPT 013 ............... 6-122
......................... 6-43
HLMP-K105, OPT 010,101 ...........
HLMP-K105, OPT 001, 002 ..........
HLMP-K150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
HLMP-K150, OPT 010, 101 ...........
HLMP-K150, OPT 001, 002 ..........
6-137
6-132
6-24
6-137
6-132
HLMP-6856, OPT 013 ............... 6-122
HLMP-6858 ......................... 6-43
HLMP-6858, OPT 013 ............... 6-122
HLMP-7000 ........................ 6-102
HLMP-7000, OPT 011,012 ........... 6-122
HLMP-K155 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 6-24
HLMP-K155, OPT 010, 101 ........... 6-137
HLMP-K155, OPT 001, 002 .......... 6-132
HLMP-K400 ........................ 6"60
HLMP-K401 ......................... 6-60
HLMP-7000, OPT 021,022 ...........
HLMP-7000, OPT P01, P02 ..........
HLMP-7019 ........................
HLMP-7019, OPT 011,012 ...........
HLMP-7019, OPT 021, 022 ...........
6-126
6-130
6-102
6-122
6-126
HLMP-K402
HLMP-L250
HLMP-L251
HLMP-L350
HLMP-L351
........................
.........................
.........................
.........................
.........................
6-60
6-50
6-50
6-50
6-50
HLMP-7019, OPT P01, P02 .. . . . . . . . ..
HLMP-7040 ........................
HLMP-7040, OPT 011,012 ...........
HLMP-7040, OPT 021,022 ...........
HLMP-7040, OPT P01, P02 ..........
6-130
6-102
6-122
6-126
6-130
HLMP-L550 .........................
HLMP-L551 .........................
HLMP-M200 ........................
HLMP-M201
HLMP-M250
6-50
6-50
6-54
6-54
6-54
HLMP-A200 ......................... 6-85
HLMP-A300 ......................... 6-85
HLMP-A500 ......................... 6-85
HLMP-D101 ......................... 6-20
HLMP-D101, OPT 010,100 ........... 6-139
HLMP-M251
HLMP-M300
HLMP-M301
HLMP-M350
HLMP-M351
6-54
6-54
6-54
6-54
6-54
HLMP-D101, OPT 001, 002 ........... 6-132
HLMP-D105 ........................ 6-20
HLMP-D105, OPT 010, 100 .......... 6-139
HLMP-D105, OPT 001, 002 .......... 6-132
HLMP-D150 ........................ 6-24
HLMP-M500
HLMP-M501
HLMP-M550
HLMP-M551
HLMP-Q101
6-54
6-54
6-54
6-54
6-20
OPT 010,100 .......... 6-139
OPT 001, 002 .......... 6-132
........................ 6-24
OPT 010,100 .......... 6-139
OPT 001, 002 .......... 6-132
HLMP-Q150
HLMP-Q150,
HLMP-Q150,
HLMP-Q150,
HLMP-Q400
6-24
OPT 011, 012 ........... 6-122
OPT 021, 022 .......... 6-126
OPT P01, P02 .......... 6-130
........................ 6-38
HLMP-D400 ........................ 6-71
HLMP-D400, OPT 010, 100 .......... 6-139
HLMP-D400, OPT 001, 002 .......... 6-132
HLMP-D401 ........................ 6-71
HLMP-D401, OPT 010,100 ........... 6-139
HLMP-S200
HLMP-S201
HLMP-S300
HLMP-S301
HLMP-S400
............... . . . . . . . . ..
.........................
.........................
.........................
.........................
6-91
6-91
6-91
6-91
6-91
HLMP-D401, OPT 001, 002 .......... 6-132
HLMP-K101 ......................... 6-20
HLMP-K101, OPT 010, 101 ........... 6-137
HLMP-K101, OPT 001, 002 ........... 6-132
HLMP-K105 . . .. . .. . . .. . .. . .. .. . . .... 6-20
HLMP-S401
HLMP-S500
HLMP-S501
HLMP-T200
HLMP-T300
.........................
.........................
.........................
.........................
.........................
6-91
6-91
6-91
5-45
5-45
HLMP-D150,
HLMP-D150,
HLMP-D155
HLMP-D155,
HLMP-D155,
New Products in BOLD Type.
xv
HLMP-T400 ............... ; ......... 5-45
HLMP-T500 ......................... 5-45
HMDL-2416 ..................... ;.. 7-204
HMDL-2416TXV .................... 7-204
HMDL-2416TXVB . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . ... 7-204
4N55/883B ........................ 9-140
4N55TXV .......................... 9-140
4N55TXVB . .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. . . .. ..... 9-140
5082-7100 ............. ; . . . . . . . . . . . .. 7-80
5082-7101 ........................... 7-80
HPDL-1414 . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . .. 7-30
HPDL-2416. ......................... 7-38
JAN1N5765 ........................ 6-146
JAN1N6092 ........................ 6-146
JAN1 N6093 ........................ 6-146
5082-7102 ........................... 7-80
5082-7295 .......................... 7-174
5082-7300 ......................... 7-154
5082-7302
7-154
5082-7304
7-154
JAN1N6094 ........................ 6-146
JANTX1 N5765 ..................... 6-146
JANTX1N6092 ..................... 6-146
6-146
JANTX1 N6093
6-146
JANTX1 N6094
5082-7340
5082-7356
5082-7357
5082-7358
5082-7359
M001-01ACX .......................
M001-02ACX .......................
M001-03ACX .......................
M001-04ACX ...•.............. .... ..
SL5505 ........................ ;; ...
7-182
7c182
7-182
7c182
9-61
5082-7404
5082-7405
5082-7414
5082-7415
5082-7432
. . . . . . . .. . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . ..
..........................
..........................
..........................
..........................
7-169
7-169
7-169
7-169
7-169
16800A
16800A,
16800A,
16801 A
16801A,
............................. 3-56
OPT 001 ............... , ..... 3-62
OPT 002 .................... 3-64
............................. 3-56
OPT 001 .................... 3-62
5082-7433
5082-7441
5082-7446
5082-7610
5082-7610,
.. . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . ..
...........................
...........................
...........................
OPT S01, S02 ............
7-169
7-174
7-174
7-121
7-153
16801A,
16830A
16832A
16840A
16842A
OPT 002 ................ ; ....
..............................
....................... : ......
.......................•.......
..............................
3-64
3-56
3-56
3-56
3-56
5082-7611
5082-7611,
5082-7613
5082-7613,
5082-7616
...........................
OPT S01, S02 ............
...........................
OPT S01, S02 ............
...........................
7-121
7-153
7-121
7-153
7-121
1 N5765 ............................ 6-146
1N6092 ........... : ................ 6-146
1N6093 ............... ~ ............ 6-146
1N6094 ............................ 6-146
4N45 ................................ 9-75
5082-7616,
5082-7620
5082-7621
5082-7623
5082-7626
OPT S01, S02 ............
....... ; ..................
...........................
..........................
..........................
7-153
7-121
7-121
7-121
7-121
4N46 .................................
4N51 ................................
4N51TXV ..........................
4N52 ...............................
4N52TXV ..........................
9-75'
7-182
7-182
7-182
7-182
5082-7650 ..........................
5082-7650, OPT S01,.S02 ............
5082-7651 ...........................
5082-7651, OPT S01, S02 ............
5082-7653 ..........................
7-121
7-153
7-121
7-153
7-121
4N53 ..............................
4N53TXV ..........................
4N54 ..............................
4N54TXV ..........................
4N55 .. : ...........................
7~182
7-182
7-182
7-182
9-140
5082-7653, OPT S01,S02 ............
5082-7656 ..........................
5082-7656, OPT 801, S02 ..... : . .. ...
5082-7660 ..........................
5082-7661 ...........................
7-153
7-121
7-153
7-121
7-121
New Products in BOLD Type.
xvi
7-154
7-158
7-158
7-158
7-158
..........................
OPT S01, S02 ............
..........................
OPT S01, S02 ............
..........................
7-121
7-153
7-121
7-153
7-121
6N134TXV ......................... 9-145
6N134TXVB ......................... 9-145
6N135 .............................. 9-57
6N135, OPT 010 ..................... 9-10
6N135, OPT 100 ..................... 9-10
5082-7730, OPT S01, S02 ............
5082-7731 ...........................
5082-7731, OPT S01, S02 ............
5082-7736 ..........................
5082-7736, OPT S01, S02 ............
7-153
7-121
7-153
7-121
7-153
6N136 .............................. 9-57
6N136, OPT 010 ...................... 9-9
6N136, OPT 100 ..................... 9-10
6N137 .............................. 9-35
6N137, OPT 010 ...................... 9-9
5082-7740 ...........................
5082-7740, OPT S01, S02 ............
5082-7750 ..........................
5082-7750, OPT S01, S02 ............
5082-7751 ...........................
7-121
7-153
7-121
7-153
7-121
6N137, OPT 100 ..................... 9-10
6N138 .............................. 9-67
6N139 .............................. 9-67
6N139, OPT 010 ...................... 9-9
6N139, OPT 100 ..................... 9-10
5082-7751, OPT S01, S02 ............
5082-7756 ..........................
5082-7756, OPT S01, S02 ............
5082-7760 ..........................
5082-7760, OPT S01, S02 ............
7-153
7-121
7-153
7-121
7-153
6N140A ...........................
6N140A/883B ......................
6N140TXV .........................
6N140TXVB ........................
8102801 EC .........................
5082-7663
5082-7663,
5082-7666
5082-7666,
5082-7730
9-159
9-159
9-159
9-159
9-149
8302401 EC ........................ 9-163
92261A .............................. 2-4
51605B .............................. 2-4
51605G .............................. 2-4
51605R .............................. 2-4
51610A .............................. 2-8
6N134 ............................. 9-145
New Products in BOLD Type.
xvii
.High Reliability
•
•
•
•
Screening Programs
Hermetic Lamps Selection Guide
Hermetic Displays Selection Guide
Hermetic Optocouplers Selection Guide
-------- - - - - - - - - -
High Reliability
can be enhanced by 100% screening and conditioning
tests. Lot capabilities can be confirmed by acceptance
qualfication test programs. MIL-D-87157 is used to
define the military requirements for plastic LED
indicators and displays.
Hewlett-Packard has supplied specially tested high
reliability optoelectronic products since 1968 for use in
state-of-the-art commercial, military, and aerospace
applications. To meet the requirements of high
reliability, products must be designed with rugged
capabilities to withstand severe levels of environmental
stress and exposure without failure. We have
accomplished this objective by designing a unique
family of hermetic products including lamps, displays,
and optocoup1ers which have proven their merits in
numerous advanced space and defense programs in the
international marketplace.
All testing is done by experienced Hewlett-Packard
employees using facilities which are approved by
DESC for JAN products and by customer inspection
for special programs. Environmental equipment
capabilities and operating methods of the test laboratory
meet MIL-STD-750 or MIL-STD-883 procedures.
Hewlett-Packard Quality Systems are in compliance
with MIL-Q-9858 or MIL-I-45208. The requirements
of MIL-STD-45662 are followed by Hewlett-Packard
Calibration Systems.
These products receive reliability screening and
qualification tests in accordance with the following
appropriate reliability programs: MIL-S-19500, MILD-87157 and MIL-STD-883. HP supplies JAN and
J ANTX LED indicators and optocoup1ers in
compliance with DESC selected item drawings and
parts with HP standard military equipment screening
programs for optocoup1ers and displays. In addition,
Hewlett-Packard optocoup1ers are considered hybrid
devices and are therefore line certified in accord~~ce
with MIL-STD-1772, as well as in conformance to
Appendices A and G of MIL-M-3851O.
Reliability programs are also performed to individual
customer control drawings and specifications when
needed. Some of these special testing programs are very
complex and may include Class S requirements for
microcircuits.
HP's epoxy encapsulated optoelectronic products are
designed for long life applications where non-man rated
or ground support requirements allow their use. As
with hermetic products, the capabilities of epoxy parts
1-2
---------'---
- - - - - - - - - - - - ----------
High Reliability
Optoelectronic Products
Hewlett-Packard offers the broadest line of high
reliability, solid state display products. They are
specially designed to withstand severe environmental
stresses and exposure without failure. This unique
product group includes lamps, integrated numeric and
hexadecimal displays, 5 x 7 dot matrix displays, and
fully intelligent monolithic 16 segment displays.
The integrated numeric and hexadecimal displays with
on board decoder/driver and memory are hermetically
sealed and have a character height of 7.4 mm (0.29 inch).
These devices are available in standard red; low power,
high efficiency red; high brightness, high efficiency red;
yellow; and a green epoxy sealed unit that conforms to
MIL-D-87157 hermeticity requirements. These devices
are designed and tested for use in military and
aerospace applications.
The hermetic solid state lamps are listed on the MILS-19500 Qua1ified Parts List (QPL). These devices
meet JAN and J ANTX quality levels and are furnished
in the basic lamp configuration or an integral panel
mountable assembly. Four colors are available: high
efficiency red, standard red, yellow and green. The
hermetic Ultra-bright lamps are provided with JAN
and J ANT~ equivalent testing. These devices are
sunlight viewable and are available in three colors: high
efficiency red, yellow and green.
The 5 x 7 dot matrix alphanumeric displays with
extended temperature range capabilities are available in
three character heights: 3.8 mm (0.15 inch), 5 mm
(0.2 inch) and 6~9 mm (0.27 inch). These displays are
available in several colors: standard red, high efficiency
red and yellow. Green devices conforming to MIL-D87157 hermeticity requirements are available in the
3.8 mm (0.15 inch) and 5 mm (0.2 inch) character
heights. The 5 mm (0.2 inch) and 6.9 mm (0.27 inch)
versions have the added features of having a solderglass seal and an even wider operating temperature
range than the 3.8 mm (0.15 inch) packiige. This wide
variety of character heights and colors makes these
products ideal for a variety of applications in avionics,
industrial cOntrols, and instrumentations.
The hermetically sealed 4N51-4N54 hexadecimal and
numeric displays are listed on the MIL-D-87157
Qualified Parts List and are supplied to Quality Level
A. Four types of devices are available: numeric
indicators with right-hand or left-hand decimals,
hexadecimal indicator and overrange display with righthand decimal.
In addition to the QPL products, Hewlett-Packard also
offers two in-house high reliability testing programs,
TXV and TXVB. The TXVB program conforms to
MIL-D-87157 Quality Level A test tables with 100%
screening and Quality Conformance Inspection testing
(QCI). The TXV program is a modification to Level A
testing and consists of 100% screening and Group A
testing. Products that are tested to TXV and TXVB
programs and comply with MIL-D-87157 hermeticity
requirements include the numeric and heXadecimal
displays, 5 x 7 dot matrix displays, and monolithic 16
segment displays. Detailed testing programs for these
devices are given in the individual data sheets.
1-3
-----------------
-------------------------------------
Optoelectronic Product
Qualification
DESC Qualified Products
Two military general specifications are presently in use
to qualify visible products. MIL-S-19500 establishes
the qualification requirements for JAN and JANTX
hermetic lamps. Four hermetic lamps and three
panel mountable hermetic lamps are listed on the MILS-19500 Qualified Parts List (QPL). Descriptions of the
individual devices and test program are given in the
slash (detail) specifications MIL-S-19500/467, /519,
/520 and/521.
MIL-D-87157 establishes the qualification
requirements for the 4N51-4N54 light emitting displays.
These four hermetic displays are listed on the MIL-D87157 Qualified Parts List. Descriptions of the
individual devices and test program are given in the
slash specification MIL-D-87157/1 (ER).
Hewlett-Packard Hi-Rei Testing Programs
By conforming to the requirements of MIL-D-87157
for all other .display and lamp products, not discussed
above, Hewlett-Packard is able to offer products of
significant value to. reliability oriented customers. MILD-87157 has provisions fodour different quality levels
as follows:
Level A Hermetic displays with 100% screening and
Group A, B and C testing.
Level B Hermetically sealed displays with Group A,
B, and C testing and without 100% screening.
Level C Non-hermetic displays with 100% screening
and Group A, Band C testing.
Level D Non-hermetic displays with Group A, B, and
Ctestingand without 100% screening.
Hewlett-Packard devices meeting the hermeticity
requirements of MIL-D-87157 include the hermetic
hexadecimal, numeric and alphanumeric displays
described in this section of the catalog. If the suffix
TXVB is added to the part number, the display is
tested to Level A with 100% screening and qualification
tests. When the suffix TXV is added. the devices are
submitted to 100% screening and Group A testing.
Detailed testing programs which follow the MIL-D87157 Quality Level A test tables are given in the
individual data sheets. The general MIL-D-87157
Quality Level C program for non-hermetic displays is
given on the following pages.
1-4
TABLE I. 100% SCREEN FORMAT FOR QUALITY LEVEL C
MIL-STD-750
Method
Test Screen
1. Precap Visuall1l
2072
Level C
When specified
2. High Temperature Storagel 11
1032
100%
3. Temperature Cyclingl1l
1051
100%
4. Constant Accelerationl 1.2 1
2006
When specified
5. Fine Leakl 11
1071
N/A
6. Gross Leakl11
1071
-
7. Interim Electrical/Optical Testsl 11
8. Burn-lnI 1.3 i
1015
9. Final Electrical/Optical Tests
10. Delta Determinationsl 11
11. External Visuall 3 1
N/A
When specified
100%
-
100%
-
When specified
2009
100%
Notes:
1. These tests are design dependent. The conditions and limits shall be specified in the detail specification when these tests are applicable.
2. Applicable to cavity type displays only.
3. MIL-STD-883 test method applies.
TABLE II. GROUP A ELECTRICAL TESTS[1]
LTPD
Subgroups
Subgroup 1
DC Electrical Tests at 25°C
5
Subgroup 2
Selected DC Electrical Tests at High Temperatures
7
Subgroup 3
Selected DC Electrical Tests at Low Temperatures
7
Subgroup 4
Dynamic Electrical Tests at TA = 25° C
5
Subgroup 5
Dynamic Electrical Tests at High Temperatures
7
Subgroup 6
Dynamic Electrical Tests at Low Temperatures
7
Subgroup 7
Optical and Functional Tests at 25°C
5
Subgroup 8
External Visual
7
Notes:
_
_
_
_
1: The specific parameters to be included for tests in each subgroup shall be as specified in the applicable detail specification.
1-5
----------
TABLE lila. GROUP B, CLASS A AND B OF MIL-D-87157
(CLASS C AND D DISPLAYS ONLY)
,
Test
MIL-STD-750
Method
Sampling Plan
1022
4 Devices/
Subgroup 1
Resistance to Solvents II I
2075[7J
Internal Visual and Design Verification[2. 5, 6J
o Failures
1 Device/
o Failures
Subgroup 2[3,4]
Solderabilityl I I
E[ectrical/Optical Endpointsl l I
2026
LTPD = 15
Subgroup 3
Therma[ Shockl l I
(Temperature Cycling)
1051
LTPD=15
1021
Moisture Resistancel I I
E[ectrica[/Optical Endpointsl l I
Subgroup 4
Operating Life Test (340 Hours)l1 I
Electrical/Optical Endpointsl I I
1027
LTPD = 10
Subgroup 5
Non-Operating (Storage) Life Test (340 Hours)ll I
Electrical/Optical Endpointsl l I
1032
LTPD = 10
Notes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Test method or conditions in accordance with detail specification.
Not required for solid encapsulated displays.
The LTPD applies to the numberof leads inspected except in no ease shall
less than three displays be used to provide the number of leads required.
Whenever electrical/optical tests are not required as endpoints, electrical
rejects may be used.
7.
MIL-STD-883 test method applies,
Visual inspection is performed through the window display.
Equivalent to MIL-STD-883, Method 2014,
TABLE IVa. GROUP C, CLASS A AND B OF MIL-D-87157
MIL-STD-750
Method
Test
Subgroup 1[1]
Physical Dimensions
2066
Sampling Plan
2 Devicesl
o Failures
Subgroup 2[1]
Lead Integrityl61
2004
LTPD=15
Subgroup 3
Shockl 21
Vibration, Variable Frequencyl21
Constant Accelerationl 21
External Visuall 3 1
Electrical/Optical Endpointsl 4 1
2016
2056
2006
10100r 1011
LTPD= 15
Subgroup 4
Operating Life Test1 4,51
Electrical/Optical Endpointsl 4 1
1026
A = 10
Subgroup 5
Temperature Cycling (25 cycles min.)1 4 1
Electrical/Optical Endpointsl 4 1
1051
LTPD = 20
Notes
1. Whenever electrical/optical tests are not required as endpoints, electrical
rejects may be used.
2. Not required for solid encapsulated displays.
3. Visual requirements shall be as-specified in MIL-STD-883, method 1010 or
5.
lOll.
4.
Test method or conditions in accordance with detail specification.
6.
1-6
If a given inspection lot undergoing Group B inspection has been selected
to satisfy Group C inspection requirements, the 340 hour life tests may be
continued on test to 1000 hours in order to s~tisfy the Group C life test
requirements. I n such cases, either the 340 hour endpoint measurements
shall be made as a basis for Group B lot acceptance or the 1000 hours
endpoint measurements shall be used as the basis for both Group Band C
acceptance.
MIL-STD-883 test method applies,
Hermetically Sealed and High Reliability LED Lamps
Description
Device
Package Duiline Drawing
Part No.
1N5765
JAN1N576S1 4]
T
"....-
......
/
,
~ <:IT3 ~
\
Colorl 21
Red
(640 nm)
Package
Hermeticl
TO-4613]
. lens
Red
Diffused
Typical
luminous
Intensity
1.0 mcd
@20mA
2e 112111
70'
Typical
Forward
Voltage
1.6 V
@20mA
JANTX1 N576514]
1N6092
JAN1N6092[4]
High
Efficiency
Red
(626 nm)
5.0 mcd
@20mA
2.0 V
@20mA
JANTX1N6092[4]
1N6093
Yellow
(585 nm)
Yellow
Diffused
Green
(572 nm)
Green
Diffused
3.0 mcd
@25mA
2.1 V
@25mA
Red
Diffused
1.0 mcd
@20mA
1.6 V .
@20mA
5.0 mcd
@20mA
2.0 V
@20mA
3.0 mcd
@25mA
2.1 V
@25mA
JAN1N6093[4]
JANTX1 N609314]
/
~
-~
1N6094
JAN1N6094[4]
JANTX1N6094[4]
HlMP-0904
Red
(640 nm)
Panel Mount
Version
HlMP-0930
HlMP-0931
HlMP-0354
JANM195001
51901[4]
JTXM195001
51902[4]
HLMP-0454
0
JANM195001
52001[4]
JTXM195001
52002[4]
HLMP-0554
JANM195001
52101{4]
JTXM195001
52102[4]
High
Efficiency
Red
(626 nm)
Yellow
(585 nm)
Yellow
Diffused
Green
(572 nm)
Green
Diffused
NOTES:
1. (-)112 is the off-axis angle at which the luminous intensity is half the axial luminous intensity.
2. Dominant Wavelength.
3. PC Board Mountable.
4. Military Approved and qualified for High Reliability Applications.
1-7
Page
No.
6-146
Hermetically Sealed and High Reliability LED Lamps (cant.)
Description
Device
Package Outline Drawing
r;(
Part No.
Colorl2]
HlMP-0363
High
Efficiency
Red
(626 nm)
HlMP-0391
HlMP-0392
HlMP-0463
HLMP-0491
Package
Hermetic
TO-1813]
lens
Typical
luminous
Intensity
Clear
Class
50 mcd
@20mA
201/211]
18
Typical
Forward
Voltage
2.0V
@20mA
Yellow
(585 nm)
50 mcd
@20mA
2.0 V
@20mA
Green
(572 nm)
50 mcd
@25mA
2.1 V
@25mA
50 mcd
@20mA
2.0V
@20mA
Yellow
(585 nm)
50 mcd
@25mA
2.0 V
@20mA
Green
(572 nm)
50 mcd
@25mA
2.1 V
@25mA
HlMP-0492
-,
Gill;,
-'
HLMP-0563
HLMP-0591
HlMP-0592
HLMP-0364
HLMP-0365
HLMP-0366
HLMP-0464
HLMP-0465
High
Efficiency
Red
(626 nm)
Panel
Mount
Version
Clear
Glass
HLMP-0466
0
HlMP-0564
HLMP-0565
HLMP-0566
NOTES:
1. (-)1/2 is the off-axis angle at which the luminous intensity is half the axial luminous intensity.
2. Dominant Wavelength.
3. PC Board Mountable.
1-8
Page
No.
6-152
- - - - - _......- - - - -
Hermetic Hexadecimal and Numeric Dot Matrix Displays
Description
Device
Ll
· .
IA)
[J
[J
· .
IB)
· .
Ie)
.....
·· ..
En
4N51
Numeric RHDP
4N51TXV
Decoder /Driver/Memory
M87157/00101ACXll) TXV - Hi Rei Screened
(4N51TXVB)
(A)
4N54
4N54TXV
M87157/00103ACXll)
(4N54TXVB)
(C)
4N53
4N53TXV
104ACXll)
(4N53TXVB)
(D)
Hexadecimal Built-in
Decoder /Driver/Memory
TXV - Hi Rei Screened
HDSP-0781
(A)
Numeric RHDP. Built-in
Decoder /Driver Memory
TXV Hi Rei Screened
TXVB Hi Rei Screened
to Level A MIL-D-87157
HDSP-0781
TXV
·.
(01
HDSP-0782
TXV
HDSP-0782
(B)
HDSP-0782
TXVB
HDSP-0783
(D)
7.4 mm (.29")
4 x 7 Single Digit
, Package:
8 Pin Glass Ceramic
15.2mm (.6"1 DIP
Truly Hermetic
Application
8 Pin Hermetic Built-in
15.2 mm (.6") DIP
with gold plated
leads
HDSP-0783
TXV
0
0
0
4N52
Numeric LHDP Built-in
4N52TXV
Decoder/Driver/Memory
M87157/00102ACX(1) TXV - Hi Rei Screened
(4N52TXVB)
(B)
HDSP-0781
TXVB
TIn
Package
Military High Reliability
Applications
Avionics/Space Flight
Systems
Fire Control Systems
HDSP-0784
TXV
HDSP-0784
TXVB
HDSP-0791
(A)
HDSP-0791
TXV
HDSP-0791
TXVB
HDSP-0792
(B)
HDSP-0792
TXV
7-182
0
Ground Support.
Shipboard Equipment
0
Ground_ Airborne. Shipboard 7-190
Equipment
Fire Control Systems
Space Flight Systems
Other High Reliability
Uses
Character Plus/Minus Sign
TXV - Hi Rei Screened
High Efficiency Red.
Low Power
··
0
NumeriC LHDP. Built-in
Decoder/Driver Memory
TXV Hi Rei Screened
TXVB Hi Rei Screened
to Level A MIL-D-87157
Overrange .!: 1
TXV Hi Rei Screened
TXVB Hi Rei Screened
to Level A MIL-D-87157
HDSP-0783
TXVB
HDSP-0784
(C)
Page
No.
Hexadecimal. Built-in
Decoder/Driver Memory
TXV Hi Rei Screened
TXVB Hi Rei Screened
to Level A MIL-D-87157
High Efficiency Red.
High Brightness
Numeric RHDP. Built-in
Decoder/Driver Memory
TXV Hi Rei Screened
TXVB Hi Rei Screened
to Level A MIL-D-87157
0
0
0
·
Numeric LHDP. Built-in
Decoder / Driver Memory •
TXV Hi Rei Screened
TXVB Hi Rei Screened
to Level A MIL-D-87157
Ground. Airborne. Shipboard
Equipment
Fire Control Systems
Space Flight Systems
Other High Reliability
Uses
'.
HDSP-0792
TXVB
..
..
[1] Military Approved and Qualified for High Reliability Applications.
1-9
- - - - _ . __. -_._-----
..
-- -------------
Hermetic Hexadecimal and Numeric Dot Matrix Displays (continued)
Device
HDSP-0783
(D)
(See previous page)
HDSP-0783
TXV
Application
Color
Description
Overrange ±1
TXV Hi Rei Screened
TXVB Hi Rei Screened
to Level A MIL-D-87157
·
··
High Efficiency Red.
High
Brightness
·
HDSP-0783
TXVB
HDSP-0794
(C)
HDSP-0794
TXV
HDSP-0794
TXVB
HDSP-0881
(A)
HDSP-0881
TXV
HDSP-0881
TXVB
HDSP-0882
(B)
HDSP-0882
TXV
HDSP-0882
TXVB
HDSP-0883
(0)
HDSP-0883
TXV
Hexadecimal. Built-in
Decoder IDriver Memory
TXV Hi Rei Screened
TXVB Hi Rei Screened
to Level A MIL-D-87157
Numerrc RHDP. Built-in
Decoder I Driver Memory
TXV Hi Rei Screened
TXVB Hi Rei Screened
to Level A MIL-D-87157
Yellow
Numeric LHDP. Built-in
Decoder IDriver Memory
TXV Hi Rei Screened
TXVB Hi Rei Screened
to Level A MIL-D-87157
Overrange =1
TXV HI Rei Screened
TXVB Hi Rei Screened
to Level A MIL-D-87157
HDSP-0883
TXVB
HDSP-0884
(C)
HDSP-0884
TXV
HOSP-0884
TXVB
(See previous page)
HDSP-0981
(A)
HDSP·0981
TXV
Hexadecimal. Built-in
Decoder IDriver Memory
TXV Hi Rei Screened
TXVB Hi Rei Screened
to Level A MIL-D-87157
High
Performance
Green
Numeric RHDP, Built·in
Decoder IDriver Memory
TXV Hi Rei Screened
TXVB Hi Rei Screened
to Level A MIL-D·87157
HDSP·0981
TXVB
HDSP·0982
(B)
HDSP·0982
TXV
Numeric LHDP, Built·in
Decoder !Driver Memory
TXV Hi Rei Screened
TXVB Hi Rei Screened
to Level A MIL-D·87157
HDSP·0982
TXVB
HDSP·0983
(C)
HDSP·0983
TXV
Overrange ±1
TXV Hi Rei Screened
TXVB Hi Rei Screened
to Level A MIL·D·87157
HDSP·0983
TXVB
.'
1-10
Page
No.
Ground. Airborne. Shipboard 7-190
Equipment
Fire Control Systems
Space Flight Systems
Other High Reliability
Uses
---------
Hermetic Hexadecimal and Numeric Dot Matrix Displays (continued)
Hexadecimal, Built-in
Decoder IDriver Memory
TXV Hi Rei Screened
TXVB Hi Rei Screened
to Level A MIL-D-87157
HDSP-0984
(D)
(See prevIous pagel
HDSP-0984
TXV
Page
No.
Applicalion
Color
Description
Device
·
··
·
High
Performance
Green
HDSP-0984
TXVB
Ground. Airborne. Shipboard 17-190
Equlpmenl
File Conllol Syslems
Space Fllghl Syslems
Olhel High Rellablilly
Uses
Hermetic Alphanumeric Displays
Description
Device
mI
r;:=;~:..
__ .J g
~r~~~J;
- - -"1!1
11:" ___ 10
~:-
=[:~Jn
'--
~
Color
HMDL-2416 4.1 mm (0.16") Four
Character Monolithic
HMDL-2416 Smart Alphanumeric
TXV
Display
HMDL-2416 Operating Temperature
TXVB
Range: -55'C to 100'C
Red
HDSP-2351
Yellow
HDSP-2351
TXV
HDSP-2351
TXVB
4.87 mm (0.19") 5 x 7 Four
Character Alphanumeric
Sunlight Viewable
Display
Operating Temperature Range:
-55'C to 100°C
HDSP-2352
···
Page
No.
Application
Military Equipment
High Reliability Applications
Military Telecommunications
• Military Avionics
• Military Cockpit
• Military Ground Support
Systems
7-204
7-214
High Efficiency Red
HDSP-2352
TXV
HDSP-2352
TXVB
HDSP-2353
High Performance
Green
HDSP-2353
TXV
HDSP-2353
TXVB
D~
HDSP-2010
I ::.: I
i ,.:-:!
!
1:.:.:'
I ~
. ~
~
j,1
:!-
HDSP-2010
TXV
HDSP-2010
TXVB
3.7 mm (.15") 5 x 7 Four
Character Alphanumeric
Operating Temperature
Range: -40'C to +85'C
TXV Hi Rei Screened
TXVB Hi Rei Screened to
Level A MIL-D-87157
Red, Red Glass
Contrast Filter
Extended temperature
applications requiring
high reliability.
liD Terminals
Avionics
7-198
For further information see
Application Note 1016.
-
1-11
......
·
··
__ ..-_
......... _.. _ - - - - - -
Hermetic Alphanumeric Displays (continued)
Paga
Dascrlptlon
Davlca
HDSp·2310
HDSp.2310
. TXV
HDSP.2310
TXVB
Color.
5.0 mm (.20") 5 x Hour
Character Alphanumeric
12 Pin Ceramic 6.35 mm
(.25") DIP with untinted
glass lens
Standard Red
Application
• Military Equipment
• Avionics
• High Rei Industrial
. Equipment
No.
7·228
1 - - - - - 1 Operating Temperature
HDSp.2311
HDSP.2311
TXV
HDSp·2311
TXVB
r-H-D-S-P.2-3---12-l
Range: ·55°C to +85°C
Yellow
True Hermetic Seal
TXV - Hi Rei Screened
TXVB - Hi Rei Screened
to Level A MIL·D·87157
High Elf. Red
HDSp·2312
TXV
HDSp·2312
TXVB
HDSp·2313
High Performance
Green
HDSP·2313
TXV
HDSP·2313
TXVB .
HDSp·2450
c ... ,
I
HDSp·2450
TXV
fiDSP.2450
TXVB
f-:-:,::c:-__:-:-I
HDSP·2451
HDSP·2451
TXV
HDSP·2451
TXVB
Operating Temperature
Range: .55° C to +85~ C
6.9 mm (.27") 5 x 7 Four
Character Alphanumeric
28 Pin Ceramic 15.24 mm
(.6") DIP
True Hermetic Seal
TXV - Hi Rei Screened
Red
Yellow
TXVB -'Hi Rei Screened
to Level A MIL·D.87157
HDSp·2452
High Efficiency Red
HDSp·2452
TXV
HDSp·2452
TXVB
HDSp·2453
High Performance
Green
HDSp·2453
TXV
HDSP·24s3
TXVB '
1-12
• Military Equipment
• High Reliability
Applications
• Avionics
• Ground Support. Cock·
pit. Shipboard Systems
7.235
Hermetic Optocouplers
Several years ago, HP commenced the introduction of a
new series of 8 pin single and dual channel devices with
extraordinary capabilities. The HCPL-5700/l and
HCPL-5730/l are, respectively, single and dual channel
high gain Darlington units. The HCPL-5200/1 and
HCPL-5230/1 are high speed logic gate devices with a
wide supply voltage from 4.5 to 20 volts and high
CMR. The HCPL-5400/1 and HCPL-5430/1 are,
respectively, single and dual channel high speed
couplers featuring typical data rates of 40 Mbaud. The
most recent of our 8 pin hermetic products is the
HCPL-5760/1, a single channel, three chip, ACiDC to
logic interface optocoupler.**
Hewlett-Packard has selected several very popular
optocciupler types for assembly in our militarized
hermetic 8 pin and 16 pin dual in-line packages. These
devices offer a wide variety of LED input current
levels', speed and current transfer ratio. High
performance optocouplers are used in many U.S. and
international military, aerospace and high reliability
applications.
HP's hermetic optocouplers are classified by the U.S.
Department of Defense as hybrid microcircuits and
therefore comply with line certification requirements of
Mil-Std-1772. DESC* granted HP QML (Qualified
Manufacturing Line) status in April of 1987, which
allows us to continue the supply of both 883B marked
parts and DESC drawing parts. Virtually all of our
hermetic optocouplers may be purchased with
screening and quality conformance testing in
compliance with class level B of Mil-Std-883 as
standard catalog parts. Class S tested parts are also
available under special testing programs. Parts having
DESC* military drawings are 810280lEC and
830240lEC and are also available from stock.
Our Mil-Std-I772 line certification allows HPto
consider assembly and test of more technically
advanced hybrid devices where our expertise in
materials and processing may contribute to a new
product's success in OEM applications. Construction of
custom hybrid circuits requires the special working
relationship that HP has always enjoyed with its
customers toward the advancement of state-of-the-art
products.
The 8102801EC is a 6NI34 consisting of dual channel
high speed logic gates compatible with TTL inputs and
outputs. The common mode for this part was recently
improved to a minimum of 1000 VI p.s. A second family
of dual channel high speed logic gates, the HCPL1930/1, also features high common mode and has the
added feature of mput current regulation. The
830240lEC is a quad channel low input current photodarlington, ideal for MOS, CMOS, or RS232-C data
transmission systems. Finishing out our 16 pin devices
is the 4N55 product family. The 4N55 is a dual channel
coupler having low gain transistor output useful for
isolating circuits in power supply applications, logic
interfacing, and wide bandwidth analog applications.
*Defense Electronic Supply center (DESC) is an
agency of the United States Department of Defense
(DOD).
**Contact your HP field sales engineer for higher
withstand voltage up to 1500 V dc.
1-13
.., ..._----_._--
Plastic Optocouplers
Hewlett-Packard supplies plastic optocouplers with high
reliability testing for commercial/industrial applications
requiring prolonged operational life. Two of the most
frequently requested 100% preconditioning and screening
programs are given. The first program has burn-in and
electrical test only, the second program adds temperature
storage and temperature cycling. Either program is available for HP's plastic optocouplers. Electrical testing is to
catalog conditions and limits and will include 100% DC
parameters, sample testing of input-output insulation
leakage current and appropriate AC parameters. Contact
your local field representative for pricing and availability of
these programs.
PLASTIC OPTOCOUPLERS
PRECONDITIONING AND SCREENING 100%
COMMERCIAL BURN-IN·
Examinations or Tests
MIL-STD-883
Methods
Conditions
1. Commercial Burn-in
1015
TA= 70°C, 160 hours per designated circuit.
2. Electrical Test
Per specified conditions and min.lmax.
limits at TA = 25°C
SCREENING PROGRAM·
Examinations or Tests
MIL-STD-883
Methods
Conditions
1. High Temperature Storage
1008
2. Temperature Cycling
1010
10 cycles, -55°C to +125°C
3. Burn-in
1015
TA = 70°C, 160 hours per designated circuit
4. Electrical Test
5. External Visual
24 hours at 125°C
Per specified conditions and min.lmax.
limits atTA = 25°C
2009
'Contact your field salesman for details.
1-14
GROUP B TESTING MIL-STD-883, METHOD 5005 (CLASS B DEVICES)[l]
Method
Test
Subgroup 1
Physical Dimensions
(Not required if Group D is
to be performed)
Subgroup 2
Resistance to Solvents
Subgroup 3
Solderability
(LTPD applies to number of leads
inspected - no fewer than 3 devices
shall be used.)
Subgroup 4
I nternal Visual and Mechanical
Condillons
LTPD
2016
2 Devices/
o Failures
2015
4 Devices/
o Failures
2003
Soldering Temperature of 245 ±5° C for 10
seconds
2014
15
(3 Devices)
1 Device/
o Failures
Subgroup 5
Bond Strength
(1) Thermocompression (performed at
precap, prior to seal. LTPD applies to
number of bond pulls).
Subgroup 6
Internal water vapor content (Not
applicable - per footnote of MIL-STD)
Subgroup 7
Fine Leak
Gross Leak
2011
1014
Subgroup 8'
Electrical Test
Electrostatic Discharge Sensitivity
Electrical Test
(1) Test Condition D
15
-
Test Condition A
Test Condition C
5
Group A, Subgroup 1, except 11- 0
15
3015
Group A, Subgroup 1
...
(To be performed at Initial qualification only)
Group C testing is performed on a periodic basis from current manufacturing every 3 months.
GROUP C TESTING MIL-STD-883, METHOD 5005 (CLASS B DEVICES)[l]
Test
Subgroup 1
Steady State Life Test
Method
1005
Conditions
Condition B, Time + 1000 Hours Total
TA = +125°C
Burn-in conditions are product dependent
and are given in the individual device data
sheets.
Endpoint Electricals at 168 hours and
504 hours
Group A, Subgroup 1, except 11-0
Endpoint Electricals at 1000 hours
Group A, Subgroup 1
Subgroups 2 and 3 where applicable
Subgroup 2
Temperature Cycling
1010
Condition C, -65° C to +150° C, 10 cycles
Constant Acceleration
2001
Condition A, 5K Gs, V, and V2 axis only,
8 pin and 16 pin metal lid DIP
Condition E, 30K Gs, V, and V2 axis only,
8 pin ceramic lid DIP
Fine Leak
1014
Condition A
Gross Leak
1014
Condition C
Visual Examination
1010
Endpoint Electricals
Per visual criteria of Method 1010
Group A, Subgroup 1
1-15
LTPD
5
15
Group D testing is performed on a periodic basis from current manufacturing every 6 months.
GROUP D TESTING MIL-STD-883, METHOD 5005 (CLASS B DEVICES)!']
Test
Method
Conditions
LTPD
Subgroup 1
Physical Dimensions
2016
Subgroup 2
Lead Integ rity
2004
Test Condition B2 (lead fatigue)
15
Subgroup 3
Thermal Shock
1011
Condition B, (-55°C to +125°C)
15 cycles min.
15
Temperature Cycling
1010
Condition C, (-65°C to +150°C)
100 cycles min.
15
Moisture Resistance
1004
Fine Leak
1014
Condition A
Gross Leak
1014
Condition C
Visual Examination
Per visual criteria of Method 1004 and 1010
Endpoint Electricals
Group A, Subgroups 1, 2 and 3
where applicable
Subgroup 4
Mechanical Shock
2002
Condition B,.1500G, t = 0.5 ms,
5 blows in each orientation
Vibration Variable Frequency
2007
Condition A min.
Constant Acceleration
2001
Condition A, 5K Gs, V, and V2 axis only,
8 pin and 16 pin metal lid DIP
Condition E, 30K Gs, V, and V2 axis only,
8 pin ceramic lid DIP
Fine Leak
1014
Condition A
Gross Leak
1014
Condition C
Visual Examination
1010
Per visual criteria of Method 1010
Endpoint Electricals
Subgroup 5
Salt Atmosphere
15
Group A, Subgroups 1, 2 and 3
where applicable
1009
Condition A min.
1014
Condition A
Gross Leak
1014
Condition C
Visual Examination
1009
Per visual criteria of Method 1009
Subgroup 6
Internal Water Vapor Content
1018
5,000 ppm maximum water content at 100°C
Subgroup 7
Adhesion of lead finish
2025
15
2024
5 Devices
(0 failures)
Fine Leak
Subgroup 8
Lid Torque
(Applicable to 8 pin ceramic lid DIP only)
15
3 Devices
(0 failures)
5 Devices
(1 failure)
Notes:
1. Hewlett-Packard exercises a testing option as allowed by MIL-STD-883, Method 5008, Par. 3.1a. Paragraph 3.1 of Method 5008 states
that "hybrid and multichip microcircuits, which are contained in packages having an inner seal perimeter of less than 2.0 inches",
may be tested in accordance with the requirements of MIL-STD-883, Methods 5004 and 5005, with a change to the internal visual
from Method 2010 to Method 2017.
1-16
---~
--_ ..
--_.-----
Hermetic Optocoupler Product Screening and Quality Conformance Test Program
(MIL-STO-883 Class 8)
The following 100% Screening and Quality Conformance
Inspection programs show in detail the capabilities of our
hermetic optocouplers. This program will help customers
understand .the tests included in Methods 5004 and 5005
of MIL-STD-883 and to help in the design of special
product drawings where this testing is required. The
4N55/8838, 6N140A/8838, 5231/8838, 1931/8838,5401/8838,
5201/8838, 5431/883B, 5761/883B, 5701/8838, 5731/8838,
8102801 EC and 8302401 EC (DESC Selected Item Drawings
for the 6N134 a.nd 6N140A respectively) have standardized
test programs suitable for product use in military, high
reliability applications and are the preferred devices by
military contractors. (See note 1.)
100% Screening
MIL-STO-883, METHOD 5004 (CLASS 8 OEVICES)[l]
Test Screen
Method
Conditions
'.
1. Precap Internal Visual
2017
Condition B, DESC Partsl']
= 150°C, Time = 24 Hours minimum
2. High Temperature Storage
1008
Condition C, TA
3. Temperature Cycling
1010
Condition C, -65° C to +150° C, 10 cycles
4. Constant Acceleration
2001
Condition A, 5K Gs, Y" and Y2 , axis only, 8 pin and 16 pin metal lid DIP
Condition E, 30K Gs, Y" and Y2 , axis only, 8 pin ceramic lid DIP
5. Fine Leak
1014
Condition A
6. G ross Leak
1014
7. Interim Electrical Test
-
8. 8urn-ln
1015
9. Final Electrical Test
Electrical Test
Electrical Test
Electrical Test
-
10. External Visual
Condition C
Group A, Subgroup 1, except 11/0 (optional)
Condition B, Time = 160 Hours minimum, TA = 125°C
8urn-in conditions are product dependent and are
given in the individual data sheets.
Group A,
Group A,
Group A,
Group A,
Subgroup 1, 5% PDA applies
Subgroup 2
Subgroup 3
Subgroup 9
2009
Quality Conformance Inspection
Group A electrical tests are product dependent and are given in the individual device data sheets. Group A and 8 testing
is performed on each inspection lot.
GROUP A TESTING MIL-STO-883, METHOD 5005 (CLASS 8 OEVICES)[l]
LTPO
Subgroup 1
2
Static tests at TA = 25° C
Subgroup 2
Static tests at T A = +125° C
3
Subgroup 3
Static tests at T A = -55° C
5
Subgroup 4
Dynamic test at T A = 25° C (where applicable)
2
Subgroups 5, 6, 7 and 8
These subgroups are non-applicable to this device type
Subgroup 9
Switching tests at T A = 25° C
2
Subgroup 10
Switching tests at TA
= +125° C
3
= -55° C
5
Subgroup 11
Switching tests at TA
1-17
8 Pin Dual-In-Line Package
High-Speed Logic Gate Optocouplers
Description
Device
Application
3'
'~""
6 VE
HCPL-5200 Single Channel,
Hermetically Sealed
Wide Supply Voltage
Optocoupler
4
5GND
HCPL-5201 MIL-STD-883
Class B
Military/High
Reliability
HCPL-5230 Dual Channel,
Hermetically Sealed
Wide Supply Voltage
Optocoupler
High Speed Logic
Ground Isolation,
LSTTL, TTL, CMOS
Logic Interface
HCPL-5231 MIL-STD-883
Class B Part
Military/High
Reliability
HCPL-5400 Single Channel
Hermetically Sealed
High Speed
Optocoupler
High Speed Logic
Isolation, AID and
Paraliel/Serial
Conversion
2
';~.fJ
7 Vo
It¥i}IID-
2
po Vcc
P7 VOl
3~flID'------
6 V02
4
5 GND
.."
'~.."
High Speed Logic
Ground Isolation,
LSTTL, TTL, CMOS
Logic Interface
'~
II
7 VE
4
5 GND
HCPL-5401 MIL-STD-883
Class B Part
Military/High
Reliability
7 VOl
HCPL-5430 Dual Channel
Hermetically Sealed
High Speed
Optocoupler
High Speed Logic
Isolation, Communications, Networks,
Computers
HCPL-5431 MIL -STD-883
Class B Part
Military/High
Reliability
2
3
6 Vo
>.,.
2
\,
3
""
6 V02
4
5 GND
Typical
Data Rate
INRI]
Common
Mode
Specllied
Input
Current
Wilhstand
Test
Voltage"
Page
No.
5 M bills
1000 VII's
6.0 mA
500 Vdc
9-102
r-9-108
40 M bit/s
500 VII'S
9.0mA
500 Vdc
9-114
r-9-120
High Gain Optocouplers
Description
Device
'tg""
2,
3
4
7NC
6Vo
5GND
HCPL-5700 Single Channel
Hermetically Sealed
High Gain Optocoupler
MIL-STD-883
Class B Part
HCPL-5730 Dual Channel
Hermetically Sealed
7 VOl
High Gain Optocoupler
6 V02
5 GND HCPL-5731 MIL-STD-883
Class B Part
HCPL-5701
.
'~ "
2'
3 'l
4
I
Application
Typical
Data Rate
(NRII
Line Receiver, Low
60k bit/s
Current Ground
Isolation. TTLiTTL.
LSTTLITTL. CMOS/TTL
Military/High
Reliability
Line Receiver, Polarity
Sensing, Low Current
Ground Isolation
Military/High
Reliability
Current
Transfer
Ratio
Specified
Input
Current
Withstand
Test
Voltage"
Page
No.
200% Min.
0.5 mA
500 V dc
9-126
-
9-130
AC/DC to Logic Interface Optocoupler
Device
..
,
7NC
'~
'6Vo
2
3
4 --
Description
HCPL-5760
5GND
HCPL-5761
Single Channel
Hermetically Sealed
Threshold Sensing
Optocoupler
MIL-STD-883
Class B Part
Application
Limit Switch
Sensing, Low Voltage
Detector Relay
Contact Montitor
Military/High
Reliability
'Contact your HP field sales engineer for higher withstand voltage up to 1500V dc.
1-18
Typical
Data Rate
10 kHz
Input
Threshold
Current
2.5 mA TH+
1.3 mA TH-
Output
Current
Wilhstand
Test
Voltage"
Page
No.
2,6 mA
500 V dc
9-134
16 Pin Dual In-Line Package
High Speed Transistor Optocouplers
Device
rg~=~
I§:
~~ift
~~J
Description
Application
4N55
Dual Channel
Hermeticall,y Sealed
Analog Optical
Coupler
Line Receiver.
Analog Signal
Ground Isolation.
Switching Power
Supply Feedback
Element
4N55/8838
MIL-STO-883
Class 8 Part
Military/High
Reliability
~
Typical
Data Rate
INRZ)
Currenl
Transler
Ratio
Specilied
Input
Current
Wilhstand
Test
Voltage
Page
No.
700k bills
9% Min.
16mA
1500 V dc
g..140
Typical
Data Rate
INRZ)
Common
Mode
Specilied
Input
Current
Withstand
Test
Vollage
Page
No.
10M bills
1000 VII's
10mA
1500 V dc
9-145
High Speed Logic Gate Optocouplers
Device
Q~~
~
~vcc
Description
6N134
Dual Channel
Hermetically Sealed
Optically Coupled
Logic Gate
Line Receiver.
Ground Isolation for
High Reliability
Systems
8102801EC
DESC Approved
6N134
Military /High
Reliability
HCPL-1930
Dual Channel
Hermetically sealed
High CMR Line
Receiver Optocoupler
Line receiver. High
Speed Logic Ground
Isolation in High
Ground or Induced
Noise Environments
HCPL-1931
MIL-STD-883
Class 8 Part
Military/High
Reliability
il '~~v"
~}t!v.
~
I
a~_!i~'ND
~
:
IW1'
v,
.~~
r'~~
';'ND
~v,
~~OUT
I
;!VDUT
00"
Application
I 9-149
10M bills
1000 V/I'S
10 mA
1500 Vdc
g..153
Typical
Data Rate
INRZ)
Current
Transfer
Ratio
Specilied
Input
Current
Wilhstand
Test
Voltage
Page
No.
lOOk bills
300% Min.
05 mA
1500V dc
g..159
High Gain Optocouplers
Device
[jF~
~
{
~vcc
~}1~iJIvOi
~ 'F~~v"
~}J:~~V03
! ~ilv"
o~ JU ill'"
ID
~
-
Description
6N140A
(6N140)
Hermetically Sealed
Package Containing
4 Low Input Current.
High Gain Optocouplers
8302401EC
DESC Approved
6N140A
6N 140A / 8838 MIL-STD-883
(6N140/8838) Class 8 Part
Application
Line Receiver. Low·
Power Ground
Isolation for High
Reliability Systems
Military /High
Reliability
Use 8302401 EC
in New Designs
1-19
I-
9-163
I-
g..159
~
..•~
, '
'- ' ,
Ink-JetCotnponents
•
•
Thermal Ink-Jet Print Cartridge
Carriage Assembly
Ink-Jet Products
Non-contact printing permits marking on uneven
surfaces, a near impossible task for most printing
technologies; the silent operation makes the print
cartridge especially suitable for office, classroom, and
laboratory environments; and the small size and very
low power consumption of the print cartridge make it
ideal for battery/portable applications.
Thermal Ink-Jet Cartridges
Millions of Hewlett-Packard thermal ink-jet print
cartridges have demonstrated their performance and
reliability in HP ThinkJet and QuietTel printers. Now
this revolutionary, proprietary technology is available
for OEM printing devices. Its long list of advantages
make it attractive for a wide range of industrial and
commercial applications.
Among the many applications of this breakthrough
technology are: ticketing and receipting machines,
point-of-sale devices, printing calculators, medical and
scientific recorders, document marking machines, and
bar code printers.
The thumb-sized print cartridges completely integrate
all the printing elements and ink supply into a single,
disposable unit. Reliability is "designed-in", because
there are no moving parts, messy ribbons, or complex
ink pumps, typical of other printing technologies.
To put the printing technology of tomorrow in your
products today, look to Hewlett-Packard's thermal
ink-jet!
Downtime for ink replenishment or printhead failures
virtually eliminated, because the easy pop-outldropIn replacement requires no tools or technicians.
~s
2-2
Ink Jet Products
Device
Package Outline Drawing
Part No.
Color Ink
92261 A
Black
51605B
Blue
51605R
Red
51605G
Green
51610A
2-3
Description
Page
No.
Print cartridges
2-4
Carriage Assembly for the
Thermal Ink-Jet
Print Cartridge
2-8
rhO-
HEWLETT
~~ PACKARD
THERMAL INK-JET
PRINT CARTRIDGE
BLACK 92261 A
BLUE 51605B
RED 51605R
CREEN 516050
Features
• HEWLETT-PACKARD'S PROVEN THERMAL
INK-JET TECHNOLOGY
• LOW COST DISPOSABLE PRINTHEAD
• HIGH SPEED (1250 DOTS/SEC.)
• HIGH RESOLUTION (96 DOTS/INCH)
• 1/8 INCH PRINT ZONE (12 DOT VERTICALLY
IN-LINE)
• 10 MILLION DOT CAPACITY
(500K CHARACTERS)
• NON-CONTACT PRINTING
• SMALL SIZE
• VERY LOW POWER CONSUMPTION
• QUIET OPERATION
Description
• EASY REPLACEMENT
The HP Thermal Ink-jet print cartridge is a low cost
disposable 'inkjetprinthead which is suitable for a broad
range of industrial and commercial applications. The totally
self-contained print cartridge uses HP's Thermal Ink-jet
technology which overcomes the reliability problems of
conventional piezoelectric inkjet technologies.
Applications
• TICKETING AND RECEIPTING
Non-contact printing operation allows printing on irregular
surfaces at variable distances. It also eliminates printer
failures due to friction wear or foreign body interference.
The absence of any moving parts further enhances reliable
operation. The self-contained design and pressure interconnect allows fast, simple replacement, and it eliminates
the need for any other printer parts such as ribbons,
pumps, etc. It can be fired in any physical orientation.
• PORTABLE PRINTING
• SELECTIVE EJAR CODE PRINTING
• INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL MARKING
• POINT OF SALE PRINTING
The small size of the print cartridge makes it very suitable
for compact or portable printing devices. Its small size also
makes it possible to combine several cartridges to provide
larger print zones or higher throughput speeds. Virtually
silent operation matches the ergonomic needs of the office,
classroom and laboratory.
• ADDRESSING AND PERSONALIZATION
• SCIENTIFIC AND MEDICAL
INSTRUMENTATION
The power consumption of the print cartridge is radically
lower than other printing technologies. This dramatically
reduces the cost of the printer power supply and driver
electronics. It also makes battery operation possible, and
lowers radiated EMI levels. Driver circuitry can be made
with standard off-the-shelf components.
• PERSONAL COMPUTER PRINTING
2-4
A dot firing frequency of 1250 Hz provides a printing
speed of 13 inches/sec at 96 dots/inch resolution. This is
equivalent to over 155 characters per second at a density
of 12 characters per inch. A 2000 Hz dot frequency is
possible under certain low dot density printing conditions,
such as low resolution text. The typical ink capacity of 10
million dots will provide approximately 500K characters
using a common 96 dots/inch square font. Higher char-
acter capacities can be achieved by reducing the font
resolution (fewer dots per character).
Unlike multi-use ribbons used in dot matrix printers, the
print quality is consistent over the life of the print cartridge.
The print cartridge will print on a wide variety of papers
and porous surfaces. Optimum print quality is obtained on
HP designated papers.
PHYSICAL DIMENSIONS
r-10.125,
3.17 0.13
TYP
0.005)
•
I
±
r
ALL DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETRES AND (INCHES)
22.23 ± 0,13
.lJ~~~====~__
1_0._87J.I' 0.005)
""~;J
4.27
~g:~
10.168 ~:g~)
ICENTER TO CENTER)
LOCATING
PINS
+0.13
B.30 -0.30 ) (CENTER TO CENTER)
(0.327 ~g:g~~
SUBSTRATE/CONNECTOR DETAIL
0.26410.0104) TYP.
12
NOZZLE 1:_;.
2.906
ATE
10.1144)
PL
1:",;_+'-___-,
NOZZLES [21
SUBSTRATE
[
12
0'1
010
09
08
1.420
NOTES:
10.=05:::59:;-)~TY:;;;P:-.-1-87
-Cile
CONTACT PADS 121
oo
o
o
o
COM
1
2
3
Cil
L J
5.022
10.1977)
1. DIMENSIONS ARE DEFINED BY PHOTOLITHOGRAPHIC PROCESS.
2. CONTACT PAD NUMBERS CORRESPOND TO NOZZLE NUMBERS.
3. CONTACT PADS ARE GOLD PLATED FOR CORROSION PROTECTION;
MATING CONTACTS SHOULD AVOID SCRATCHING.
2-5
Maximum Ratings
Parameter
Max. Rating
·10
Number of dots per print cartrldgell]
=
Condltioll$
Units
MOots
Nozzle life
2
MOots
Shelf life
18
Mos.
Shelf life
6
Mos.
Non-operating temperature
60
·C
Any single naule
At 25·C in container
At 25·C outside container
48 hours
Note:
1. Actual number of dots is application dependent. Value shown is typical.
Recommended Operating Conditions
Parameter
Symbol
Nozzle to Media Spaclng[l. 2)
Min.
Max.
Units
0.65
1.15
(0.045)
mm
(inches)
(o.D25)
Conditions
Operating Temperaturel:Jj
Top
10
40
·C
Operating Humidity[3j
Hop
5
80
%RH
25·C
-
0
4500
Meters
25"C
Operating Altitude
Notes:
1. Clogging may result if media comes in contact with print cartridge.
2. Larger spacing may be used but with degradation in print quality.
3. Prefiring may be req'uired in low humidity' and some low temperature conditions.
Electrical Specifications
Parameter
ReSistance (pad to common)
T":'
Symbol
Rpp
0
Dot frequency
Dots fired simultaneously
Operating Energy (pad to common)
Eo"
Max.
Units
70
Ohms
1250
Hz
2
Dots
Conditions
All nozzles firing
36.5
/.IJ
Tpw "'4.5/.15
Rpc'" 65 Ohms
40.5
/.IJ
Tpw "B.O /.IS
Rpc "85 Ohms
Tpw ;4.5JLS
Operating Voltage {Ped to common)
Vop
Pulse Wldth!lj
Tpw
4.5
4.5
Dead Time
TOT
0
0.5
Transition Time
Tr.
Tpw "6.0 JLs
8.0
/.Isee
500
nsec
/.Isec
10-90%
Note:
1. Any pulse width t'olerance must be compensated by tightening the voltage variation to maintain an equivalent pulse energy as if
there were no pulse width variation.
2-6
RESISTOR FIRING TIMING DIAGRAM
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
COMMON
R12
Rll
Rl0
R9
RB
R7
v
R6
R5
R4, R10
R3. R9
R4
r-\.
-+--~,
,\----'\--
~
____-J'r\ ____
,~
R3
R2
Rl
~~
R2, RB
supporting Information
RT, R7
L
For further information, refer to:
"Thermal Ink-jet Print Cartridge Designer's Guide",
Publication #5954-8400
"Hewlett-Packard Journal", May 1985,
Publication #5953- 8535.
I
TIME REQUIRED TO FIRE
ONE COLUMN OF 12 DOTS.---J
NOTES:
OTHER SEQUENCES ARE POSSIBLE.
These documents are available through your local HP
component sales office.
NO MORE THAN TWO DOTS FIRED SIMULTANEOUSLY.
safety Information
Ordering Information
The ink used in the print cartridge includes Diethylene
Glycol, which may be harmful if swallowed, but is nontoxic. Test results regarding toxicity and other health considerations are available on request.
PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION
This product complies with the Consumer Safety Protection Code of the Federal Regulations as well as the EPA
New Chemical Product Regulations.
No special procedures are necessary in disposing of the
print cartridge.
2-7
92261 A
Black tnk Print Cartridge
51605B
5i60SR
51605G
Blue Ink Print Cartridge
Red Ink Print Cartridge
Green Ink Print Cartridge
51610A
Carriage Assembly with Flex Olrcuit
from the Hewlett-Packard ThinkJet
Printer
Flin-
a:e..
HEWLETT
PACKARD
CARRIAGE ASSEMBLY FOR
THE THERMAL INK*JET
PRINT CARTRIDGE
51610A
For use With HP print cartridges
#: 92261 A, 51605B, 51605R,516050
"
Features
• PROVIDES MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL
INTERCONNECT FOR THE THERMAL INK-JET
PRINT CARTRIDGE
• EASY PRINT CARTRIDGE REPLACEMENT
• PRECISION MECHANICAL INTERCONNECT
• SIMPLE, RELIABLE, PRESSURE ELECTRICAL
CONTACTS
• 8 INCH PRINT ZONE SCANNING WIDTHS,'
• BUILT~iN POSITION DETECTOR ARM
Description
Note: Print cartridge not incl,ided with 51610A
Tl:1e 51!l10A carriage assembly is.a totally self-contained.
unit for connecting the HP Thermal Ink-jet print cartridge
to a host printing device. It includes all the parts necessary
to provide both electrical and mechanical interconnect
and comes totally pre-assembled. The 51610A is the same
carriage assembly used inihe HP ThinkJet printer.
Insertion or removal·of the print cartridge from the carriage assembly requires no tools and takes only a few
seconds to complete. Insertion is done by simply dropping
the cartridge into the carriage assembly and then rotating'
a cammed head latch upward as shown in Figur,e 2.
If:I ~CONNECTOR
ID IliJ
_ ...."v.......
CUSliION (2)
~~-
WEAl!
SHOE
I
CARRIAGE FRAME
.. ~
FLEX CIRCUIT SUPPORT
Figure. 1. Exploded View
2-8
13X. 1.310.050)
TRACE WIDTH
1
29.5
11.160)
rl~~iO)1
- - -n
8-12
591
(2.325)
SURFACE
FINISH
rnm,,,~,"J~-U
CARRIAGE ROD
06342 +0 000
-0,005 DIA
+0.0000)
( 02497 -00002
.
STRAIGHTNESS 0.076 (0.003)
NOZZLE PLATE
DETAIL
[3J
DIMENSIONS ARE IN MM (INCHES).
@]
PROVIDES PRIMARY MOUNTING SURFACE. MATERIAL SHOULD BE 303 STAINLESS STeEL WITH CLEAR
PASSIVATION FINISH. NO LUBRICATION IS NECESSARY OR RECOMMENDED.
o
NOTED PARTS ARE NOT INCLUDED IN CARRIAGE ASSEMBLY, BUT ARE SHOWN TO ILLUSTRATE
APPLICATION.
m
MATERIAL IS NYLON 6/6 BLENDED WITH GLASS FIBER (30 %), TFE (13 %) AND SILICONE (2
%J.
@] 6~~~~D:~OCU~~R~~~~~~:;~~~TA~CTRH~S~::~N;HzgEN!GAINST THE PRINTER RAIL.
I!J
:~~61~i~~~~~~; REFERENCE POINT. MATERIAL IS ACETAL FILLED WITH 20 % TFE, lNP # FULTON
[2J ge~~A;ri :tt~E~~~~~~~~~DO~I~~C3KOE~:~ROINCHES MINIMUM HARD GOLD (KNOOP 130 MINIMUM
Figure 2. Outline Drawing With Printer Interface.
2-9
Electrical connection to the host printer may be made with
a standard printed circuit board connector, Amp
#1-520315-3.
A flexible printed circuit provides electrical connection to
both the print cartridge and the host printer without the
need for additional connectors. This flex circuit also allows
the print cartridge to be scanned across print zone widths
of up to 8 inches.
A home position detector arm on the carriage assembly
may be used to detect when the carriage assembly passes
one or more detector locations on the printer. This may be
done by passing the detector arm through an interruptable
type optical sensor. Suggested parts: Optek #K-8150,
Kodenshi #SG-HP01.
A specially designed pressure interconnect system provides
reliable electrical contact to the print cartridge over a wide
range 'of environmental conditions while minimizing any
damage to the print cartridge contact pads. Electrical
contact is enhanced by using a special dimpling technique
on the flex circuit. This provides a greater degree of
insensitivity to paper dust and ink contamination. It also
makes the contact area easy to clean if contaminants
become excessive (see Maintenance).
For continuous sensing arid control of carriage motion,
HP offers an extensive line of rotary and linear motion
sensing and control components. Contact your local
Hewlett-Packard Component Sales Representative for more
information. '
Design Considerations
Maintenance
The carriage assembly is intended to be mounted on a
carriage rod and moved with a drive cable as shown in
Figure 2. The direction of drop firing is controlled by the
angular position of the carriage assembly on the carriage
rod. A wear shoe (see Figure 2) provides the means for
maintaining this angular reference by riding on a low
friction printer rail in the host printer. Ifink firing is done in
a horizontal orientation, gravitational forces on the carriage
assembly c~n be utilized to maintain this mating.
No routine cleaning or lubrication is required for the
carriage assembly. If excessive contamination of the electrical contacts causes loss of print, gently wipe the contacts with a swab dampened with Iso Propyl Alcohol as
shown in the Print Cartridge Designer's Guide. Avoid
harsh scrubbing.
supporting Information
The,51610A-carriage assembly is intended to be used in
applications where the paper path is curved, such as with
a round printer platen as'shown in Figure 2. This,allows
the paper to be brought closer to the print cartridge
nozzles than with a flat paper path. Optimum print quality
is ,obtained by maintaining the recommended nozzle to
paper spacing of 0.65 to 1.15 mm. Larger spacings are
possible, but with some degradation in print ,quality (see
Thermal Ink-jet Print Cartridge Designer's Guide). To maintain the recommended spacing, it is important that the
printer designer maintains good dimensional control from
the printer/carriage mating surfaces to the paper surface,
and understands which tolerances are important in a given
application.
2-10
Title
HPPub#
Thermal Ink-jet Print Cartridge Data Sheet
5954-8399
Thermal Ink-jet Prjnt Cartridge
Designer's Guide
5954-8535
Hewlett-Packard Journal, May 1985
5953-8535
2-11
:j
','
Bar Code Contponents
•
•
•
•
•
SmartWand
Digital Wands
Decoder ICs
Optical' Sensor
Readers
---
----- -- ---- ------ -----------------
- - - - - - - ------------
Bar Code Products
particularly for the commercial/office environment
where control over label quality is high. For those
customers beginning to use barcode scanners or
addressing consumer applications, Digital Bar Code
Wands (HEDS-3XXX) provide a very cost
effective solution.
The HP SmartWand family (HBCR-8XXX) is the
latest addition to the wide range of bar code products
offered by Hewlett-Packard. The HP SmartWand is an
intelligent peripheral designed to easily add bar code
scanning capability to any host system which can
support a 5 V serial asynchronous interface. This device
is designed specifically for the OEM who would rather
not expend valuable resources developing software and
integrating system hardware to support bar codes. A
powerful microcomputer, bar code decoding software,
optical and escape sequence programmability, nonvolatile configuration memory, and a high performance
contact scanner, are all combined into a standard size
industrial wand package.
The decoder IC family now includes three product
lines. The most recent, HBCR-20l0, is a CMOS
version of the Multi-Purpose HBCR-2000. This
product is especially well suited for low power/portable
applications_ and like the HBCR-2000, can decode the
output from virtually any hand-held scanning device,
including hand-held lasers and other solid state noncontact scanners. The general purpose digital wand
decode IC, HBCR-1800, offers both full duplex serial
or parallel output and provides a powerful, cost
competitive decode solution. All the decode ICs are in
40 pin DIP packages.
The HP digital wand selection now includes four
product families to meet the performance and price
requirements of every customer application. The stateof-the-art Low Current Digital Bar Code Wands are
available in both a metal case for indoor/outdoor
rugged industrial applications (HBCS-6XXX) and a
polycarbonate case for commercial/office applications
(HBCS-5XXX). Through an advanced/optical sensor
and signal processing circuitry, these wands are able to
provide superior performance while drawing 3.5 rnA at
5 V. In addition to the very low power requirements,
the advanced design allows performance improvements
which include high ambient light rejection, including
direct sunlight; a wider range of resolution choices; and
a sensor which reads thermally printed bar codes. For
customers who do not require the state of the art
performance of the Low Current Digital Bar Code
Wands the Sapphire Tip Digital Bar Code Wands
(HBCS-2XXX) offer an attractive alternative,
Hewlett-Packard's Industrial Digital Slot Reader,
HBCS-7XXX, is a rugged scanner designed specifically
for reading bar codes printed on I.D. cards, badges,
heavy paper stock, or traveling forms. It features a large
slot width for handling even multiple laminated cards, a
wide scan speed range, and digital output that is
compatible with wand decoding software.
Completing the product mix is the High Resolution
Optical Reflective Sensor, HBCS-ll00. The HBCS1100 is a unique 0.19 mm resolution sensor packaged in
a standard TO-5 header. This product is a cost
effective, dependable solution.
3-2
Bar Code Wands
Package Outline Drawing
~
~~.!::---
Part No.
Description
Features
HBCR·8100 HP SmartWand
Programmable Contact
Bar Code Reader
Low Resolution
(0.33 mm)
HBCR-8300 HP SmartWand
Programmable Contact
Bar Code Reader
Medium Resolution
(0.19 mm)
HBCR-8500 HP SmartWand
Programmable Contact
Bar Code Reader
High Resolution
(0.13 mm)
~
~
~
~
~"'1t!.
~
~
~
HBCS-5000 Low Current Digital
Bar Code Wand
(with Switch)
Resolution 0.33 mm
HBCS-5100 Low Current Digital
Bar Code Wand
(without Switch)
Resolution 0.33 mm
HBCS-5200 Low Current Digital
Bar Code Wand
(with Switch)
Resol'ution 0.19 mm
·
··
·•
·
·
Automatic Recognition and Decode of
Standard Codes
5 V Serial Asynchronous Output
All Code Reading Parameters Optical/Escape
Sequence and Configurable
Configuration Stored in Non-Volitile Memory
Standard Size Epoxy Coated Metal Case
655 Nanometer Sensor on Low and Medium
Resolution
Direct Sunlight Operation
·
·· o
·
··•
Low Continuous Current Draw
(Less Than 5 mAl
High Ambient Light Rejection
to 45' Scan Angle
Push to Read Switch for Ultra Low Power
Consumption
Rugged Polycarbonate Case
Sealed Sapphire Tip
Full Line of Options Available
HBCS-5300 Low Current Digital
Bar Code Wand
(without Switch)
Resolution 0.19 mm
HBCS-5400 Low Current Digital
Bar Code Wand
(with Switch)
Resolution 0.13 mm
HBCS-5500 Low Current Digital
Bar Code Wand
(without Switch)
Resolution 0.13 mm
HBCS-6100 Low Current Digital
Bar Code Wand
Resolution 0.33 mm
HBCS·6300 Low Current Digital
Bar Code Wand
Resolution 0.19 mm
HBCS·6500 Low Current Digital
Bar Code Wand
Resolution 0.13 mm
3-3
·
·•• o
·•
Low Continuous Current Draw
(Less Than 5 mAl
High Ambient Light Rejection
to 45' Scan Angle
Sealed Sapphire Tip
Metal Case
Full Line of Options Available
Page
No.
3-6
3-13
Bar Code Wands (Cont.)
Package Outline Drawing
~
~
~
Part No.
Description
Features
HBCS-2200 Sapphire Tip
Digital Bar Code Wand
(with Switch)
Resolution 0.19 mm
HBCS-2300 Sapphire Tip
Digital Bar Code Wand
(without Switch)
Resolution 0.19 mm
HBCS-2400 Sapphire Tip
Digital Bar Code Wand
(with Switch)
Resolution 0.19 mm
~
HBCS-2500 Sapphire Tip .
Digital Bar Code Wand
(without Switch)
Resolution 0.13 mm
~
HEDS-3000 Digital Bar Code Wand
(with Switch)
Resolution 0.3 mm
~
HEDS-3050 Digital Bar Code Wand
(Shielded)
Resolution 0.3 mm
Page
No.
··•
··•
·
Digital Output
0-45 0 Scan Angle
Replaceable Sapphire Tip
Internal Shielding
Push-to-Read Switch Available for Low Power
Applications
Rugged Polycarbonate Case
Full Line of Options Available
3-19
··
··
·•
Digital Output
0-30 0 Scan Angle
Replaceable Tip
Internal Shielding Available for Improved
Electrical Noise Rejection
Push-to-Read Switch Available for Low Power
Applications
Full Line of Options
3-25
Component Level Bar Code Readers
Package Outline Drawing
Part No.
Description
Features
HBCR-1800 Bar Code
Decoder IC
~::::::::::::::::::: :I
HBCR-2000 Multi-Purpose
Decoder IC
"
HBCR-2010 CMOS Multi:Purpose
Decoder IC
Package outline drawings not drawn to scale.
3-4
··
··
·
·•
·•
•
·
··
··
Page
No.
Industry $tandard Bar Codes
Automatic Code Recognition
Full Duplex Serial or Parallel ASCII Output
Single 5 Volt Supply
3-31
Accepts Inputs from All Hand-Held
Scanners, Including Lasers
Largest Selection of Codes Available
Automatic Code Recognition
Serial ASCII Output
Standard 40 Pin Package
3-37
CMOS Low Power Design
Accepts Inputs from All Hand-Held
. Scanners, Including Lasers
Largest Selection of Codes Available
Automatic Code Recognition
Serial ASCII Output
Standard 40 Pin Package
3-43
Component Level Bar Code Readers (Cont.)
Package Outline Drawing
f
01
1
[[8
f
01
[[8
:1
Part No.
Description
Features
HBCS-7000 Industrial Digital
Slot Reader,
Visible Red,
Resolution 0.19 mm
HBCS-7001 Optics/Electronics
Module, Visible Red,
Resolution 0.19 mm
0
0
0
0
0
125 Mil Slot Width
Epoxy Finshed Metal Housing
Wide Scan Speed Range
Tamper Proof Design
Digital Output
Page
No.
3-44
HBCS-7100 Industrial Digital
Slot Reader,
Infra-Red
Resolution 0.19 mm
HBCS-7101 Optics/Electronics
Module, Infra-Red,
Resolution 0.19 mm
Optical Reflective Sensors
Package Outline Drawing
~
Part No.
Description
Features
HBCS-1100 High Resolution
Optical Reflective
Sensor
0
•
0
0
0
0.19 mm spot size
Fully Specified and Guaranteed for
Assured Perfomance
Visible Light Source can Detect Most Colors
Photo IC Detector Optimizes Speed and
Response
Standard To-5 Header
Page
No.
3-50
Bar Coder Readers
Package Outline Orawlng
Part No.
Description
~
16800A
Programmable
Bar Code
Reader
~!~U~
Features
~
~
.'
.~~
'.~~
&
0
0
~~
.?JY
0
0
0
0
16801A
Non-Programmable
Bar Code
Reader
~
3-5
Flexible Configuration
All Standard Industrial and Commercial Bar
Codes Supported
Computer Control and Simple Operator
Feedback (16800A only)
Internal Power Supply
Meet UL, CSA, FCC Class B, VDE Level B
Low Current Digital Bar Code Wand Included
Page
'No.
3-56
F/i;-
HEWLETT
~~ PACKARD
HP smartWand
programmable Contact
Bar Code Reader
HBCR'S300
General purpose
HBCR·S500
High Resolution
HBCR-8100
low ReSolution
Description
prevent dust, dirt, and liquid contaminants from degrading
or destroying components inside the wand.
The HP SmartWand is an intelligent peripheral designed to
easily add bar code scanning capability to any host system
which can support a 5 V serial asynchronous interface. A
powerful microcomputer, bar code decoding software, optical and escape sequence programmability, non-volatile
configuration memory, and a high performance contact
scanner, are all combined into a standard size industrial
wand package. This integrated system transmits decoded
bar code data in a serial ASCII format, effectively freeing
the host system processor from the decoding task. The
optics and low power electronics allow operation in a wide
range of environments including direct sunlight, intense
aritificial light, and' in ; electromagnetic fields caused by
motors or radio frequency transmitters.
The HP SmartWand automatically recognizes and decodes
standard bar code symbologies. Code type identification,
label length checking, and check character verification
options when enabled ensure a high level of data integrity.
A power-on memory self test option ensures the decoder
is operating properly. Various code selections, interface
protocols, and other control options, can be selected and
automatically stored in non-volatile memory by either manually scanning a special bar code menu or transmitting
escape sequences from the host system.
In addition, the HP SmartWand has the ability to convert
any of the standard bar code symbologies to Code 39 and
emulate the undecoded output of a digital wand. This
allows an existing decode system, which can decode Code
39, to inClude symbologies not previously available.
The epoxy coated, textured metal case has O-ring seals at
each end, a labyrinth strain relief for the cord, and a
replaceable sealed sapphire tip. These design features
Block Diagram
3-6
Contact Scanner performance
SUMMARY
synthetic sapphire ball which contacts the labels is self
cleaning and nearly impervious to wear: The low weight
and compact shape allows ease of use and helps to
reduce worker fatigue. The rugged industrial design allows
use in both indoor and outdoor environments.
The HP SmartWand is a high performance contact bar
code reader designed to scan and decode bar code labels
located on uniform surfaces, The optics in the wand are
designed to operate with the tip touching the bar code
labels while scanning, The scanner is capable of reading
through plastic laminates up to 0,25 mm (0,010") thick. The
TYPICAL WAND CHARACTERISTICS
HBCR-8300
Ge,neral Purpose
Parameter
HBCR-asoo
HighR~solution
HBCR-8100
Low Resolution
0.13 mm (0.005 in,)
0.33 mm (0,013 in,)
Wavelength
655 nQl; (visible red)
820 nm (infrared)
655 nm (visible red)
Scan Speed
3-50 in.lsec;
3-50 in.!sec.
3-50 in.lsec.
0° - 40'
0° - 40'
0° ,. 40°
45%
45%
45%
No'minal Narrow Element Width
Tilt Angle
Minimum Bar/Space Contrast
at Specified Wavelength
ENVIRONMENTAL PERFORMANCE
Parameter
Conditions
Operating Temperature
-20' to +70°C (_4' to 158'F)
Storage Temperature
-40' to +70°C (-40° to +158'F)
Humidity
5% to 95% (non-condensing)
Operating Altitude
Sea Level to 4,600 metres (15,000 feet)
Storage Altitude
Sea Level to 15,300 metres (50.000 teet)
Vibration
Random: 5-500 Hz, 3.41 g rms. 10 minutes per axis
Swept Sine: 55-500 Hz, @ 3 g. 1 minute/octave, 10 minutes each resonance
Shock
500 g's at 1 millisecond, 18 shocks (3 each, 6 surfaces)
Ambient Light
o to 100kLux (Direct sunlight)
Rain
MIL-STD-810. Method 506, Procedure II. Drip
Dust
MIL-STD-810, Method 510, Blowing Dust
Mechanical Specifications
NOTE: All DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETAES AND (INCHES,.
3-7
programmable configuration
configuration menu or by sendillg the appropriate escape
sequence from the host system. The wand can be reconfigured at any time to accommodate changing application
requirements. Configuration labels and the escape sequences with detailed instructions on how to use each of
them are printed in the HP SmartWand Users Manual (Part
# HBCR-8997). Configuration labels (Part # HBCR-8998)
can also be purchased separat€)ly·as an accessory.
The HP SmartWand can be configured by scanning a
series of special menu labels or by transmitting escape
sequences from the host system to the wand. This allows
decoding options and interface protocols to be tailored to
a specific application. The configuration is stored in nonvolatile memory and cannot be changed by removing
power from the wand or by scanning standard bar code
labels. The configuration information can be transmitted
to the host system by scanning a bar code label in the
An example configuration display screen with the default
settings is shown.
CONFIGURATION DISPLAY SCREEN
CONFIGURATION DISPLAY SCREEN
READ
CHECK CHAR
CODE
verlt
xmlt
(yes)
Code 39
(yes)
(no)
(yes)
Int. 2/5
(yes)
(no)
UPCIEAN
(yes)
yes
yes
(yes)
Codabar
no
no
Code 128
(yes)
yes
no
Code 11
(yes)
(1)
yes
MSI Code
(yes)
yes
yes
version 12.X
MESSAGE COMPONENTS (control character =
header:( )
trailer: (11M i\J)
reader address:( )
- - - SERIAL PORT baud rate:(9600)
parity: (0'5)
stop bits:(1}
(20ms)delay:(off)
LENGTH
min
max
(1)
(32)
(4)
(32)
fixed
(1)
(32)
(1)
(32)
(1)
(32)
(1)
(32)
A+
letter)
CODE ID
xmll:(off)
. (a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(c) Hewlett Packard 1986
OTHER CONFIG. SETTINGS
(variable length)
(start/stop transmitted)
- - - -- -- -
--
----
no-read: ( )
message ready:( 1\ F)
message not ready:( 1\ U)
PACING - - - - - - MISCELLANEOUS XON/OFF protocol:(off)
no-read recognition:(off)
Single Read Mode:(off)
scanner: (enabled)
- - - - --
I
-
Note: This is a partial listing of configurable parameters. Please refer to the HP SmartWand
Users Manual (Part # HBCR-8997) for a complete listing.
Bar Code Decoding
performance
BAR CODE SYMBOLOGIES SUPPORTED
The HP SmartWandautomatically recognizes and decodes
Code 39 (3 of 9 Code). Interleaved 2 of 5, Universal
Product Code (UPC). European Article Numbering Code
(EAN), Japanese Article Numbering Code (JAN). Codabar
(NW7 Code), Code 128, MSI Code, and Code 11. Minimum
and maximum length values can be configured for each
code (except UPC/EAN/JAN) and all codes can be scanned
bi-directionally. All code types and their decoding format
options can be enabled or disabled using either the optical
configuration menu or escape sequences.
UPC-E, EAN-8, EAN-13, JAN-8 and JAN-13 are fixed length
numeric only bar codes that have automatic check character verification and transmission. Decoding can be restricted to UPC-A and UPC-E. UPC-E labels can be expanded into the UPC-A format upon transmission.Supplemental encodations can be enabled in 2 digit, 5 digit, or
both 2 and 5 digit lengths. Labels. with supplemental
encodations, or "add-on's" must be scanned from left to
right in'one stroke so that the supplementals are scanned
after the main label. When automatic recognition of supplemental encodations is enabled, labels with or without
add-on's are decoded.
Codabar, a numeric bar code with special characters, can
have a message lengths up to a maximum of 32 characters.
The HP SmartWand can be configured to transmit or
suppress the data contained in the start and stop characters.
Code 39, an alphanumeric bar code, can have message
lengths up to a maximum of 32 characters. An optional
check character can be used with these codes and the HP
SmartWand can be configured to verify this character.
Transmission of the check character is optional. Extended
Code 39 can be enabled as the full ASCII conversion
option for Code 39.
Code 128, a compact full ASCII bar code, can have message lengths up to a maximum of 31 characters in codes A
and B, and 62 characters in code C: Check character
verification is automatic and check character transmission
is always suppressed.
Interleaved 2 of 5, a compact numeric only bar code, can
be read with variable message lengths from 4 to 32 characters in even number increments. It can also be read with
fixed message length exactly 2 characters long, with fixed
message lengths that are exactly 6 or exactly 14 characters
long, or with a fixed message length from 4 to 32 characters
in even number increments. Check character verification
and transmission are optional.
Code 11, a numeric high density code, can have message
lengths up to 32 characters. Verification of one or two
check characters must be enabled, and the check character(s) are always transmitted.
MSI Code, a continuous numeric only code, can have
message lengths up to 32 characters. The check digit, a
modulo 10 Checksum, is always verified and transmitted.
Standard UPC, EANand JAN bar codes including UPC-A,
3-8
DECODING PARAMETERS
Other default decoding parameters:
Extended Code 39 (full ASCII conversion) is disabled.
Interleaved 2 of 5 message length is variable.
UPC/EAN/JAN supplemental digits are disabled.
Codabar stop/start characters are transmitted.
Parentheses indicate the parameter is optically configurable. Brackets indicate the parameter is escape sequence
configurable. Default settings are shown.
"Code
'Status
Code
Check Character
Verification
Transmit
Message Length
Minimum
Maximum
C'ode 1.0. Cha,racter
Transmit [(disabled)]
Code 39
[(enabled)J
[(disabled)]
[(yes)]
(1)
(32)
{(a)]
Interleaved 2 of 5
[(enabled)]
.[(disabled)]
[(yes)]
[(4)]
[(32)]
[(b)]
UPC/EAN/JAN
{(enabled»)
yes
yes
Codabar
[(enabled)]
no
no
(32)
[«:i)]
[(e)J
fixed
[(c))
(1)
Code 128
[(enabled) I
yes
no
(1 )
(32)
Code 11
[(enabled)]
[(1 )J
yes
(1)
(32)
[(f))
MSI Code
[(enabled)J
yes
yes
(1)
(32)
[(g)J
MESSAGE COMPONENTS
10 ASCII characters. The code identification character is a
single ASCII character which immediately precedes the
decoded data and is used to identify the bar code symbology that was decoded.' The no-read message can be up to
10 ASCII characters and can be transmitted in place of
decoded data if a bar code label is scanned and a decode
does not occur.
There are three optical or escape sequence configurable
message components that can be defined by the user and
added to the decoded data transmitted by the HP SmartWand. The message components are: header, trailer, and
code identification character. A no-read message option is
also available.
The header, which precedes the decoded data, and the
trailer, which follows the decoded data, can contain up to
The default settings for the message components are
shown,
Message Parameter
Conflgurable Options
Default Setting
Header:
Trailer:
No Read Message:
Code Identification Character:
01010 ASCII characters
o Characters (empty buffer)
o to 10 ASCII characters
o to 10 ASCII characters
1 ASCII character
CRLF
o Characters (empty buffer)
See "Decoding Parameters" table
Electricallnterface
PIN DIAGRAM
Wire
Pln# Color
Function
1
-
2
White
TxD Transmitted Data (from the wand)
3
Green
RxD Received Data (to the wand)
4
-
5
-
6
-
7
Black
o
;;
4
3
2
N/C
o
o
o
N/C
o
7
o8
o
9
N/C
N/C
MALE 9 PIN SUBMINIATURE 0 CONNECTOR
Ground
8
-
N/C
9
Red
Vee
Shell
-
Shield
3-9
Pin Description
PIN2
TxD - This is the transmitted serial data line from the HP
SmartWand. It obeys RS232. data formats, but uses.zero to
five volt logic level swings. It can be described as TTL level
RS232. This will drive TTL, LSTTL, and CMOS inputs. The
output circuit is shown:
HP SMART WAND
I----~---------I
I
1
I
I
I
m~
I
TxD Output Specifications
TxD
(Vee" 5 Yolts DC@TA=25°C)
VOH
2.00 VDC @ 740 pA
3.00 VDC @ 410 pA
4.00 VOC @ 95 pA
I
I
I
(VOH '" Vec-0.7(3100 'IOH)]
I
I":"
0.30 VOC @ 20 mA
I
I
I
7')~",~1'~W!"':':~~~"lJlP
t
illll:-==134==(5.31===u::g=::c
L
,)~~'.>11?'~:~~ I ! ~C::I===~
T
,M."
18
;J~
---c
i2~
19 (0.8)
CDJ)o==IlIIh~..dJ~
/.--260110)
·1·
200 18)
NOTE: DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETRESAND (INCHES).
3~19
..
__.. _.... _._----_._-------_._--_._-_._..._ - - - _ .._---_._.-_... -
....
_-_._ - .__. _ - - - - - - ....
Applications
The digital bar code wand is a highly effective alternative to
keyboard data entry. Bar code scanning is faster and more
accurate than key entry and provides far greater throughput.
In addition, bar code scanning typically has a higher first read
rate and greater data accuracy than optical character recognition. When compared to magnetic stripe enCOding, bar
code offers significant adv::.ntages in flexibility of media,
symbol placement and immunity to electromagnetic fields.
Hewlett-Packard's sapphire tip wands are designed for use in
applications where dirt and debris are a common occurrence
and could cause clogging in a conventional open-tip wand. In
addition, the sapphire ball provides superior wear resistance and improves scanning ease. The rugged yet lightweight polycarbonate case makes these wands ideal for use
in commercial or light industrial applications.
Applications include remote data collection, work-in-process
tracking, point-of-sale data entry, inventory control, library
circulation control, medical records tracking, and repair/
service work.
Recommended Operating Conditions
Parameter
Symbol
Nominal Narrow Element Width
HBCS-2200/2300
H BCS-2400/2500
Min.
Max.
Units
0.19 (0.0075)
mm (in)
0.13 (0.005)
mmlin.l
Scan Velocity
VSCAN
7.6 (3)
Contrast
Rw-Rs
45
Supply Voltage
Vs
Temperature
TA
Notes
127 15m
cm/sec (in/sec)
%
1
4.5
5.5
Volts
2
-20
+65
°C
Tilt Angle
(See Figure 8)
Orientation
(See Figure 1)
3
Noles:
1. Contrast is defined as Rw-Rs, where Rw is the reflectance of the white spaces and Rs is the reflectance of the black bars. measured at the emitter
wavelength 1700 nm or 820 nml. Contrast is related to print contrast signallPCS) by PCS = IRw-Rs)/Rw or Rw-Rs = PCS·Rw.
2. Power supply ripple and noise should be less than 100 mV peak to peak.
3. Performance in sunlight will vary depending on shading at wand tip.
Absolute Maximum Ratings
Parameter
Symbol
Min.
Max.
Units
Storage Temperature
Ts
-40
+75
°C
+65
°C
Operating Temperature
TA
-20
Supply Voltage
HBCS-2200/2300
Vs
-0.5
+6.00
V
HBCS-2400/2500
Vs
-0.5
+5.75
V
200
mW
-0.5
+20
V
Output Transistor Power
PT
Output Collector Voltage
Vo
3-20
Notes
Electrical operation
The HBCS-2XXX family of digital bar code wands consists
of a precision optical sensor, an analog amplifier, a digitizing circuit, and an output transistor. These elements provide
a TTL compatible output from a single 4.5V to 5.5V power
supply. The open collector transistor requires an external
pull-up resistor for proper operation.
Grounding the shield will provide a substantial improvement
in EMIIESD immunity in AC powered systems. However, it
is essential that the shield be properly terminated even
when EMI and ESD are not a concern, otherwise the shield
will act as an antenna, injecting electrical noise into the
wand circuitry.
A non-reflecting black bar results in a logic high (1) level
output, while a reflecting white space will cause a logic low
(0) level output. The initial or "wake-up" state will be indeterminate. However, after a short period (typically less than
1 second), the wand will assume a logic low state if no bar
code is scanned. This feature insures that the first bar will
not be missed in a normal scan.
The HBCS-2200/2400 wands incorporate a push-to-read
switch which is used to energize the LED emitter and electronic circuitry. When the switch is initially depressed,
contact bounce may cause a series of random pulses to
appear at the output (Vol. This pulse train will typically settle
to a final value within 5 ms.
The recommended logic interface for the wands is shown in
Figure 9. This interconnection provides the maximum ESD
protection for both the wand and the user's electronics.
The wands provide a case, cable, and connector shield
which must be terminated to logic ground or, preferably, to
both logic ground and earth ground. The shield is connected to the metal housing of the 5 pin DIN connector.
Electrical Characteristics
(Vs = 4.5V to 5.5V, TA = 25° C, RL = 1KO to 10KO, unless otherwise noted)
Parameter
Supply Current
Symbol
Is
High Level Output Current
IOH
Low Level Output Voltage
VOL
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Units
42
50
mA
Vs=5.0V
400
J,lA
VOH=2.4V
Conditions
0.4
V
IOL= 16 mA
Output Rise Time
tr
3.4
20
J,lS
Output Fall Time
10%-90%
Transition
RL=1K
Notes
4
If
1.2
20
J,lS
Switch Bounce
HBCS-22()0/2400
Isb
0.5
5.0
ms
5
Electrostatic Discharge Immunity
ESD
25
kV
6
Notes:
4. Push-to-read switch (if applicable) is depressed.
S. Switch bounce causes a series of sub-millisecond pulses to appear at the output (Vol.
6. Shield must be properly terminated (see Figure 9). The human body is modeled by discharging a 300 pF capacitor through a SOO
resistor. No damage to the wand will occur at the specified discharge level.
Block Diagram
HBCS-2300/2500
(without Switch)
HBCS-2200/2400
(with Switch)
3-21
n
Scanning performance
IVs
= 5.0 V, RL = 1.0 to 10 K!l, TA = 25° C, Scan Velocity = 50 cm/sec)
Symbol
Parameter
Decodability Index
01
Average Width Error
INarrow Bars)
OSbn
Average Width Error
IWide Bars)
OSbw
Average Width Error
INarrow Spaces)
Average Width Error
(Wide Spaces)
Deviation from Average
(InternaiJ
Deviation from Average
(First Bar)
OSsn
HBCS·
Typ.
Max.
Units
2200/2300
9
22
%
2400/2500
12
22
%
2200/2300
0.005
10.00021
mm
lin,)
2400/2500
0.024
(0.0009)
mm
lin,)
2200/2300
0.003
10.0001)
mm
lin.)
2400/2500
0.023
10.009)
mm
lin.!
2200/2300
-0.Q11
1-0.0004)
0.027
1-0.Q1 06)
mm
lin,)
mm
lin.)
-0.002
1-0.0001)
-0.026
i-0.0010)
mm
lin,)
mm
lin.)
2400/2500
2200/2300
OSsw
2400/2500
2200/2300
0.Q18
10.0007)
0.048
(0.0019)
mm
lin.)
2400/2500
0.019
(0.0007)
0.052
(0.00201
mm
lin,)
2200/2300
0,090
(0.0035)
0.152
(0.0060)
mm
lin.i
2400/2500
0.060
(0.0024)
0.100
(0.0039)
mm
On.)
de
db1
Condition
Fig.
Note
1,2,3
4,7,9
7,8
1,2,9
7
1,2,5
6,9
7
Tilt Angle 0° to 40°
Preferred Orientation
Standard Test Tag
Notes:
7. The test tag for the HBCS·2200/2300 Wands IFigure 2al consists of black bars and white spaces with a narrow element width of 0.19 mm
10.0075 in.1 and a wide element width of 0.42 mm 10.0165 in.l. This equates to a wide·to-narrow ratio of 2.2:1. A margin, or white reflecting
area, of at least 5 mm in width precedes the first bar.
The test tag for the HBCS-2400/2500 wands IFigure 2bl consists of black bars with a narrow element width of 0.13 mm 10.005 in.1 and
wide element width of 0.43 mm 10.017 in.l, giving a ratio of 3.4:1. The white spaces have a narrow element width of 0.28 mm 10.011 in.1 and
wide element width of 0.64 mm 10.025 in.1 yielding a ratio of 2.3:1. Both tags are photographically reproduced on diffuse reflecting paper
with a PCS greater than 90%.
8. Decodability index is a measure of the errors produced by the wand when scanning a standard test symbol at a constant velocity. It is
expressed as a percentage of the narrow element width.
For a more detailed discussion of the terms used here, see Hewlett-Packard Application Note 1013 "Elements of a Bar Code System"
Ipublication number 5953-93871.
HBCS·22/2400
H BCS·23/2500
a, HBCS·22/2300 Test Tag
b, HCBS·24/2500 Test Tag
Figure 2. Standard Test Tag Formats
(Test Tags Enlarged to Show Detail)
Figure 1, Preferred Wand Orientation
3·22
Typical Performance Curves
IVs = 5 V, RL = 1 Kil, TA = 25° C, Tilt = 15°, VSCAN = 50 cm/sec unless otherwise specified)
25
'"
1
X
25
'"
20
w
a
a
;:;
>f-
15
<>:
10
:::;
iii
a
a
u
20
1
X
w
;:;
-- --
........
w
a
....
1
-
-
HBCS-2200/2300
15
>f-
- --"
HBCS-2400/2500
:::;
iii
<>:
a
10
0
u
w
1--
a
1
Ci
Ci
VSCAN - SCAN VELOCITY - em/sec
Vs - SUPPLY VOLTAGE - VOLTS
Figure 3. Decodabllity Index vs. Supply Voltage.
Figure 4. Decodabllity Index vs. Scan Velocity.
0.140
0.140
0.120
'"0a::
0:::
o
0.120
a::
a::
a::
w 0.100
J:
f-
a
0.080
~
ei
>
<>:
ffi
--
--.
HBCS-2200/2300
J:
f-
db,
~ 0.080
g
<>: 0.060
0.060
:;;
0
~ 0.040
'"'0"
;:: 0.020
<>:
:;
w
0.100
a
-- -_.
-
---
...
o
a::
--- ---
I
~ 0.040
db,-
HBCS-2400f2500 -
ALL WANDS-;:;:::-
'o"
~
':;',;;-::
:;
o
Vs - SUPPLY VOLTAGE - VOLTS
(O.~8~
~
~
0
15
u
10
w
a
1
40
60
80
100
120
em/sec
,--.,----,---,--,---,
1.5
u (0.06)
;:;
a
<>:
20
u;
20
1;)
a
o
Figure 6. Deviation from Average Width Error
vs. Scan Velocity.
25
>f-
de
ALL JANOS
VSCAN - SCAN VELOCITY -
Figure 5. Deviation f.rom Average Width Error
vs. Supply Voltage.
:::;
iii
.....
0.020
db,
-
w
a
1
"
HBCS-2400i2500
db,
:;;
a
'"
"
HBCS-2200/2300
-----
I
I
E
E
-_.-
HBCS-24001250Q
1
fJ:
'"W
----
I
HBCS-2200/2300
1.0
(0.04)
J:
a
z
0.5
<>: (0.02)
s:
Ci
o
-40
-20
20
40
60
80
10
e-
TA - TEMPERATURE -"C
20
30
40
TI LT ANGLE - DEGREES
Figure 8. Wand Height vs. Tilt Angle.
Figure 7. Decodability Index vs. Temperature.
3-23
50
Selection Guide
NOMINAL
NARROW
ELEMENT
WIOTH?
NOTES:
IF IT IS NECESSARY TO READ BAR CODE PRINTED IN COLORS OTHER THAN BLACK AND WHITE IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT EITHER THE
HBCS-2200 DR HBCS-2300 WANDS BE SELECTED.
IF IT IS NECESSARY TO READ SECURITY "BLACK-ON-BLACK" BAR CODE (CARBON-BASED BLACK AND WHITE BAR CODE WITH A BLACK
OVERLAY). IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT EITHER THE HBCS-2400 OR THE HBCS-2500 WANDS BE SELECTED.
--------, r -
SHIELD
-
-
-
-
-
I
-
Mechanical Considerations
--,
)
I
Vs (1)
I
The wands include a standard 5 pin. 240 0 DIN connector.
The detailed specifications and pin-outs are shown in Figure
10. Mating connectors are available from RYE Industries and
SWITCHCRAFT in both 5 pin and 6 pin configurations.
These connecors are listed below.
WAND
SYSTEM INTERFACE
®TRANSZORB IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF GENERAL
SEMICONDUCTOR INDUSTRIES. TEMPE AZ.
Figure 9. Recommended Logic Inlerface (When earth ground Is
nol available, connecl shield 10 logic ground, as shown by dolled
line).
Connector
Configuration
RYE MAB-5
5Pin
SWITCH CRAFT 61 GA5F
5 Pin
SWITCH CRAFT 61 HA5F
5 Pin
RYE MAB-6
6Pin
SWITCHCRAFT 61GA6F
6Pin
Maintenance Considerations
There are no user serviceable parts inside the wand. The tip
is designed to be easily replaceable. and if damaged it should
be replaced. Before unscrewing the tip. disconnect the wand
from the system power source. The part number for the wand
tip is HBCS-2999. The tip can be ordered from any HewlettPackard franchised distributor.
NOTES:
1. DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETRES AND (INCHES).
WIRE COLOR
RED
Vo OUTPUT
BLACK
GROUND
N/A
N/C
N/A
CASE
Vs SUPPLY VOLTAGE
WHITE
Figure 11. Sapphire Tip.
optional Features
N/C
SHIELD (MUST BE
CONNECTED)
For options such as special cords. connectors or labels. contact your nearest Hewlett-Packard sales office or franchised
Hewlett-Packard distributor.
Figure 10. Connector Specifications.
3-24
DIGITAL
BAR CODE WAND
HEDS-30DO
HEDS-3D50
Features
• 0.3 mm RESOLUTION
Enhances the Readability of dot matrix printed
bar codes
• DIGITAL OUTPUT
Open Collector Output Compatible
with TTL and CMOS
• PUSH-TO-READ SWITCH (HEDS-3000)
Minimizes Power in Battery
Operated Systems
• SINGLE 5V SUPPLY OPERATION
• ATTRACTIVE, HUMAN ENGINEERED CASE
• DURABLE LOW FRICTION TIP
• SOLID STATE RELIABILITY
Uses LED and IC Technology
o SHIELDED CASE AND CABLE (HEDS-3050)
Maximizes EMI/ESD Immunity in AC
Powered Systems
electromagnetic interference, electrostatic discharge,
and ground loops in AC powered systems. Both wands
feature a strain relieved 104 cm (41 in.) cord with a ninepin subminiature D-style connector.
Description
The HEDS-3000 and HEDS-3050 Digital Bar Code Wands
are hand held scanners designed to read all common bar
code formats that have the narrowest bars printed with a
nominal width of 0.3 mm (0.012 in.). The wands contain an
optical sensor with a 700 nm visible light source, photo IC
detector, and precision aspheric optics. Internal signal
conditioning circuitry converts the optical information
into a logic level pulse width representation of the bars
and spaces.
The HEDS-3000 comes equipped with a push-to-read
switch which is used to activate the electronics in battery
powered applications requiring lowest power consumption. The HEDS-3050 does not have a switch, and features
internal metal shielding that maximizes immunity to
Applications
The Digital Bar Code Wand is an effective alternative to
the keyboard when used to collect information in selfcontained blocks. Bar code scanning is faster than key
entry and also more accurate since most codes have
check-sums built-in to prevent incorrect reads from being
entered.
Applications include remote data collection, ticket
identification systems, security checkpoint verification,
file folder tracking, inventory control, identifying assemblies in service, repair, and manufacturing environments,
and programming appliances, intelligent instruments and
personal computers.
Wand Dimensions
HEDS-3000
PUSIi-TQ.oREAO
23 (O.9)~
Li2 paper with a print contrast signal greater than 0.9.
8. The print contrast signal (PCS) is defined as: PCS = (Rw - Rb)
IRw, where Rw is the reflectance at 700 nm from the white
spaces, and Rb is the reflectance al 700 nm for the bars.
9. 1.0 in. = 2S.4 mm, 1 mm = 0.0394 in.
10. The Wand is in the preferred orientation when the surface of
the label is parallel to the height dimension of the bar code.
3-27
- - - _ ...
__
._--..
-
...-
------------------------------------
OPERATION CONSIDERATIONS
The Wand resolution is specified in terms of a bar and
space Width Error, WE. The width error is defined as the
difference between the calculated bar (space) width, B,
(S), and the optically measured bar (space) widths, b (s).
When a constant scan velocity is used, the width error can
be calculated from the following.
B = tb' Vscan
S '" ts' Vscan
~b = B - b
~s = S - s
orientation (Figure 1), tilted at an angle of 10° to 20°, and
the Wand tip is in contact with the tag. The Wand height,
when held normal to the tag, is measured from the tip's
aperture, and when it is tilted it is measured from the tip's
surface closest to the tag. The Width Error is specified for
the preferred orientation, and using a Standard Test Tag
consisting of black bars and white spaces. Figure 2
illustrates the random two level bar code tag. The
Standard Test Tag is photographed on Kodagraph
Transtar TC5® paper with a nominal module. width of
0.3 mm (0.012 in.) and a Print Contrast Signal (PCS) of
greater than 90%.
Where
~b, ~s= bar, space Width Error (mm)
b, s = optical bar, space width (mm)
B, S = calculated bar, space width (mm)
Vscan = scan velocity (mm/s)
tb, ts = wand pulse width output( s)
The magnitude of the width error is dependent upon the
width of the bar (space) preceeding the space (bar) being
measured. The Guaranteed Width Errors are specified as a
maximum for the margin to first bar transition, as well as,
maximums and minimums for the bar and space width
errors resulting from transitions internal to the body of the
bar code character. The Typical Width Error Performance
specifies all possible transitions in a two level code (e.g, 2
of 5). For example, the ~b2-1 Width Error specifies the
width error of a single bar module (0.3 mm) when
preceeded by a double space module (0.6 mm).
BAR WIDTH 0.3 mm (0.012 in.) BLACK & WHITE
RWHITE ~ 75%, pes;;t. 0.9 KODAGRAPH TRANST AR TC5® PAPER
Figure~.
The BarWidth Error ~b, typically has a positive polarity
which causes the calculated bar, B, to appear wider than
its printed counterpart. The typical negative polarity of the
Space Width Error ~s, causes the measured spaces to
appear narrower. The consistency of the polarity of the
bar and space Width Errors suggest decoding schemes
which average the measured bars and measured spaces
within a character. These techniques will produce a higher
percentage of good reads.
Standard Test Tag Format.
®TRANSZORB IS A REGISTERED
TRADEMARK OF GENERAL
SEMICONDUCTOR INDUSTRIES.
r- - - - - - - - -,
PUSH~READ I
Vs (9)
: Te:: AZ.
- - - - 0 o-~~----<~~--~~~~~~~~--
+
4.7J.lf
I@TRANSZORB
I
P6KE 7.5C
I 13
EAC~oI21
GNDI71
The Wand will respond to a bar code with a nominal
module width of 0.3 mm when itis scanned at tilt angles
between 0° and 30°. The optimum performance will be
obtained when the Wand is held in the preferred
- - - - - - ' L _________ ~
HEDS-300e
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE
SUPPRESSION INTERI=ACE
SYSTEM INTERFACE
Figure 3a, Recommended Logic Interface for HI:OS-3000
®TRANSZORB IS A REGISTERED
TRADEMARK OF GENERAL
INDUSTRIES.
r- - - - - - -: - -~ ~i~~CEO~~UCTOR
SHIELD
I
+
4.7pF
Vs (9)
I-I!;V
I@TRANSlORB
I P6KE 7.5e
I
13
EAC~~ 121
GND(7)
L~J!,~~D_~ ___ _J
HEDS-3050
HEDS-3000
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE
SUPPRESSION INTERFACE
SYSTEM INTERFACE
HEDS-3050
Figure 3b. Recommended Logic Interface for HEDS-3050.
(When earth ground is not available. connect shield
to logic ground, as shown by dotted line)
Figure 1. Preferred Wand Orientation.
3-28
Typical Performance Curves (RL = 2.2kO)
0.15
0.15
0.10
0:
0
~ 1S~ B~R
"
...... .-
./
0.05 "b. INTERNAL BAR
WIDTH ERROR
0:
0:
W
:I:
PREFERRED
ORIENTATION
0.10 0;;0;;; 1:- 1ST LR
.....
HEIGHT" 0.1 mm
vscan'" 50 em/s
-
STANDARD TAG
0.05
(O.3mm)
Vs "" 5V
"
~
W
-0.15
~
w
0.10
~
V
r- f-'"
0.05
5°
1/
\
\
0.10
-
~
;:
-0,10
-0.15
- - -
-
o
1O
~
;:
PREFERRED ORIENTATION
TILT = 0°
--
IY
:::::"
r-r
vscan = 50 em/s
STANDARD TAG (0.3 mm)
Vs = 5V
TA "" 25°C
- - -
-0.15
I
a
I
--,....
0.05
i!'o
c-
0.05
! -0,05
w
;:
I
-0.10
f-I--
-0.15
I I
I I
o
p'REFkRRkD
vr i
I
I
I
I
i i
l:
b
I
1O
\ -0.05
-0.10
~
As, INTERNAL SPACE
WIDTH ERROR
PREFERRED ORIENTATION
TILT-a'
HEIGHT = 0.25 mm
STANDARD TAG (0.3 mm)
TA = 25°C
Vs '" 5V
I-- I-- -
TILT = 0°- -
I
-
;:
-
TA = 25°C -
I
-
w
I
-0.15
o
0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
so
vseao - SCAN VELOCITY - em/s
b, 5 - BAR. £PACE WIDTH - mm
Figure 8. Width Error vs. Bar Width.
WIDTH ERROR
ffi
O'R'E~TA~'ON I
T
.J.b, INTERNAL BAR
I--
0:
HEIGHT = 0.25 rom
Yscan= 50 emfs
5
-
0:
o
"s. INTERNAL SPACE WIDTH ERROR
~~--r
I 1
T
1O
I I
1ST BAR
I :
,,1'
'..L
ffi
r- r- -
J I
0.10
Ab, INTERNAL BAR WIDTH ERROR
0:
Ii!
-.
0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 O.S 0.9 1.0
1dT B1R
~
I
PREFERRED ORIENTATION
TILT = a"
vscan = 50 em/s
STANDARD TAG (0.3 mm)
TA :; 25°C
Vs = 5V
r- r- -
0.15
1
-
r-.
Figure 7. Width Error vs. Height (Any Orientation).
0,15
1
-.
I- SPACE WIDTH ERROR
-
\
.,.-
h - HEIGHT - mm
Figure 6. Width Error vs. Height (Preferred Orientation).
0.10
--
1
INTE~NAL BAR
WIDTH ERROR
h - HEIGHT - mm
1
\
f-~tl
-0.05
-0.10
0.1 0.2 0,3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0
1
/
a: 0.05 _Ab,
o
~
~~~~:~~~~~ ~R~OR
~,
1 1
1ST BAR
0.15
\
0:
0:
W
-0.05
lac 15° 20" 25" 30 e 35"
Figure 5. Width Error v:s. Tilt (Any Orientation).
w
§;'
,
fJ - TILT - DEGREES
a:
~
i""-
-0.15
t.b. INTERNAL BAR WIDTH ERROR
0:
_r-
TILT - DEGREES
~,
1ST BAR
iNTE'RNAL SPACE
- ~" WIDTH
ERROR
-0.10
Figure 4. Width Error vs. Tilt (Preferred Orientation).
0.15
-0.05
3:
5' 10' 15' 20' 25' 30' 35'
e-
±-:f-.-!. ......
~
i"-
-0.10
~,...
0:
0:
As. INTERNAL SPAC~ ...
WIDTH ERROR
I -0.05
(0.3 mm)
WIDTH ERROR
0:
t-
o
1O
vscaf'l= 50 em/s
STANDARD TAG
V
Ab.IINT~RNlL BAR r- ~~!:~~oC
-
o
TA "" 25°C
HEIGHT = 0.1 mm
/
I
Figure 9, Width Error vs. Scan Velocity.
3-29
- I-- r--
0.15
0.15'
-
0.10
E
E
I
a:
0
a:
a:
w
:r
I-
0.05
PREFERRED ORIENTATION
TIL T = D·
STANDARD TAG (0.3 mm)
HEIGHT'" 0.25 mm
J
0.10
1ST BAR
vscan::; 50 emls
Vs '" 5V
JBA~-
E
E
I
0.05
a:
a:
ab. INTERNAL BAR WIDTH ERROR
Ab. INTERNAL BAR WIDTH ERROR
0
ffi
0
~
~
As. INTEIRNAIL SP C~WID H EIRROR_
I -0.05
I -0,05
w
;:
~
-0.10
0
i"0
0
i - r--
PREFERRED ORIENTATION
HEIGHT'" 0.25 mm
TILT=O· -
r- ~
vscan'" 50 emls
STANDARD TEST TAG 10.3 mm)
TA ::; 25°
r- r-
-0.10
-0.15
3.5
4.0
4.5
5.0
5.5
As. INTERNAL SPACE WIDTH ERROR
-0.15
6.0
5"
10·
Vs - SUPPLY VOLTAGE - V
15· 20"
25· 3D· 35· 40· 45·
TA - TEMPERATURE _
Figure 10. Width Error vs. Supply Voltago.
60"
55·
°c
Figure 11. Width Error vs. Temperature.
MECHANICAL CONSIDERATIONS
The HEDS-3000/-3050 include a standard nine pin D-style
connector with integral squeeze-to-release retention mechanism. Two types of receptacles with the retention mechanism are available from AMP Corp. (printed circuit
header: 745001-2 Panel mount: 745018, body; 66570-3,
pins). Panel mount connectors that are compatible with
the Wand connector, but do not include the retention
mechanism, are the Molex A7224, and AMP 2074-56-2.
MAINTENANCE CONSIDERATIONS
While there are no user serviceable parts inside the Wand,
the tip should be checked periodically for wear and dirt, or
obstructions in the aperture. The tip aperture is designed
to reject particles and dirt but a gradual degradation in
performance will occur as the tip wears down, or becomes
obstructed by foreign materials.
Before unscrewing the tip, disconnect the Wand from the
system power source. The aperture can be cleaned with a
cotton swab or similar device and a liquid cleaner.
The glass window on the sensor should be inspected and
cleaned if dust, dirt, or fingerprints are visible. To clean the
sensor window dampen a lint free cloth with a liquid
cleaner, then clean the window with the cloth taking care
not to disturb the orientation of the sensor. DO NOT
SPRAY CLEANER DIRECTLY ON THE SENSOR OR
WAND.
~
o~O'T
L~."",
b
~DRl
HEDS-3001
Figure 12. Wand Tip.
After cleaning the tip aperture and sensor window, the tip
should be gently and securely screwed back into the
Wand assembly. The tip should be replaced if there are
visible indications of wear such as a disfigured, or
distorted aperture. Th.e part number for the Wand tip is
HEDS-3001.1t can be ordered from any franchised HewlettPackard distributor.
OPTIONAL FEATURES
The wand may also be ordered with the following special
features:
• Special colors
• Customer specified label
• No label
• Heavy duty retractable coiled cord
• No connector
• With/without switch button
For more information, call your local Hewlett-Packard
sales office or franchised distributor.
111
Pin
1
2
I
"Cb~
26.8
III
3
11.05)
4
5
6
.1
~
1!lJ
t
15.8
10.62)
7
8
9
54321
I
[llOOOOO
0000
!
NOTES,
1. ALL DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETRES AND (INCHES).
II II
98 76
Figure 13. Connector Specifications.
3-30
I]
Wire
Color
NC
White
NC
NC
-NC
Black
NG
Red
HEDS-3000
FUnction
NC
Vo Output
NC
HEOS-3050
Function
NC
Vo Output
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
Shield
NC
Ground
NC
Vs Supply Voltage
Ground
NC
Vs Supply Voltage
Flihl
HEWLETT
~~ PACKARO
BAR CODE DECODER IC
H8CR1800
Features
• INDUSTRY STANDARD BAR CODES
3 of 9 Code
Extended 3 of 9 Code
Interleaved 2 of 5 Code
UPC/EAN/JAN Codes
i-i
• AUTOMATIC CODE RECOGNITION
"
• FULL DUPLEX SERIAL OR PARALLEL ASCII
OUTPUT
I
':,p~. ~ :::':1:' <'
$1S't \ , ;,
~OH.~'~u:~' ~
!:.lIIckar d Co.
..."Int..,
I
,~ ~
,
82
• EXTENSIVE CONFIGURATION CONTROL
THROUGH SOFTWARE COMMANDS
~
,
• DECODER IC IN A STANDARD 40 PIN DIP
PACKAGE
• AUDIO AND VISUAL FEEDBACK CONTROL
• SINGLE 5 VOLT SUPPLY
Description
Applications
HewleU-Packard's HBCR-1800 Bar Code Decoder IC is a
high performance product designed to simplify the implementation of bar code reading capability in any OEM
system. The standard 40 pin decoder IC has been specially
designed to work with any of HewleU-Packard's digital
wands. When combined with an external RAM chip, the
result is a component-level reader that allows a manufacturer to easily add bar code reading to his equipment.
Bar codes are rapidly becoming a preferred alternative to
other forms of data entry. Bar coding has proven faster and
more accurate than keyboard entry. In addition, bar code
scanning typically has a higher first read rate and greater
data accuracy than Optical Character Recognition. When
compared to magnetic stripe encoding, bar code offers significant advantages in flexibility of media, symbol placement
and immunity to electromagnetic fields.
The standard decoding chip supports four of the most popular codes: 3 of 9 Code, Extended 3 of 9 Code, Interleaved 2 of
5 Code, and UPC/EAN/JAN Codes. If more than one standard code is enabled, the reader will automatically recognize
and decode the code being scanned. Bi-directional scanning
is allowed for all codes except UPC/EAN/JAN with supplemental digits. For 3 of 9 Codes and Interleaved 2 of 5 Code, a
maximum of 32 characters inot including start and stop characters) are allowed.
Manufacturers of data collection terminals, point-of-sale terminals, keyboards, weighing scales, and other data collection
and material handling equipment are finding a growing
demand for bar code reading capability in their products. The
HBCR-1800 Bar Code Decoder IC makes it easy to add this
capability without the need to invest in the development of
bar code decoding software.
HBCR-1800 Bar Code Decoder IC makes it easy to add this
capability without the need to invest in the development of
bar code decoding software.
The decoder IC may be set to communicate in either serial or
parallel ASCII. Operator feedback is supported through pins
that allow for external LED drive and a beeper drive circuits.
In addition, there are thirteen programmable functions covering items from terminator character selection to the tone of
the beeper.
The 40 pin decoder IC may be easily configured with most
common microprocessors using either a parallel ASCII or
serial ASCII interface. The IC may be added to an existing
board, designed into an add-on board, or designed into an
entirely new system. Using the decoder IC as an integral part
of the host system will eliminate the need for the external bar
code readers which are often used to perform the same
function.
3-31
Decoder Ie Specifications
Wand input can be disabled by the host system through a
software command. This allows the application program to
control the operator's ability to enter bar code data, thereby
preventing inadvertant data entry and allowing the host to
verify each scan before enabling subsequent scans.
General Information
The HBCR-1800 Bar Code Decoder IC consists of an NMOS
decoding IC in a 40 pin Dual In-Line package. The readers
require an external 1K x 8 bit multiplexed RAM chip (Intel
8185 or similar) or a 1K x 8 bit RAM and an address latch
chip (Mostek MK4801 or similar and a 74LS373). To complete the reader, a 12 MHz crystal must also be added.
The wand is connected to pin 12 of the decoder IC (see Figures 1 and 2).
Data Communications
The decoding IC is designed to interface with most standard
microprocessors, and can communicate in either serial or
parallel ASCII. It provides complete compatibility with the
output from Hewlett-Packard digital bar code wands.
The decoder IC can communicate with the host system
through either a serial ASCII or parallel ASCII port. The parallel port allows for faster data communication between the two
devices. Both parallel and serial ports are bi-directional.
Performance Features
The serial port may also be connected directly to RS-232-C
level shifters to produce an RS-232-C compatible output. A
wide range of baud rate, parity, stop bits and terminator
characters may be selected, as described in Table 1. In addition, XON/XOFF pacing for the decoder IC's data transmission
is available.
Bar Codes Supported
The HBCR-1800 Bar Code DecoderlC is capable of reading
four popular bar code symbologies: 3 of 9 Code, Extended
3 of 9 Code, Interleaved 2 of 5 Code and UPC/EAN/JAN
Codes.
The 3 of 9 Code, an alphanumeric code, and the Extended 3
of 9 Code, a full 128 character ASCII version of the 3 of 9
Code, may be read bi-directionally for message lengths up to
a maximum of 32 characters. An optional checksum character may be used with these codes, and the decoder IC may
be configured to verify this character prior to data transmission. Enabling the Extended 3 of 9 Code will disable the
standard 3 of 9 Code as the two are mutually exclusive.
The parallel port uti lizes both a send and receive handshake
for data transfer between the decode'r IC and the host system. Timing diagrams for these handshakes are shown on
page 5.
The decoder IC has a 255 character output buffer which will
store data if transmission to the host is prevented. A buffer
overflow will actuate a signal on the beeper line for the
beeper to sound three times in rapid succession.
The Interleaved 2 of 5 Code, a compact numeric only bar
code, may also be read bi-directionally for message lengths
up to a maximum of 32 characters. To enhance data accuracy, an optional checksum character verification and/or
label length checking may be enabled.
Feedback Features
The decoder IC has several provisions for signalling operator
feedback. Pin 14 provides a signal for an LED driver and pin
15 provides a signal for a beeper driver. An LED or beeper
driver connected to the decoder IC may be controlled directly
by the IC, with a signal generated after a good read; or may
be controlled by the host system. In addition, the tone of the
beeper can be varied by a software command to be one of 16
different tones.
.
All popular versions of the UPC, EAN, and JAN bar codes
may be read bi-directionally, including UPC-A, UPC-E, EAN8, EAN-13, JAN-8, and JAN-13. All codes may be enabled
simultaneously or only tlie UPC codes may be enabled.
UPC, EAN and JAN codes with complementary two digit or
five digit supplemental encodations, or "add-ons", may also be
read in one of two ways. If UPC, EAN and JAN codes are
enabled but neither tWo digit nor five digit supplemental
encodations are enabled, then only the main part of the symbols printed with supplemental encodations will be read. If
the two digit or the five digit supplemental encodations are
enabled, then only symbols with these supplementals will be
read. In this case, the symbols may only be read in the direction which results in the supplement being scanned last.
Power Requirements
Both the decoder IC and the wands operate from a single
+5 V DC power supply. The maximum current draw for the
decoder IC is 175 mA Themaximum ripple voltage should
be less than 100 mV peak-to-peak.
Configuration Control
Automatic code recognition is provided for the Interleaved 2
of 5 Code, UPC/EAN/JAN Codes, and either the 3 of 9 Code
or the Extended 3 of 9 Code. The decoder IC's default setting
is for simultaneous reading of the 3 of 9 Code, Interleaved 2
of 5 Code and UPC/EAN/JAN Codes.
Configuration of the decoder IC may be determined through
hardwire connections and/or through software commands.
Hardwire selection is limited to key operating parameters. A
much greater range of configuration control is available
through software commands. A summary of the decoder IC
features and configuration control these features is presented in the following table.
Wand Input
The decoder IC has been specially designed to operate with
any of several Hewlett-Packard digital bar code wands.
3-32
- - - - --_ ..
__._----
-----------------------------_._---------
Table 1. Summary of Features and Configuration Control
Feature
Function of Value
Hardwirel
Software
Control[1)
Mode of
Operation
Parallel or Serial Mode
Hardwire
Parallel
Default
Settlng[2]
Mode[3]
N/A
Baud Rate
300,1200,2400,9600
Hardwire
300 Baud
Serial
Parity
O's, 1's, Odd, Even
Hardwire
O's
Serial
Stop Bits
1 or 2
Hardwire
2
Serial
Terminator
Character,
CR, CR/LF, HT, None
Hardwire
CR
Serial
User Defined 110 Characters Max.)
Software
CR
Both
Both
Both
Header
Character
User Defined 110 Characters Max.)
Software
No Header
Character
Data Output
Pacing
XON/XOFF
Software
No Pacing
3 of 9 Code
Interleaved 2 of 5 Code
Software
Industrial
Code Select
Extended 3 of 9 Code
UPC/EAN/JAN
Code
Select
Both
5
Interleaved
2 of 5 Code
UPC/EAN/JAN together;
or UPC Only
Software
UPC/EAN/JAN
Codes
Enable 2 or 5 Digit
Supplements
Software
Supplements
Not Enabled
Suppress Zeros UPC-E
Software
Zeros Included
3 of 9 Code Checksum
Both
Both
Both
Interleaved 2 of 5
Checksum
Software
No
Checksum
Verification
Interleaved 2 of 5
Label Length
Check
User Defined up to 32 Characters
or Variable Length
Software
Variable Length
Both
Scanner Disable
Disables Wand Input
Software
Wand Input
Enabled
Both
Good Read
Beep Select
Enables Good Read Beep
in one of 16 Tones
Software
Beep Signal
Enabled; Tone = 15
Both
Sound Tone
External Command to Sound Tones
Defines 1 of 16 Tones
Software
N/A
Both
LED Control
Controls LED Driver Circuit
Software
LED to Flash Upon
Good Read
Both
Status Request
Gives Status of Decoder
Ie Configuration
Software
N/A
Both
Software
N/A
Both
Resets Decoder IC to Hardwire
Configuration and Default Software
Settings
4
3 of 9 Code
Checksum
Verification
Enable
Hard Reset
Notes
Notes:
1. Software commands are sent by means of escape sequence.
2. Default settings are those settings which result when the relevant pins have been tied to +SV and no software commands have been
sent to the decoder IC.
3. Some functions apply only when the decoder IC is operating in the serial mode. Others apply in both the parallel and serial modes.
4. In the parallel mode, the parity is always odd.
5. In the parallel mode the terminator character is "CR" unless changed through software commands.
3-33
Recommended Operating Conditions
Parameter
Absolute Maximum Ratings
Parameter
Symbol Min. Typ. Max. Units Notes
Supply
Voltage
Ambient
Temperature
Crystal
Frequency
Vee
4.5
5.5
V
TA
0
70
°C
12
XTAL
7
MHz
8
Note:
7. Maximum power supply ripple of 100 mV peak-to-peak.
S. 12 MHz crystal is recommended.
Symbol
Min.
Max.
Units
Storage
Temperature
Notes
Ts
-65
+150
·C
Pin
Voltage
V,N
-0.5
+7.0
V
Power
Dissipation
Po
2.0
Watts
9
Note:
9. Voltage on any pin with respect to ground.
Block Diagrams
SERIAL PINOUT
PARALLEL PINOUT
BAUD{
RATE
STOP BITS
PARITV{
3
4
TERMINATOR{
PARALLEL
OUTPUT
PORT
ADDRESS
AND
DATA
BUSTO
RAM CHIP
2
3
4
ADDRESS
AND
DATA
BUSTO
RAM
CHIP
SUPRESS ZEROS UPC-E
RESET
RxD
TxD
WAND IN
NC
LED
BEEPER
TO RAM CHIP
fWii
lIfO
XTAL2
XTAL 1
GND
NC- Pins should be lell floating
Figure 1.
.Flgure 2.
DECODER IC TO MEMORY
8185 MULTIPLEXED
1Kx8RAM
1Kx 8 RAM WITH
ADDRESS LATCH CHIP
,
ADDRESS CONTROL
ADDRESS
CONTROL
DATA
DECODER
IC
8185
OR
SIMILAR
MK4801
OR
SIMILAR
DECODER
IC
ADDRESS
ADDRESS
CONTROL
DATA
Figure 3.
74LS373
CONTROL
Figure 4.
3-34
DATA
-------.---------~
)arallel Mode Handshake Timing
lOST COMMANDS RECEIVED BY DECODER IC
(INPUT FROM
HOST)
tCR~
-tCS~1
,
.
tCA
I[
1\
(HOST COMMAND
TO BUS)
tcc
I
,
PORT I
PINS 8-1
I
\.
'tCR = Falling edge of COMMAND READY to falling edge
of COMMAND READ. Max. = 22!,s (MICRO SECONDS).
'Note: These timing specifications given are based on the assumptions that the wand is not active at the time. Since the wand input to
the microprocessor is interrupt driven. the timing might be
stretched if the wand is active during that time. All the timings
assume the microprocessor runs at 12 MHz.
tcs = Command setup to rising edge of COMMAND
READY. Min. = 0 !'S.
'tCA = Rising edge of COMMAND READY to rising edge
of COMMAND READ. Typical = 6 !'s.
tcc = Rising edge of COMMAND READ to falling edge of
COMMAND READY. Min. = 0 !'s.
DECODER IC DATA SENT TO HOST
~
(INPUT FROM
HOST)
~
I--tDD
(DATA TO
BUS)
PORT I
PINS 8-I
,
\-
~
tDF_
.
tDD
-}I
.I
I - - tDW-----.I - t D H -
(OUTPUT TO
HOST)
,
-.V
I
'too = Falling edge of DATA READY to data output to
bus. Max. = 140!,s.
'tow = Rising edge of DATA READY to rising edge of
DATA WRITE. Max. = 5 !'S.
This number reflects that there is no decoding in progress,
no status, terminal 10, header or terminator change command is being executed at the time.
'toH = Data hold after rising edge of DATA WRITE.
Max. = 2 !'s.
too = Rising edge of DATA WRITE to falling edge of
DATA READY. Min. = 0 !'s.
'tOF = Data output to bus to falling edge of DATA WRITE.
Max. = 2!,s
3-35
DC Characteristics (TA= ooe to 70 oe, Vee = 4.SV to S.SV, Vss =OV)
Symbol
Parameter
VIL
Input low Voltage
Max.
Unit
0.8
V
Test CondlUonr;
Input High Voltage (except Pins 9 and 18)
Vee + 0.5
V
Input High Voltage (Pins 9 and 18)
Vee +0.5
V
Output Low Voltage (Pins H!. 10-17. 21-28)
0.45
V
IOL= 1.6 rnA
VOLI
Output Low Voltage (Pins 30 and 32-391
0.45
V
IOL=3.2mA
VOH
Output High Voltage (Pins 1-8,
10-17 and 21-281
V
IOH=-80p.A
VOH1
Output High Voltage (Pins 30 and 32-391
V
IOH ""-400 p.A
2.4
Input low Current (Pins 1-8,
10-17 and 21-28)
Low Current (Pin 1S)
nput High Current to Pin 9 for Reset
Pin 19 toVss
-SOO
p.A
-2.5
rnA
Pin 19 to Vss; VIN .. 0.45V
±10
p.A
0.45 < VIN < Vee
SOO
p.A
VIN=Vee-1.5
175
rnA
AU Outputs Disconnected
VII'I=O.45V
Wand 1/0 Interfaces
~~
Vee
121
WAND
CDNNECTOR
WAND
i
WAND INPUT
CONNECTDRWV---.......---~
SHIELD
SHIELD
MINIMAL
TRANZDRBS
P6KE 7.5C (THREE EACHI
RECOMMENDED
Note:
The shield must be connected to ground for proper wand operation.
Figure 5. Wand Interfaces
3-36
- - - - - - - - - - - - - ----- - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Flin-
HEWLETT
~GtI PACKARD
MULTI-PURPOSE
BAR CODE DECODER IC
HBCR-2000
Features
• IDEAL FOR HAND SCANNING APPLICATIONS
AND MANY AUTOMATED SCANNING
APPLICATIONS
• COMPATIBLE WITH THE SCANNERS NEEDED
FOR VIRTUALLY ALL HAND-HELD SCANNING
APPLICATIONS
- Laser Scanners·
- Wands
- Slot Readers
• WIDE SELECTION OF INDUSTRY STANDARD
BAR CODES SUPPORTED
- Code 39 (3 of 9 Code)
- Extended Code 39
- Interleaved 2 of 5 Code
- UPC/EAN/JAN Codes
- Codabar (NW7 Code)
-Code128
• AUTOMATIC CODE RECOGNITION
• FULL DUPLEX SERIAL ASCII INTERFACE
• EXTENSIVE CONFIGURATION CONTROL
THROUGH SOFTWARE COMMANDS
• STANDARD 40 PIN DIP PACKAGE
• AUDIO AND VISUAL FEEDBACK CONTROL
• SINGLE 5 VOLT SUPPLY
Description
Hewlett-Packard's HBCR-2000 Multipurpose Bar Code
Decoder IC offers a flexible 'bar code decoding capability
designed to give OEMs the ability to address a large number
of industry segments and applications. The decoder IC's
flexibility is made possible through sophisticated software
which allows the IC to accept data input from a wide variety
of digital scanners and to decode the most popular bar
code symbologies with full automatic code recognition.
Implbmeritation of the decoder IC is easy since it requires
only a few supporting chips and provides a standard
interface to the host.
The HBCR-2000 is compatible with the scanners needed
for virtually all hand scanning applications. Specifically,
it is compatible with moving-beam laser scanners such as
the Symbol Technologies' LS7000, Symbol TechnologieS'
LS7000 II, and Spectra Physics' SP2001; fixed-beam noncontact scanners; Hewlett-Packard . digital wands; and
Hewlett-Packard digital slot readers.
The decoder IC is also an excellent decoding .solution for a
number of the stationary scanning applications found in
automated systems. In this case, the scan rates for movingbeam applications must be similar to the scan rates for most
hand-held laser scanners (35-45, scans/second) and the
scan speeds for fixed-beam applications must be similar to
the scan speeds for wands and slot rE:laders. For moving
beam applications, it is also important for the scanner to
utilize the three laser control lines on the IC.
The standard decoder IC supports the bar code symbologies
now being used for most applications in the. industrial, retail,
commercial, government, and medical markets. The bar
codes supported are: Code 39 (3 of 9 Code), Extended
Code 39, Interleaved 2 of 5 Code, UPC/EAN/JAN Codes,
Codabar (NW7 Code) and Code 128. If more than one code
is enabled, the decoder IC will automatically recognize and
decode the code being scanned. Bi~directional scanning is
allowed for all codes except UPC/EAN/JAN codes with
supplemental digits.
The HBCR-2000 communicates with the host through a
flexible,.full duplex serial ASCII interface. OEMs may choose
either to convert this interface to a standard data communi-.
cations protocol such as RS-232-CN.24 or to connect the
decoder IC directly to another microprocessor for data
processing or data re-formatting. Operator feedback is sup~
ported through piiui that allow for external LED drive and
beeper drive circuits. In addition, there are 21 programmable
functions covering items from laser redundancy check to
the tone of the beeper.
3-37
_... _-_.__ .
-_.. _._------- ---------_._._---_._------ . _ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - _..... _._-- .. _-- _.- ----- .._-_._-..- . _ - - - - - - - - - - -
Applications
All popular versions of the UPC, EAN, and JAN bar codes
may be read bi-directionally, including UPC-A, UPC-E,
EAN-8, EAN-13, JAN-8, and JAN-13. All codes may be
enabled simultaneously or only the UPC codes may be
enabled. UPC, EAN, and JAN symbols with complementary
two digit or five digit supplemental encodations,or "addons", may also be read.
Bar codes are rapidly becoming a preferred alternative to
other forms of data entry. Bar coding has proven faster and
more accurate than keyboard data entry. I n addition, bar
code scanning typically has a higher first read rate and
greater data accuracy than optical character recognition.
When compared to magnetic stripe encoding, bar code
offers significant advantages in flexibility of media, symbol
placement and immunity to electromagnetic fields.
Codabar, a numeric only bar code with special characters,
may be read bi-directionally for message lengths up to a
maximum of 32 characters. The start and stop c'haracters in
the symbol are normally transmitted, but transmission of
these characters may be disabled through a software
command.
Manufacturers of data collection terminals, point-of-sale
terminals, keyboards, weighing scales, automated test equipment and other data collection or material handling equipment are finding a growing demand for bar code reading
capability in their products. The HBCR-2000 Multipurpose
Bar Code Decoder IC makes it easy to add bar code
reading capability for a wide variety of applications without
the need to invest in the development of bar code decoding
software.
Code 128, a compact full ASCII bar code, may also be
scanned bi-directionally for message lengths up to a maximum of 32 characters.
Automatic code recognition is provided for the Interleaved 2
of 5 Code, UPC/EAN/JAN Codes, Codabar, Code 128, and
either Code 39 or Extended Code 39. Any subset of these
codes may be selected for decoding. The decoder IC's
default setting is for simultaneous reading of Code 39,
Interleaved 2 of 5 Code with variable lengths, UPC/EAN/JAN
Codes without'supplements, Codabar, and Code 128.
Decoder Ie Specifications
GENERAL INFORMATION
The HBCR-2000 is an NMOS decoding IC in a 40 pin Dual
In-Line package. When configured in a system, the HBCR2000 requires a crystal and an external 1K byte RAM. The
external RAM may be implemented using either a multiplexed RAM chip (Intel 8185 or equivalent) or a nonmultiplexed RAM chip and a latch chip (Mostek MK4801 or
equivalent and 74LS373). The recommended crystal frequency is 11.059 MHz (CTS Knights R1032-6BA.11.059 or
equivalent).
SCANNER INPUT
The HBCR-2000 is designed to accept a digital input signal
either from a fixed-beam scanner, such as a wand, slot
reader, or fixed-beam non-contact scanner, or from a
moving-beam scanner such as a hand-held laser scanner.
The state of pin 7 must be set prior to power-up to reflect
the type of scanner connected to the decoder IC.
The decoding software has been specially designed to
operate with any of Hewlett-Packard's digital bar code
wands. Sapphire-tip digital wands feature a scan angle of 0
to 45 degrees, a variety of resolutions, and a TIL compatible
digital output. A complete wand selection guide is presented
in Table 2.
The decoder IC is designed to interface with most standard
microprocessors or other host systems through a full duplex
serial asynchronous ASCII port. It offers complete compatibility with Hewlett-Packard digital wands and digital slot
readers as well as hand-held laser scanners from both
Spectra Physics, Inc. and Symbol Technologies, Inc. Other
scanners, such as hand-held fixed-beam non-contact scanners and the scanners used in some stationary scanning
applications, may also be used with the IC.
The decoder IC is also designed specifically for operation
with Hewlett-Packard's digital slot readers. These slot readers
feature a sealed case with a slot width of 3.2 mm (0.125 in.)'
and either an infrared (880 mm) or visible red (660 mm)
LED light source. A separate module which contains the
slot reader optics and electronics is available for stationary
scanning applications or for configuration in applications
requiring a different slot width.
'
Performance Features
BAR CODES SUPPORTED
The HBCR-2000 decoder IC is capable of reading six popular bar code symbologies: Code 39 (3 of 9 Code). Extended
Code 39, Interleaved 2 of 5 Code, UPC/EAN/JAN Codes,
Codabar (NW7 Code), and Code 128.
'
Code 39, an alphanumeric code, and Extended Code 39, a
full 128 character ASCII version of Code 39, may be read
bi-directionally for message lengths up to a maximum of 32
characters, An optional check character may be used with
these codes, and the decoder IC may be configured to
verify this, character prior to data transmission. Enabling
Extended Code 39 will disable standard Code 39 as the
two are mutually exclusive,
The Interleaved 2 of 5 Code, a compact numeric only bar
code, may also be read bi-directionally for message lengths
from 4 to 32 characters. To enhance data accuracy, optional
check character verification and/or label length checking
may be enabled.
The decoding software for moving-beam scanners has been
designed to work with hand-held laser scanners manufactured by Spectra Physics, Inc. and Symbol Technologies,
I nco The delay time for automatic laser shutoff is adjustable
through a software command to the IC. A redundancy
check feature is available for applications which require
extreme accuracy. Applications which require and ability to
sense motor failure in a laser scanner or to calculate the
ratio of laser on-time to laser ofHime must support these
requirements through external hardware.
The digital input Signal from the scanner is connectedto pin
12. When the decoder IC is used with a hand-held laser
scanner, the laser enable, laser trigger, and scanner synchronization signal 'lines are connected to pins 6, 8, and 1:3,.
respectively. Scanner input can be disabled by ttie host
system though a software command. This allows the, application program to enable bar code data entry only when
3c38
I'
expecting the operator to enter data which has been
encoded in bar code. The decoder Ie also offers a single
read mode which can be enabled through a software
command. The single read mode allows the application
program to prevent bar code data entry until a "Next Read"
command is sent, thereby allowing the host to process
transmissions and verify each scan before enabling subsequent decodes.
ware command to be one of 16 tones or the beeper may
be silenced.
POWER REQUIREMENTS
The decoder IC operates from a single 5 V DC power
supply. The maximum current draw is 175 mAo The maximum ripple voltage for the power supply should be less
than 100 mV peak-to-peak.
DATA COMMUNICATIONS
The decoder IC communicates with the host system
through a full-duplex, asynchronous, serial ASCII port. A
wide range of baud rate, parity, stop bits, and terminator
characters may be selected, as described in Table 1. In
addition, both request-to-send/clear-to-send hardware handshake and XON/XOFF (DC1/DC3) character pacing are
available for control of the decoder IC's data transmission.
CONFIGURATION CONTROL
Configuration of the decoder IC may be determined through
hardwire connections and/or through software commands.
Hardwire selection is limited to key operating parameters. A
much greater range of configuration control is available
through software commands. A summary of the decoder IC
features and the configuration control available for these
features is presented in Table 1. A users manual which
provides detailed configuration information and example
schematics is supplied with the HBCR-2000.
OPERATOR FEEDBACK
The decoder IC has several provisions for signalling operator
feedback. Pin 14 provides a signal for an LED driver and pin
15 provides a signal for a beeper driver. An LED or beeper
driver connected to the decoder IC may either be controlled directly by the IC, with a signal generated after a
good read, or may be controlled by the host system. In
addition, the tone of the beeper can be varied by a soft-
Handling Precautions
The decoder IC is extremely sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). It is important that good anti-static procedures
be observed when handling the IC. The package should not
be opened except in a static free environment.
Recommended operating Conditions
Typ.
Parameter
Symbol
Min.
Max.
Units
Noles
Supply Voltage
Vcc
4.5
5.5
V
1
Ambient Temperature
TA
0
70
"C
Crystal Frequency
XTAL
MHz
2
Element Time Interval (MOVing-Beam)
ETiM
22
555
Itsec
2,3,4,5
Element Time Interval (Fixed-Beam)
ETIF
150
70,000
Itsec
2,3,5,6,7
11.059
NOTES:
1. Maximum power supply ripple of 100 mV peak-to-peak.
2. Crystal frequencies from 3.5 MHz to 12 MHz may be used. For
frequencies other than 11.059 MHz, multiply the specified baud
.
XTAL
rates and beeper frequencies by 11.059 MHz and multiply the
4. Corresponds to a scan rate of 35 to 45 scans per second, a
scan rate which is common for hand-held laser scanners.
5. Element time intervals which are smaller than the minimum
ETI's specified will still be processed, but with additional width
errors that may cause the input signal to be undecodable.
6. The maximum scan speed may be calculated by dividing the
smallest narrow element width by 150 Itsec. For example, for
0.19 mm (0.0075 in.) narrow elements, the maximum scan
speed is 127 cm/sec (50 in.!sec).
7. The minimum scan speed may be calculated by dividing the
largest wide element width by 70,000 Itsec. For example, for
1.52 mm (0.060 in.) wide elements, the minimum scan speed
is 2.2 cm/sec (0.9 in.!sec).
element time interval ranges by 11.~5~A~HZ. The ETI ranges
specified a crystal frequency of 11.059 MHz.
3. An element time interval (ETI) is the time period in the digital
signal from the scanner that corresponds to the physical width
of a printed element (bar or space) in the bar code symbol
ETIM applies when pin 7 is tied low and ETIF applies when pin
7 is tied high.
Absolute Maximum Ratings
Parameter
Symbol
Min.
Max.
Units
Storage Temperature
TS
-65
+150
°C
Pin Voltage
VIN
-0.5
+7.0
V
Power Dissipation
Po
1,5
Watts
Nole:
8. Voltage on any pin with respect to ground.
3-39
Notes
8
TABLE 1. SUMMARY OF FEATURES AND CONFIGURATION CONTROL
I
Scanner Type
~
Laser Shutoff Delay
I
Hardwlre/
Software
ControlI91
Function or Value
wand/Slot Reader or Moving Beam Laser Scanner
Hardwire
I
Defines Laser On-Time prior to Automatic Shutoff
from 0 to 10 seconds in 100 me steps
Laser RE!dundancy Check 'Enables Requirement for Two Consecutive,
Identical Decodes for a Good Read
~---------------4~------------------------------~SC~an~ne~rl~n~pu~t~E-n-a~bl~e----~E~na~b~le~$-D~~~a~A~cq~u~m~it~io~n_f_rom
__S~ca~n_ne_r________
Single Read Mode
Enables Requirement for a 'Next Read' Command
before Processing the next Scanner Input Signal
Extended Code 39
J!
Default
Settlng[10]
Software
MOVing Beam
Laser Scanner
3 seconds
Software
Not Enabled
-------+--------~
ftware
Enabled
Software
Not Enabled
Both
Co~39
Interleaved 2 of 5 Code
UPCIEAN/JAN Codes
Codabar
Code 128
Code Select
8~
iTil
rn
____________
UPC/EAN/JAN
Decoding Options
!~
~~
________________
Software
__________________________4-________
UPC/EANlJAN together; or UFC Only
Software
Code 39
Interleaved
20f 5 Code
UPC/EAN/JAN
Codes
Codabar
~~C~O~~1~~~
UPC/EAN/JAN
together
Supplement&
~~_a_b_le_2_or
__5_D_i9_it_S_u_p_~_em
__
en_~____________~___ftw
__a_~
__-+~N~ot~E~n~ab~l~ed~
No Check
Character
Verification
Transmit
Check Character
Verification Enable
Code 39 Check Character
Interleaved 2 of 5 C~ Check Character
Software
Codabar Data
1l'ansmlSSion Option
Interleaved 2 of 5
Label Length Check
Baud Rate
TransmIt or Suppress StartlStop Characters
Software
User Defined from 4 to 32 Characters
or Variable l.ength
1200,2400.4800,9600
0'$, 1's, Odd, Even
10r2
Software
Variable
Length
HardwltJi~
1200
Hardwire
O's
jl~
i
Terminator Charactar
(,)
Header Character
I
Data OUtput Pacing
1. Good Read Beep Select
I Sound Tone
Both
~-+__..;.,1_--l
CR,CR/L~ETX,None·
User Defined (10 Characters Max.)
User Defined (10 Characters Max.)
Software·
FITS/CTS
Harawire
Software '
Software
Enables Good Read Beep and sets 1 of 16 tones
Software
t
r=
CR
No PacIng
Beep Enal;lled;
Tone 12
N/A
Software
External Command to InHiate Beep Signal
in 1 of 16 tones
~~------------+-~------------~~----~-----4
LED Control
Defines LED Control to be Internal,
Software
LED to Flash
Po
External. or both
Automatically
o
Upon Good Read
u.
1
je
Status Request
~'E Hard Reset
ililj
Gives Status of Decoder IC Confl9ur~ion
Resets Decoder IC to Hardwire Configuration
and Default Software Settings
Software
Software
N/A
N/A
NOTES:
9. Hardwire control is accomplished by tying the appropriate
input pins high or low. Software commands are sent by means
of escape sequences.
10. Default settings are ,those settings which result when the
relevant Input pins have been tied to Ground and no software
commands have been sent to the decoder IC.
3-40
---~~
..
--------~-----~---------------------
Pinout
BAUD{
RATE
VCc(+5 V)
ADO
ADl
AD2
AD3
LASER ENABLE OUTPUT
6
ADDRESS
AND DATA
BUS
AD4
SCANNER TYPE INPUT
AD5
LASER TRIGGER INPUT
AD6
AD7
+5V
ADDRESS LATCH ENABLE
NC
SCANNER SIGNAL INPUT
LASER SYNCHRONIZATION INPUT
CODE 39 CHECK CHARACTER
EXTENDED CODE 39
LED OUTPUT
} TERMINATOR
}
A9
PARITY
}
TO RAM CHIP
AB
VSS(GND)
Figure 1.
Block Diagrams
DECODER IC TO MEMORY
1K x 8 RAM WITH ADDRESS LATCH CHIP
8185 MULTIPLEXED 1K X 8 RAM
ADDRESS CONTROL
A
MK4801
OR
SIMILAR
DECODER
IC
ADDRESS
CONTROL
DATA
74LS373
ADDRESS
CONTROl..
DATA
DECODER
IC
B1B5
OR
SIMILAR
ADDRESS
CONTROL
DATA
Figure 2.
Figure 3.
Scanner Compatibility
The HBCR-2000 is compatible with the complete line of
Hewlett-Packard digital wands, Hewlett-Packard digital slot
readers, and hand-held laser scanners manufactured by
both Symbol Technologies, Inc. and Spectra Physics, Inc.
ink smearing, spots and voids, or other minor print flaws,
the wands which specify a recommended nominal narrow
element width of 0.3 mm (0.012 in.) or 0.33 mm (0.013 in.)
are recommended.
The selection of Hewlett-Packard digital wands available for
use with the HBCR-2000 is presented in Table 2. For the two
families of sapphire-tip digital wands, the most widely used
wands are those which specify a recommended nominal
narrow element width of 0.19 mm (0.0075 in.). These wands
are capable of reading bar codes printed with a variety of
different printers and over a wide range of printed resolutions
(as specified by narrow element widths) and are, therefore,
considered to be general-purpose wands. The higher resolution wands, with a recommended nominal narrow element
of 0.13 mm (0.005 in.), are recommended for applications in
which only high resolution bar codes are being read. For
applications which require a scanner to read medium or low
resolution bar codes, particularly those with edge roughness,
The Hewlett-Packard slot readers and slot reader modules
which are available for use with the HBCR-2000 are presented in Table 3. The standard slot readers have a slot
width of 3.2 mm (0.125 in.) and are, therefore, capable of
reading bar codes on anything from paper to doublelaminated badges. For applications which require a different
slot width or. which require a fixed-beam scanner in an
automated system, a module which contains the slot reader
optics and electronics assembly is also available.
3-41
The hand-held laser scanners compatible with the HBCR2000 include the Symbol Technologies' LS7000, Symbol
Technologies' LS7000 II, and Spectra Physics' SP2001. For
detailed information on these scanners, please contact these
companies directly.
TABLE 2. HEWLETT-PACKARD DIGITAL BAR CODE WANDS
Emltter[13]
Wsvelength
Tilt
Angle
"TYpical
Current
Case
Material
Switch
Tip
O.Smm
(0.012 in.)
700nm
O-SO°
42 ma
ABS Plastic
Yes
Open
HEOS-30S0
I
I
I
I
I
No
I
HBGS-2200
OJ9mm
(0.0075 in.)
700nm
0-45°
42 ma
Poly carbonate
Yes
Sapphire
Ball
HBGS-2300
I
I
I
I
I
No
I
HBGS-2400
0.13mm
(0.005 in.)
820mm
I
I
Polycarbonate
Yes
I
HBGS-2500
I
I
I
I
I
No
I
HBGS-SOOO
0.33mm
(0.013 in.)
655nm
0-450
3.5 ma
Poly carbonate
Yes
Sapphire
Ball
I
I
I
I
No
I
Metal
I
)
Part Number
~';;
00
--10
Q.
i7
'"
.!::
HEOS-SOOO
s;
Q.
Q.
co
III
i
HBGS-5l00
~
HBCS-6WO
Q.
:a
Q.
Q.
HBGS·5200
co
III
i
HBCS-5300
HBGS-6300
::>
0
~
HBGS-5400
Q
--I
Recommended[11, 12J
Nominal Narrow
Element Width
HBCS-5500
HBCS-6500
I
I
I
I
I
0.19 mm
(0.0075 in.)
I
I
I
Polycarbonate
Yes
I
I
I
I
I
No
I
I
I
I
I
Metal
I
I
I
O.13mm
(0.005 in.)
820mm
I
I
Polycarbonate
Yes
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
No
Metal
I
I
I
tion) than specified may also be read as long as print quality is
good.
13. Wands with an emitter wavelength of 655 mm are recommended for reading bar codes printed on regular (white)
thermal paper or printed with Hewlett-Packard's Thinkjet
printer. Either 655 mm or 700 mm wands are recommended for
bar codes printed with dye-based ink or in color.
14. Low current sapphire-tip wands are designed to operate in all
ambient light environments including in direct sunlight and
under high intensity lamps.
NOTES:
11. The nominal narrow element width of a symbol may also be
referred to as the resolution of the symbol or as the 'x'
dimension of the symbol.
12. Nominal narrow element (bar/space) width, a term which
applies to the symbol and not to the scanner itself, is specified
to facilitate selecting the best scanner for the symbol being
read. The scanners are designed to accomodate printing
tolerances around the nominal dimension specified. Bar codes
having larger nominal narrow element widths (ie. lower resolu-
TABLE 3. HEWLETT-PACKARD DIGITAL SLOT READERS
Part Number
Configuration
Recommended(15)
Nominal Narrow
Element Width
Emitter[16)
Wavelength
Temperature
Range
Case
Material
HBCS-7000
Complete Slot Reader
0.19 mm (0.0075 in.)
660 nm
-20 to +55"G
Metal
HBGS-7001
Slot Reader Module
I
B60nm
I
HBCS-7100
Gomplete Slot Reader
0.19 mm (0.0075 in.)
880 nm
-40 to +70 0 G
I
I
HBGS-7101
Slot Reader
I
880 nm
I
I
NOTES:
15. The aperture design of the slot reader optical system allows
reading both high resolution bar code symbols and poorly
printed medium or low resolution bar code symbols with the
same scanner.
16. The 880 nm slot reader is recommended for bar code symbols
printed with carbon-based inks or for "black-an-black" bar
code symbols. The 660 nm slot reader is recommended for bar
code symbols printed with dye-based inks or printed on regular
thermal paper.
3-42
F/iP'l HEWLETT
CMOS MULTI-PURPOSE
BAR CODE DECODER IC
~e.. PACKARD
HBCR-2010
Description
The HBCR-2010 is a CMOS (low power) version of the
HBCR-2000. With the exception of the power consumption, the performance of the HBCR-2010 is identical to the
HBCR-2000. Please refer to the HBCR-2000 data sheet
and manual (part # 5954-2165) for a complete discussion
of the capabilities of the product. The following information summarizes the differences between the HBCR-2000
and the HBCR-2010.
Power Consumption (at Vee of 5.0 Volts)
15 mA
HBCR-2010
Idle Mode lYpfeal
Maximum
Typical
HBCR-2000
175mA
N/A
19 mA
4mA
Note:
Idle mode only occurs when the HBCR-2010 decoder is in the Wand Mode. Idle mode does not occur when the HBCR-2010
decoder is in the Laser Mode.
External Clock Drivers
If an external clock is to be used, the function of XTAL 1 (pin 19) and XTAL2 (pin 18) is different for the HBCR-2010.
18
Clock
TTL Level
19
20
XTAL2
18
No Connect
19
Clock
CMOS Level
XTAL1
20
Ground
I
Ground
Ground
HBCR-2010
HBCR-2000
3-43
XTAL2
XTAL1
Ground
Flin-
HEWLETT
~~ PACKARD
INDUSTRIAL
DIGITAL BAR CODE
SLOT READERS
HBCS~7000
HBCS-70S0
HBCS-7100
HBCS-7150
Features
• MULTI-RESOLUTION
Compatible with Virtually All Bar Code
Resolutions
• LARGE SLOT WIDTH
Allows Reading Multiple Laminated Cards
• SEALED METAL CASE (IP 66/67)
Can Be Installed Outdoors or in Wet
Environments
• TAMPER PROOF DESIGN
Ideal for Security Applications
• MINIMAL FIRST BAR DISTORTION
Compatible with Most Decoding Software
• AVAILABLE IN EITHER VISIBLE 660 nm OR
INFRARED 880 nm VERSIONS
• WIDE OPERATING TEMPERATURE RANGE
-40 to 70° C (HBCS-7100)
-20 to 55° C (HBCS-7000)
holes, the units become tamper-proof, making them excellent choices for security access control.
The optical system is centered in the slot track,allowing
the user to easily scan from either direction. The wide slot
width makes it easy to insert and slide the cards. The
optical system is covered with a recessed window to
prevent contamination and reduce the wear on the cards.
• WIDE SCAN SPEED RANGE
• BLACK TEXTURED EPOXY FINISH
• DIGITAL OUTPUT
Open Collector Output Compatible with TTL
and CMOS Logic
The standard slot reader comes with the optical/electrical
asembly mounted on a base plate with an opposite rail. A
122 em (48 in.) straight cord and a 5 pin, 240 degree,
locking DIN connector are also standard.
• SINGLE 5 VOLT SUPPLY
Description
Hewlett-Packard's Industrial Digital Slot Readers are designed to provide excellent scanning performance on a
wide variety of bar coded cards and badges. They contain
a unique optical/electrical system that integrates over a
large area of the bar/space pattern, providing a greatly
improved first read rate even on poorly printed bar codes.
The HBCS-7000 has a visible red (660 nm) optical system
with a resolution of 0.19 mm (0.0075 in.). The HBCS-7100
model has an infrared (880 nm) optical system with a
resolution of 0.19 mm (0.0075 in.).
The extra large depth of field allows these slot readers to
have a slot width of 3.2 mm (0.125 in.), thus making it
possible to read even multiple laminated cards and badges.
When used as a stand alone optics module, the maximum
depth of field is dependent on resolution.
The optics and electronics are housed in a rugged metal
case. The cases are fully gasketed and sealed, making
them suitable for use in outdoor or wet environments. The
black epoxy coating adds a durable, ·finished look to these
Digital Slot Readers. When installed using the rear screw
The optical/electrical system is also available as a separate
unit which can be integrated into other equipment or used
as a stand alone sensor assembly.
Applications
The digital bar codeslot reader is a highly effective alternative to keyboard data entry. Bar code scanning is faster
and more accurate than key entry and provides far greater
throughput. In addition, bar code scanning typically has a
higher first read rate and greater data accuracy than
optical character recognition. When compared to magnetic
stripe encoding, bar code offers significant advantages in
flexibility of media, symbol placement and immunity to
electromagnetic fields.
Hewlett-Packard's Industrial Digital Slot Readers are designed for applications where high first read rate and
durability are important factors. The epoxy coated metal
case, with its tamper-proof mounting system, makes these
slot readers ideal choices for security access control, time
and attendance recording and other bar coded badge and
card reading applications.
3-44
Recommended operating Conditions
Symbol
Parameter
Min.
Nominal Narrow Element Width
H8GS:YOOO/7050
0.19 (0.0075)
20 '(~l)
Scari'Velocity!l J
VSCAN
Gontrast!2]
Rw-Rs
45
Vs
4.5
Supply Voltage(31
Temperature(4]
HBGS-7000/70S0
.,
.
Amb!ent Lighj[5]
Units
mm(in.)
0.19 (0.0075)
H8GS-7100/7150
HBCS-7100/7l50
Max.
mm (in.)
317 (125)
cm/sec{ln .. sec/.) •
5.5
Volts
%
TA
-20
+55
°G
TA.
-40
+70
°C
lQP,OOO
lux
Ev
Notes:
1. Measured scanning a symbol with 0.19 mm (0.0075 in.1 narrow elements. For larger narrow element widths, the maximum scan
velocity will increase proportionately.
2. Contrast is defined as Rw-Rs where Rw is the reflectance of the white spaces and Rs is the reflectance of the black bars, measured
at the emitter wavelength (660 nm or 880 nm). Contrast is related to print contrast signal (PCS) by PCS = (Rw-Rs)/Rw or Rw-Rs =
PCSx Rw.
3. Power supply ripple and noise should be less than 100 mV peak to peak.
4. Non-condensing. If there is frost or dew covering over the optics window, it should be removed for optimal scanning performance.
5. Direct sunlight at any illumination angle.
Absolute Maximum Ratings
Symbol
Min.
Max.
Storage Temperature
Ts
-40
+80
°C
Supply Voltage
Vs
-0.3
+7:0
Volts
200
mW
-0.3
+20
Volts
Parameter
Output Transistor Power
Pr
Output Collector Voflage
Vo
Units
WARNING:
OBSERVING THE INFRARED LIGHT SOURCE IN THE HBCS-7150 AT CLOSE DISTANCES FOR PROLONGED
PERIODS OF TIME MAY CAUSE INJURY TO THE EYE. When mounted with the rail in place, the infrared output flux is
radiologically safe. With the rail removed, precautions should be taken to avoid exceeding the limits recommended in
ANSI Z136.1-1981.
Electrical Operation
The HBCS-7XXX family of digital slot readers consists of a
precision optical system, an analog amplifier, a digitizing
circuit, and an output transistor. These elements provide a
TTL compatible output from a single 4.5 V to 5.5 V DC
power supply. The open collector transistor requires a
pull-up resistor for proper operation.
The slot reader connector provides a shield which should
be terminated to logic ground or, preferably, to both logic
ground and earth ground. The shield is connected to the
metal housing of the 5 pin DIN connector, the metal
housing of the slot reader, and logic ground inside the slot
reader.
A non-reflecting black bar results in a logic high (1) level
output, while a reflecting white space will cause a logic
low (0) level output. After power-up, the slot reader will be
fully operational after a period of approximately 6 seconds.
During operation, the slot reader will assume a logic low
state after a short period (typically 1 second) if no bar
code is scanned. This feature allows multiple scanners
(both slot readers and Hewlett-Packard sapphire tip wands)
to be connected together with a simple OR gate.
The recommended logic interface for the slot reader is
shown in Figure 1. This interface provides ESD protection
for both the slot reader and the user's electronics.
The maximum recommended cable length for the slot
reader's output is 25 feet.
3-45
Electrical Characteristics (V s " 4.5 V to 5.5 V, T
Symbol
Parameter
Supply Current
HBCS-7000!7050
Is
HBCS-7100!7150
Is
Min.
A "
25°C, unless otherwise noted)
Max.
Units
50
100
mA
. Vs"5.0V
65
100
mA
Vs=S.OV
VOH=2.4V
'TYP·
High Level Output Current
IOH
1.0
p.A
Low Level Output Voltage
VOL
0.4
V
Output Rise Time
Output Fall Time
Electrostatic Discharge Immunity[6j
Ir
0.9
5.0
If
0.07
5.0
ESD
25
Conditions
IOL = 16 mA
p.S
10%-90%
Transition
P.s
Rl
"
1K 0;
kV
Notes:
6. Shield must be properly terminated (see Figure 1). The human body is modeled by discharging a 300 pF capacitor through a 500
resistor. No damage to the slot reader will occur at the specified discharge level.
Interface Specifications
The slot readers include a standard Spin, 240°, metal,
locking DIN connector. The recommended logic interface
is shown in Figure 1. The mechanical specifications and
wiring are shown in Figure 2. Mating connectors are
available from SWITCH CRAFT in both 5 pin and 6 pin
configurations. These connectors are listed on the right.
§
TRANZORB P6KE 7.5 C
I
V,(1)
SPin
SWITCH CRAFT 13EL5F
5 Pin
SWITCHCRAFT 61HA6F
6Pin
TRADEMARK OF GENERAL
r---------,I
I
I
SWITCH CRAFT 61 HASF
TRANZORB IS A REGISTERED
13 EACH)
SHIELD
Configuration
Connector
SEMICONDUCTOR INDUSTRIES.
TEMPE AZ
+5 V
74LS14
i
SLOT READER
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE
SYSTEM INTERFACE
SUPPRESSION INTERFACE
Figure 1. Recommended Logic Interface (When earth ground is not available, connect shield to logic ground, as shown by dolled line).
"'_ _
""~
WIRE COLOR
13.6\0.53)
L"",,~---J
RED
Vs SUPPLY VOLTAGE
WHITE
Vo OUTPUT
BLACK
GROUND
N/A
N/C
N/C
N/A
CASE
HBCS-6XXX
NOTES:
1. DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETRESAND IINCHES).
Figure 2. Connector Specifications.
3-46
SHIELD IMUST BE
CONNECTED I
n
Mounting Considerations
Slot Reader
(:'~)r------------------------'
The slot reader (HBCS-700017100) is designed to be virtually tamper-proof when mounted using the two rear
mounting holes. In this case, the cable must be routed
from the rear of the slot reader through the mounting
surface (wall, door, etc.). For applications where a tamperproof installation is less of a concern, an optional mounting bracket (HBCS-7999) allows for more convenient surface mounting.
_ 7.0
~ (0.23)
When mounting the slot reader, the cable may either be
routed through the mounting surface (see above), or it
may be routed along grooves in the base and exit the side
of the slot reader at anyone of four points. This allows
flexibility in the mounting orientation.
ffi (a. DB}
.=
6.0
E 10.241
7 5.0
~ (0.20)
z
4.0
~ (0.16)
is 3.0
~ (0.12)
~
Q..
a
2.0
1.0
(0.04)
0.05
0.10
0.15
0.20
0.25
0.30
0.35
10.0021 10.0041 10.0061 10.0031 10.0101 10.0121 10.0141
MINIMUM SYMBOL RESOLUTION - mm (inches)
Optics/Electronics Module
The optics/electronics module (HBCS-705017150) is designed for applications which require a different slot width,
integration into a larger housing, or a fixed-beam stationary scanner. When using the optics/electronics~ module,
the operating distance from the front surface of the module
to the symbol will vary depending on the symbol resolution. Figure 3 shows the relationship between operating
range and minimum symbol resolution for a typical optics/
electronics module. This relationship was applied in the
design of the slot reader, where a slot width of 3.2 mm
(0.125 in.) insures excellent performance reading bar code
symbols which have a nominal resolution of 0.19 mm
(0.0075 in.) and include printing errors.
When mounting the optics/electronics module it is important that the screws be tightened with a minimum static
torque of 2.5 Nm (22 in.-Ibs.). This will insure that the
sealing gasket is compressed sufficiently to provide proper
sealing.
Rail
The rail (HBCS-7998) is designed for use with the optics/
electronics module in applications which require a different slot width. It may also be used in applications where it
is preferable to mount the optics/electronics module and
rail flush to the mounting surface instead of using the base
provided with the slot reader.
Figure 3. Typical Operaling Distance vs. Minimum Symbol
Resolution.
and spaces should cross the area between 1.14 mm (0.45
in.) and 1.40 mm (0.55 in.) from the bottom edge of the
card(s) or document(s).
The bars should be perpendicular to the bottom edge of
the card(s) or document(s), however, a skew of ±4 degrees
from the perpendicular is acceptable.
Maintenance Considerations
The slot reader and optics/electronics module include a
window which is slightly recessed in order to prevent
direct contact with the bar code symbol. This reduces
wear on both the window and the symbol. The window
may, however, become dirty over a period of time. If this
occurs, clean the window with a commercial glass cleaner.
Testing
Mounting Bracket
The mounting bracket (HBCS-7999) is designed to provide
a convenient way of mounting the slot reader, optics/
electronics module, and/or rail to a flat surface.
All Hewlett-Packard Digital Bar Code Slot Readers are
100% tested for performance and digitizing accuracy after
manufacture. This insures a consistent quality product.
More information about Hewlett-Packard's test procedures,
test set-up, and test Ifmits are available upon request.
Symbol Placement
The center of the slot reader's optical system is located
12.7 mm (0.50 in.) from the bottom of the slot. Consequently, bar code symbols to be read by the slot reader
must be positioned on the card(s) or document(s) at a
height which insures that all bars and spaces will cross a
line located 12.7 mm (0.50 in.) from the bottom edge of the
card(s) or document(s). For optimal performance, all bars
optional Features
For options such as special cables or connectors, contact
your nearest Hewlett-Packard sales office or authorized
representative.
3-47
Dimensions
SLOT READER
(HBCS-7000/7100)
OPTICS/ELECTRONICS MODULE
(HBCS-7050/7150)
r-t=~~~~~~
0.32
M5 X O.BO
TAPPED HOLE
2.0310.80)
.L....._:c;::~=====i.-..J -------1..
10.125)
12)
F~
#8-32
TAPPED HOLE
(2)
~~~~~~~~7~1~IA;..'--i1i~=I-==""'_===__"U~,,!___...L
CABLE
EXIT
12)
12.70
2.0310.80) DIA.
11.43
14.50)
'~{-
MAX.
1+-----1270 15.00) ~---.j
CABLE
EXIT
RAIL
(HBCS-7998)
if'75
10.69)
L-_.J.._ _ _ _ _ _
#8·32
f
TAPP~~ HDLE~~
2.7911.10)
t
I
_
_
...I.._...Jl~·80)
~
~7.6213.00)~ ~.I
~12.7015.00)
MOUNTING BRACKET
(HBCS-7999)
0.5010.196) DIA. THRU
16 PLCS)
1
T)
7.11
7.62
0.43 10.170) DIA. THRU
CSK 42° X 0.99 (a.39) DIA.
14 PLCS)
13.00)
0.50 (0.196) DIA. THRU
CSK 42· X 0.9910.39) DIA.
12 PLCS)
2.1610.85) DIA. THRU
NOTES,
1. MOUNTING HOLES ON HBCS·7000/7100 ARE SUITABLE FOR EITHER #10-a:2 OR
MS·O.SO SCREWS.
2. MOUNTING HOLES ON HBCS-7050/7150 ARE FOR #8-32 SCREWS,
3. MOUNTING HOLES ON HBCS-799S ARE FOR #8·32 SCREWS.
4. THICKNESS Of THE HBCS·79S9 MOUNTING BRACKET IS 3.2 mm (0.125 in.)
5. HBCS·7000/7100 SLOT READERS, HBCS·705017150 MODULES, AND HBCS·799B
RAILS HAVE A BLACK TEXTURED EPOXY FINISH. HBCS·7999 MOUNTING
BRACKETS HAVE AN ELECTROLESS NICKEL FINISH.
6. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE NOMINAL AND ARE STATED IN MILLIMETRES AND (INCHES).
3"48
~
1.07
[10.42)
0.5310.21)
Selection Guide
Dellcr '"
Part Number
HBCS-7000
p!JiS-7100
I» HBCS-7050
HBCS-7150
n
Slot Reader with 660 nm visible red light source and 0.19 mm (0.0075 in.) nominal
resoluti'bn.
Reader with 880 nm Infrared light source and 0.19 mm (0.0075 in.) nominal
lution.
tics/Electronics MOdule~with gso nm visible red light source and 0.19 rrfifl'
.22
A
1\=700nm. Vo=5V
Detector Area
Ao
.160
IN
TA=25°C
TA-70·CI
Fig.
Note
IF=O, Vo"'5V;
Refiectlon"'O%
12
mm2 Square. with Length=.4mm/Side
Emitter Electrical/Optical Characteristics at TA=25°C
Parameter
Symbol
Forward Voltage
VF
Reverse Breakdown Voltage
BVA
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Units
1.6
1.8
V
IF=35mA
V
IR=l00I'A
5
Conditions
Radiant Flux
0
0
9~%
70
i!:
50
a:
30
,-I
20
UJ
~
40
qO,3
·0,2
-0,1
80
:'l::>
70
0
"
"::>
60
UJ
50
:::i
~10%
I-d- ~
.
;::
"...
\
10
~
100
2
0
1\
60
"...
110
I
100
0,1
0
0,2
I\,
I\.
40
30
~
'"
- r--- -
I- -
90
20
'"
10
00
0.3
1
Ad - EDGE DISTANCE (mm)
UJ
'"02
51
UJ
a:
,-
~
~
I
~
70
60
;;:
10
oS
...2
\\.
"...
40
~
I
600
700
900
800
0,1
0,01
1000
/
If_
I
~
20
0
"",,'
/ :3I
1§
.,
~O'C
25'C"
V
I
UJ
::>
~
30
::
a:
a:
"
50
10
6
100
io-.
80
""5
Figure 11. Modulation Transfer Function
I"",
90
4
SPATIAL FREQUENCY (LINE PAIR/mm)
Figure 10. Step Edge Response
100
3
2
E
If
1,3
A - WAVELENGTH (nm)
I
1,5
1,4
1,6
1,7
v, - FORWARD VOLTAGE (VI
Figure 12. Detector Spectral Response
Figure 13. LED Forward Current vs. Forward Voltage
Characteristics
vee
1,2
REFLECTOR
11 0'C 1
I
1,0
REFERENCE
PLANE
2S'C
"r-- ;I \
::>
it
0,8
2
C
I
0,6
I
7(rc
UJ
>
~
1\.1
6
VI
V,
,\
0,4
1/
uJa:
~
660
v.. v
680
CATHODE
~
R,
--,
dt=",
lip
V
-
2
720
740
Vee
VOUT = 1 + R2/R,
R,
I
~sI
--'
8
"':"
~~
700
1
~
--4-
4
SUBSTRATE, CASE
~\
I~
l
0,2
0
640
ANODE
I
a:
3
~I
x
.......
It
-lpRF
~
~T
760
A - WAVELENGTH (nm)
Figure 14. Relative Radiant Flux vs. Wavelength
Figure 15. Photodiode Interconnection
3-55
V
VauT
RF
Flidl
-=:e..
HEWLETT
PACKARD
BAR CODE READERS
16800A
16801A
Features
Description
• THREE INDUSTRIAL BAR CODES
STANDARD:
- 3 of9 Code
- Interleaved 2 of 5Code
- Industrial 2 of 5 Code
The 16800A and 1,6801A are high performance bar code
readers. The 16800A includes a wide range of programmable features which allow the reader to be fully integrated into
sophisticated data entry systems. The, 16801A is non- ,
programmable, providing a more cost-effective solution for
applications which do not requlr~ programmability.
• AUTOMATIC CODE RECOGNITION
The standard reader supports three popular industrial bar
codes: 3 of 9 code, Interleaved 2 of 5 code, and Industrial 2 of
5 code. If more ~han one standard code is enabled, the
reader will automatically recognize which code is being
read. Options are available for reading UPC/EAN/JAN
codes, Coda bar code, and other bar codes. Bidirectional
scanning is provided for all bar codes supported.
• OPTIONAL BAR CODES AVAILABLE
UPC/EAN/JAN
- Codabar
- Others
• FLEXIBLE DUAL RS-232-C (V.24) DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
- Facilitates a Wide Variety of Configurations
• PROGRAMMABLE OPERATION (16800A only):
- Two LED Status Indicators
Beeper Control
Code Selection
Data Communication Configuration
Reader Operational Status
• HIGH PERFORMANCE DIGITAL WANDS:
-45 Degree Scan Angle
- Sealed Sapphire Tip ,
- Polycarbonate or Metal Case
.
,
• INTEGRAL POWER SUPPLY
The 16800A and 16801A may be configured with a wide
range of computer systems; including minicomputers, desktop computers, and personal computers. Dual RS-232-C
(V.24) ports facilitate, operation in both stand-alone and
eavesdrop configurations. In an eavesdrop configuration,
the reader will generally be operated in conjunction with an
RS-232-C terminal.
'
'
Interactive systems design is supported in the, 16800A
through programmable operator feedback and reader control features. A multi-tone'beeper and two LED indicators are
provided to allow simple, yet flexible audio and visual programmable feedback. Local operator feedback is provided
in the 16801A through a beeper which sounds to signify a
good read.
Reader performance can be optimized by selecting the wand
appropriate for the 'environment and the type of symbol
being read. The wands offer a 45 degree scan angle, a
rugged case, and a sealed sapphire tip. The sapphire tip may
be replaced by the user if it is damaged.
• TABLETOP OR WALL MOUNTABLE
• BUILT-IN SELF TEST
• WORLDWIDE HP SERVICE
3'-56
Applications
Bar codes offer a method of entering data into computers
which is fast, accurate, reliable, and which requires little
operator training. Implementation of a bar code system can
lead to increased productivity, reduced inventory costs,
improved accountability, increased asset visibility, and
reduced paperwork. Customer satisfaction will also improve
as a result of improved quality control, reduced shipping
errors, and reduced order and ship times. On-line, real-time
interactive systems will allow the user to take full advantage
of the contributions offered by bar code systems. The
16800A and 16801 A provide a high performance solution for
applications which require on-line bar code data entry.
The most common type of data stored in bar code is item
identification information used in a wide range of applications such as:
-
Inventory Control
Work-in-Process Tracking
Distribution Tracking
Order Processing
Records Management
Point-of-Sale
Government Packaging and Shipping
Bar codes can also be used in applications where information about an item or a transaction must be accurately
entered into the host computer. Item location, employee
identification, work steps, equipment settings, equipment
status, and inspection results are some of the types of information which can be entered using bar codes.
Typical configuration
The dual RS-232-C (V.24) output provided by the 16800A
and 16801 A allows a single reader to be configured in a wide
range of on-line applications. Three typical system configurations are outlined below:
• Stand-Alone Reader - The 16800Al16801A is in direct
communication with the host minicomputer, desktop
computer, or personal computer.
Computer
3-57
•
A cluster of 16800N16801As communicates with the host computer through a multiplexer.
Where the advantages of fiber optic data communications are desired, the Hewlett-Packard 39301 A Fiber
Optic Multiplexer can be used.
Multiplexed -
MUX
Computer
•
The 16800N16801A is in an eavesdrop
configuration between an RS~232-C terminal and the
host computer. The reader c;an be configured to transmit
to the computer, to the terminal, or to both
simultaneously.
Eavesdrop -
Computer
Terminal
Wand Selection
The 16800A and 16801 A bar code readers include HBCS5300 digital bar code wand which is capable of reading bar
code symbols which have nominal narrow bar/space widths
of 0.19 mm (0.0075 in.) or greater. This includes a wide
range of high, medium, and low resolution bar codes
including standard 3 of 9 code [0.19 mm (0.0075 in.)].
An optional HBCS-5500 digital bar code wand is available
for very high resolution codes with nominal narrow bar/
space widths of 0.13 mm (0.005 in.) to 0.20 mm (0.008 in.).
The 820 nm near-infrared emitter in the HBCS-5500 wand
also enables it to read the black-on-black bar codes used
in some security systems. This wand is not recommended
for dot matrix printed bar codes or colored bar codes.
The HBCS-5000 series wands feature a rugged polycarbonate case designed for light industrial and commercial
applications. Applications which require an industrial wand
are supported by the optional HBCS-6300 and HBCS-6500
digital bar code wands. These wands feature a solid metal
case and internal construction designed for abusive environments. The HBCS-6300 and HBCS-6500 have the same
bar code reading characteristics as the HBCS-5300 and
HBCS-5500, respectively.
All wands are also available under accessory product
numbers.
Code Selection
The 16800A and 16801A offer user flexibility in the implementation of the th ree standard bar codes:
• Single Code Selection or Automatic Code Recognition
(any combination of the three standard codes)
• Checksum Verification Selectable
• Variable Message Length up to 32 characters
3-58
• Selectable Message Length Check (Interleaved 2 of 5
code and Industrial 2 of 5 code)
• Any specified code resolution
Optional bar codes will also provide a high degree of user
flexibility. The code reading configuration is switch selectable. Additional information on bar code symbologies is
available in the Operating and Installation Manual and in
Application Note 1013 - "Elements of a Bar Code System".
16800A Additional Capabilities
The 16800A offers the advantage of programmable control
over all aspects of the code reading configuration. This
capability enables the applications software to determine
what code can be read depending on the type of data to be
entered. For example, the 3 of 9 code could be enabled for
entering item identification information and then the 3 of 9
code disabled and Interleaved 2 of 5 code enabled for entering a different type of data such as employee identification
or job status. This allows different barcodes to be used in the
system while at the same time preventing the operator from
entering the wrong type of data into the data base.
Data Communications
The 16800A and 16801A provide a flexible dual RS-232-C
(V.24) serial ASCII data communications capability which
can support a wide range of system configurations. The
reader offers the user the choice of full 01 half duplex transmission when in character mode and, if in an eavesdrop
configuration with a terminal, the reader can also be operated in block mode. The user can tailor the reader's data
communication configuration to the application by selecting the appropriate transmission mode (full/half duplex),
operating mode (character/block mode), data rate, parity,
terminator, stop bits, and inter-character delay on the readily
accessible 01 P switches. Request to Send/Clear to Send and
DC1/DC3 (XON/XOFF) traffic control is available.
16800A Additional Capabilities
The 16800A offers expanded data communications capabilities with the added benefit of programmable control. In
addition to programmable control of the transmission mode
(full/half duplex) and the operating mode (character/block
mode), the 16800A provides the following programmable
features:
• User-definable header (up to 10 characters)
• User-definable terminator (up to 10 characters)
• DC1/DC3 (XON/XOFF) traffic control enable/disable
3-59
operator Feedbacl<
The 16800A and 16801 A provide good read feedback to the
operator by sounding an integral beeper. Beeper volume
can be adjusted as appropriate for the application.
16800A Additional Capabilities
Interactive operator feedback is provided in the 16800A
through two programmable LED indicators and programmable beeper control. The user has programmable control
over operator feedback as follows:
o Local good read beep enable/disable
o Local good read beep tone (16 tones available)
o Computer commanded beep (16 tones available)
o Red LED Indicator on/off
o Green LED Indicator on/off
Programmable operator feedback can be used to prompt the
operator, to signify that data has been validated by the computer, to differentiate between different workstations in
close proximity, to provide additional LED feedback in
extremely noisy environments, or for a variety of other
reasons.
Reader Control and status
(16800A only>
The 16800A provides the user with added programmable
control over the reader's operation and also enables the user
to obtain on-line status information regarding the reader's
configuration and functionality. The programmable control
and status features are described below:
Scanner Enable/Disable - When disabled, further bar code
scans are ignored.
Single Read Enable/Disable - When enabled, a single bar
code scan can be entered between "Next Read" commands.
Hard Reset - Commands the reader to return to the operating configuration prescribed by the DIP switch settings. An
automatic self-test is also executed.
Status Request - Commands the reader to send the status
of its operating configuration to the computer.
Specifications
Environmental Conditions
Temperature, Free Space Ambient:
-40 to 75° C (-40 to +167° F)
Non-Operating:
Operating:
0 to+55° C (+32 to 131 ° F)
General
Typical Wand Reading Characteristics:
Parameter
Units
Minimum
Recommended
Nominal Narrow
Element Width
HBCS-5300 HBCS-5500
or
or
HBCS-6300 HBCS-6500
mm
in.
0.190
0.0075
0.127
0.005
THtAngie
degrees
0-45
0-45
Scan Speed
cm/sec
In./sec
7.6-127
3-50
7.6-127
3-50
Wavelength
nm
655
820
Bar Codes Supported:
Standard: 3 of 9 Code (ANSI MH10.8M-1983;
MIL-STD-1189)
Interleaved 2 of 5 Code (ANSI MH10.8M-1983)
Industrial 2 of 5 Code
Optional:
UPC/EAN/JAN (Option 001)
Codabar (Option 002)
Others (contact factory)
Data Communications
5 to 95% (non-condensing)
Humidity:
Altitude:
Non-Operating:
Operating:
Shock:
30g, 11 ms, 1/2 sine
PhYSical Specifications
Weight, including wand:
2.0 kg (4,4 pounds)
Weight, polycarbonate
wand only:
(including coiled cord)
0.13 kg (0.3 pounds)
Weight, industrial
wand only:
(including coiled cord)
0.16 kg (0,4 pounds)
Reader Dimensions:
134 mmW x 23 mmD x 20 mmH
(5.3 inW x 0.9 in.D x 0.8 in.H)
158 mmW x 24 mmD x 18 mmH
(6.2 inW x 0.9 in.D x 0.7 in.H)
Industrial Wand
Dimensions:
Parity:
O's, 1's, Odd, Even. Switch
Selectable.
Wand Cord Length:
Terminator:
CR, CR/LF, Horizontal Tab
(HT), None. Switch Selectable.
Stop Bits:
1 or 2. Switch Selectable.
Inter-Character Delay:
30 ms or None. Switch
Selectable.
Standard Asynchronous
Communications
Interface:
Transmission Modes:
Operating Modes:
Traffic Control:
EIA Standard RS-232-C (CCITT
V.24)
Full or half duplex, asynchronous. Switch selectable.
Programmable in 16800A.
Character or Block Mode.
Switch selectable. Programmable in 16800A.
100V (+5%,
(Opt. 210)
120V (+5%,
(Standard)
220V (+5%,
(Opt. 222)
240V (+5%,
(Opt. 224)
Power Consumption:
-10%) at 48-66 Hz
-10%) at 48-66 Hz
-10%) a148-66 Hz
-10%) at 48-66 Hz
20 VA maximum
Regulatory Agency Approvals
RFI/EMI:
- VDE 0871 level B
- FCC Class B
Safety Approvals:
-
Request to Send/Clear to Send.
255 Characters
94 cm (37 in.) - retracted
206 cm (81 in.) - extended
Power Requirements
Input Voltage:
DC1/DC3 (XON/XOFF). Switch
Selectable. Programmable in
16800A.
Output Buffer:
260 mmW x 189 mmD X 71 mmH
(10.25 inW x 7,4 in.D x 2.8 in.H)
Polycarbonate Wand
Dimensions:
110,300,600,1200,2400,4800,
9600 baud. Switch Selectable.
User defined. Maximum of 10
characters each.
0.38 mm (0.015 in.) POp,
5 to 55 to 5 Hz, 3 axis
Vibration:
Data Rate:
Programmable Header/
Terminator (16800A
only):
Sea level to 15300 metres
(50,000 feet)
Sea level to 4600 metres
(15,000 feet)
UL478, UL114 forEDP and office equipment
CSA C22.2-154 for EDP equipment
VDE 0730 part 2P for EDP and office equipment
Complies with IEC standard #380 and #435 for EDP
and office equipment
Installation
All product preparation and installation can be performed by
the owner/user. Refer to the Operating and Installation
Manual supplied with the unit for detailed instructions.
3-60
Supporting Literature
Siegler ADM-31 to a DEC PDP-ll Computer", Publication
Number: 5953-9365 (Available through local sales office)
For further information refer to:
Application Bulletin 61, "HP 16800A/16801A Bar Code
Reader Configuration Guide for an IBM 3276/3278 Terminal", Publication Number: 5953-9361 (Available through
local sales office)
16800A/16801 A Option 001 Data Sheet, Publication Number
5954-2156 (Available through local sales office)
16800A/16801 A Option 002 Data Sheet, Publication Number
5954-2157 (Available through local sales office)
16800A/16801A Operating and Installation Manual, PIN:
16800-90001
16800A/16801 A Option 001 Operating and Installation Manual Addendum, PIN: 16800-90004
16800A/16801 A Option 002 Operating and Installation Manual Addendum, PIN: 16800-90006
Application Note 1013, "Elements of a Bar Code System",
Publication Number: 5953-7732 (Available through local
sales office)
Application Bulletin 59, "HP 16800A/16801A Bar Code
Reader Configuration Guide for a DEC VT-l00 or Lear
Application Bulletin 62, "HP 16800A/16801A Bar Code
Reader Configuration Guide for an IBM 4955F Series 1 Process Control CPU/Protocol Converter and an IBM 3101
Terminal", Publication Number: 5953-9362 (Available
through local sales office)
Application Bulletin 63, "HP 16800A/16801A Bar Code
Reader Configuration Guide for an IBM 5101 Personal
Computer", Publication Number: 5953-9363 (Available
through local sales office)
Application Bulletin 68, "HP 16800A/16801A Bar Code
Reader Configuration Guide for a MICOM Micro 280 Message Concentrator", Publication Number: 5953-9382 (Available through local sales office)
Ordering Information
PROOUCTNO.
DESCRIPTION
16800A
PROGRAMMABLE BAR CODE READER - Includes HBGS-5300 digital wand, Internal power
supply for 120V line voltage, power cord, and Operating and Installation Manual. Reader supports
3 of 9 Code, Interleaved 2 of 5 Code, and Industrial 2 of 5 Code.
16801 A
BAR CODe READER -Includes HBCS-5300 digital wand, internal power $upplyfor 120V line
voltage, power cord, and Operating and Installation Manual. Reader supports 3 of 9 Code,
Interleaved 2 of 5 Code, and Industrial 2 of 5 Code.
-001
-002
-210
-222
-224
Add UPG/EAN/JAN code reading capability; Delete Industrial 2 of 5 code
Add Codabar code reading capability; Delete Industrial 2 of 5 code
100V power supply
220V power supply
240V power supply
-320
Delete HBCS-5300 digital wand; Add HBCS-5500 ditlgal wand
-400
Delete HBCS-5300 digital wand; Add HBCS-6300 Industrial digital wand
-420
Delete HBCS-5300 digital wand; Add HBCS-6500 industrial digital wand
-610
Add Wall Mounting Kit
-910
Additional Operating and Installation Manual
ACCESSORIES
16830A
General Purpose Digital Bar Code Wand
16832A
High Resolution Digital Bar Code Wand
16840A
Industrial (Metal) General Purpose Bar Code Wand
16842A
HBCS-2999
HBCS-4~99
Industrial (Metal) High Resolution Bar Code Wand
HBCS-5300/5500 Replacement Sapphire Tip
HBCS-6300/6500 Replaoement Sapphire Tip
16800-61000
Wall Mount Kit
HEDS-0200
20 fool Wand Extension Cord
03075-40006
17355A
External Wand Holder
2.7 metres (9 feet) Male-Male RS-232-C cable. Shielded.
LITERATURE
16800-90001
16800-90004
16800-90006
Operating and Installation Manual
Option 001 Operating and Installation Manual Addendum
Option 002 Operating and Installation Manual Addendum
3-61
Flidl
HEWLETT
II:~ PACKARD
CODABAR
BAR CODE READERS
16800A
OPTION 002
16801A
OPTION 002
Features
Applications
• CODABAR CODE READING CAPABILITY,
Coda bar code is commonly used for material tracking,
customer Identification, and traceability in four specific
application areas:
'. TWO STANDARD INDUSTRIAL BARCODES
- 30f9Code
- Interleaved 2 of 5 Code
-
• AUTOMATIC CODE RECOGNITION
• HIGH PERFORMANCE DIGITAL WANDS
..,. 45 Degree Scan Angle
- Replaceable, Sealed, Sapphire Tip
- Polycarbonate or Metal Case
Description
Option 002 adds bar code reading capability for Codabar
to the HP16800A Programmable Bar Code 'Reader and
HP16801A Non-Programmable Bar Code Reader. Transmission of the start and stop characters which are part of
each Coda bar symbol is user-selectable.
,Two standard industrial codes, the 3 of 9 code and Interleaved 2 6f 5 code, may also be read with Option 002.
These two codes may be enabled individually, simultaneously, and/or in conjunction with the Codabar code.
Industrial 2 of 5 code reading capability, available with the
standard HP16800A and HP16801A, is not provided with
Option 002.
3-62
Libraries
Hospitals
FilmProcessing
Package Tracking
The 3 of 9 code is also popular' in these applications,
especially where an alphanumeric code is preferred. In
some circumstances, both the 3 of 9 code and Codabar
code may need to be read interchangeably. This capability
is provided by the automatic code recognition feature of
the HP16800A and HP16801A.
The 3 of 9 code. and Interleaved 2 of 5 code are generaily
preferred in industrial applications and in applications
which involve interfacility or intercompany movement of
goods. These applications include:
-
Inventory control
tracking
Distribution tracking
Records management
Government packaging and shipping
Labor reporting
Asset management
Work~in-process
wand Selection
Ordering Information
The HP 16800A and HP 16801A Bar Code Readers include
an HBCS-5300 digital bar code wand which is capable of
reading bar code symbols which have nominal narrow
bar/space widths of 0.19 mm (0.0075 in.! or greater. This
wand is recommended for reading all low resolution bar
codes, such as those produced with dot matrix printers,
and for reading high resolution 3 of 9 and Interleaved 2 of
5 bar codes. It may also be used to read most high resolution Codabar symbols.
An optional HBCS-5500 digital bar code wand is available
for very high resolution codes have nominal narrow
bar/space widths of 0.13 mm (0.005 in.! to 0.20 mm (0.008
in.!. This wand may provide superior performance when
reading high resolution Codabar symbols since this code
has a nominal narrow bar width of 0.17 mm (0.0065 in.>. An
820 nm near-infrared emitter enables the HBCS-5500 to
read black-and-white bar codes and the black-on-black bar
codes used in some security systems.
Applications which require an industrial wand are supported
by the optional HBCS-6300 and HBCS-6500 digital bar
code wands. These wands feature a solid metal case and
internal construction designed for abusive environments.
The HBCS-6300 and HBCS-6500 have the same bar code
reading characteristics as the HBCS-5300 and HBCS-5500,
respectively.
Product
Number
Programmable Bar Code Reader
Includes HBCS-5300 digital wand,
internal power supply for 120 V line
voltage, power cord, and Operating
and Installation Manuals. Reader
supports Codabar, 3 of 9, and
Interleaved 2 of 5 codes.
16801A
-002
Non-Programmable Bar Code Reader
Includes HBCS-5300 dig7tal wand,
internal power supply lor'20 V line
voltage, power cord, and Operating
and Installation Manuals. Reader
supports Codabar, 3 of 9, and
Interleaved 2 of 5 codes.
100V Power Supply
220V Power Supply
240V Power Supply
Delete HBCS-5300 digital wand;
add HBCS-5500 ditigal wand
Delete HBCS-5300 digital wand;
add HBCS-6300 industrial digital wand
Delete HBCS-5300 digital wand;
add HBCS-6500 Industrial digital wand
Add Wail Mounting Kit
Additional Operating and Installation
Manuals
-210
-222
·224
-320
-400
Supporting Literature
-420
For further information refer to:
-610
-910
16800Al16801A Option 002 Operating and Installation
Manual Addendum, PIN: 16800-90006
16800Al16801A Operating and Installation Manual,
PIN: 16800-90001
16800Al16801A Data Sheet, Publication No: 5954·2155
3-63
DescrlpUon
16aobA
-002
FliP'l
a:t:.
HEWLETT
PACKARD
UPC/EAN/JAN
BAR CODE READERS
16800A
OPTION 001
16801A
OPTION 001
Features
Description
• FLEXIBLE COMMERCIAL CODE READING
CAPABILITY
- UPC-A, UPC-E
- EAN-S, EAN-13
- JAN-S, JAN-13
- 2-Digit Supplemental Encodation
- 5-Digit Supplemental Encodation
Option 001 adds bar code reading capability for the Universal Product Code (UPC), European Article Numbering
Code (EAN), and Japanese Article Numbering Code (JAN)
to the HP 16800A Programmable Bar Code Reader and HP
16801A Non-Programmable Bar Code Reader.
• TWO STANDARD INDUSTRIAL BAR CODES
- 3 of9 Code
- Interleaved 2 of 5 Code
• AUTOMATIC CODE RECOGNITION
• COMPATIBLE WITH UPC SHIPPING
CONTAINER SYMBOL SPECIFICATION
• HIGH PERFORMANCE DIGITAL WANDS
- 45 Degree Scan Angle
- Replaceable, Sealed, Sapphire Tip
- Polycarbonate or Metal Case
All popular versions of the UPC, EAN and JAN bar codes
may be enabled, including UPC-A, UPC-E, EAN-8,
EAN-13, JAN-8 and JAN-13. All codes may be read simultaneously, or only UPC-A and UPC-E may be enabled.
UPC, EAN, and JAN codes with complementary 2-digit or
5-digit supplemental encodations, or "add-ons", may be
read in one of two ways. If UPC, EAN, and JAN codes are
enabled but neither 2-digit nor 5-digit supplemental encodations are enabled, then symbols printed with, or without,
supplements can be read and only the main symbol will be
output. If 2-digit (or 5-digitl supplemental encodations are
enabled, then only symbols with 2-digit (or 5-digitl supplements can be read and both the main symbol and the
supplement are output. 2-digit and 5-digit supplemental
encodations may be enabled simultaneously.
Two standard industrial codes, the 3 of 9 code and Interleaved 2 of 5 code, may also be read with Option 001.
These two codes may be enabled individually, simultaneously, and/or in conjunction with the UPC, EAN, and JAN
codes. The implementation of the Interleaved 2 of 5 code
is compatible with the UPC Shipping Container Symbol
Specification.
3-64
colored bar codes and, therefore, is not recommended for
reading the UPC, EAN, and JAN bar codes.
Industrial 2 of 5 code reading capability, available with the
standard HP 16800A and HP 16801 A, is not provided with
Option 001.
Applications which require an industrial wand are supported
by the optional HBCS-6300 and HBCS-6500 digital bar
code wands. These wands feature a solid metal case and
internal construction deSigned for abusive environments.
The HBCS-6300 and HBCS-6500 have the same bar code
reading characteristics as the HBCS-5300 and HBCS-5500,
respectively.
Applications
Option 001 to the HP 16800A and HP 16801A Bar Code
Readers provides an excellent solution for both commercial and industrial applications by supporting the popular
UPC, EAN, and JAN codes as well as the industry standard 3 of 9 and Interleaved 2 of 5 codes.
Supporting Literature
Typical applications for UPC, EAN, and JAN codes
include:
-
For further information, refer to:
16800Al16801A Option 001 Operating and Installation
Manual Addendum, PIN: 16800-90004
Point-of-sale
Inventory control in retail stores
Order entry for retail products
Tracking periodical and/or book returns
Tracking coupon receipts
Production line tracking in consumer products manufacturing plants
16800Al16801A Operating and Installation Manual, PIN:
16800-90001
16800Al16801A Data Sheet, Publication No.: 5954·2155
Ordering Information
The 3 of 9 code and Interleaved 2 of 5 code are commonly
used for work-in-process tracking and inventory control
applications. Some applications may require that the 3 of 9
code or Interleaved 2 of 5 code be read interchangeably
with the UPC, EAN, and/or JAN codes. For example, products which are marked with a UPC code may be shipped
in a container marked with the Interleaved 2 of 5 code.
The automatic code recognition capability of the HP
16800A and HP 16801A allows these codes to be read
interchangeably.
PrO'aUel
Number
Description
16800A
-001
PROGRAMMABLE BAR CODE
READER
Includes HBCS-5300 digital wand,
internal power supply for 120 V line
voltage, power cord, and Operating
and Installation Manuals. Reader
supports UPC, EAN, JAN, 3 of 9, and
Interleaved 2 of 5 codes.
16801A
-001
NON-PROGRAMMABLE BAR CODE
READER
Includes HBCS-5300 digital wand,
internal power supply for 120 V Hne
voltage, power cord, and Operating
and Installation Manuals. Reader
supports UPC, EAN, JAN, 3 of 9, and
Interleaved 2 of 5 codes.
Typical applications for 3 of 9 code and Interleaved 2 of 5
code include:
-
Inventory control
Work-in-process tracking
Distribution tracking
Records management
Government packaging and shipping
Labor reporting
Asset management
Wand Selection
The HP 16800A and HP 16801A Bar Code Readers include
an HBCS-5300 digital bar code wand which is capable of
reading bar code symbols which have nominal narrow
bar/space widths of 0.19 mm (0.0075 in.) or greater. A 655 nm
visible red emitter enables the HBCS-5300 to read a wide
variety of colored bar codes. This wand is recommended
for reading the UPC, EAN, and JAN bar codes
An optional HBCS-5500 digital bar code wand is available
for very high resolution codes having nominal narrow
bar/space widths of 0.13 mm (0.005 in.) to 0.20 mm (0.008 in.)
An 820 nm near-infrared emitter enables the HBCS-5500 to
read black-and-white bar codes and the black-on-black bar
codes used in some security systems. It cannot read
-210
100 V power supply
-222
220 V power supply
-224
240 V power supply
-320
Delete HBOS-5300 digital wand;
add HBOS-5500 ditigal wand
-400
Delete HBOS-5300 digital wand;
add HBCS-6300 industrial digital wand
-420
Delete HBOS-5300 digital wand;
add HBCS-6500 industrial digital wand
-610
Add Wall Mounting Kit
-910
Additional Operating and Installation
Manuals
3-65
- - - - -_._.__..
-
..
__ . - - - _
..
_--
Motion Sensing and Control
•
•
•
Optical Encoders
Digital Potentiometers
Motion Control ICs
Motion Sensing and Control
Motion Sensing
New Products
As an extension of our emitter/detector systems
capability, Hewlett-Packard has developed a family of
motion sensing products. These product include optical
shaft encoders, optical encoder modules for closed loop
servo applications and digital potentiometers for manual
input applications. HP's Optical products provide a
digital link converting mechanical shaft rotation into
TTL logic level signals.
Hewlett-Packard's new HEDS-9000 and HEDS-9100
series optical encoder modules provide sophisticated
rotary motion detection at a low price making it ideal
for high volume applications. The modular design
approach incorporates a unique photodetector array
allowing easy assembly and encoder design flexibility.
Standard resolutions for these modules range from 96
to 1000 counts per revolution.
Our HEDS-SOOO and HEDS-6000 series encoders may
be used in a wide variety of closed loop servo
applications varying from computer peripherals and
professional audio-video systems to automated
production equipment. Encoders also find widespread
use in industrial and instrument applications in which
digital information is needed to monitor rotary motion.
Hewlett-Packard has also introduced the HEDS-9200
series encoder modules which sense linear movement.
These encoder modules are based on the same
innovative emitter/detector technology as the HEDS9000 series, however they are optimized to sense linear
position. These linear encoder modules are extremely
tolerant to misalignment and well suited for printers,
copiers, x-y tables and a variety of other industrial and
office automation products.
The HP encoder system takes advantage of a
specialized optical design and a custom integrated
circuit to deliver superior performance in a compact
package. The design also minimizes the mechanical
tolerances required of the shaft and mounting surface.
The HEDS-SOOO and HEDS-6000 encoders are
available with a range of options including resolution
and shaft sizes.
The HEDS-7S00 series digital potentiometer is a 28
mm diameter encoder completely assembled with a
shaft and bushing, making it suitable for panel
mounting. The device converts manual rotary inputs
into digital outputs using the same high performance
emitter/detector technology used in our encoders. A
digital potentiometer can be used as an input
mechanism in a variety of applications including: test
and measurement equipment, CAD-CAM systems, and
positioning tables.
4-2
---------
-
The HEDS-5500 is a quick assembly, low cost,
complete optical encoder. This product does not require
adhesive, special tools, or any last minute adjustments
to complete the assembly process. The encoder features
high performance based on the HEDS-9100 series
encoder module and comes in a wide variety of
resolutions and shaft sizes.
Motion Control
To complement the motion sensing products, HP has
released two motion control ICs. The HCTL-lOOO
general purpose motion control.IC greatly simplifies
the task of designing digital motion control systems.
The HCTL-1000 compares .the command position or
velocity from a host processor to the actual position or
velocity from an incremental encoder, and outputs an
appropriate motor command using one of four
programmable position and velocity control modes.
Some of its other features include a programmable
digital filter, an electronic commutator, and a
quadrature decoder/counter.
The HCTL-2000 Quadrature Decoder Counter IC
provides a one chip, easy to implement solution to
interfacing the quadrature output of an encoder or
digital potentiometer to a microprocessor. It includes a
quadrature decoder, a 12 bit up/down state counter,
and an 8 bit bus interface. The use of Schmitt triggered
inputs and a digital noise filter allows reliable operation
in noisy environments.
For more information on these new product
developments, contact your local Hewlett-Packard
Components Field Engineer, or write Hewlett-Packard
Optoelectronics Division, 640 Page Mill Road, Palo
Alto, California 94304.
4-3
Motion Sensing and Control
Optical Encoder Modules
Package Outline Drawing
Part No.
/ofOF=~
oox g ~
@[I]
I I ffi
Resolution
Page No.
D
A.B
A 500 CPR
B 1000 CPR
HEDS-9100
OPT DO 0
A.B
K 96 CPR
C 100 CPR
o 192 CPR
E 200 CPR
F 256 CPR
G 360 CPR
H 400 CPR
A 500 CPR
I 512 CPR
4-7
IOND
2 DO NOT CONNECT
~
XXAA J:
Channels
HEDS'9000
OPT D 0 0
P=-
! ~~~
A
5 CH. B
~I=~
D
A.B
Part No.
Channels
I
D
L 120 LPI
M 127 LPI
•. 150 LPI
HEDS-9200
OPT rOO
4-11
I
4-15
Quick Assembly Encoder - HEDS-5500 Series
Option Code
Package Outline Drawing
Resolution
Shaft Size
D
CD
K 96 CPR
C 100 CPR
0 192 CPR
E 200 CPR
F 256 CPR
G 360 CPR
H 400 CPR
A 500 CPR
I 512 CPR
01
02
03
04
05
06
11
12
14
t
t
HEDS-5500
~.
-.~ ~ ~i~ ~~ =~.A
~.~
PIN =5 - CH.B
~""'OO"':H
OPTDCD
A,B
t~
~ ~i~;~: ~~D
J
28 mm Diameter Encoders -
Page No.
4-19
2mm
3mm
1/8 in.
5/32 in.
3/16 in.
1/4 in.
4mm
6mm
5mm
HEDS-5000 Series
Option Code
Package Outline Drawing
Part No.
Channels
Resolution
D
.
.,,)
~~C:\
a~'
HEDS-5000
OPT 0
OJ
HEDS-5010
OPT 0
A, B
OJ
I
4-4
A, B, I
C 100 CPR
o 192 CPR
E 200 CPR
F 256 CPR
G 360 CPR
H 400 CPR
A 500 CPR
I 512 CPR
J.-
Shaft Size
4-25
o:J
01
02
03
04
05
06
11
14
..
Page No.
2mm
3mm
1/8 in.
5/32 in.
3/16 in.
1/4 in.
4mm
5mm
56 mm Diameter Encoders - HEDS-6000 Series
Option Gode
Package Outline Drawing
Part No.
Ghannels
HEDS·6000
OPT 0 CD
A. B
HEDS-6010
OPTD CD
A. B, I
Resolution
D
E
H
A
I
200 CPR
400 CPR
500 CPR
512 CPR
B 1000 CPR
J 1024 CPR
Shalt Size
OJ
05
06
07
DB
09
10
11
12
13
Page No.
4-33
3/16 in.
1/4 in.
5/16 in.
3/B in.
1/2 in.
5/B in.
4mm
6mm
Bmm
Digital Potentiometer - HEDS-7500 Series
Package Outline Drawing
&
Part No.
Resolution
Termination
Page No,
HEDS-7500
256 CPR
Color Coded Wire
4-41
HEDS-7501
256 CPR
Ribbon Cable
Motion ControllCs - HCTL-XXXX Series
Package Outline
Part No.
NC·[~POE
2
39 ~
AD1/0Bl [
3
38 b"ALE
AD2/DB2 [
4
37
AD3/DB3 [
5
36
6
35 ] Vee
ADS/CBS [
7
34 ] EXTCLK
DB6 [
8
33 J'INDEX
DB7 [
9
32 ] Vss
Vss [
10
31 ] CHA
Vee [
11
4-43
30 ]
HCTL-2000
Quadrature Decoder/Counter IC
4-67
CHB
29 ] PHD
13
28 ] PHC
LlMIT[ 14
27
STOpe 15
PULSE [
General Purpose Motion ControllC
J R/W
J ·RESET
AD4/DB4 [
lNIT [
Page
No.
HCTL-1000
cs
ADO/DBO [
PROF[ 12
Description
26
16
25
SIGN [
17
24
Mea [
18
23
Mel [
19
22
Me2 [
20
21
P
P
P
P
P
PHS
PHA
Me7
MeG
MCS
P
P
MC4
Me3
• SHOULD BE LEFT FLOATING.
oo[~JVoo
elK [
2
SEL [
15
J
01
3
14 ] 02
DE/[ 4
13 JD3
RST/[ 5
12 JD4
CHS[ 6
'1J05
CHA,[ 7
10] 06
Vss [
B
9
P
07
4-5
Convenience Assembly Tools for 28 mm Diameter Encoders - Not Required
Page
Pa~kage
Outline Drawing
Part No.
Description
HEDS-8930
HEDS-5000 Series Tool Kit
•
•
•
•
Holding ScreWdriVer
Torquelimiting Screwdriver
HEDS-8920 Hub Puller.
HEDS-8922 Gap Setter, .'
HEDS-892X
Centering Cones
• Aidin High Volume Assembly
• Order in Appropriate Shaft Size '
No_
4-25
",':.
'.' ",
4-6
TWO CHANI\jEL
O~l~AL INeREME~TAL
~!NCODER MODULE
HEDS-9000
SERIES
Features
• HIGH PERFORMANCE
• HIGH RESOLUTION
• LOWCOST
• EASY TO MOUNT
• NO SIGNAL ADJUSTMENT REQUIRED
o INSENSITIVE TO RADIAL AND AXIAL PLAY
• SMALL SIZE
• -40 0 C to 1000 C OPERATING TEMPERATURE
o TWO CHANNEL QUADRATURE OUTPUT
• TTL COMPATIBLE
• SINGLE 5 V SUPPLY
Description
The standard resolutions presently avaihible are 500 CPR
and 1000 CPR for use with a HEDS-6100 series codewheel
or the equivalent. Consult local Hewlett-Packard sales representatives for custom resolutions.
The HEDS-9000 series is a high performance, low cost,
optical incremental encoder module. When operated in conjunction with a codewheel, this module detects rotary
position. The module consists of a lensed LED source and a
detector IC enclosed in a small C-shaped plastic package.
Due to a highly collimated light source and a unique photodetector array, the module is extremely tolerant to mounting
misalignment.
Applications
The HEDS-9000 provides sophisticated motion detection at
a low cost, making it ideal for high volume applications.
Typical applications include printers, plotters, tape drives,
and factory automation equipment.
The two channel digital outputs and the single 5 V supply
input are accessed through four 0.025 inch square pins
located on 0.1 inch centers.
ESD WARNING: NORMAL HANDLING PRECAUTIONS
SHOULD BE TAKEN TO AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE.
package Dimensions
OPTION
CODE
ALIGNMENT
RECESS
DATE COPE
NorE I
t
1.85(1l·07~.-1
m
2.41 (O·085l
MAX.
I I
,-jl
I.S~\~~O)
11.•7
{O.GSOI
~
-
SIDEA
xx • WORK WEEK
ALIGNMENT
RECESS
12.07 (OA15)
MAX.
3.0, (0.119) MAX.
1-10028 (0.405) MAX.
NOTE 1: YY • YEAR
DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETERS AND (INCHES)
II
4.75 OPTle:AL
(0.1871 CENTER
[ : : REF.
•
END VIEW
4-7
SIDEB
output Waveforms
Block Diagram
r-, r--------------,
I
I I
I
I I
I Vee
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
4
I
I
I
CHANNEL A
I3
~2
w
o
...:::>
CHANNEL B
I5
12
::;
I
"
I
I
I
I
CHANNEL B
EMITTER SECTION
CODE
WHEEL·
~
IGNO
L
I ______________
'- _______ ...JI
1
DETECTOR SECTION
ROTATION
Theory of operation
1 Shaft Rotation = 360 mechanical degrees
= N cycles
The HEDS-9000 is a C-shaped emitter/detector module.
Coupled with a codewheel it translates the rotary motion of
a shaft into a two-chan riel digital output.
As seen in the block diagram, the module contains a single
Light Emitting Diode (LED) as its light source. The light is
collimated into a parallel beam by means of a single lens
located directly over the LED. OppOSite the emitter is the
integrated detector circuit. This IC consists of multiple sets
of photodetectors and the signal processing circuitry necessary to produce the digital waveforms.
The codewheel rotates between the emitter and detector,
causing the light beam to be interrupted. by the pattern of
spaces and bars on the codewheel. The photodiodes which
detect these interruptions are arranged in a pattern that
corresponds to the radius and design of the codawheel.
These detectors are also spaced such that a light period on
one pair of detectors corresponds to a dark period on the
adjacent pair of detectors. The photodiode outputs are then
fed through the Signal processing circuitry resulting in A, A,
Band· B. Two comparators receive these Signals and produce the final outputs for channels A and B. bue to this
integrated phasing technique, the digital output of channel
A is in quadrature with that of channel B (90 degrees out of
phase).
1 cycle (c) = 360 electrical degrees (0 e)
. = 1 bar and window pair
Pulse Width (P): The number of electrical degrees that an
output is high during 1 cycle. This value is nominally 180 °e
or'h cycle.
Pulse Width Error (IlP): The deviation, in electrical degrees,
of the pulse width from its ideal value of 180 ° e.
State Width (S): The number of electrical degrees between
a transition in the output of channel A and the neighboring
transition in the output of channel B. There are 4 states per
cycle, each nominally 90 °e.
State Width Error (IlS): The deviation, in electrical degrees,
of each state width from its ideal value of 90° e.
Phase (w/rPb
0.7
1.4
Lw
1.8(.07)
Window Length
Absolute Maximum
Codewheel Radius
2.3(.09)
Units
mm(inch)
Rop +l.9(Om5) mm(inch)
Rc
4-9
Noles
Includes eccentricity errors
Mounting Considerations
ALIGNING BOSS
0.76 10.030i HIGH IMAX)
2.36 (O.093)±O.025(O.001) DIA.
0.25(0.010) x 450 CHAMFER
2 PLACES
CDDEWHEEL
ARTWORK SIDE
+-+---+---O,~
~UNTING
i
r- ""
----->..~ ~ - I
0\
cp\
PLANE
~'~:~~i:~~B)
2 PLACES
--I
OPTICAL CENTER
~ I~
i
20.83 (0.820)
12.60 !0.496) 21.08 10.830)
MOUNTING
PLANE
ALIGNING BOSS
0.76 10.030) HIGH IMAX)
2.36 (0 093l±O.025(O.OO1) DIA.
MAX. 4.4510.175)
NOTE 1
ROP+(:'l;71
~'~~~CO~~1 x 45
0
CHAMFER
NOTE1: THESE DIMENSIONS INCLUDE SHAFT
END PLAY, AND CODEWHEEL WARP.
Figure 2. Mounting Plane Side A.
Figure 3. Mounting Plane Side B.
Connectors
Manufacturer
Pari Number
Mounting Surface
AMP
103686-4
640442-5
80th
Side 8
6erg
Both
65039-032 with
4S25X-000 terminals
Molex
2695 series with
2759 series
terminals
SETSCREW
2·56
HOLLOW OVAL
POINT
SideB
rr=~
25,4
Figure 4. Connector Specifications
18,0
IJ~j
Ordering Information
. . "lJ
[[@]
(O,334±O,020)
Re$olution
(Cycles per Revolution)
A - 500 cpr
B-1000cpr
UNITSmm(lNCHES)
Shaft Diameter
05 - 3/16 IN. 11 - 4 mm
06 - 1/4 IN.
12 - 6 mm
07 - 5/16 IN. 13 - 8 mm
OS -SIS IN.
09-1/2 IN.
10 -5/SIN.
Figure 5. HEDS-6100 Codewheel
4-10
FliO'l
HEWLETT
~e.. PACKARD
TWO CHANNEL
OPTICAL INCREMENTAL
ENCOOER MODULE
11 mm, optical RadiLis
HEpS-9100
SERIES
Features
• HIGH PERFORMANCE
• HIGH RESOLUTION
• LOW COST
• EASY TO MOUNT
• NO SIGNAL ADJUSTMENT REQUIRED
• INSENSITIVE TO RADIAL AND AXIAL PLAY
• SMALL SIZE
• -40°C to 100°C OPERATING TEMPERATURE
" TWO CHANNEL QUADRATURE OUTPUT
• TTL COMPATIBLE
• SINGLE 5 V SUPPLY
Description
The HEDS-9100 series is a high performance, low cost,
optical incremental encoder module. When operated in conjunction with a codewheel, this module detects rotary
position. The module consists of a lensed LED source and a
detector IC enclosed in a small C-shaped plastic package.
Due to a highly collimated light source and a unique photodetector array, the module is extremely tolerant to mounting
misalignment.
The standard resolutions presently available range from
96 cpr to 512 cpr for use with a HEDS-5100 series codewheel or the equivalent. Consult local Hewlett-Packard
sales representatives for custom resolutions.
Applications
The two channel digital outputs and the single 5 V supply
input are accessed through four 0.025 inch square pins
located on 0.1 inch centers.
The HEDS-9100 provides sophisticated motion detection at
a low cost, making it ideal for high volume applications.
Typical applications include printers, plotters, tape drives,
and factory automation equipment.
ESD WARNING: NORMAL HANDLING PRECAUTIONS
SHOULD BE TAKEN TO AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE.
package Dimensions
~
z
z
8
OATe CODE
NOTE 1
ALIGNMENT
RECESS
'.. OPTICAL
CENTER
NOTE 1, VY
~·YEAR
XX ,. WORK WEEK
DIMENSIONS IN MILlIMETEAS AND HNCHESf
END VIEW
4-11
SIDEB
Block Diagram
output Waveforms
I------c------+j
I
14
I
I
I
I
CHANNEL A
3
1
..!:!&to,
w
C
:J
CHANNEL B
....
~
15
"<:
I
I
I
I
I
IGNO
IL
I
L _______ ...l
EMITTER SECTION
______________
CODe
.J
1
DETECTOR SECTION
WHEEL
ROTATION
Theory of Operation
1 Shaft Rotation = 360 mechanical degrees
= N cycles
The HEDS-9100 is a C-shaped emitter/detector module,
Coupled with a codewheel it translates the rotary motion of
a shaft into a two-channel digital output.
As seen in the block diagram, the module contains a single
Light Emitting Diode (LED) as its light source. The light is
collimated into a parallel beam by means of a single lens
located directly over the LED. Opposite the emitter is the
integrated detector circuit. This IC consists of multiple sets
of photodetectors and the signal processing circuitry necessary to produce the digital waveforms.
The codewheel rotates between the emitter and detector,
causing the light beam to be interrupted by the pattern of
spaces and bars on the codewheel. The photodiodes which
detect these interruptions are arranged in a pattern that
corresponds to the radius and design of the codewheel.
These detectors are also spaced such that a light period on
one pair of detectors corresponds to a dark period on the
adjacent pair of detectors. The photodiode outputs are then
fed through the signal processing circuitry resulting in A, A,
Sand B. Two comparators receive these signals and produce the final outputs for channels A and S. Due to this
integrated phasing technique, the digital output of channel
A is in quadrature with that of channel S (90 degrees out of
phase).
Definitions
Count (N) = The number of bar and window pairs or
counts per revolution (CPR) of the codewheel.
1 cycle (c) = 360 electrical degrees (Oe)
= 1 bar and window pair
Pulse Width (P): The number of electrical degrees that an
output is high during 1 cycle. This value is nominally 180 °e
or V, cycle.
Pulse Width Error (I!.P): The deviation, in electrical degrees,
.
of the pulse width from its ideal value of 180 °e.
State Width (S): The number of electrical degrees between
a transition in the output of channel A and the neighboring
transition in the output of channel S. There are 4 states per
cycle, each nominally 90 ° e.
State Width Error (I!.S): The deviation, in electrical degrees,
of each state width from its ideal value of 90° e.
Phase (<1»: The number of electrical degrees between the
center of the high state of channel A and the center of the
high state of channel B. This value is nominally 90 °e for
quadrature output.
Phase Error (f!.
2
10
15
elec deg,
Parameter
Case 1: Module mounted on tolerances 01 ±O.13mm(O.005").
Notes
Case 2: Module mounted on tolerances 01 ±O.38mm(O.015").
Electrical Characteristics
Electrical Characteristics over Recommended Operating Range, typical at 25° C
Parameter
Symbol
Supply Current
Icc
High Level Output Voltage
VOH
Low Level Output Voltage
Rise Time
Fall Time
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Unlls
17
40
mA
0.4
Volts
Volts
2.4
VOL
tr
200
ns
tf
50
ns
Notes
=-40 p.A Max.
IOl =3.2 mA
Cl =25 pF
Rl = 11 KH pull-up
IOH
Note:
1. For improved perlo""ance in noisy environments or high speed applications, a 3.3 kn pull-up resistor is recommended.
Codewheel Options
Recommended Codewheel
Characteristics
The HEDS-9100 is designed to operate with the HEDS-5100
series codewheel. See ordering information and specifications at the end of this data sheet.
CPR
(N)
OPTICAL RADIUS
Rop mm (inch)
96
11.00 (0.433)
100
11.00 (0.433)
192
11.00 (0.433)
200
11.00 (0.433)
256
11.00 (0.433)
360
11.00 (0.433)
400
11.00 (0.433)
500
11.00 (0.433)
512
11.00 (0.433)
Figure 1. Codewheel Design
Parameter
Symbol
Min.
Max.
Window/Bar Ratio
w/b
0.7
1.4
Lw
1.8(.07)
Window Length
Absolute Maximum
Codewheel Radfu$
Rc
2.3(.09)
Units
mm{inch)
Rop+1.9(0.075) mmUnch}
4-13
Notes
I ncludes eccentricity errors
Mounting Considerations
ARTWORK SIDE
+-~ ~~ O_'~
__
___
MOUNTING
OPTICAL CENTER
~
.
M 2.5 x 0.45
12·56 UNC·281
2 PLACES
~LANE
M 2.5xO.45
12·56 UNC·281
2 PLACES
....-1
OPTICAL CENTER
-~c-~: -t~
"'-----\-.......j....
t-..1.---+-t:jl~::rt_
I
, f\~" T
MOUNTING
PLANE
127
Q~ ~F'"'",~
20.9
0.7610.0301 HIGH
2.3610.093I'O.02510.001IDIA.
MAX. 4.4510.1751
NOTE 1
ROP+10~i7:71
~'~~~cO~~1 x 46" CHAMFER
NOTE1, THESE DIMENSIONS INCLUDE SHAFT
END PLAY, AND CODEWHEE~ WARP.
Figure 3. Mounting Plane Side B.
Figure 2. Mounting Plane Side A.
Connectors
Manufacturer Part Number
Mounting Surlaee
AMP
103686-4
640442-5
Both
SideS
Berg
65039-032 with
Both
4825X-OOO terminals
MoJex
2695 series with
2759 series
terminals
SideS
r 7.9~
I
10.210.401
t
Figure 4. Connector SP!clflcatlons
Ordering Information
[ill]
25.15
(0.9901 DIAMETER
~
~.,. lJ
10.212 + 0.0121
Resolution
(Cycles per Revolution)
K-96cpr G-360cpr
C·100cpr H-400cpr
o - 192 cpr A - 500 cpr
E • 200 cpr I - 512 cpr
F ·256 cpr
Shaft Diameter
01-2mm
02-3mm
03 - 1/8 in.
04-5/32 In.
05 -3116 in.
06-1/4 in.
11-4mm
14-5mm
12 - 6 mm
UNITS mm(INCHES)
Figure 5. HEDS.-5100 Codewheel
4-14
HEWLETT
PACKARD
L1NEA~
OPTICAL II\ICREMENTAL
ENC€JOER MODULE
HEOS-9200
SERIES
Features
• HIGH PERFORMANCE
• HIGH RESOLUTION
• LOW COST
• EASY TO MOUNT
• NO SIGNAL ADJUSTMENT REQUIRED
• INSENSITIVE TO MECHANICAL
DISTURBANCES
• SMALL SIZE
• -40 0 C TO 1000 C OPERATING TEMPERATURE
• TWO CHANNEL QUADRATURE OUTPUT
• TTL COMPATIBLE
o SINGLE 5 V SUPPLY
Description
The HEDS-9200 series is a high performance, .Iow cost,
optical incremental encoder module. When operated in
conjunction with a codestrip, this module detects linear
position. The module consists of a lensed LED source and
a detector IC enClosed in a small C-shaped plastic package.
Due to a highly collimated light source and a unique photodetector array, the module is extremely tolerant to mounting
misalignment.
The two channel digital outputs and the single 5 V supply
input are accessed through four 0.025 inch square pins
located on 0.1 inch centers.
The standard resolutions available are 4.72 counts per mm
(120 cpi), 5.00 courits per mm (127 cpi) and 5.91 counts per
mm (150 cpi). Consult local Hewlett-Packard sales representatives for other resolutions ranging from 1.5 to 7.8
counts per mm (40 to 200 counts per inch).
Applications
The HEDS-9200 provides sophisticated motion detection at
a low cost, making it ideal for high volume applications.
Typical applications include printers, plotters, tape drives,
and factory automation equipment.
ESD WARNING: NORMAL HANDLING PRECAUTIONS.
SHOULD BE TAKEN TO AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE.
package Dimensions
~z
8
~<
0
COOE
N
ALIGNMENT
REcess
Ql
tb:~
u >
u
~2 0:~Oi
....
1N >
OPTION
t
r:>') ...
ALIGNMENT
RECESS
1 ,
1.S51D.0131-i
~I
11.21
1·).600
SIDE A
NOTE 1, yy. VEAR
XX = WORK weeK
DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETERS ANI:> [lNCHESI
SIDES
4-15
- - - - _ . _ - - - _ ..-
Block Diagram
output Waveforms
rlr----~--------l~
I
,4
I
I
I
I
CHANNEL A
I3
~2
CHANNEL 8
I5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I Gllio
I _______ .JI
L
EMITTER SECTION
CODE
CHANNEL B
~---------~----~,
DETECTOR SECTION
STRIP
LINEAR POSITION
Theory of Operation
The HEDS-9200 is a C-shaped emitter/detector module.
Coupled with a codestrip ,it translates linear motion into a
two-channel digital output
Pitch: 1/0, The unit length per count.
Electrical degree (De): Pitch/360, The dimension of one bar
and window pair divided by 360.
As seen in the block diagram, the module contains a single
Light Emitting Diode (LED) as its light source. The light is
collimated into a parallel beam by means of a single lens
located directly over the LED. Opposite the emitter is the
integrated detector circuit This IC consists of multiple sets
of photodetectors and the signal processing circuitry necessary to produce the digital waveforms.
1 cycle (C): 360 electrical degrees, 1 bar and window pair.
The codestrip moves between the emitter and detector,
causing the light beam to be interrupted by the pattern of
spaces and bars on the codestrip. The photodiodes which
detect these interruptions are arranged in a pattern that
corresponds to the count density of the' codestrip. These
detectors are also spaced such that a light period on one
pair of detectors corresponds to a dark period on the
adjacent pair of detectors. The photodiode outputs are,
then fed through the signal processing circuitry resulting in
A, A, Band B. Two comparators receive these signals and
produce the final outputs for channels A and B. Due to this
integrated phasing technique, the digital output of channel
A is in quadrature with that of channel B (90 degrees out of
phase).
State Wldth(S): The number of electrical degrees between a
transition in the output of channel A and the neighboring
transition in the output of channel B. There are 4 states per
cycle, each nominally 900 e.
Definitions
Count density (D): The number of bar and window pairs
per unit length of the codestrip.
Pulse Width (P): The number of electrical degrees that an
output is high during 1 cycle. This value is nominally 1800 e
or 112 cycle.
Pulse Width Error (Ll.P): The deviation, in electrical degrees,
of the pulse width from its ideal value of 1800 e.
State Width Error (Ll.S): The deviation, in electrical degrees,
of each state width from its ideal value of 900 e.
Phase (<1»: The number of electrical degrees between the
center of the high state of channel A and the center of the
high state of channel B. This value is nominally 90 0 e for
quadrature output.
Phase Error (Ll.+C",":..:AN",N:.:E::..1I+'0", VOl
¢1
Po
(;2
Theory of operation
The incremental shaft encoder operates by translating the
rotation of a shaft into interruptions of a light beam which are
then output as electrical pulses.
In the HEDS-5XXX the light source is a Light Emitting Diode
collimated by a molded lens into a parallel beam of light. The
Emitter End Plate contains two orthree similar light sources,
one for each channel.
The standard Code Wheel is a metal disc which has N
equally spaced apertures around its circumference. A
matching pattern of apertures is pOSitioned on the stationary'
phase plate. The light beam is transmitted only when the
apertures in the code wheel and the apertures in the phase
plate line up; therefore, during a complete shaft revolution,
there will be N alternating light and dark periods. A molded
lens beneath the phase plate aperture collects the modulated light into a silicon detector.
The Encoder Body contains the phase plate and the detection elements for two or three channels. Each channel
consists of an integrated circuit with two photodiodes and
amplifiers, a comparator, and output circuitry.
The apertures for the two photodiodes are positioned so that
a light period on one detector corresponds to a dark period
on the other ("push-pull"). The photodiode signals are
amplified and fed to the comparator whose output changes
state when the difference of the two photocurrents changes
sign. The second channel has a similar configuration but the
location of its aperture pair provides an output which is in
quadrature to the first channel (phase difference of 90° ).
Direction of rotation is determined by observing which of the
channels is the leading waveform. The outputs are TTL logiC
level signals.
The optional index channel is similar in optical and electrical
configuration to the Aand B channels previously described.
An index pulse of typically 1 cycle width is generated for
each rotation of the code wheel. Using the recommended
logic interface, a unique logic state (Po) can be identified if
such accuracy is required.
The three part kit is assembled .by attaching the Encoder
Body to the mounting surface using three screws. The Code
Wheel is set to the correct gap and secured to the shaft.
Snapping the cover (Emitter End Plate) on the body completes the assembly. The only adjustment necessary is the
encoder centering relative to the shaft. This optimizes quadrature. and the optional index pulse outputs.
Index Pulse Considerations
The motion sensing application and encoder interface circuitry will determine the necessary phase relationship of the
index pulse to the main data tracks. A unique shaft position
can be identified by using the index pulse output only or by
logically relating the index pulse to the A and B data channels. The HEDS-5010 allows some adjustment of the index
pulse position with respect to themain data channels. The
position is easily adjusted during the assembly process as
illustrated in the assembly procedures.
Definitions
Electrical degrees:
1 shaft rotation' = 360 angular degrees
= N electrical cycles
1 cycle
= 360 electrical degrees
Position Error:
The angular difference between the actual shaft position and
its pOSition as calculated by counting the encoder's cycles.
Cycle Error:
An indication of cycle uniformity. The difference between an
observed shaft angle which gives rise to one electrical cycle,
and the nominal angular increment of 1/N of a revolution.
Phase:
The angle between the center of Pulse A and the center of
Pulse B.
Index Phase:
For counter clockwise rotation as illustrated above, the
Index Phase is defined as:
1
=
(1 -2).
2
1 is the angle, in electrical degrees between the falling edge
of I and falling edge of B. 2 is the angle, in electrical
degrees, between the riSing edge of A and the rising edge
of I.
Index Phase Error:
The Ind.ex Phase Error (LlI) describes the change in the
Index Pulse position after assembly with respect to the A and
B channels over the recommended operating conditions.
4-26
Absolute Maximum Ratings
parilln~ter
Symbol
Min.
Max.
Units
Ts
TA
-55
-55
,'100
°Celsius
"Celsius
;, ",
g
mm(1 inch/JooO) T1R
Storage Temperature
Operating Temperature
Vlbratl,on
Shaft Aicialfllay,
Shaft Eccentricity Plus
Radial Play
SUPply;Voltage
OiJiput,Voltage
Output Current per
Channel
"
-0.5
-0.5
·1
Vee
Vo
10
Velocity
Acceleiatlqn
"
Notes
100
20
.50 (20)'
" :1 (4)
mm(i inch/i000) TlR,
7
Vee
5
Volts
Volts
mA
30,000
250,000
Ra~::Sec'2
See N<;>te 1
See Ni>te 1
Movement should be
limited even under
shock conditions.
,
R;p.M.
Recommended Operating Conditions
Parameter
Temperature
Supply Voltage
Code Wheel Gap
Shaft Perpendicularity
Plus Axial Play
Shaft Eccentricity Plus
Radial Play
Load Capacitance
Symbol
Min.
Max.
Units
T
-20
4.5
85
5.5
1.1 (45)
"Celsius
Volt
mm (inch/i000)
mm (Inch/1000)
TIR
mm (inch/1QOO)
TIR
pF
Yee
"
0.25 (i0)
0.Q4 (1.5)
100
CL
Notes
'Non-condensing atmos.
Ripple < 100mVp- p
Nominal gap =
0.63 mm (.025 in.) when shaft
is at minimum gap position,
10 mm (OAlnch) from
mounting surface.
Encoding Characteristics
The specifications below apply within the recommended operating conditions and reflect performance at 500 cycles per
revolution (N = 500). Some encoding characteristics improve with decreasing cycles (NI. Consult Application Note 1011 or
factory for additional details
Parameter
Symbol
Position ErrorWorst Error Full
Rotation
AS
Cycle Error Worst Error Full
Rotation
e.C
Max. Count Frequency
fMAX
Pulse Width ErrorWorst Error Full
Rotation
Phase Sensitivity to
Eccentricity
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Units
NotesiSee Definitions)
10
40
Minutes of Arc
1 Cycle = 43.2 Minutes
See Figure 5.
3
5.5
Electrical deg.
"-
130,000
e.P
200,000
Hertz
16
Electrical deg.
f = Velocity (RPM) x N/60
T "" 25° C. f = 8 KHz
See Note 2
520
(13)
Elec. deg./mm
(Elec. deg.lmil)
20
(.5)
Elec. deg.hom
(Elec. deg.!mil)
~S
25
Electrical deg.
T 25" C. f "" 8 KHz
See Note 2
Index Pulse Width
f1
360
Electrical deg.
T "" 25° C, f"" 8 KHz
See Note 3
Index Phase Error
AI
Electrical deg.
See Notes 4, 5
Electrical deg.
See Note 5
Phase Sensitivity to
Axial Play
Logic Slate Width ErrorWorst Error Full
Rotation
Index Pulse Phase
Adjustment Range
0
±70
17
±130
4-27
mil = inch/1QOO
mil = inch/1000
=
Mechanical Characteristics
Parameter
Symbol
Dimension
Outline Dimensions
Tolerance
Units
+.000
-.015
mm
+.0002
-.0005
Inches
+.0000
-.0007
inches
Notes
See Mech. Dwg.
Code Wheel Available to
Fitthe Following Standard
Shaft Diameters
4
2
3
5
5/32
1/8
3/16
Moment of Inertia
gcm2 (oz-in-s2)
0.4 (ex lo-6)
J
Required Shaft Length
Bol! Circle
Mounting Screw Size
1/4
12.8 (.50)
±0.5 (±0.02)
mm (inches)
See Figure 10,
Shaft in minimum
length position.
20.9 (.823)
±0,13 (±.OOS)
mm (inches)
See Figure 10,
1.6 x 0.35 x 5 mm
DIN 84
or
0-80 x 3/16
Bmding Head
mm
inches
Electrical Characteristics When operating within the recommended operating range.
Electrical Characteristics over Recommended Operating Range (Typical at 25° C).
Parameter
Supply Current
Symbol
Min.
Icc
High Level Output
Voltage
VOH
Low Level Output
Voltage
VOL
Typ.
Max,
Units
21
40
mA
36
60
2.4
0.4
RisaTime
tr
0.5
Fan Time
tf
0,2
Ceo
12
Cable Capacitance
Notes
HEDS·SOOO (2 Channel)
HEDS·5010 (3 Channel)
V
IOH = -401lA Max.
V
IOL=3.2 mA
Ils
CL "" 25 pF, RL
=11 K Pull-up
See Note 6
pF/metres
Output Lead to Ground
NOTES:
1. The structural parts of the HEDS-5000 have been tested to 20g and up to 500 Hz. For use outside this range, operation may be limited
at low frequencies (high displacement) by cable fatigue and at high frequencies by code wheel resonallces. Resonant frequency
depends on code wheel material and number of counts per revolution. For temperatures below -20 0 C the ribbon cable becomes
brittle and sensitive to displacements. Maximum operating and storage temperature includes the surface area of the encoder mounting. Consult factory for further information. See Application Note 1011.
2. In a properly assembled lot 99% of the units, when run at 25 0 C and 8 KHz, should exhibit a pulse width error less than 35 electrical
degrees, and a state width error less than 45 electrical degrees. To calculate errors at other speeds and temperatures add the values
specified in Figures 1 or 2 to the typical values specified under encoding characteristics or to the maximum 99% values specified in this
note.
3. In a properly assembled lot, 99% of the units when run at 25 0 C and 8 KHz should exhibit an index pulse width greater than 260
electrical degrees and less than 460 electrical degrees. To calculate index pulse widths at other speeds and temperatures add the
values specified in Figures 3 or 4 to the typical 360 0 pulse width or to the maximum 99% values specified in this note.
4. After adjusting index phase at assembly, the index phase error specification (:S:4
'~~A--l
.1J
10
V
T
L~
-------r=~PO
~_ii
I
~~ __ J
:
1I374LS11
1/674LS14
-=-oJ-.---~----- GROUND
4 - - } (GROUND OR 00
5 -NOT CONNECT)
(1/1000 INCH)
MILLIMETRES
SHAFT ECCENTRICITY -
DASHED LINES REPRESENT AN OPTIONAL INDEX SUMMING CIRCUIT.
STANDARD 74 SERIES COULO ALSO BE USED TO IMPLEMENT THIS CIRCUIT.
Figure 5. Position Error va. Shaft Eccentricity
Figure 6. Recommended Interface Circuit
4-29
...
_.. _- _._-----_._------------------------------ .- ....._--_._.-
/~r.:::"""\
PINOUT
I"
,"" ..
,,)
Vee
MOUNTING
SURFACE
~
Vee
CHANNELS
Vee
CHANNEL I
9
10
ENCODER BODY
NOTE: REVERSE INSERTION OF THE CONNECTOR
WI LL PERMANENTLY DAMAGE THE DETECTOR IC.
MATING CONNECTOR
BERG 65-692-001 OR EQUIVALENT
Figure 7. Connector Specifications
Figure 8. HEDS-5000 Series Encoder Kit
M 1.6 x .35 150 GH
OR
0-80 UNF·2B
--A------+---~~
20.90 DIA.
I.B23DIA.I
!"if! A !0'!.20/1.00BI
I
25.15
(.9901 DIAMETER
5.38 ± .31
UNITS mm (INCHES)
1- ,
1/
.\-~
GROUND
N.C. OR GROUND
N.C. OR GROUND
GROUND
BOTTOM VIEW
\\
\."':) ;:'\ \
CHANNEL A
MILLIMETRE .X±.5 .XX ±.10
(INCHES) (.XX ± .02 .XXX ± .005)
1.212' .0121
Figure 9. Code Wheel
Figure 10. Mounting Requirements
Ordering Information
HEDS-5
OPTION*y
PRODUCT TYPE
RESOLUTION ICYCLES PER REVOLUTION)
C-l00CPR
G -360CPR
D -192CPR
H - 400 CPR
E - 200 CPR
A - 500 CPR
F - 256 CPR
I - 512 CPR
NOTE: OTHER RESOLUTIONS AVAILABLE
ON SPECIAL REQUEST.
0- 28 mm COMPLETE KIT
1-28mm CODE WHEEL
2 - 28 mm ENCODER BODY
3 - 28 mm EMITTER END PLATE'
OUTPUTS
SHAFT DiAMETER
o-
2 CHANNEL DIGITAL
1 - 3 CHANNEL DIGITAL
01-2mm
02-3mm
03- 1/8 in.
04-5/32 in.
05- 3/16 in.
MECHANICAL CONFIGURATION
06-1/4;".
11- 4mm
0- 0.6 m (24 In.j CABLE
12 -6mm
14 - 5mm
00 - USE WHEN ORDERING
ENCODER BODIES
"NO OPTION IS SPECIFIED WHEN ORDERING
EMITTER END PLATES ONLY.
4-30
Shaft Encoder Kit Assembly
See Application Note 1011 for further discussion.
The following assembly procedure represents a simple and reliable method for prototype encoder assembly. High volume assembly may
suggest modifications to this procedure using custom designed tooling. In certain high volume applications encoder assembly can be
accomplished in less than 30 seconds. Consult factory for further details. Note: The code wheel to phase plate gap should be set between
0.015 in. and 0.045 in.
I WARNING: THE ADHESIVES USED MA Y Bli HARMFUL. CONSUL T THE MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDA TlONS. I
READ THE INSTRUCTIONS TO THE END BEFORE STARTING ASSEMBLY.
3.0 ENCODER BODY ATTACHMENT
1.0 SUGGESTED MATERIALS
1.1 Encoder Parts
Encoder Body
Emitter End Plate
Code Wheel
1.2 Assembly Materials
RTV - General Electric 162
- Dow Corning 3145
Epoxy-Hysol 1C
Acetone
Mounting Screws (3)
RTV and Epoxy Applicators
1.3 S\lggesled Assembly Tools
a) Holding Screwdriver.
b) Torque Limiting Screwdriver. 0.36 cm kg (5.0 in. oz.).
c) Depth Micrometer or HEDS-8922 Gap Setter.
d) Oscilloscope or Phase Meter (Described in AN 1011). Either
may be used for two channel phase adjustment. An oscillo,scope is required for index pulse phase adjustment.
3.1
Place the encoder body on the mounting surface and slowly
rotate the body to spread the adhesive. Align the mounting
screw holes with the holes in the body base.
3.2 Place the screws in the holding screwdriver and thread them
into the mounting holes. Tighten to approximately 0.36 cm kg
(5.0 in. oz.) using a torque limiting screwdriver if available (See
notes a and b below). Remove centering cone if used.
Notes:
a) At this torque value, the encoder body should slide on the
mounting surface only with considerable thumb pressure.
b) Thetorque limiting screwdriver should be periodically calibrated
for proper torque.
1.4 Suggested Circuits
a) Suggested circuit for index adjustment (HEDS-5010).
4.0 EPOXY APPLICATION
A
OUTPUT TO OSCILLOSCOPE
BUFFER
A
1/474LS32
For optimal index phase, adjust encoder position to equalize T1 and T2 pulse widths.
b)
~hase Meter Circuit
Recommended for volume assembly. Please see Application Note 1011 for details.
2.0 SURFACE PREPARATION
4,1
Collect a small dab of epoxy on an applicator.
4.2 Spread the epoxy inside the lower part of the hub bore.
4.3 Holding the code wheel by its hub, slide it down the shaft just
enough to sit it squarely. About 3 mm (1/8").
5.0 CODE WHEEL POSITIONING
-----... ,
.
~
THE ELAPSED TIME BETWEEN THIS STEP AND THE
COMPLETION OF STEP 8 SHOULD NOT EXCEED 112
HOUR.
'
2.1
5.1
Clean and degrease with acetone the mounting surface and
shaft making sure to keep the acetone away from the motor
bearings.
2.2 Load the syringe with RTV.
2.3 Apply RTV into screw threads on mounting surface. Apply
more RTV on the surface by forming a daisy ring pattern
connecting the screw holes as shown above. .
I CAUTION: KEEP RTV AWA Y FROM THE SHAFT BEARING. ,I
4-31
'\
~, 'J
'');
Take up any loose play by lightly pulling down on the shaft's
load end.
5.2 Using the gap setter or a depth micrometer, push the code
wheel hub down to a depth of 1.65 mm (.065 in.) below the
rim of the encoder body. The registration holes in the gap
setter will align with the snaps protruding from the encoder
body near the cable.
5.3 Check that the gap setter or micrometer is seated squarely
on the body rim and maintains contact with the code wheel
hub.
5.4 No epoxy should extrude through the shaft hole.
DO NOT TOUCH THE CODE WHEEL AFTER ASSEMBL Y.
6.0 EMITTER END PLATE
8.0 INDEX PULSE ADJUSTMEI':IT (HEDS-5010)
8.1
6.1
Visually check that the wire pins in the encoder body are
straig.ht and straighten if necessary.
6.2 Hold the end plate parallel to the encoder body rim. Align the
guiding pin' on the end plate with the hole in the encoder
body and press the end plate straight down until it is locked
into place.
6.3 Visually check to see if the end plate is properly seated.
Some applications require that the index pulse be aligned
with the main data channels. The index pulse position and
the phase must be adjusted simultaneously. This procedure
sets index phase to zero.
8.2 Connect the encoder cable.
8.3 Run the motor. Adjust for minimum phase error using an
oscilloscope or phase meter (see 7.3).
8.4 Using an oscilloscope and the circuit shown in 1.4, set the
trigger for the falling edge of the I output. Adjust the index
pulse so that Tl and T2 are equal in width. The physical
adjustment is a side to side motion as shown by the arrow.
8.5 Recheck the phase adjustment.
7;0 PHASE ADJUSTMENT
8.6 Repeat steps 8.3-8.5 until both phase and index pulse position are as desired.
8.7 No stress should be applied to the encoder package until the
RTV has cured. Cure time: 2 hours@70·Cor24hrs.atroom
temperature.
SPECIALITY TOOLS - Available from Hewlelt-Packard
7.1
a)
HEDS-8920 Hub Puller
This tool may be used to remove code wheels from shafts
after the epoxy has cured.
~
b)
H EDS-8922 Gap Setter
This tool may be used in place of a depth micrometer as
an aid in large volume assembly.
The following' procedure should be followed when phase
adjusting channels A and '8.
k
"65"03mm~~
7.2 Connect the encoder cable.
7.3 Run the motor. Phase corresponds to motor direction. See
output waveforms and definitions. Using either an oscilloscope or a phase meter, adjust the encoder for minimum
phase error by sliding the encoder forward or backward on
the mounting surface as shown above. See Application Note
1011 for the phase meter circuit.
(.DSS ± ,001 in.)
c)
7.4 No stress should be applied to the encoder package until the
RTV cures. Cure time·is 2 hours @ 70· Cor 24 hrs. at room
temperature.
Note: After mounting, the encoder should be free from mechanical forces that could cause a shift in the encoder's position
relative to its mounting surf~ce.
In the event that the code wheel has to be removed after the epoxy
has set, use the code wheel extractor as follows:
1 Remove the emitter end plate by prying a screwdriver in the
slots provided around the encoder body rim. Avoid bending
the wire leads.
2 Turn the screw on the extractor counter-clockwise until the
screw tip is no longer visible.
3 Slide the extractor's horseshoe shaped lip all the way into the
groove on the code wheel's hub.
4 While holding the extractor body stationary, turn the thumb
screw clockwise until the screw tip pushes against the shaft.
5 Applying more turning pressure will pull the hub upwards
breaking the epoxy bond.
6 Clean the shaft before reassembly.
HEDS-892X Centering Cones
For easier volume assembly this tool in its appropriate
shaft size may be used in step 3.0 to initially center the
encoder body with respect to the shaft and aid in locating
the mounting screw holes. Depending on the resolution
and accuracy required this centering may eliminate the
need for phase adjustment steps 7 and 8.
Part Number
HEDS-8923
HEDS-8924
HEDS-8925
HEDS-8926
HEDS-8927
HEDS-8928
HEDS-8929
HEDS-8931
CODE WHEEL REMOVAL
d)
4-32
0
Shaft Size
2mm
3mm
1/8in.
5/32 in.
3/16 in.
1/4 in.
4mm
5mm
HEDS-8930 HEDS-5000 Tool Kit
1
Holding Screwdriver
1
Torque Limiting Screwdriver, 0.36cm kg (5.0 in. oz.)
HEDS-8920 Hub Puller
.
1
HEDS-8922 Gap Setter
1
1
Carrying Case
Fli;'
56 mm DIAMETER
TWO AND THREE
CHANNEL INCREMENTAL
OPTICAL ENCODER ~T
HEWLETT
~~ PACKARD
HEDS-6ooD
SERIES
Features
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
192-1024 CYCLES/REVOLUTION AVAILABLE
MANY RESOLUTIONS STANDARD
QUICK ASSEMBLY
0.2S.mm (.010 INCHES) END PLAY ALLOWANCE
TTL COMPATIBLE DIGITAL OUTPUT
SINGLE SV SUPPLY
WIDE TEMPERATURE RANGE
SOLID STATE RELIABILITY
INDEX PULSE AVAILABLE
Description
The HEDS-6000 series is a high resolution incremental
optical encoder kit emphasizing ease of assembly and
reliability. The 56 mm diameter package consists of 3 parts:
the encoder body, a metal code wheel, and emitter end plate.
An LED source and lens transmit collimated light from the
emitter module through a precision metal code wheel and
phase plate into a bifurcated detector lens.
The light is focused onto pairs of closely spaced integrated
detectors which output two square wave signals in
quadrature and an optional index pulse. Collimated light and
a custom photodetector configuration increase long life
reliability by reducing sensitivity to shaft end play, shaft
eccentricity and LED degradation. The outputs and the 5V
supply input of the HEDS-6000 are accessed through a 10
pin connector mounted on a .6 metre ribbon cable.
outline Drawing
l-600(24)-1
~ION
r
A standard selection of shaft sizes and resolutions between
192 and 1024 cycles per revolution are available. Consult
the factory for custom resolutions. The part number for the
standard 2 channel bit is HEDS-600Q, while that for the 3
channel device, with index pulse, is HEDS-6010. See
Ordering I nformation for more details. For additional design
information, see Application Note 1011.
Applications
Printers, Plotters, Tape Drives, Positioning Tables, Automatic Handlers, Robots, and any other servo loop where a
small high performance encoder is required.
7.62
(Q.3oo)
n--+-....
10C CONNECTOR
CENTER
POLARIZED
PHASE PLATE
CODE
WHEE~
26.9
(1.020)
61.:t
(2.410)
EMlTTE.R END PLATE
3.25 DIA.
10.128)
~==~~
ENCOOER eDDy
L,9.6j
~
1+-_ _ _ 65.9 MAX. DIA., _ _ _...I
(0.776)
SECTIONA-A
TYPICAL DIMENSIONS IN MILUMETRES ANO (INCHES).
4-33
-_
...
__.- _ - - - ...
(2.200)
Block Diagram and output Waveforms
r- -
-
-
-
-
-
-
(FOR COUNTER CLOCKWISE ROTATION OF CODE WHEEL
AS VIEWED FROM EMITTER END PLATE)
REsiSroR- - - ---,
I
b
Vee
CHANNEL A
> + = = = t ' - o VOA
~}GROUND
---f.!o
I
) -J-CG:::H::::AN::.:N::E::..L::..Bf18",
I
>--=----t/
I
I
I
DOO:OT
CONNEGT
VOS
~-"'''
\ I i r-,".~"
>+C:::H:..:AN::.:N::E::..L,--'+,'0", VOl
¢1
Po
r/!2
ENCODER BODY
Theory of operation
The incremental shaft encoder operates by translating the
rotation of a shaft into interruptions of a light beam which are
then output as electrical pulses.
In the HEDS-6XXX the light source is a Light Emitting Diode
collimated by a molded lens into a parallel beam of light. The
Emitter End Plate contains two orthree similar light sources,
one for each channel.
.
The standard Code Wheel is a metal disc which has N
equally spaced slits around its circumference. An aperture
with a. matching pattern is positioned on the stationary
phase plate. The light beam is transmitted only when the slits
in the code wheel and the aperture line up; therefore, during
a complete shaft revolution, there will be N alternating
light and dark periods. A molded lens beneath the phase
plate aperture collects the modulated light into a silicon
detector.
The Encoder Body contains the phase plate and the detection elements for two or three channels. Each channel
consists of an integrated circuit with two photodiodes and
amplifiers, a comparator, and output circuitry.
The apertures for the two photodiodes are positioned so that
a light period on one detector corresponds to a dark period
on the other. The photodiode signals are amplified and fed to
the comparator whose output changes state when the difference of the two photo currents changes sign ("PushPull"l. The second channel has a similar configuration but
the location of its aperture pair provides an output which is in
quadrature to the first channel (phase difference of 90 0 I.
Direction of rotation is determined by observing which of the
channels is the leading waveform. The outputs are TTL logic
level Signals.
The optional index channel is similar in optical and electrical
configuration to the A,B channels previously described. An
index pulse of typically 1 cycle width is generated for each
rotation of the code wheel. USing the recommended logic
interface, a unique logic state (Pol can be identified if such
accuracy is required.
The three part kit is assembled by attaching the Encoder
Body to the mounting surface using two screws. The Code
Wheel is set to the correct gap and secured to the shaft.
Snapping the cover (Emitter End Platel on the body completes the assembly. The only adjustment necessary is the
encoder centering relative to the shaft, to optimize quadrature and optional index pulse output.
Index Pulse Considerations
The motion sensing application and encoder interface circuitry will determine the need for relating the index pulse to
the main data tracks. A unique shaft position is identified by
using the index pulse output only or by logically relating the
index pulse to the A and B data channels. The HEDS-6010
index pulse can be uniquely related with the A and B data
tracks in a variety of ways providing maximum flexibility.
Statewidth, pulse width or edge transitions can be used. The
index pulse position, with respect to the main data channels,
is easily adjusted during the assembly process and is illustrated in the assembly procedures.
Definitions
Electrical degrees:
1 shaft rotation = 360 angular degrees
= N electrical cycles
1 cycle
= 360 electrical degrees
Position Error:
The angular difference between the actual shaft position and
its position as calculated by counting the encoder's cycles.
Cycle Error:
An indication of cycle uniformity. The difference between an
observed shaft angle which gives rise to one electrical cycle,
and the nominal angular increment of 1/N of a revolution.
Phase:
The angle between. the center of Pulse A and the center of
Pulse B.
Index Phase:
For counter clockwise rotation as illustrated above, the
Index Phase is defined as:
<1>1 = (<1>1-<1>21.
2
<1>1 is the angle, in electrical degrees, between the falling edge
of I and falling edge of B.2 is the angle, in electrical
degrees, between the riSing edge of A and the rising edge
of I.
Index Phase Error:
The Index Phase Error (11<1>11 describes the change in the
Index Pulse position after assembly with respect to the A and
B channels over the recommended operating conditions.
4-34
Absolute Maximum Ratings
Storage Temperature
Operating Temperature
Symbol
Min.
Max.
Units
Ts
·55
-55
100
100
°Oelslus
°Celsius
20
g
:25(10)
mm (inch/10bb)
TIR
TA
Nbtes
See Note 1
See
'i: .·. ·,?5
.sl)iiffAxial Play
Shaft Eccentricity Plus
Radial Play
Supplyyglt(!ge ..
Outp{JifVoltage
Vee
Vo
-0,5
-0,5
Vee
Volts
Output Current
Velocity
'10
-1
5
mA
12.000
250.000
R,pLM,
7
a
Aq'celerC!Jign
Movement should 6eJimited
even under shock
cdhdittdO$:
.,
Recommended operating Conditions
Parameter
Temperature
Supply Voltage
Code Wheel Gap
Shaft Perpendicularity
Plus Axial Play
Shaft Eccentricity Plus
Radial Play
Load Capacitance
Symbol
Min.
Max.
Units
T
-20
4,5
85
5,5
1,1 (45\
°Celsius
Volt
mm (inch/10pO)
mm (inch/1000)
TlR
Non-condensing atmos,
Ripple < 100mVp_p
mm (inch/1000)
TlR
pF
10 mm (0.4 inch) from
mounting surface.
Vee
0,25 (10)
0,04 (1.5)
100
CL
Notes
Nominal gap '"
0,76 mm (,030 in,) when shaft
is at minimum gap position,
Encoding Characteristics
The specifications below apply within the recommended operating conditions and reflect performance at 1000 cycles per
revolution (N = 1000). Some encoding characteristics improve with decreasing cycles iN\, Consult Application Note 1011 or
factory for additional details.
Parameter
Position Error
Cycle Error
Max. Count Frequency
Pulse Width Error
Symbol
M)
Min.
AC
fMAX
AP
130,000
Typ,
Max.
Units
Notes (See Definitions)
7
18
Minutes of Arc
1 Cycle = 21.6 Minutes
See Figure 5.
3
5.5
Electrical deg.
200,000
Hertz
12 .
Electrical deg.
Phase Sensitivity to
Eccentricity
227
i5,8)
Elec. deg.!mm
(Elec. deg.!mill
Phase Sensitivity to
Axial Play
20
(.5)
Elec. deg.lmm
(Elec. deg.lmil)
f =Velocity (RPM) x N/60
T=25°C,f=8KHz
See Note 2
mil
=inch/1000
mil '" inch/1000
=
Logic State Width Error
olS
25
Electrical deg.
T 25°C, f= 8 KHz
See Note 2
Index Pulse Width
PI
360
Electrical deg.
T = 25° C, f
See NoteS
Index Phase Error
Al
Electrical deg.
See Notes 4, 5
Index Pulse
Adjustment Range
17
0
±165
4-35
Electrical deg.
= 8 KHz
/
Mechanical Characteristics
Parameter.
Dimension
Symbol
Outline Dimensions
Tolerance
Units
+.000
-.015
mm
+.0000
-.0007
inches
Notes
See Mech. Dwg.
4
6
8
Code Wheel Available to
Fit the Foltowing Standard
Shaft Diameters
3/16
1/4
5/16
1/2
5/8
7.7 (110 x 10-6)
J
Moment of Inertia
3/8
Required Shaft Length
Bolt Circle
gcm2 (oZ-in-S21
15.9 (0.625)
±0.6 (±.0241
mm (inches 1
See Figure 10.
Shaft at minimum
length position.
46.0 (1.811)
±0.13 (±.0051
mm (inches)
See Figure 10.
2.5 x 0.45 x 5
OR
#2-56 x 3/16
Pan Head
Mounting Screw Size
mm
inches
Electrical Characteristics When operating within the recommended operating range.
Electrical Characteristics over Recommended Operating Range (Typical at 25°CI.
Parameter
Supply Current
Symbol
Min.
Icc
High Level Output
Voltage
VOH
Low Level Output
Voltage
VOL
Typ.
Max.
Units
21
40
mA
36
60
2.4
0.4
Rise Time
Ir
0.5
Fait Time
tf
0.2
Ceo
12
Cable Capacitance
Notes
HEDS-6000 (2 Channel)
HEDS-6010 (3 Channel)
V
IOH '" -401'A Max.
V
IOL=3.2mA
1'$
CL'" 25 pF, RL = 11 K Pull-up
See NoteS
pFlmeter
Output Lead to Ground
NOTES:
1. The structural parts of the HEDS-6000 have been successfully tested to 20g. In a high vibration environment use is limited at low
frequencies (high displacement) by cable fatigue and at high frequencies by code wheel resonances. Resonant frequency depends on
code wheel material and number of counts per revolution. For temperatures below -20° C the ribbon cable becomes brittle and sensitive
to displacements. Maximum operating and storage temperature includes the surface area of the encoder mounting. Consult factory for
further information. See Application Note.l 011.
2. In a properly assembled lot 99% of the units, when run at 25° C and 8 KHz, should exhibit a pulse width error less than 32 electrical
degrees, and a state width error less than 40 electrical degrees. To calculate errors at other speeds and temperatures add the values
specified in Figures 1 or 2 to the typical values specified under encoding characteristics or to the maximum 99% values specified in
this note.
3. In a properly assembled lot, 99% of the units when run at 25°C and 8 KHz should exhibit an index pulse width greater than 260
electrical degrees and less than 460 electrical degrees. To calculate index pulse widths at other speeds and temperatures add the
values specified in Figures 3 or 4 to the typical 360° pulse width or to the maximum 99% values specified in this note.
4. Index phase is adjusted at assembly. Index phase error Ls the maximum change in index phase expected over the full temperature
range and up to 50 KHz, after assembly adjustment of the index pulse position has been made.
5. When the index pulse is centered on the low-low states of channels A and S as shown on page 2, a unique Po can be defined once per
revolution within the recommended operating conditions and up to 25 KHz. Figure 6 shows how Po can be derived from A, S, and I
outputs. The adjustment range indicates how far from the center of the low-low state that the center of the index pulse may be
adjusted.
6. The rise time is primarily a function of the RC time constant of Rl and Cl. A faster rise time can be achieved with either a lower value of
Rl or Cl. Care must be observed not to exceed the recommended value of IOl under worst case conditions.
4-36
ELECTRICAL
ELECTRICAL
DEGREES
DEGREES
130
lZ0
110
a: a: 100
00
a: a: 90
a: a:
WW
80
J:J:
70
........
00
60
H
50
ww
....
40
i:el;;
30
~~
20
ww
10
~~
a: a:
a: a:
a: a:
00
ww
J:J:
.... ....
00
H
WW
"
......
....
5~
i:el;;
==~
ww
..
~~
zz
J:J:
zz
J:J:
-10
-20
-30
uu
130
lZ0
110
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
-10
-20
-30
""
-40
-60
-40
-40
-60
10
0
-20
-30
..
-40
-50
'z"
-70
J:
-80
.
~
-70
J:
-80
u
~
w -60
-60
w
-20
i:e
-50
'z"
0
-10
....J:
0
i!:
w -30
-40
~
100
20
10
-10
~
80
30
"'~ ...
::~~~
-~" ..'l~....
20
w
60
ELECTRICAL
DEGREES
30
i:e
40
Figure 2. Maximum Change In Pulse Width Error or In
State Width Error Due to Speed and Temperature
ELECTRICAL
DEGREES
....
0
i!:
20
TEMPERATURE IN DEGREES CENTIGRADE
Figure 1. Typical Change In Pulse Width Error or in State
Width Error due to Speed and Temperature
J:
-20
-40
TEMPERATURE IN DEGREES CENTIGRADE
"
-90
-90
-100
-100
-110
-110
-120
-60
-40
-20
20
40
60
-120
100
80
-60
-40
TEMPERATURE IN DEGREES CENTIGRADE
-20
20
40
60
80
100
TEMPERATURE IN DEGREES CENTIGRADE
Figure 3. Typical Change in Index Pulse Width Due to
Speed and Temperature
Figure 4. Maximum Change in Index Pulse Width Due to
Speed and Temperature
PIN
50
.
- - . , . - - , - - - - - - - - Vee
"a:
u.
o
1
=>
"
30
I
a:
oa:
IE
.,.,.-
20
z
o
;::
~
0.1.uF
9~/674LS14
A
40
:il....
z
J;
7
10
i..-
--- - I---
I--"
-
10
99%
t-
0.00
(11
.02
V
.06
.08
1J
--1
T
~_il
I
l_
I
1/374LSll
1/674LS14
:-~-~--------GROUND
{3)
121
.04
~
1J -------r=D---Po
1/674LS14
8~--J
TYPICAL
I-'
o
.
(1/1000 INCH)
.10
MILlIMETRES
4 - - } (GROUND OR DO
5 --
NOT CONNECT)
SHAFT ECCENTRICITY
DASHED LINES REPRESENT AN OPTIONAL INDEX SUMMING CIRCUIT.
STANDARD 74 SERIES COULD ALSO BE USED TO IMPLEMENT THIS CIRCUIT.
Figure 5. Position Error vs. Shaft Eccentricity
Figure 6. Recommended Interface Circuit
4-37
PINOUT
PIN.;t
1
2
Vee
GROUND
N,C. OR GROUND
N,C. OR GROUND
GROUND
Vee
CHANNEL B
Vee
CHANNEL I
5
6
7
8
BOTTOM VIEW
FUNCTION
CHANNEL A
10
MATING CONNECTOR
BERG 65·692·001 OR EOUIVALENT
EMITTER
END PLATE
Figure 7~ Connector Specifications
CODE WHEEL
ASSEMBLY
PHASE
PLATE
ENCODER
BODY
Figure 8. HEDS·6000 Series Encoder Kit
SETSCREW
2·56
HOLLOW OVAL
POINT
8.48! 0.51
10.334 ± 0.020)
, MILLIMETRE ,x ± 0.5 .XX ± 0.10
(INCHES) I.XX. 0.02 .XXX' 0.0061
UNITS mm (INCHES)
Figure 9. Code Wheel
Figure 10. Mounting Requirements
Ordering Information
OPTION'
RESOLUTION tCYClES PER REVOLUTIONI
D-192CPR
e -200 CPR
H-400CPR
PRODUCT TYPE
1-512CPR
B -1000CPR
J-1024 CPR
o - 56 mm COMPLETE KtT
1 - 56 mm CODE WHEEL
2 - 56 mm ENCODER BODY
3 - 56 mm EMtTTER END PLATE·
A -500CPR
NOTE: OTHER RESOLUTIONS AVAILABLE
ON SPECIAL REOUEST
OUTPUTS
o - 2 CHANNEL DIGITAL
SHAFT OlAMETER
1 - 3 CHANNEL DIGtTAL
05 - 31161N.
06 - 1/4 IN.
07 -att6IN.
08 - SI8IN.
09 - 112 IN.
10 - 518 IN.
MECHANICAL CONfiGURATION
0-0.6 m (24 IN.l CABLE
11-4mm
12-5mm
'NO OPTION IS SPECIFIED WHEN ORDERING
EMITTER END PLATES ONLY.
IS-amm
00 - use WHEN ORDERING
ENCODER aDDlES
4-38
Shaft Encoder Kit Assembly
See Application Note 1011 for further discussion.
The following assembly procedure represents a simple and reliable method for prototype encoder assembly. High volume assembly may
suggest modifications to this procedure using custom designed tooling. In certain high volume applications encoder assembly can be
accomplished in less than 30 seconds. Consult factory for further details. Note - the code wheel to phase plate gap should be set between
0.015 in. and 0.045 in.
I WARNING: THE ADHESIVES USED MAY BE HARMFUL. CONSULT THE MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDA TlONS. I
READ THE INSTRUCTIONS TO THE END BEFORE STARTING ASSEMBLY.
1.0 SUGGESTED MATERIALS
3.0 ENCODER BODY ATTACHMENT
1.1
Encoder Parts
Encoder Body
Emitter End Plate
Code Wheel
1.2 Assembly Materials
RTV-General Electric 162
-Dow Corning 3145
Acetone
Mounting Screws 121
1.3 Assembly Tools
al Torque limiting screwdriver, 0.5 cm kg. 17.0 in. oz. I.
b I Straight edge. Straight within 0.1 mm 10.004 in. I
c I Oscilloscope. 1Phase meter may be optionally used for two
channel calibration I.
dl Hub puller. Grip-O-Matic-OTC #1000 2-jaw or equivalent.
Optional tool for removing code wheels.
el Syringe applicator for RTV.
f) Torque limiting Allen wrench. 0.5 cm kg (7.0 in. oz.)
0.035 in. hex.
1.4 Suggested Circuits
a I Suggested circuit for index adjustment (HEDS-6010 I.
74LS14
ll>O--l1J.~
____----.
A
OUTPUT TO.OSCILLOSCOPE
BUFFER
A
3.1
Place the encoder body on the mounting surface and slowly
rotate the body to spread the adhesive. Align the mounting
screw holes with the holes in the body base.
3.2
Place the two mounting screws into the holding bosses in the
body base, as shown.
3.3 Thread the screws into the mounting holes and tighten both to
0.5 cm kg 17.0 in. oz. I using the torque limiting screwdriver.
ISee notes A and BI.
3.4
1/474LS32
Foroptimal index phase adjust encoder pOSition to equalize
Tl and T2 pulse widths.
bl Phase Meter Circuit
Recommended for volume assembly. Please see Application Note 1011 for details.
2.0 SURFACE PREPARATION
It is not necessary to center the encoder body at this time.
Notes:
a I At this torque value, the encoder body should slide on the mounting surface only with considerable thumb pressure.
b I The torque limiting screwdriver should be periodically calibrated
for proper torque.
4.0
APPLICATION OF RTV TO THE HUB
THE ELAPSED TIME BETWEEN THIS STEP AND THE
COMPLETION OFSTEPB SHOULD NOT EXCEED 1/2
HOUR.
2.1
Clean and degrease with acetone the mounting surface and
shaft making sure to keep the acetone away from the motor
bearings.
2.2
Load the syringe with RTV.
2.3 Apply RTV into screw threads on mounting surface. Apply
more RTV on the surface by forming iI daisy ring pattern
connecting the screw holes as shown above.
, CAUTION: KEEP RTVAWAY FROM THE SHAFT BEARING.'
, CAUTION: HANDLE THE CODE WHEEL WITH CARE.
4.1
I
Make surethatthe hex screw on the hub does not enter intothe
hub bore.
4.2 Apply a small amount of RTVonto the inner surface of the hub
bore.
4.3 Spread the RTV evenly inside the entire hub bore.
4.4
Holding the code wheel by its hub, slide it down onto the shaft
until the shaft extends at least halfway into the bore.
4-39
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - _ . --.._._-_.
5.0 CODE WHEEL POSITIONING
7.0 PHASE ADJUSTMENT
7.1
5.1
Position the Allen torque wrench into the hex set screw in the
hub, as shown.
5.2
Pull the shaft end down to bottom out axial shaft play. Using
the straight edge, push the top of the hub even with the top of
the encoder bocy. The Allen wrench should be used during
this movement to apply a slight upward force to the hub,
insuring continuous contact between the straightedge and the
hub.
.
The following procedure should be followed when.phase
adjusting channels A and B.
.
7.2 Connect the encoder cable.
7.3 Run the motor. Phase corresponds to motor direction. See
output waveforms and definitions. Using either an oscilloscope
or a phase meter, adjust the encoder for minimum phase error
by sliding the encoder forward or backward on the mounting
surface as shown above. See Application Note 1011 for the
phase meter circuit.
5.3 Tighten the hex set screw to approximately 0.5 em. kg. (7.0 in.
OZ.I and remove the straight edge.
7.4 No stress should be applied to the encoder package until
the RTV cures. Curve time is 2 hours @ 70· Cor 24 hours
at room temperature.
.
5.4 The code wheel gap may now be visually inspected to check
against gross errors. A nominal gap of 0.8 mm 10.030 ·in.1
should be maintained.
Note: After mounting, the encoder should be free from mechanical
forces that could cause a shift in the encoder's position relative to its
mounting surface.
6.0 EMITTER END PLATE
8.0
INDEX PULSE ADJUSTMENT-{HEDS-6010)
8.1
Some applications require that the index pulse be aligned with
the main data channels. The index pulse pOSition and the
phase must be adjusted simultaneously. This procedure sets
index phase to zero.
.
6.2 Align the emitter end plate so that the two flanges straddle the
track of the encoder body where the wire pins are located.
Press the end plate until it snaps into place.
8.2
Connect the encoder cable.
6.3 Visually check to see if the end plate is properly seated.
8.4
Using an oscilloscope and the circuit shown in 1.4, set the
trigger for the falling edge of the PI output. Adjust the index
pulse so thatTl and T2 are equal in width. The physical adjustment is a side to side motion as shown by the arrow.
8.5
Recheck the phase adjustment.
8.6
Repeat steps 8.3-8.5 until both phase and index pulse position
are as desired.
8.7
No stress should be applied to the encoder package until
the RTV has cured. Cure time: 2 hours @ 70· C or,24 hours
at room temperature.
6.1
Visually check that the wire pins in the encoder body are
straight and straighten if necessary.
8.3 Run the motor. Adjustfor minimum phase error using an oscilloscope or phase meter. (See 7.3).
4-40
--------
F/i'PW
HEWLETT
~e.tI PACKARO
PANEL MOUNT DIGITAL
POTENTIOMETER
HEDS-7500
SERIES
Features
• DESIGNED FOR MANUAL OPERATION
• SMALL SIZE
• RELIABLE OPTICAL TECHNOLOGY
• 256 PULSES PER REVOLUTION STANDARD
Other Resolutions Available
• TTL COMPATIBLE DIGITAL OUTPUT
• SINGLE 5 V SUPPLY
• -20 0 TO +85 0 C OPERATING RANGE
• 0.1 OZ.-IN. NOMINAL SHAFT TORQUE
Description
The HEDS-7500 series is a family of digital potentiometers
designed for applications where a hand operated panel
mounted encoder is required. The unit outputs two digital
waveforms which are 90 degrees out of phase to provide
resolution and direction information. 256 pulses per revolution is available as a standard resolution. The digital
outputs and the 5 V supply input of the HEDS-7500 are
accessed through color coded wire or through a 10 pin
connector mounted on a 6 inch ribbon cable. Each digital
output is capable of driving two standard TTL loads.
code wheel rotates between the LED and detector to provide digital pulses without wipers or noise. The
HEDS-7500 is configured to provide standard potentiometer type panel mounting. Additional design information is
available in Application Note 1025.
Applications
The HEDS-7500 series digital potentiometer may be used
in applications where a manually operated knob is
required to convert angular position into digital
information.
The HEDS-7500 emphasizes reliability by using solid state
LEDs and photodiode detectors. A non-contacting slotted
outline Drawing
j---' l61---t----"".911.221
rl13'2gl:~:~1 12.110,Wll
53
I
10POSITlON
IPC CONNECTOR
C.ENrt:R POLAFUZED
OR
4. COLOR CODED
~
,~
0
11''';~~=~
L
THReAD
31$~32:
NUT SUPPLIED
i~~~i MAX, OIA.
TYPICAlOIM£NS!ONS IN M:tlL1METRESANCHINCHES)
4-41
Absolute Maximum Ratings
Symbol
Min.
Max.
Units
Storage Temperature
Ts
-40
+85
°C
Operating Temperature
TA
-40
Parameter
Notes
+85
°C
Vibration
20
9
20 Hz-2 kHz
Shock
30
9
V
11 msec
Supply Voltage
Vee
-0.5
7
Output Voltage
Vo
-0.5
Vee
V
Output Current per Channel
10
-1
5
mA
1
Ibs.
Ibs.
Shaft Load - Radial
Axial
1
-
Recommended Operating Conditions
Parameter
Symbol
Min.
Max.
Units
T
-20
85
°C
Vee
4.5
5.5
V
300
RPM
Temperature
Supply Voltage
Rotation Speed
Noles
Non-condensing atmosphere
Ripple < 100 mV p _p
Electrical Characteristics
When operating within the recommended operating range.
Electrical Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Range Typical at 25° C.
Parameter
Symbol
Supply Current
Icc
High Level Output Voltage
VOH
Low Level Output Voltage
VOL
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Units
21
40
mA
2.4
0.4
Notes
= -40 p.A Max.
V
IOH
V
IOL=3.2 mA
CAUTION: Device not intended for applications where coupling to a motor is required.
WAVEFORMS
RECOMMENDED INTERFACE CIRCUIT
CHANNEL A
f J
A
90' ± 4 5 . j
-
l
Vee
1
0
CHA
CHANNEL B
ILJl
CHB~B
1
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ GROUNO
GROUND
0
CH B LEADS CH A FOR COUNTERCLOCKWISE ROTATION.
CH A LEADS CH B FOR CLOCKWISE ROTATION.
STANDARD 74SERIES COULD ALSO BE USED TO IMPLEMENT THIS CIRCUIT.
TERMINATION
Ribbon Cable Termination
Color Coded Wire Termination
Ordering Information
PINOUT
~
CHANNEL A
Vee
GROUND
N.C. OR GROUND
N.C. OR GROUND
GROUND
DESIGNATION
WHITE/BLACK/RED
WHITE/BLACK/BROWN
WHITE/RED
BLACK
CHANNEL A
CHANNEL B
Vee
GROUND
Vee
BOTTOM VIEW
9
10
CHANNEL'B
Vee
N.C.
NOTE: REVERSE INSERTION Of THE
CONNECTOR WILL PERMANENTLY
DAMAGE THE DETECTOR IC.
MATING CONNECTOR
BERG 65·692'()01 OR EQUIVALENT
4-42
Part Number
Description
PPR
Termination
HEDS-7500
256
Wire
HEDS-7501
256
Cable
GENERAL PURPOSE
MOTION CONTROL Ie
. :'II HEWLETT
~
171~ PAC~ARD
Features
• DC, DC BRUSH LESS AND STEPPER MOTOR
CONTROL
o POSITION CONTROL
• VELOCITY CONTROL
AO,IDaS
• PROGRAMMABLE VELOCITY PROFILING
o
PROGRAMMABLE DIGITAL FILTER
o
PROGRAMMABLE COMMUTATOR
o
PROGRAMMABLE PHASE OVERLAP
o
PROGRAMMABLE PHASE ADVANCE
o
GENERAL 8 BIT PARALLEL 1/0 PORT
Vee
PROF
INIT
CiIiU'I'
ffijjI
PULSE
SIGN
• 8 BIT pARALLEL MOTOR COMMAND PORT
MCo
• PWM MOTOR COMMAND PORT
o
QUADRATURE DECODER FOR ENCODER
SIGNALS
o
24 BIT POSITION COUNTER
o
~NGLE5VPOWERSUPP~
1 OR 2 MHz CLOCK OPERATION
Package Dimensions
ORIENTATION NOTCH:
t:::~:
mn-----]
L
NOTES:
'I. EACH PIN CENTERLINE TO 8E LOCATEO
WITHIN 0.010" OF ITS TRUE
LONGITUOINAL POSITION.
2. LEAO FINISH: SOLOER COAT,
r--
-I r-
2.0601 0.010
0•080 t 0.010
--I
0.600tO.Ol0
CToe
OFBENOR
SEATING
PLANE
PIN NO, 1 10
0.200MAX
1-1
0.02 MIN
,e~--:!~
.J
Me,
Me2
'SHO·lu~i.-O-SE""L""E-FT-F-LO"'ATING
PINOUT
o TTL COMPATIBLE
o
7
:±=
4o-PIN PLASTIC DUAL INLINE PACKAGE
'"
General Description
The HCTL-1000 is a high performance, general purpose
motion control IC fabricated in Hewlett-Packard NMOS
technology, It performs all the time-intensive tasks of digital
motion control, thereby freeing the host processor for
other tasks. The Simple programmability. of all control
parameters provides the user with maximum flexibility and
Figure 1. System Block
Diagram
quick design of control systems with a minimum number
of components. All that is needed for a complete servo
system is a host processor to specify commands, an
amplifier and motor with an incremental encoder. No
analog compensation or velocity feedback is necessary
(see Figure 1).
Table of Contents
Page
General Description , .. " ... , ... ,',." ............. , 1
Theory of Operation " ... " .. ,', .. , .. , ......... ".,. :2
Absolute Maximum Ratings .... , .. , .. , ............ ,' 3
DC Characteristics .... , ... ,.,'" .:. , .. , .. , . , .. , , , , , ,. 3
AC Characteristics , ... , , ... , , ..' ... , , • , • , .. , , , , , .. , ,. 4
Timing Diagrams " .•• " •. ,., .. "."., .... " •. " .. .',. 5
Functional Pin Description ", ... ,"', .... ,"", ....• 9
Operation of the HCTL-1000 " ......... , ............ 10
- User Accessible Registers . '." . , , , , , ••.•..•.••.•• 10
- Operating Modes ,." .. , ... ,',., .. , ....... ,.,'" 13
- Commutator"" •.. , .. '.,.,.".,',., .. , .. ,""'.'., 17
Interfacing the HCTL-1000 .......... , , ....... , , ...... 20
- I/O Interface '., .. ,', .... ,.," ' ...•• ,"', ... ,......... 20
- Encoder Interface " .. , .. , .. , .............. , , ... , 20
,.... Amplifier Interface , .•. ', .. " ... , .. , ....... , , , .. , 21
ESD WARNING: Since this is an NMOS device, normal
precautions should be taken to avoid static damage.
4-43
PROF
INIT
r--~-------------------------------,
I
..
I
ADO/DBO
MC,
AD,/DB,
MC,
MC,
AD2/DB2
AD3/DB3
MOTOR
COMMANO
AD4/DB4
PORT
MC,
MC,
ADs/DBs
MC.
DB,
MC.
DB1
ALE
CS
PULSE
OE
SIGN
R/W
PHA
PHB
COMMUTATOR
i _r;;:;;:;:;,
PHC·
EXTCLK~
PHD
RESET+
I
IL _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
CHA CHB
Figure 2. Internal Block Diagram
Introduction
Theory of Operation
The purpose of this section is to describe the organization
of this data sheet. The front page includes the key features
of the HCTL-1000, a general description of the part, the
mechanical drawing and pin-out, and a Table of Contents.
Following this section is the Theory of Operation, which
gives the user a brief overview of how the HCTL-1000 operates by describing the internal block diagram shown in
Figure 2. The following five sections give the specifications
of the HCTL-1000, including Absolute Maximum Ratings,
DC Characteristics, AC Characteristics, Timing Diagrams,
and Functional Pin Descriptions. The final two sections
include the detailed information on how to operate and
interface to the HCTL-1000. The How to Operate section
discusses the function and address of each software register, and describes how to use the four position and velocity
control modes and the electronic commutator. The How to
Interface section describes how to interface the HCTL-1000
to a microprocessor, an encoder, and an amplifier.
The HCTL-1000 is a general purpose motor controller
which provides position and velocity control for dc, dc
brush less and stepper motors. The internal block diagram
of the HCTL-1000 is shown in Figure 2. The HCTL-1000
receives it input commands from a host processor and
position feedback from an incremental encoder with quadrature output. An a-bit directional multiplexed address/data
bus interfaces the HCTL-1000 to the host processor. The
encoder feedback is decoded into quadrature counts and
a 24-bit counter keeps track of position. The HCTL-1000
executes anyone of four control algorithms selected by
the user. The four control modes are:
•
•
•
•
4-44
Position Control
Proportional Velocity Control
Trapezoidal Profile Control for"point to point moves
Integral Velocity Control with continuous velocity profiling
using linear acceleration
--------- -----
-
The resident Position Profile Generator calculates the
necessary profiles for Trapezoidal Profile Control and
Integral Velocity Control. The HCTL-1000 compares the
desired position (or velocity) to the actual position (or
velocity) to compute compensated motor commands using
a programmable digital filter D(z). The motor command is
externally available at the Motor Command port as an 8bit byte and at the PWM port as a Pulse Width Modulated
(PWM) signal.
-
--- -------------- - - - - - - - - -
Absolute Maximum Ratings
Operating Temperature ................... O°C to 70°C
Storage Temperature ................. -40°C to +125°C
Supply Voltage ........................... -0.3 V to 7 V
Input Voltage ............................ -0.3 V to 7 V
Maximum Power Dissipation ................... 0.95 W
Maximum Clock Frequency .................... 2 MHz
The HCTL-1000 has the capability of providing electronic
commutation for dc brushless and stepper motors. Using
the encoder position information, the motor phases are
enabled in the correct sequence. The commutator is fully
programmable to encompass most motor encoder combinations. I n addition, phase overlap and phase advance
can be programmed to improve torque ripple and high
speed performance. The HCTL-1000 contains a number of
flags including two externally available flags, Profile and
Initialization, which allow the user to see or check the
status of the controller. It also has two emergency flags,
Limit and Stop, which allow operation of the HCTL-1000 to
be interrupted under emergency conditions.
The HCTL-1000 controller is a digitally sampled data system.
While information from the host processor is accepted
asynchronously with respect to the control functions, the
motor command is computed on a discrete sample time
basis. The sample timer is programmable.
D.C. Characteristics T
Parameter
A
= O°C to +70°C; Vee = 5 V ± 5%; Vss = 0 V
Symbol
Min.
lYP·
Max.
Units
Power Supply
Vee
4.75
5.00
5.25
V
Supply Current
Icc
80
180
mA
Iii
10
p.A
Tristate Output
Leakage Current
I'on
±10
p.A
Input Low Voltage
V
Input Leakage Current
Teit Conditione
"'5.25 V
VOUT " -0.3 to 5.25 V
VIL
-0.3
0.8
Input High Voltage
V'H
2.0
Vee
V
Output low Voltage
VOL
-0.3
0.4
V
Output High Voltage
VOH
2.4
Vee
V
950
mW
20
pF
T A" 25° C, f'" 1 MHz
unmeasured pins
returned to ground
pF
Same as above
Power DIssipation
Po
Input Capacitance
C'N
Output Capacitance load
COUT
400
100
4-45
=2.2mA
IOH = -200 p.A
A.C. Electrical Characteristics· TA =o·c to 70·C; Vcc =5 V± 5%; Units =nsec
2MHz
ID# Signal
1
Clock Period
Symbol
Min.
tCPER
500
230
200
=
2
Pulse Width, Clock High
3
4
Pulse Width, Olock Low
5
Input Pulse Width Reset
6
Input Pulse Width StoP. LImit
tiP
GOO
7
Input Pulse Width Index, Index
t,X
8
Input Pulse Width CHA, CHB
tlAB
1600
1600
tAB
600
tCPWH
tCPWL
tOR
Olock Rise and Fall Time
tlRsT
9 Delay CHA to CHB Transition
10 Input Rise/Fail Time OHA, CHB, Index
Input Rise/FaU Time Reset. ALE. OS. DE, Stop, Limit
12
Input Pulse Width ArE, OS
tlPW
tAC
14 Delay Time. ALE Rise to CS Rise
15 Address Set Up Time Before ALE Rise
tOA
tASR1
16 Address Set Up Time Before OS Fall
17 Write Data Set Up Time Before OS Rise
18
19
20
21
Delay Time. Write Cyo/e. CS Rise to ALE Fall
22
Delay Time. Read/Write, OS Rise to CS Fait
tASR
tOSR
AddresslOata Hold Time
tH
Set Up Time, RIW Before CS Rise
twos
Hold Time, RIW After CS Rise
tWH
I'
23 Write Cycle, ALE Fall to ALE Fall For Next Write
Hm., Cs RI" .. OE
26
27
twe
F~I
tosOE
ay Time. DE Fall to Data Bus valid
tOEDe
y Time, CS Rise to Data Bus Valid
tosoe
t Pulse Width DE
t'PWOE
28
Hold Time. Data Held After DE Rise
tOOEH
29
Delay Time, Read Cycle, CS Rise to ALE Fall
tOSALR
30 Read Cycle, ALE Fall to ALE Fall For Next Read
31 Output Pulse Width. PROF. INIT, Pulse. Sign,
PHA-PHD, MC Port
32 Output Rise/Fall Time. PROF, INn; Pulse, Sign
PHA-PHD. Me Port
50
5000
1100
3100
3100
1100
450
50
80
50
90
50
H
50
20
20
20
50
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
3400
3000
3530
3200
100
0
1830
1700
100
1800
100
20
3300
100
20
tRC
1820
1950
3320
3450
tOF
500
1000
tOR
20
tEP
20
150
20
300
20
33 Delay Time, Clock Rise to Output Rise
34 Delay Time, CS Rising to MC Port Valid
35 Hold Time, ALE High After CS Rise
tcsMO
tALH
100
100
36 Pulse Width, ArE High
tALPWH
100
100
4-46
Max.
200
tCSAL~
tcscs
M
1000
300
50
tlR
13 Delay Time, ALE Fall to OS Fall
Max.
2500
t'ABR
11
Clock Frequency
1 MHz
1600
150
300
3200
HCTL-1000 I/O Timing Diagrams
Input logic level values are the TTL Logic levels V,L = 0.8 V and V,H = 2.0 V.
Output logic levels are VOL = 0.4 V and VOH = 2.4 V.
n-
~
INDEX _ _ _
_ __
CHA
_~=:r_
INDEX
~
CHB
CLOCK
RESET
i~,~F ----\J,---------i.l~SIGN
~~~~~
_ _ _.....t
4-47
------
, . _.. _ - - - - _. ._-", . .
_0J=:r_
~
HCTL-1000 I/O Timing Diagrams
There are three different timing configurations which can be used to give the uSer flexibility to interface the HCTL-1000 to
most microprocessors. See the I/O interface section for more details.
ALE/CS NON OVERLAPPED
Write Cycle
R/W
AD/DB
~.I.~
~ALlD
ADDRESS
Read Cycle
4-48
HCTL-1000 I/O Timing Diagrams
ALE/CS OVERLAPPED
Write Cycle
t----------i12}----------i
RiW
AD/DB
Read Cycle
4-49
HCTL-1000 I/O Timing Diagrams
ALE WITHING CS
Write Cycle
1--------------------------~231r_------------------------~
ALE
1-----------{14r----------J+"'--'---------{ }----------l
Read Cycle
4-50
Functional Pin Description
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS
~ymbol
Pin Number
Description
2-7
Add1(!lsslData bus - Lower 6 bits of S-bit I/O port which are multiplexed between address
and a,l1ta.
6;;9
Data bu~ ;;-Y12R!lr 2 bits 91 8-bit IIQport usest for (jaya only.
ADO/DBOAD5/DB5
IJ;ls, D7
INPUT SIGNALS
Symbol
CHA/CHa
Index
Description
Pin Number
31,30
33
Channel A,a - input pins for position feedback from an incremental shaft encoder. Two
channels, A and B. 90 degrees out of phase are required.
Index Pulse - input from the reference or Index pulse of an Incremental encoder. Used
only In conjunction with the Commutator. Either a low or high true signal can be used with
the Index pin. See Timing Diagrams and Encoder Interface section for more detail.
R/W
37
Read/Write - determines direction of data exchange for the I/O port.
A'l::'E
38
Address Latch Enable - enables lower 6 bits of external data bus into internal address
latch.
CS
39
Chip Select - performs 110 operation dependent on status of RIW line. For a Write. the
external bus data is written into the internal addressed location. For Read, data is read
from an internal location into an internal output latch.
OE
40
Output Enable - enables the data in the internal output latch onto the external data bus
to complete a Read operation.
Limit
14
Limit Switch - an Internal flag which when externally set, triggers an unconditional
branch to the Initialization/Idle mode before the next control sample is executed. Motor
Command is set to zero. Status of the LImit flag is monitored In the Status register.
SfOij
15
Stop Flag - an internal flag that is externally set. When flag Is set during Integral Velocity
Control mode, the Motor Command is decelerated to a stop.
Reset
36
Reset - a hard reset of internal circuitry and a branch to Reset mode.
ExtClk
34
External Clock
Vec
11,35
Voltage Supply - Both Veo pins must be connected to a 5.0 volt supply.
Vss
10,32
Circuit Ground
NC
1
Not Connected - this pin should be left floating.
OUTPUT SIGNALS
Symbol
MCO-MC7
Pulse
Sign
PHA-PHD
Description
Pin Number
18-25
Motor Command Port - 8-blt output port which contains the digital motor command
adjusted for easy bipolar DAC Interfacing. MC7 Is the most significant bit (MSB).
16
Pulse - pulse width modulated signal whose duty cycle is proportional to the Motor
Command magnitude. The frequency of the signal is External Clock/lOa and pulse width
is resolved Into 100 external clocks.
17
Sign - gives the sign/direction of the pulse signal.
26-29
Phase A. a, C, D -
Phase Enable outputs of the Commutator.
Prof
12
Profile Flag - Status flag which indicates that the controller is executing a profiled
position move in the Trapezoidal Profile Control mode.
lnlt
13
Initialization/Idle Flag - Status flag which indicates that the controller is in the
Initialization/Idle mode.
- - - - - - - - - - - - _. . ._.....
4-51
__
.. -_... _ ... ' - - -
.... - ......._------_ .. _--_..
-_._.. _ - - -
Operation of the HeTl-1000
F2 - Unipolar Flag - set/cleared by the user to specify
Bipolar (clear) or Unipolar (set) mode for the Motor
Command port.
USER ACCESSIBLE REGISTERS
The HCTL-l000 operation is controlled by a bank of 64 8-bit
registers, 32 of which are user accessible. These registers
contain command and configuration information necessary
to properly run the controller chip. The 32 user-accessible
registers are listed in Table I. The register number is also
the address. A functional block diagram of the HCTL-l000
which shows the role of the user-accessible registers is
also included in Figure 3. The other 32 registers are used
by the internal CPU as scratch registers and should not be
accessed by the user.
F3 - Proportional Velocity Control Flag - set by the user
to specify Proportional Velocity control.
F4 - Hold Commutator Flag - set/cleared by the user or
automatically by the Align mode. When set, this flag
inhibits the internal commutator counters to allow
open loop stepping of a motor by using the commutator. (See "Offset register" description in the
"Commutator section.")
F5 - Integral Velocity Control- set by the.user to specify
Integral Velocity Control. Also set and cleared by the
HCTL-l000 during execution of the Trapezoidal Profile mode. This is transparent to the user except
when the Limit flag is set (see "Emergency Flags"
section).
There are several registers which the user must configure
to his application. These configuration registers are discussed in more detail below.
Program Counter (ROSH)
Status Register (R07H)
The Program Counter, which is a write-only register, executes the preprogrammed functions of the controller. The
program counter is used along with the control flags FO,
F3, and F5 in the Flag register (ROOH) to change control
modes. The user can write any of the following four
commands to the Program Counter.
The Status register indicates the status of the HCTL-l000.
Each bit decodes into one signal. All 8 bits are user
readable and are decoded as shown below. Only the lower
4 bits can be written to by the user to configure the HCTL1000. To set or clear any of the lower 4 bits, the user writes
an 8-bit word to R07H. The upper 4 bits are ignored. Each
of the lower 4 bits directly sets/clears the corresponding
bit of the Status register as shown below. For example,
writing XXXX010l to R07H sets the PWM Sign Reversal
Inhibit, sets the Commutator Phase Configuration to "3
Phase", and sets the Commutator Count Configuration to
"full".
OOH - Software Reset
01H -Initialization/Idle mode
02H - Align mode
03H - Control modes; flags FO, F3, and F5 in the Flag
register (ROOH) specify which control mode will be
executed.
The commands written to the Program Counter are discussed in more detail in the section called Operating
Modes and are shown in flowchart form in Figure 4.
Status
Bit
Flag Register (ROOH)
The Flag register contains flags FO thru F5. This register is
also a write-only register. Each flag is set and cleared by
writing an 8-bit data word to ROOH. The upper four bits are
ignored by the HCTL-l000. The bottom three bits specify
the flag address and the fourth bit specifies whether to set
(bit = 1) or clear (bit = 0) the addressed flag.
Bit number
Function
7-4
3
Don't
set/clear
care
2
1
0
A02
AD1
ADO
FO - Trapezoidal Profile Flag - set by the user to execute
Trapezoidal Profile Control. The flag is reset by the
controller when the move is completed. The status
of FO can be monitored at the Profile pin (12) and in
Status register R07H bit 4.
Fl - Initialization/Idle Flag - set/cleared by the HCTL1000 to indicate execution of the Initialization/Idle
mode. The status of Fl can be monitored at the
Initialization/Idle pin (13) and in bit 5 of the Status
register (R07H). The user should not attempt to set
or clear Fl.
4-52
Function
Note
0
PWM Sign Reversal
Inhibit
0= off 1 =on
Discussed in Amplifier
Interface section
under PWM Port
1
Commutator Phase
Configuration
0=3 phase
1 "4 phase
Discussed in
Oommutator section
2
Commutator Count
Configuration
o=quadratu re
1 =: full
Discussed in
Commutator section
3
Should always be set
too
4
Trapezoidal Profile
Flag FO
1 " in Profile Oontrol
5
Initializatlonlldte
Discussed in Operating
Flag F1 1 =in
Mode sectio~~~~~de
Initialization/Idle Mode I nitializalionli
6
Stop Flag
Discussed in
sel (Stop triggered) Emergency Flags
1 = cleared (no Stop)
section
7
Limit Flag
Discussed in
=: set (Limit triggered) Emergency Flags
1'" cleared (no Limit)
section
Discussed in Operating
Mode section under
Trapezoidal Profife
Control
o"
o
I
TABLE I: REGISTER REFERENCE TABLE
Register
(Hel() (Dec)
ROOH
R05H
R07H
RoaH
ROSH
ROtH
RODH
ROEH
ROFH
R12H
R13H
R14H
R18H
R19H
R1AH
R1BH
R1CH
R1FH
R20H
R21H
R22H
R23H
R24H
R26H
R27H
R2aH
R29H
R2AH
R2BH
R34H
R35H
R3CH
User
f1!l'nctlon
Mode Used
Data Typel1]
Flag Regil\tar
~II
All
Program Counter
Status Register
All
a bit Motor '@Cftnmand Port 'All
PWM Motor Command Pori! iAll
Command Position (MSB) All except
Proportional Velocity
R130 Command Position
All except
Prop~tional Velooity
R140 Command Position (LSB)
All exc'ept
Proportional Velocity
R15D Sample Timer
'All
RlaD Aotual Position (MSS)
All
R190 Actual Position
All
R20D Actual Position (LSS)
All
R24D Commutator Ring
All
Rg.?D Commutator Velocity Timer All
R26D X
All
R27D Y Phase Overlap
All
R280 Offset
All
R31D Maximum Phase Advance
All
All except
R32D Filter Zero, A
Proportional Velocity
R33D Filter Pole, B
All except
Proportional Velocity
R34D Gain, K
All
R35D Command Velocity (LSB)
Proportional Velocity
R36D Command Velocity (MSS)
Proportional Velocity
R38D Acceleration (LSS)
Integral Velocity and
Trapezoidal Profile
R39D AcceleratIon (MSB)
I ntegral Velocity and
Trapezoidal Profile
R400 Maximum Velocity
Trapezoidal Profile
R41D Final Position (LSB)
Trapezoidal Proflle
R42D Final Position
Trapezoidal Profile
R430 Final Position (MSB)
Trapezoidal Profile
Proportional Velocity
R52D Actual Velocity (LSS)
R53D Aotual Velocity (MSB)
Proportional Velocity
R60D Command Velocity
Integral Velocity
ROOD
R050
R070
ROaD
R09D
R12D
-
A~ess
w
w
r/w121
Reference
Page~1.1lbber
r/w
"r/w
"r/wI3]
10
10
10, 1a
21
22
15
2's complement
r/w[3)
15
2'$ complement
r/w(3)
15
scalar
2's oomplemEfit
2's complement
2's complement
5calar[6.7)
scalar
scalar(6)
scalad6]
2's complementf7]
scalar[6,71
scalar
w
13
15
15
15
18
19
18
18
18
scalar
r/w
12
scalar
2's complement
2'$ complement
scalar
r/w
r/w
r/w
r/w
12
15
15
15, 16
scalarl 6]
r/w
15,16
scalar(6)
2'5 oomplement
2's complement
2's complement
2's complement
2's oomplement
2'5 complement
r/w
r/w
r/w
16
16
soalar
-
2's oomplem~faOH
2's complemei',
2's complement
rl4)
rf4l/w(5)
r[4)
r/w
w
r/w
r/w
r/w
r/w
r/w
r/w
r
r
r/w
,
19
12
16
16
15
15
15
Noles:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5. Writing to R13H clears Actual Position Counter to zero.
6. The scalar data is limited to positive numbers (OOH to 7FH).
7. The commutator registers (R18H, Rl CH, Rl FH) have further
limits which are discussed in the Commutator section of this
data sheet.
Consult appropriate section for data format and use.
Upper 4 bits are read only.
Writing to ROEH (LSB) latches all 24 bits.
Reading R14H (LSB) latches data into R12H and R13H.
4-53
POSITIOIII PROFILE GENERATION
INTEGRAL
VELOCITV
1127H AceEL Msa
1126H ACCEL LSS
~3CH COMMAND
VELOCITY
TRAPEZOIOAL
PROFILE
R27H ACCEL M58
1126H ACCEL lsa
R2SH MAXIMUM VELOCITY
R2aH FINAL POS Msa
R~AH fiNAL POS
R29H FINAL POS LSD
......
··
,·••
COMMANO VELOCITY
R24HMSS
~3H
COMMAND POSITION
ROCHMSS
ROOH
ROEH LSS
LSB
I
A)\ _o-B----'J
,-----1'
J
CONFIGURATION
,-==""",R",EG:-;I",ST:::Eo:RS=:---l/ . /
::~ ~~~~::::~~TeR r--- "
R07H STATUS FlEGI$TER
+
_
1
iL-- Dfd ~ ~
;r-
I
I
a'BIT PARALLEL
MOTOR COMMANO
PORT
DIGITAL FILTER
~~~~ :
R22HK
I
I
L_--~B
I
ACTUAL VElOCITV
R3SHMSS
R~4H lSS
-I
PWM MOTOR
COMMAND PORT
r - PULSE
...r-- SIGN
I R09HI
I SAMPLE TIMER I
lJ
I
COMMUTATOR PORT
1118H RING
ACTUAL POSITION
r------<~ :;:~ :
R'21-1 MS8
RI3H
I
R14H LSI<
t
A ;; • PROPORTIONAL VELOCITY
CONTROL MODE
B '" • POSITION CONTROL MODE
• INTEGRAL VELOCITY CONTROL MODE
• TRAPEZOIDAL PROFILE MODE
r-- MCo-MC,
L-RO_S_H_ _ _...
L-I
:
:-----------i
'i
I
0-----1
I
I
I
1
I
LQUADRATURE DECODER I
1
r-- PHA-PHD
R leH OFFSET
RlfH MAX ADVANCE
R19H VELOCITV TIMER
JB
Figure 3. Register Block Diagram
Emergency Flags - Stop and Limit
Stop and Limit flags are hardware set flags that signify the
occurrence of an emergency condition and cause the controller to immediately take special action.
The Stop flag affects the HCTL-1000 only in the Integral
Velocity mode. When the Stop flag is set, the system will
come to a decelerated stop and stay in this mode with a
command velocity of zero until the Stop flag is cleared
and a new command velocity is specified.
The Limit flag, when set in any control mode, causes the
HCTL-1000 to go into the Initialization/Idle mode, clearing
the Motor Command and causing an immediate motor
shutdown. When the Limit flag is set, none of the three
control mode flags (FO, F3, or F5) are cleared as the
HCTL-1000 enters the Initialization/Idle mode. The user
should be aware that these flags are still set before commanding the HCTL-1000 to re-enter one of the four control
modes from Initialization/Idle mode. In addition, the user
should note that if the Limit flag is set while the HCTL-1000
is in Trapezoidal Profile Control mode, then BOTH flags FO
AND F5 should be cleared before the HCTL-1000 is commanded to re-enter any of the fou r control modes from
Initialization/Idle mode.
Stop and Limit flags are set by a low level input at their
respective pins (15, 14). The flags can only be cleared
when the input to the corresponding pin goes high, signifying that the emergency condition has been corrected,
AND a write to the Status register (R07H) is executed.
That is, after the emergency pi n has been set and cleared,
the flag also must be cleared by writing to R07H. Any
word that is written to R07H after the emergency pin is set
and cleared will clear the emergency flag, but the lower 4
bits of that word will also reconfigure the Status register.
Digital Filter (R22H, R20H, R21 H)
All control modes use some part of the programmable digital filter D(z) to compensate for closed loop system stability. The compensation D(z) has the form:
4-54
K(Z-~)
D(z) =
256
---=-4 (z+lL)
256
[1)
where:
z = the digital domain operator
K = digital filter gain (R22H)
A = digital filter zero (R20H)
B = digital filter pole (R21 H)
- - - - - - _ . - - _ . _ - - - _ . _.....
The compensation is a first-order lead filter which in
combination with the Sample Timer T(ROFH) affects the
dynamic step response and stability of the control system.
The Sample Timer, T, determines the rate at which the
control algorithm gets executed. All parameters, A, S, K,
and T, are 8-bit scalars that can be changed by the user
any time.
The digital filter uses previously sampled data to calculate
D(z). This old internally sampled data is cleared when the
Initialization/ldle mode is executed.
In Position Control, Integral Velocity Control, and Trapezoidal Profile Control the digital filter is implemented in
the time domain as shown below:
MC n = (K/4)(Xn) - [(N256)(K/4)(X n_1 ) + (S/256)(MC n.1)] [2]
where:
n = current sample time
n-1 = previous sample time
MC n = Motor Command Output at n
MC n-1 = Motor Command Output at n-1
Xn = (Command Position - Actual Position) at n
Xn.1 = (Command Position - Actual Position) at n-1
Velocities are specified to the HCTL-1000 in terms of
quadrature encoder counts per sample time. In the Trapezoidal Profile and Integral Velocity Control modes, the
minimum velocity which may be specified is one encoder
count per sample time. The Proportional Velocity Control
mode, allows a minimum velocity of 1 encoder count per
16 sample times to be specified. To achieve the slowest
velocities possible, the sample times for the HCTL-1000
must be made as slow as possible.
For more information on system sampling times, bandwidth,
and stability, please consult Hewlett-Packard Application
Note 1032, "Design of the HCTL-1000's Digital Filter
Parameters by the Combination Method."
OPERATING MODES
- Reset
- Initialization/ldle
-Align.
[3]
where:
Yn = (Command Velocity - Actual Velocity) at n
The four control modes available to the user include:
-
Position Control
Proportional Velocity Control
Trapezoidal Profile Control
I ntegral Velocity Control
The HCTL-1000 switches from one mode to another as a
result of one of the following three mechanisms:
Sample Timer Register (ROFH)
The contents of this register set the sampling period of the
HCTL-1000. The sampling period is:
t = 16(T+1 )(lIfrequency of the external clock)
[4]
where: T = register ROFH
The Sample Timer has a limit on the minimum allowable
sample time depending on the control mode being executed.
The limits are given below:
ROFH Contents
Minimum Limit
Position Control
Proportional Velocity Control
Trapezoidal Profile Control
Integral Velocity Control
.
The HCTL-1000 executes anyone of 3 set up routines or 4
control modes selected by the user. The 3 set up routines
include:
In Proportional Velocity control the digital compensation
filter is implemented in the time domain as:
MC n = (K/4)(Y n)
__
07H
07H
OFH
OFH
1. The user writes to the Program Counter.
2. The user sets/clears flags FO, F3, or F5 by writing to the
Flag register (ROOH).
3. The controller switches automatically when certain initial
conditions are provided by the user.
This section describes the function of each set up routine
and control mode and the initial conditions which must be
provided by the user to switch from one mode to another.
Figure 4 shows a flowchart of the set up routines and
control modes, and shows the commands required to switch
from one mode to another.
Set Up Routines
(070)
(070)
(150)
(150)
1. RESET
The Reset mode is entered under all conditions by either
executing a hard reset (Reset pin goes low) or a soft reset
(write OOH to the Program Counter, R05H).
The maximum value of T (ROFH) is FFH (2550). With a 2
MHz clock, the sample time can vary from 64 !,sec to 2048
!,sec. With a 1MHz clock, the sample time can vary from
128 !,sec to 4096 !,sec.
Digital closed-loop systems with slow sampling times have
lower stability and a lower bandwidth than similar systems
with faster sampling times. To keep the system stability
and bandwidth as high as possible the HCTL-1000 should
typically be programmed with the fastest sampling time
possible.
The exception to this rule occurs when the user would like
to use the HCTL-1000 to control a motor with an encoder
at very slow velocities.
When a hard reset is executed, the following conditions
occur:
- All output signal pins are held low except Sign (17).
Databus (2-9). and Motor Command (18-25).
- All flags (FO to F5) are cleared.
- The Pulse pin of the PWM port is set low while the Reset
pin is held low. After the Reset pin is released (goes high)
the Pulse pin goes high for one cycle of the external clock
driving the HCTL-1000. The Pulse pin then returns to a low
output.
- The Motor Command port (R08H) is preset to 80H.
(1280)
- The Commutator logic is cleared.
- The 1/0 control logic is cleared.
- A soft reset is automatically executed.
4-55
When a soft reset is executed, the following conditions
occur:
- The digital filter parameters are preset to
A (R20H) = ESH (229D)
8 (R21 H) = K (R22H) = 40H (64D)
- The Sample Timer (ROFH) is preset to 40H. (64D)
- The Status register (R07H) is cleared.
- The Actual Position Counters (R12H, R13H, R14H) are
cleared to O.
From Reset mode, the HCTL-1000 goes automatically to
Initialization/Idle mode.
RESET PIN
LOW
2. INITIALIZATION/IDLE
The Initialization/Idle mode is entered either automatically
from Reset, by writing 01 H to the Program Counter (ROSH)
under' any conditions, or pulling the Limit pin low.
In .the Initialization/Idle mode, the following occur:
- The Initialization/Idle flag (F1) is set.
- The PWM port R09H is set to OOH (zero command).
- The Motor Command port (R08H) is set to 80H (128D)
(zero command).
- Previously sampled data stored in the digital filter is
cleared.
It is at this point that the user should pre-program all the
necessary registers needed to execute the desired control
mode. The HCTL-1000 stays in this mode (idling) until a
new mode command is given.
WRITE DOH
TO ROSH
3. ALIGN
WRITE 01H
TO ROSH
WRITE 03H
TO ROSH
SET/CLEAR FO, F3,OR FS*
FO
TRAI'EZOIOAL
PROFIL'
(CoNTROLLER CLEARS
. FOAT TH£ END
OF THE MoV1!.!
F3
PROPORTioNAL
VELOCITY
CoNTROL
FS
INTEGRAL
VE~QCITY
CONTROL
POSITION
CONTROL
The Align mode is executed only when using the commutator feature of the HCTL-1000. This mode automatically
aligns multiphase motors to the HCTL-1000's internal
Commutator.
The Align mode can be entered only from the Initialization/
Idle mode by writing 02H to the Program Counter register
(ROSH). 8efore attempting to enter the Align mode, the
user should clear all control mode flags and set both the
Command Position registers (ROCH, RODH, and ROEH)
and the Actual Position registers (R12H, R13H, and R14H)
to zero. After the Align mode has been executed, the
HCTL-1000 will automatically enter the Position Control
mode and go to position zero. 8y following this procedure,
the largest movement in the Align mode will be 1 torque
cycle of the motor.
The Align mode assumes: the encoder index pulse has
been physically aligned to the last motor phase during
encoder/motor assembly, the Commutator parameters have
been correctly preprogrammed (see the section called The
Commutator for details), and a hard reset has been executed while the motor is stationary.
The Align mode first disables the Commutator and with
open loop control enables the first phase (PHA) and then
the last phase (PHC or PHD) to orient the motor on the
last phase torque detent. Each phase is energized for 2048
system sampling periods (t). For proper operation, the
motor must come to a complete stop during the last phase
enable. At this point the Commutator is enabled and
commutation is closed loop.
The HCTL-1000 then switches automatically from the Align
mode to Position Control mode.
Control Modes
'Only one flag can be set at a time.
Figure 4. Operating Mode Flowchart
Control flags FO, F3, and FS in the Flag register (ROOH)
determine which control mode is executed. Only one
control flag can be set at a time. After one of these control
flags is set, the control modes are entered either automatically from Align or from the Initialization/Idle mode by
writing 03H to the Program Counter (ROSH).
4-56
1. POSITION CONTROL
FO, F3, FS cleared.
Position Control performs point-to-point position moves
with no velocity profiling. The user specifies a 24-bit
position command, which the controller compares to the
24-bit actual position. The position error is calcuated, the
full digital lead compensation is applied and the motor
command is output.
The controller will remain position-locked at a destination
until a new position command is given.
The actual and command position data is 24-bit two'scomplement data stored in six 8-bit registers. Position is
measured in encoder quadrature counts.
The command position resides in ROCH (MSB), ROOH,
ROEH (LSB). Writing to ROEH latches all 24 bits at once
for the control algorithm. Therefore, the command position
is written in the sequence ROCH, ROOH and ROEH. The
command registers can be read in any desired order.
Because the Command Velocity registers (R24H and R23H)
are internally interpreted by the HCTL-1000 as 12 bits of
integer and 4 bits of fraction, the host processor must
multiply the desired command velocity (in quadrature
counts/sample time) by 16 before programming it into the
HCTL-1000's Command Velocity registers.
The actual velocity is computed only in this algorithm and
stored in scratch registers R35H (MSB) and R34H (LSB).
There is no fractional component in the actual velocity
registers and they can be read in any order.
The controller tracks the command velocity continuously
until new mode command is given. The system behavior
after a new velocity command is governed only by the
system dynamics until a steady state velocity is reached.
The actual position resides in R12H (MSB), R13H, and
R14H (LSB). Reading R14H latches the upper two bytes
into an internal buffer. Therefore, Actual Position registers
are read in the order of R14H, R13H, and R12H for correct
instantaneous position data. The Actual Position registers
cannot be written to, but they can all be cleared to 0
simultaneously by a write to register R13H.
The largest position move possible in Position Control
mode is 7FFFFFH (8,388,6070) quadrature encoder counts.
3. INTEGRAL VELOCITY CONTROL
FS set
Integral Velocity Control performs continuous velocity profiling which is specified by a command velocity and command acceleration. Figure 5 shows the capability of this
control algorithm.
The user can change velocity and acceleration any time to
continuously profile velocity in time. Once the specified
velocity is reached, the HCTL-1000 will maintain that
velocity until a new command is specified. Changes between
actual velocities occur at the presently specified linear
acceleration.
F3 set
The command velocity is an 8-bit two's-complement word
stored in R3CH. The units of velocity are quadrature
counts/sample time.
Proportional Velocity Control performs control of motor
speed using only the gain factor, K, for compensation. The
dynamic pole and zero lead compensation are not used.
(See the "Digital Filter" section of this data sheet.)
The conversion from rpm to quadrature counts/sample
time is shown in equation 5. The Command Velocity
register (R3CH) contains only integer data and has no
fractional component.
The command and actual velocity are 16-bit two's-complement words.
While the overall range of the velocity command is 8 bits,
two's-complement, the difference between any two sequential commands cannot be greater than 7 bits in magnitude (i.e., 127 decimal). For example, when the HCTL-1000
is executing a command velocity of 40H (+640), the next
velocity command must fall in the range of 7FH (+1270),
the maximum command range, to C1H (-630), the largest
allowed difference.
2. PROPORTIONAL VELOCITY CONTROL
The command velocity resides in registers R24H (MSB)
and R23H (LSB). These registers are unlatched which
means that the command velocity will change to a new
velocity as soon as the value in either R23H or R24H is
changed. The registers can be read or written to in any
order.
R24H
IIII IIII
The command acceleration is a 16-bit scalar word stored
in R27H and R26H. The upper byte (R27H) is the integer
part and the lower byte (R26H) is the fractional part
R23H
IIII.FFFF
COMMAND VELOCITY FORMAT
The units of velocity are quadrature counts/sample time.
To convert from rpm to quadrature counts/sample time,
use the formula shown below:
Vq = (Vr)(N)(t)(0.01667/rpm-sec)
[5]
Where:
Vq =velocity in quadrature counts/sample time
Vr = velocity in rpm
N = 4 times the number of slots in the codewheel
(i.e., quadrature counts).
t = The HCTL-1000 sample time in seconds. (See the
section on the HCTL-1000's Sample Timer register).
4-57
(2)
CD
USER CHANGES ACCELERATION COMMAND
USER CHANGES VELOCITY COMMAND
Figure 5. Inlegral Velocily Mode
provided for resolution. The integer part has a range of
OOH to 7FH, The contents of R26H are internally divided
by 256 to produce the fractional resolution.
~
VELOCITY
_ _ _ _ _. - - MAXIMUM VELOCITY
USEVkeEL
..-
FO SET
BY
AC~
~~
._-- "\rCTl-1000
CLEARED BY
L----~----~T~R~A~PE~Z~O~ID~A~L----~~-----t
R27H
R26H
OIllIIII FFFFFFFF/256
-+--- MAXIMUM VELOCITY
COMMAND ACCELERATION FORMAT
VELOCITY
FOSE~ACCEL
BY USEr
t
FOClEARED BY
H TL-1000
•t
r
L-____~~------~------~~---_t
The units of acceleration are quadrature counts/sample
time squared.
TRIANGULAR
To convert from rpm/sec to quadrature counts/[sample
time]2, use the formula shown below:
Aq = (Ar)(N)(t2)(0.01667/rpm-sec)
ACCEL
1/2 WAY TO
FINAL POSITION
FINAL POSITION
Figure 6. Trapezoidal Profile Mode
[6]
4. TRAPEZOIDAL PROFILE CONTROL
Where:
Aq = Acceleration in quadrature counts/[sample timej2
Ar = Acceleration in rpm/sec
N = 4 times the number of slots in the codewheel (i.e.,
quadrature counts)
t = The HCTL-1000 sample time in seconds. (See the
section on the HCTL-1000's Sample Timer register).
FO-Set
Trapezoidal Profile Control performs point-to-point position
moves and profiles the velocity trajectory to a trapezoid or
triangle. The user specifies only the desired final position,
acceleration and maximum velocity. The controller computes
the necessary profile to conform to the command data. If
maximum velocity is reached before the distance halfway
point, the profile will be trapeZOidal, otherwise the profile
will be triangular. Figure 6 shows the possible trajectories
with Trapezoidal Profile control.
Because the Command Acceleration registers (R27H and
R26H) are internally interpreted by the HCTL-1000 as 8
bits of integer and 8 bits of fraction, the host processor
must multiply the desired command acceleration (in quadrature counts/[sample timej2) by 256 before programming
it into the HCTL-1000's Command Acceleration registers.
Internally, the controller performs velocity profiling through
position control.
Each sample time, the internal profile generator uses the
information which the user has programmed into the Command Velocity register (R3CH) and the Command Acceleration registers (R27H and R26H) to determine the value
which will be automatically loaded into the Command
Position registers (ROCH, RODH, and ROEH). After the new
command position has been generated, the difference
between the value in the Actual Position registers (R12H,
R13H, and R14H) and the new value in the Command
Position registers is calculated as the new position error.
This new position error is used by the full digital compensation filter to compute a new motor command output for
this sample time. The register block diagram in Figure 3
further shows how the internal profile generator works in
Integral Velocity mode. In control theory terms, integral
compensation has been added and therefore, this system
has zero steady-state error.
Although Integral Velocity Control mode has the advantage
over Proportional Velocity mode of zero steady state velocity
error, its disadvantage is that the closed loop stability is
more difficult to achieve. In Integral Velocity Control mode,
the system is actually a position control system and therefore the complete dynamic compensation D(z} is used.
If the external Stop flag F6 is set during this mode
signaling an emergency situation, the controller automatiically decelerates to zero velocity at the presently specified
acceleration factor and stays in this condition until the flag
is cleared. The user then can specify new velocity profiling
data.
The command data for Trapezoidal Profile Control mode
consists of a final position, a command acceleration, and a
maximum velocity. The 24-bit, two's-complement final position is written to registers R2BH, (MSB), R2AH, and R29H
(LSB). The 16-bit command acceleration resides in registers
R27H (MSB) and R26H (LSB). The command acceleration
has the same integer and fraction format as discussed in
the Integral Velocity Control mode section. The 7-bit maximum velocity is a scalar value with the range of OOH to
7FH (OD to 127D). The maximum velocity has the units of
quadrature counts per sample time, and resides in register
R28H. The command data registers may be read or written
to in any order.
The internal profile generator produces a position profile
using the present Command Position (ROCH-ROEH) as the
starting point and the Final Position (R2BH-R29H) as the
end point.
Once the desired data is entered, the user sets flag FO in
the Flag register (ROOH) to commence motion (if the HCTL-1000
is already in Position Control mode).
When the profile generator sends the last pOSition command
to the Command Position registers to complete the trapezoidal move, the controller clears flag FO. The HCTL-1000
then automatically goes to Position Control mode with the
final pOSition of the' trapezoidal move as the command
pOSition.
When the HCTL-1000 clears flag FO it does NOT indicate
that the motor and encoder are at the final pOSition NOR
that the motor and encoder have stopped. The motor and
encoder's true position can only be determined by reading
the Actual Position registers. The only Way to determine if
the motor 'and encoder have stopped is to read the Actual
Position registers at successive intervals.
4-58
The status of the Profile flag can be monitored both in the
Status register (R07) and at the external Profile pin (pin
12) at any time. While the Profile flag is high NO new
command data should be sent to the controller.
Each sample time, the internal profile generator uses the
information which the user has programmed into the Maximum Velocity register (R28H), the Command Acceleration
registers (R27H and R26H), and the Final Position registers
(R2BH, R2AH, and R29H) to determine the value which
will be automatically loaded into the Command Position
registers (ROEH, RODH, and ROCH). After the new command
position has been generated, the difference between the
value in the Actual Position registers (R12H, R13H, and
R14H) and the new value in the Command Position registers
is calculated as the new position error. This new position
error is used by the full digital compensation filter to
compute a new motor cor:nmand ouput for the sample
time. (The register block diagram in Figure 3 further shows
how the internal profile generator works in Trapezoidal
Profile mode.)
--POSITIVE DIRECT1QN_
1 _ 1 1 - - - - - - - - 1 MOTOR REVOLUTION
----PHA
-------PHB
---PHC
-----PHO
-------1
EXAMPLE: 4 PHASE, 2 POLE MOTOR
POSITION ENCODER INDEX PULSE AT POINTS
CD OR@
COMMUTATOR
The commutator is a digital state machine that is configured by the user to properly select the phase sequence
for electronic commutation of multi phase motors. The
Commutator is designed to work with 2, 3, and 4-phase
motors of various winding configurations and with various
encoder counts. Along with providing the correct phase
enable sequence, the Commutator provides programmable
phase overlap, phase advance, and phase offset.
Figure 7. Index Pulse Alignment to Molor Torque Curves
CHANNEL A & B DETECTORS
INDEX PULSE
DETECTOR
Phase overlap is used for better torque ripple control. It can
also be used to generate unique state sequences which can
be further decoded externally to drive more complex amplifiers and motors.
Phase advance allows the user to compensate for the frequency characteristics of the motor/amplifier combination.
By advancing the phase enable command (in position),
the delay in reaction of the motor/amplifier combination
can be offset and higher performance can be achieved.
Phase offset is used to adjust the alignment of the commutator output with the motor torque curves. By correctly
aligning the HCTL-1000's commutator output with the motor's
torque curves, maximum motor output torque can be
achieved.
ENCODER
CODEWHEEL
Figure 8. Codewheellndex Pulse Alignment
The inputs to the Commutator are the three encoder
signals, Channel A, Channel B, and Index, and the configuration data stored in registers.
The Commutator uses both channels and the index pulse
of an incremental encoder. The index pulse of the encoder
must be physically aligned to a known torque curve location
because it is used as the reference point of the rotor
position with respect to the Commutator phase enables.
The index pulse should be permanently aligned during
motor encoder assembly to the last motor phase. This is
done by energizing the last phase of the motor during
assembly and permanently attaching the encoder codewheel to the motor shaft such that the index pulse is active
as shown in Figures 7 and 8. Fine tuning of alignment for
commutation purposes is done electronically by the Offset
register (R1 CH) once the complete control system is set
up.
4-59
SIGN
PWM
PULSE
A
HeTl·1OO
TTL OUTPUT
PHA
TO POWER
AMPLIFIERS
PHB
COMMUTATOR
PHe
PHD
0
Figure 9. PWM Interface to Brushless DC Motors
3 PHASE
Each time an index pulse occurs, the internal commutator
ring counter is reset to O. The ring counter keeps track of
the current position of the rotor based on the encoder
feedback. When ttie ring counter is reset to 0, the Commutator is reset to its origin (last phase going low, phase A
going high) as shown in Figure 10.
ENCODER: 90 COUNTS/REVOLUTION
FULL COUNTS
RING' 9
CASE
X
V
,
2
3
4
OCCURS AT
3
0
2
1
2
2
THE ORIGIN
1
1
0
0
2
2
0
0
0
1
51s
7
OFFSET
ADVANCE
The output of the Commutator is available as PHA, PHB,
PHC, and PHD on pins 26-29. The HCTL-1000's commutator
acts as the electrical equivalent of the mechanical brushes
in a motor. Therefore, the outputs of the commutator
provide only proper phase sequencing for bidirectional
operation. The magnitude information is provided to the
motor via the Motor Command and PWM ports. The outputs
of the commutator must be combined with the outputs of
one of the motor ports to provide proper DC brush less
and stepper motor control. Figure 9 shows an example of
circuitry which uses the outputs of the commutator with
the Pulse output of the PWM port to control a DC brush less
or stepper motor. A similar procedure could be used to
combine the commutator outputs PHA-PHD with a linear
amplifier interface output (Figure 15) to create a linear
amplifier system.
OUTPUT VOLTAGE
INDEX
PULSE
COUNTS
,
(INPUT)
8485 8S{S7 88 89tO
1
213
4
8! 91011
I
PHA
r--x--l
0
~
I
PHC
I
I
IX!
~RING(1)~
:
CD
PHA
Iv
x Iv
PHC
PHA
1. STATUS REGISTER (R07H)
0
vi
OFFSE:~
Ivl x Iv
PHe
PHA
: I--
PHe
I
0
xlvi
I v I xlvi
RINGI1II
1·1
I
I
IvI x Iv
Jv
PHB
Bit #2 only affects the commutator's counting method.
This includes the Ring register (R18H), the X and Y registers
(R1 AH & R1 BH), the Offset register (R1 CH), the Velocity
Timer register (R19H), and the Maximum Advance register
(R1FH).
,
Iv I x Iv
Ivl x Iv
Iv I x Iv I
I
--+RINGII't-------l
I
I
I
I
I
I v I x Iv I
I vi x vi
PHB
Bit #1 -0 = 3-phase configuration, PH A, PHB, and PHC are
active outputs.
1 = 4-phase configuration, PHA - PHD are active
outputs.
Bit #2 - 0 = Rotor position measured in quadrature counts
(4x decoding).
1 = Rotor position measured in full counts
(1 count = i codewheel bar and space.)
I
I
Lvi x I vi
Commutation Configuration Registers
The Commutator is programmed by the data in the following
registers. Figure 10 shows an example of the relationship
between all the parameters.
.r>"-----------
CK
12BIT
BINARVCTR
12BIT
lATCH
4X
DECODE
lOGIC
CHA
CNT
CNT
00·07
12
Qll
UP/ON
CHANNEL
B
00-
UP/ON
CK
ClR
Do-011
CK
ClR
SE.l
INH
DE
CH B-I'!>-+-4
INHIBIT
r---------------,
INHIBIT lOGIC
SEl------+_-~~-------r_----~------------+_--~
~------~-~+_--------~+_--------+_----------------------_r-------J
Figure 6. Simplified Logic Diagram
straint derives from the operation of the input filters. It
relates the maximum clock period to the minimum encoder
pulse width. The second constraint derives from the decoder operation and is covered in the "Quadrature Decoder"
section. It relates the maximum clock period to the minimum encoder state width (Tes).
DIGITAL FILTER
The digital filter section is responsible for rejecting noise
on incoming quadrature signals. Schmitt-trigger conditioning addresses the problems of slow rise and fall times and
low level noise. The major task of the filter is to deal with
short-duration noise pulses that cause the input logic level
to momentarily change. Due to the nature of quadrature
decoding, noise pulses on one channel will not cause a
count error, but the coincidence of two overlapping noise
pulses, one on each input, can cause illegal state transitions. False counts of undetermined direction will result
from the decoding of these illegal transitions (see Fig. 8).
A pair of filters rejects these noise pulses by sampling the
CHA and CHB logiC levels and storing a time history in a
pair of shift registers. For each channel, if the input level
has had the same value on three consecutive riSing clock
edges, that val ue becomes the new output of the filter; otherwise the output is unchanged. This means that the CHA
filter output cannot change from high to low until the CHA
input has been low for three consecutive rising clock
edges. CHB is treated the same as CHA.
The operation of this digital filter section places one of two
timing constraints on the minimum clock frequency in relationship to the encoder count frequency. The first con-
The explanation of constrai nt one above is as follows: It
takes a minimum of four positive clock transitions for a
new logic level on either CHA or CHB to propagate through
their respective filters, but the signal only needs to be stable for tliree consecutive rising clock edges (See Figure 7).
This means that the minimum encoder pulse width (Te) on
each channel must be;:: 3TCLK, where TCLK is the period
of the clock.
In the presence of noise, the filter will require that 3TCLK
be less than T e, since noise pulses will interrupt the required
three consecutive constant level samples necessary for the
filter to accept a new input level. In general, the types of
noise that this filter will deal with will derive from the rotating system, i.e., motor noise, capacitively coupled level
changes from other encoder channels, etc. As such, these
noise sources will be periodic in nature and proportional to
the encoder frequency. Design for noise of this type is discussed later in the "Filter Optimization" section.
4-72
ClK
CHA~
I
r---T·-----;:::I.=-;:T-:-:::es~~=·==;'-T.=====1
I.
r-
I
CHB_------!I
T.--~·o+ol·~--T.-----I·I
Figure 7. Minimum Encoder Pulse Width with Respect to TelK
In addition to problems with noise, other common signal
problems enter into the determination of the maximum
TClK for each application. The following quadrature signal
aberrations can all be accounted for by designing with
short enough TClK to accommodate the reduction of the
effective encoder pulse width:
1) non-ideal encoder rise and fall times,
2) asymmetric pulses,
3) short « 180 electrical degrees) pulses.
The combination of the following two errors must be examined in light of the minimum state width constraint to
ensure proper operation of the decoder section:
1) Phase shift deviations from 90 electrical degrees
between the CHA and CHB signals;
2) Pulse width errors resulting in Te shorter than 180
electrical degrees in either or both CHA and CHB.
Design for these conditions is discussed in the "Filter
Optimization" section.
Designing for these non-ideal signals is discussed later in
the "Filter Optimization" section.
COUNT Up
~
,
QUADRATURE DECODER
The Quadrature Decoder section samples the outputs from
the CHA and CHB filters. Sampling occurs on the rising
clock edge. The Decoder Section observes changes in
these outputs, and, on the rising clock edge, it outputs two
signals to the position counter. These signals specify when
to count and in which direction (up or down).
Encoder state changes are detected by comparing the previous sampled state to the current sampled state. If the two
are different, the counter section is signaled to count on
the next rising clock edge. Count direction (up or down) is
also determined by observing the previous and current
states, as shown in the quadrature state transition diagram
(figure 8). An illegal state transition, caused by a faulty
encoder or noises severe enough to pass the filter, will produce a count but in an undefined direction.
The second constraint on the relationship between TCLK
and the input quadrature signal, as previously mentioned in
the "Digital Filter" section, is the requirement by the 4x
decoder for at least one positive clock transition to occur
during each quadrature state to detect the state. This constraint is satisfied if: Tes > TClK, where Tes is the time
interval corresponding to the shortest state width at the
maximum system velocity.
4-73
3
,,~
,
,
CHA
eKS
0
,
STATE
2
0
,
3
0
0
4
1
Figure 8. Elements of 4x Quadrature Decoding
POSITION COUNTER
This section consists of a 12-bit binary up/down counter
which counts on rising clock edges as specified by the
Quadrature Decode Section. All twelve bits of data are
passed to the position data latch. The system can use this
count data in three ways:
A. System total range is :512 bits, so the count represents
"absolute" position.
B. The system is cyclic with :512 bits of count per cycle,
RST is used to reset the counter every cycle, and the
system uses the data to interpolate within the cycle.
C. System count is >12 bits, so the count data is used as a
relative or incremental position input for a system computation of absolute position.
In case C above, counter rollover occurs. In order to prevent loss of position information, the processor must read
the outputs of the HCTL-2000 at intervals shorter than 512
times the minimum encoder line period. This minimum line
period (Tel p) corresponds to the maximum encoder velocity of the design. Two's complement arithmetic is normally
used to compute position from these periodic position
updates.
POSITION DATA LATCH
This section is a 12-bit latch which captures the position
counter output data on each rising clock edge, except when
its inputs are disabled by the inhibit logic section during
two-byte read operations. The output data is passed to the
bus interface section. The latch is cleared asynchronously
by the RST signal. When active, a signal from the inhibit
logic section prevents new data from being captured by the
latch, keeping the data stable while successive byte-reads
are made through the bus interface section.
of the position data latch output. Since the latch is only
twelve bits wide, the upper four bits of the high byte are
internally set to zero. The SEL and OE signals determine
which byte is output and whether or not the output bus is
in the high-Z state, respectively.
INHIBIT LOGIC
The Inhibit Logic Section samples the OE and SEL signals
on the falling edge of the clock and, in response to certain
conditions (see Figure 9 below), inhibits the position data
latch. The RST signal asynchronously clears the inhibit
logic, enabling the latch.
sTEP SEL
t
L
.2
tI
ACTION
'SET"INtlIBIT, READ HI Tesmin and Tmn < 2T CLK. This noise can
be subdivided into four categories, each having different
design constraints. These categories are differentiated by
the pulse width of noise on the individual encoder channels.
T nl = The fundamental period characteristic of a periodic noise source
T CLK = Period of HCTL-2000 clock input
signal
T mn = Maximum pulse duration of
encoder noise
Temin = Te(min) = Minimum encoder line
pulse width including encoder
errors
Tesmin = Tes(min) = Minimum encoder
statewidth including encoder
errors
Telpmin = Period of maximum designed
encoder line frequency
RPM = Maximum designed operating
speed of the encoder in revolutions
per minute
N = Encoder line count
= Number of encoder counts per
revolution
Kl = 60 sec.!min.
Dependant channel noise, as below in case Band C in
Table 6, is noise where the superposition of noise from
both encoder channels does not display a period shorter
than the minimum state width:
T nl > Tesmin.
The graphic analYSis of the effect of this type of noise
upon the filter operation is illustrated in Figure 11.
Tmn 4* (TcLKI
ENCODING ERRORS
Design for quadrature signal errors proceeds as follows for
an ideal quadrature signal, i.e. all errors = 0:
Tel p = 360 0 e = defined as one electrical
cycle in electrical degrees
Te = 1/2Telp = 1800 e ideal pulse
width
Tes = 1/4Telp = 1/2 Te = 90 0 e, ideal
state width
(1 )
(2)
(3)
In a real system there are quadrature signal errors, where
these errors are:
IlP = Maximum encoder pulse width
error in ° e, as a deviation from the
ideal pulse width of 180° e
*Signal after Internal Input Filter
Figure 11. Noise is Encoder Channel Dependent
Independant channel noise, as in case D and E in Table
6, is such that the noise on each channel is independant
of the noise on the other channel. The period 01 the
noise on each channel must satisfy the condition:
IlS = Maximum state width error in °e, as
a deviation from the ideal state
width of 900 e
The worst cases for pulse width and state width errors in
terms of time intervals will occur at the maximum designed
system operating velocity. These errors are typically available from encoder manufacturer's data sheets.
4-75
Tnl> Tesmin
independantly. The graphic analysis of the effect of this
type of noise on the filter operation is illustrated in Figure 12.
Tmn 4* (TCLK)
FILTER DESIGN EXAMPLES
Given the above rules, we can calculate the design parameters for a typical high performance motor loop as follows:
Where RPM = 3600 rev/min.
N = 1000 counts/rev.
AP=±48°e
AS=±600e
at 60° C, 11Telpmin = 60kHz
Then the following calculation accounts for signal errors:
K1
(RPMIIN)
Teipmin = (
60
from eq. 4
(3600)11000)
= 16667 ns
Temin=
(
= (
·Signal after Internal Input Filter
Figure 12. Noise Is Encoder Channel Independent
18o-IAPI
360
) Telpmin
180-48
360
) 116667 ns)
from eq. 5
= 6111 ns
The set of design rules that are presented in Table 6 can be
derived by examination of Figures 11 and 12, and the following constraints:
Tesmln=
a)The encoder output signals must stay at a logic level
for a minimum of three consecutive clock -pulses before
the HCTL-2000 recognizes the logic level change:
Temin > 3TCLK·
(
= (
90-IASI
360
) Telpmin
90-60
360
) 116667 nSf
from eq. 6
= 1389 ns
If the noise is as in case B of Table 6, we can use the above
to evaluate the system.
b)After acceptance by the HCTL-2000 input filtering section, a state must exist for a minimum of TCLK to be
recognized by the internal logic.
For the condition of noise such that T mn <: 260 ns:
TCLK> 260 ns
c)The minimum encoded pulse width must be greater
than twice the minimum state width: Temin > 2Tesm in.
255 ns:5 T CLK <. T esmin
4
d)The minimum clock period must be greater than 255
ns, which is the minimum clock period for which the
HCTL-2000 is -guaranteed to operate over the entire
specified operating temperature range.
Tesml n=
4
1389 =347 ns
4
Thus,
255 ns:5 T CLK <: 347 ns
Similar calculations can be performed to design the filter
for the specifics of each system.
-l
Table 6. Summary of Filter Design Rules for the HCTL-2000
case
Nolle
Relationship
Pulse Width
Clock Period
Constraint
DealS" Criteria
Temin > 2Tesmln
Tclk <: Te5min
255ns::;; Tclk <: (1/3)Temin
TClk>Tmn>O
2550$::;; Tclk <: (1/4)Tesm in
General
Conditions
A
No noise on
CHAorCHS
S
Superposition of noise
on CHAor CHS
Tesmln>Tnl
T emln > 2Te8min ..
C
Superposition of noise
on CHAor CHB
T esrnin > Tnf
T emin > 2Tesmln
2Tclk> Tmn<::Tclk
D
Noise on CHA or
on CHS Indepencklnt
of each other
Tesmin> Tnf
Temin > 2Tesmin
TClk> Tmn >'0
255ns::;; TcIk <. (115)Tesml n
E
Noise on CHA or
on CHS Independent
of each other
Te8min >Tnf
T emln > 2Tesmin
2Tclk > T mn <:: Telk
2550$::;; Telk <: (1n)Tesmln
4-76
I
255ns::;;Tolk<:(115)Tesm in
Interfacing the HCTL-2000:
General
The 12 bit latch and inhibit logic on the HCTL-2000 allows
access to 12 bits of count with an 8 bit bus. When only 8
bits of count are required, a simple 8 bit (1 byte) mode is
available by holding SEL high continously. This disables
the inhibit logic. OE provides control of the tri-state bus,
and read timing is per Figures 3 and 4.
The internal inhibit logic on HCTL-2000 inhibits the transfer
of data from the counter to the position data latch during
the time that the latch outputs are being read. The inhibit
logic allows the microprocessor to first read the high order
4 bits from the latch and then read the low order 8 bits
from the latch. Meanwhile, the counter can continue to
keep track of the quadrature states from the CHA and CHB
input signals.
For proper operation of the inhibit logic during a two-byte
read, OE and SEL must be synchronous with CLK due to
the falling edge sampling of OE and SEL.
Figure 10 shows a logic diagram of the inhibit logic circuit.
The operation of the circuitry is illustrated in the read timing shown in Figure 13.
CLK
JlfLfL~J1Jl-fl-fLJUl-fLf
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SEL
DE
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
INHIBIT
SIGNAL
DATA
LINES
POSITION
LATCH
ACTIONS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
i
'~
I
'I
I.
I
I
~
/
/~I
I
I
I
i
u
I
I
I
II
I
II
I
II
I
I
II I
I
I'l---!+--!l
r II I
I
I
I
II I
I
II
I
I
_'L
\'
I I
I
I
I W--~ow
I
TRI STATE
HIGH BYTE
I I BYTE
I
I
I I
I
I
/
"
II
II
II
I
I
II
/
I I
I
I
I
I
I NEW NEW I NEW
lyNEW
DATA UNCHANGED
DATA
I
DATA
I DATA DATA I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I
I
('
,
I
I
I
I
I
o
I
I~,
I '
I
I
I
I
I
~
I
I
I
I
I
,
I,'
!
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
cbcb
II
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
LOW BYTE
/
I
I
TRI STATE
I
I
I
I
I I
I
I!!
I I
I
I I
I
I I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I NEW
I DATA
I
I
I
o ocb
I
I
cb
Figure 13. Inlernallnhlbil Logic Timing
ACTIONS
1. On the rising edge of the clock, counter data is transferred to the position data latch, provided the inhibit
signal is low.
2. When OE goes low, the outputs of the multiplexer are
enabled onto the data lines. If SEL is low, then the high
order data bytes are enabled onto the data lines. If SEL
is high, then the low order data bytes are enabled onto
the data lines.
3. When the HCTL-2000 detects a low on OE and SEL during a falling clock edge, the internal inhibit signal is
activated. This blocks new data from being transferred
from the counter to the position data latCh.
4. When SEL goes high, the data outputs change from
high byte to low byte.
5. The first reset condition for the inhibit logic is met when
the HCTL-2000 detects a logic high on SEL and a logic
low on OE during a falling clock edge.
6. When OE goes high, the data lines change to a high
impedance state.
7. To complete the reset of the inhibit logic, after the first
reset condition has been met, the HCTL-2000 needs to
detect a logic high on OE during a falling clock edge.
4-77
Interfacing the HCTL-2000 to a Motorola 6801
This ,interface method provides the minimum part count
when the 6801 is operated in "MODE 5". A typical 6801 circuit is shown in Figure 14. In Figure .14, the 74LS138
22
3
A,
23
A,
A"
los
2
24
,
39
E;
A,
A,
A.
1~~
6601
3
r' 0, 30
p, 31
9
4
12
ClK
OE
SEl
0,
10
06
32
33
D.
3.
0,
35
0,
36
0,
37
" 00
11
06
PORT 4
Ii
]6
40
29
""
The processor clock output (E) is used to clock the HCTL2000 as well as the address decoder. One of the address
decoder outputs drives the OE input. This results in HCTL2000 counter data being enabled onto the bus whenever an
external memory access is made to the HCTL-2000. This
example assumes the address assigned to the HCTL-2000
high byte is an even address. The least significant address
bit is connected to theSEL input. It determines which data
byte is output. When AO on the decoder equals 0 the chip
selects the high byte, and when AO equals 1, the chip
selects the low byte. This configuration allows the 6801 to
read both data bytes with a single double-byte fetch instruction (LDD E, 01 XX). The LDD instruction is a five cycle
instruction which reads external memory location 01XX
and stores the high order byte in accumulator A and reads
external memory location 01 XX +1 and stores the low order
byte in accumulator B during the last two cycles. Figure 15
illustrates the sequence of events during all five cycles.
wpl
4E,
El
E
address decoder can be eliminated if the HCTL-2000 is the
only occupant of Port 4.
O.
12
0,
13
HCTL.200(l
03
0,
15
0,
"
1
o.
Figure 14. A Circuit to'interface to the 6801
CYCLE 1
CYCLE 5
ICLoCK)
ADDRESS
BUS
DATA BUS'
1
I
I
I
I
I
OPCODE
ACDR. +1
OPCODE
ADDR. +2
OPERAND
ADpR.
I
I
I
opdJDE
I
1
1
1
1
1
I
I
I
ACDR,. LOW
DATA
HIGH BYTE
OPE~AND
I
ACDR. HIGH
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
:
I
I
OPCOOE
ACDR.
I
los
1
1
OPE~AND
I
I
I
I
I
I
DATA
LOW BYTE
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
\
!
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
: 1 :I
.....--+---i-----t'.
AolSELI
I
I
OPERAND
ACDR. +1
/
I
~
i. . . .
1
1
I
I
I
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
I
1
1
I
,I"
I ,
I
I
I
IIII~IIII
I
I
1
INTERNAL
INHIBIT
:
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
1
:
I
I
:
I
II' "
I,
::
I
I
I
I
1
I
1
HCTL -2000
DATA'BUS
ACTIONS
1
I
I
cb,
:Ir-l
I I I ,
I
I
I
:
I
I
I
I
I
HIGH Z
I
I
I
I
cb
cb
I
I
I
HIGH Z
1
I
I
I
cb cb
Figure 15. Interface Timing for the 6801 LDD E
4-78
ACTIONS
1. E is the microprocessor clock output. On the rising edge
of E, if the internal inhibit is not active, then new data is
transferred from the internal counter to the position data
latch.
2. An even address output from the 6801 has caused SEL
to go low. E goes high which causes the address decoder output for the HCTL-2000 OE input to go low.
This causes the HCTL-2000 to. output the high byte of
the position data latch.
4. E is now low, so the address decoder output is disabled
and OE goes high. The 6801 increments the address, so
SEL goes high. The pOSition data latch is still inhibited.
5. The address decoder is enabled after E goes high, so
OE goes low and the low data byte is enabled onto the
bus.
6. The 6801 reads the data bus on the falling edge of E,
storing the low order data byte in accumulator B. The
chip detects that OE is low and SEL is high on the failing edge of E, so the first inhibit-reset condition is met.
7. E is now low, so the address decoder is disabled, causing OE to go high and the data lines to go to the high
impedence state. The 6801 continues its instruction execution, and the state of SEL is indeterminate.
3. The 6801 reads the data bus on the falling edge of E,
storing the high order data byte in accumulator A. The
chip detects that OE and SEL are low on the falling
edge of E and activates the internal inhibit signal. The
position data latch is inhibited and data cannot be transferred from the internal counter to the latch.
8. The HCTL-2000 detects OE is high on the next falling
edge of E. This satisfies the second inhibit reset condition so the inhibit signal is reset.
Interfacing the HCTL-2000 to
an Intel 8748
The circuit in Figure 15 shows the connections between an
HCTL-2000 and an 8748. Data lines 00-07 are connected
to the 8748 bus port. Bits 0 and 1 of port 1 are used to
control the SEL and OE inputs of the HCTL-2000 respectively. TO is used to provide a clock signal to the HCTL-2000.
The frequency of TO is the crystal frequency divided by 3.
TO must be enabled by executing the ENTO CLK instruction after each system reset, but prior to the first encoder
position change. An 8748 program which interfaces to the
circuit in Figure 16 is given in Figure 17. The resulting interface timing is shown in Figure 18.
To
Pll
1
2
28
3
27
• OE
P"
0.,
19
18
9
10
DB'
8748
D.5
17
11
16
12
15
,.
13
13
15
12
1
0.4
0.3
DB'
0.,
D ••
"
eLK
SEt
0,
0,
05 HCTt-2000
0,
03
0,
0,
00
Figure 16. An HCTL-2000 to Intel 8748 Interface
LOC
000
002
003
004
006
008
009
OOB
OBJECT
CODE
9900
08
A8
8903
08
A9
8903
93
SOURCE STATEMENTS
ANL P1, OOH
INSA, BUS
MOVE ROA
ORL P1, 01H
INS A, BUS
MOV R1, A
ORL P1, 03H
RETR
ENABLE OUTPUT AND OUTPUT HIGHER ORDER BITS
LOAD HIGHER ORDER BITS INTO ACC
MOVE DAT~ TO REGISTER 0
CHANGE PATA FROM HIGH ORDER TO LOW ORDER BITS,
LOAD ORDER BITS INTO AC
MOVE DATA TO REGISTER 1
DISABLE OUTPUTS
RETURN
Figure 17. A Typical Program for Reading HCTL-2000 with an 8748
4-79
11
elK
1
I
I
I
PROGRAM
ANL, P1, 004
EXECUTION
ORL Pl, OIH
1
I
I
I
RETR
INHIBIT
r - - - - - - B U S READ
DATA BUS
~
I
ACTIONS
I
-----;-1-------,
HIGH BYTE
I
6:
cb
Figure 18. 8748 READ Cycle from Figure 14.
ACTIONS
1. ANl P1. OOH has just been executed. The output of
bits 0 and 1 of Port 1 cause SEl and OE to be logic low.
The data lines output the higher order byte.
2. The HCTl-2000 detects that OE and SEl are low on the
next falling edge of the ClK and asserts the internal
inhibit Signal. Data can be read without regard for the
phase of the ClK.
3. INS A, BUS has just been executed. Data is read into
the 8748.
5. INS A, BUS has just been executed. lower order data
bits are read into the 8748.
6. ORl P1, 03H has just been executed. The HCTl-2000
detects OE high on the next falling edge of ClK. The
program sets OE and SEl high by writing the correct
values to port 1. This causes the data lines to be tristated. This satisfies the second inhibit-reset condition.
On the next rising ClK edge new data is transferred
from the counter to the position data latch.
4. ORl PORT 1, 01 H has just been executed. The program
sets SEl high and leaves OE low by writing the correct
values to port 1. The HCTl-2000 responds by outputting
the lower byte. The HCTl-2000 detects OE is low and
SEl is high on the next falling edge of the ClK, and
thus, the first inhibit-reset condition is met.
4-80
4-81
~~-------------
---------
----.-.---------.--.--~--------
Light Bars and
Bar Graph Arrays
•
•
•
Light Bars
Bar Graph Arrays
Legends
IJght Bars and
Bar Graph Arrays
LED Light Bars are Hewlett-Packard's innovative
solution to fixed message annunciation. The large,
uniformly illuminated light emitting surface may be
used for backlighting legends or simple indicators. Four
distinct colors are offered, AlGaAs red, high efficiency
red, yellow, and high performance green with two
bicolor combinations (see page 5-15). The AlGaAs Red
Light Bars provide exceptional brightness at very low
drive currents for those applications where portability
and battery backup are important considerations. Each
of the eight X-Y stackable package styles offers one,
two, or four light emitting surfaces. Along with this
family of stackable light bars, HP also provides a single
chip light bar for high brightness indication of small
areas. Panel Mounts and Legends are also available for
all devices.
In addition to light bars, HP offers effective analog
message annunciation with the lO-element and 101element LED Bar Graph Arrays. These bar graph
arrays eliminate the matching and alignment problems
commonly associated with arrays of discrete LED
indicators. Each device offers easy to handle packages
that are compatible with standard SIP and DIP
sockets. The lO-element Bar Graph Array is available in
standard red, AlGaAs red, high efficiency red, yellow,
and high performance green. The new multicolor lO~
element arrays have high efficiency red, yellow and
green LEDs in one package. The package is X-Y
stackable, with a unique interlock allowing easy end-toend alignment. The lOl-element Bar Graph Array is
offered in standard red, high efficiency red and high
performanc green with I % resolution.
5-2
LED Light Bars
Description
Device
Lens
Page
No.
Diffused
23 mcd
2.0V
5-8
Part No.
1c=J1
HLMP-2300
~
HLMP-2400
Yellow
Difjused
20 mcd
2.1 V
HLMP-2500
Green
Green
Diffused
25 mcd
2.2V
Diffused
45 mcd
2.0V
II
[~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~J
~
I
~
38 mcd
2.1 V
HLMP-2550
Green
Green
Diffused
50 mcd
2.2 V
Diffused
22 mcd
2.0 V
Diffused
18 mcd
2.1 V
Green
Diffused
25 mcd
2.2 V
Diffused
25 mcd
2.0V
Diffused
18 mcd
2.1 V
Green
Diffused
25 mcd
2.2 V
Diffused
45 mcd
2.0 V
Diffused
35 mcd
2.1 V
Green
Diffused
50 mcd
2.2 V
Diffused
43 mcd
2.0 V
Diffused
35 mcd
2.1 V
Green
Diffused
50 mcd
2.2 V
HLMP-2620
HLMP-2720
HLMP-2820
HLMP-2635
I
~
D
Diffused
HLMP-2800
IDDDDI
High
8 Pin In-Line; 0.100"'
Efficiency Centers; 0.800"'L x
Red
0.195"'W x 0.245"'H
Yellow
HLMP-2700
~
High
4 Pin In-Line; 0.100"'
Efficiency Centers; 0.400"'L x
0.195"'W x 0.245"'H
Red
HLMP-2450
HLMP-2600
DO
B
HLMP-2350
Package
Typical
Forward
Imltage
@20mA
Package Outline Drawing
II
Color
Typical
Luminous
Intensity
@20mA
HLMP-2735
HLMP-2835
HLMP-2655
HLMP-2755
HLMP-2855
High
8 Pin DIP; 0.100"'
Efficiency Centers; 0.400"'L x
0.400"'W x 0.245"'H
Red
Dual Arrangement
Yellow
Green
High
16 Pin DIP; 0.100"'
Efficiency Centers; 0.800"'L x
Red
0.400"'W x 0.245"'H
Quad Arrangement
Yellow
Green
High
16 Pin DIP; 0.100"'
Efficiency Centers; 0.800"'L x
Red
0.400"'W x O.245"'H
Dual Bar
Yellow Arrangement
Green
High
8 Pin DIP; 0.100"'
Efficiency Centers; 0.400"'L x
0.400"'W x 0.245"'H
Red
Square
Yellow Arrangement
Green
5-3
LED Light Bars (Continued)
Package Outline Drawing.
Part No.
HLMP'2670
[JDI
,
Lens
. ~pli:al
Luminous
Intensity
. @20mA
Diffused
45 mcd
2.0 V
Diffused
35 mcd
2.1 V
Green
Diffused
50mcd
, 2.2V
Diffused
80 mcd
2.0V·
Diffused
70 mcd
2.1 V
Green
Diffused
100 mcd
2.2 V
Typical
Forward
Lens
Typlcill
Luminous
Intensity
@3ri1A
'@3mA
Page
No.
Diffused
7.5 mcd
' 1.6V
5-15
Description
Device
HLMp·2770
~
HLMp·2870
HLMP·2685
Cl
HLMp·2785
~.
HLMp·2885
. Package:'
Color·
High
16 Pin DIP; 0: 100" ,
Efficiency Centers; 0.800"L x
Red
0.400"W ~ 0.245"H
Dual Square
Yellow Arrangement ..
Green
High
16 Pin DIP; 0. 100"
Efficiency Centers; 0.800"L x
Red· O:4OO"W x 0.245"H
Single Bar
Yellow Arrangement
.,
Green
~plcal
Forward
~Itage
·@20rilA
Page
No.
5·8
,
DH AIGaAs Low Current LED Light Bars
,
Device
Package Dutllns Drawing
Descrlpllon
Part No.
1c=J1
I
Package
Color
HLCp·Al00 AlGaAs Red 4 Pin In·Llne; 0.100"
Centers; 0.400"L x
0.195"W xO.240"H
··fuiJ
II
~ltage
,
II
[~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~J
m
~
IDDDO!
~
AIGaAs Red 8 Pinln·Line; 0.100"
Centers; 0.800"L x
0.195"W x 0.240"H
Diffused
'15.0 mcd
..
.-.
HLCp·Dloo
."
AIGaAs Red 8 Pin DIP; 0.100"
Centers; 0.400"L x
O.4oo"W x 0.240"H
Dual Arrangement
Diffused
,.
7.5 mcd
.. ,....
"
"
HLCp·El00
AIGa!\s Red 16 Pin DIP; 0.100"
Centers; 0.800"L x
0.400"W x: 0.240"H
Quad Arrangement
Diffused
I
,
"'1
HLCP·Bloo
:
7.5 mcd·
"',
..
;
DH AIGaAs Low Current LED Light Bars (Continued)
Device
Description
Lens
Typical
luminous
Intensity
@3mA
Typical
Forward
IhIltage
@3mA
AIGaAs Red 16 Pin DIP; 0.100"
Centers; O.SOO"L x
0.400"W x 0.240"H
Dual Bar
Arrangement
Diffused
15.0 mcd
1.6 V
D
HLCP-Cl00 AIGaAs Red SPin DIP; 0.100"
Centers; 0.400"L x
0.400"W x 0.240"H
Square
Arrangement .
Diffused
15.0 mcd
IO[JI
HLCP-Gl00 AIGaAs Red 16 Pin DIP; 0.100"
Centers; O.SOO"L x
0.400"W x 0.240"H
Dual Square
Arrangement
Diffused
15.0 mcd
HLCP-Hl00 AIGaAs Red 16 Pin DIP; 0.100"
Centers; O.SOO"L x
0.400"W x 0.240"H
Single Bar
Arrangemimt
Diffused
30.0 mcd
Package Outline Drawing
Part No.
[E:3
I
I
HLCP-Fl00
~
~
~
CJ]
~
Color
Package
Page.
No.
5-15
LED Bicolor Light Bars
Device
Package Outline Drawing
Description
. Pari No.
HLMP-2950
Color
High
Efficiency
Redl
Yellow
HlMP-2965
High
Efficiency
Red/
Green
D
@
,-
Package
S Pin DIP; .100"
Centers; .400"l x
.400"W x .245"H
Square
Arrangment
Lens .
Diffused
Diffused
5-5
Typical
Luminous
Intensity
@20mA
HER: 20 mcd
Yellow: 12 mcd
Typical
Forward
Voltage
. @20mA
HER: 2.0 V
Yellow: 2.1 V
HER: 20 mcd
Green: 20 mcd
HER: 2.0 V
Green: 2.2 V
Page
No.
5-20
LED Bar Graph Arrays
Description
Device
Package Outline Drawing
0000000000
~v~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
I[
r
--=:]1
L 11111111 i II: Ii i III
Package
20 Pin DIP; .
.100" Centers;
1.0"L x .400"W
x .200"
Lens
Diffused
Typical
Luminous
Intensity
1250 !lcd
@20mA DC
Typical
Forward
Voltage
1.6V@
20 mA DC
Part No.
HDSP-4820
Color
Standard
Red
HDSP-4830
High
Efficiency
Red
Diffused
3500 !lcd @
@10mA DC
2.1 V@
20 mA DC
HDSP-4840
Yellow
Diffused
1900 !lcd
@10mADC
2.2V@
20 mA DC
HDSP-4850
High
Performance
Green
Green
Diffused
1900 !lcd
@10mADC
2.1 V@
10 mA DC
HDSP-4832
Multicolor
Diffused
1900 !lcd
@ 10 mA DC
HDSP-4836
Multicolor
Diffused
1900 !lcd
@10mADC
HDSp·8820
Standard
Red
Red,
Non-Diffused
20 !lcd
@ 100 mA Pk:
1 of 110 D.F.
175 !lcd
@ 100 mA Pk:
1 of 110 DF
2.3 V
@ 100 mA Pk:
1 of 110 DF
175 !lcd
100 mA Pk:
1 of 110 OF
2.3 V
@ 100 mA Pk:
1 of 110 D.F.
mI J
22 Pin DIP;
.100" Centers;
4.16"Lx .390"W
x .236"H
HDSP-8825
High
Efficiency
Red
Clear
HDSP-8835
High
Performance
Green
Clear
@
1.7 V@
Page
No.
5-27
5-33
100 mA Pk:
1 of 110
D.F.
DH AIGaAs Low Current 10-Element Bar Graph Arrays
Device
Package Outline Drawing
lDDOD DODD DOl
Description
Part No.
HLCP-Jl00
Color
AlGaAs
Red
Package
20 Pin DIP;
.100" Centers;
1.0"L x .400"W
x .200"
~v~ ~ ~ ~ H~ ~ r
5-6
Lens
Diffused
Typical
Luminous
Intensity
1000 !lcd
@lmA
Typical
Forward
Voltage
1.6V@
1 mA
Page
No.
5-41
Single Chip LED Light Bar
Device
Lens
Typical
Luminous
Intensity
Tinted
Diffused
4.8 mcd
@20mA
Description
Package Dutllne Drawing
Part No.
Color
Package
HLMP-T200 High
One Chip
Efficiency LED
Red
Light Bar
(626 nm)
D
W
~O
201/2
100'
Typical
Forward
1hIitage
2.2V
@20mA
HLMP-T300 Yellow
(585 nm)
6.0 mcd
@20mA
2.2V
@20mA
HLMP-T400 Orange
(608 nm)
4.8 mcd
@20mA
2.2V
@20mA
HLMP-T500 Green
(569 nm)
6.0 mcd
@20mA
2.3 V
@20mA
Page
No.
5-45
Panel and Legend Mounts for LED Light Bars
Device
Package Outline Drawing
I
Corresponding Ughl Bar
Module Part Number
Part No.
HLMP-2598
HLMP-2350, -2450, -2550,
HLCP-B100
HLMP-2599
HLMP-2300, -2400, -2500,
HLCP-A100
HLMP-2898
HLMP-2600, -2700, -2800
-2655, -2755, -2855
-2950, -2965, HLCP-C100, '0100
HLMP-2899
HLMP-2620, -2720, -2820,
-2635, -2735, -2835
-2670, -2770, -2870
-2685, -2785, -2885
HLCP-E100, -F100, -G100, -H100
I
CJ
D
CJ
Page
No.
5-49
Special Options
Description
Legends
Intensity Selected
Option
Code
Applicable Part Number HLMp·
LOO, L01, L03, L04
LOO, LOt L03, L06, L04
LOO, L01, L02, L03, L04, L05, L06
S02
5-7
Page
No.
2300, 2400, 2500, HLCP-A 100
2655, 2755, 2855, HLCP-C100
2685, 2785, 2885, HLCP-H100
5-51
2300,2400,2500,2635,2735,2835
2350, 2450, 2550, 2655, 2755, 2855
2600, 2700, 2800, 2670, 2770, 2870
2620, 2720, 2820, 2685, 2785, 2885
5-53
LED LIGHT BARS
rhO- HEWLETT,
HIGH EFFICIENCY RED HLMP-2300/-2600 SERIES
YELLOW HlMP-2400/-2700 SERIES
HIGH PERFORMANCE GREEN HlMP-2500/-2800 SERIES
~:t:. PACKARD
Features
• LARGE, BRIGHT, UNIFORM LIGHT EMITTING
AREAS
'
Approximately LambertianRadiation Pattern
• CHOICE OF THREE COLORS
• CATEGORIZED FOR LIGHT OUTPUT
• YELLOW AND GREEN CATEGORIZED FOR
DOMINANT WAVELENGTH
• EXCELLENT ON-OFF CONTRAST
• EASILY MOUNTED ON P.C. BOARDS OR
INDUSTRY STANDARD SIP/DIP SOCKETS
• MECHANICALLY RUGGED
• X-Y.STACKABLE
• FLUSH MOUNTABLE '
Applications
'. CAN BE USED WITH PANEL AND LEGEND
MOUNTS
• BUSINESS MACHINE MESsAGE
AN",UNCIATORS
• LIGHT EMITTING SURFACE SUITABLE FOR
LEGEND ATTACHMENT PER'APpLICATION
NOTE 1012
'
• TELECO,MMUNICATIONS INDICATORS
• FRONT PANEL PROCESS STATUS INDICATORS
• SUITABLE FOR MULTIPLEX OPERATION
.PC BOARD IDENTIFIERS
• I.C. COMPATIBLE
• BAR GRAPHS
Description
The HLMP-2300/-2400/-2500/-2600/-2700/-2800 series light
bars are rectangular light sources designed fora variety of
applications where a large, bright source of light is required. These light bars are configured in single-in-line
and dual-in-line packages that qontairi' either Single or
segmented light emitting areas. The-2300/-2400/-2600/'
-2700 'seties' devices utilize LED chips which are made
from GaAsP' on a transparent GaP substrate. The -2500/
-2800 series devices utilize chips made from GaP on a
transparent GaP substrate.
Selection Guide
Light Bar Part Number
HLMPHigh
Green
EfIlclency Yellow
Red
Size of Light Emitting Areas
Number
of
Light
Emitting
Areas
Package
OuUine
Corresponding
Panel and
Legend Mount
Part No. HLMP-
2300
2400
2500
8.89 mm x 3,81 mm (0.350 in. x 0.150 in.)
1
A
t:::l
2599
2350
2450
2550
19.05 mm x 3.81 mm (0.750 in. x 0.150 in.)
1
B
c:::::J
2598
2600
2700
2800
8.89 mm x 3.81 mm (0.350 in. x 0.150 in.)
2
0
~
2698
2620
2720
2820
8.89 mm x 3.81 mm (0.350 in, x 0.150 in.)
4
2635
2735
2835
3.81 mm x 19.05 mm (0.150 in. x 0.750 in.)
2
2655
2755
2855
8.89 mm x 8.89 mm (0.350 in. x 0.350 in.)
1
C
~
0
2670
2nO
2870
8.89 mm x 8.89 mm (0.350 in. x 0.350 in.)
2
G
rn
2899
2685
2785
2885
8.89 mm 19.05 mm (0.350 in. x 0.750 in.)
1
H
0
2899
5e8
2899
2899
2898
Absolute Maximum Ratings
Parameter
Average Power Dissipation per LED Chiplll
Peak Forward Current per LED Chip. T A'" 50° C
(Maximum Pulse Width'" 2 ms l21
Time AVerage Fo~,Ja;d Cui~~rltper LED Chip.
Pulsed Conditions l2j
HI:~P.~OI
HI:MP-24001
HI:M.~;2?~~1
-2600 Series
-2700 Series
-2800 Stlries
135mW
85mW
135mW
90mA
60mA
90mA
20mA
TA"'50°C
25mA
TA'''' 25°C
25 mA
30mA
....•.. 25mA
DC Forward Current per LED Chip. T A'" 50° clSj
30mA
6V
Reverse Voltage per LED Cbip
Operating TemperaliJre Rarfg'e
Storage Tempef~t(i~ Range
-40" C to +85 0 C
260" C 10,r'3 seconds
Lead Soldering Temperature 1.6 mm (1/16 inch)
8elo;y:§eating Plane
NOTES: 1. For HLMP-23001-25001-26001-2800 series. derate above T A=25'C at 1.8 mW/'C per LED Chip. For HLMP-24001-2700 series, derate above
TA=50°C at 1.8 mW/oC per LED Chip. See Figure 2.
2. See Figure 1 to establish pulsed operating conditions.
3.. For HLMP-2300/-2500/-2600/-2800 series, derate above TA =50'C at 0.50 mA/'C per LED Chip. For HLMP-24001-2700 series, derate above
TA =60'C at 0.50 mA/'C per LED chip. See Figure 3.
r1
rt
'-1=7 +,
r- r
Package Dimensions
4.0b4"MIN,
0.50S 0.0.076
4953
10:1951
MAX
(0,160)
.
B.S90
10.3501
I
I
I~:~~I
3.S10
10.150}
1'i7~ ~
LD~
LII
10.1501
11:i
TOP A
PIN 1
3.S10
II
I
TOPS
CATHOOE ENO
END VIEW A, B
CQLOR
BIN
DATE
CQOE
ISEE NOTE 51
LUMINOUS
~\~~~~~
1
ISEENOT(4)
2.54 TYP
(0.1001
L
2 3 4
I
......J
(~:~)
IJTYP.
6.223 MAX,
10.2451
5 6 1 8
4
ro
0.584,0.016
10.023,0.003)
SIDE A
SIDE B
0.254 t 0,05
10,010 z
1=1
Cd
7.620
(0.3001
o.oozr1
:I:
(O.150)
4.064
~
MIN.
X
I
,
,
X
1,m6
(Q,04°
TYP. '
T+
x
x
6,223
(0.245)
MAX.
END VIEW C,D. E, F,G,H
SI DE VIew C, 0
2.640
(0.100)
T'l
T
~
...........J
I
DATE
CODE
LUMINOUS
INTENSITY
CATEGORY
ISEE NOTE 41
!
I
8.890
(0.350)
I
19.050
COLOR 81N
{SEE NOTE 5)
SIDE VIEW E, F, G, H
I
f t
PART
NUMBER
8.890 1.270
(0.350j{O.050
t
o.sOSz 0.05
10.020 ± 0.0(2)
TYP.
~~ I D
D 1_I
1--
S.890
(0.3501
-
I
I
10.160
(O.4001
MAX,
E
-
10.160
10.4WI
MAX.
F
-
I
10.160
10.400)
MAX,
G
NOTE, DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETRES IINCHES). TOLERANCES ,0.26 mm ItO.010 in} UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED,
5-9
I_
Internal Circuit Diagrams
PIN
PIN FUNCTION
.2300/-2400
B
-23501-2450
·2500
-2550
A
A
PIN
1
Cathode-a
Cathode-a
:2
3
Anode-a
Cathode -b
Anode-a
Cathode-b
4
Anode-b
5
6
7
8
1
2
C,D
3
4
15
5
6
7
8
14
9
10
16
Anode-b
Cathode-c
11
Anode-C
Cathode - d
Anode-d
13
.12
11
12
13
14
15
16
PIN FUNCTION
C,D
E,F,G,H
CATHODE a
CATHODE a
ANODE a
ANODEa
ANODEb
ANODEb
CATHODE b CATHODE b
CATHODEc
CATHODEc
ANODEc
ANODEc
ANODEd
ANODEd
CATHODEd
CATHODEd
CATHODEe
ANODE.
ANODEf
CATHODEf
CATHODEg
ANODEg
ANODEh
CATHODEh
10
B
E,F,G,H
Electrical/Optical Characteristics at TA =25°C
High Efficiency Red HLMP-2300/-2600 Series
Parameter
HLMP2300
2350
2600
Luminous loteoSityl41
Per Light Em itt! ng
Area
2620
2635
2655
2670
2685
Peak Wavelength
Symbol
Min.
Typ.
6
23
mcd
20mA DC
26
mcd
60 mA Pk: 1 of 3 OF
45
mcd
20 mA DC
52
mcd
60 mA Pk: 1 013 OF
6
22
mcd
20 mA DC
25
mcd
60 mAPk: 1013 OF
6
25
mcd
20 mA DC
29
mcd
60 mA Pk: 1 of 3 OF
45
mcd
20 mA DC
52
mcd
60 rnA Pk: 1 013 OF
43
mcd
20 rnA DC
49
mcd
60 rnA Pk: 1 013 OF
45
mod
20 rnA DC
52
mcd
60 mAPk: 1013 OF
Iv
13
Iv
Iv
13
Iv
13
Iv
13
Iv
Test Condillons
22
80
mcd
20 mA DC
92
mcd
60 rnA Pk: 1 of 3 DF
om
Iv
"peak
635
Ad
626
Forward Voltage Per LED
VF
2.0
Thermal ReSistance LED
J unction-to-Pin
Unil$
Iv
Dominant WavelengthlSI
Reverse Breakdown VOltage Per LED
Mal<.
VeA
6
15
om
2.6
V
IF~
V
IR
"C/WI
R8J-PIN
5-10
150
LED
Chip
20 rnA
= 100pA
Yellow HLMP-2400/-2700 Series
Parameter
Luminous Intensityl4j
Per Ught Emitting
Area
HLMP-
Symbol
2400
Iv
2450
Iv
2700
Iv
2720
Iv
2735
Iv
2755
Iv
2170
2785
Min.
20 mA DC
6~~1013DF
38
46
mOd
20
mcd
60 rnA Pk: 1 of 3 DF
18
mcd
2Q:.mA DC : , / ,
22
mcd
60''iTIAPk: 1 of 3 OF
6
18
mcd
20 rnA DC
mcd
60 mA Pk: 1 of 3 DF
13
22
35
mcd
20 rnA DC
43
mcd
60 mA Pk: 1 of 3 OF
35
mcd
20mADC
43
mod
60 mA Pk: 1 of 3 DF
13
35
43
mcd
20 mA DC
70
85
mod
m¢d
60..mA Pk: 1 of 3 OF
26
mcd
60 mA Pk: 1 of 3 DF
13
),peak
583
),d
Forward Voltage Per LED
Reverse Breakdown Voltage Per LED
VF
585
2,1
6
VBR
Test Conditions
nfpd
Dominant Wavelengthl 5 1
Peak Wavelength
Units
24
6
Iv
Max.
mcd
13
Iv
Typ.
20
6
20'mA DC
nm
nm
2.6
15
V
IF=20 mA
V
IR = 100}J.A
"C/WI
Thermal Resistance LED
Junctlon-to-Pln
LED
Chip
150
ROJ-PIN
High Performance Green HLMP-2500/-2BOO Series
Parameter
Luminous Intensltyl41
Per Light Emltti ng
Area
HLMP-
Symbol
2500
Iv
2550
Iv
2BOO
Iv
2820
Iv
2835
Iv
2855
Iv
2870
Iv
2885
Iv
Min.
5
Typ.
Test Conditions
20 mADC
28
mcd
60 mA Pk: 1 013 DF
11
50
mcd
20mA DC
mcd
60 mA Pk: 1 of 3 OF
5
56
25
mcd
20 mA DC
mcd
60 mA Pk; 1 013 DF
5
28
25
mod
20 mA DC
mod
60 mA Pk: 1 013 OF
11
28
50
mcd
20mADC
56
mod
60 mA Pk: 1 of 3 OF
11
50
mod
20 mADC
mod
60 mA Pk: 1 of3 DF
11
56
50
mcd
20mA DC
56
mcd
60 mA Pk: 1 013 OF
22
100
mod
20 mADC
111
mcd
60 mA Pk: 1 of 3 DF
nm
Apeak
565
Ad
572
Forward Voltage Per LED
VF
2.2
Rever$e Breakdown Voltage Per LED
VSR
Thermal Resistance LED
Ju netion-to-Pin
Units
mcd
Dominant Wavelength1 5 1
Peak Wavelength
Max.
25
6
15
nm
2.6
V
IF=20 mA
V
IA
~
100 j.£A
"C/WI
R8J-PIN
150
LED
Chip
Notes:
4. These devices are categorized lor luminous intensity with the intensity category designated by a letter code on the side of the
package.
5, The dominant wavelength, Ad, is derived Irom the CIE chromaticity diagram and is that single wavelength which defines the color of
the device. Yellow and green devices are categorized lor dominant wavelength with the color bin designated by a number code on
the side of the package,
5-11
Electrical
,The HLMP-2300/-2400/-2500/-2600/-2700/-2800/ series of
light bar devices .are composed of two, four or eight light
emitting diodes, with the light from each LED optically
'scattered to form an evenly. illuminated light emitting surface. The LED's have a P-N junction diffused into the
epitaxial layer on a GaP transparent substate.
Size of Light
Emitting
Area
The anode and cathode.of each LED is brought out by
separate pins. This universal pinout arrangement allows
for the wiring of the LED's within a device in any of three
possible configurations: parallel, series, or series/parallel.'
The typical forward voltage values, scaled from Figure 5,
should be used for calculating,the current limiting resistor
values and typical power dissipation. Expected maximum
VF values for the purpose of driver circuit design and
maximum power diSSipation may be calculated using the
following VF models:
SUrface Area
Sq. Metres
Sq. Feet
8.89 mm x 8.89 mm 61.74 x 10.6
729.16 x 10..tl
8,89 mm x 3,81 mm 33.B7 x 10'6
364.58
X
8.89 mm x 19.05 mm 135.48 x 10..tl 1458.32
3.81 mm x 19.05 mm 72.56
x 10-8
10.8
x 1o..t>
781.25 X 10.6
Refresh rates of 1 kHz or faster provide the most efficient
operation resulting in the maximum possible time average
luminous intensity.
VF = 1.8V + IPEAK (400)
For IpEAK ;:: 20mA
The time average luminous intensity may be calculated
using the relative efficiency characteristic of Figure 4,
l1iPEAK' and adjusted for operating ambient temperature.
The time average luminous intensity at TA = 25'C is
calculated as follows:
VF = 1.6V + IDe (500)
For 5mA'S IDe S 20mA
Iv "TIME AVG = [210AVG
mA] (111 PEAK ) (Iv Data Sheet)
The maximum power dissipation can be calculated for any
pulsed 'or DC drive condition. For DC operation, the
maximum power dissipation is the product of the maximum
forward voltage and the maximum forward current. For
pulsed operation, the maximum power dissipation is the
product of the maximum forward voltage at the peak
forward current times the maximum average forward
current. Maximum allowable power dissipation for any
given ambient tempenitureand thermal resistance (R8J-A)
can be determined by using Figure 2. The solid line in
Figure 2 (R8J-A of 538'C/W) represents a typical thermal
resistance of a device socketed in a printed circuit board.
The dashed lines represent achievable thermal resistances
that can be obtained through improved thermal design.
Once the maximum allowable power dissipation is determined, the maximum pulsed or DC forward current can be
calculated.
'
Example: For HLMP-2735 series
111 PEAK
Iv TIME AVG =
= 1.18 at IPEAK = 48 mA
[~~~~]
(1.18) (35 mcd) = 25
~cd
The time average luminous intensity may be adjusted for
operating ambient temperature by the following exponential equation:
Iv (TA) = Iv (25'C) e
[K ITA-2S'CI[
Device
K
-2300/-2600 Series
-2400/-2700 Series
-2500/-2800 Series
-o.0131/·C
-0.01121°C
-o.0104/°C
Optical
The radiation pattern for these light bar devices is
approximately Lambertian. The luminous sterance may
be calculated using one of the two following formulas:
L' (~d/m2) = Iv (cd)
v,
'A(m2)
.
.ITlv (cd)
Lv (footlamberts) = A (ft2)
Example: Iv (80· C) = (25 mcdle
[-0.0112 (80·2SI[
= 14 mcd
~g
~~
"'w
Zo
i=w
<0:
OPERATION IN
~: ~
a::::J
THIS REGION
~ ~ ~ 41-;;;m.;;\;;t+Hiffi--t-\l-tt-tHIt---t'H-l"flctitt'\.:t-+++ttttt;:~~~~~~URE
~~a
DERATING OF
:ieg
IDe MAX
"-0-"
OZ:>
9~~ 2~~~~~--~-HL~t&-~
~~~
I
~II~
~~
_~_g
1~~~~~__~-U~~~~uu~~~~~~
1
10
tp - PULSE DURATION - fJS
Figure 1. Maximum Allowed Peak Current vs. Pulse Duration.
5-12
Mechanical
These light bar devices may be operated in ambient
temperatures above +60 0 C without deratirig when
installed in a PC board configuration that provides a
thermal resistance to ambient value less than 250 0 C/W/
LED. See Figure 3 to determine the maximum allowed
thermal resistance for the PC board, Rope-A, which will
permit nonderated operation in a given ambient
temperature.
To optimize device optical performance, specially
developed plastiCS are used which restrict the solvents
that may be used forcleaning.lt is recommended that only
~
180
z
160
a
~
140
~
C
120
ffi
100
~
"
X
""
"
"
Q
~
- "'-:
REJ.GAoIEN
I
..
i
I "-
I
-.:.....-",
ROJA
40
-
20
-
I
I
I
1/
All,. -430'c,wILED
I
I
I
',/
0
o
tt
322~C/w/lEO
<'
./
\
•
~
~
20
""a
15
X
>-:..'
.
m _
a:
:>
R~r T'Cl'LEi
w
25
15a:
\
60
"E
,:.
M
TA -AMBIENT TEMPERATURE _
""
E
~l
M
IM
R8J" • 322'C,wILED
RUJ~ • 4~'ck'LE~ / '
ReJ~ • S18·ck'lE~./
I---
00
cc
10
20
YELLOW
~
1.0
13
"'i=>
~
a:
0.8
0.7
~
~
"
.)
1.1
0.9
0.6
\
\
X
V
10"\
\
~ ,)
'\
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
Figure 3. Maximum Allowable DC Current per LED vs. Ambient
Temperature, Deratlngs Based on Maximum Allowable
Thermal Resistance Values, LED Junction-to-Ambient
on a per LED Basis, Tj MAX = 1000 C.
1.3
1.2
\
TA - AMBIENT TEMPERATURE _ °c
Figure 2. Maximum Allowable Power Dissipalion per LED vs.
Ambient Temperature Deratlngs Based on Maximum
Allowable Thermal Resistance Values, LED Junction to
Ambient on a per LED Basis, Tj MAX = 1000 C.
,.
15"
'\
ylEUdw
10
u
"{
,
REd.GREkN
30
'I,
YELLOW
80
x
"
35
I
:>
mixtures of Freon (Fl13) and alcohol be used for vapor
cleaning processes, with an immersion time in the vapors
of less than two (2) minutes maximum. Some suggested
vapor cleaning solvents are Freon TE, Genesolv 01-15 or
DE-15, Arklone A or K. A 60 0 C (140 0 F) water cleaning
process may also be used, which includes a neutralizer
rinse (3% ammonia solution or equivalent), a surfactant
rinse (1% detergent solution or equivalent), a hot water
rinse and a thorough air dry. Room temperature cleaning
may be accomplished with Freon T-E35 or T-P35,
Ethanol, Isopropanol or water with a mild detergent.
IJ
.- -
r:-...
/
RED
-
I~REEN - -
H
I
0.5
IpEAK - PEAK CURRENT PER LED - mA
Figure 4. Relative Efficiency (Luminous Intensity per Unit
Current) vs. Peak LED Current.
5-13
2.4
90
2.2
BO
"
E
>-
"'
"""'0
"'"
"
"'~
.!:
2.0
2°
_N
1.6
on>,,"
00
1.4
~;x
>- E
70
"
15
>
>-
60
50
2w
1.2
w"
O.B
i~'
.~«
40
30
1.8
>"'
0
20
~~
10
"'
I I I
1.0
1/
...<
0.4
0.2
/'
V
0.6
00
VF - FORWARD VOLTAGE - V
,/
;'
R~O,
YELLOW,
~AE~N
.......
10
15
-
~-
I
1- -
20
25
I--
f-30
IDe-DC CURRENT PER LED-rnA
Figure 5. Forward Current vs. Forward Voltage Characteristics.
Figure 6. Relative Luminous Intensity vs. DC Forward Current.
For a Detailed Explanation on the Use of Data Sheet Information and Recommended
Soldering Procedures, See Application Note 1005,
5-14
DOUBLE HETEROJUNCTION AIGaAs
RliB LOW CURRENT LIGHT BARS
2 CHIP SIP HLCP-A100 4 CHIP DIP HLCP-C1001D100
4 CHIP SIP HLCP-B100 8 CHIP DIP HLCP-E10QLF100
tG100/H100
Features
• LOW POWER CONSUMPTION
3 rnA Drive Current
Low Forward Voltage
Excellent lor Battery Operated Applications
• X-V STACKABLE
• DEEP RED COLOR
Description
The HLCP-X100 Series light bars utilize Hewlett-Packard's
newly developed Double Heterojunction (DH) AIGaAs/GaAs
material to emit deep red light at 645 nm. This material has
outstanding efficiency at low drive currents and can be
either DC or pulse driven. Typical applications include
message annunciation for business machines, telecommunications, and instrumentation front panel, especially
those requiring portability or battery backup.
Absolute Maximum Ratings
Average Power Dissipation per LED Chip[1] ..... 37 mW
Peak Forward Currentper LED Chip[1] .......... 45 mA
Time Average Forward Current per LED Chip,
Pulsed Conditions[2] .............. 15 mA, T A = 25° C
DC Forward Current per LED Chip[3] ........... 15 mA
Reverse Voltage per LED Chip .................. 5 V
Operating Temperature Range ....... -20° C to +100° C
Storage Temperature Range ....•.... -55° C to +100° C
Lead Soldering Temperature 1.6 mm (1116 inch)
Below Seating Plane ............... 260° C for 3 sec.
Noles:
1. For pulsed operation, derate above TA = B7°C at 1.7 mW/oC
per LED.
2. See Figure 1 to establish pulsed operating conditions.
3. For DC operation, derate above T A = 91' C at O.B mAl' C per
LED.
Selection Guide
Light Bar
Part Number
HLCPAIGaAs
Red
Size of Light Emitting Areas
Number
of
Light
Emitting
Areas
A100
8.89 mm x 3.81 mm (0.350 in. x 0.150 in,)
1
A
CI
2599
8100
19.05 mm x 3.81 mm (0.750 in. x 0,150 in.)
1
B
c:::::J
2598
0100
8.89 mm x 3.81 mm (0,350 in. x 0.150 in.)
2
0
E100
8,89 mm x 3.81 mm (0.350 in. x 0.150 in.)
4
E
8.89 mm x 19,05 mm (0.150 in. x 0.750 in.)
2
F
1
C
E3
0
2899
8.89 mm x 8.89 mm (0.350 in. x 0.350 in.)
2899
2899
F100
C100
=
Package
Outline
Wi
G100
8.89 mm x 8.89 mm (0.350 in. x 0.350 in.)
2
G
IT]
H100
8.89 mm 19.05 mm (0.350 in. x 0.750 in.)
1
H
D
5-15
Corresponding
Panel and
Legend Mount
Part No. HLMP·
2698
2899
2898
Package Dimensions'
1\
4.064 MIN.
0.508 ±0.D76 1
10.020 ±0.0031
8.890
10.3501
MAX
111
'L
.r~~
PIN 1
CATHOOE END
rl
4953
10:,951
10.1601
4.953
10.1951
3.810
10.1501
19.050
.(0.7501
'.
~I
11:i
r
3.. 810
IJ'
II~
Lli
TOPB
TOP A
.
I
PART
NUMBER
END VIEW A, B
SEATING
PLANE
t...,...;,;,,;.._tTI
SEATING
PLANE
LUMINOUS
INTENSITY
CATEGORY
1 2
(SEE NOTE 41
2.54 TVP
J L
1
TypJ
2.54
10.1001
3
4
5
6
7 8
TLS.223
1.016
(0.2451
(0.0401
MAX.
~hTYP.
10.1001
0,584 ± 0.076
(0.023 '0.0031
SIDE B
SIDE A
I~
'
I
~PIN
I :- . - Ii II! ,~.:~
11g~;;,'r
M·AX.
3
6
4
1.016
(O.04°'l~
6.223
TYP.
10.2451
MAX.
10.3501
5
C
-.l
T
~
3.810
10.150'1-1
""I===I;==--I
LUMINOUS
INTENSITY
CATEGORY
ISEE NOTE 41
CJJ70
CJ
10.0501'
c:J
-1
TYP.
SIDE VIEW E, F, G, H
1,0.1501
3.810
10.1501
_ _ 4PLCS
PART
NUMBER
0.508 ± 0.05·
(0.020± 0.0021
.
L1 DF~I:~~~~O
:,'
I
TYP.
--,
I
10.160
10.4001
~
MAX.
E
NOTE: DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETRES (INCHES). TOLERANCES :!:0.25 mm (:!;0.010 inl UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED.
5-16
.
7.620
(0.3001
4064-b]
(0:1601~
'no
r----1 - :3m'0:0501
L-..J __'0_,1501
T ~ I~~~g, It-=T --;I,~:~~g, It-
SIDE VIEW C, 0
2.540
10.1001
.
0.254' 0.05
_
(0.010 ± 0.002;-11
MIN.
END VIEW C,D, E, F,G,H
Internal Circuit Diagrams
~
"' .. '
,
"
2
3
•
A
PIN.FUNCTfON
PIN
C,D
PIN FUNCTION
B.',
-2100/-2350/-2450
.
·2550
A
PIN
-2000/-2300/-2400
-2500
1
•... Cathode-a
2
A~ode - a
Cathode -::- b
3
4
,i
-
Anode-b'
C,D
Caihode - a
16
Anode - a
'5
Cathod~.-
,'.
b
." Anode-b',
5 .'
Cathode -'c
13
6
Anode-.c
'2
'7
8
Cathode -d
"
Anode --,. d
10
B
1
2
3
4
C4THODEa
ANODE a'"
ANODE b
CATHODE b
CATHODE c
ANODEc
ANODEd
CATHODE d
S
6
7
8
9
10 "
11
12
13
14
15
16
E,F,G,H.
CATHODE a
ANODE a
ANODE b
CATHODE b
CATHODE c
ANODEc
ANODEd
CATHODEd
CATHODEe
ANODEe
ANODEf
CATHODEf
.CATHODE 9
ANODE'g
ANODEh
CATHODE h
E,F,G,H
Electrical/Optical Characteristics at TA = 25°C
Parameter
HLCP
A100
8100
C100
0100
Luminous.lntenslty[4)
Per Light Emitting
Area
E100
Fl00
Gl00
Hl00
Peak Wavelength
. Symbol
Min.
30
Iv
6.0
Iv
6.0
Iv
3.0
Iv
3.0
Iv
6.0
Iv
6.0
Iv
12.0
Iv
Typ.
Units Test Conditions
mcd
12.0
mcd
20 mA Pk: 1 of 4 OF
15
mcd
3mA DC
3mAOC
24.0
mcd
20 mA Pk: 1 of 4 OF
15
mcd
3mAOC
24.0
mcd
20 mA Pk: 1 of 4 OF
7.5
mcd
3mAOC
12.0
mcd
20 mA Pk: 1 of 4 OF
7.5
mcd
3mA DC
12.0
mcd
20 mA Pk: 1 of 4 OF
15
mcd
3mADC
24.0
mcd
20 mA Pk: 1 of 4 OF
15
mcd
3mAOC
24.0
mcd
20 mA Pk: 1 of 4 OF
30
mcd
3mAOC
48.0
mcd
20 mA Pk: 1 of 4 OF
nm
nm
Apeak
645
Dominant Wavelength[5]
Ad
637
Forward Voltage Pef Led
VF
Reverse Breakdown VOltage Per LED
VBR
Thermal Resistance LED
Junction-to-Pin
Mal(.
7.5
IF; 3 mA
1.6
1.8
5
2.2
V
IF= 20 mA Pk:
1 of4 OF
V
lR ~ 100,uA
"C/WI
ROJ _PIN
250
LED
Chip
Notes:
4. These devices are categorized for luminous intensity with the intensity category designated by a letter code on. the side of the package.
5. The dominant wavelength, Ad. is derived from the CIE chromaticity diagram and is that single wavelength which defines the color of the device.
5-17
Electrical
The HLCP-X100 series of light bar devices are compsed of
two, four or eight light emitting diodes, with the light from
each LED optically scattered to form an evenly illuminated
light emitting surface. These diodes have their P-N junctions
formed in AIGaAs epitaxial layers on a GaAs substrate.
The anode and cathode of each LED is brought out by
separate pins. This universal pinout arrangement allows
for the wiring of the LED's within a device in any of three
possible configurations: parallel, series, or series/parallel.
The typical forward voltage values, scaled from Figure 4,
should be used for calculating the current limiting resistor
values and typical power dissipation. Expected maximum
V F values for the purpose of driver circuit design and
maximum power dissipation may be calculated using the
following VF models:
The maximum power dissipation can be calculated for any
pulsed or DC drive condition. For DC operation, the maximum power dissipation is the product of the maximum
forward voltage and the maximum forward current. For
pulsed operation, the maximum power dissipation is the
product of the maximum forward voltage at the peak
forward current times the maximum average forward current. Maximum allowable current for any given ambient
temperature and thermal resistance (RIIJ-A) can be determined by using Figure 2. The solid line in Figure 2 (RIIJ-A
of 5380 C/W) represents a typical thermal resistance of a
device socketed in a printed circuit board. The dashed
lines represent achievable thermal resistances that can be
obtained through improved thermal deSign.
VFMAX = 2.0 V + IF (10 0), IF 2: 20 mA
VFMAX = 1.8 V + IF (20 0), IF ~ 20 mA
OPERATION IN THIS
REGION REQUIRES
TEMPERATURE DERATING
OF IDe MAX
tp - PULSE DURATION - /-IS
Figure 1. Maximum Allowable Peak Current vs. Pulse Duration
15
1.2
,,·t++~ ---~\
"
E
,.
/'
1.0
"iii
0.8
::>
~
0.6
"I
>
I-
iiia:
10
Ro", • 6Qo'c/WILEO
-, ~ -
::;
a:
"c
w
i=
~
X
".E'"
0.4
i
a:
0.2
°20
30
40
50
60
70
80
TA - AMBIENT TEMPERATURE _
90
100
10
°c
20
30
40
PEAK CURRENT PER LED (rnA)
Figure 2. Maximum Allowed DC Current per LED vs. Ambient
Temperature, Deratings Based on Maximum Allowable
Thermal Resistance Values, LED Junction-to-Ambient
on a per LED Basis, T JMAX = 110' C
Figure 3. Relative Efficiency (Luminous Intensity per Unit
Current) vs. Peak LED Current
5-18
50.0
I
"
..1
20.0
I
E
...I
i:'a:i
10.0
5.0
a:
::>
u
c
2.0
~
a:
1.0
a:
it
0.5
I
-"
0.2
0.1
1.0
0.5
0
VF
-
'.5
2.0
0'1L
.2-l-LLJ
O."'5LU..I..L,--!c2-LJ""5~LJ.J,l:0--,J20
2.5
DC CURRENT PER LED (mAl
FORWARD VOLTAGE - V
Figure 5. Relative Luminous Intensity VB.
DC Forward Current
Figure 4. Forward Current vs. Forward Voltage
Characteristics
I
For a Detailed Explanation on the Use of Data Sheet Information and Recommended
Soldering Procedures, See Application Notes 1005 and 1027.
5-19
I
LED BreOLOR LIGHT BARS
roUi HEWLETT
DIP - single Light Emitting Area
-.:~ PACKARD
HIGH EFFICIENCY REDIYElLOW HLMp·2950
HIGH EFFICIENCY RED/HIGH PERFORMANCE GREEN HLMp·2965
Features
• LARGE,BRIGHT, UNIFORM. LIGHT EMITTING
AREA'
.
.
8.89mm x8.89mm (0.35 x 0.35 inch)
ApprClximalely Lambertian Radialion Pattern
• CHOICE OF TWO.BICOLOR COMBINATIONS
• CATEGORIZED FOR LIGHT OUTPUT
A'ND
• YELLOW
GREEN
CATEGORIZED FOR DOMINANT WAVELENGTH
• EXCELLENT ON-OFF CONTRAST
• EASILY MOUNTED ON P.C. BOARDS OR
INDUSTRY STANDARD DIP SOCKETS
• MECHANICALLY RUGGED
• X-Y STACKABLE
• FLUSH MOUNTABLE
Applications
• CAN BE USED WITH HLMP-;!898 PANEL AND
LEGEND MOUNT
• TRISTATE LEGEND ILLUMINATION
• LIGHT EMITTING SURFACE SUITABLE FOR
LEGEND ATTACHMENT PER APPLICATION
NOTE 1012
• I.C. COMPATIBLE
o
SPACE-CONSCIOUS FRONT PANEL STATUS
INDICATORS
o
BUSINESS MACHINE MESSAGE
ANNUNCIATORS
o TELECOMMUNICATIONS INDICATORS
o
TWO FUNCTION LIGHTED SWITCHES
Description
The HLMP-2950/-2965 light bars are bicolor light sources
designed for a variety of applications where dual state or
tristate illumination is required for the same annunciator
function. In addition. both devices are capable of emitting a
range of colors by pulse width modulation. These light bars
'",-
are configured in dual-in-line packages which contain a
single light emitting area. The high efficiency red (HER)
and yellow LED chips utilize GaAsP on a transparent GaP
substrate. The green LED chips utilize GaP on a transparent
substrate.
I
package 'Dimensions
2.540
10.1001 -j-;;;;",'==iI
LUMINOUS
INTENSITV
-=~~~
~D-!
I
)gl~ 2
MAX.
:
D11-1
:
8--
1
T ---rjII
~
8.890
(0.3501
10.160
(0.4001
-I '
MAX.
SIDE VIEW
8.890
(O.350)
TOP VIEW
END VIEW
_
"'OTES, DIMENSIONS IN MllLiMETRes I1NCIIESI.
TOLERANCeS cO.25 min {'O.OIO Inl UNLESS
OTHERWISE INDICATED.
Absolute Maximum Ratings
Parameter
HLMP·2965
HLMP·2950
135mW
85mW
Average Power Dissipation per LED Chip!1j
Peak Forward Current per LED Chip, T A'" 50' C
(Maximum Pulse Width" 2 ms)I1.2!
Time AveragEj,Forward Current per LED Chip,
Pulsed Conditions[2!
.......... ,....•.. ,...
90mA
60mA
25,rnA;
TA = 25°C
29mA;
Ti<;'50°C
DC Fdrward Current per LED Chip, T A = 50' C[3!
OPllrating Temperature Range
.."
36"mA
'25mA
-20' C to +85.' C
_40° C to +85° C
Storage Tempe,rature Range
-40' C to +85' C
Lead So!dering,Temperature, 1.6 mm (V16 inch) Below Seating plane
260' C for 3 seconds
Notes:
1. For HLMP-2965, derate above T A = 25° C at 1.8 mW;o C per LED chip. For HLMP-2950, derate above T A = 50' C at 1.8 mW;oC per LED
chip. See Figure 2.
2. See Figure 1 to establish pulsed operating conditions.
3. For HLMP-2965, derate above TA = 50'C at 0.50 mA/'C per LED chip. For HLMP-2950, derate above TA = 60°C at 0.50 mA/oC
per LED chip. See Figure 3.
Internal Circuit Diagram
PIN
*
HIGH EFFICIENCY RED LED
*,.
YELLOWI
GREEN
HER
a
2
CATHODE
ANODE a
3
4
ANODE b
CATHODE b
5
CATHODE c
6
7
CATHODE 9"
CATHODE h
B
ANODEh
YELLOW OR GREEN LED
Electrical/Optical Characteristics at TA = 25°C
HIGH EFFICIENCY RED/YELLOW
HLMp·2950
Parameter
Symbol
HER
Min.
Typ,
13
43
13
Iv
HER
Peak Wavelength
Yellow
5
Yellow
Thermal ReSistance LED
Junction-to-Pin
Yellow
mcd
20 mA DC
49
mcd
60 mA Pk: 1 of 3
Duty Factor
35
mCd
20 mA DC
43
mod
60 mA Pk: 1 of3
Duty Factor
nm
583
626
Ad
nm
585
HER
Forward Voltage
Test Conditions
635
APEAK
HER
Dominant Wavelength
Units
Iv
Luminous Intensity •
Yellow
Max.
VF
2.0
2.6
2.1
2.6
150
OJC
5-21
V
"C/W/LED
iF=20mA
Electrical/optical Characteristics at TA
HIGH EFFICIENCY RED/GREEN
HLMP-2965
Symbol
Parameter
HER
Luminous Intensity
Min.
Typ.
19
43
25
20 mA DC
49
mcd
60 mA Pk: 1 of 3
Duty Factor
50
mcd
20 mA DC
mcd
60 mA Pk: 1 of3
Duty Factor
Iv
HER
Green
635
APEAK
Green
626
Ad
Green
Thermal Resistance LED
Junction-to-Pin
nm
572
HER
Forward Voltage
nm
565
HER
Dominant Wavelength: sl
Test Conditions
mcd
56
Peak Wavelength
Units
Iv
4
Green
Max.
VF
2.0
2.6
2.2
2.6
150
ReJ-PIN
V
IF '" 20 mA
°C/W/LED
Notes:
4. These devices are categorized for luminous intensity with the intensity categorization designated by a two letter combination code
located on the side of the package (Z =HER, W =Yellow or Green)
5. The dominantwavelength, "d, is derived from the C.I.E. chromaticity diagram and is that single wavelength which defines the color of
the device.
Electrical
The HLMP-2950/-2965 bicolor light bar devices are composed of eight light emitting diodes: four High Efficiency
Red and four that are either Yellow or Green. The light
from each LED is optically scattered to form an evenly
illuminated light emitting surface. The LED's are die attached and wire bonded in bicolor pairs, with the anodel
cathode of each LED pair brought out by separate pins.
The typical forward voltage values, scaled from Figure 5,
should be used for calculating the current limitin>j resistor
values and typical power dissipation. Expected maximum
VF values for the purpose of driver circuit design and maximum power dissipation may be approximated using the
following VF models:
VF = 1.8V + IPEAK (400)
For IpEAK ~ 20 mA
VF = 1.6V + IDC (500)
For 5 mA ::; IDe::; 20 mA
The maximum power dissipation can be calculated for any
pulsed or DC drive condition. For DC operation, the
maximum power dissipation is the product of the maximum
forward voltage and the maximum forward current. For
pulsed operation, the maximum power dissipation. is the
product of the maximum forward voltage at the peak
forward current times the maximum average forward
current. Maximum allowable power dissipation for any
given ambient temperature and thermal resistance r R8J-A I
can be determined by using Figure 2. The solid line
in Figure 2 (R8J-A of 538 0 C/W) represents a typical thermal
resistance of a device socketed in a printed circuit board.
The dashed lines represent achievable thermal resistance
that can be obtained through improved thermal design.
Once the maximum allowable power dissipation is determined, the maximum pulsed or DC forward current can be
calculated.
Optical
The radiation pattern for these light bar devices is approximately Lambertian. The luminous sterance may be calculated using one of the two following formulas:
Lv (cd/m2) =
Iv (cd)
A (m2)
Lv (footlamberts) =
ITlv (cd)
A (ft2)
where the area (A) of the light emitting surface is 67.74 x
10-6 m 2 (729.16 x 10-6ft.2).
5-22
For a Detailed Explanation on the Use of Data Sheet Information and Recommended
Soldering Procedures, see Application Note 1005.
10
100
10000
1000
tp - PULSE DURATION -lAS
Figure 1. Maximum Allowed Peak Current vs. Pulse Duration.
~
180
2
160
o
~
140
~
Ci
120
ffi
100
"~
RE~.G~EEN
!
!, I
80
"
X
60
"
"
40
X
"
20
:J
! I
I R.""
8~IIJA
t{V)A
_,c
." , ,
"
<-
~ 3~2 C~IILE? / /
"s'ssc
.30 CIWILED
.:.
25
a:
20
""0
15 I--
15a:
\
:J
\
,;
"E"
~" '\
C1/lEh~
j II I .
u
'I
I
\\
RUJA - 3Z2'CIWILEI>
ROJ~ "410' CJIiLEh /
R"J~ • 5~B'ckILEb/
10
00
TA - AMBIENT TEMPERATURE - C
'\ ', k"",
lX ,
V f:\: ,1
\,
vkuJw
E
, -""-b.
I
~
REb.GR~EN
30
,- "'~
VE,lOW
"
"
35
J J
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
TA - AMBIENT TEMPERATURE -
Figure 2. Maximum Allowable Power Dissipation per LED vs.
Ambient Temperature. Deratings based on Maximum
Allowable Thermal Resistance Values, LED Junction to
Ambient on a per LED Basis, Tj MAX = 100' C.
80
90
"c
Figure 3. Maximum Allowable DC Current per LED vs. Ambient
Temperature, Deratings Based on Maximum Allowable
Thermal Resistance Values, LED Junction-to-Ambient
on a per LED Basis, Tj MAX = 100' C.
5-23
90
80
, "t.
e,
I-
70
iiia:
60
:>
50
a:
"0a:
40
a:
30
~
.it,
.!:
20
10
VF - F.DRWARD VOLTAGE - V
IpEAK - PEAK CURRENT PER LED - rnA
Figure 4. Relative Elficlency (Luminous Intensity per Unit
Current) vs. Peak LED Cur~nt.
Figure 5. Forward Current vs. Forward Voltage Characteristics.
2.'
,.
I-
~<
2.2
2.0
1.8
~~
1.6
:><
I.'
",l-
00
zw
i~
:>~
~<
w:!1
>a:
-0
I-z
1.2
1.0
0.8
<- 0.6
iil
a:'
0.'
IOC-DC CURRENT PER LED-rnA
Figure 6. Relative Luminous Intensity vs.
5-24
DC, Forward
Current.
Reversing polarity LED Drivers
output control or provide other means for turning both
LED's off. An example of this circuit technique is shown in
Figure 11.
Bicolor LED light bar modules require a polarity reversing
scheme to turn on the desired LED. Reversing line drivers,
timers and memory drivers can be used to drive bicolor
LED light bars.
The NE556 dual timer, or two NE555 timers can also be
used to drive bicolor light bars, as shown in Figure 12. The
outputs at the NE555 timer are able to source or sink up to
200 mAo Connected as shown, each timer acts as an inverting buffer. This circuit has the advantage over the previous
line driver circuits of being able to operate at a wide variety
of power supply voltages ranging from 4.5 to 16 volts.
The reversing line driver, which was originally designed to
drive a data transmission line, can also be used as a polarity
reversing driver for bicolor LED modules. The reversing line
driver has a totem pole output structure that differs from
most TTL circuits in that the output is designed to source
as much current as it is capable of sinking.
Memory drivers can also be used to drive bicolor light bars.
Figure 13 shows a 75325 core memory driver being used to
drive several pairs of bicolor LEDs. The 75325 is guaranteed to supply up to 600 mA of current with an output
voltage considerably higher than 5V line drivers. The 75325
requires an additional 7.5V power supply at about 40 mA to
properly bias the sourcing drivers. The 75325 allows tristate (red, green, yellow, or emerald, off) operation.
Line drivers designed to operate from a single 5V supply
are typically specified to source or sink 40 mA. Figure 7
shows the typical output characteristics of three different
line drivers connected so that one output sources current
across a load and the current is sunk by another output.
This circuit is shown in Figure 8. At 40 mA output current,
the output voltage typically varies from 2.4V 1741281 to 2.9V
IDM 8830, 96141 for Vee = 5.0V. A basic bicolor LED circuit
is shown in Figure 9. Since a line driver can supply 40 mA, it
is capable of driving two LED pairs.
By employing pulse width modulation techniques to any of
these circuits a range of colors can be obtained. This technique is illustrated in Figure 14.
Some line drivers like the 9614 are constructed such that
the sourcing output is brought out separately from the sinking output. With this type of line driver, the LED currents for
each pair can be controlled separately. This technique is
shown in Figure 10. Other line drivers provide a tri-state
80
'E",
I-
to-...
-...,
"\
SO
a:
::>
"::>
40
::::>
'i'
E
,,
V
I-
---.---------1r---- vcc
V-OM8830
1-'96\4
"I .
"\ "<; K'
"\
ffi
a:
Hewlett-Packard cannot assume responsibility for use of
any circuitry described other than the circuitry entirely
embodied in an HP product.
74US -
\1\
20
1\\
'\
VO"OUTPUT VOLTAGE - V
Figure 8. Line Driver Equivalent Circuit.
Figure 7. Typical Output Characteristics of Reversing Line Drivers.
RED.
RED.
GREEN!r-E3~~'!~25D~M8=8=30~-r_-----l
5
YELLOW
3sn
RED
T-----l
GREEN·-l:i3::>==kYELLOW
3sn
lsn
GREEN!
YELLOW
RED
lsn
GREEN!
YELLOW
YIELDS APPROXIMATELY 20mAlRED LED
YIELDS APPROXIMATELY 25mAIYELLOW OR GREEN LED
Figure 9. Typical Line Driver Circuit; Approximately 20mA/LED Pair.
5-25
Figure 10. Techniques for Varying the Current of Each LED.
1/67404
RED,GREEN,VELIOW----~--~~;~r_----------_:31~~~------~--------------__,
lsn
l5n
GREENI
YELLOW
ENABLE-----r------------------~_7_i
Figure 11'. Tristate (Red,
Green/Yello~
Off) Bicolor LED Driver.
+6V
RED, GREEN, YELLOW
lOn:
10n
10fl
RED
YIELDS APPROXIMATELY 25mA/LED PAIR
Figure 12. Use of Dual Timer to Drive Bicolor Light Bars
+V:>7.5
1/67404
~~-.--~~fA~~~----~~~W~2~------~--~--------_1~----~
1/275325
X 15
ENABlE--~----~------~r_~ot~------~-----1
GREEN,
YELLOW
RED
+-____________--+______~ lOmA PER LED PAIR
rl0'--__-+__
D
1/275325
Yr------'
C
UP TO 20 LED PAIRS
(600mA TOTALI
Figure 13. 75325, High Current Bicolor Driver,
Vee
Vee
Vee
100Kfl
2Kfl
PULSE WIDTH MODULATION CDNTROL
.-/
100Kn
14
2.2Kfl
1/2 NE556
112 NE556
f------ OUTPUT (BICOLOR CIRCUIT)
2AVn'
n_
L-J
~
~ GREEN, YEL~OW
O.BV _______________
2.
4V
UlF
-RED
0.8V ________________
Figure 14. Pulse Width Modulation Technique
5-26
LED COLOR KEY FOR ALL FIGURES
XHER'
A
YELLOW OR GREEN LED
10-ELEMENT BAR GRAPH ARRAY
F/i;;'l
RED
HIGH-EFFICIENCY RED
YELLOW
HIGH PERFORMANCE GREEN
M!JlnCOlQR
MULTICOLOR
HEWLETT
a:~ PACKARD
HD5P-4820
HDSP'1l830
HDSP-481l0
HDSP-1l850
HP$P'1l832
HDSP-1l836
Features
• CUSTOM MULTICOLOR ARRAY CAPABILITY
• MATCHED LEOs FOR UNIFORM APPEARANCE
• END ST ACKABLE
• PACKAGE INTERLOCK ENSURES CORRECT
ALIGNMENT
• LOW PROFILE PACKAGE
• RUGGED CONSTRUCTIONRELIABILITY DATA SHEETS AVAILABLE
• LARGE, EASILY RECOGNIZABLE SEGMENTS
• HIGH ON-OFF CONTRAST, SEGMENT TO
SEGMENT
• WIDE VIEWING ANGLE
• CATEGORIZED FOR LUMINOUS INTENSITY
• HDSP-4832/-4836/-4840/-4850 CATEGORIZED
FOR DOMINANT WAVELENGTH
Applications
•
•
•
•
•
Description
These 10-element LED arrays are designed to display information in easily recognizable bar graph form. The packages
are end stackable and therefore capable of displaying long
strings of information. Use of these bar graph arrays eliminates the alignment, intenSity, and color matching problems
associated with discrete LEOs. The HDSP-4820/-48301
-4840/-4850 each contain LEOs of just one color. The
HDSP-4832/-4836 are multicolor arrays with High-Efficiency
Red, Yellow, and Green LEOs in a single package. CUSTOM
MULTICOLOR ARRAYS ARE AVAILABLE WITH MINIMUM
DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS. CONTACT YOUR LOCAL
DISTRIBUTOR OR HP SALES OFFICE FOR DETAILS.
INDUSTRIAL CONTROLS
INSTRUMENTATION
OFFICE EQUIPMENT
COMPUTER PERIPHERALS
CONSUMER PRODUCTS
Package Dimensions
1. DIMENSIONS IN MII_LIMETRES (lNCHESI.
Z. ALL UNTOLERANCEO DIMENSIONS fOR
REFERENCE ONLY.
3. HD$P-483ZI-4ll36/-4ll40!-48S0 ONLY.
2.54
(0.1001
DATE CODE
R- o.~
PIN I MARKING
{O.OISI
L
I'
!...........J
7.52" 0.36
I
I (0.300, 0.0151
~.54±O.2S
(O.100±Ml0)
5-27
Absolute Maximum Ratings£91
HDSP-4820
Parameter
Average Power DISsipation per LED
(T = 25° C) [1}
HDSP-4830
HDSP-4840
HDSP-4850
125mW
125mW
125mW
125mW
Peak Forward Current per LED
150 mWrll1
90 mA[3)
6OmA(3)
9OmAf3]
DC Forward Current per LED
30mA[41
30mA[Sj
SamAra]
30 mAFl
-40" C to +85" C
Operating Temperature Range
20" C to +85· C
-40' C to +85' C
Storage Temperature Range
3.0 V
Reverse Voltage per LE::D
Lead Soldering Temperature
(1.59 mm (1/16 inCh) below seating plane
260° C for 3 seconds
NOTES:
1. Derate maximum average power above TA = 25' C at 1.67 mW/' C. This derating assumes worst case. R0J-A = 600' C/WiLED.
2. See Figure 1 to establish pulsed operating conditions.
3. See Figure 6 to establish pulsed operating conditions.
4. Derate maximum DC current above TA=63' C atO.81 mAl' C per LED. Thisderating assumes worst case R0J-A= 600' C/W/LED. With
an improved thermal design, operation at higher temperatures without derating is possible. See Figure 2.
5. Derate maximum DC current above TA = 50' C atO.6 mAl' C per LED. This derating assumes worst case R0J-A = 600' C/W/LED. With an
improved thermal design, operation at higher temperatures without derating is possible. See Figure 7.
6. Derate maximum DC current above TA= 70' C atO.67 mAl' C per LED. This derating assumes worst case R0J-A=600' C/W/LED. With
an improved thermal design, operation at higher temperatures without derating is possible. See Figure 8.
7. Derate maximum DC current above TA = 37' C at 0,48 mAl' C per LED. This derating assumes worst case R0J-A = 600' C/W/LED. With
an improved thermal design, operation at higher temperatures without derating is possible. See Figure 9.
8. Clean only in water, Isopropanol, Ethanol, Freon TF or TE (or equivalent) and Genesolve 01-15 (or equivalent).
.
9. Absolute maximum ratings for the HER, Yellow, and Green elements of the multicolor arrays are identical to the HDSP-4830/-48401
-4850 maximum ratings.
Multicolor Array
segment Colors
Internal Circuit Diagram
1'-...
v
20
b
19
"
d
t-.. •
.
::: f
:::
::: h
~i
K
I
v
10
18
17
16
15
14
13
PIN
1
2
3
4
6
6
7
8
9
10
FUNCTION
AN()DE-a
ANODE-b
ANODE-c
ANOOE-d
ANODE-e
ANODE-f
ANODE-g
ANODE-h
ANODE-i
ANOOE-!
PIN
11
12
FUNCTION
CATHODE-j
CATHODE-;
CATHODE-h
CATHODE-g
CATHODE-f
CATHODE-.
CATHOOE-d
CATHODE-c
CATHODE-b
CATHODE-a
13
14
16
16
17
18
19
20
12
Segment
a
b
C
d
e
f
g
h
i
11
J
HDSp·4832
Segment Color
HER
HER
HER
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Green
Green
Green
HD$P-4838
Segment Color
HER
HER
Yellow
YellOW
Green
Green
Yellow
Yellow
HER
HER
Electrical/Optical Characteristics at TA,= 25 0 C41
RED
HDSP-4820
Parameter
Luminous Intensity per LED
(Unit Average)111
Symbol
IF
Test Conditions
Min.
Typ.
IF=20mA
610
1250
APEAK
655
Dominant Wavefength l21
Ad
645
Forward Voltage per LED
VF
IF=20mA
Reverse Voltage per LED
VR
IR'" 100 p.A
Peak Wavelength
1.6
3
Max.
Units
I
I
!tcd
nm
nm
2.0
V
12(5)
V
Temperature Coefficient VI' per LED
AVF/oC
-2.0
mVioC
Thermal Resistance LED Junction-to-Pln
RSJ- P1N
300
"C/WI
LED
5-28
YELLOW
HDSP-4840
Parameter
Luminous Intensity per LED
(Unit Average}111
Peak Wavelength
t1' ,.
Symbol
d
Test Conditions
IF= 10 mA
Iv
"Min.
Ty!).
600
1900
Rax.
"cd
nm
583
APEAK
Dominant Wavelengthl2,3 1
Ad
581
Forward Voltage per LED
VF
11'=20 rnA
Reverse Voltage per LED
VA
IA = 100 "A
3
Units
585
592
2.2
2.5
nm
V
40(51
V
Temperature Coefficient VF per LED
AVF/"C
-2,0
mVl·C
Thermal Resistance LED Junction-to-Pin
RaJ-PIN
300
·ClWi
LED
GREEN
HDSP-4850
Parameter
Luminous Intensity per LED
(Unit Average}111
Peak Wavelength
Dominant Wavelength l2•31
Symbol
Iv
Test Conditions
Min.
Typ.
IF=10mA
600
1900
Max.
fled
APEAK
566
Ad
571
577
2.1
2.5
Forward Voltage per LED
VF
Reverse Voltage per LED
VA
IF"'" 10 rnA
I
IA'" 100 "A
3
Units
nm
nm
V
50(51
V
Temperature Coefficient VF per LED
AVF/·C
-2.0
mVl"C
Thermal Resistance LED Junction-te-Pin
RaJ-PIN
300
·C/WI
LED
NOTES:
1. The bar graph arrays are categorized for luminous intensity. The category is des.ignated by a letter located on the side of the package.
2. The dominant y.oavelength. Ad, is derived from the CIE chromaticity diagram and is that single wavelength which defines the color of the
device.
3. The HDSP-4832/-4B36/-4B40/-4850 bar graph arrays are categorized by dominant wavelength with the category designated by a
number adjacent to the intensity category letter. Only the yellow elements of the HDSP-4B32/-4B36 are categorized for color.
4. Electrical/optical characteristics of the High-Efficiency Aed elements of the HDSP-4B321-4836 are identical to the HDSP-4B30
characteristics. Characteristics of Yellow elements of the HDSP-4B32/-4B36 are identical to the HDSP-4B40. Characteristics of Green
elements of the HDSP-4B32/-4B36 are identical to the HDSP-4B50.
5. Reverse voltage per LED should be limited to 3.0 V Max.
5-29
HDSP-4820
OPERATION IN
THIS REGION
REQUIRES
TEMPERATURE
DERATING OF
IDe MAX
1
1
tp - PULSE DURATION - ,uSEe
Figure 1. Maximum Tolerable Peak Current vs. Pulse Duration
"
E
I
z'
a:
a:
::J
"
""
>E
r--
25
I--
20
1',
H;.".48SE
X
15
>E
10
"
"~
1-0
*
0,9
(j
30
r-:- I'---
I
UJ
>
;::
~
RJ'A .loo,d'\'JlsJo/ h,",
""'- I-
If
>
35
IUJ
-
1-1
45
40
a:
I
I
\
!
0.8
C
0
0
0.7
00
20
40
60
80
100
120
140 I 160
150
Ipeak - PEAK SEGMENT CURRENT - rnA
Figure 2. Maximum Allowable D.C. Current per LED vs.
Ambient Temperature. Deratings based on Maximum
Allowable Thermal Resistance, LED Junction-to-Ambient
on a per LED basis. T JMAX = 1000 C
Figure 3. Relative Efficiency (Luminous Intensity per Unit
Current) VB. Peak Segment Current
1.4,----,..----,---,....---,..-----,
160
i
o
TA - AMBIENT TEMPERATURE - QC
<
E
140
~
z
!
~
120
100
~
~
B
80
60
~
<
~
40
I
20
~
",.
.4
.8
1.2
16
20
24
2.8
),2
V F - FORWARD VOL T AGE - V
IF - SEGMENT DC CURRENT - rnA
Figure 5. Relative Luminous Intensity VB. D.C. Forward ,Current
Figure 4. Forward Current vs. Forward Voltage
For a Detailed Explanation on the Use of Data Sheet Information and Recommended
Soldering Procedures, See Application Note 1005.
5-30
HDSP-4830/-4840/-4850
V
!dslilllo
Illtlll
HOSPI1Y'O
OPERATION IN
THIS REGION
REaUIRES
HDSP-.4j40
TEMPERATURE
"-\
\
"-
~'O
10
~
DERATING OF
IDe MAX.
J,..
\
1\
'oS>",
1\'<>oS>~
l~oS>
~~
I f\ I
~
1
~
1'\
~r-~~i'A
t:
~<"
~
f\ 1m
~
10,000
1000
100
DC OPERATION
'tp - PULSE DURATION - ~SEC
Figure 6. HDSP-4830/-4840/-4850 Maximum Tolerable Peak Current vs. Pulse Duration
45
"e
iii0:
35
::>
30
0:
"c"
::>
"
"X
""XI
"E"
u
I
iii
"- r\.
25
I
Re'_A = 600'elW/l
15
o
o w
~
~
~
~
~
12
~
10
"
W
00
L
"~
. 'It
~
"I
6
~
4
"E
I
2
o
o
00
10
TA - AMBIENT TEMPERATURE _ °C
"
zw
0:
0:
::>
u
"c
"
::>
~"
"
J!"
45
1.6
40
1.5
35
30
25
40
50
60
70
BO 90 100
~
1.4
iiiC3
1.3
~
1,2
....l
SERIES
/ / HDSP-4840
1
t
t
-I-
~
5w
20
,
10
1.0
I
0.9
~
0.8
1/
HDSP-4SS0 SERies
fA V
1.1
J
0:
15
HDSP-4B30 SERIES
/
w
I
~
30
Figure 8. HDSP-4840 Maximum Allowable D.C. Current per LED
vs. Ambient. Temperature. Deratlngs Based qn Maximum Allowable Thermal Resistance Values, LED Junctlon-to-Amblent on a
.
per LED basis. TJ MAX = 1000 C. .
I
I-
20
TA - AMBIENT TEMPERATURE -'C
Figure 7. HDSP-4830 Maximum Allowable D.C. Current per LED
vs. Ambient Temperature. Deratings Based on Maximum Allowable Thermal Resistance Values, LED Junctlon-to-Amblent on a
per LED basis. T J MAX = 1000 C.
e
-
c
-
,
5
14
a
u
~~
10
RSJ-" 06oo'CIWI$EO+
~
~y
I
1\1
16
I-
Re,••• 4~'CIW/LED
20
~
~ lB
J
I
I-
20
I
40
n
I
.:
0.7
0
0.6
0
o
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90 100
IpEAK - PEAK SEGMENT CURRENT - rnA
TA - AMBIENT TEMPERATURE -'C
Figure 10. Relative Efficiency (Luminous Intensity per UnltCurrent) vs. Peak Segment Current
.
Figure 9. HDSP-4850 Maximum Allowable D.C. Current per
LED ¥s. Ambient Temperature. Deratlngs Based on Maximum
Allowable Thermal Resistance Values. LED Junctlon-to-Ambient
on a per LED basis. T J.MAX = 100°C C.
For a Detailed Explanation on the Use of Dat.a Sheet Inforl)1ation and Recommended
Soldering Procedures, See Application Note 1005:
....
5-31
HDSP-4830/-4840/-4850/-4890
90 r--rr:;HD;:;SP'".-::4S5=O"'1--;
.I./,
rr--r--,-,--,
4.0,-,--r--,-,--,-r--r-.
BO 1--+",SE'j'R",tE;::.Sr----t--I"+-I+-l~+-_1
35
"7 70 f-+-t-f-',+-+-+-t-+---l
Ii
~
60 I--+-+-I--I//'r-/
.-t-;H"'O!;;:SP:;--4S.h;4Q.-I---l
!5
1/- SERIES
50 I-H"'OS:±"P-4";;B;-!c3Q;c-'
~l-llllfH'--+-'''T'='-+--1
:=l-I---tT--1L/~
It
SERIES
'!III
~ 40 f-'=T"-r--'I;,rylH-+-+-t-+---l
2.0
"
~ 30f--r-t-r.~~-t-+-+-t-+---l
~ 20 f-+--tl"hfA'I+--+--I-_I--+-+--1
10
1.5
lhi
2.0
3.0
4.0
• /
1.0
o,:V
Vl
f--r-H. r-t---r-t-t---r-t--1
1.0
L
a
5.0
V
5
L
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
IDC - DC CURRENT PER LED - rnA
VF '- FORWARD VOLTAGE - V
Figure 11. Forward Current vs. Forward Voltage
Figure 12. HDSP-4830/-4840/-4850 Relative Luminous
Intensity vs. D.C. Forward Currenl
Electrical
These versatile bar graph arrays are composed often light
emitting .diodes. The light from each LED is optically
stretched to form individual elements. The diodes in the
HDSP-4820 bar graph utilize a Gallium Arsenide Phosphide
(GaAsP) epitaxial layer on a Gallium Arsenide (GaAs) Substrate. The HDSP-4830/-4840 bar graphs utilize a GaAsP
epitaxial layer on a GaP substrate to produce the brighter
high-efficiency red and yellow displays. The HDSP-4850
bar graph arrays utilize a GaP epitaxial layer on a GaP
substrate. The HDSP-4832/-4836 multicolor arrays have
high efficiency red, yellow, and green LEOs in one package.
The time averaged luminous intensity may be calculated
using the relative efficiency characteristic shown in Figures
3 and 10. The time averaged luminous intensity at TA =
25°C is calculated as follows:
These display devices are deSigned to allow strobed operation. The typical forward voltage values, scaled from Figure4
or 11, should be used for calculating the current limiting
resistor value and typical power dissipation. Expected maximum VFvalues, for the purpose of driver circuit design and
maximum power dissipation, may be calculated using the
following VF MAX models.
Example; For HDSP-4830 operating at IPEAK = 50 mA, 1 of 4
Duty Factor
Refresh rates of 1 KHz or faster provide the most efficient
operation resulting in.the maximum possible time averaged
luminous intensity.
1
r IFAVG
Iv TIME AVG = ~F SPEC AV~('1IPEAK) (Iv SPEC)
'1IPEAK = 1.35 (at IpEAK = 50 mAl
HDSP-4820 (Red)
VF MAX =1.75 V + IPEAK (12.5f1)
For: IPEAK :2: 5 mA
r12.5 mAl
Iv TIME AVG= l1 0 mA (1.35) 2280 !Lcd = 3847 !Lcd
j
HDSP-4830/-4840 (High Efficiency Red/Yellow)
VF MAX = 1.75V + IPEAK(38D)
For IPEAK :2: 20 mA
VF MAX = 1.6V+loc (45D)
For: 5 mA ~ loc ~ 20 mA
HDSP-4850 (Green)
VF MAX = 2.0V + IPEAK (50D)
For: IPEAK > 5 mA
I
For Further Information Concerning Bar Graph Arrays and Suggested Drive Circuits,
Consult HP Application Note 1007 Entitled "Bar Graph Array Applications".
-'-'
5-32
Fli;'
101 ELEMENT
BAR GRAPH ARRAY
HEWLETT
~~ PACKARD
HJPH
RED HDSp·8820
HIGH EFFICIENCY RED HDSP-8825
PERFORMANCE GR~EN HDSP:8835
TECHNICAL DATA
JANUARY 1986
Features
• HIGH RESOLUTION (1%)
• EXCELLENT ELEMENT APPEARANCE
Wide, Recognizable Elements
Matched LEDs for Uniformity
Excellent Element Alignment
• SINGLE-IN-LlNE PACKAGE DESIGN
Sturdy Leads on Industry Standard 2.54 mm
(0.100") Centers
Environmentally Rugged Package
Common Cathode Configuration
• LOW POWER REQUIREMENTS
1.0 rnA Average per Element at 1% Duty Cycle
• SUPPORT ELECTRONICS
Easy Interface with Microprocessors
Description
The HDSP-88XX series is a family of 101-element LED linear arrays designed to display information in easily
recognizable bar graph or position indicator form. The
HDSP-8820, utilizing red GaAsP LED chips assembled on
a PC board and enclosed in a red polycarbonate cover
with an epoxy backfill seal, has 1.52 mm (0.060 inch) wide
segments. The HDSP-8825 and HDSP-8835 are high efficiency red and high performance green respectively, each
with a 1.02 mm (0.040 inch) segment width. The HDSP8825 and HDSP-8835 have a clear polycarbonate lens.
Mechanical considerations and pin-out are identical
among all 3 devices. The common cathode chips are
addressed via 22 single-in-line pins extending from the
back side of the package.
Applications
o INDUSTRIAL PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS
o EDGEWISE PANEL METERS
o
INSTRUMENTATION
o POSITION INDICATORS
o FLUID LEVEL INDICATORS
Package Dimensions (1, 2)
MAGNIFIED ELEMENT DESCRIPTION!
5-33
Internal Circuit Diagram 15,61
C'~
co
1
Device Pin Description
PIN
LOCATION
@A
~
;g: A,
At
~
~ A,
i;j
A3
~
I"
~
LA
~
[
As
As
~
A7
7
As
31
Ag
27 AlO
Cl0
S
N
::
LA
IA
:"
~
LA
C200-1
C30®-f
SIX ADDITIONAL
GROUPSOF
TEN ELEMENTS
C40@)--l
C50@)--l
C60@--1
C70@--1
C80 33
1
1
1
I
I
I
I
N
LA
~
iA
:~
C90
"'
iA
L<
c:
I"
0'" PIN NUMBER
NOTES:
5. ELEMENT LOCATION NUMBER ~ COMMON CATHODE NUMBER + ANODE NUMBER,
FOR EXAMPLE, ELEMENT 83 IS OBTAINES BY ADDRESSING CSO AND A3.
6. A' AND C' ARE ANODE AND CATHODE OF ELEMENT ZERO.
5-34
FUNCTION
1
2
3
C'(6)
4
No Pin
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
C10
A1
A8
CO
A4
No Pin
C20
No Pin
A'(6)
No Pin
C30
No Pin
A7
No Pin
C40
No Pin
A2
No Pin
C50
No Pin
A3
No Pin
C60
No Pin
A10
No Pin
C70
No Pin
A9
No Pin
C80
A5
A6
No Pin
C90
Absolute Maximum Ratings
Parameter
HOSP·SS20
HOSP·SS25
Average Power per Element (TA "" 25· C)
15mW
20mW
HOSP·S835
20mW
Peak Forward Current per Element
(TA "" 25"0)17 1(Pulse Width:5 300 psI
200mA
150mA
1S0mA
7mA
5mA
SmA
Operating Temperature Range
-40· to +850 C
Storage Temperature Range
-40· to +85·C
-40" to +85" 0
-400 to+85.C
-40. to +850C
Average Forward Current per E'iement
(TA"" 25" C)[81
Reverse Voltage per Element or DP
Lead Solder Temperature 1.59 mm [1.16 inch]
below seating plane[Sl
-40" to +85· C
5.0 V
5.0V
S.OV
260· C for 3 sec.
260" C tor 3 sec.
260' C for 3 seo.
Notes:
7. See Figures 1 and 2 to establish pulsed operating
conditions.
8. Derate maximum average forward current above TA = 70 0 C
at 0.16 mAIO C/Element for the HDSP-8820 and 0.11
mN°C/Element for the HDSP-882s and HDSP-883s. See
Figures 3 and 4.
9. Clean only in water, Isopropanol, Ethanol, Freon TF. or TE
(or equivalent) and Genesolv DI-ls or DE-IS (or equivalent),
See mechanical section of this data sheet for Information on
wave soldering conditions.
Electrical/Optical Characteristics at TA
25°C
RED HDSP-8820
Para"",ier
Time averaged Luminous Intensity per Element
(Unit average) [Ill)
Symbol
Test Conditions
Min.
IV
100 mA Pk.: 1 of 110
Duty Factor
8
Peak Wavelength
Dominant Wavelength [111
APEAK
Max.
20
Ad
VF
IF'" 100 mA
Rel/erse Voltage per Element
VR
AVF/oC
tR" 100 pA
640
1.7
om
2.1
3.0
V
V
·2.0
700
R6J-PIN
Units
pod
nm
655
Forward Voltage per Element
Temperature cOefficient VF per Element
Thermal Resistance LEO Junetlon-ta-Pin
Typ.
'.eml
LED
HIGH EFFICIENCY RED HDSP-8825
Parameter
Time averaged Luminous Intensity per Element
(Unit average) [WI
Peak Wavelength
Dominant Wavelength (111
SymbOl
IV
Test Conditions
100 mA Pk.: 1 of 110
Duty Factor
Typ.
60
175
pod
635
626
2.3
nm
nm
APEAK
Ad
Forward Voltage per Element
VF
IF = 100 mA
Reverse Voltage per Element
VR
IR"" 100 pA
I
Max.
Min.
3.0
3.1
UnllS
V
V
Temperature Coefficient VF per Element
.lVF'oC
-2.0
mVrC
Thermal Resistance LED Junctlon-to-Pin
Rt)J-PIN
1000
·elWf
LEO
5-35
Electrical/optical Characteristics at TA
25° C (continued)
HIGH PERFORMANCE GREEN HDSP-8835
Parameter
Time Averaged Luminous Intensity per Element
(Unit average) [101
Peak Wavelength
Dominant Wavelength 1111
Symbol
Tesl Conditions
Min.
Typ.
IV
100 rnA Pk.: 1 of 110
Duty Factor
70
175
Max.
Units
j.lcd
/l.PEAK
568
nm
Ad
574
nm
Forward Voltage per Element
VI'
IF"" 100 mA
Reverse Voltage per Element
IF = 100 itA
Temperature Coefficient VF per Element
VR
J.VF/·C
Thermal ReSistance LED JUnction-ta-Pin
R('}J-PIN
2.3
3.0
3~
V
-2.0
mVl·C
1000
·C/WI
LED
Notes:
10. Operation at peak currents olless than 100 mA may cause intensity mismatch. Consult factory for low current operation.
11. The dominant wavelength, Ad, is derived from the CIE chromaticity diagram and is the single wavelength which defines the color
of the device.
i.OPERATION IN
~
"I
THIS REGION
REQUIRES
T. EMPERATURE
DERATING OF
Icc MAX.
tp - PULSE DURATION - p.sec
Figure 1. Maximum Tolerable Peak Current
VS.
Pulse Duration HDSp·8820
~~
~~ mRII.m~
:s
~~
I OPERATION IN
ffig
37
~~~6SU~~~~ON
~
:::E
30
"
~~
TEMPERATURE
DERATING
OF Icc MAX.
x"
~'~
u. ....
oz
Q~
'"
"'u
""
....
tp - PULSE DURATION -
~sec
Figure 2. Maximum Tolerable Peak Current vs. Pulse Duration HDSP·8825 and HDSP-8835
5-36
10
10
"EI
"EI
~
~
:i
:ia:
r--..
a:
a:
=>
"::;"c
7.
=>
:;
a:
=>
""c
:;
ROJA • 20WCiWILEO
""-
=>
::;
~.
::;
x
"
::;
I
ROJA. '" 2000~ClW/lED
I
w
.s
.s
10
20
3D
40
50
60
70 80 8590 100
TA - AMBIENT TEMPERATURE -
10
gc
20
30
40
50
60
70 808590 100
TA - AMBIENT TEMPERATURE -'C
Figure 4. Maximum Allowable D.C. Current per LED vs.
Ambient Temperature. Deratings based on Maximum
Allowable Thermal Resistance, LED Junction-toAmbient on a per LED basis. T JMAX "" 115' C
HDSP-8825/HDSP-8835
Figure 3. Maximum Allowable D.C. Current per LED vs.
Ambient Temperature. Deratings based on Maximum
Allowable Thermal Resistance, LED Junction-to-.
Ambient on a per LED basis. T JMAX = 115' C·
HDSP-8820
200
1.2
HDSP-8S25\.
1.1
I
>-
1ii"
1.0
1l0SP-8S20
OJ
0.9
*'"
0.9
c=>
z
:E
"-'w
>
~
ula:
~
vi /
HDSP-a636
"
i-o""
E
...zI
!I
w
a:
a:
IlDSP-8S20
""0
a:
,},
0.7
/I"
0.6
t'HOSP-S8:l5
I I
I
0.4
0.3
0.2
o
20
40
60
~
c--- r-- c---
140
120
";:a:
100
'"~
60
12
'HOsP-8a2S
0.5
190
I
~
90
HOSP-8820
~
~
40
20
o
80 100 120 140 160 180 200
,..-
160
II
D
-
1"'1I0SP-8825
HDSI'_
0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0
VF - PEAK FORWARD VOLT AGE - V
IpEAK - PEAK CURRENT PER SEGMENT - rnA
Figure 5. Retative Efficiency (Luminous Intensity per Unit Current) vs. Peak Segment Current
Figure 6. Forward Current vs. Forward Voltage
For A Detailed Explanation on the Use of Data Sheet Information, See Application Note 1005.
5-37
operational Considerations
ELECTRICAL
The HDSP-88XX is a 101 element bar graph. array. The
linear array is arranged as ten groups of ten LED elements
plus one additional element. The ten elements of each
group have common cathodes. Like elements in the ten
groups have common anodes. The device is addressed via
22 single-in-line pins extending from the back side of the
display.
This display is designed specifically for strobed (multiplexed) operation. Minimum peak forward current at which
all elements will be illuminated is 15 mA. Display aesthetics are specified at 100 mA, 1/110 DF, peak forward
current. The typical forward voltage values, scaled from
Figure 6 should be used for calculating the current limiting
resistor value and typical power dissipation. Expected
maximum VF values, for the purpose of driver circuit
design and maximum power dissipation, may be calculated using the following VF model:
HDSP-8820
VFMAX = 2.02 V + IPEAK (0.8 !1)
For IpEAK > 40 mA
HDSP-8825
VFMAX = 1.7 V + IPEAK (14!1)
For IpEAK > 40 mA
HDSP-8835
VFMAX = 1.7 V + IPEAK (14 0)
For IPEAK > 40 mA
The time averaged luminous intensity at TA = 25°C may
be calculated using:
Iv Time Avg. = [ I
IF-AVG
]
• 1)IPEAK . IV-SPEC
F-SPEC-AVG
where 1), relative efficiency, may be determined from Figure 5.
The circuit in Figure 7 displays an analog input voltage in
bar graph form with 101 bit resolution. The 74390 dual
decade counter has been configured to count from 0 to
99. The 10 outputs correspond to "ones" and the 20 outputs correspond to "tens". The "one" outputs from the
counter drives the display element anodes through a 7442
1 of 10 BCD decoder. Sprague UDN2585 drivers source
the anodes with 80 mA peaklsegment. The "ten" outputs
from the counter drive the group cathodes through a
74145 BCD decoder. The circuit multiplexes segments 100
to 91 first, then segments 90 to 81, and so on with segments 10 to 1 last. During the time that the output from the
T.r. TL507C AID converter is low the corresponding display elements will be illuminated.
The TL507C is an economical AID converter with 7 bit
resolution. The single output is pulse-width-modulated to
correspond to the analog input voltage magnitude. With
Vcc = 5 V the analog input voltage range is 1.3 V to 3.9 V.
The TL507C output is reset each time the 74390 resets.
Duration of the high output pulse is shorter for larger
analog input voltages. A high output from the TL507C disables the display by forcing the 7442 inputs to an invalid
state. Hence, as the analog input voltage increases more
elements of the bar graph display are illuminated. Display
element zero is DC driven.
The circuit in Figure 8 uses the HDSP-88XX as a 100 bit
position indicator. Two BCD input words define the position of the illuminated element. Display duty factor, 1/100,
is controlled by the ENABLE signal.
MECHANICAL
Suitable. conditions for wave soldering depend on the specific kind of equipment and procedure used. A cool down
period after flow solder and before flux rinse is recommended. For. more information, consult the local
Hewlett-Packard Sales Office or Hewlett-Packard Optoelectronics, Palo Alto, California.
5-38
Vee
1
l
Vee
lKUf
390n
L
NE555
18
Vee
74390
4 lB
10A 3
~2A
; R
~28
D
6 TH
2
I
10. 5
lOe 6
1 lA
OUT 3
TR
F~C.v.GNP
~.05"F
100 7
15 A
0
14 B
1
2
~c
3
,_
f'~'
-=1-
-=
14 ClRz
lOA 13
11
2a" 10
20e 9
3
~
5
l'
.01"F
Ion
9
~
4
5
12 0
6
7
6
-
200
1
18
2
2
17
3
4
3
16
4
15
5
5
14
6
6
7
9
7
13
12
6
11
p.!.!!-
~
~ IS
~ eLfI
,
10
13
1
18
19
117
6
15
74Ls32
20pF 14
~
9
A
14 B
12
C
5
4
3
2
D
i
1
I'471-1F
13
5
21
4
3
25
2
33
17
29
37
820n '1
Vee
VCC1
e,.
C1')
C40
C50
Coo
C70
Ceo
e,.
At
~C'
0l)T4
A
C
Ie.
"---
SKU
l~
IN
AI
: C,.
7
6
,,
0
Vee
11
10
8
9
1
6
13
5
A,
-=
9_
10J , 8
,----2-'A
AN ALOG
IN PUT
A.
34
2 110
23 A4
A,
10 UDN 2585
AIC
'EN
A,
15
35 A7
2
'---C
"----f
A,.
31
A.
7
-=
10Kn
~
27
10
9p!.!
L);
Vee
HDSP-88XX
UDN 2585
1
Tl507C
GNU
3
-=
Figure 7. 101 Element Bar Graph
5-39
Ion
Vee
I
7442
0
15
14
f
B
BCD
DATA
1
:
-
2J
r--r
~
,Ii.
2
3
S
4
$
~C
4_
5.1
1
8
7
12
rs
1
2
17
19
3
3
16
23
4
4 UDN_ 15
5
14
34
6
6
13
35
7
7
12
15
9
8
11
7
1Ip!2-
74lS32
e
2
EflAl!U
18
All
As
A.
As
31 At
,jUDN - 1 t 7
NESS!>
D
6 TH OUT
AJ
AO
~
,~ 9
1
300Kn
A2
1'0
Vee
R Vcc
6 A,
5
3~
D
18
1
2
27 AtO
7
3 KG
1'0
~
2 fR
5
;--
.001 pF
1
9
eNciND
~'
-=-
15
'Ii
A
a
1
14
B
a
BCD
DATA
13
C
12
D
L-
8
$
4
C
D
3
2
1
0
Figure 8. 100 Element Position Indicator
5-40
jI1DSP-88JO(
~
74145
11
37
10
33
9
29 C7(I
7
25
6
21
5
17
4
13
3
Coo
Coo
Ceo
Coo
Coo
Can
2
9 C""
5
1
Ie,.
Ct.
DOUBLE HETEROJUNETION AIGaAs
LOW EURRENT 10-ELEMENT
BAR GRAPH ARRAY
AIGaAs RED HLCP-J100
Features
• LOW POWER CONSUMPTION
Typical Intensity of 1.0 mcd @ 1 mA Drive Current
•
•
•
•
•
DEEP RED COLOR
END-STACKABLE
EXCELLENT ON-OFF CONTRAST
WIDE VIEWING ANGLE
MATCHED LEOs FOR UNIFORM APPEARANCE
Description
The solid state 10-element LED bar graph array utilizes
HP's newly developed double heterojunction (OH) AIGaAs/
GaAs material technology. The material is characterized
by outstanding light output efficiency over a wide range of
drive currents. Use of these bar graph arrays eliminates
the alignment, intensity and color matching problems associated with discrete LEOs. Typical applications are found
in office equipment, instrumentation, industrial controls,
and computer peripherals where portability or battery
backup are important considerations.
package Dimensions
1. DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETERS (INCHES)
2. ALL UNTOLERENCEO DIMENSIONS FOR
REFERENCE DNLV.
r
6, to + 0.25
IQ.24
M-I0.G15)
I
I
1.62 ± 0.38
I - i {O.3OO, MiSl
2.&4+0.26
IO.loo±O.010)
5-41
Absolute Maximum' Ratings
Average Power Dissipation per LED
(TA = 25 0 C)[1) ............................... 37 mW
Peak Forward Current per LED .................. 45 mA
DC Forward Current per LED ................... 15 mA
Operating Temperature Range ......... -20° C to +100° C
Storage Temperature Range ..... '...... -55° C to +100° C
Reverse Voltage per LED .......................... 5 V
Lead Soldering Temperature (1.59 mm (1/16 inch)
below seating plane ................ 260° C for 3 sec.
Noles:
1, For pulsed operation, derate above TA = 87' e at 1.7 mW/' e
per LED.
.
2. See Figure 1 to establish pulsed operating conditions.
3. For De operation, derate above TA = 91'e at 0.8 mA/'e per
LED.
Internal Circuit Diagram
N'
~!b
~
.
:;:d
v
•
f
•
h
",i i
10
Ii
VI
PIN
1
20
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
19
18
17
16
15
to
FUNCTION
ANODE-.
ANODE-b
ANODE-c
AI'.)ODE-d
ANODE-e
ANODE-f
ANODE-g
ANODE-h
ANODE- i
ANODe-!
PIN
g
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
FUNCTION
CA1HODE-/
CATHODE-;
CATHODE-h
CATHODE~9
CATHODE-f
CATHODE-.
CATHODE-d
CATHODE-e
CATHODE-b
CATHODE-.
14
13
12
11
Electrical/Optical Characteristics at TA = 25°C
Parameter
luminous Intensity per LED
(Unit Average)!1)
Peak Wavelength
Dominant Wavelength(2)
Forward Voltage per LED
Reverse Voltage per LED
Symbol Test Conditions
Min.
Typ.
600
1000
5200
pcd
ApEAK
645
nm
Ad
637
nm
IF"1 mADC
IF - 20mA Pk;
1 of 4 Duty Factor
Iv
VF
IF=1 mADC
IF- 20 mA Pk
1 of 4 Duty Factor
VR
IR"100/LA
Max.
Units
1.6
1.a
5
2.2
V
V
Temperature Coefficient VF per LED
AVF/'C
-2.0
mVl'C
Thermal Resistance LEO Junction-to-Pin
R0J-PIN
300
"CIWILEO
Notes:
4. These devices are categorized for luminous intensity with the intensity category designated by a letter code on the side of the
package.
5. The dominant wavelength, Ad, is derived from the elE chromaticity diagram and is that single wavelength v.:hich defines the color of
the device.
5-42
HLCP-J100
8
19~~~
7
S~~rn=i::=j-;;;;;;.;:;:;;;;-d;,
1===
OPERATION IN THIS
REGION REQUIRES
TEMPERATURE DERATING
OF IDC MAX
11~~~~1~0-i~~~~~~~~~
tp - PULSE DURATION - "'
Figure 1. Maximum Allowed Peak Current vs. Pulse Duration
15
..
Ru
E
...2I
LJChV1L~ f..--
"I II
10
Rs... •
w
a:
a:
./
600"ChV1LED
1.2
~\
1.0
I
-
-
>
"2
w
OJ
0.8
w
w
O.S
u:
u.
:::I
""
-
r--
>
C
I
5
~
0.4
w
a:
:Ii
J
0.2
020
30
40
50
SO
70
so
TA - AMBIENT TEMPERATURE _
90
100
10
°c
Figure 2. Maximum Allowed DC Current per LED vs. Ambient
Temperature, Deratlngs Based on Maximum Allowable
Thermal Resistance Values, LED Junctlon-to-Amblent
on a per LED Basis, T JMAX = 1100 C
20
3D
40
PEAK CURRENT PER LED (mAl
Figure 3. Relative Elllclency (Luminous Intensity per Unit
Current) VB. Peak Segment Current
1I
~
w
a:
a:
:::I
"
~
~
Ii?
a:
I
v, -
FORWARD VOLTAGE - V
Figure 4. Forward Current VB. Forward Voltage
. DC CURRENT PER LED ImAI
Figure 5. Relative Luminous Intensity vs. DC Forward Current
For a Detailed Explanation on the Use of Data Sheet Information and Recommended
Soldering Procedures, See Application Note 1005.
5-43
Electrical
These versatile bar graph arrays are composed of ten light
emitting diodes. The light from each LED is optically
stretched to form individual elements. These diodes have
their P-N junctions formed in AIGaAs epitaxial layers grown
on a GaAs substrate.
.
'
These display devices are designated to allow strobed
operation. The typical forward voltage values. scaled from·,
Figure 4. should be used for calculating the current limiting
resistor value and typical power dissipation. Expected maximum VF values. for the purpose of driver circuit design and
maximum power dissipation. may be calculated using the
following VF MAX models.
The time averaged luminous intensity may be'balculated'
using the relative efficiency characteristic shown in Figure
3. The time averaged luminous intensity at TA = 25°C is
, calculated as follows:
[
.
Iv TIME AVG = I
IFAv~ '~
' ('11 PEAK) (Iv SPEC)
FSPECAVG ,
Example: 'For HLCP~J100ciperating at IpEAK = 45 mAo 1 of 3
Duty Factor
'1IPEAK = 0.94 (at IpEAK = 45 mAl
VFMAX = 1.8 V + 'F (20 0). IF S; 20 mA
15 mA]
: Iv TIME AVG= [ ~ (94) 1000 !tcd = 1410 !tcd
V FMAX = 2.0 V + 'F (10 0). IF 2: 20 mA
Refresh rates of 1 KHz or faster provide the most efficient
operation resulting in the maximum possible time averaged
luminous intensity.
For Further Information Concerning Bar Graph Arrays and Suggested Drive Circuits,
, consultHP Applicatlon,Note 1007 Entitled "Bar Graph Array Applications",
.'
;';'\'
'5-44
SINGLE CHIP LED LIGHT BAR
HIGH
EFFICIEN~Y
REQ.iHLMP-T2QQS
YELLOW···HLMP-T300··S
O~~~QE HLMP0S
S
HIGH PERFORMANCE GREENH[
00 SERIES
Features
• FLAT RECTANGULAR LIGHT EMITTING
SURFACE
• CHOICE OF 4 BRIGHT COLORS
• EXCELLENT ON/OFF CONTRAST
• IDEAL AS FLUSH MOUNTED PANEL
INDICATORS
• LONG LIFE: SOLID STATE RELIABILITY
• SOLDER COATED LEADS
Description
Applications
The HLMP-T200/-T300/-T400/-T500 light bars are rectangular light sources designed for a variety of applications
where this shape and a high sterance are desired. These
light bars consist of a rectangular plastic case around an
epoxy encapsulated LED lamp. The encapsulant is tinted to
match the Golor of the emitted light. The flat top surface is
exceptionally uniform i.n light emission and the plastic case
eliminate~ light leakage froin the sides of the device.
• BAR GRAPHS
• FRONT PANEL STATUS INDICATORS
• TELECOMMUNICATIONS INDICATORS
• PUSH BUTTON ILLUMINATION
• PC BOARD IDENTIFIERS
.• BUSINESS MACHINE MESSAGE
ANNUNCIATORS
Package Dimensions
,-
r
3.55
10.140)
t
f
03S
1.65
(0.0651
~~~~R
nn
E
NeE
CATHODE
NOTES:
1. DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILlIMETRES {lNCHESI.
2. TOLERANCES ARE '0.25 mm (,0.010 INCHI
UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.
&.73
~O.OISJ
(0.265)
m
I
----r
.;
--J
5-45
1
20.0
(0.780) MIN.
i
(O~O~~) Tvp.Ji~ i (O'; ';~)
SQ.
I
~
+
NOM.
2.54 NOM.
~IO.l00)
Electrical/Optical Characteristics at TA =25°C
DevIce
Symbol
Description
HLMP-
MIn.
~p.
Iv
Luminous Intensity
High Efficiency Red
T200
3.0
4.8
Orange
T400
3.0
4.8
Yellow
T300
3.0
6.0
Green
T500
3.0
6.0
201/2
>'PEAK
~
TS
C
Included Angle
Between Half
Luminous Intensity
Points
Peak Wavelength
Dominant Wavelength
Speed of Response
capacitance
All
100
High Efficiency Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
635
612
Max.
583
Unlta Test CondIIIons
moo
IF= 20mA
Deg.
I,," 20 inA
See Note 1
nm
Measurement at Peak
nm
See Note 2
565
High Efficiency Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
626
608
585
569
High Efficiency Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
350
350
ns
390
870
High EfficIency Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
"
pF
11
120
'OIW
R6JC
Thermal Resistance
All
Vf
Forward Voltage
HER/Orange
Yellow
Green
VR
Reverse Breakdown Volt.
All
'Iv
Luminous Efficacy
High Efficiency Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
4
8
1.5
1.5
2.2
2.2
2.6
1.6
5.0
2.3
2.6
2.6
VF"'O; f= 1 MHz
Junctlon to Cathode
Lead at Seating Plane
V
IF "'20 mA
V
'R" 100 I4A
145
262
500
59S
IUll'I$ns
-watt
See Note 3
Notes:
1. 0112 is the off-axis angle at which the luminous intensity is half the axial luminous intensity.
2. The dominant wavelength, Ad, is derived from the CIE chromaticity diagram and represents the single wavelength which defines the color of
the device.
3. Radiant intensity,_ 'e, in watts/steradian, may be found from the equation Ie = 'v/~v, where Iv is the luminolis intensity in candelas and ~v is
the luminous efficacy in lumens/watt.
5-46
Characteristics at TA = 25°C
'·'1-·------,--"""--"""-,-..,...,.--..,....,.--,---'------,...-------,
HIGH
£FFIC~ENCY
"EO
0.5
o
750
700
500
Figure 1. Relative Intensity vs. Wavelength.
High Efficiency Red, Orange, Yellow,
and Green Light Bars
90
II
0
0
z'"
WE
10
1.0
ZN
~~
~~.
,,-
-N
:0-'
-,'"
w"
5"
V~
4.0
u
'.0
w
>
.,/
.5
"
3.0
,.,
*~
1.0
W
/..J
2.0
/
1.5
>"
_0
.t
>u
ffi
00
ZW
Ii
0
2.0
1-0
""j
0
o
GRE~±- -
in-
Ii ~
RI'D.
ORANGE
~~~~e
V£llOW
1.2
>
t-
YELLOW
60
40
1.3
;
0
5.0
......V
"
~
~ ~-
1/
0.•
0 .•
0.7
0.6
-
\ GRE1N
f-- l -
II
f
~
'"
10
.\ .'
0.5
15
20
25
30
VF -FORWAROVOLTAGE-V
10
IpEAK -
~
~
~
60
M
m
80
00
PEAK CURRENT PER LED - rnA
Icc - DC CURRENT PER LED - rnA
Figure 2. Forward Current vs. Forward
Voltage Characteristics.
Ip - PULSE DURATION -
Figure 3. Relative Luminous Intensity
vs. DC Forward Current.
Figure 4. Relative Efficiency (Luminous
IntenSity per Unit Current) vs.
LED Peak Current.
jJ.S
Figure 6. Relative Luminous Intensity vs.
Angular Displacement.
Figure 5. Maximum Tolerable Peak Current vs. Pulse
Duration. (I DC MAX as per MAX Ratings).
5-47
Absolute Maximum Ratings at TA = 25°C
High Efficiency Red!
Orange
Yellow
Green
Peak Forward Current
90
60
90
mA
Average Forward Currentl1]
25
20
25
mA
Parameter
Units
DC Current[2j
30
20
30
mA
Power Dissipation [3J
135
85
135
mW
Operating Temperature Range
-40 to +85
-40 to +85
-20 to +85
Storage Temperature Range
-55 to +100
-55 to +100
-55 to +100
·C
Rel/erse Voltage (IR" 100 /LA)
5
V
Transient Forward Currentl4J
(10/Lsec Pulse)
500
mA
Lead Soldering Temperature
{1.6 mm (0,063 In.) below
seating planel
260" C for 3 seconds
Notes:
1. See Figure 5 to establish pulsed operating conditions.
2, For Red, Orange, and Green derate linearly from 50" C at 0,5 mA!" C. For Yellow derate linearly from 50" C at 0,34 mAIo C. ,
3, For Red, Orange, and Green derate power linearly from 25°C B1.1.6 mWi~b. For,yellow derate power linearly from 50°C at 1.1;> mWrC,
4, The transient peak current is the maximum non-recurring peak current that can be applied to the device without damaging the LED die
and wirebond, It is not recommended that the device be operated at peak currents beyond'the peak 'forward current listed in: the
Absolute Maximum Ratings,
'
'.
Electrical
Mech~lni~al
The typical' forward voltage values,: scaled from Figure 2,
should be used for calculating· the current limiting resistor
values and typical, power dissipation. Expected maximum
VF values for the purpose of driver circuit design and .
maximum 'power dissipation may be calcullited using'the
.
following VF models:
These light. bar 'devices may be operated in ambient
temperatures above +50° C without derating when installed
in a PC board configuration that provides a thermal re~
sistance (junction' to ambient) valueless thari625° C/W.
VF = 1.8V + IpEAK (400)
For IpEAK <': 20mA
VF =; 1.6V + IDe (500)
For5 mA~ loe~ 20 mA
optical'
The radiation paiternfor these light bar devices is approximately Lambertian. The luminous sterance may be calculatedusing one of the two following formulas:
L ( d/ 2). = Iv: (Cd) .
v c m . A (m2)
To optimize device optical performance, speCiallydevel. oped plastics are used which restrict the solvents 'that may
be used for cleaning .. It is recommended, that only mixtures of. Freon (F113) and alcohol be used ·for vapor
cleaning processes, with an immersion time in the vapors
of less than two (2) minutes maximum.' Some suggested
vapor cleaning solvents are Freon TE, Genesolv DI-15 or
DE-15, Arklone A or K. A,60°C,(140°F) water. cleaning
process may also be used, which includes. a 'neutralizer
rinse (3% ammonia solution or equivalent), a surfactant
rinse (1% detergent solution or equivalent), a hot water
rinse and a thorough air dry. Room temperature cleaning
may be accomplis~ed with Freon T-E35.orT-P35, Ethanol,
Isopropanol or water with a mild detergent: '
_ 7Tlv(cd)
Lv (footlamberts) - A (ft2)
Size of light emitting area (A)= 3.18 mm x 5.72 mm
.
= 18.19 x 10c6 m 2
,; 195.8x 10-6 ft2'
"i."
5-48
- - _ .._ - - - - _ . _ . _ - - - _ . _ - - - - - ----.-.
-n.~
E~
HEWLETT
PACKARD
PANEL AND
LEGEND MOUNTS FOR
LED LIGHT BARS
HlMP-2598
HlMP-2599
HlMp·2898
HLMP-2899
Features
• FIRMLY MOUNTS LIGHT BARS IN PANELS
• HOLDS LEGENDS FOR FRONT PANEL OR
PC BOARD APPLICATIONS(1)
• ONE PIECE, SNAP-IN ASSEMBLY
• MATTE BLACK BEZEL DESIGN ENHANCES
PANEL APPEARANCE
• FOUR SIZES AVAILABLE
• MAY BE INSTALLED IN A WIDE RANGE OF
PANEL THICKNESSES
• PANEL HOLE EASILY PUNCHED OR MILLED
Description
This series of black plastic bezel mounts is designed to
install Hewlett-Packard Light Bars in instrument panels
ranging in thickness from 1.52 mm (0.060 inch) to 3.18 mm
(0.125 inch). A space has been provided for holding a 0.13
mm (0.005 inch) film legend over the light emitting surface
of the light bar module.
Selection Guide
Panel and Legend
Mount Part No.
HLMP-
Corresponding Light Bar
ModUle Part No.
HLCP- HLMP-
Panel Hole Inslallation
Dimensions(2)
Package
Outline;
2598
9100
2350,2450,2550
7,62 mm 10.300 inch, x 22.86 mm ,0,900 inch,
2599
Al00
2300,2400,2500
7.62 mm 10.300 inch, x 12,70 mm {0.500 inch,
ia::l
CI
A
2898
0100
0100
2600,2700,2800
2655,2755,2855
2950,2965,2980
12.70 mm '0.500 inch, x 12.70 mm ,0.500 inch,
[]
C
CI
0
B
El00
2899
2620,2720,2820
2635,2735,2835
G100 2670,2770,2870
Hloo 2685,2785,2885
Floo
12.70 mm 10.500 inch, x 22.86 mm ,0.900 inch'
Notes:
1. Application Note 1012 addresses legend fabrication options.
2. Allowed hole tolerance: +0.00 mm, -0.13 mm (+0.000 inch, -0.005 inch). Permitted radius: 1.60 mm (0.063 inch).
5-49
Package Dimensions
tI~:~:21
J - - 16.86 ---l
I
(0.7421
l_t..---I~li
1.:""",;;;;;;;;='"
j
illl
TOPB
SIDEA,B
I - 23.88. 0.25 -----l
I
10.94(h 0.0101
I
Tope
I~I
TOP D
NOTES, ,. DIMENSIONS IN MllllMETRES {INCHES}
2. I)r-rrOlERANCED DIMENSIONS ARE FOR
o
I1I
11----1
0.16
(O.030r-
6.22. 0.25
1(0.245. 0.0101
o
...
SIDEC,D
REFEAENCEONLV.
Mounting Instructions
1. Mill 131 or punch a hole in the panel. Deburr. but do not
chamfer. the edges of the hole.
Installation Sketches
2. Place the front of the mount against a solid. fiat surface.
A film legend with outside dimension~ equal to the outside dimensions of the light bar may be placed in the
mount or on the light bar light emitting surface.
Press the light bar into the mount until the tabs snap
over the back of the light barl41. When inserting' the
HLMP-2898. align the notched sides of the light bar
with the mount sides which do not have the tabs).
(See Figure 1)
3. Applying even pressure to the top of the mount. press the
entire assembly into the hole from the front of the paneil5 J.
(See Figure 2)
NOTE: For thinner panels. the mount may be pressed into
the panel first. then the light bar may be pressed into the
mount from the back side of the panel.
Notes:
3. A 3.18 mm (0.125 inch) diameter mill may be used.
4. Repetitve insertion of the light bar into mount may cause
damage to the mount.
5. Repetitive insertion of the mount into the panel will degrade the
retention force of the mount.
Figure 1. Installation of a Light Bar Into a Panel Mount
Suggested Punch Sources
Hole punches may be ordered from one of the following
sources:
Danly Machine Corporation
Punchrite Division
15400 Brookpark Road
Cleveland. OH 44135
(216) 267-1444
Ring Division
The Producto Machine Company
Jamestown. NY 14701
(800) 828-2216
Porter Precision Products Company
12522 Lakeland Road
Santa Fe Springs. CA 90670
(213) 946-1531
Figure 2: Installation of the Light Bar/Panel Mount Assembly into
a Front Panel
Di-Acro Division
Houdaille Industries
800 Jefferson Street
Lake City. MN 55041
(612) 345-4571
5-50
LIGHT BAR LEGENDS
STANDARD OPTIONS FC>R:
HLCP-A100ZHLMP-2300/-24QO/-25QO SE~IES
HLCP-C100/HLMP-26SS/-27S5/-28SS S~~IES
HLCP-H100/HLMP-2685/-278S/-2885 SERIES
Features
• FACTORY INSTALLATION SAVES TIME IN
MANUFACTURING, PURCHASING AND
STOCKING
.qta.
..
i~.,r'''~:
• LIGHT OR DARK FIELD FORMAT (DARK FIELD
STANDARD)
• HIGH STRENGTH ADHESIVE BACKING
o CUSTOM LEGENDS AVAILABLE
Description
option Guide
Light bar legends are available with factory installation on
all light bars, using either standard or custom legends.
Options LOO through L06 address our standard legend
formats and can be specified for various size light bars in
accordance with the Device/Option Selection Matrix.
Option
Legend Title
LOO
L01
L02
L03
L04
L05
L06
ON
OFF
READY
HIGH
LOW
RESET
STOP
Ordering Information
To order light bar legends, include the appropriate option
code along with the device catalog number. Example: to
order the HLMP-2655 with the "OFF" legend, order as follows: HLMP-2655 Option L01. Minimum order quantities
vary by part number.
For custom legends, please contact your local HewlettPackard sales office or franchised Hewlett-Packard
distributor.
Ratings and Characteristics
The absolute maximum ratings, mechanical dimensions and
electrical characteristics for light bars with legends are the
same as for the standard catalog devices. Refer to the basic
data sheet for the specified values. For use in applications
involving high humidity conditions, please contact your
Hewlett-Packard representative.
As with the standard light bar devices, the radiation pattern is
approximately Lambertion. The luminous sterance for a
given device is the same as for the standard light bar
products. To calculate this value, refer to the "Optical"
section of the LED Light Bars data sheet in this catalog.
5-51
Dimensional specifications for Legends
HLMP-2300 Series
HLMP-2655 Series
NOTE: A~~ OIMENSIONS IN MILl.IMETfles IINCHES)'
HLMP-2685 Series
Device/Option Selection Matrix
Applicable Light Bar Series
Option
Legend
HLMP-2300/·2400/2500
HLCP'A100
HLMP-2655/·2755/-2855
HLCP·C100
HLMP·2685/-2785/-2885
HLCP·H100
LOO
L01
L02
L03
LQ4
L05
LOS
ON
OFF
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
READY
HIGH
LOW>
RESET
STOP
X
X
X
5-52
X
INTENSITY SELECTED LIGHT BARS
Features
Luminous intensity selection is available for high efficiency
red, yellow, and high performance green.
• INTENSITY SELECTION IMPROVES
UNIFORMITY OF LIGHT OUTPUT FROM
UNIT TO UNIT. AVAILABLE IN HIGH
EFFICIENCY RED, YELLOW, AND HIGH
PERFORMANCE GREEN.
• TWO CATEGORY SELECTION SIMPLIFIES
INVENTORY CONTROL AND ASSEMBLY.
To ensure our customers a steady supply of product, HP
must offer selected units from the center of our production
distribution. If our production distribution shifts, we will
need to change the intensity range of the selected units our
customers receive. Typically, an intensity may have to be
changed once every 1 to 3 years.
Current intensity selection information is available through a
category reference chart which is available through your
local field sales engineer or local franchised distributor.
Description
Light bars are now available from Hewlett-Packard which
are selected from two adjacent intensity categories. These
select light bars are basic catalog devices which are presorted for luminous intensity then selected from two
predetermined adjacent categories and assigned to one
convenient part number.
Example: Two luminous intensity categories are selected
from the basic catalog HLMP-2300 production distribution
and assigned to the part number HLMP-2300 option S02.
Absolute Maximum Ratings
and Electrical/Optical
Characteristics
The absolute maximum ratings, mechanical dimensions,
and electrical/optical characteristics are identical to the
basic catalog device.
Selected light bars are ideal for applications which require
two or more light bars per panel.
Device Selection Guide
The following table summarizes which basic catalog devices are available with category selection.
Package
4 Pin In-Line
8 Pin In-Une
8 Pin DIP
Dual Arrangement
16 Pin DIP
Quad Arrangement
16 Pin DIP
Dual Bar Arrangement
8 Pin DIP
Square Arrangement
16 Pin DIP
Dual Square Arangement
16 Pin DIP
Single Bar Arangement
Yellow
AIGaAs Red
HLCP-A 100 OPT 502
HLCP-Bl00 OPT S02
HLCP·C 100 OPT S02
High Efliciency Red
HLMP-2300 OPT 502
HLMP-2350 OPT S02
HLMp·2600 OPT 502
HLMP-2400 OPT 502
HLMP·2450 OPT S02
HLMP-2700 OPT S02
Green
HLMP-2500 OPT S02
HLMP-2550 OPT S02
HLMP-2800 OPT S02
HLCp·G100 OPT S02
HLMp·2620 OPT S02
HLMP-2720 OPT S02
HLMP-2820 OPT 502
HLCp·F100 OPT S02
HLMp·2635 OPT S02
HLMp·2735 OPT S02
HLMP·2835 OPT S02
HLCP-Dl00 OPT 502
HLMp·2655 OPT S02
HLMp·2755 OPT 502
HLMp·2855 OPT S02
HLCP-G100 OPT S02
HLMP-2670 OPT S02
HLMP-2770 OPT 302
HLMP·2870 OPT 802
HLCP-Hl00 OPT 502
HLMP-26B5 OPT 302
HLMp·2785 OPT 302
HLMP·2885 OPT 302
Note:Option 502 designates a two intensity category selection. Option S02s
of different part numbers may not have the same apparent brightness. Contact your HP Field Sales Office for design assistance.
5-53
/
.
"
...
'-
',
.'~'
,---
""
'
··SoUdState·Lantps
•
•
•
•
•
•
Optional Leadform/Packaging
A1GaAs Lamps .
Special Application Lamps
Generai Purpose Lamps
Emitters
Hermetic Lamps
Solid State Lamps . . . .
From General to SpecialPurpose Lamps, H~wlett~
Packard continues to grow its LED lamp product .
offering. This year, the broad line of lamp products is
expanding in aspects of performance, packaging, and
options.
D~uble Heterojunction Aluminum.Gallium Arsenide
(AlGaAs) Technology is born and bred to produce high
brightness, low current lamps in subminiature, T-I, and
T-l 3/4 families. In addition, a special T-I 3/4 version
offers 1 Candela (1000 mcd) performance.
New packages are always an area of growth and
importance to designers and Hewlett~Packard. That's
why HP has introduced a family of 2 mmx 5 mm
lamps, 940 nm emitter lamps,and now offers a
T-l 3/4 bi-colorlamp. In addition,HP offers a new T-2
lamp designed as an alternative to incandescent
backlighting.
Hermetic Lamps
In addition to Hewlett-Packard commercial solid state
lamps, Hewlett.,.Packard offers a complete:line of
hermetically sealed solid state lamps which are listed on
·MIL-S-19500 Qualified Parts List. All four colors are
supplied in the basic lamp configuration, as well as the
following two panelmo'unt assembly optitlns: Option
#001 represents an anodized lIluminum sleeve and .
Option #002 represents a conductive composite sleeve
for improved EMIIRFI shielding capabilities.
Hermetic ultra bright iamps ar~ provided with JAN
and J ANTX equivalent testing, two panel mount
options, and in three colors. These devices were
specially designed to meet the sunlight viewability
requirements of the military market.
HP has responded to requests for options and variations
of existing subminiature, T-I, and T-l 3/4 lamps in the
past and this year is no exception. Subminiature lamp
offerings grow with the addition of high brightness
lamps, standard bends, and tape and reel options.
6-2
Diffused (Direct View) Lamps
Description
Device
. package Outline Drawing
[g~
(
C3:~
Part No.
HlMP-3000
Color(2)
Package
Red
(640 nm)
T'13/4
lens
Tinted
Diffused
HlMP-3001
HlMP-3002
Thin
leadframe
HlMP-3003
HlMP-3300
HlMP-3301
High
Efficiency
Red
(626 nm)
T-13/4
HlMP-3762
r---;::-
HlMP-D400 Orange
(608 nm)
HlMP-D401
HlMP-3400
Yellow
(585 nm)
HlMP-3401
HLMP-3862
,..- " \
01
0
\
~_/.
/
HLMP-3502
Green
(569 nm)
HLMP-3507
HLMP-3962
HLMP-3200
HLMP-3350
HLMP-3351
~~
HLMP-3450
"...:.._/.
High
Efficiency
Red
(626 nm)
Yellow
(585 nm)
HLMP-3451
HlMP-3553
·0' 0')
"
T-13/4
Low Profile
HLMP-3201
,
8
Red
(640 nm)
,
Green
(569 nm)
HLMP-3554
6-3
Tinted
Diffused
Typical
luminous
Intensity
2.0 mcd
@20mA
4.0 mcd
@20mA
2.0 mcd
@20mA
4.0 mcd
@20mA
3.5 mcd
@10mA
7.0 mcd
@10mA
15.0 mcd
@10mA
3.5 mcd
@10mA
7.0 mcd .
@10mA
4.0 mcd
@10mA
8.0 mcd
@10mA
12.0 mcd
@10mA
2.4.mcd
@10mA
5.2 mcd
@10mA
11.0 mcd
@10mA
2.0 mcd
@20mA
4.0 mcd
@20mA
3.5 mcd
@10mA
9.0 mcd
@.10 mA
4:0 mcd
@10mA
10.0 mcd
@10mA
3.2 mcd
@10mA
10.0 mcd
@10mA
291/2(1)
Typical
Forward
Voltage
Page.
No.
75°
1.6 V
@20mA
6-69
65°
2.2 V
@10mA
6-71
2.2 V
@10mA
75°
2.2 V
@10mA
75°
2.3 V
@10mA
60°
1.6 V
@20mA
50°
2.2 V
@10mA
2.2 V
@10mA
2.3 V
@10mA
6-75
Diffused (Direct View) Lamps (cont.)
Device
Package Outline Drawing
b)
DLt
Description
Part No.
HLMP-1000
Color(2(
Red
(640 nm)
Package
T-1
Lens
Tinted
Diffused
HLMP-1002
HLMP-1080
HLMP-1300
HLMP-1301
Untinted
Diffused
Tinted
Diffused
High
Efficiency
Red
(626 nm)
HLMP-1302
HLMP-1385
e
' .... _"
HLMP-K400 Orange
(608 nm)
HLMP-K401
HLMP-K402
HLMP-1400
Yellow
(585 nm)
HLMP-1401
HLMP-1402
HLMP'1485
HLMP-1503 Green
(569 nm)
HLMP-1523
HLMP-1585
(
HLMP-1200
)Y
HLMP-1201
HLMP-1350
HLMP-1450
e
'--
HLMP-1550
Red
(640 nm)
T-1
Low Profile
High
Efficiency
Red
(626 nm)
Yellow
(585 nm)
Green
(569 nm)
Untinted
Non-Diffused
Tinted
Diffused
Typical
Luminous
Intensity
1.0 mcd
@20mA
2.5 mcd
@20mA
1.5 mcd
@20mA
2.0 mcd
@10mA
2.5 mcd
@10mA
4.0 mcd
@10mA
10.0 mcd
@10mA
2.0 mcd
@10mA
2.5 mcd
@10mA
4.0 mcd
@10mA
2.0 mcd
@10mA
3.0 mcd
@10mA
4.0 mcd
@10mA
10.0 mcd
@10mA
2.0 mcd
@10mA
4.0 mcd
@10mA
6.0 mcd
@10mA
1.0 mcd
@20mA
2.5 mcd
@20mA
2.0 mcd
@10mA
2811211J
60°
60°
Typical
Forward
Voltage
1.6 V
@20rnA
2.2V
@10mA
6-58
6-60
2.2 V
@10mA
2.2 V
@10mA
2.3 V
@10mA
. 1200
, 1.6 V
@20mA
540
2.2 V
@10mA
2.2 V
@10mA
2.3 V
@10mA
6-4
Page
No.
6-58
.
_._----_._--
Diffused (Direct View) Lamps (cont.)
Device
Package Outline Drawing
Color[2)
HLMP-6000 Red
(640 nm)
=~
=8=
Part No.
~
~plcal
Description
Package
Subminiature
Lens
Luminous
Intensity
Tinted
Diffused
1.2 mcd
@10mA
HLMP-6001
3.2 mcd
@10mA
HLMP-6300 High
Efficiency
Red
(626 nm)
3.0 mcd
@lOmA
20112[1)
90°C
6-38
HLMP-6305 High
Efficiency
Red
Untinted
Non-Diffused
12 mcd
@10mA
70°
2.2 V
@10mA
6-32
HLMP-Q400 Orange
(608 nm)
Tinted
Diffused
3.0 mcd
@10mA
90°
2.2V
@10mA
6-38
2.2V
@10mA
HLMP-6405
Untinted
Non-Diffused
12 mcd
@10mA
70°
2.2 V
@lOmA
6-32
HLMP-6500 Green
(569 nm)
Tinted
Diffused
3.0 mcd
@10mA
90°
2.2V
@10A
6-38
-;- Untinted
12 mcd
@lOmA
70°
2.3 V
@10mA
6-32
3 Tinted
4 Diffused
5
6
8
1.2 mcd
@10mA
90°
1.6 V
@10mA
6-43
3
4
5
6
8
3.0 mcd
@10mA
HLMP-6505
-B-a
1.6 V
@lOmA
Page
No.
2.2V
@10mA
HLMP-6400 Yellow
(585 nm)
g:
~
Typical
Forward
Iotltage
Non-Diffused
HLMP-6203 Red
HLMP-6204 (640 nm)
HLMP-6205
HLMP-6206
HLMP-6208
HLMP-6653
HLMP-6654
HLMP-6655
HLMP-6656
HLMP-6658
High
Efficiency
Red
(626 nm)
HLMP-6753 Yellow
HLMP-6754 (585 nm)
HLMP-6755
HLMP-6756
HLMP-6758
HLMP-6853 Green
HLMP-6854 (569 nm)
HLMP-6855
HLMP-6856
HLMP-6858
-
-3
4
5
6
8
-3
4
5
6
8
•Array Length
- - - - - - - - _ . -_._--------_ .. __ ..... _...
6-5
2.2 V
@10mA
2.2V
@10mA
2.3 V
@10mA
---.---
2mm Flat Top Lamps
Device
. Package Outline Drawing
ft
~
~
DaacrlpUon
Part No;"
Colorl2]
HLMP-1800 High
Efficiency
HLMP-I801 Red
(626 nm)
Package
2rTim Flat
Top, Round
Emitting
Surface
Lens
. Tinted
Diffused
HLMP-1819 Yellow
(585 nm)
HLMP-1820
HLMP-I840 Green
(569 nm)
HLMP-I841
@
r:-
tn~
D
@
HLMP-L250 High
Efficiency
HLMP-L251 Red
(626 nm)
HLMP-L350 Yellow
(585 nm)
HLMP-L351
2mm Flat
Top, Square
Emitting
Surface
Tinted
Diffused
HLMP-L550 Green
(569 nm)
HLMP-L551
Typical
Luminous
Intensliy
1.8 mcd
@10mA
2.9 mcd
@10mA
1.51)1cd
@10mA
2.5 mcd
@10mA
2.0 mcd
, @10mA
3.0 mcd
@10mA
I.Bmcd
@10mA
·2.9 mcd
@10mA
1.5 mcd
@10mA
2.5 mcd
@10mA
2.0 mcd
@10mA
3.0 mcd
@10mA
281/2\1]
: 140°
Typical
Forward
Voltage
2.2 V
@10mA
Page
No.
6-44
2.2 V
@10mA
2.3 V
@10mA
140°
2.2 V
@10mA
6-50
2.2 V
@10mA
2.3 V
@10mA
4mm FlatTop Lamps
Daacrlpllon
Davlca
Packaga Outllna Drawing
D
Colorl2]
Part No.
HLMP-M200 High
Efficiency
HLMP-M201 Red
(626 nm)
HLMP-M250
Packaga
4mm Flat
Top
Lans
Tinted
Diffused
Tinted
Non-Diffused
HLMP-M251
8
\
I
...•..
HLMP-M300 Yellow
(585 nm)
HLMP-M301
Tinted
Diffused
HLMP-M350
Tinted
Non-Diffused
HLMP-M351
HLMP-M500 Green
(569 nm)
HLMP-M501
Tinted
Diffused
HLMP-M550
Tinted
Non-Diffused
HLMP-M551
6-6
Typical
luminous
Intanslty
5.0 mcd
@20mA
7.0 mcd
@20mA
5.0 mcd
@10rTiA
7.0 mcd
@10mA
5.0 mcd
@20mA
7.0 mcd
@20mA
5.0 mcd
@10mA
7.0 mcd
@10mA
7.0 mcd
@20mA
10.0 mcd
@20mA
10.0 mcd
@10mA
16.0 mcd
@10mA
28112\1]
150°
Typical
Forward
Voltaga
2.2 V
@10mA
2.2 V
@10mA
2.3 V
@10mA
Paga
No.
6-54
--------------------------
High Intensity Lamps
Description
Device
Package Outline Drawing
Part No.
HLMp·3050
Color[2[
Red
(640 nm)
HLMp·3315 High
Efficiency
HLMp·3316 Red
(626 nm)
f""""\
r---
Package
Lens
Tinted
Non·Diffused
T·13/4
HLMp·3415 Yellow
(585 nm)
HLMp·3416
HLMp·3517 Green
(569 nm)
HLMp·3519
8)
o oj
')..,..,.-"'/
HLMp·3365
W
~~
"
High
Efficiency
HLMp·3366 Red
(626 nm)
Low Profile
HLMp·3465 Yellow
(585 nm)
HLMp·3466
HLMp·3567 Green
(569 nm)
HLMp·3568
8
I
"~--<
d
n
HLMp·l071
Red
(640 nm)
HLMp·1320 High
Efficiency
HLMp·1321 Red
(626 nm)
T·l
Untinted
Non·Diffused
Tinted
Non·Diffused
Untinted
Non·Diffused
Tinted
Non·Diffused
Untinted
Non·Diffused
Tinted
Diffused
HLMp·1420 Yellow
(585 nm)
HLMp·1421
HLMp·1520 Green
(569 nm)
HLMp·1521
8
Tinted
Non·Diffused
T·13/4
'".;"
Typical
Luminous
Intensity .
2.5 mcd
@20mA
18.0 mcd
@10mA
30.0 mcd
@10mA
18.0 mcd
@10mA
30.0 mcd
@10mA
10.0 mcd
@10mA
25.0 mcd
@10mA
10.0 mcd
@10mA
18.0 mcd
@10mA
12.0 mcd
@10mA
18.0 mcd
@10mA
7.0 mcd
@10mA
15.0 mcd
@10 rnA'
2.0 mcd
@20mA
12.0 mcd
@.10mA
28112[1)
24°
35°
Typical
Forward
Voltage
1.6 V
@20mA
2.2 V
@10mA
Pags
No.
5-69
5-81
2.2 V
@10mA
24°
2.3 V
@10mA
45°
2.2 V
@10mA
5-75
2.2 V
@10mA
40'
2.3 V
:@10mA
45'
1.6 V
@20mA
2.2 V
@10mA
45'
12.0 mcd
@10mA
2.2 V
@10mA
12.0 mcd
@10mA
2.3V
@10mA
Typical
Luminous
Intensity
2.5 mcd
@20mA
5.0 mcd
@20mA
2.5 mcd
@20mA
5.0 mcd
@20mA
2.5 mcd
@20mA
5.0 mcd
@20mA
Typical
Forward
Voltage
2.2 V
@20mA
5-58
5-65
Rectangular Lamps
Description
Devlcs
Package Outline Drawing
c=:J
~
~ ~
Color[2)
Part No.
HLMP·0300 High
Efficiency
HLMp·0301 Red
(626 nm)
Package
Rectangular
HLMp·0400 Yellow
(585 nm)
HLMp·0401
HLMp·0503 Green
(569 nm)
HLMp·0504
6-7
Lens
Tinted
Diffused
28112[1]
100'
2.2 V
@20mA
2.3 V
@20mA
Page
No.
5-95
2 mm x 5 mm Rectangular Lamps
Device
Package Outline Drawing
r---
-
~
Part No.
Colorl2)
HLMP-S200 High
Efficiency
Red
HLMP,S201 (626 nm)
Description
Package
2mmx5mm
Rectangular
Lens
Typical
Luminous
Intensity .
Tinted
Diffused
3.5 mcd .
@20mA
20112111
110'
Typical
Forward
Voltage
2.2 V
@20mA
Page
No.
6-91
4.8 mcd
@20mA
HLMP-S300 Yellow
(585 nm)
2.1 mcd
@20mA
HLMP-S301
3.5 mcd
@20mA
HLMP-S400 Orange
(608 nm)
3.5 mcd
@20mA
HLMP-S401
4.8. mcd
@20mA
HLMP-S500 Green
(569 nm)
4.0 mcd
@20mA
HLMP,S501
5.8 mcd
@20mA
2.2 V
@20mA
2.2 V
@20mA
2.3 V
@20mA
AIGaAs Lamps
Device
Package Outline Drawing
r ....
TI
Part No.
Colorl21
HLMP'D101 AlGaAs
Red
(637 nm)
Description
Package
T-13/4
HLMP-D105
.~
G
,
Lens
Typical
Luminous
Intensity
Tinted
Diffused
70 mcd
@20mA
65'
240 mcd
@20mA
24'
45 mcd
@20mA
60'
65 mcd
@20mA
45'
45 mcd
@20mA
70'
201/21 11
Maximum
Forward
Voltage
2.2 V
@20rriA
Page
No.
6-20
o oj
I.
"-"
f""',
HLMP-K101
T-1
r~?
2.2 V
@20mA
n
HLMP-K105
.
e
'- ... "
=c:OP
HLMP-Q101
Subminiature
~~
6-8
2.2 V
@20mA
- - - .._-_.-_._-----
-----------
Low Current AIGaAs Lamps
Device
Packaga Outllna Drawing
r-..
Part No.
HLMP·D1~O
Description
Packaga
Color[2[
T·13/4
AIGaAs
Red
(637 nm)
Lans
Typical
Luminous
Intanslty
Tinted
Diffused
3.0 mcd
@1mA
650
10 mcd
@1mA
24 0
2.0 mcd
@1mA
60 0
3.0 mcd
@1mA
450
1.8 mcd
@1mA
70 0
Maximum
Forward
20112[1]
.
~ltaga
3.0 V
@20mA
Paga
No.
6-24
~
HLMp·D155
D D)
(;)
,
.
I.
~-....:
,
r\
HLMp·K150
T·1
3.0V
@20mA
r~~
r.rr
.
,
HLMp·K155
e
..... _,
~
HLMp·Q150
Subminiature
3.0V
@20mA
~~
Very High Intensity AIGaAs Lamps
Davlca
Packaga Outllna Drawing
g
~~
.. ".
8»
,
Part No.
Color
HLMp·4100 AIGaAs
Red
(637 nm)
Dascrlptlon
Package
.. T·13/4
HLMp·4101
Lens
Typical
Luminous
Intensity
Untinted
Non·Diffused
750 mcd
@20mA
1000 mcd
@20mA
~-./
6-9
Typical
Forward
20112
~Itaga
80
1.8 V
@20mA
Page
No•
6-28
Low Current Lamps
Device
Description
Color(2]
Part No.'
HlMP-4700 High
Efficiency
Red
(626 nm)
Package Outline Drawing
~
~
~
",-"
,
0
50°
HlMP-4719 Yellow
(585 nm)
1.8 mcd
@2mA
1.9 V
@?mA
HlMP-4740 Green
(569 nm)
1.8 mcd
@2mA
1.8 V
@2mA
Page
No.
6-102
I.
HlMP-1700 High
Efficiency
Red
(626 nm)
~~
,
28112(1]
\
~
,
lens
Tinted
Diffused
Typical
Forward
Voltage
1.8 V
@2ri1A
OJ
~-.:/.
,
Package
T-13/4
' Typical
, luminous
' Intensity
2:0mcd
@2mA
e
T-1
Tinted
Diffused
1.8 mcd
@2mA
500
'1.8 V
@2'mA
HlMP-1719 Yellow
(1j85 nm)
1.6 mcd
@2mA
1.9V
@2mA
HlMP-1790 Green
(569 nm)
1.6 mcd
@,2mA
"1.8 V
@2mA
'_:..'
=~
==B=~
"
H
~
~
,
"
HlMP-7000 High
Efficiency
Red
(626 nm)
HlMP-7019 Yellow
(585 nm)
HlMp:7Q40 Green
(569nm)
HlMP-1740 High
Efficiency
Red
, ;,
, (626 nrn)
Subminiature
2 mm Flat
Top, Round
,Emitting
Surface
Tinted
Diffused
0.8 mcd
@2mA
Tinted
Diffused
0.6 mcd
@2mA
0.6 mcd
@2mA
0.5 mcd
@2mA
90°
140°
1.8 V
@2mA
1.9 V
@2mA
1.8 V
@2mA
1.8 V
@2mA
,
HlMP-1760 Yellow
(585 nm)
0.4 mcd
@2mA
@}
6-10
1.9V
@2mA
I '
6-44
Ultrabright Lamps
Descrlpllon
Device
Package Outline Drawing
g
~
Colorl2J
Part No.
HLMP-3750 High
Efficiency
Red
(626 nm)
Package
T-13/4
Lens
Untinted
Non-Diffused
Typical
Luminous
Intensity
125 mcd
@20mA
28112[1 [
24°
Typical
Forward
Voltage
2.2 V
@20mA
HLMP-3850 Yellow
(585 nm)
140 mcd
@20mA
2.2V
@20mA
HLMP-3950 Green
(569 nm)
120 mcd
@20mA
2.3 V
@20mA
~.
e
[[J] [[J]l
~
.
---'
I
~~
e
HLMP-3390 High
Efficiency
Red
(626 nm)
T-13/4
Low Profile
Untinted
Non-Diffused
55 mcd
@20mA
32°
2.2V
@20mA
HLMP-3490 Yellow
(585 nm)
2.2V
@20mA
HLMP-3590 Green
(569 nm)
·2.3 V
@20mA
IIIDIIIDj
~_-
....
iij
0;
.,....
cr:
cr:
:>
iij
"iil
0.5
w
>
~
cr:
~
~
,
cr:
~
300
2BO
260
240
220
200
lBO
160
140
120
100
BO
60
40
20
o
o
600
II
Ii
=It
1
.1
II
I
0,5
WAVELENGTH - nm
1.4
ffi:i
~~
1.2
5~
1.0
"0
:ow
:>N
.... ::;
0"
w:O
Ncr:
L
O.B
::;0
,,2
0.4
0
2
0.2
V'
v
>-
V
V
00
1.0
I
~ct
wE
(30
;;:N
2.5
3.0
3.5
.......
O.B
..... ~
tt!;;
wO
>w
0.6
...."
0.4
~~
/.
0.6
,,cr:
2.0
1.2
0;
",N
1.5
FORWARD VOLTAGE - V
Figure 2. Forward Current vs. Forward Voltage.
1.6
....>-
1.0
VF -
Figure 1. Relative Intensity vs. WaveleMgth.
I .....
f
L.
w:o
cr:cr:
,0
/
~~
0.2
10
15
20
25
05
30
10
I pEAK
I DC - DC FORWARD CURRENT - rnA
-
20
50
100
200 300
PEAK FORWARD CURRENT - rnA
Figure 4. Relative Efficiency v••
Peak Forward Current.
Figure 3. Relative Luminous Intensity vs.
DC Forward Current. .
40
35
"
E
....
iij
cr:
cr:
:>
30
1\
25
"
20 r- I-
~
15 r-
0
cr:
cr:
~
,
10
~
00
R(JJA = 459 z CIW ....
\
\
X, \
IIII
r\\
-R(" i sri v>< ~\
Rt,,!, 'Bref~
/'
20
40
60
BO
100
tp - PULSE DURATION -
TA - AMBIENT TEMPERATURE _ °C
Figure 5. Maximum Forward DC Current vs.
Ambient Temperature.
Derating Based on T J MAX ~ 1100 C.
jJS
Figure 6. Maximum Tolerable Peak Current vs.
Peak Duration (lpEAK MAX Determined
from Temperature Derated IDe MAX).
6-22
--------
---.---.~-~---------------
-----------
90·i---l--+----!--'--:':'E
90·i---l---+--I-I-f.'
Figure 7. Relative Luminous Intensity vs.
Angular Displacement. HLMP-D101.
Figure 8. Relative Luminous Intensity vs.
Angular Displacement. HLMP-K101.
BO'
90·1---+----+----+----=t::=~I-',10·,-2J,0~·,130"",140""'~50:::':::!60=='' '7' ' 0' ' SO='' '90=·.J,OO'
Figure 9. Relative Luminous Intensity vs.
Angular Displacement. HLMP-D105 ..
Figure 10. Relative Luminous Intensity vs.
Angular Displacement. HLMP-K105.
Figure 11. Relative Luminous Intensity vs. Angular Displacement
for Subminiature Lamp
6-23
rh~
~~
DOUBLE HETEROJUNCTION AIOaAs
lOW CURRENT RED LED LAMPS
HEWLETT
T-1 3/4 (Smm) HLMP-01S0/0155
T-1 (3mm) HLMP-K150/K155
SUBMINIATURE HLMP-Q150
PACKARD
Features
• MINIMUM LUMINOUS INTENSITY
SPECIFIED AT 1.mA
• HIGH LIGHT OUTPUT AT LOW CURRENTS
• WIDE VIEWING ANGLE
• OUTSTANDING MATERIAL EFFICIENCY
• LOW POWER/LOW FORWARD VOLTAGE
• CMOS/MOS COMPATIBLE
• TTL COMPATIBLE
• DEEP RED COLOR
Applications
Description
• LOW POWER CIRCUITS
• BATTERY POWERED EQUIPMENT
These solid state LED lamps utilize newly developed double
heterojunction (DH) AIGaAs/GaAs material technology.
This LED material has outstanding light output efficiency
at very low drive currents. The color is deep red at the
dominant wavelength of 637 nanometres. These lamps are
ideally suited for use in applications where high light
output is required with minimum power input.
• TELECOMMUNICATION INDICATORS
package Dimensions
5.""~
4.~ (0.1801
T
==¥'21
9.19 tQ.3ti2)
T
1
12.44 (.490)
1f.'6ii'
(.46QI
+-
Q&l! I.Q&W
0,64 (0.0251
23.01.90)
0-,45 il).Ola)
SQUARE NOMIN.Al.
I
MIN.
1.271.000.
NOM.
j
t
1.21 10.0(0)
NOM,
CATHOOE
~~~
nlnl !L!.J:?lli
/
~'~
"t/
A
NOTES,
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETRES tlNCHES).
2. AN EPOXY MINISCUS MAY EXTEND ABOUT
I mm (0.040"1 DOWN THE LEADS.
--.---1-,
CATHODE " -
254 (.100} NOM.
CATHODE
B
I..-
f
--!
5.6 (.220j
2.54(.1001
NOM.
~
-;
(Continu~d
6-24
on next page.)
package Dimensions
1--=---,-1 r
I II
17
MI to.020) NOM.
1.111 (M75) MAX,
::::;.--T9.s9 ~ 0.2010.0081 REF.
/
... ---
~
I
~
~.'4100451
r---If---'-I
~=
t===
T
CATHODE
1£ ~
0.1& (M30) MAX.
1.78(0,070)
ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETRES (lNCHESI.
o
Axial Luminous Intensity and Viewing Angle @ 25°C
Part Number
HLMp·
Package
Description
Iv (mcd) @ 1 mA DC
Min.
'tYP·
2111/. Note 1.
Degrees
Package
Outline
A
1.2
3
65
5
10
24
B
1.2
2
60
C
D150
T-' % Red Tinted Diffused
0155
T-1 % Red Untinted, Non-diffused
K150
T-1 Red Tinted Diffused
K155
T-1 Red Untinted Non-diffused
2
3
45
C
Q150
Subminiature Red Tinted Diffused
1
1.8
70
0
Note:
1. BY, is the off axis angle from lamp centerline where the luminous intensity is Y, the on-axis value.
Absolute Maximum Ratings at TA =25°C
Peak Forward Current!1] ....................... 300 mA
Average Forward Current .............•........ 20 mA
DC Current!2] ................................. 30 mA
Power Dissipation ............................. 87 mW
Reverse Voltage (IR =100I'A) .........•............. 5 V
Transient Forward Current (10 I'S Pulse)!3] ...... 500 mA
Operating Temperature Range ........... -20 to +100°C
Storage Temperature Range ............. -55 to +100°C
Lead Soldering Temperature
[1.6 mm (0.063 in.) from body] ... 260°C for 5 seconds
Notes:
1. Maximum IpEAK at f = 1 kHz, OF = 6.7%.
2. Derate linearly as shown in Figure 4.
3. The transient peak current is the maximum non-recurring peak
current the device can withstand without damaging the LED
die and wire bonds. It is not recommended that the device be
operated at peak currents beyond the Absolute Maximum
Peak Forward Current.
Electrical/Optical Characteristics at TA =25°C
Symbol Description
Min.
Typ.
Max.
1.6
1.8
5.0
15.0
V
Unit
Test Condition
VF
Forward Voltage
VR
Reverse Breakdown Voltage
Ap
Peak Wavelength
645
nm
Measurement at peak
Dominant Wavelength
637
nm
Note 1
20
nm
Ad
AX'h
Spectral line Halfwidth
~ed of Response
V
IF= 1 mA
11l=1001'A
30
ns
Exponential Time Constant. e-IITs
Capacitance
30
pF
VF = 0, f
8JC
Thermal ReSistance
220
·C/W
Junction to Cathode Lead
I1v
Luminous Efficacy
80
9.mIW
Note 2
C
=1
MHz
Notes:
1. The dominant wavelength, Ad, is derived from the CIE chromaticity diagram and represents the color of the device.
2. The radiant intensity, Ie, in watts per steradian, may be found from the equation Ie = Iv/~v, where Iv is the luminous intensity is in
candelas and ~v is luminous efficacy in lumens/watt.
6-25
. _ - - _.... _. -----_..... _._ .._._--
300.0 r--,--,--,.--,---,;01.....-r-"'I
1.0
200.0r-~--~--+--+-7~--~-~
C(
100.0
~ 50.0
>
liS
~
20.0
ac
5.0
~
2.0
a:
a: 10.0
~
I-
;!;
0.5
w
a:
>
5a:
a:
w
~
1.0
I
0.5
~
0.2
600
VF- FORWARO VOLTAGE -: V
WAVELENGTH - nm
Figure 2. Forward Current vs. Forward V~ltage.
Figure 1. Relative Intensity vs. Wavelength.
40
".
E
35
I
30
I-
2
w
II:
II:
:J
CJ
c
25
20
a:
~
a:
15
I
10
.
0
~
IF - DC FORWARD CURRENT - mA
TA - AMBIENT TEMPERATURE - ·C
Figure 3. Relative Luminous Intensity vs.
.
DC Forward Current.
Figure 4. Maximum Forward DC Current vs.
Ambient Temperature.
Derating Based on TJ Max. =. 1.10· C.
I.
6-26
ao'
90'1--+--+--f---E~"-:'-:':;0'C-2;;;0::-'-:3;:'0·'":4tO';-'S::':Oc;:'·-:!60::;'-::7trt~a;::0~'9~Oc;:',~'OO'
Figure 6. Relative Luminous Intensity vs.
Angular Displacement. HLMP-K150.
Figure 5. Relative Luminous Intensity vs.
Angular Displacement. HLMP-D150.
90' t--+--+---Ic--F3!l."""',--:'--..:l.,..".,..""""""-::7"'0':-a"'0-g.J.0-.--"00'
Figure 8. Relative Luminous Inlenslty vs.
Angular Displacement. HLMP-K155.
Figure l Relative Luminous Intensity vs.
Angular Displacement. HLMP-D155.
Figure 9. Relative Luminous Intensity vs. Angular Displacement
for Subminiature Lamp
6-27
DOUBLE HETEROJUNCTION AIOaAs
VERY HIOH INTENSITY
RED LED LAMPS
T-1 3/4 (5 mm) HLMP-4100,-4101
Flin-
HEWLETT
~~ PACKARD
Features
• 1000 mcd AT 20 mA
• VERY HIGH INTENSITY AT LOW DRIVE
CURRENTS
• NARROW VIEWING ANGLE
• OUTSTANDING MATERIAL EFFICIENCY
• LOW FORWARD VOLTAGE
• CMOS/MOS COMPATIBLE
• TTL COMPATIBLE
• DEEP RED COLOR
Description
These solid state LED lamps utilize newly developed double
heterojunction (DH) AIGaAs/GaAs material technology.
This LED material has outstanding light output efficiency
over a wide range of drive currents. The lamp package has
a tapered lens, designed to concentrate the luminous flux
into a narrow radiation pattern to achieve a very high
intensity. The LED color is deep red at the dominant
wavelength of 637 nanometres. These lamps may be DC
or pulse driven to achieve desired light output.
Applications
• BRIGHT AMBIENT LIGHTING CONDITIONS
• EMITTER/DETECTOR AND SIGNALING
APPLICATIONS
• GENERAL USE
package Dimensions
~:: ;g:~~:l
r
0.64 (0.025)
SO!)A~E
1.32 10.0521
NOMINAL
liJi2ToJi4oi
~-r==~~T~======~~
ig::~:~J-23'0 MIN·d
l
::!;
12.44 t0A90)
11.{;8 10.460)
6-28
10.90)
1.27
{~g~)...--
--------
-------------- - - - -
Luminous Intensity @ 25°C
PIN
HLMP·
4100
r---
Package
Description
T-1 3/4 Red Untinted.
Non-diffused
4101
Iv (mcd)
@20mADC
Min.
Typ.
500
750
700
1000
281/2
Note 1Degrees
8
Note:
1.01/2 is the angle from optical centerline where the luminous
intensity is 1/2 the optical centerline value.
Absolute Maximum Ratings at TA = 25°C
Maximum Rating
Parameter
Units
Peak Forward CurrentP. 2]
300
mA
Average Forward Current(2]
20
mA
DC Currentl3 J
30
mA
Power Dissipation
87
mW
Reverse VOltage (lR = 100 ,"A)
5
V
500
mA
Operating Temperature Range
-20 to +100
°C
Storage Temperature Range
-55 to +100
°c
Transient Forward Current (10 '"s Pulse)14]
Lead Soldering Temperature [1.6 mm (0.063 in.) from body]
260°C for 5 seconds
Notes:
1. Maximum IpEAK at f = 1 kHz. DF = 6.7%.
2. Refer to Figure 6 to establish pulsed operating conditions.
3. Derate linerally as shown in Figure 5.
4. The transient peak current is the maximum non-recurring peak current the device can withstand without damaging the LED die and
wire bonds. It is not recommended that the device be operated at peak currents beyond the Absolute Maximum Peak Forward
Current.
Electrical/Optical Characteristics at TA = 25°C
Symbol
Descripllon
VF
Forward Voltage
VR
Reverse Breakdown Voltage
APEAK
Min.
5.0
Typ.
Max.
Unit
1.8
2.2
V
20mA
IR=100!,A
Test Condition
15.0
V
Peak Wavelength
650
nm
Measurement at peak
Dominant Wavelength
Note 1
642
nm
Spectral Line Hallwidth
20
nm
Speed 01 Response
30
ns
Exponential Time Constant.
e- tls
Capacitance
30
pF
VF " 0, 1 '" 1 MHz
8jc
Thermal Resistance
220
°CIW
Junction to Cathode Lead
'iJV
Luminous Efficacy
80
1m/W
Note 2
Ad
~A
1/2
rs
C
Notes:
1. The dominant wavelength, Ad, is derived from the CIE chromaticity diagram and represents the color of the device.
2. The radiant intensity. Ie, in watts per steradian. may be found from the equation Ie = Iv/~v, where Iv is the luminous intensity in
candelas and ~v is luminous efficacy in lumens/watt.
3. The approximate total luminous flux output within a cone angle of 20 about the optical axis, q,v(20), may be obtained from the
following formula:
q,v(20) = [q,V(O)/lv(O)]lv:
Where:q,v(O)/lv(O) is obtained from Figure 7.
6-29
300
1.0
..
E
I
~
;;;
i'!i
I-
i'!i
'::>'""
u
0
'"
;::
'"~
l-
i!;
W
0.5
..
>
~
'"
W
I
,."
280
260
240
220
200
180
160
140
·120
100
80
60
40
20
600
WAVELENGTH - nm
v, - FORWARD VOLTAGE - V
Figure 1. Relative Intensity vs. Wavelength
Figure 2. Forward Current vs. Forward Voltage
1.2
>
1.0
~c
wE
§:w
-N
0.6
10
"''''
.!'~
0.4
~ti
!'i~
w:l!
0.2
I DC
-
DC FORWARD CURRENT - mA
"Igure 3. Relative Luminous Intensity vs. DC Forward Current
IPEAK - PEAK FORWARD CURRENT - mA
Figure 4. Relative Efficiency ve. Peak Forward Current
0
5
0
fIIi, •• • SS9'
51- R9, ..... 674'CIW=
o
6S9"CIW:
It,._••
5
!
0
1'\.1\ 1.\
(,,'
~1\\
~
5
0
10
20 30 40 50 60 70
80 80 100 110
TA - AMBIENT TEMPERATURE -'C
tp - PULSE DURATION - /.IS
Figure 6. Maximum Tolerable Peak Current vs.
Peak Duration (I PEAK MAX Determined
from Temperature Derated IDe MAX).
Figure 5. Maximum Forward DC Current vs. Ambient
Temperature Derating Based on T J MAX. =110· C
6-30
o
~
"'w
>-'
1-+-1-_1-+_1--1-_1-+-1_+-1°. 14
..~ "~
0,135 ~ ~
_I-H++--+-t-+-+-+-t--JI''--t---l 0.12
Hxt--I-+-t--+-t--7f<-I:--+-I0.10
\~",-H*-+--+-t--+"7f--I--I--I----l
0.08
~
0
OU
"Z
~2
-'to
~"
1--1--1-+-::....."-1--1--1-:--1--+-10.06
::JZ
0.04
35:
\).tH-+~"-+--t-+-t-+--+-t--l
"I\I-..+....I---I--I--I--I--+~I--+-I 0.02
O-ANGlE FROM OPTICAL CENTERLINE-DEGREES
(CONE HALF ANGLE)
Figure 7. Relative Luminous Intensity vs. Angular Displacement
6-31
~~
Fli;-
HEWLETT
SUBMINIATURE HIGH BRIGHTNESS
SOLID STATE LAMPS
~e. PACKARD
High Efficiency Red • HlMP-630S
Yellow • HlMP-640S
High performance Green • HLMP-6505
Features
• SUBMINIATURE PACKAGE STYLE
• END STACKABLE
• LOW PACKAGE PROFILE
• AXIAL LEADS
• NARROW VIEWING ANGLE
• LONG LIFE - SOLID STATE RELIABILITY
• AVAILABLE IN BULK, ARRAYS, TAPE AND
REEL, SURFACE MOUNT, AND BENT LEAD
CONFIGURATIONS
Description
Lamps in this series of solid state indicators are encapsulated in an axial lead subminiature package of molded
epoxy. They utilize an untinted non-diffused lens providing
superior product performance. Small size makes these
lamps suitable for PC Board mounting in space sensitive
applications.
Part
Special lead bending, packaging and assembly methods
can be used with these devices. Refer to the special data
sheet for lead bend configurations. Two special surface
mount lead configurations are also available. See the data
sheets for "gull wing" and "yoke lead" options for more
detailed information. Tape and reel packaging for the
standard product is also available (refer to Tape and Reel
Data Sheet).
Number
HLMP-
Minimum
Intensity
(mcd) at 10 mA
6305
3.4
High Efficiency
Red
(GaP on GaAsP)
3.6
Yellow
(GaP on GaAsP)
4.2
Green
(GaP)
6405
6505
package Dimensions
1§!i~I>IA
1.91 (0.0761
•
AU. DIMENSIONS AAE IN MIt.LIMETI\E$ !INCHES),
6-32
I
Color
(Material)
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ..- - - - - - - - - - - - -
Electrical Characteristics at TA = 25°C
Symbol
Iv
Parameter
Luminous Intensity
Device
HLMP-
Min.
Typ.
High Efficiency Red
6305
3.4
12
3.6
12
4.2
12
Yellow
6405
Green
6505
Max.
Units
Test Conditions
mcd
IF" 10 mA
(Figures 3.8, 13)
28
Deg.
See Note 1
(Figures 6, 11. 16)
201/2
Including Angle
Between Half
Luminous Intensity
Points
All
ApEAK
Peak Wavelength
High Efficiency Red
Yellow
Green
635
583
565
nm
Measurement at Peak
High Efficiency Red
Yellow
Green
626
585
569
nm
See Note 2
High Efficiency Red
Yellow
Green
40
36
High Efficiency Red
Yellow
Green
90
90
500
High Efficiency Red
Yellow
Green
11
15
18
Thermal Resistance
All
120
Forward VOltage
High Efficiency Red
Yellow
Green
1.5
1.5
1.5
5.0
Ad
AA1/2
7$
C
OJC
VF
Dominant Wavelength
Spectral Line
Halfwldth
Speed of Response
Capacitance
VA
Reverse Breakdown Voltage
All
'T}v
Luminous Efficacy
High Efficiency Red
Yellow
Green
nm
28
2.2
2.2
2.3
145
500
595
ns
pF
°G/W
3.0
3.0
V
VF=O; f" 1 MHz
Junction to Cathode
Lead
IF" 10 mA
(Figures 2, 7, 12)
3.0
V
IA" 100 p.A
lumens
See Note 3
Watt
Notes:
1. 81/2 is the off-axis angle at which the luminous intensity is half the axial luminous intensity.
2. The dominant wavelength, Ad, is derived from the CIE chromaticity diagram and represents the single wavelength which defines the
color of the device.
3. Radiant intensity, Ie, in watts/steradian, may be found from the equation Ie, " IV/1)v, Where Iv is the luminous intensity in candelas
and 1)v is the luminous efficacy in lumens/watt.
.
6-33
Absolute Maximum Ratings at TA = 25°C
Green
High Eft. Red
HLMP-6305
Vellow
HLMP-6405
HLMp·S505
Uni"
135
85
135
rnW
30[2]
20[1]
30(2)
rnA
90
See Fig. 5
60
See Fig. 10
90
See Fig. 15
rnA
Reverse Voltage (lR = 100 p.A)
5
5
5
V
Transient Forward Currentl3]
500
500
500
mA
-55 to +100
-55 to +100
Parameter
Power Dissipation
DC Forward Current
Peak Forward Current
(10 p.sec Pulse)
Operating Temperature Range
-20 to +100
Lead Soldering
Thmperature [1.6 mm (0.063
In.) from body]
·C
-55 to +100
Storage Temperature Range
260°C for 3 seconds
Notes:
1. Derate from 50° Cat 0.2 mAIo C.
2. Derate from 50° C at 0.5 mAIo C.
3. The transient peak current is the maximum non-recurring peak current that can be applied to the device without damaging the LED die
and wirebond. It is not recommended that the device be operated at peak current beyond the'peak forward current listed in the Absolute
Maximum Ratings .
.1.or-------,.--,,....:---......- - . . - - - - . . , . . . . , - - , , . - - - - - - - - . - - - - - - - .
T•• 25'0
HIGH EFfiCIENCY RED
O.5~------_+~--+_~---~--~---~~~----_4-------~
!lRSEN
. ~obo-------=~~~-----~~Sb~------::~65tO~==~~~::7=OO==..--------~750
WAVELENGTH-nm
Figure 1. Relative Intensity vs. Wavelength
\J
'6-34
High Efficiency Red HLMP-6305
60
.."
E
50
0
Z
w
40
II:
II:
::>
u
0
30
/
II:
i~
~
20
10
o
1.0
/
1.5
/
4.0
/
/
~
....
"
1.5
~g
1.0
....
w:'iE
>11:
-0
/
II:
2.0
,/
3.5
2.5
0.5
o/
o
3.0
VF - FORWARD VOLTAGE - V
,/
~
f"
V
/
10
15
20
25
30
IDC.- DC CURRENT PER LED - mA
Figure 2. Forward Current vs. Forward
Voltage Characteristics
Figure 3. Relative Luminous Intensity
vs. Forward Current
1.6
1.5
U
>0
u"
1.4
~.§
1.3
e'c"
wQ.
1.2
,,~
WW
- ....
>~:
S:l!
wa:
1.1
1.0
.9
II:Q
!;
.8
I
.7
50
~I'
jj
::d~
60
":Iii
!PEAK - PEAK CURRENT - mA
Figure 4. Relative Efficiency
(Luminous Intensity per Unit
Current) vs; Peak Current
tp - PULSE DURATION -~.
Figure 5. Maximum Tolerable Peak Current
vs. Pulse Duration (locMAX
as per MAX Ratings)
90°I----..f---I---I---l::!:
Figure 6. Relative Luminous Intensity vs. Angular'Dlsplacement
6-35
Yellow HLMP-640S
60
",
40
Z
50
E
....
w
0
I
0:
~
.l!-
TA·JC
30
20
I
ID
1.0
1.5
2.0
2.0
;;;0-
1.5
::>"
00
Zw
-N
:1;::>-'
J
-,"
1.0
/
w:I;
>a:
-0
5;;;
w
a:
./
o
~Ci
~.!l
Z_
II
0:
"ii:
,.
0-
0:
0:
::>
u
2.5
I
2.5
3.0
3.5
.5
L
V'
o
o
4.0
VF - FORWARD VOLTAGE - V
V
L
v
L
10
15
20
IF - FORWARD CURRENT - mA
Figure 7. Forward Current vs. Forward
Voltage Characteristics
Figure 8. Relative Luminous Intensity
vs. Forward Current
1.6
1.5
G
u"
,.0
1.4
§~
1.3
~~
1.2
Wo
WW
>N
1.1
:h
wo:
~~
1.0
0:0
.9
u-
;;;
.6
V
/
V
I
v
V
I
10
20
30
40
50
60
IpEAK - PEAK CURRENT - rnA
Ip - PULSE DURATION - P'
Figure 9. Relative Efficiency
(Luminous Intensity per Unit
Current) vs. Peak Current
Figure 10. Maximum Tolerable Peak
Current vs. Pulse Duration (IDC MAX
as per MAX Ratings)
90'i---+---t---i----e
Figure 11. Relative Luminous Intensity vs. Angular Displacement
6-36
~----~-
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~-
Green HLMP-6S0S
60
..e
40
I
II
I-
ffi0:
50
0:
:::>
'0:"'
30
f2
20
"
~
0:
.!:
4.0
if
10
o
1.0
.I
1.5
/
'I
/
/
V
/
2.0
3.0
3.5
oV
4.0
VF - FORWARD VOLTAGE - V
V
/
o. 5
2.5
V
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
IpEAK - PEAK CURRENT PER LED - rnA
Figure .13. Relative Luminous Intensity
VS. Forward Current
Figure 12. Forward Current vs. Forward
Voltage Characteristics
1.7
1.6
1.5
1.4
1.3
/'
1.2
I
1.1
I
1.0
0.9
0.8
0.7 0
I
10
20
30
tt
40
50
60
70
\ .L.o........u.=O'-.L..L
80 90 100
IpEAK - PEAK CURRENT PER LEO - mA
'p -
Figure 14. Relative Efficiency
(Luminous Intensity per Unit
Current) VS. Peak Current
PULSE DURATION - " '
Figure 15. Maximum Tolerable Peak
Current VS. Pulse Duration (I DC MAX
as per MAX Ratings)
80'
+-_-l__-+'~
90'1-_+_ _
Figure 16. Relative Luminous Intensity vs. Angular Displacement
6-37
Fli;-
SUBMINIATURE SOLID STATE LAMPS
RED
HIGH EFFICIENCY RED
ORANGE
YELLOW
HIGH PERFORMANCE GREEN
HEWLETT
~e.. PACKARD
•
•
•
•
•
HLMP-6000/6001
HLMP-6300
HLMp·Q400
HLMP'6400
HLMp·6500
Features
• SUBMINIATURE PACKAGE STYLE
• END STACKABLE
• LOW PACKAGE PROFILE
• AXIAL LEADS
• WIDE VIEWING ANGLE
• LONG LIFE - SOLID STATE RELIABILITY
• AVAILABLE IN BULK, ARRAYS, TAPE AND
REEL, SURFACE MOUNT, AND BENT LEAD
CONFIGURATIONS
Description
Lamps in this series of .solid state indicators are
encapsulated in an axial lead .subminiature package of
molded epoxy. They,utilize a tinted, diffused lens providing
high on-off contrast and wide angle viewing. Small size
makes these lamps suitable for PC board mounting in space
sensitive applications.
Special lead bending, packaging and assembly methods can
be used with these devices. For example, lead bending on
2.54mm (0.100 in) and 5.0Bmm (0.200 in) centers is available.
Two special surface mount lead configurations are also
available. See the data sheets for "gull wing," "yoke lead"
and bend options for more detailed information.
Tape and reel packaging for the standard product and for
the surface mountable "gull wing" and "yoke lead" versions
is described in their respective surface mount data sheets.
package Dimensions
ALL DIMENSIONs ARE IN MU.LIMETRES {lNCHESl.
6-38
Part
Number
HLMP·
Minimum
Intensity
(mcd) at 10 mA
6000
0.5
Standard Red
(GaAsP)
6001
1.3
Standard Red
(GaAsP)
6300
1.0
High Efficiency
Red
(GaP on GaAsP)
Q400
1.0
Orange
(GaP on GaAsP)
6400
1.0
Yellow
(GaP on GaAsP)
6500
1.0
Green
(GaP)
Color
(Material)
------------------------------------------
Electrical Characteristics at TA = 25°C
r-
,~,
Symbol Parameter
Iv
Luminous Inten§ity
c
t\
iI%
Device
HLMP·
Min.
StandardRM
6000
01
'.
0.5
1.3
i
!!lrange
Q400
Yellow
6400
1.2
Max.
Units;
3.~'%
.
~
i~Efficien~y Red •
6300
Typ.
1.0
3.0
1.0
3.0
1.0
3.0
1.0
3.0
.-
!If
mcd
Test Conditions
gc,:1ltiG%"
IF= 10 mA
(Figures 3, 8, 13, 18)
~
Green
6500
201/2
Including Angle
Between Half
Luminous Intensity
Points
All
90
Deg.
See Note 1
(Figures 6, 11. 16. 21)
APEAK
Peak Wavelength
Standard Red
High Efficiency Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
655
635
612
583
565
nm
Measurement at Peak
Standard Red
High Efficiency Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
640
626
603
585
569
nm
See Note 2
Standard Red
High Eff, Red/Orange
Yellow
Green
24
40
36
28
Standard Red
High Efficiency Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
15
90
260
90
500
n$
Standard Red
High Efficiency Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
100
11
4
15
18
pF
120
·C/W
Ad
.1A1/2
TS
C
Dominant Wavelength
Spectral Line
Halfwidth
Speed of Response
CapaCitance
8JC
Thermal Resistance
All
VF
Forward Voltage
Standard Red
High Efficiency Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
VR
Reverse Breakdown Voltage
'f/v
Luminous Efficacy
1.4
1.5
1.5
1,5
1.5
1.6
2.2
2.2
2.2
2.3
5,0
Slandard Red
High Efficiency Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
Notes on following page.
6-39
65
145
262
500
595
•
nm
2.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
VF=O;f=lMHz
Junction to Cathode
Lead
V
IF= 10 mA
(Figures 2, 7, 12, 17)
V
IR" 100p.A
lumens
See Note 3
--watt
Notes:
1. (-)1/2 is the off-axis angle at which the luminous intensity is half the axial luminous intensity.
2. The dominant wavelength, Ad, is derived from the CIE chromaticity diagram and represents the single wavelength which defines the
color of the device.
3. Radiant intensity, Ie, in watts/steradian, may be found from the equation Ie = Iv/ryv. Where Iv is the luminous intensity incandelas and
ryv is the luminous efficacy in lumens/watt.
Absolute Maximum Ratings at TA
Parameter
Power Dissipation
DC Forward Current
Peak Forward Current
Red
HLMP·6000f1
High Eff. Red
HLMP-6300
Orange
HLMp·Q400
Yellow
HLMP-6400
Green
HLMP-6500
Units
100
135
135
85
135
mW
50PJ
3012 J
30[2}
20[1}
30[2J
mA
1000
See Fig. 5
90
See Fig. 10
90
See Fig. 10
60
See Fig. 15
90
See Fig. 20
mA
Reverse Voltage (I R= 100 pAl
5
5
5
5
5
V
Transient Forward Current(2)
(10 }tsec Pulse)
2000
500
500
500
500
mA
-55 to +100
-55 to +100
-55 to +100
-55 to +100
Operating Temperature Range
Storage Temperature Range
Lead Soldering
Temperature {1.6 mm
(0.063 in.) from body}
-20 to +100
-55 to +100
°C
2600 0 for 3 seconds
Notes:
1. Derate from 50' C at 0.2 mAl' C.
2. The transient peak current is the maximum non-recurring peak current that can be applied to the device without damaging the LED die
and wirebond. It is not recommended that the device be operated at peak current beyond the peak forward current listed in the Absolute
Maximum Ratings.
,.0r-------------,-~~--~~--~
__
~----,_~--~r_----------,_------------~
WAVELENGTH - nm
Figure 1. Relative Intensity vs. Wavelength
6-40
standard Red HLMP-6000/6001
•
/'
•
•
•
•
1.7D
VF- FORWARD VOLTAGE - VOLTS
Figure 2. Forward Current vs.
Forward Voltage.
""
1.30 '-T"""T""""-'-"T""-r-""r-r-r-.
i \""
S f-t-~+-+-+--r-r-+-+~
~ ',l°f-Hf-f-
V
IV
.L
10
*
"
,.-f--
~ ',OOf-t-t-t~
f-'-
.
50
II' - FORWARD CURRENT - mA
Figure 3. Relative Luminous Intensity
vs. Forward Current.
'rEAK - PEAK CURRENT - mA
Figure 4. Relative Efficiency
(Luminous Intensity per Unit
Current) vs. Peak Current.
tp - PULSE DURATION - pi
Figure S. Maximum Tolerable Peak Current vs. Pulse Duration. (IDC MAX
as per MAX Ratings)
1
'•
V
I
·•
0
Figure 6. Relative Luminous Intensity vs. Angular Displacement.
1.•
/
I.S
U
>0
!~
tE~
/
/
"
1.2
wo
wW
1.1
j::::i
1.'
>N
S~
w~
I
I.'
1.3
~o
l!
..
..
.7
2.'
Vf • FORWARD VOLTAGE - V
IDC - DC CURRENT PER LED _ rnA
Figure 7. Forward Current vs. Forward
Voltage Characteristics
100
1000
tp '- PULSE DURATION
Figure 8. RelatlveLuminouslntenslty
vs. Forward Current.
!PEAK - PEAK CURRENT -mA
Figure 9. Relative Efficiency
(Luminous Intensity per Unit
Current) vs. Peak Current.
,....
- JlI
Figure 10. Maximum Tolerable Peak Current vs. Pulse Duration. (IDC MAX
as per MAX Ratings)
Figure 11. Relative Luminous Intensltyvs.AngularDlsplacement.
6-41
Yellow HlMP-6400
/
1.0
/
S
/
1.5
! 1~
Q
~'
/
5
./
./
2.0
/
'-0\ -25;c
2,
i
/
1.5
2.5
30
•
2,
J
•
•
·
•
•
v
00
35
4.0
\If - FORWARD VOLTAGE-V
5
'/
V
4
V
3
/
/'
2
•
•
9
I.
/
I
'01020
304050
60
IpEAK - PEAK CURRENT - mA
... - FORWARD CURRENT - mA
Figure 12. Forward Current vs. Forward
Voltage Characteristics
I
I
7
2.
15
I
/
I
Figure 13. Relative Luminous Intensity
vs. Forward Current.
Figure 14. Relat,lve Efficiency
(Luminous Intensity per Unit
Current) vs. Peak Current.
10000
tp - pULSE DURATION -,us
Figure 16. Relative Luminous Intensltyvs.AngularDlsplacement.
Figure 15. Maxlmum,Tolerable Peak Current vs. Pulse Duration. (IDC MAX
as per MAX Ratings)
Green HlMP-6500
v
'00
..
~~
•
/
.~
o
=
;
2
..
0
1.0
/
1.5
2.0
•
I
2, 5
2, 0
.
2.5
30
3.5
Figure 17. Forward Current vs.
Forward Voltage.
4
3
2
I
V
15
20
25
30
35
40
'PEAK - PEAK CURRENT PER LED - rnA
,Figure ;18. Relative 'Luminous Intensity
vs. DC Forward Current
o.
7
I
I
9
10
/
•
/
•1/
40
5
'"
•
VF-FORWARD VOLTAGE-V
v'
V
5
/
I
7
35
'3, 0
/
20
•
I
4,0
0
I
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
Figure 19. Relatlave Efficiency
(Luminous Intensity per Unit'
Current) vs. Peak LED Current
I
I
tp - PULSE DURATION -III
Figure 20. Maximum Tolerable Peak Current vs. Pulse Duration. (IDC MAX
as per MAX Ratings)
Figure 21. Relative Luminous Intensltyvs.AngularDlsplacement.
6-42
80 90 100
IpfAK - PEAK CURRENT PER LED - rnA
------.---~-.~-------
MA TCHED JltRRA'IS OF
SUE3MIf>JlATURE LAMPS
RED
HIGH EFFICIENCY RED
HlMPi~,~;QO
SERIES
HlMP~66QO SI=RIES
¥l=lLOWc'HlMP~6150 SERIES
GREEN HLMP-6850 SERIES
Features
• IMPROVED BRIGHTNESS
• AVAILABLE IN 4 BRIGHT COLORS
Red
High Efficiency Red
Yellow
High Performance Green
• EXCELLENT UNIFORMITY BETWEEN
ELEMENTS
/
• END STACKABLE FOR LONGER ARRAYS
o SELECTION OF VARIOUS LENGTHS
• COMPACT SUBMINIATURE PACKAGE STYLE
• NO CROSSTALK BETWEEN ELEMENTS
Description
Applications
The HLMP-6XXX Series Arrays are comprised of several
subminiature lamps molded as a single bar. Arrays are
tested to assure 2.1 to 1 matching between elements and
intensity binned for matching between arrays.
.. INDUSTRIAL CONTROLS
The HLMP-620X Series Arrays are Gallium Arsenide
Phosphide red light emitting diodes. The HLMP-665X,
HLMP-675X series arrays are Gallium Arsenide Phosphide
on Gallium Phosphide red and yellow light emitting diodes.
The HLMP-685X series arrays are Gallium Phosphide green
light emitting diodes.
Each element has separately accessible leads and a
diffused lens which provides a wide viewing angle and a
high on/off contrast ratio. The center-to-center spacing is
2.54 mm (.100 in.) between elements. Special lead bending
is available on 2.54 mm (.100 in.) and 5.08 mm
(.200 in.) centers.
o POSITION INDICATORS
o OFFICE EQUIPMENT
II
INSTRUMENTATION LOGIC INDICATORS
o CONSUMER PRODUCTS
Array
Length
3-Elem.~nt
4-Element
5-Element
6-Element
,8dilement
High
Efficiency
Red
Red
HLMP· E1?9?
HLMP- 6264
HLMp· 6205
HLMP- 6206
H!7MP- 6208
6e~3
6654
6655
66,56
6658
Yellow
6753
6754
67:,55
6756
6758
High
Performance
Green
6853
6854
6855
6856
6858
package Dimensions
Note'!
1. All ditmO$foll$ are in
mUHmetrB$-11ncoesl.
2. Qvetaillength i$ the number of elemenH time$
2.54mm (.l()() In.l •
.16W30j
MAX,
t::I.l
6-43
.
----~---------
-------
FliP'l
2mm FLAT TOP LED LAMPS
HEWLETT
High Efficiency Red, Yellow, Green Lamps
Low current Lamps
Integrated Resistor Lamps
a.:~ PACKARD
Features
• WIDE VIEWING ANGLE
• UNIFORM LIGHT OUTPUT
• MOUNTS FLUSH WITH PANEL
• CHOICE OF THREE BRIGHT COLORS
- High Efficiency Red
- Yellow
- High Performance Green
• LOW CURRENT VERSION AVAILABLE
- High Efficiency Red and Yellow
• INTEGRATED RESISTOR VERSION AVAILABLE
- Requires no External Current Limiter with
5 V -12V Supply
Description
These rugged solid state lamps are designed for applications requiring a bright, compact source of light. Uniform
light output, wide viewing angle and flat top make the lamp
ideal for flush mounting on a front panel.
The red and yellow devices use 'Gallium Arsenide Phosphide on Gallium Phosphide light emitting diodes, the green
devices use a Gallium Phosphide light emitting diode.
Axial Luminous Intensity and Viewing Angle
@.
Color
High
Efficiency
Red
Yellow
Green
Iv (mcd)
rI Number
HLMP·
-1800
1801
Min.
Typ.
Test
Condition
201/211J
Tinted, Diffused
0.8
1.8
10 mA
140
Tinted, Diffused, High Brightness
2.1
2.9
10mA
0.5
2mA
Description
Tinted, Diffused, Low Current
0.2
Tinted, Diffused,S V Integrated Resistor
0.5
5V
-1661
Tinted. Diffused, 12 V Integrated Resistor
0.8
12 V
-1819
Tinted, Diffused
0.9
1.5
10 mA
-1820
Tinted, Diffused, High Brightness
1.4
2.5
10 mA
-1760
Tinted, Diffused, Low Current
0.2
0.4
2mA
-1674
Tinted, Diffused,S V Integrated Resistor
0.5
5V
-1675
Tinted, Diffused, 12 V Integrated ReSistor
0.9
12 V
-1840
Ti nted, Diffused
1.0
2.0
10mA
-1841
Tinted, Diffused, High Brightness
1.6
3.0
10 mA
-1687
Tinted, Diffused,S V Integrated Resistor
0.5
5V
-1688
Tinted, Diffused. 12 V Integrated Resistor
1.0
12 V
NOTE:
1.
~)1/2
is the off-axis angle at which the luminous intensity is half the axial intensity.
6-44
140
140
Package Dimensions
0.45 (O.OlS)
CATHODE
SQUARE NOM/
dI:::::r========i==c::k
I
2.5410.1001
NOM.
'-r
",.~:~J'ib
t2.7 .fO.G50) NOM,
NOTES;
1 AU, DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILllMETRES ONCHES!.
2. AN"EPOXY MENISCU& MAY EXTEND ABOOT
1 mm {a,040l DOWN THE LEADS.
Absolute Maximum Ratings
atTA=25°C
HIGH EFFICIENCY RED, YELLOW AND GREEN LAMPS
.. '
Parameter
Peak Forward Current
Average Forward Currentl 11
DC Currentl 21
Power DissipationJ31
Reverse Voltage (fR - 100 }J.AI
Transient Forward Currentl41 no }J.sec Pulse)
Operating Temperature Range
Storage Temperature Range
Lead Soldering Temperature
11.6 mm 10.063 inl from body}
High Eliiciency , i; .•,
Yellow
Green
Red
HLMp·1800/-1801 HLMP;1819/·1820 HLMp·1840/·1841
90
60
90
,.",
25
25
20
.". 20
30
30
ii
135
85
135
'.. ,.•..••. 5
5
5
500
500
500
-20 to +100
-55 to +100
-55 to +100
Units
rnA
mA
mA
mW
V
mA
°C
260' C for 5 seconds
NOTES:
1. See Figure 3 to establish pulsed operating conditions.
2. For Red and Green Series derate linearly from 50° C at 0.5
mAIo C. For Yellow Series derate linearly from 50° C at 0.2
mArC.
3. For Red and Green Series derate power linearly from 25° C
at 1.8 mW/o C. For Yellow Series derate power linearly from
50° Cat 1.6 mW/O C.
4. The transient peak current is the maximum non-recurring
peak current that can be applied to the device without
damaging the LED die and wirebond. It is not recommended
that the device be operated at peak currents beyond the
peak forward current listed in the Absolute Maximum
Ratings.
LOW CURRENT LAMPS
High Ellici~ncy Red
HLMP~1740
Parameter
DC and Peak Forward Currentl 11
Transient Forward Current 110 msecPulse)
Power Dissipation
"
Reverse Voltage IIR - 50 MA)
Operating and Storage Temperature Rqnge
Lead Soldering Temperature n,6 mm 10:063 in.1
from body)
7
500
27
II
I
I
Yellow
HLMP·1760
7
500
24
5.0
-55 to +100
Units
mA
mA
mW
V
°C
260° C for 5 seconds
NOTES:
1. Derate linearly from 92° Cat 1.0 mAIO C.
INTEGRATED RESISTOR LAMPS
Parameter
Reverse Voltage (18 - 100 }J.Al
DC Forward Voltage ITA = 25° Cl
Operating Temperature Range
Storage Temperature Range
Lead Soldering Temperature
5 V Larhps
HER/Yellow
HLMp·1660
HLMP·1674
5V
7.5 VI 1 1
-40° C to 85° C
-55°C to 100°C
12 V Lamps
5 V Lamps
HER/Yellow
Green
HLMP-1661
HLMP-1687
HLMP-1675
5V
5V
7.5 VllJ
15 Vl21
-20° C to 85° C
-40° C to 85° C
-55°C to lOGoC
-550 C to 100° C
260·C for 5 seconds
NOTES:
1. Derate from TA = 50° Cat 0.071 Vlo C, see Figure 3.
2. Derate from TA = 50° Cat 0.086 Vlo C, see Figure 4.
6·45
12 V Lamps
Green
HLMP·1688
5V
15 V[2/
-20· C to 85° C
-55°C to 100°C
Electrical/Optical Characteristics at TA == 25° C
High
Efficiency Red
Symbol Parameter
Min,
Typ.
Yellow
Max.
Min.
Typ.
Green
Max.
Min.
lYP.
Max.
Units Test Conditions
APEAK
Peak Wavelength
635
583
565
nm
LlAl!2
Spectral Line
Halfwidth
40
36
28
nm
Ad
Dominant Wavelength
626
585
569
'7v
luminous Efficacy
145
500
595
VA
Reverse Breakdown
Voltage
nm
Note 1
lumen Note 2
Iwatt
5.0
5.0
5.0
V
IA
~
100 itA
NOTES:
1. The dominant wavelength, Ad. is derived from the CIE chromaticity diagram and represents the single wavelength which defines
the color of the device.
2. Radiant intensity, Ie, in watts/steradian. may be found from the equation Ie = Iv/ryv' Where Iv is the luminous intensity in candelas
and ryv is the luminous efficacy in lumens/watt.
HIGH EFFICIENCY RED, YELLOW AND GREEN LAMPS
High
Green
Yellow
Efficiency Red
HLMP-1800/-1801 HLMP-1819/-1820 HLMP-1840/-1841
Symbol
Parameter
VF
Forward Voltage
TS
Speed of Response
C
Capacitance
OJC
Thermal Resistance
Min. Typ. Max.
1.5
2.2
Min. Typ. Max.
3.0
1.5
2.2
90
3.0
Min. Typ. Max.
1.5
2.3
3.0
500
90
Units Test Condllions
V
pF
20
15
18
120
120
120
IF= 10 mA
ns
VF = O. f = 1 MHz
°C/W Junction to
Cathode Lead
LOW CURRENT LAMPS
High Efficiency Red
HLMP·1740
Symbol
Parameter
VF
Forward Voltage
Min.
Typ.
Max.
1.8
2.2
Yellow
HLMP-1760
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Units
1.9
2.7
V
Test Conditions
2mA
Speed of Response
90
90
ns
C
Capacitance
11
15
pF
()JC
Thermal Resistance
120
120
°CIW
Junction to
Cathode Lead
Max.
Units
Test Conditions
20
mA
At rated voltage
°CIW
Junction to
Cathode Lead
.."8
Vp =0. 1= 1 MHz
INTEGRATED RESISTOR LAMPS
12V
HLMP·1661/
1675/·1688
5V
HLMP-16601
-16741-1687
Symbol
Parameter
Typ.
Max.
IF
Forward Current
Min.
10
15
IIJC
Thermal ReSistance
90
Min.
I Typ.
13
90
6-46
0"
1.0
10· 20· 30· 40· 50·
60
70
80
90 100
Figure 1. Relative Luminous Intensity vs. Angular Displacement
1.0r--------------,----~----~~_.--------~
--,_--------------r_------------_.
__
GAEEN
HIGH EfFICIENCY
/~
RED
OL-______~__~~________~~__~~--------~--~------------~~------------~
500
650
700
750
WAVELENGTH - nm
Figure 2. Relative Intensity vs. Wavelength
HIGH EFFICIENCY RED, YELLOW AND GREEN LAMPS
HER HLMP-1800,-1801
Yellow HLMP-1819,-1820
Green HLMP-1840,-1841
90
!J
80
~~
"'"
00
I
.
Zw
:E~
2.5
~'"
w:.
2.0
-0
1.5
w
1.0
5~
0:
0,5
1.4
OJ
1.3
~
>/
,
1£ 9"
1. 1
i=w'"
-
1.0
,
n
0.9
~
I
~
/
~ -:::
0.8
I
;;
0.7
0.6
10
15
~
20
~
~
~
~
00
!'arlEEN
fi=
J
0:
VHLOW
EFflCJENCY RED
V
L
/
1.2
.~
If
j.
If
o ./
o 5
>
.~
HIGH
YELlOW
1.5
I
,,~
>0:
1. 6
I
'HlGHIEF~lclI,JCY
flED ANIl OREEN
4.5
o
10
20
30
ff
40
50
60
70
80
90 100
IPEAK - PEAK LED CURRENT - rnA
IDe - DC CURRENT PER LED rnA
Figure 5. Relative Luminous .Intenslty vs. Forward Current
Figure 6. Relative Efficiency (Luminous Intensity per Unit
Current) vs. Peak LED Current
LOW CURRENT LAMPS
HER HLMP-1740
Yellow HLMP-1760
10
10.0,---,----,----,---,----,
I
~
,
~ 8.01---t----t---i---++---:;j
~1
-tA .25"C
....
150:
·z N
~~
~fa
HIGH
EFFICIENCY
0:
Reo ....
i3
o
0:
-....
6.0 f---+---l----l....;~:tf-__l
~j
,
;! 4 . 0 r - - - t - - + " ' 7 ' ' r f - - - t - - - i
~~
:3~
2.0 f---+-::",-l----l---;--__l
~
~
Wo:
~
,
J
~
)
1.0
.5
f"lOW
2.0
1.5
VF.- FORWARD VOLTAGE
2.5
-v
IDe - DC CURRENT PER LED - rnA
Figure S. Relative Luminous Intensity vs. Forward Current
Figure 7. Forward Current vs. Forward Voltage
INTEGRATED RESISTOR LAMPS
5 Volt HLMP-1660, -1674, 1687
12 Volt HLMP-1661, -1675, -1688
24
'",
20
150:
16
""
12
E
...
I
I
I
;!:
0:
~
.,
o
o
II
16
""
12
0
I
V
/
0:
'"
~
,
;!:
0:
I
~
150:
0:
V
'"
20
...
/
0:
'",
E
V
0:
0
24
/
V
~
L
I8
7.5
10
12
14
I
15
o
o
16
1/;'
,/
V
I
I8
7.6
I
10
12
14
I
15
16
Vc;c -APPLIED FORWARD VOLTAGE-V
Vee - APPLIED FORWARD VOLTAGE - V
Figure 9. For:ward Current vs. Applied Forward Voltage. 5 Volt
Devices
..
Figure 10. Forward Current vs. Applied Forward. Voltage. 12
Volt Devices
6-48
2.5
2.0
2
w
1.5
~
a:
1.0
/
>
;:
0.5
0
0
2
/
/
~GH
w
>
~
a:
/
0.5
EFFICIENCV_
REO, YELLOW.
GREEI
4
/
1.0
2
6
o
I
8
4
I--
HIGH EFFICIENCV
I--J-+-v-++-~::;r~
a
10
5 VOLT DEVICE
/
8
12
16
20
12 VOLT DEVICES
Figure 11. Relative Luminous Intensity vs. Applied Forward
Voltage. 5 Volt Devices
Figure 12. Relative Luminous Intensity vs. Applied Forward
Voltage. 12 Volt Devices
6-49
FliU-
2mm SQUARE FLAT TOP LED LAMPS
HEWLETT
High Efficiency Red HLMP-l250, -l251
a:~ PACKARD
Yellow HLMP-L350, -L351
Green HlMP-L550, -L551
Features
• WIDE VIEWING ANGLE
• UNIFORM LIGHT OUTPUT
• SQUARE LIGHT EMITTING AREA
• MOUNTS FLUSH WITH PANEL
• CHOICE OF THREE BRIGHT COLORS
-
High Efficiency Red
Yellow
High Performance Green
Description
These rugged solid state lamps are designed for applications requiring a bright, compact source of light. Uniform
light output, wide viewing angle and flat top make the lamp
ideal for flush mounting on a front panel.
The red and yellow devices use Gallium Arsenide Phosphide on Gallium Phosphide light emitting diodes, the green
devices use a Gallium Phosphide light emitting diode.
Axial Luminous Intensity and viewing Angle
Color
Part Number
HLMP-
Description
Iv (mcd)
Typ.
Min.
Tesl
Condition
2(')1/2111
140
High
Efficiency
Red
-L250
Tinted, Diffused
0.8
1.8
10mA
-l251
Tinted, Diffused, High Brightness
2.1
2.9
10 mA
Yellow
-L350
Tinted, Diffused
0.9
1.5
10 mA
-L351
Tinted, Diffused, High Brightness
1.4
2.5
10 mA
-L550
Tinted, Diffused
1.0
2.0
10mA
-L551
Tinted, Diffused, High Brightness
1.6
3.0
lOrnA
Green
NOTE:
1. (-)1/2 is the off-axis angle at which the luminous intensity is half the axial intensity.
6-50
140
140
Package Dimensions
3Sl
i r lBOLI,r
~
0.B9 (0]81"
lo.o
0,64
,,"
i
F
4,19\0,185)
3.7S(if.J49J
i
2.'110.0811
"
,,'
~
~:;~~--
~~~:~:~~;l-
t
-
0.90 10.0351 REF.
fSOUA:;V
1
I
r--,I I
~10.2201_L
~CATHODE
0.4510.0101
2.54
'~'""":JL
3.fJ110.1211
r----24.13 10.9501
MIN.
4.83 (O.190)
~~~OOI
I
1.2110.OGOl
NOM.
NOTES:
1, ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETRES (INCHES/'
2. AN EPO'>;Y--MENISCUS MAY EXTEND ABOUT
6,91 (O,272}
6,10 (0.240)
1 mm j(t04Q") DOWN THE LEADS.
Electrical/Optical Characteristics at TA -- 25°C
.COMMON CHARACTERISTICS
Symbol Parameter
High
Efficiency Red
Yellow
Green
L2501lL251
L350/351
L550/551
Min.
'TYP·
Max.
Min.
'TYP·
Max.
Min.
'TYP·
Max.
Units Test Conditions
ApEAK
Peak Wavelength
635
583
565
nm
~A1I2
Spectral Line
Halfwidlh
40
36
28
nm
Ad
Dominant Wavelength
626
585
569
llv
Luminous Efficacy
145
500
595
VR
Reverse Breakdown
Voltage
5.0
VF
Forward Voltage
1.5
TS
Speed of Response
C
Capacitance
IJJC
Thermal Resistance
3.0
5.0
1.5
2.2
90
90
Note 1
IWat't
5.0
2.2
nm
lumen Note 2
3.0
1.5
2.3
500
11
15
18
120
120
120
3.0
=100)LA
V
IR
V
IF'" 10 rnA
ns
pF
VF'" 0, f '" 1 MHz
°C/W Junction to
Cathode Lead
NOTES:
1. The dominant wavelength. Ad. is derived from the CIE chromaticity diagram and represents the single wavlength which defines the
color of the device.
2. Radiant intensity, Ie, in watts/steradian, may be found from the equation Ie ~ Iv/~v' Where Iv is the luminous intensity in candelas
and ~v is the luminous efficacy in lumens/watt.
6-'51
Absolute Maximum Ratings atTA=25'C
HIGH EFFICIENCY RED, YELLOW AND GREEN LAMPS
High Efficiency
Green
Yellow
Red
HlMP·l250/·L251 HlMP·L350/-L351 HLMP·1550/·l551
Parameter
Peak Forward Current
Average Forward Currentl11
DC Currentl:?l
Power Oissipationl 3 1
Reverse Voltage (lR - 100 JJA,)
Transient Forward Currentl 4l (i0 psee Pulse)
Operating Temperature Range
Storage Temperature Range
Lead Soldering Temperature
(a mm 10.063 in.1 from body)
60
20
20
65
5
500
90
25
30
135
5
500
-55 to +100
90
25
30
135
5
500
-20 to +100
-55 to +100
Unite
mA
mA
mA
mW
V
rnA
~C
260·C for 5 seconds
NOTES:
1. See Figure 3 to establish pulsed operating conditions.
2. For Red and Green Series derate linearly from 50' C at 0.5
mAl" C. For Yellow Series derate linearly from 50' C at 0.2
mN'C.
3. For Red and Green Series derate power linearly from 25' C
at 1.8 mW/' C. For Yellow Series derate power linearly from
50'C at 1.6 mW/'C.
4. The transient peak current is the maximum non-recurring
peak current that can be applied to the device without
damaging the LED die and wirebond. It is not recommended
that the device be operated at peak currents beyond the
peak forward current listed in the Absolute Maximum
Ratings.
90'1---+---+--1--+-===
Figure 1. Relative Luminous Intensity vs. Angular Displacement
1.0r----------.---~._--~~_r--------~~_.--------------~------------~
--------+--------_1
O.5f------------++---j!\-----+\--..,I------~.......
WAVELENGTH - nm
Figure 2. Relative Intensity vs. Wavelength
6-52
HIGH EFFICIENCY RED, YELLOW AND GREEN LAMPS
HER HLMP-L250, -L251
Yellow HLMP-L350, -L351
Green HLMP-L550, -L551
90
#
I
80
1/
)
1.5
0:
U
/
2.5
1.0
15
~V
1.2
w"'
>0:
>u
1.
yEt-LOW
1/
1
0.9
~
0.8
"
10
15
~ t:S
1''f-
VI
2.0
1.0
4.5
t--
fA
20
10
5.0
I
Af
,-........,'--------I-->.,--------l---------I
~~OO~---~--~~~-----~-~~------~--~------~~------~7~
WAVELENGTH - nm
Figure 2. Relative Intensity vs. Wavelength
6-56
HIGH EFFICIENCY RED, YELLOW AND GREEN LAMPS
HER HLMP-M2XX Series
Yellow HLMP-M3XX Series
Green HLMP-M5XX Series
90
~
BO
"E
70
I
I-
ffi
'a:"
"
i"E
";:a:
~
I
.!:
I
60
,.....
HIGH
EfflCIENCYJ
RED,
50
1/1/
40
30
20
10
jg
1.0
Figure 3. Maximum Tolerable Peak Current vs.
Pulse Duration. (Ioc MAX as per MAX Ratings.)
4.5
>I-
in_
wE
z"
~:=
",I-
""
00
i~
".... "....
4.0
I
3.5
3.0
2.0
~~
1.0
'"
0.5
"
>-
"JIGHiEFf!CIEJCY
RED AND GREEN
ffi"
u
-/
1.4
5.0
~
1.2
>
1. 1
~
1.0
I
0.9
YEL.lOW
~"
0.8
I
HIGH
EFFiCIENCY RED
/'"
II
/
1.3
I~ I/'
'f
w
-:::::
-'(
GREEN
/
III
;;
0.7
,/
5
4.0
YELLOW
a:
/
3.0
I.G
j
1.5
?VELLOW_ t----
rt
II/)
VI
2.0
1.5
'/
w"
>'"
0
t---- t----
Figure 4. Forward Current vs. Forward Voltage
/
2.5
~
I
VF - FORWARD VOLTAGE - V
tp - PULSE DURATION -ps
5.0
GRJEN
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
O.G
50
o
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
IPEAK - PEAK LED CURRENT - rnA
IDe - DC CURRENT PER LED rnA
Figure 5. Relative Luminous Intensity vs. Forward
Current. Nondlffused Devices.
Figure 6. Relative Efficiency (Luminous Intensity per Unit Current)
vs. Peak LED Current. Nondiffused Devices.
1.3
YELLOW
1.2
>I-
2.0
"ffi
U
§
in_
z"
~~
ZN
~~
/
1.5
00
zw
-N
,,,,""
"
1.0
....
w"
>'"
0
I-z
~-
/
.5
a:
---
V
V
w
V
g>
20
/
0.9
0.8
0.7
"~
O.G
"
15
l,.f. F"'"
1.0
25
I
o
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
IpEAK - PEAK CURRENT PER LED - rnA
IDe - DC CURRENT PER LED - rnA
Figure 7. Relative Luminous Intensity vs. Forward
Current. Diffused Devices.
-
dRIEEN
0.5
0.4
30
--
1/
w
V
10
1.1
'7
fE~
1"-,,, "
>-
Figure 8. Relative Efficiency (Luminous Intensity per Unit Current)
vs. Peak Current. Diffused Devices.
6-57
T-1 (3mm)
Flin-
a!e.
RED SOLID STATE LAMPS
HEWLETT
PACKARD
HlMP-1000 Series
HlMP-1200 Series
Features
- rr mr.nm
3.18 (.125)
2.61 [1Q5)
3.431.135)
• WIDE VIEWING ANGLE
• SMALL SIZE T-1 DIAMETER 3.18mm (0:125")
"'I
6.351t250)
t
4.io
~
mimi _~jl-----1 4.;a p 6s1
• IC COMPATIBLE
• RELIABLE AND RUGGED
Description
1.•2\'.4.,
JL
NOM.
24.13 ~O.95J
MIN.
The HLMP-1000 is a series of Gallium Arsenide Phosphide
Light Emitting Diodes designed for applications where
space is at a premium, such as in high density arrays.
OATHOO£-I--
The HLMP-1000 series is available in three lens configurations.
1.21LOSOIT'--J
NOM.
HLMP-1000 .,-- Red Diffused lens provides excellent on-off
contrast ratio, high axial luminous intensity, and wide viewing angle.
I
--- 2.54 to.1OO) NOMINAL
HLMP-1080 - Same as HLMP-1000, but untinted diffused to
mask red color in the "off" condition.
Figure A.
HLMP-1 071/-1201 - Untinted non-diffused plastic lens provides a point source. Useful when illuminating external lens,
annunciators, or photo-detectors.
Pari
Number
HLMP·
Iv (mcd)
@20mA
Package &
Lens Type
Min.
Typ.
_J
Viewing
Angle
201/2
-1000
A-Tinted
Diffused
,5
1.0
60"
-1002
A-Tinted
Diffused
1.5
2.5
60"
-1080
A-Untlnted
Diffused
.5
1.5
60'
A-Untinted
Non-Diffused
1.0
-1200
B-Untinted
Non-Dlffused
.5
1.0
120·
-1201
B-Untinted
Non-DJffuaed
1.5
2.5
120'
-1071
t-
4:)1
Typ.
~o
t-ii~HI
1--3.301.1301 MAX.
L
I~U£j
3.23 t.127)
11)
~L
24.1:1 (0.95)
MIN.
0.45 t.018t
CATHODE-
-+
I-----
h~~~~!L
'----
1.27t+{}Sms--i- :
2.0
NOM.
45'
I IJ.-I
-j
2.54 (0.100)
NOM1NAL
Figure B.
NOTES:
1, ALL OlMENSIONS ARE. IN Mltt.lMETAES (INCHES}.
2, Alii EPOXY MENt$¢US MAY EXHNO ABOUT 1mtll
(.040"1 DOWN THE LEApS.
6-58
Absolute Maximum Ratings at TA = 25° C
I IiMclHer
.
Dissipation
1000 Series
Units
100
mW
.
cDC.Forward Current (1)
50
mA
Average Forward CurrEln.i
50
mA
1000
mA
Peak Operating Forward Current
.CC> •• C
•.
·CCC.CC.
5
V
2000
mA
Reverse Voltage OR"" 100 !,Al
Transient Forward Currentl1! (10 !,sec Pulse)
Operating and Storage Temperature Range
-15°C to +100°C
26q~C for 5 seconds
cR~ad Solder TemperaWre (1,6 rum [0.06?lnChlbElI()wpaq~age base)
Note:
1. Derate linerarly from
sooe at 0.2 rnA/DC.
Electrical Characteristics at TA =25°C
Symbol
Parametilrs
ApEAK
Peak Wavelength
655
nm
Ad
Dominant Wavelength
648
nm
,',A112
Spectral Line Halfwidth
24
nm
TS
Speed of Response
10
ns
C
Capacitance
100
pF
8JC
Thermal Resistance
120
°C/W
VF
Forward Voltage
VR
Reverse Breakdown Voltage
Min,
Typ.
1.4
Max.
1,6
2.0
5
Units
Test Conditions
Measurement at Peak
VF = 0, f"" 1 MHz
Junction to Cathode Lead
V
IF "" 20 mA
V
IR
=100 JiA
HLMP-1200/-1201
50
.
40
~
30
2.60
<
~
~
,
~
..
--1---5
20
/
10
'I 1 1
I
00
0.4
0.8
1.2
1.6
2.0
:/
7
~-
10
20
30
50 90 1-----l--l----J---+'3i!ll--''::0·'':'20'::-·-:"30'::-'-"40C:-'-"so"""'607. ""70"'·...o~·9:':0:-:-'100°
Q
0
40
IF - FORWARD CURRENT - rnA
FORWARD CURRENT - VOLTAGE CHARACTERISTICS
Figure 1, Forward Current vs,
Voltage Characteristic.
Z-
/
0
-"
L
r-~-
5
W
~
I-~
-
2
~
<
-
Figure 2. Luminous Intensity vs.
Forward Current (IF),
HLMP-1000/-1002/-10BO
Figure 4. Relative Luminous Intensity vs. Angular Displacement.
Figure 3. Typical Relative Luminous
Intensity vs. Angular Displacement.
HLMP-1071
Figure 5. Relative Luminous Intensity vs. Angular Displacement.
6-59
T-1 (3mm)
Flin-
DIFFUSED SOLID STATE LAMPS
HEWLETT
HIGH EFFICIENCY RED •
ORANGE •
YELLOW •
HIGH PERFORMANCE GREEN.
~~ PACKARD
HLMP-1300 SERIES
HLMP-K400 SERIES
HLMP-1400 SERIES
HLMP-1500 SERIES
Features
• HIGH INTENSITY
• CHOICE OF 4 BRIGHT COLORS
High Efficiency Red
Orange
Yellow
High Performance Green
• POPULAR T-1 DIAMETER PACKAGE
• SELECTED MINIMUM INTENSITIES
• WIDE VIEWING ANGLE
• GENERAL PURPOSE LEADS
• RELIABLE AND RUGGED
• AVAILABLE ON TAPE AND REEL
package Dimensions
Description
This family of T-l lamps is widely used in general purpose
indicator applications. Diffusants, tints, and optical design
are balanced to yield superior light output and wide viewing
angles. Several intensity choices are available in each color
for increased design flexibility.
Part
Number
HLMp·
1300
General Purpose
1.0
1301
General Purpose
2.0
1302
High Ambient
3.0
1385
Premium lamp
6.0
K400
General purpose
1.0
K401
High Ambient
2.0
K402
Premium lamp
3.0
1400
General Purpose
1.0
1401
General Purpose
2.0
1402
High Ambient
3.0
1485
Premium Lamp
6.0
1503
General Purpose
1.0
1523
High Ambient
2.6
1585
Premium Lamp
4.0
~ 0.46 HW18, SQUARE NOM.
CATHODE
"
)j L
27NOM.50
10.0
2.5410.100)
NOM.
NOTES;
1. At.l OIMENSIONS ARE rN MIi..J..IMETRES !INCHES).
2. AN EPOXy MENISCt)S MAY EXTENOAa.O\,.JT lmm
(-Q'{)4O-"i DOWN THE LEADS,
6-60
Applicallon
Minimum
Intensity
(mcd) at 10mA
Color
(Material)
High
Efficiency
Red
(GaAsP
on GaP)
Orange
(GaAsP
on GaP)
Yellow
(GaAsP
on GaP)
Green
(GaP)
Electrical Characteristics at TA = 25°C
Symbol
Qescrlptlon
Iv
(uminous Intensity
20112
ApEAK
Ad
~A1I2
TS
C
I"'"
Device
High Efficiency Red
13,00
1301
1302
1385
Orange
K400
K401
K402
Yellow
1400
1401
1402
1485
Green
1503
1523
1585
Min.
'TYP.
1.0
2.0
3.0
6.0
2.0
2.5
4.0
10.0
to
2.0
3.0
2.0
2.5
4.0
to
2.0
3.0
6.0
2.0
3.0
4.0
10.0
1.0
2.6
4.0
2.0
4.0
6.0
Max.
Units
Test Condillons
~
mcd
IF'" 10 mA
60
Deg.
IF'" 10 mA
See Note 1
High Efficiency Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
635
603
583
565
nm
Measurement at Peak
High Efficiency Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
626
608
585
569
nm
See Note 2
Spectral Line
Halfwidth
High Efficiency Red
Yellow
Green
40
36
28
nm
Speed of Response
High Efficiency Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
90
280
90
500
ns
High Efficiency Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
11
4
15
18
pF
120
°CfW
Including Angle
Between Half
Luminous Intensity
Points
Peak Wavelength
Dominant Wavelength
Capacitance
All
8JC
Thermal Resistance
All
VF
Forward Voltage
HER/Orange
Yellow
Green
t5
1,5
1.5
5.0
VA
Reverse Breakdown Volt.
AU
rJv
Luminous Efficacy
High Efficiency Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
2.2
2.2
2.3
145
262
500
595
3.0
3.0
3.0
VF '" 0; f '" 1 MHz
Junction to Cathode'
Lead
V
IF=10mA
V
IR = 100 p.A
lumens
Watt
See Note 3
NOTES:
1. 0112 is the off-axis angle at which the luminous intensity is half the axial luminous intensity.
2. The dominant wavelength, Ad, is derived from the CIE chromaticity diagram and represents the single wavelength which defines the
color of the device.
3. Radiant intensity, Ie, in watts/steradian, may be found from the equation Ie = Iv/~v. where Iv is the luminous intensity in can del as and ~
is the luminous efficacy in lumens/watt.
6-61
Absolute Maximum Ratings at TA
HER/Orange
Yellow
Peak forward Current
90
60
Average Forward Current l11
25
20
DC Current l21
30
20
Power Dissipation l3J
135
Parameter
Reverse Voltage OR = 100 pAl
Units
90
rnA
25
rnA
30
rnA
135
rnW
5
5
5
V
500
500
500
rnA
-55 to +100
-55 to +100
Transient Forward Current l41 (10 psee Pulse)
Operating Temperature Range
±=
Green
Storage Temperature Range
-20 to +100
'0
-55 to +100
260· 0 for 5 seconds
Lead Soldering Temperature 11.6 mm (0.063 in.) from body]
NOTES:
1. See Figure 5 (Red/Orange). 10 (Yellow) or 15 (Green) to establish pulsed
4. The transient peak current is the maximum non-recurring peak current
that can be applied to the device without damaging the LED die and
operating conditions.
2. For Red, Orange, and Green series derate linearly from 50' C at 0.5
mAIo C. For Yellow series derate linearly from 500 Cat 0.2 mAID C.
wirebond. It is not recommended that the device be operated at peak
currents beyond the peak forward current listed in the Absolute Maximum
3. For Red, Orange, and Green series derate power linearly from 25°C at 1,8
mW/oC. For Yellow series derate power linearly from 50°C at 1.6 mW/oC.
Ratings.
1.0
~
~
w
HIOH EFFICIi:.NCY
••0
0.'
~
~
0
500
700
750
WAVELENGTH - nm
Figure 1. Relative Intensity vs. Wavelength
T-1 High Efficiency Red, Orange Diffused lamps
1.6r-...-......--,.-,--...-.,......,.-,.....-,
90
BO
1,
70
~
80
~
a
~
~
~
.
...,
50
20
10
5.0
IDe - DC CURRENT PER L.ED - mA
VF - FORWARO VOL. TAGE - V
Figure 2. Forward Current vs. Forward
Voltage Characteristics.
Figure 3. Relative Luminous tntenslty
vs. DC Forward Current.
IpEAK - PEAK CURRENT PER L.ED - mA
Figure 4. Relative Elllclency (Luminous
Intensity per Unit Current)
vs. Peak LED Current.
100'
tp - PUL.SE DURATION -1'5
Figure 5. Maximum Toterable Peak Current vs. Putse
Duration. (Ioc MAX as per MAX Ratings).
Figure 6. Relative Luminous tntensity vs. Angular Disptacement.
6-62
T-1 Yellow Diffused Lamps
2. 5
I
TA ..
I
II
0
0
0
I
0
0
1.0
1.5
25~C
/
5
0
/
A
0
2.0
2.5
30
VF • FORWARD VOLTAGE -
35
1.5
g
/
/
5
1.6
/
/
,/
V
~
1.3
~
1.2
~
::;
1
i
1. 0
~
9
/
20
V
/
.7 0
4.0
If - FORWARD CURRENT - rnA
Figure 8. Relative Luminous Intensity
vs. Forward Current.
V
/
6
15
10
v
Figure 7. Forward Current vs. Forward
Voltage Characteristics.
,/'
u
10
20
30
40
50
60
IpEAK - PEAK CURRENT - mA
Figure 9. Relative Efficiency
(Luminous Intensity per Unit
Current) vs. Peak Current.
100"
tp - PULSE DURATION -I-'S
Figure 11. Relative Luminous Intensity vs. Angular Displacement.
Figure 10. Maximum Tolerable Peak Current
vs. Pulse Duration. (Ioc MAX
as per MAX Ratings.)
T-1 Green Diffused Lamps
0
7
0
0
I
0
I
,
s
/
0
s
0
I
0
V
5
0
0
0
10
/
0
II
VF - FORWARD VOLTAGE - V
Figure 12. Forward Current vs. Forward
Voltage Characteristics.
~
1.4
f3
1.3
ffi
1. 2
,
0
/
5
oL
20
5
>
/
: f
10
15
20
25
30
3540
IpEAK - PEAK CURRENT PER LED - rnA
Figure 13. Relative Luminous Intensity
vs. Forward Currenl.
7
0'0102030405060
70
80 90100
IpEAK -PEAK CURRENT PER LED - rnA
Figure 14. Relative Efficiency (Luminous
Intensity per Unit Current)
vs. Peak LED Current.
tp - PULSE DURATION -I'S
Figure 15. Maximum Tolerable Peak Current
vs. Pulse Duration. (Ioc MAX
as per MAX Ratings.)
Figure.16. Relative Luminous Intensity vs. Angular Displacement.
6-63
FliOW
LOW PROFILE T-1 (3mm) LED LAMPS
HEWLETT
~~ PACKARD
High Efficiency Red HLMP-1350
Yellow HLMP-1450
High Performance Green HlMP-1550
Features
package Dimensions
• LOW PROFILE HEIGHT
• SMALL T-1 SIZE DIAMETER
3.18 mm (.125 inch)
• HIGH INTENSITY
• IC COMPATIBLE
• CHOICE OF 3 BRIGHT COLORS
High Efficiency Red
Yellow
High Performance Green
Description
NOns:
t. AU, DIMENSI[)NSARE IN
This family of solid state lamps is especially suited for
applications where small package size is required without
sacrificing luminous intensity. The HLMP-1350 is a red
tinted, diffused lamp providing a wide viewing angle. The
HLMP-1450 and HLMP-1550 are similar products in yellow
and green respectively.
MILiIMETRE'S (INCHll.sl.
2. AN t;:POx-Y MENISCUS MAY
EXTEND ABOUT 1fl'1fll
(."040". DOWN THE LEADS
Axial Luminous Intensity and viewing Angle @ 25°C
Part
Number
HLMP-
Min.
Typ.
Test
Condition
rnA
IV (mcd)
Description
201/2
(Typ.)
[1]
Ad
(nm-Typ.)
[2]
626
High Efficiency
Red
Color
1350
Tinted, Wide Angle
1.0
2.0
10
55'
1450
Tinted. Wide Angle
2.0
2.0
55'
585
Yellow
Tinted, Wide Angle
1.0
1.0
10
1550
10
55'
569
Green
NOTES:
1. 01/2 is the off-axis angle at which the luminous intensity is half the axial intensity.
2. The dominant wavelength, Ad, is derived from the CIE chromaticity diagram and represents the single wavelength which defines
the color of the devi!;e.
For Maximum Ratings and Electrical/Optical Characteristics (including figures) see HLMP-1300/-1400/-1500 data
sheet, publication number 5953-7735, except for Figure A
shown here.
Figure A. Relative Luminous Intensity vs. Angular Displacement.
6-64
--~-----,-,--------
-
~------,
---------
._--
IIIU3 HEWLETT
1L'7'~ PACKARD
Features
• HIGH INTENSITY
• CHOICE OF 3 BRIGHT COLORS
High Efficiency Red
Yellow
High Performance Green
• POPULAR T-1 DIAMETER PACKAGE
• SELECTED MINIMUM INTENSITIES
• NARROW VIEWING ANGLE
• GENERAL PURPOSE LEADS
• RELIABLE AND RUGGED
• AVAILABLE ON TAPE AND REEL
package Dimensions
Description
This family of T-1 lamps is specially designed for applications requiring higher on-axis intensity than is achievable
with a standard lamp. The light generated is focused to a
narrow beam to achieve this effect.
Pari
Number
HLMP-
f
1.021.040)
NOM.
1320
1321
Description
Untinted
Non-Diffused
Tinted
Non-Diffused
CATHODE
°11
1420
1421
NOMINj\~
5
1.27l.O
-
1520
2.54 {.1001
NOMINAl.
1521
NOTES,
1. ALlDllIIENSIONSARE INMILLIIIIETRES (INCHES),
2. AN EPOXY Mf!NISCUS MAY EXHND ABOUT lmm
{,040··' DOWN THE LEADS-
6-65
Untinted
Non-Diffused
Tinted
Non-Diffused
Untinted
Non-Diffused
Tinted
Non-Diffused
Minimum
Intensity
(mcd)
al10 rnA
8.6
8.6
9.2
6.0
4.2
4.2
Color
(Material)
High
Efficiency
Red
!GaAsP
on GaP)
Yellow
(GaAsP
on GaP)
Green
(GaP)
--"-'
Electrical Characteristics at TA = 25°C
Symbol Description
Iv
Luminous Intensity
Device
HLMP·
Min.
Typ.
1320
1321
8.6
3.6
12.0
12.0
mcd
IF'" 10 mA (Figure 3)
1420
1421
9.2
12.0
12.0
mcd
IF" 10 mA (Figure 8)
6.0
1520
1521
4.2
4.2
5.0
5.0
mcd
IF" 10 mA (Figure 3)
Max. Unils
Test Conditions
20 1/2
Including Angle
Between Half
Luminous Intensity Points
All
45
Deg.
IF" 10 mA
See Note 1
(Figures 6, 11, 16, 21)
ApEAK
Peak Wavelength
132X
142X
152X
635
583
565
nm
Measurement at Peak
(Figure 1)
IlA 112
Spectral Line Halfwidth
132X
142X
152X
40
36
28
nm
I\d
Dominant Wavelength
132X
142X
152X
626
585
569
nm
TS
Speed of Response
132X
142X
152X
90
90
500
ns
C
Capacitance
132X
142X
152X
11
15
18
pF
8JC
Thermal Resistance
Ali
VF
Forward Voltage
132X
142X
152X
1.5
1.5
1.5
VR
Reverse Breakdown Voltage
All
5.0
'Iv
Luminous Efficacy
120
"C/W
2.2
2.2
\ 2.3
V
3.0
3.0
3.0
145
500
595
132X
142X
152X
See Note 2 (Figure 1)
VF = 0; f" 1 MHz
Junction to Cathode Lead
IF"'10mA
V
IR"1001'A
lumens
See Note 3
'"Wait
Notes:
3. Radiant intensity, Ie, in watts/steradian, may be found from the equation
Ie = Iv/1Jv, where Iv is the luminous intensity in candelas and 1Jv is the
luminous efficacy in lumens/watt.
1. Eh/2 is the off-axis angle at which the luminous intensity is half the axial
luminous intensity.
2. The dominant wavelength, Ad. is derived from the erE chromaticity
diagram and represents the single wavelength which defines the color of
the device.
Absolute Maximum Ratings at TA
= 25°C
Red
Yellow
Gireen
Units
Peak Forward Current
90
60
90
mA
Average Forward Current!11
25
20
25
mA
DC Current!21
30
20
SO
mA
Power Dissipationl31
135
85
135
mW
5
5
5
V
500
500
500
mA
-5510+100
-20 to +100
-55 to +100
·C
Parameter
Reverse Voltage OR '" 100 I'Al
Transient Forward Currentl4! (10
,"sec Pulse)
~emperature Range
emperature Range
-5510+100
260· C for 5 seconds
Lead Soldering Temperature
(1,6 mm {0.063 InJ from bodyj
6-66
NOTES:
1. See FigureSIRedl. 10 IYeliowl. or 1SIGreeni to establish pulsed operating conditions.
2. For Red and Green series derate linearly from SO°C at O.S mAloC. For Yellow series derate linearly from SO'C at 0.2 mAl'C.
3. For Red and Green series derate power linearly from 2S'C at 1.8 mW/'C. For Yellow series derate power linearly from SO'C at 1.6 mW/oC.
4. The transient peak current is the maximum non-recurring peak current that can be applied to the device without damaging the LED die
and wirebond. It is not recommended that the device be operated at peak currents beyond the peak forward current listed in the
Absolute Maximum Ratings.
1.0
~
~
~
~
w
0.5
2
~
0
500
750
WAVELENGTH - nm
Figure 1. Relative Intensity vs. Wavelength
T-1 High Efficiency Red Non-Diffused
0
0
0
0
I ojjji
I
,
I
01----
'I----
W
0
o
~~
0
0
0
1.0
V
0
0
'.0
3.0
Figure 2. Forward Current vs. Forward
Voltage Characteristics
tp -
PULSE DURATION
5
1--"-
4
1/
/
3
/
I
2
/
v
II
0
9
10
15
25
IDe - DC CURRENT PER LED - rnA
VF - FORWARD VOL TAG E - V
I.'
1
'/
2.0
q
,
I
/
Figure 3. Relative Luminous Inlenslly
vs. DC Forward Current
I
o., I
o.7
o
10
20
~
~
~
~
70
80
Figure 4. Relative Efficiency
(Luminous Intensity per Unit
Current) vs. Peak LED Current
-I'~
Figure 5. Maximum Tolerable Peak
Current vs. Pulse Duration.
(locMAX as per MAX Ratings)
Figure 6. Relative Luminous Intensity vs. Angular Displacement
6-67
00
IpEAK - PEAK CURRENT PER LEO - mA
T-1 Yellow Non-Diffused
'.B
2.S...---,---r--.,---"
~
2.'
h
w.!i
i
~~~~~---+~-
1l~.
"~~~~--f'--
~e
i
2O~"""'~~-I
;!
!~
~~
~i
~-
',.
~~
!;~
d
1.3
t~
'.2
u~
1.5
wQ
ww
~~
,~
:l~
wa:
a:~
.5
...
...
.,....
,.
S
u
\If - FORWARD VOLTAGE· V
Figure 7. Forward Current vs.
Forward Voltage
Characteristics
IF - FORWARD CURRENT - mA
Figure 8. Relative Luminous Intensity
vs. Forward Current
'PIEAK - Pl!AK CURRENT - mA
Figure 9. Relative Efficiency
(Luminous Intensity per Unit
Current) vs. Peak Current
tp - PULSE DURATION -~,
Figure 10. Maximum Tolerable Peak Current
vs. Pulse Duration. (IDCMAX
as per MAX Ratings)
Figure 11. Relative Luminous Intensity vs. Angular Displacement
T-1 Green NOn.,Diffused
I,. - FORWARD CURRENT - mA
VF - FORWARD VOLTAGE_V
Figure 12. Forward Current vs.
Forward Voltage
Characteristics
Figure 13. Relative Luminous Intensity
vs. Forward Current
"EAK - PEAK CURRENT PEA LED - mAo
Figure 14. Relative Efficiency
(Luminous Intensity per Unit
Current) vs. Peak LED Current
I
tp - PULSE DURATION -,ul
Figure 15. Maximum Tolerable Peak Current
vs. Pulse Duration. (locMAX
as per MAX Ratings)
Figure 16. Relative Luminous Intensity vs. Angular Displacement
6-68
T-1 3/4 (Smm)
RED SOLID STATE LAMPS
HLMP-3000
HLI\t1P-3Q01
HLMp·3002
HLMP-3003
HlMP·30S0
Features
•
•
•
•
LOW COST, BROAD APPLICATIONS
LONG LIFE, SOLID STATE RELIABILITY
LOW P-OWERREQUIREMENTS: 20 mA @ 1.6V
HIGH LIGHT OUTPUT:
2.0 mcd Typical for HLMP-3000
4.0 mcd Typical for HLMP-3001
• WIDE AND NARROW VIEWING ANGLE TYPES
• RED DIFFUSED AND NON-DIFFUSED
VERSIONS
Description
The HLMP-3000 series lamps are Gallium Arsenide
Phosphide light emitting diodes intended for High Volume/
Low Cost applications such as indicators for appliances.
smoke detectors. automobile instrument panels and many
other commercial uses.
The HLMP-3000/-3001/-3002/-3003 have red diffused
lenses where as the HLMP-3050 has a red non-diffused
lens. These lamps can be panel mounted using mounting
clip HLMP-0103. The HLMP-3000/-3001 lamps have .025"
leads and the HLMP-3002/-3003/-3050 have .018" leads.
NOTES:
1. The transient peak current is the maximum non-recurring peak current that
can be applied to the device without damaging the LED die and wirebond. It
is not recommended that the device be operated at peak currents beyond the
peak forward current listed in the Absolute Maximum Ratings.
Absolute Maximum Ratings
at TA = 25°C
~pation
DC Forward Current IDerate
100
50
Urilts
mW
mA
50
1000
5
2000
mA
rnA
V
mA
3000 Series
linearly from 50°C at 0.2 mN°C)
Average Forward Cu rrent
Peak Operating Forward Current
Reverse VoltaQe IIR = 100 itA)
Transient Forward Currentl 1 1
(10 I'sec Pulse)
Operating and Storage Temperature Range
Lead Solder Temperature (1.6 mm
[0.063 inch] below package base)
-55° C to +10Qo C
260· C for 5 seconds
package Dimensions
HLMP·3002/-3003/-3050
1--->1-- ~;:"'~
t
tWoi
HLMP-3000/-3001
NOTES:
1, AI..L DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETRES{lNCHES).
2, AN EPOXY MENISCUS MAY EXTEND A60UT lmm
, (.040"1 DOWN THE l.EADS.
~<~~-t
~'1J
n1nl
6,1 tMO)
5.6 <'ZJO}
/"-'~
CATHOOE
_
CATHODE
6-69
O~
2.54 ,.100) NOM.
Electrical Characteristics at TA=25°C
Symbol
Description
Luminous Intensity
Iv
Oevlce HLMP·
Min.
Typ.
30oof3002
3001/3003
1.0
2.0
1.0
2.0
4.0
2.5
60
Included Angle Between
Half Luminous
Intensity Points
Peak Wavelength
20112
Ap
Dominant Wavelength
Ad
3050
3000/3002
3001/3003
3050
Units Tesl Conditions
med IF=20 mA
med if=20 rnA
med IF=20 mA
De9· IF=20 rnA
Max.
60
24
655
655
655
648
3000/3002
3001/3003
3050
3000/3002
nm
Measurement at Peak
om
3001/3003
Spectral Line Halfwidlh
AA1J2
3050
3000/3002
24
nm
10
os
100
pF
3001/3003
3050
Speed of Response
TS
C
Capacitance
(-lJC
Thermal Resistance
3000/3002
3001/3003
3050
3000/3002
3001/3003
3050
VF
forward Voltage
VB
Reverse Breakdown
Voltage
3000/3002
'C/W Junction to Cathode Lead
95
120
120
1.6
3000/3001
3002/3003
3050
1.4
VF = 0, f - 1 MHz.
2.0
V
If - 20 mA (Fig, 2)
V
IR-l00IlA
300113003
3050
3000/3002
5,0
3001/3003
3050
2.50
50
40
2.25
....>-
30
"
E
0;
....:ii
20
~
....
:ii
'"
"'"
"'"0
~
::w
10
/"
I
2.00
I
/
1.75
/
1.50
2
u
"'"5:
"'"
>
;:
~
~
1.25
/
1.00
.75
/
a:
.50
-~
.25
1
1.40
/
/
.,./
o
o
1.70
/
10
20
30
40
50
IF - FORWARD CURRENT - rnA
V F - FORWARD VOLTAGE - VOLTS
Figure 1. Forward Current Versus Forward Voltage
Figure 2. Relative Luminous Intensity Versus Forward Current
O.5f-----I-----I-----I!--\----f------4
500
550
600
WAVELENGTH - nm
Figure 3, Relative Luminous Intensity Versus Angular
Displacement.
FIgure 4. Relative LumInous Intensity Versus Wavelength.
6-70
750
T·1 3/4 (Smm)
DIfi=FUSf;D SOLtD t
PS
HICH E~~ICIENC\1w ED
ORANGE
YELLOW
HIGH I?ERFiRMANCE &IEN ~
Features
o
HIGH INTENSITY
o
CHOICE OF 4 BRIGHT COLORS
High Efficiency Red
Orange
Yellow
High Performance Green
o POPULAR T-1'I4 DIAMETER PACKAGE
o SELECTED MINIMUM INTENSITIES
o WIDE VIEWING ANGLE
o GENERAL PURPOSE LEADS
o RELIABLE AND RUGGED
o AVAILABLE ON TAPE AND REEL
Description
This family of T-1% lamps is widely used in general purpose
indicator applications. Oiffusants, tints, and optical design
are balanced to yield superior light output and wide viewing
angles. Several intensity choices are available in each color
for increased design flexibility.
package Dimensions
~WL200j
Part
Number
HUJlP-
Application
Minimum
Intensity
(mod) at 10mA
3300
General Purpose
2.1
3301
High Ambient
4.0
3762
Premium Lamp
8.0
0400
General Purpose
2.1
0401
High Ambient
4.0
3400
General Purpose
2.2
3401
High Ambient
4.0
3862
Premium Lamp
8.0
3502
General Purpose
1.6
3507
High Ambient
4.2
3962
Premium Lamp
8.0
4.57 (.180)
T
0i,45j..o'1I1 SQUARE.
NQMINAL
I
I
LL
""
..011··
NOM.
NOTES:
1. ALL OIMENSIONS At:I£IN MII.LlMETRES IINCH~SI
Z. AN epoxy MENISCUSMAV EXTEND ABOUT lmm.
I 040") DOWN THE lEADS.
6-71
Color
(Material)
High
Efficiency
Red
(GaAsP
on GaP)
Orange
(GaAsP
on GaP)
Yellow
(GaAsP
on GaP)
Green
(GaP)
565nm
·Electrical Characteristics at TA =25°C
Symbol Parameter
Iv
201/2
APEAK
A)" 1/2
Ad
1's
C
(JJC
VF
VR
tlv
Luminous Intensity
Device
HLMP-
Min.
TYP·
High Efficiency Red
3300
3301
3762
2.1
4.0
8.0
3.5
7.0
15.0
Orange
D400
0401
2.1
4.0
3.5
7.0
Yellow
3400
3401
3862
2.2
4.0
8.0
4.0
8.0
12.0
Green
3502
3507
3962
1.6
4.2
8.0
2.4
5.2
11.0
Including Angle
Between Half
Luminous Intensity
Points
High Efficiency Red
Peak Wavelength
High Efficiency Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
60
60
60
Orange
Yellow
Green
HER/Orange
Yellow
Green
Dominant Wavelength
High Efficiency Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
626
608
585
569
High Efficiency Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
90
280
90
500
High Efficiency Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
11
4
15
18
Thermal Resistance
All
140
Forward Voltage
HER/Orange
Yellow
Green
1.5
1.5
1.5
Reverse Breakdown Voltage
All
5.0
Luminous Efficacy
High Efficiency Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
Capacitance
Units
Test Conditions
mcd
IF" 10 mA
Oeg.
IF" 10 mA
See Note 1
nm
Measurement at Peak
60
635
612
583
565
Spectral Line
Halfwidth
Speed of Response
Max.
40
36
28
2.2
2.2
2.3
145
262
500
595
nm
nm
See Note 2
ns
pF
·CIW
3.0
$.0
3.0
V
VF"'O;f=lMHz
Junction to Cathode
Lead
iF= 10 mA
V
h'l = 100 p.A
lumens
See Note 3
Watt
NOTES:
1. (-)1/2 is the off-axis angle at which the luminous intensity is half the axial luminous intensity.
2. The dominant wavelength, Ad, is derived from the CIE chromaticity diagram and represents the sin91e wavelength which defines the
color of the device.
3. Radiant intensity, Ie, in watts/steradian, may be found from the equation Ie = Iv/T/V, where Iv is the luminous intensity in candelas and T/V
is the luminous efficacy in lumens/watt.
6-72
Absolute Maximum Ratings at TA = 25°C
Ii!ER/Orange
Yellow
90
60
rnA
-5510+100
-55 to +100
·C
Green
Units
Transient Forward Curreli'!1 41(10 !,sec Pulse)
Operating Temperature Range
NOTES:
1. See Figure 5 (Red/Orange), 10 (Yellow) or 15 (Green) to establish pulsed
operating conditions.
2. For Red, Orange, and Green series derate linearly from 5011 C at 0.5
mA/o C. For Yellow series derate linearly from 500 Cat 0.2 mA/o C.
For Red, Orange. and Green series derate power linearly from 25° C at
3. 18 mW/o C. For Yellow series derate power linearly from 50° C at 1.6
mW/"C.,
4. The transient peak current is the maximum non-recurring peak current
that can be applied to the device without damaging the LED die and
wirebond. It is not recommended that the device be operated at peak
currents beyond the peak forward current listed in the Absolute Maximum
Ratings.
,.o.--------,--,...-~"'_;__."""',____."""'-_.------r_-----,
1:
HIGH EFFICIENCY
~
~,o
~
O.51_-------l-f--,I'r--fPr--f--~-~~-----I_-----_l
w
"~
WAVELENGTH - nm
Figure 1. Relative Intensity vs. Wavelength
T-1 3A1 High Efficiency Red, Orange Diffused Lamps
0
0
I
o
II
I
I
o
10
V
20
30
t-
T+
~
~~
"
~
u
~:=
I
I
I
II
0
0
40
A I
/' I
0
~
~~
c- ..
r1-
-~- -- t-
~ffi
.,
..
::~
><
~~
g-
0.5
40
VF _ FORWARD VOLTAGE - V
Figure 2. Forward Current vs. Forward
Voltage Characteristics.
IDe - DC CURRENT PER LED - rnA
Figure 3. Relative Luminous Intensity
vs. DC Forward Current.
IpEAIt - PEAK CURRENT PER LED - rnA
Figure 4. Relative Efficiency (Luminous
Intensity per Unit Current) vs.
LED Peak Current.
-+'r..::1~!--t-+--IO.2
tp -
PULSE DURATION -,..,
Figure 5. Maximum Tolerable Peak Current vs. Pulse
Duration. (IDC MAX as per MAX Ratings
Figure 6. Relative Luminouslntensltyvs.Angular
Displacement.
6-73
T-1 3;4 Yellow Diffused Lamps
2.'
~
lA
~4
20
~~
..,
Wg
~~
~<
"25~C
V
~@
~j
w·
~<
>«
-0
~~
'.0
/
.,
L
00
VF - FORWARD VOLTAGE - V
Figure 7. Forward Current vs. Forward
Voltage Characteristics.
/
'0
/
/
15
.7 0
20
10
20
30
40
50
60
'PEAl< - PEAK CURRENT:' rnA
'F - FORWARD CURRENT - mA
Figure 8. Relative Luminous Intensity
vs. Forward Current.
Figure 9. Relative Efficiency (Luminous
Intensity per Unit Current) vs.
Peak Current.
lrt11-t-t--t--t--t--t--f=r""t--j 0.2
90'1--_+-_+__+_-£
Ip - PULSE DURATION - 115
Figure 10. Maximum Tolerable Peak Current vs. Pulse
Duration. (IDC MAX as per MAX Ratings)
Figure 11. Relative Luminous Intensity vs. Angular
Displacement.
T-1 % Green Diffused Lamps
·
·
·
..
90
u
2.0
I
I
1.5
I
fil
N
Cl
:J
e:
~
<{
1r
;;;
"e:
e:
1.0
0
.5
1.70
Vi
o
o
V F - FORWARD VOLTAGE - V
Figure 2. Forward Current versus
Forward Voltage.
/
10
/
_. 1-
/'
>~
/
uE
ffi:=
- r----
~~
:to
WW
w~
-~
r----
~
,.....
1.20
1.10
>~
i=~
:Ie:
l-
I
II
I
wO
e:~
20
30
40
50
IF - FORWARD CURRENT - rnA
Figure 3. Relative Luminous Intensity
versus Forward Current.
1.00
o
o
20
IpEAK -
40
60
Figure 4. Relative Efficiency
(Luminous Intensity
per Unit Current)
versus Peak Current.
tp - PULSE DURATION -IJ-S
Figure 5. Maximum Tolerable Peak Current v'ersus Pulse
Duration. ilDe MAX as per MAX Ratings)
Figure 6: Relative Luminous Intensity versus
Angular Displacement.
6-76
80
PEAK CURRENT - mA
100
GREEN HlMP-3550 SERIES
Electrical Specifications at TA=25°C
Min.
Typ.
Axial Luminous Intensity
,3553
3554
3567
3568
1.6
6.7,
4.2
10.6
3.2
10.0
7.0
,15.0
"IQcluded Angle'Between
Hall Luminous Intensity
Points
3553
3554
3567
3568
Description
Iv
20112
,
Device
1'j~,fI{'IP~
Symbol
Maj(.
50 ,
Units Test Conditions
mcd
IF = 10 mA (Fig. 18)
Deg.
Note 1 (Figure 21)
50
40
40
APEAK
Peah Wayelength
565
nm
Measurement at Peak (Fig. 1)
Ad
Dominant Wavelength
569
nm
Note 2
..'.A1/2
Spectral Line Halfwidth
28
nm
T5
Speed of Response
500
ns
C
Capacitance
18
pF
OJC
Thermal Resistance
120
VF
Forward Volli:lge
1,5
VR
Reverse Breakdown
Voltage
5.0
'Iv
Luminous Efficacy
2.3
VF
= 0; 1= 1 MHz
°C/W Junction to Cathode Lead
3.0
V
IF = 10 mA (Fig. 17)
V
IR=100jlA
ImIW Note 3
595
Notes: 1.8112 is the off-axis angle at which the luminous intensity is half the axial luminous intensity. 2. Dominant wavelength, A.ct, is derived from the CI E
chromaticity diagram and represents the single wavelength which defines the color of the device. 3. Radiant Intensity Ie. in watts/steradian may be found
from the equation Ie = Iv/flv. where Iv is the luminous intensity in candelas and T'iv is the luminous efficacy in lumens/watt.
90
1
1. 3
/
BO
0
I
>
t-
/
o;_
~
0
2"
wE
t-o
2N
::l
0
00
I
'"'"
"'"
~~
/
OJ
Q
~
40
~~
,,~"
w"
>'"
::l~
II
30
~
20
/
10
°
1.0
iE
u
~
1,0
'"
"~
~-
3.0
4,0
0
I
0, B
0, 7
0, 6
/
I
~
0, 5
0. 4
5,0
Figure 17. Forward Current versus
Forward Voltage.
"
-
./"
>
'"
VF - FORWARD VOLTAGE - V
1
~w "0,9
1.5
t-2
/
2,0
1;
_0
I
.'--
2
2,0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
II' - FORWARD CURRENT - mA
IpEAK - PEAK CURRENT PER LED - rnA
Figure 18. Relative Luminous Intensity
versus Forward Current.
Figure 19. Relative Efficiency
(Luminous Intensity
per Unit Current)
versus Peak Current.
tp - PULSE DURATION - J-lS
Figure 20. Maximum Tolerable Peak Current versus Pulse
Duration. (IDe MAX as per MAX ratings).
Figure 21. Relative Luminous Intensity versus
Angular Displacement.
6-77
90
HIGH EFFICIENCY RED HLMP-3350 SERIES
Electrical Specifications at TA =25°C
Device
HLMP-
Min.
Typ.
Axial Luminous Intensity
3350
3351
3365
3366
2.0
5.0
7.0
12.0
3.5
7.0
10,0
18.0
281/2
Included Angle Between
Half Luminous Intensity
Points
3350
3351
3365
3366
Symbol
Description
Iv
Max.
Units Test Conditions
mcd
IF"'" 10 mA (Fig, 8)
Oeg. Note 1 (Fig.
50
50
45
45
11)
AP
Peak Wavelength
635
nm
Measurement at Peak (Fig. II
Ad
Dominant Wavelength
626
nm
Note 2
AA1/2
Spectral Line Halfwidth
40
nm
T$
Speed of Response
90
ns
C
Capacitance
16
liJC
Thermal Resistance
120
VF
Forward Voltage
1.5
VR
Reverse Breakdown
Voltage
5.0
'Iv
Luminous Efficacy
pF
VF=O; f= 1 MHz
·C/W Junction to Cathode Lead
2.2
S.O
145
V
IF = 10 mA (Fig. 7l
V
IR= 100pA
Im/W NoteS
Notes: 1. Ow, is tM off-axis angle at which the luminous intensity is half the axial luminous intensity. 2. Dominant wavelength, ~d, is derived from the CIE
chromaticity diagram and represents the single wavelength which-aefines the color of the device. 3. Radiant Intensity Ie, in watts/steradian may be found
from the equation Ie = Iv/11v. where Iv is the lUminous intensity in candelas and 11v is the luminous efficacy in lumens/watt.
4.0
90
I
>
t: '
~~
/
0
I
I
II
0
0
o
1.0
V
2.0
~~
/
~~
00
~~
::J'"
~i
H=
3.0
4.0
2. 0
1.
a:
O.
5.0
Figure 7. Forward Current versus
Forward Voltage,
V
1.5
~~
>-
"til
"
/
5
~o
VF - FORWARD VOLTAGE -V
V
3.0
2.
1.6
L
3.5
0
:v
/
*~
/
w
>
;:
1.1
a:
V
I
~
~
10
16
20
25
30
IF - FORWARD CURRENT - mA
Figure 8. Relative Luminous Intensity
versus Forward Current.
(PEAK - PEAK CURRENT PER LED - mA
Figure 9. Relative Efficiencv
. (Luminous Intensity
per Unit Currentl
versus Peak Current.
90'f--t--+--+--t:
tp - PULSE DURATION - /-IS
Figure 10. Maximum Tolerable Peal, Current versus Pulse
Duration. (lOC MAX as per MAX Ratings)
'Figure 11. Relative Luminous Intensity versus
Angular Displacement.
6-78
YELLOW HLMP- 3450 SERIES
Electrical Specifications at TA =25°C
DevIce
HLMP.
Min.
Typ.
Axial Luminous Intensity
3450
3451
3465
3466
2.5
6.0
6.0
12.0
4.0
10.0
12.0
18.0
med
IF - 10mA (Fig. 13)
20112
Included Angle Between
Half Luminous Intensity
Points
3450
3451
3465
3466
50
50
45
45
Deg.
Note 1 (Fig. 16)
AP
Ad
Pe~k~aY7Iength
583
nm
Measurement at Peak (Fig. 1l
Domlhaht Wavelength
585
nm
Note 2
~A1/2
Spectral Line Halfwidth
36
nm
1's
Speed of Response
90
ns
C
Capacitance
18
pF
IJJC
Thermal Resistance
120
Symbol
Description
Iv
VF
Forward Voltage
1.5
VR
Reverse Breakdown
Voltage
5.0
'lV
LU[11inous Efficacy
Max.
Units Test Cq,ndltlons
VF '" 0; f = 1 MHz
°C/W Junction to Cathode Lead
2.2
3.0
V
IF = 10 mA (Fig. 12)
V
IR=100 "A
ImIW Note 3
500
Notes: 1.8% is the off-axis angle at which the luminous intensity is half the axial luminous intensity. 2. Dominant wavelength. Ad. is derived from the CI E
chromaticity diagram and represents the single wavelength which defines the color of the device. 3. Radiant Intensity Ie, in watts/steradian may be found
from the equation Ie:; IV/flv, where Iv is the luminous intensity in candelas and T1v is the luminous efficacy in lumens/watt.
0
~
40
0
0
a:
0
:>
~
~
_~
/
10
0
~~
wE
>-0
z_
;;;>-
II
0:
a:
u
o
a:
,.>-
/
I
>-
a;
2.5
1/
:>"
00
zw
-N
:>-'
,,-,"
W"
J
1.5
2.0
~ 2slc
2.0
1.5
1.0
/
>0:
-0
>-z
~-
0:
/
1.0
TA
2.5
3.0
3.5
4.0
VF - FORWARD VOLT AGE - V
Figure 12. Forward Current versus
Forward Voltage.
.5
/
V
/
V
1.6
/
1.5
)-g
1.4
§~
1. 3
H:~
1. 2
~~
1. 1
u-
wo
~~
5::
1.0
0:0
9
V
wo:
5
8
o
o
V
10
15
20
IF - FORWARD CURRENT - rnA
Figure 13. Relative Luminous Intensity
versus Forward Current:
7
I
/
v
V
. r--
J
10
20
30
40
tp - PULSE DURATION - JAS
Figure 16. Relative Luminous Intensity' versus
Angular Displacement
6-79
60
Figure 14. Relative Efficiencv
(Luminous Intensity
per Unit Current)
versus Peak Current.
1,'-:.0-'-ULlllL-L
Figure 15. Maximum Tolerable Peak Current versus Pulse
Duration. (I DC MAX as per MAX Ratingsl.
50
IpEAK - PEAK CURRENT - rnA
GREEN HLMP- 3550 SERIES
Electrical Specifications at TA =25°C
D$vlC$
Units Test Condillons
HLMP-
Min.
Typ.
AXial Luminous Intensity
3553
3554
3567
3568
1.6
6.7
4.2
10.6
3.2
10.0
7.0
15.0
mcd
IF = 10 mA (Fig. 18)
Included Angle Between
Half Luminous Intensity
Points
3553
3554
3567
3568
50
50
40
40
Deg.
Note 1 (Figure 21)
Symbol
Description
Iv
281/2
Max.
AP
Peak Wavelength
565
nm
Measurement at Peak (Fig. 1)
Ad
Dominant Wavelength
569
nm
Note 2
nm
/lA1/2
Spectral Line Hal/width
28
rs
Speed of Response
500
ns
C
Capacitance
18
pF
8JC
Thermal Resistance
120
VF
Forward Voltage
1.6
Vf\
Reverse Breakdown
Voltage
5.0
t/v
Luminous Efflcacy
VF '" 0; f - 1 MHz
"C/W Junction to Cathode Lead
2.3
3.0
V
IF'" 10 mA (Fig. 17)
V
1f\=100"A
Im/W Note 3
595
Notes: 1. By: is the off·axis angle at which the luminous intensity is half the axial luminous intensity. 2. Dominant wavelength, Ad, is derived from the CI E
chromaticity diagram and represents the single wavelength which defines the color of the device. 3. Radiant Intensity Ie, in wat~s/steradian may be found
from the equation Ie = Iy/fly. where Iv is the luminous intensity in candelas and flv is the luminous efficacy in lumens/watt.
0
El
I
~
a:
a:
'"ou
J
°ttt
a:
30
i2
I
0
I
0
o
1.0
z"
'"w
2.0
3~
1.5
I-
,.u
u
~w
00
-N
j
zw
,,"'~
~"
w"
>a:
_0
J
I-Z
~-
1.2
15
E
1-0
ZN
0
40
TA ~ 25"(;
,.
I
0
a:
~
1.3
I
0
>
~
1.0
a:
~
.5
~
a:
/
2.0
3.0
4.0
YF - FORWARD VOLTAGE -
5.0
v
Figure 17. Forward Current versus
Forward Voltage.
IF - FORWARD CURRENT - mA
IpEAK - PEAK CURRENT PER LED - rnA
Figure 18. Relative Luminous Intensity
versus Forward Current.
Figure 19. Relative Efficiency
(Luminous Intensity
per Unit Current)
versus Peak Current.
90'
f--+--+--+-
tp - PULSE DURATION - ~s
Figure 21. Relative Luminous Intensity versus
Angular Displacement.
Figure 20. Maximum Tolerable Peak Current. versus Pulse
Duration. (lDC MAX as per MAX ratings).
6-80
--
~-~-~~-----------
T-1 3/4 (5 mm)
lTV SOLID ST TE LAMPS
rli~ HE\lVLETT
a:e...
PACKARD
EFFICIENC;Y
I-
X SERIES
~~.
HIO~JfRIiORMAN~EYIIJ,
GRN -
Features
• HIGH INTENSITY
• CHOICE OF 3 BRIGHT COLORS
High Efficiency Red
Yellow
High Performance Green
• POPULAR T-1 3/4 DIAMETER PACKAGE
• SELECTED MINIMUM INTENSITIES
• NARROW VIEWING ANGLE
• GENERAL PURPOSE LEADS
• RELIABLE AND RUGGED
• AVAILABLE ON TAPE AND REEL
J
Package Dimensions
I
Description
This family of T-1 3/4 lamps is specially designed for
applications requiring higher' on-axis intensity than is
achievable with a standard lamp. The light generated is
focused to a narrow beam to achieve this effect.
Part
Number
HLMP3315
MS{,..(18)
SQVAB\;
NQMINAl.
3316
3415
3416
3517
3519
CA'THOOe
NOTES'
1. All. DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILUMETRES (iNCHES).
,. AN £POXV MtN.tSC:US MAY 'EXtENO ABOUT lmm
1,040" DOWN THe L~S.
6-81
Description
Illuminator/Point
Source
Illuminator/High
Brightness
Illuminator/Point
Source
illuminator/High
Brightness
Illuminator/Point
Source
illuminator/High
Brightness
Minimum
Intensity
(mcd)
at 10 mA
12
20
10
Color
(Material)
High
Efficiency
Red
(GaAsP
on GaPJ
20
Yellow
(GaAsP
on GaP)
6.7
Green
(GaP)
10.6
Electrical Characteristics at TA = 25°C
Description
Symbol
Luminous Intensity
Iv
2(-)112
Including Angle
Between Half
Luminous Intensity
Points
Peak Wavelength
ApEAK
Device
HLMP-
Min.
Typ.
3315
3316
12.0
20.0
18.0 I
30.0
mcd
3415
3416
10.0
20.0
IS.0
30.0
m ; t IF'" 10 mA IFigureS'
3517
3519
6.7
10.0
25.0
mc
IF = 10 mA (Figure 31
10.6
Deg.
IF'" 10 rnA
See Nole 1 IFigure 61
Spectral Une Haifwidlh
Dominant Wavelength
Ad
rs
Speed of Response
C
Capacitance
35
35
3415
3416
35
35
Oeg.
IF'" 10mA
See Note 1 (Figure III
3517
3519
24
24
Oeg.
IF =10 rnA
See Note 1 iFigure 16)
331 X
635
5S3
nm
Measurement at Peak
(Figure 11
565
331 X
40
341X
351X
331X
341X
351X
331X
341X
351X
36
Thermal ReSistance
nm
28
626
nm
See Note 2 (Figure 1)
585
569
ns
90
90
500
11
15
331 X
341X
OJc
I
Test Condilions
IF '" 10 mA (Figure 3'
3315
3316
341X
351X
..u 1/2
Unll$
Max.
VF""O; f= 1 MHz
pF
351X
18
331 X
120
"CIW
Junction to Cathode Lead
341X
351X
VF
Forward Voltage
VR
Reverse Breakdown Voll.
'IV
Luminous Efficacy
331 X
341 X
351X
1.5
1.5
1.5
All
5.0
331 X
341 X
3.0
3.0
3.0
2.3
145
500
595
351X
NOTES:
2.2
2.2
IF = 10 rnA (Figure 2)
IF = 10 rnA (Figure 71
IF = 10 mA (Figure 12)
V
V
Ill'" l00jJ.A
lumens
Watt
See Note 3
1. (~)112 is the off-axiS angle at which the luminous intenSity is half the axis/luminous intenSity.
2. The dominant wavelength, Ad. is derived from the CIE chromaticity diagram and represents the single wavelength which defines the color
of the device.
3. Radiant intenSity, Ie. in watts/steradian, may be found from the equation I~ = lv/l1v, where Iv is the luminous intenSity in candelas and.l1v is
the luminous efficacy in lumens/watt.
Absolute Maximum Ratings at TA = 25°C
Parameter
331X$eries
341X Series
351 X Series
Units
Peak Forward Current
90
60
90
rnA
Average Forward CurrenVl,
25
20
25
rnA
DC Currentl 21
30
20
30
mA
Power Dissipallonl31
135
85
135
mW
5
5
5
V
500
500
500
-5510+100
-20 to +100
-55 to +100
Reverse VOltage 1111 = 100 p.AI
Transient Forward Curren~41 (10
p.sec Pulse)
Operating Temperature Range
Storage Temperature Range
-55 to +100
260·C for 5 seconds
Lead SOldering Temperature
!1.6 mm (0.063 In.! from bodyl
6-82
mA,
'C
NOTES:
1. See Figure 5 (Red), 10 (Yellow), or 15 (Green) to establish pulsed operating conditions.
2. For Red and Green series derate linearly from 50° Cat 0.5 mAloC. For Yellow series derate linearly from 50° Cat 0.2 mAIo C.
3. For Red and Green series derate power linearly from 25°C at 1.8 mW/' C. For Yellow series derate power linearly from 50°C at 1.6 mW/o C.
4. The transient peak current is the maximum non-recurring peak current that can be applied to the device without damaging the LED die
and wirebond. It is not recommended that the device be operated at peak currents beyond the peak forward current listed in the
Absolute Maximum Ratings.
1.0
~
.~
w
HIOH
~FFICIENC""
REO
0.5
2:
~
0
500
700
650
750
WAVELENGTH· nm
Figure 1. Relative Intensity. vs. Wavelength
High Efficiency Red HLMP-331 X Series
0
,
~
80
5
70
0
60
5
aa 50.,
I
/
/
•
30
0
20
:/
10
0
'-0
'.0
/
/
30
IOC • DC CURRENT PER LED. rnA
Vf' - FORWARO VOLTAGE - V
Figure 2. Forward Current vs. Forward
Voltage Characteristics
V
.
0
Figure 3. Relative Luminous Intensity
vs. DC Forward Current
IpEAK - PEAK CURRENT PER LED - mA
Figure 4. Relative Efficiency
(Luminous Intensity per Unit
Current) vs. Peak LED Current
90'f----+--+--+-Ip - PULSE DURATION -,..5
Figure 5. Maximum Tolerable Peak
Current vs. Pulse Duration
(IDC MAX as per MAX Ratings)
Figure 6. Relative Luminous Intensity vs. Angular Displacement
6-83
Yellow HLMP-341X Series
2.5
TA
>
~
!2~
<"to
/
2.0
~~
so
/V
~~
1.5
~:J
~.
1.0
w~
L
>~
~¥
.5
0/
VF - fORWARD VOLTAGE - V
Figure 7. Forward Current vs.
Forward Voltage
Characteristics
1.31--+-+7"'!--1--I--1
1.2 t--i'--;I'1--i--t---t--j
1.1
L
~fil
"
1. 5t--i'--r-i--t-":::!-'9
1.4 t--i'--r--t-:7""I----t--j
1.0
10
15
20
IF - FORWARD CURRENT - rnA
40
50
60
IpEAK - PEAK CURRENT - mA
Figure 8. Relative Luminous Intensity
vs. Forward Current
Figure 9. Relative Efficiency
(Luminous Intensity per Unit
Current) vs. Peak Current
90" 1---1---!----+-tp - PULSE DURATION - /.IS
Figure 10. Maximum Tolerable Peak Current
vs. Pulse Duration (Ioc MAX
as per MAX Ratings)
Figure 11. Relative Luminous Intensity vs. Angular Displacement
Green HLMP-351 X Series
I
II
0
0
-t-
0
o
0
so
II
40
l/
.0
JO
0
10
0
5
il
.If
0
4
VI
20
30
IF-DC fORWARD CURRENT-rnA
VF - FORWARD VOLTAGE - V
Figure 12. Forward Current vs.
Forward Voltage
Characteristics
/v
/
v
Figure 13. Relative Luminous Intensity
vs. DC Forward Current
Ip~AK - PEAK CURRENT PER L.EO -
t-t-i-i-i--r-r-r-T--;.6
.4
.2
tp - PULSE DURATION - /,s
Figure 15. Maximum Tolerable Peak Current
vs. Pulse Duration (loC MAX
as per MAX Ratings)
Figure 16. Relative Luml~ous Intensity vs. Angular Displacement.
T-l 3/4 Lamp
6-84
mA
Figure 14. Relative Efficiency
(Luminous Intensity per Unit
Current) vs. Peak LED Current
T-2 (6 mm) Incandescent
Alternative LED Lamps
High Efficiency Red H~I¥1P·A200
Yellow ~ll;ivtP·A300
High ~erformance Green HLMP;ASOO
Features
• FOUR LED CHIPS PER LAMP
• WIDE RADIATION PATTERN
20,/, = 120° typo
• HIGH LIGHT OUTPUT
• NON·DIFFUSED
• 3 COLORS
• POWER SAVING DESIGN
Advantages Over
Incandescent lamps
• MTBF IN EXCESS OF 5,000,000 HOURS
Applications
• SOCKETS NOT NEEDED
• MECHANICALLY RUGGED PACKAGE
o ALTERNATIVE TO INCANDESCENT LAMPS
• LOW POWER CONSUMPTION
• LIGHTED SWITCHES
• BACKLIGHTING PANELS, LEGENDS
Description
The devices have three leads: an anode, a cathode, and a
center heat sink which allows operation at elevated temperatures. These non-diffused lamps are designed for backlighting applications where uniform illumination of a translucent surface is required. Typical applications are illuminated switch keycaps and backlighted front panel annunciator functions.
The HLMP-A200/-A300/-A500 series of solid state lamps
incorporates four LED chips in a single package to give
bright uniform backlighting illumination to larger areas
than is possible using conventional LED lamps. They
provide a low power, long-life alternative to filtered incandescent lamps of similar size.
Axial luminous IntenSity and Viewing Angle
Color
Part Number
HLMP·
Iv (mea)
v(mlm)
Min.
lYP·
lYP·[ll
20,/,
Typ.£2J
Test
Conditions
Backlighting Lamp
General Purpose
22
40
180
114°
50mA
25°C
Description
High Efficiency
Red
A200
Yellow
A300
Backlighting Lamp
General Purpose
23
40
160
114"
50mA
25°C
High Performance
Green
A500
Backlighting Lamp
General Purpose
27
40
225
1240
50mA
25°C
Notes:
1.·v is the total luminous flux produced by the device, measured in millilumens.
2. Oy, is the off·axis angle at which the luminous intensity is half the peak intensity.
6-85
Package Dimensions
I
if.8i (Q.VOj -----..
r6"0(0240~
~.35
t
(0.2SO)
filfii.i8oj
FLANGE
r=
8.64 (0.340)
9.40 iif370j
..
~~~:~~~ I'"----
!
~ANODELEAD
I'
- - - - - - f-
5.11 (0.225)
6.3& 1015O}
/
\
LAMP
eODv
+
254 (0.1001
NOMINAL
\
t:""J
I
1___
~~
~
~,-
O.S9 (0.0351
CENTER LEAD
5.72 10.225'
HEAT SINK
SN~J?N3;~~ - - -
~
#
f
' -- -- ?
-
CATHODE
LEAD
(0 0301
102(0.040\
ANODE
AND
lEADS
I
2.5410
NOMINAL
---1
a.7l
100lTl--8\ 0 - -t,
j CJ\TH~De
t-
-
/""'''~
L /b-~
\~
0.56 (a.0221
-mI0.02SI
NOTES:
,. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETRES IINCHESI.
2. AN EPOXY MENISCUS MAY EXTEND ASOUT 1 mm
10.040"1 DOWN THE lEADS.
Internal Circuit Diagram
~
....1-1--'1
.... 1-1--'
I
1
YI
YI
...... -1--'
THE CENTER HEAT SINK LEAD IS REQUIRED FOR
EFFECTIVE HEAT DISSIPATION. NO EXTERNAL
1'1
GROUND OR OTHER ELECTRICAL CONNECTION
ANODE
HEJ SINK
SHOULD BE MADE TO THE HEATSINK LEAD.
CATHODE
Electrical/Optical Characteristics
at T A = 25°C
COMMON CHARACTERISTICS
High
Symbol
Parameter
Efficiency Red
Mal(.
Min.
Typ.
Min.
Yellow
Typ.
Max.
Green
Min.
Typ.
Test
MaJ(,
Units Conditlon&
Peak Wavelength
635
583
565
Ad
Dominant Wavelength[1!
626
585
569
nm
YJv
Luminous
Efficacyf 2 J
145
500
595
lumen
VR
Reverse Breakdown
Voltage
8.0
VF
Forward Voftage(3J
3.7
rs
Speed of Response
90
90
500
ns
C
Capacitance
11
15
18
pF
ApEAK
nm
Iwatt
8.0
4,2
4.8
3.7
8.0
4.3
4.8
4.1
4.6
5.2
V
IR"'100"A
V
IF"50mA
VF=O,
f" 1 MHz
OJC
Thermal Resistance[4J
60
60
60
·C/W Junction to
Pins (Total
Package)
..
Notes:
1. The dominant wavelength, Ad, is derived from the CIE chromaticity diagram and represents the single wavelength which defines the
color of the device.
2. Radiant intensity, Ie' in watts/steradian, may be found from the equation Ie =Iv/~v. Where Ivis the luminous intensity in candelas and
nv is the luminous efficacy in lumens/watt.
3. Designers should be aware that selection of current limiting resistors becomes critical in 5 volt applications.
4. The value ROJ-PIN =60'C/W is the combined thermal resistance, LED junction-to-pin, when both the heat sink and cathode leads are
used for heat dissipation. For effective heat dissipation, it is recommended that both the heat sink and cathode leads have equivalent
thermal resistance paths to ambient.
6-86
Absolute Maximum Ratings
atT A =25°C
HIGH EFFICIENCY RED, YELLOW AND GREEN LAMPS
">,,'
High Efficiency
Red'
Peak f;orward Current
Average Forw-
>-
HIGH £l!flC1ENCY
:'i>-
REO
u;
;:;
w
0.5
>
;::
~
'"
a
700
500
750
WAVELENGTH - nm
Figure 1. Relative Intensity vs. Wavelength
w
a
~
'"
W
'"
~ :;j>"
>-'"
" ,,'"
x"
"0"
2
;:: "
~
a
0
>-
~2
a
OW
::>
::>3
a
~u
xC)
HEJ. G!EE~
YE~LOl "
ROJA
I
-
ffi '2a
~
\
I
a
,,;j
I
J I
,.a
"E
\
9
Jo~ ~ 25~oC/~""" V
0
'6,
::>
u
~
~
ir
-"
HIGH
0 - ~ EFFICIENCY
REO
'0
0
TA - AMBIENT TEMPERATURE _ °C
Figure 3. Maximum Allowable DC Current
per Lamp vs. Ambient Temperature.
Deratings are shown for Three Thermal
Resistance Values, LED Junction to
Ambient (ROJA)'
6-87
/
~VELLOW
1-111
a
1I1/'GREEN
a
a
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110
If-.II /
.."
0 0 (( 2.0
3.0
VF
-
fr
4.0
5.0
6.0
7.0
FORWARD VOLTAGE - V
Figure 4. Typical Forward Current vs.
Forward Voltage
1. 2
V
1. 0
~
E
~
~
@ A. 6
YELLOW
I?'
YELLOW,
GREEN
/.
20
~ ~
0,8
~ ~
0,7
.-
0.6
~
l - i-
30
40
Z
~
~
I I
I I
10
0.9
,gs
l..l
0.2
1.0
~ ~
~@
Ii":
0.4
o
;0
1. 1
ffi~
- E
~g
Q
\iIj
~
o~
o
1.2
>
~/
N
~
~
O. 81- HIGH ~~6'creNCY
v.:
1/
A
1\
\I-H£R. GREEN
Y/
1
'/
I
0.5
0.4
50
60
loe - DC CURRENT - rnA
IpEAK
Figure 5. Relative Luminous Intensity vs. Forward Current
-
PEAK LED CURRENT - rnA
Figure 6. Relative Efficiency (Luminous Intensity per Unit
Current) vs. Peak LED Current
Figure 7. Far-Field Relative Luminous Intensity vs. Angular Displacement.
Operational Considerations for
the HLMP-A200/-A300/-ASOO
Series of LED Lamps
ELECTRICAl:. CONSIDERATIONS
The HLMP-A200/-A300/-A500 series of LED lamps was
designed to combine the light-output of filtered incandescent
lamps with the reliability and power savings of LEOs. These
LEDs present a number of advantages over incandescent
lamps in a wide variety of backlighting applications:
Long Life - When operated within data sheet conditions,
LED lamps exhibit MTBFs over 5,000,000 hours. Miniature
incandescent lamps typically have MTBFs varying from 500
to 25,000 hours. Due to the superior reliability of LEOs,
they may be permanently mounted on circuit boards,
eliminating sockets and their associated costs.
INTERNAL CIRCUIT - The HLMP-A200. -A300. and -A500
devices contain four LED chips wired in a "series-parallel"
electrical configuration. There are two pairs of parallelwired chips, with the two pairs wired in series. See Figure 8.
This electrical arrangement provides compatibility with low
voltage systems, yet still allows operation at relatively low
currents. The outer' two leads of the lamp serve as the
anode and cathode. The cathode lead also serves as a
heat sink for two of the LED chips with the center lead
providing a heat sink for the other two LED chips.
CAUTION: DO NOT connect the heat sink lead to any
external electrical circuitry or ground. This could either
turn off the LED chips or expose them to excessive drive
current.
Rugged Package - Since all the internal components of
an LED lamp are permanently encapsulated in a plastic
package, they are extremely resistant to shock, vibration,
and breakage.
Low Power - In many applications, these LED lamps provide
the same light output as a filtered incandescent lamp, yet
consume 50% to 75% less power. They therefore generate
less heat, and require smaller power supplies.
6-88
ANODE
HEAT SINK
Figure 8. Internal Circuit Diagram
CATHODE
-
---------~--------
The typical forward voltage values, either scaled from Figure
4 or calculated from the model listed below, can be used to
calculate the current limiting resistor value and typical
power dissipation. Expected minimum and maximum forward
voltages may be calculated from the following worst case
models. These models can be used to calculate the maximum power dissipation as well as minimum and maximum
forward currents for a given electrical design.
R
6.3 Voc
ANODE
VFMIN = VoMIN + IF (RsMIN)
VFTYP = VoTYP + IF (RsTYP)
VFMAX = VoMAX + IF (RsMAX)
For: IF ~ 20 mA
Figure 10. Circuit to Operate the Lamp at 6.3 V DC
v,
Referring to Figure 3, in a typical mounting scheme with
= 163° C/W, the maximum DC current is 60 mA at 45° C.
CATHODE
8JA
Figure 9. Electrical Model
The expected values for Va and Rs are listed below in
Table 1.
EXAMPLE - What is the expected minimum and maximum forward voltage for the HLMP-A200 operated at 60
mA?
R=Vs-Vo_Rs
IF
Where Vs = power supply voltage
Va = device voltage intercept from model
IF = desired forward current
Rs = device internal resistance from model
R = (6.3)(1.05) - 3.4 _ 6
(.060)
= 48 ohms
= 51 ohms (next higher standard 5% value)
VFMIN = 3.4 + (.060)(6)
= 3.76
VFMAX = 3.8 + (.060)(20)
= 5.00
DRIVING THE LAMP - Like other LED devices, this lamp
is current driven, and drive circuits must be designed to
prevent excessive current from flowing through the device.
The lamp has been designed for DC operation. Pulsed
operation at average currents in the range of 40-60 mA is
allowable but will not increase the light output significantly
as compared to the same DC current.
CONSTANT-CURRENT DRIVERS - The use of transistors
or certain driver ICs which have constant-current outputs
to power the lamp is recommended. Drive configurations
such as these provide high immunity to power-supply
voltage variation and easy interface to logic circuits. Examples of such drive circuits can be found in HewlettPackard's Fiber Optics Applications Manual (HPBK-2000),
Section 2.4.
Resistor power dissipation:
P = 12 R
= (.060)2 (51)
= .184 Watt
= % Watt resistor (next higher standard value)
Using this 51 ± 5% ohm resistor and a 6.3 V ± 5% power
supply, what is the expected minimum, typical, and maximum forward current?
IF=(VS-VO)
(R + Rs)
Where Vs = power supply voltage
Va = device voltage intercept from model
R = external current limiting resistor
Rs = device internal resistance from model
RESISTIVE CURRENT-LIMITING - The simplest method
of driving the lamp is to operate it with a series resistor
from a fixed voltage supply. Since this drive circuit is most
susceptible to variations in both the power supply voltage
and the LED's forward voltage, a worst-case design example is shown.
EXAMPLE - What is the resistor value needed to run the
HLMP-A200 at the maximum DC current at 45° C using a
6.3 ± 5% DC supply?
I MIN = (6.3)(.95) - 3.8
F
(51)(1.05) +20
= 21 mA
I TYP = 6.3 - 3.6
F
51 + 12
= 43 mA
I MAX = (6.3)(1.05) - 3.4
F
(51 )(.95) + 6
= 59 mA
Table 1. Expected typical and worst case values of Vo and Rs
Color
PIN HLMP
VOMIN
RsMiN
VOTYP
RsTYP
VoMAX
RsMAX
HER
Yellow
Green
A200
A300
A500
3.4 V
3.4 V
3.7V
Sohms
Sohms
Bohms
3.SV
3.8V
3.8V
12 ohms
10 ohms
16 ohms
3.8V
3.9V
4.1 V
20 ohms
18 ohms
22 ohms
6-89
MECHANICAL & HANDLING CONSIDERATIONS
LEAD CONSTRUCTION - Heavy copper leads were designed into this series of LED lamps to effectively dissipate
the heat generated (by the four LED chips. Because the
leads are so rigid, care must be taken that the leads are
NOT bent in such a way that cracking of the encapsulating
epoxy occurs.
LEAD PLATING - Lamp leads in this series are silver
plated. In order to prevent lead tarnishing, finger cots should
be worn whenever handling the devices.
SOLDERING - These LED lamps can withstand wave
soldering conditions as outlined in Application Note 1027,
"Soldering LED Components." Solder temperatures of
260°C for up to 5 seconds will not damage these devices.
THERMAL
Although LED lamps are extremely reliable within the normal
operating temperature range, problems may be encountered
at very high temperatures. Specifically, catastrophic failures
can occur when the LED junction temperature exceeds
110°C. Several guidelines have been incorporated into this
data sheet to prevent such operation.
MOUNTING THE LAMP - The Cathode and Heat Sink
(center) leads provide the thermal paths for heat generated
at the LED junctions to leave the package. Approximately
'12 the total package power is dissipated by each of these
two leads. For best results, all three leads should be
soldered to a printed-circuit board. It is recommended that
both the heat sink and cathode leads be soldered to small
('Is" x '!a") metalized areas on the board in the Vicinity of the
lamp, particularly if a number of lamps are placed close
together.
In most cases, forced air circulation around the lamp is not
necessary. It is important that the natural convection of air
around the device is not obstructed. Efficient heat sinking
of this sort will allow operation of the lamp at higher
ambient temperatures without exceeding the 110° C maximum LED junction temperature.
DETERMINING THE LED JUNCTION TEMPERATURE The LED junction temperature is difficult to measure direct-
Iy, but it can be computed if the lamp's lead temperature
and its thermal resistance (junction to pin) are known.
EXAMPLE - Is it safe to operate a HLMP-A200 device at
50 mA forward current if both the cathode and heat sink
lead temperatures are 65° C?
Maximum power dissipated by the lamp:
P = (IF)(VF)
.
= (0.050 A)(4.8 V)
= 0.240 W
Temperature difference between the LED junction and the
leads:
~ T = (OJ-PIN)(P)
= (60° C/W)(0.240 W)
= 14°C
Maximum LED junction temperature:
Tg = T plN + ~T
= 65°C +14°C
= 79°C
< 110° C, therefore safe
In situations where the worst-case lead temperature is
unavailable, OJA (the thermal resistance, junction to ambient)
may be used to determine the LED junction temperature
directly from the ambient temperature. This thermal resistance will be highly dependent on the physical configuration of the equipment in which the lamp is mounted.
Figure 3 shows the maximum allowable drive current vs.
ambient temperature for several different values of 0JA. The
worst case value of 250°C/Watt roughly corresponds to
mounting the LED in a very small, enclosed housing without efficient heat sinking (such as in a pushbutton switch).
The typical value of 163° C/W might be encountered if the
LED is mounted with other components on a PC board in a
naturally-convected piece of equipment. The best-case
value of 1000 C/W may be achieved if the lamp is soldered
to a PC board with large metal "lands" connected to the
leads and moderate airflow around the device. As shown in
this figure, the full-power operating temperature range is
extended as the thermal resistance is lowered.
OPTICAL
The radiation pattern for this series of lamps (shown in
Figure 7) has been specifically tailored for even illumination of flat translucent surfaces. In order to prevent objectionable "hot-spots" on the surface to be illuminated, the
luminous intenSity is designed to be greater off-axis than
on-axis. At more than 50 0 off-axis, the light output rapidly
drops off so as to minimize light loss out the sides and
back of the lamp.
The relative positioning of the lamp and the surface to be
illuminated will need to be optimized for the designer's
particular application. Placing the lamp in close proximity
to the legend results in bright illumination of a small area;
pulling the lamp farther back illuminates larger areas with
lower brightness.
It may be desirable to mount reflective white baffles around
the lamp to redirect some of the light emerging at wide
angles onto the legend. Such baffles are also effective at
eliminating "cross-talk", a situation in which light from one
lamp partially illuminates an adjacent legend. Care should
be taken to insure that such baffles do not completely
obstruct air flow around the device.
Figure 11. Use 01 Metalized Printed Circuit Board to Heat Sink
the Lamp
6-90
------~-----------------~--
2 mm x 5 mm RECTANGULAR LAMPS
Flidl
HEWLETT
HIGH EFFICIENCY RED
YELLOW
ORANGE
HIGH PERFORMANCE GREEN
~~ PACKARD
HLMP-S200 SERIES
HLMP-S300 SERIES
HLMP-S400 SERIES
HLMp·5500 SERIES
Features
• RECTANGULAR LIGHT EMITTING SURFACE
• EXCELLENT FOR FLUSH MOUNTING ON
PANELS
• CHOICE OF 4 BRIGHT COLORS
• LONG LIFE: SOLID STATE RELIABILITY
• EXCELLENT UNIFORMITY OF LIGHT OUTPUT
Description
The HLMP-S200, -S300, -S400, -S500 are epoxy encapsulated lamps in rectangular packages which are easily
stacked in arrays or used for discreet front panel indicators.
Contrast and light uniformity are enhanced by a special
epoxy diffusion and tinting process.
In addition to the standard high efficiency red, yellow, and
high performance green colors, this product comes in
Orange for greater flexibility in human factors design.
Package Dimensions
5.46 (0.2151
-.r:-4.95~
5.1810.204)
4lljO;19.il
t
I
'
1.27 (0.0$01
NOMINA~
NOTES:
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MtLLIMETRES l/NCHESI.
2. AN EPOXY MENISCUS MAY EXTEND ABOUT
1 mm tlM)40") DOWN THE LEADS.
3. THERE is A MAXiMUM I" TAI'ER fROM
BASE TO THE TQl> OF LJ\M~.
6-91
-----
----
-----
Electrical/optical Characteristics at TA = 25°C
Symbol
Description
Device
HLMP·
Iv
Luminous Intensity
High Efficiency Red
Min.
Typ.
8201
2,1
3.4
3,5
4.8
Orange
8400
8401
2,1
3.4
3,5
4.8
Yellow
S300
8301
1.4
2.2
2.1
3,5
Green
8500
S501
2.6
4,'
4.0
5,8
S200
201/2
APEAK
Ad
TS
C
Included Angle
Between Hall
Luminous Intensity
Points
Peak Wavelength
Dominant Wavelength
Speed of Response
Capacitance
Max.
Units
Test Conditions
mcd
IF= 20 mA
All
110
Oeg,
IF~ 20 mA
See Note 1
High Efficiency Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
635
612
583
565
nm
Measurement at Peak
High Efficiency Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
626
603
585
569
nm
See Note 2
High Efficiency Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
350
350
390
870
ns
High Efficiency Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
11
4
15
18
pF
120
°CIW
OJC
Thermal Resistance
All
VF
Forward Voltage
HER/Orange
Yellow
Green
1.5
1.5
5.0
VR
Reverse Breakdown Volt.
All
'Iv
Luminous Efficacy
High Efficiency Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
1.5
2,2
2.2
2.3
145
262
500
VF"O;f=lMHz
Junction to Cathode
Lead at Seating Plane
3,0
3.0
V
Ip=20mA
V
IF!" 1ooJi.A
lumens
Watt
See Note 3
3,0
595
NOTES:
1, 0112 is the off-axis angle at which the luminous intensity is half the axial luminous intensity.
2, The dominant wavelength, Ad, is derived from the CIE chromaticity diagram and represents the Single wavelength which defines the color
of the device.
3. Radiant intensity, Ie. in watts/steradian, may be found from the equation Ie = 'v/ryv. where Iv is the luminous intensity in candelas and ryv is
the luminous efficacy in lumens/watt.
6-92
Absolute Maximum Ratings at TA = 25°C
HlghEf~£iency Red!
Orange
Yellow
Green
Peak Forward Current
90
60
90
mA
Aver~ge
25
20
25
mA
DCGU rrent{21
30
20
30
Power DlsSlpl!lion[3]
135
85
135
Parameter
Forward Current!1l,
Transient F~rWard Currentl 4 ]
(19!,sec Pulse)
Units
/' mA
"
mW
mA
500
Operating Temperature Range
-55 to +100
Storage Temperature Range
-20 to +85
-55 to +100
Lead Soldering Temperature
[1.6 mm (0.063 in.) below
seating plane1
°C
';55 to +100
260· C for 5 seconds
Notes:
1. See Figure 5 to establish pulsed operating conditions.
2. For Red, Orange, and Green series derate linearly from 50°C at 0.5 mA/oC. For Yellow series derate linearly from 50°C at 0.34 mA/oC.
3. For Red, Orange, and Green series derate power linearly from 25°C at 1.6 mW/oC. For Yellow series derate power linearly from 50°C at
1.6mW/oC.
'
4. The transient peak current is the maximum non-recurring peak current that can be applied to the device without damaging the LED die
and wire bond. It is not recommended that the device be operated at peak currents beyond the peak forward current listed in the
Absolute Maximum Ratings.
10
~
HIGH EFFICIENCV
~
RED
0.5
w
2
g
GREEN
0
500
700
750
WAVELENGTH - nm
Figure 1. Relative Intensity vs. Wavelength.
High Efficiency Red, Orange, Yellow, and Green
Rectangular Lamps
90
70
;
1
iila:
60
/
a
50
a:
40
~
30
80
~
...~
a:
0
~
~
".
2.0
EMERAL.O GREEN
YELLOW
10
1.0
E
~
N
::;
""c:
0
~
IA.
3.0
1.5
"@
'II:
.~
2.0
~
~
t-
'1
Iii
20
,1 EO,ORANGE
YELLOW
1.2
OREEN.
It y
RED, ORANGE
o
1.3
4.0
5.0
1.0
//
.5
~
V
v'"
/
15
20
25
Figure 3. Relative Luminous Intensity
vs. DC Forward Current.
/
~
>
~
.
~
Icc - DC CURRENT PER LED - rnA
6-93
1,0
•
VF - FORWARD VOLTAGE - V
Figure 2. Forward Current vs. Forward
Voltage Characteristics.
1. 1
~
w
V
10
~
0.9
08
O. 7
0.6
.. \GREEJ.
,\ .'
~
~
!
-
j-
EMSRAI.D GAEEN
/1
I
O.5
30
IpEAK
-
PEAK CURRENT PER LED - rnA
Figure 4. Relative Efficiency (Luminous
Intensity per Unit Current) vs.
LED Peak Curren!.
Ip - PULSE DURATION - I'S
Figure 5. Maximum Tolerable Peak Current vs. Pulse
Duration. (I DC MAX as per MAX Ratings).
Figure 6. Relative Luminous Intensity vs.
Angular Displacemeni.
6-94
RECTANGULAR SOLID STATE LAMPS
r/i~ HEWLETT
~~ PACKARD
HIGH EFFICIENCY RED HLMP-030010301
YELLOW HLMP-0400 10401
HIGH PERFORMANCE GREEN HLMP-OS03/0S04
"
Features
• RECTANGULAR LIGHT EMITTING SURFACE
• FLAT HIGH STERANCE EMITTING SURFACE
• STACKABLE ON 2.54 MM (0.100 INCH)
CENTERS
• IDEAL AS FLUSH MOUNTED PANEL
INDICATORS
• IDEAL FOR BACKLIGHTING LEGENDS
• LONG LIFE: SOLID STATE,RELIABILITY
o CHOICE OF 3 BRIGHT COLORS
HIGH EFFICIENCY RED
YELLOW
HIGH PERFORMANCE GREEN
• IC COMPATIBLE/LOW CURRENT
REQUIREMENTS
Description
The HLMP-030X, -040X, -050X are solid state lamps
encapsulated in a radial lead rectangular epoxy package.
They utilize a tinted, diffused epoxy to provide high on-off
contrast and a flat high intensity emitting surface. Borderless package design allows creation of uninterrupted light
emitting areas.
The HLMP-0300 and -0301 have a high efficiency red
GaAsP on GaP LED chip in a light red epoxy package. This
lamp's efficiency is comparable to that of the GaP red, but
extends to higher current levels.
The HLMP-0400 and -0401 provide a yellow GaAsP on GaP
LED chip in a yellow epoxy package.
The HLMP-0503 and -0504 provide a green GaP LED chip in
a green epoxy package.
package Dimensions
Axial Luminous Intensity
~
2'~b"r;,:OO)
fO:ijjjf'c=L
7.62 (O.300)
ill
0.46 (O.OIB)
SQUARE NOM
7.62 (O.300J
6.9910.276)
ParI
\3
r
B.OO@lli
7.31 (0.200)
29.21
2.5410.100)
2.1lil1i:Dm
(1.1~)
Color
Number
High
Efficiency
Red
HLMp·0300
1.0
2.5
HLMP..Q301
2.5
5.0
HLMp·0400
1.5
2.5
HLMP..Q401
3.0
5.0
HLMP-0503
1.5
2.5
HLMP·0504
3.0
5.0
BOTTOM VIEW
\..... CATHODE
Yellow
LEAD
MIN.
--L
t*
\
Iv (mcd) @
20 mA DC
Min.
Typ.
1.27 (O.OOO)
NOM.
High
Performance
Green
NarES:
1. ALL DIME!,SIONS ARE IN MllUMETAES (INCHES).
2. ~~wr::~~~ r~~g~;us MAY EXTEND ABOUT lmm (O.040")
3. THEA!> IS A MAXIMUM l' TAPEA FROM
BASE TO TOP OF lAMP.
6-95
Absolute Maximum Ratings at TA
HLMP'()~O/'()301
HLMP.()400/0401
HLMP'()503/'()504
Units
Peak Forward Current
90
60
90
rnA
Average Forward Currentl 11
25
20
25
rnA
DC Currentt2J
30
20
30
mA
Power Dlssipation[3j
135
85
135
mW
5
5
5
V
500
500
500
rnA
-55 to +100
-55 to +100
-20 to +100
-55 to +100
°C
Parameter
Reverse Voltage (lR '" 100 p.Al
Transient Forward CUfrentl 41 (10 I's Pulsel
Operating Temperature Range
Storage Temperature Range
Lead Soldering Temperature
[1.6 mm (0.063 in.) from body]
I
I
260 0 C for 5 seconds
NOTE~.
.
. .
1. See Figure 5 to establish pulsed operating conditions.
2: For Red and Green Series derate linearly from 50° C at
0.5 mA/oC. For Yellow Series derate linearly from 50·C
at 0.2 mAIO C.
3. For Red and Green series derate power linearly from 25° Cat
1.8 mWlo C: For Yellow series derate power linearly from
50° C at 1.6 mW/o C.
4. The transient peak current is the maximum non-recurring
peak current that can be applied to the device without
damaging the LED die and wirebond. It is not recommedned
that the device be operated at peak current beyond the peak
forward current listed in the Absolute Maximum Ratings.
Electrical/Optical Characteristics at TA = 25°C
HLMP-G300/-G301
Typ.
HLMP-0400/.(l401
Typ.
Description
2e1/2
Jneluded Angle
Between Half
Luminous intensity
Palms
100
100
.\p
Peak Wavelength
635
583
~
Spectral Line Hallwidth
1"$
Speed of Response
C
Capacitance
HLMP.(lS03/.(l504
Max.
Min.
Thermal Resistance
Forward Voltage
1.6
VA
Reverse Breakdown
Voltage
5.0
'Iv
Luminous EffiCscy
Typ.
Max.
100
-
m.
Dominant Wavelength
Al..l/2
;
Min.
Max.
Min.
Symbol
Units Test Conditions
Deg. Note 1. Figure 6.
565
nm
Measurement at
Peak
569
nm
Note 2
28
nm
:
90
500
ns
1
16
18
pF
120
120
120
2.2
3.0
1.6
2.2
5.0
145
Cathode Lead
3.0
1.6
2.3
5.0
. 500
VF""0;f=1 MHz:
'C/W Juncllon to
595
3.0
V
Ip=20mA
Figure 2.
V
IA= 100 pA
ImIW Note 3
NOTES:
1. 61/2 is the off-axis angle atwhich the luminous intensity is half the axial luminous intensity.
2. The dominant wavelength, Ad, is derived from the CIE chromaticity diagram and represents the single wavelength which defines the
color of the device.
a. Radiant intensity, I,. in watts/steradian, may be found from the equation 1,=ly/'lY, where Iv is the luminous intensity in candelas and
'1V is the. luminous efficacy in lumens/watt.
.
6-96
1.0
GREEN
...in>-
HIGH EfFICIENCY
RED
iii...
~
w
0.5
>
i=
~
a:
0
500
750
650
WAVELENGTH - nm
Figure 1. Relative Intemity .... Wavelength.
High Efficiency Red, Yellow and Green Rectangular Lamps
a
1.3
iI
a
il GRE~N±- r--
a
/
a
Ii V
a
a
a
1.0
~
:0
~IJ'
~
~
0
;;
J}
a
"~
~
VI.:
RED
a
a
yEL.lOW
2.0
.~
15
1.0
.5
I
f--o.
1-- --.,
V
'j,;.
/-
3.0
4.0
/
*
1. 1
u
w
1.0
0,9
~
o.
~
o. 6
>
,
. ,III
I
o.
-
\~R~E~_
#' F"'"
,
~
1S
20
25
30
5.0
loe - DC CURRENT PER LEO - rnA
VF - FORWARD VOLTAGE - V
IpEAK - PEAK CURRENT PER LED - rnA
Figure 2. Forward Current vs. Forward
Voltage.
Ip - PULSE DURATION -
V
/
.\ "
o.5
10
2.0
~+I
I
RW
YELLOW
1.2
~
~
Figure 3. Relative Luminous Intensity vs.
Forward Current.
Figure 4. Relative Efficiency (Luminous
Intensity per Unit Current) vs. Peak Current.
~s
Figure 5. Maximum Tolerable Peak Current v50
Pulse Duration. (lDC MAX as per MAX Ratings.J
Figure 6. Relative Luminous Intensity vs. Angular Displacement.
6-97
rli~ HEWLETT
.:a PACKARD
ULTRA-BRIGHT LED LAMP SERIES
T~1 3/4 HlMp·3750,-3850,·3950
T-1 3/4 lOW PROFILE HlMP-3390,·3490,·3590
T-1 HLMP-1340,-1440, -1540
Features
• IMPROVED BRIGHTNESS
• IMPROVED COLOR PERFORMANCE
• AVAILABLE IN POPULAR T-1 and T-1 3/4
PACKAGES
• NEW STURDY LEADS
• IC COMPATIBLE/LOW CURRENT CAPABILITY
• RELIABLE AND RUGGED
• CHOICE OF 3 BRIGHT COLORS
High Efficiency Red
High Brightness Yellow
High Performance Green
Description
Applications
These clear, non-diffused lamps out perform conventional
LED lamps. By utilizing new higher intensity material, we
achieve superior product performance.
o LIGHTED SWITCHES
o BACKLIGHTING FRONT PANELS
The HLMP-3750/-3390/-1340 Series Lamps are Ga'lIium
Arsenide Phosphide on Gallium Phosphide red light
emitting diodes. The HLMP-3850/-3490/-1440 Series are
Gallium Arsenide Phosphide on Gallium Phosphide yellow
light emitting diodes. The HLMP-3950/-3590/-1540 Series
lamps are Gallium Phosphide green light emitting diodes.
o LIGHT PIPE SOURCES
o KEYBOARD INDICATORS
Axial Luminous Intensity and viewing Angle @ 25°C·
Part Number
Iv (mcd)
@20mADC
Typ.
Min.
Package
Description
Color
HER
80
T-1 3/4
Yellow
80
3950
Green
SO
3390
HER
HLMP3750
3850
3490
3590
1340
1440
1540
T-1 3/4 Low Profile
T-1
2ft 1/2
Note 1.
Package
Outline
125
24·
A
140
24·
A
120
24"
A
35
55
32·
Yellow
35
55
32°
Green
35
55
32"
HER
24
35
45"
Yellow
24
45°
Green
24
35
35
8
8
8
C
C
C
45·
NOTE:
1. 01/2 is the typical off-axis angle at which the luminous intensity is half the axial luminous intensity.
6-98
package Dimensions
1-;:~~WoWI
10.J.4291
10.131.3991
I(
\ ~:;~!);~~:
r--
J T~
23 0 I 901
~
~
r
6.351t2501
56a l 220)
HtJL
1.321.0521
.
(.0401
_
.
1.02
....... 0.54 1.0251
"~il~ ~ :~~:,
--- ~::; :::~~:
4.7b 1.185)
~~'~-_-l....=!-~---1.0-2.Lt:~)t G66)
NOM.
0-4$ !.o1el
~SQUARE
24.13 (.95)
NOMINAL
MIN.
CATHODE- .........
1.271.0501
NOM •
.~
f
_..---_1_
1
j
-j
iI'""""
2.54 {.100l
NOM.
---~
pjD cIri) :~ ::;::
,!.-~
CATHODE
_
_
2.54 (.100) NOM.
PACKAGE OUTLINE "C"
HLMP-1340, 1440,1540
PACKAGE OUTLINE "8"
HLMP-3390, 3490, 3590
PACKAGE OUTLINE "A"
HLMP-3750, 3650, 3950
NOTES:
1, All dimensions are in millimeters (inches).
2. An epoxy meniscus may extend about 1 mm lOAD") down the leads.
Absolute Maximum Ratings at TA = 25°C
Parameter
Red
Yellow
Green
Units
Peak Forward Current
90
60
90
mA
Average Forward Currentl 1 ]
25
20
25
mA
DC Currentl 2 1
30
20
30
mA
Power Dissipationl 3J
135
85
135
mW
Transient Forward Currentl 4 j
(10 Ilsec pulse)
500
500
500
mA
5
5
5
V
Reverse Voltage
(lR
= 100 p.AI
Operating Temperature Range
Storage Temperature Range
-55 to+100
-55 to +100
Lead Soldering Temperature
11,6 mm (0.063 in.) from bodyl
-20 to +100
-55 to +100
"C
260 0 C for 5 seconds
NOTES:
1. See Figure 2 to establish pulsed operating conditions.
2. For Red and Green series derate linearly from 50° Cat 0.5 mAIo C. For Yellow series derate linearly from 50° C at 0.2 mAIO C.
3. For Red and Green series derate power linearly from 25° C at 1.8 mW;o C. For Yellow series derate power linearly from 50° Cat
1.6 mW/oC.
4. The transient peak current is the maximum non-recurring peak current that can be applied to the device without damaging the LED die
and wirebond. It is not recommended that the device be operated at peak currents beyond the peak forward current listed in the
Absolute Maximum Ratings.
6-99
Electrical/optical Characteristics at TA
Description
ApEAK Peak Wavelength
Symbol
Ad
Dominant Wavelength
..It..112
Spectral Line Halfwidth
rs
Speed of Response
0
Capacitance
6JC
Thermal Resistance
VF
Forward Voltage
VR
Reverse Breakdown
Voltage
'rfv
Luminous Efficacy
T-13/4
3750
3850
3950
3750
3850
3950
3750
3850
3950
3750
3850
3950
3750
3850
3950
3750
3850
3950
3750
3850
3950
3750
3850
3950
3750
3850
3950
Lo
T-1::
Dom
3390
3490
3590
3390
3490
3690
3390
3490
3590
3390
3490
3590
3390
3490
3590
3390
3490
3590
3390
3490
3590
3390
3490
3690
3390
3490
3590
I
T·1
1340
1440
1540
1340
1440
1540
1340
1440
1540
1340
1440
1540
1340
1440
1540
1340
1440
1540
1340
1440
1540
1340
1440
1540
1340
0
Min.
1.5
1.5
1.5
5.0
T~~
635
583
565
626
585
569
40
36
28
90
90
500
11
15
18
95
95
95
120
120
120
2.2
2.2
2.3
Units
nm
nm
I
T.8t Conditions
Measurement at
peak
Note 1
nm
ns
pF
·CIW
3.0
3.0
3.0
145
500
595
VF=O; f= 1 MHz
Junction to
Cathode Lead
V
IF=20 mA
(Figure 3)
V
IF= 100p.A
~
NoteZ
watt
NOTES:
1. The dominant wavelength, Ad, is derived from the CIE chromaticity diagram and represents the single wavelength which
defines the color of the device.
2. Radiant intensity, Ie, in watts/steradian, may be found from the equation Ie = Iv/~v, where Iv is the luminous intensity in
candelas and ~v is the luminous efficacy in lumens/watt.
Red, Yellow and Green
,.or-------r--.,..__-..,.....--..,----~...____r------_,_-----__,
HIGH EFfICIENCY
RED
O.5f-------++--/\-----I-\c-+----t-\-----+--------j
~O~O~---~--~~----~--=~----~--6~5~O-----~~------~700
WAVELENGTH - nm
Figure 1. Relative Intensity vs. Wavelength.
6-100
90
111111111 !111m II
.J .J.I.\~I~Hi [I)!!I) 3601~!1
I-
30 KHz
V
100 KHz
~
3 KHz
80
"~E
1.J:rtj
1 KHz
/
100 Hz
1\
1\
60
"u
"
50
0:
30
0:
"
\ , 1\
70
150:
0:
1\
I
-'=
~
Ii ;V
40
.'1!
IN
20
I
.'1
lJ.
o
2.0
1.0
tp - PULSE DURATION -IJ.S
3.0
4.0
1.3
YELLOW
"' ...
""
"W
0"
:EN
1. 1
1.0
2.0
-'"
"'z
~0:
I
0.9
1.5
,,:::;
w:E
>0:
-0
.'!.•...-'
1.2
2.5
z"
~ E
~~
/'
1.0
o
o
y'
0.8
V
/'
.5
---
v
Figure 3. Forward Current vs. Forward Voltage.
3.0
...
in_
5.0
VF - FORWARD VOLTAGE -
Figure 2. Maximum Tolerable Peak Current vs, Pulse Duration.
(IDC MAX as per MAX Ratings,)
>-
-
YELLOW
It:
RED
10
11'::.0....LJ..LWU1'::0,.-L.J..LlJ-':1.,00:-'-...ll..u:'10~0c:O.L.lLU1UJO~,000
GRE1EN±-
/
;:
5:
/J
,
0.7
"~
0.6
~
V
.
~ ~-
RED
- ....
\lREEN_
rt
/1
I
0.5
10
15
20
25
10
30
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
IpEAK - PEAK CURRENT PER LED - rnA
IDe - DC CURRENT PER LED - rnA
Figure 4. Relative Luminous Intensity vs. Forward Current.
Figure 5. Relative Efficiency (Luminous Intensity per Unit
Current) vs. Peak Current.
Figure 6. Relative Luminous Intensity vs. Angular Displacement.
T -1 3/4 Lamp.
Figure 7. Relative Luminous Intensity vs. Angular Displacement.
T -1 3/4 Low Profile Lamp.
Figure S. Relative Luminous Intensity vs. Angular Displacement.
T-1 Lamp.
6-101
FliUW
LOW CURRENT LED LAMP SERIES
HEWLETT
~e. PACKARD
T-1 3/4 (Smm) HLMP-4700, -4719, -4740
T-1 (3mm) HLMP-1700, -1719, -1790
SUBMINIATURE HLMP-7000, -7019, -7040
Features
• LOWPOWER
• HIGH EFFICIENCY
D
CMOS/MOS COMPATIBLE
• TTL COMPATIBLE
• WIDE VIEWING ANGLE
• CHOICE OF PACKAGE STYLES
• CHOICE OF COLORS
Applications
• LOW POWER DC CIRCUITS
• TELECOMMUNICATIONS INDICATORS
• PORTABLE EQUIPMENT
LOW CURRENT LAMP SELECTION GUIDE
• KEYBOARD INDICATORS
Color
Description
Size
These tinted diffused LED lamps were designed and optimized specifically for low DC current operation. Luminous
intensity and forward voltage are tested at 2 mA to assure
consistent brightness at TTL output current levels.
Red
HLMP'
Yellow
HLMP-
Green
HLMp·
T·1 3/4
4700
4719
4740
T·j
1700
1719
1790
SUbmln lature
7000
7019
7040
package Dimensions
0.45 LOUI)
SQUARE
NOflHNAt.
1,i7(,05Oo) ,
NOM.
HLMP-7000, ·7019, -7040
HLMP-4700, -4719,-4740
HLMP·1700, -1719, -1790
6-102
NOTES:
L ALL DIMENSIONS ARE 11'1 MILLIMETRES !INCHES).
2. AN EPOXY MINISCUS MAY EXTEND ABOUT
1 rom (0.040") DOWN THE lEADS.
AXIAL LUMINOUS INTENSITY AND VIEWING ANGLE @ 25°C
Part
Number
Package
Description ",m
HlMP~
T-13/4
-4700
-4719
-4740
-1700
-1719
-1790
-7000
-7019
-7040
Red
Yellow
Green
\2
1':2
1.2
T-l
Tinted
Diffused
Red""!)
Yellow
Green
JJ~.O l\
'1.0
1.0
Subminiature
Red
Yellow
Green
0.4
0.4
0.4
Tinted Diffused
%
'"
<#RJor
Iv (mcd)
@2mADC
Min.
Typ.
.r
mTinted Diffused
2(-) 1/2[1]
Package
Outline
50Q
A
50·
B
90·
C
2.0
1.8
1.8
1.e''''10:j
1.6
1.6
;;
0.8
0.6
0.6
Notes:
1. H1/2 is the typical off-axis angle at which the luminous intensity is half the axial luminous intensity.
Electrical/Optical Characteristics at TA = 25°C
Symbol
Description
T-1 3/4
T-1
SUbminiature
Min.
Max.
Units
1.8
1.9
1.8
2.2
2.7
2.2
V
2mA
V
IR=50,..A
VF
Forward Voltage
4700
4719
4740
1700
1719
1790
7000
7019
7040
VR
Reverse Breakdown
Voltage
4700
4719
4740
1700
1719
1790
7000
7019
7040
!l.o
Dominant Wavelength
4700
4719
4740
1700
1719
1790
7000
7019
7040
626
585
569
nm
Spectral Line Halfwidth
4700
4719
4740
1700
1719
1790
7000
7019
7040
40
nm
36
.1;'.1/2
Test
Condition
Typ.
5.0
5.0
5.0
Note 1
28
1'8
Speed of Response
4700
4719
4740
1700
1719
1790
7000
7019
7040
90
90
500
ns
C
Capacitance
4700
4719
4740
1700
1719
1790
7000
7019
7040
11
15
18
pF
Thermal Resistance
4700
4719
4740
1700
1719
1790
7000
7019
7040
120
120
120
·OIW
Junction to
Cathode lead
Peak Wavelength
4700
4719
4740
1700
1719
1790
7000
7019
7040
635
583
nm
Measurement
at peak
Luminous Efficacy
4700
1700
1719
1790
7000
7019
7040
145
500
595
(-)JC
APEAK
ljv
4719
4740
VF=O
f=l MHz
565
Lumens
Note 2
V1iitt
Notes:
1.. The dominant wavelength, hD, is derived from the CIE chromaticity diagram and represents the single wavelength which defines the
color of the device.
2. Radiant intensity, Ie. in watts/steradian, may be found from the equation Ie = Iv/~v, where Iv is the luminous intenSity in candelas and ~v
is the luminous efficacy in lumens/watt.
'
6-103.
Absolute Maximum Ratings
Parameter
Maximum Rating
Red
Yellow
Green
Power Dissipation
(Derate linearly from 92° 0 at 1.0 mAIo 0)
Units
24
36
24
mW
7
DC and Peak Forward Current
Transient Forward Ourrent (10 I'sec pulse)111
rnA
rnA
V
500
Reverse Vof1age (fR'" 50 pAl
5.0
Red/Yellow
Green
Operating Temperature Range
-55·0 to 100·0
-20'0 to 100·0
-55·0 to 100·0
Storage Temperature Range
260· 0 for 5 Seconds IT-1, T-1 S/4J
260·0 for 3 Seconds (Subminiature)
Lead Soldering Temperature fl.6 mm 10.063 inl from body>
Notes:
1. The transient peak current is the maximum non-recurring peak current that can be applied to the device without damaging the LED die
and wirebond. It is not recommended that the device be operated at peak currents beyond the peak forward current listed in the
Absolute Maximum Ratings.
1.0.----------.---...----"....----,.----"'7"...---.-------...,--------,
0.5f-------++--j'\----t\---.f-------1--l...------+-------i
WAVELENGTH -
Figure 1. Relative Intensity
10
nm
VS.
Wavelength
10.0 r - - , - - - r - - , - - - r - - - ,
I
~ 8.0 I---I---I---I-......,'--H~-.I
~~
2 N.
TA • 25"C
RED_
!0 <
6.01---1---1--+-7'--7'1'---;
0
~~
--......
!i~
... '" 4.0f---+--H~~--+---1
Wa:
I
)
.5
1.0
1.5
2:~
~-
r
W
YELLOW!
a:
2.01---I--"j~t---I---t---;
eeror
2.0
2.5
loC - DC CURRENT
VF - FORWARD VOLTAGE - V
Figure 2. Forward Current vs. Forward Voltage
PER LED -
Figure 3. Relative Luminous Intensity
6-104
VS.
rnA
Forward Current
80'
90'/---+--+--+--+''3
Figure 4. Relallve Luminous Intensity vs. Angular Displacement
for T-1 3/4 Lamp
Figure 5. Relallve Luminous Intensity vs. Angular Displacement
for T-1 Lamp
90' f - - + - 4 - - j - - t
Figure 6. Relative Luminous Intensity vs. Angular Displacement for Subminiature Lamp
6-105
---------~
---~--~-.-.-
Fli;-
INTEGRATED RESISTOR LAMPS
HEWLETT
5 volt and 12 Volt Series
in T-1 and T-1 3/4 packages
~~ PACKARD
Features
, ..
r:-
• INTEGRAL CURRENT LIMITING RESISTOR
• TTL COMPATIBLE
Requires no External Current limiter with
5 VoIV12 Volt Supply
· • COST EFFECTIVE
Saves Space and Resistor Cost
• WIDE VIEWING ANGLE
o AVAILABLE IN ALL COLOR$
Red, High Efficiency Red, YellOW and
High Performance Green in T-1 and
T-1 3/4 Packages
l"
n
!~)~l'
1I I1h-!r~ _-.Ji~111
....
I .
I
Description
The 5 volt and 12 volt series lamps contain an integral cur· rent limiting resistor in' series with the LED. This allows ihe
· lamp to be driven from a 5 volt.i12 voli source without an
external current limiter. The red LEOs are made from
GaAsP on a GaAs substrate,. The High EfficiE1ncy Red .and
Yellow devices use GaAsP on a GaP substrate.
PIN
HLMP-
Color
Red
Red
Package
Outline
T-1 Tinted Diffused
5
0.8
60·
A
5
0.8
1.5
60·
A
5
1.0
2.0
60·
12
1.0
2.0
60·
B
B
60a
A
1.5
4.0
50"
S
60·
A
60"
S
50"
A
60"
S
1601
3600
3601
1621
3650
3651
1540
High
Performance
Green
2e 1f2£1)
T-1 Untinted Diffused
1620
Yellow
Iv mcd
1120
1600
I
Operating
Voltage
1100
3112
Efficiency
The T-1 3/4 lamps are provided with sturdy leads suitable
for wire wrap applications. The T-1 3/4 !limps may be front
panel mounted by using the HLMP-0103 clip and ring.
Typ.
1.5
3105
High
. The green .devices use GaP on a GaP substrate. The dif··fused lamps provide a wide off-axis viewing angle.
1641
3680
3681
Package
T-1 3/4 Tinted Diffused
Min.
5
T-1 Tinted Diffused
12
5
T-1 3/4 Tinted Diffused
12
5
T-1 Tinted Diffused
12
5
T-1 3/4 Tinted Diffused
1.5
4.0
12
5
T·1 TInted Diffused
12
5
T-1 3/4 Tinted Diffused
1.5
12
Notes:
1. 01/2 is the off-axis angle at which the luminous intensity is half the axial luminous intensity.
6-106
4.0
Absolute Maximum Ratings at TA = 25° C
~~------r---------~r---~r---~
Notes:
2. Derate from TA = 50· Cat 0.071 V/· C, see Figure 3.
3. Derate from TA = 50· Cat 0.086V!" C, see Figure 4.
Electrical/Optical Characteristics at TA = 25° C
Symbol
APEAK
Ad
.lA1I2
High
Green
Elflclenc Red
Yellow
Max. Min.
MIn" J'yp. Max. Min.
Max. Min. Typ. Max.
583
565
655
569
gth
6
585
648
40
28
24
36
Red
-
Spectral Line
Halfwidlh
ra.
Units Test Gqnllitions
nm
nm Illbte 4
nm
Thermal Resistance
120
120
120
120
°c!W Junction to Cathode
eJC
Thermal Resistance
95
95
95
95
IF
Forward Current 12 V
Devices
Forward Current 5 V
Devices
Luminous Efficacy
13
·C/W Junction to CathOde
Lead (Note 7)
mA VI'=12V
HJC
IF
"IV
VR
Lead (Note 6)
Reverse Breakdown
Voltage
20
13
20
13
20
13
20
10
15
12
15
It
13
10
20
65
5.0
15
145
500
5.0
5.0
Notes:
4. The dominant wavelength, Ad, ·is. derived from the CIE
chromaticity diagram and represents the single wavelength
which defines the Color of the device.
5. Radiant intensity, .Ie, in watts/steradian, may be found from the
S95
5.0
mA
VF=5V
lumen NoteS
/watt
V
IR=100 .. A
equation Ie = Iv/"IV. Where Iv is the luminous intensity in
candelas and "IV is the luminous efficacy in lumens/watt.
6. For Figure A package type.
7. For Figure B package type.
Package Dimensions
.-
-~~
-l
r-~~
U5!~11
·>ittm, 'i~
~~
--j. t·""
.OM
44,U(09S}
T
1- I-
CAT"OO"T
~~':;~'~QM'"''
l~ri:.",rrL
--f
Lb4fQ.1QOJNOM.ll\1AI.
NOTES:
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETRES IINCHEs).
2. AN EPOXY MENISCUSMAV EXTENDABDUT lmm
1.040") DOWN THE LEADS;
Figure B. T·1 3/4 Package
Figure A. T·1 Package
6-107
24
"
E
I
I-
::;
a:
a:
::>
u
0
20
"E
II
,.
I
12
/
"
;0
a:
/
o
o
II
/
~
V
I
.!:
18
10
12
14
7.5
o
I ,.
15
v
>
I
"
I-
<5
>
""!:;'"
~
0
>
"
0
a:
"
;0
a:
~
/
V
/
V
18
10
12
14
7.5
I
1.
15
Figure 2. Forward Current vs. Applied Forward Voltage. 12 Volt
Devices
I
7.5
o
V
Vee - APPLIED FORWARD VOLTAGE - V
>
16
15
.......
.............
12
0
a:
"a:
;0
~
5l
5l
~
:::i
~
I
u
u
-!t
-!t
o
o
20
40
60
20
8085
TA - AMBIENT TErY'PERATURE - QC
Figure 3. Maximum Allowed Applied Forward Voltage vs.
Ambient Temperature ROJA = 175' C/W. 5 Volt
Devices
90'
12
"a:
Figure 1. Forward Current vs. Applied Forward Voltage. 5 Volt
Devices
""
0
a:
;0
Vee - APPLIED FORWARD VOL rAGE -
'"
,.
a:
a:
::>
u
/
.!:
20
::;
I-
a:
~
24
/
40
60
TA - AMBIENT TEMPERATURE _
8085
°c
Figure 4. Maximum Allowed Applied Forward Voltage vs.
Ambient Temperature ROJA = 175'C/W.12 Volt
Devices
r-+--+--t--\-:
Figure 5. Relative Luminous Intensity vs. Angular Displacement
for T·1 Package
Figure 6. Relative Luminous Intensity vs. Angular Displacement
for T·1 3/4 Package
6-108
2,5
1,5
2,0
:::
w
'/
1,5
>
~
w
0:
:::
V
G~A$P
A
0,5
\'/L
a
0
~
2
>
~
0:
j
0,5
~}
HIGH EfFICIENCYRED, YELLOW,
GRr EN
4
1,0
w
I
1,0
V
j
6
I
8
a
10
5 VOLT DEVICE
Figure 7, Relative Luminous Intensity vs, Applied Forward
Voltage. 5 Volt Devices
a
2
[
4
V
HIGH EFFICIENCY
~REQ,
YELLOW,
GRE,EN
6
8
10
12
J
14
16
18 20
12 VOLT DEVICES
Figure 8. Relative Luminous Intensity vs. Applied Forward
Voltage. 12 Volt Devices
6-109
FliiiW
SUBMINIATURE RESISTOR LAMPS
5 VOLT 4 rnA AND 5 VOLT
10 rnA SERIES
HEWLETT
~r.. PACKARD
Features
D
INTEGRAL CURRENT LIMITING RESISTOR
D
TTL AND LSTTL COMPATIBLE
o REQUIRES NO EXTERNAL RESISTOR WITH
5 VOLT SUPPLY
D
SPACE SAVING SUBMINIATURE PACKAGE
o WIDE VIEWING ANGLE
o
CHOICE OF CURRENT LEVEL, 4 rnA or 10 rnA
.. AVAILABLE IN HIGH EFFICIENCY RED,
YELLOW, AND GREEN
• IDEALLY SUITED FOR PORTABLE OR SPACE
CONSTRAINED APPLICATIONS
Description
The subminiature resistor lamps contain an integral current
limiting resistor in series with the LED. This allows the lamp
to be driven from a 5 volt source without an external current
limiter. The high efficiency red and yellow devices use
GaAsP on a GaP substrate. The green devices use GaP on
a GaP substrate. The tinted, diffused epoxy lens provides
high on-off contrast and a wide viewing angle. The follow-
ing special configurations are available on request:
1. Surface Mount Gull Wing Bend Mount Gull Wing Data Sheet.
Refer to the Surface
2. Tape and Reel Packaging
3. Special Lead Bending on 2.54 mm (0.100 in,) and 5.08
mm (0.200) in Centers
Device Selection Guide
High Efficiency Red
Yellow
Green
5 Volt. 10 mA
HLMP-6600
HLMP-6700
HLMP-B800
5 Volt, 4 mA
HLMP-B620
HLMP-6720
HLMP-6820
6-110
Package Dimensions
TOP VIEW
NOTES
1, ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLlMETRES (INCHES)
2, OPTIONAL LEAD FORM AVAILABLE,
SIDE VIEW
END VIEW
Absolute Maximum Ratings at TA = 25°C
HLMP-6600/6620
6700/6720
HLMP·6BOOJ6B20
High Efficiency Red/Yellow
Green
6 vons
6 Volts
5 Volts
5 Volts
DC Forward Voltage
Reverse Voltage OR = 1OOIlA)
Operating Temperature Range
-40'Ct085°C
-55' C to 100° C
Storage Temperature Range
Lead Soldering Temperature
1,6 mm (0.063 in.) From Body
260 0 C for 3 Seconds
Electrical/optical Characteristics at TA = 25° C
High J:Hiclency Red
HLMp·6600
HLMp·6620
Symbol Parameter
Yellow
HLMp·6700
Gr.en
HlMp·61Z0
HLMp·6S00
HLMp·6620
Min. Typ. Max, Min. Typ. Max, Min, Typ. Max, Min, Typ. Max. Min. Typ. Max. Min, Typ, Max.
08 2.0
1.4 5.0
1.6 5,0
1.3 5.0
0.9 2.0
08 2,0
Units
Test Conditions
mcd
'(it.ee~ Figure
5 Volts
2)
90
Oeg
Note 1
(See Figure 3
585
nm
28
569
26
nm
120
120
IV
Axiat Luminous
Intensity
2"'112
Included Angle Between
Half luminous
IntenSity Pomls
90
90
90
90
90
ApEAK
Peak Wavelength
Dominant Wavelength
583
585
36
565
569
Spectral line
Halfwidlh
635
626
40
585
..11.1/2
635
626
40
583
AD
36
r"JC
Thermal Resistance
120
120
120
120
'F
Forward Current
9.6
VR
Reverse Breakdown
lIoll3ge
W
Luminous Efficacy
nm
Note 2
'C/W Junction (0
Cathode Lead
35
13
5.0
50
145
9.6
5
13
5.0
145
3,5
50
5.0
500
9,6
5
500
35
13
mA
II
5.0
595
5
595
ifF ~5 Volts
ISee Figure 1)
IR ~
100~A
Imlw Note 3
Notes:
1. 2(-)1/2 is the off-axis angle at which the luminous intensity is half the axial luminous intensity.
2. The dominant wavelength is derived from the CIE chromaticity diagram and represents the single wavelength which defines the color
of the device,
3. Radiant intenSity in watts/sterad ion, may be found from the equation Ie = 'v/ryv, where Iv is the luminous intensity in candelas and ryv is
the luminous efficacy in lumens/watt.
6-111
- - - _ . -_... _ . _ - - _.. _ - - - _....
1.6
>
..:
~~
2""
E
I
...
~g
2
w
-'"
"'"'..:...
0:
0:
'"
~fa
:!iN
u
0
0:
"'~~
0!!-
0:
0:
..:
;=
~o:
... 0
...0I
S~
w
1.4
I
1.2
I
1.0
I
0.8
0.2
=
/
0.6
0.4
I
/
/1/
VF - FORWARD VOLTAGE - VOLTS
VF - FORWARD VOLTAGE - VOLTS
Figure 1. Forward Current vs. Forward
Voltage.
Figure 2. Relative Luminous Intensity vs.
Forward Voltage.
Figure 3. Relative Luminous Intensity vs.
Angular Displacement.
6-112
------- - - - - - - - - - -
rl;;'
-----
---.
------
HIGH EFFICIENCY RED/T-1 3/4 (5 mm)
HIGH PERFORMANCE GREEN
SleOlOR SOLID STATE LAMP
HEWLETT
~~ PACKARD
HLMP-4000
Features:
• TWO COLOR (RED, GREEN) OPERATION
• POPULAR T-1 3/4 PACKAGE
• 3 LEADS WITH ONE COMMON CATHODE
• DIFFUSED, WIDE VISIBILITY LENS
• TTL COMPATIBLE
Description
The T-1 3/4 HLMP-4000 lamp is a three leaded bicolor light
source designed for a variety of applications where dual
state illumination is required in the same package. There
are two LED chips, high efficiency red (HER) and high
performance green (Green). mounted on a central common
cathode lead for maximum on-axis viewability. Colors between HER and Green can be generated by independently
pulse width modulating the LED chips.
package Dimensions
Absolute Maximum Ratings
at TA =25°C
HIgh Efficiency
Parameter
Peak Forward Current
Red/Green
Units
90
mA
mA
II:;;;:;:;::;:;:~-U~
Average Forward Current! l i(Total)
25
DC Current[4] (Total)
30
mA
Power Dissipation[3,51(Total)
135
mW
Operating Temperature Range
-20 to +85
-55 to +100
Reverse Voltage (lR '" 100 p.A)
5
V
Transient Forward Current[6]
(10 p'sec Pulse)
500
mA
25.40 11.00)
MIN.
I
NLL
QC
Storage Temperature Range
9.19 10.362)
M3 (O]32j
, .27
~~.50}
Lead Soldering Temperature
[1.6 mm (0.063 in.) below
seatl n9 plane1
COMMON
CATHOO.
0,508 10.0201
SQ, TYP,
2.64 (0.10CI NOM.
260" C for 5 seconds
GREEN
ANODE
Notes:
1. See Figure 5 to establish pulsed operating conditions.
2. The combined simultaneous current must not exceed the
maximum.
3. The combined simultaneous power must not exceed the
maximum.
4. For HER and Green derate linearly from 50' Cat 0.5 mAl' C.
5. For HER and Green derate linearly from 25'C at 1.B mW/'C.
6. The transient peak current Is the maximum non-recurring
current that can be applied to the device without damaging the
LED die and wlrebond. It Is not recommended that the device
be operated at peak currents beyond the peak forward current
listed In the Absolute Maximum Ratings.
6-113
flAT INDICATES
REO ANODE
R"D
ANOQE
COMMON
CATHOP"
NOTES:
" All OIMENSIONS ARE IN Mll~IMETRES (INCHES),
2. AN EPOXY MENISCUS MAY EXTEND ABOUT 1 mm
lo.Q4a"1
DOWN THE LEADS.
Electrical Characteristics at TA = 25°C
Red
Symbol
Parameters
Iv
Luminous Intensity
APEAK
Peak Wavelength
Ad
Dominant Wavelength
TS
Speed of Response
Typ.
Units
Test Conditions
4.2
8
mcd
IF" 1DrnA
635
565
nm
626
569
90
500
Typ.
2.1
5
C
Capacitance
11
VF
Forward Voltage
2.1
VB
Reverse Breakdown Voltage
°JC
Thermal Resistance
20112
'l/V
Green
Min.
Min.
Max.
Max.
See Note 1
ns
18
2.5
2.3
2.7
pF
VF"D, f= 1 MHz
V
IF=10mA
5
V
120
120
°CIW
Included Angle Between
Half Luminous Intensity
Points, Both Axes
65
65
Deg.
Luminous Efficacy
145
5
595
IA = 100 j1A
JUnction to
Cathode Lead
IF= 10 rnA
See Note 2
Lumen! See Note 3
Watt
Notes:
1. The dominant wavelength, Ad, is derived from the CIE chromaticity diagram and represents the single wavelength which defines the
color of the device.
2. 01/2 is the off-axis angle at which the luminous intenSity is half the axial luminous intensity.
3. Radiant intensity, Ie' in watts steradian, may be found from the equation Ie = 1./1)., where I. is the luminous intenSity in candelas and
1). is the luminous efficacy in lumens/watt.
1.0
HIGH
PERFORMANCE GREEN
0.5
0
500
/
J
V
\
/
~
TA <25"C
\;~IGH
EFFiCiENCY
I-...
550
600
650
~
Figure 1. Relative Intensity vs. Wavelength
6-114
AEO
700
750
0
«
E
....
:i
''""
"'o"
Yl
VI
0
40
'~"
30
I
0
o
1,0
~~~~ERFORMANCE _
~
Ii /
1,0
HIGH,PEA,fORMANCE
OREEN
',\,i'
/
0,5
./
4,0
00
5.0
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
IpEAK - PEAK CURRENT PER LED - rnA
Figure 3. Relative Luminous Intensity
vs. DC Forward Current.
I
/
//
1/1
1,3
1,2
1,1
i"'""
HIGH PERFORMANCE
GREEN
V
1,0
0.7 0
1,5
'"
>--
1,4
a,B
W
EffICIENCY REO
1,5
O,g
2,0
~-
3,0
I
:E~
w"
.... Z
2,0
V
j
>'"
0
rl
HI~H I
2.5
"'.... «....
Figure 2. Forward Current vs. Forward
Voltage Characteristics.
1,6
;;; ....
",«
Zw
VF - FORWARD VOLTAGE - V
1,7
3.0
00
II
lj
~~
.... E
HIGH
EFFICIENCY RED
z;2
,rj::'
0
/,
3.5
>
....
: HIO!
EFFICIENCY RED
0
'"
«
;:
4.0
i
I I II
J
I
I
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90 tOO
IpEAK - PEAK CURRENT PER LED - rnA
tp -
Figure 4. Relative Efficiency (Luminous
tntensity per Unit Current) vs.
LED Peak Current.
PULSE DURATION - P'
Figure 5. Maximum Tolerable Peak Current
vs. Pulse Duration. (toe MAX as
per MAX Ratings)
goo r---j---t---j---r.;~"-7.'0::-·-:c2::::a,..,-::3a~'-:C4:7;a';-;:5~a'-:6~a""-::7a~'-:CB::::a""-::'ga::-'-::!,oo'
Figure 6. Relative Luminous Intensity vs. Angular
Displacement.
6-115
rh~
~~
940 nm HIGH RADIANT EMITTERS
HEWLETT
T-H-1t (5 mm Diameter) HEMT-3301
T-1 (3 mm Diameter> HEMT-1001
PACKARO
Features
• NONSATURATING, HIGH RADIANT FLUX
OUTPUT
• EFFICIENT AT LOW CURRENTS, COMBINED
WITH HIGH CURRENT CAPABI!.ITY
• THREE PACKAGE STYLES
• OPERATING TEMPERATURE RANGE
-55°C TO +100°C
• MEDIUM-WIDE RADIATION PATTERNS
• RADIATED SPECTRUM MATCHES RESPONSE
OF SILICON PHOTODETECTORS
Description
The HEMT-3301 and HEMT-l00l are infrared emitters, using
a mesa structure GaAs on GaAs infrared diode, IRED,
optimized for maximum quantum efficiency at a peak
wavelength of 940 nm. The HEMT-3301 and HEMT-l00l
emitters are untinted, undiffused plastic packages with
medium-wide radiation patterns. These medium-wide and
wide radiation patterns eliminate the beam focusing problems
that are encountered with emitters that have narrow
radiation patterns. Applications include optical transducers,
optical part counters, smoke detectors, covert identification,
paper tape and card readers and optical encoders.
Absolute Maximum Ratings
at TA =25°C
Power Dissipation ............................ 150 mW
DC Forward Current .......................... 100 mA
(Derate as specified in Figure 6)
Peak Forward Current ....................... 1000 mA
(Time average current as determined from Figure 7)
IRED Junction Temperature ..................... 110°C
Operating and Storage Temperature .... -55°C to +100°C
Lead Soldering Temperature ........ 260°C for 5 seconds
(1.6 mm (0.063 in.) from emitter body)
package Dimensions
~~
4.57
~~\'.~~\
to.tao)
r- ~::~~~~
t
6.35
Lso-)
ili
j
LlBS)
g,5Ili ..t2~} P-~....;:; ~ otti16S;
T
2$:,4011.001
Mlti,
""\0401
II
NOM,
;!4,13 {Q.'95J
0,4$ (G.o-UI)
SQUARE NOMINAL
M'["
CATHOO'T
I
li
1.21 1G.ll5Q}
NOMINAL
~ ~ :6~~~;'~O'''''AL
'lJ.i~50>rl- !
~ ~
~,54
{O.l001
NOMINAl.
CA1'1iOOE
HEMT-3301
NOTES<
1. Al~ DIMENSIONS ARE IN MllllMETRES (INCHES).
2. AN EPOXY MENISCUS MAY EXTEND ASOUT
1 ",In {O.04D") DOWN THE LEADS.
6-116
2.54l(UQOll'l.OMINAl
HEMT-1001
Electrical/Optical Characteristics at TA = 25°C
Symbol
Description
Ie
Radiant Intensity
HEM
1
HE
1
Min.
Typ.
2.5
1.0
4.0
2.0
Max.
Units
Test Conditions
Fig.
mW/sr
IF= 20 mA
4.5
Measured at
ApEAK
1
Temperature Coeffieient for Radiant
Intensity[lj
-0.58
Temperature Coelfieien! for Peak
Wavelength [21
0.3
nm/oC
Measured at
ApEAK
1
APEAK
Peak Wavelength
940
nm
Measured at
il.PEAK
1
20'h
Half Intenslty[3]
Total Angle
HEMT-3301
HEMT-1001
60
deg.
IF = 20 mA
9
AlelAT
"A/"T
%/oC:
50
8
tr
Output Rise Time
(10% to 90%)
1700
ns
IpEAK =20 mA
tf
Output Fall Time
(90% to 10%)
700
ns
IpEAK :20 mA
C
Capacitance
30
pI
VF"0;f=1 MHz
VR
Reverse Breakdown
Voltage
V
[R = 10 p.A
VF
Forward Voltage
1.30
1.15
V
IF= 100 mA
IF =20 mA
OJC
Thermal Resistance
120
5.0
1.50
IRED Junction
to Cathode Lead
°C/W
Notes:
1. Radiant intensity at ambient temperature: le(TA) = le(25"C) + (.llel.H) (TA - 25"C)/100.
2. Peak wavelength at ambient temperature: I-PEAK(TA) = I-PEAK(25"C) + (.lI-I.lT) (TA - 25"C).
3. 0'12 is the off-axis angle from emitter centerline where the radiant intensity is half the on-axis value.
4. Approximate radiant flux output within a cone angle of 20: e(20) = [e(O)/le(O)] Ie (TA); e(O)/le(O) obtained from figure 8 or 9.
I.'
~
~
1.2
1. 1
faN
1.0
«
0.9
:::;
'a:"
"zu
'r !-I-i'Jo'cI
l'
1.3
m-26'~
0.8
0.7
~
0.6
II
0.5
1-'"
0.4
!;:(
0.3
~
0.2
~
O. 1
o
.,
I
I
II
I
E
.
V\TA - 8&
I
~
a:
a:
:::>
u
"a:~
c
a:
~
1\
1
1'\\
"
~~
860
880 900
;>" -
920
940
960 980 1000 1020
WAVELENGTH - nm
VF
Figure 1. Radiated Spectrum
-
FORWARD VOLTAGE - V
Figure 2. Forward Current VS. Forward Voltage
6-117
2
IF - FORWARD CURRENT - mA
IF - DC FORWARD CURRENT - mA
Figure 3. Forward Voltage Temperature Coefficient
va. Forward Current
Figure 4. Relative Radiant Intensity
vs. DC Forward Current
1I
...
iiiII:
II:
""
C
II:
i12
g
I
IPEAK -
PEAK FORWA~D CURRENT.-:-: mA,
TA - AMBIENT TEMPERATURE -'C
Figure 5. Relative Efficiency vs. Peak Forward Current
Figure 6. Maximum DC Forward Current
vs. Ambient Temperature
Derating Based on TJ MAX = 110·C
tp - PULSE DURATION - p.s
Figure 7. Maximum Tolerable Peak Current va. Peak Duration
(I PEAK MAX Determined from Temperature
Derated IDe MAX)
6-118
90'1-t--t--t--t--I-I-I-I-1-=13
9 - OFF AXIS ANGLE - OEGREES
(CONE HALF ANGLES)
NORMALIZEO INTENSITY
Figure 8. Far Field Radiation Pattern, HEMT-3301
1.4
0
;::
1.2
1.0
"w
...,.'""
-"
~~
0:'"
... 0
"U.
O.S
...0"~
0.6
"'''
u."
~c:;
... ,,:c
,,!:
53
"
0:
I
;;;~
l~
oNORMALIZED INTENSITY
OFF·AXIS ANGLE - DEGREES
(CONE HALF ANGLES)
Figure 9. Far Field Radiation Pattern, HEMT-1001
6-119
Fli;-
700nm
HIGH INTENSITY
SUBMINIATURE
EMITTER
HEWLETT
~1!.tI PACKARD
HEMT -6000
Features
• HIGH RADIANT INTENSITY
• NARROW BEAM ANGLE
• NONSATURATING OUTPUT
• BANDWIDTH: DC TO 5 MHz
~~OIA,
• IC COMPATIBLE/LOW CURRENT
REQUIREMENT
• VISIBLE FLUX AIDS ALIGNMENT
Description
The HEMT-6000 uses a GaAsP chip designed for optimum
tradeoff between speed and quantum efficiency. This
optimization allows aflat modulation bandwidth of 5 MHz
without peaking, yet provides a radiant flux level
comparable to that of 900nm IREDs. The subminiature
package allows operation of multiple closely-spaced
channels, while the narrow beam angle minimizes
crosstalk. The nominal 700nm wavelength can offer
spectral performance advantages over 900nm IREDs, and
is sufficiently visible to aid optical alignment. Applications
include paper-tape readers, punch-card readers, bar code
scanners, optical encoders or transducers, interrupt
modules, safety interlocks, tape loop stabilizers and fiber
optic drivers.
NOTEs,
.
1, Ai.LO:tMEN'Sl¢NSAAE IN MI1.L.1MUfU!8 (lNeH~$I.
1, SIL,Vrtl't,PL.ATiiO LEAPS, seE AT>IiLICATION (lUU.ErIN 3.
3. epoxy tiNOAI'SULANr HASA ~EfRAellva: tNOltx OF 1,53,
4. ¢H!P Cl!ir,Jr~RJNa WITHIN 'tliE MCKASE IS CONSiS1'SNl
WITH FOOtNOTe 3,
.
.
Maximum Ratings at TA = 25°C
Power Dissipation ............. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 50 mW
(derate'linearly from 70°C @ 1.0mW/°C)
Average Forward Current ..................... 20 mA
(derate linearly from 70°C @ O.4mA/oC)
Peak Forward Current ................... See Figure 5
Operating and Storage
TemperatureRange ................. -55° to+100°C
Lead Solderi ng
Temperature ...................... 260° C for 3 sec.
[1.6 mm (0.063 in.) from body]
~
- WAVELENGTH - nm
Figure 1. Relative Intensltv versus Wavelength.
6-120
Electrical/optical Characteristics at TA=25°C
Symbol
Ie
Ke
Max.
Descripilon
Min.
TyPo
Radiant Intensity along Mechanical
Axis
Temperature Coefficient of Intensity
100
250
/J.W/sr
Units
IF
-0.005
°C·1
Note 1
fNote 2
lly
Luminous Efficacy
2.5
Im/W
20%
Optical Axis Half Intensity Totel Angle
Peak Wavelength (Range)
16
a9Q.715
deg.
tr
Spectral Shift Temperature Coefficient
Output Rise Time (10%-90%)
.193
70
nmfC
ns
tf
Output Fall Time
40
Co
BVR
capacitance
ns
pF
APEAK
IlAp'iI
(9O%~10%)
I
5
66
Forward Voltage
VF
I:l.VF/I:l.T Temperature Coefficient of VF
12
1.5
-2.1
Thermal Resistance
140
SJC
Reverse Breakdown Voltage
nm
V
V
1.B
mV/"C
°C/W
Test Conditions
Fig.
=10mA
3,4
Note 3, IF 0= 10 rnA
Measured @ Peak
6
1
Measured @ Peak, Note 4
IpEAK =lOrnA
IpEAK =10mA
Vp = O;f'" 1 MHz
IR =100J.I.A
,IF =lOrnA
2
IF =100 JI.A
Junction to cathode lead
NOTES: 1. le(T) = Ie (25°C) exp IKe (T - 25°C)].
2. Iv = 'lyle where Iv is in candela. Ie in watts/steradian. and 'ly In lumen/watt.
3. 9% is the off-axis angle at which the radiant intensity is half the intensity along the optical axis. The deviation batwlien the
mechanical and the optical axis Is typically within a conical half-angle of three degrees.
4. ~ (T) = ~ (26"C) + (A~ /AT) (T - 25°C)
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
VF - FORWARD VOLTAGE-V
Figure 2. Forward Currant versus
Forward Volt....
IF - FORWARD CURRENT - mA
Figure 3. Relative Radiant Intensity
_ ... Forward' Current.
IpEAK - PEAK CURRENT - mA ,
Figure 4. Relative Efficiency (Radiant Intensity
per Unit Current) yarsus Peak Currant.
° 10 20 30 40 60 60 70 60 90°,00
tp - PULSE DURATION -1'1
NORMALIZED INTENSITY
Figura 6. Maximum Tolarable Peak Current versus Pulse
Duration. (lDC MAX as par MAX Ratings)
9-0FF·AXISANGLE - DEGREES
ICONE HALF·ANGLE)
Figura 6. Far-Field Radiation Pattarn.
6-121
I·
sl~
;J_
Flidl
HEWLETT
a:e.. PACKARD
SURFACE MOUNT OPTION FOR
SUBMINIATURE LAMPS
GULL WING LEAD CONFIGURATION
INDIVIDUAL SUBMINIATURE LAMP SUPPLIED IN 12mm TAPE - OPTION 011
SUBMINIATURE ARRAY SUPPLIED IN A SHIPPING TUBE - OPTION 013
Features
• GULL WING.LEAD CONFIGURATION,
INDIVIDUAL SUBMINIATURE LAMPS AND
ARRAYS
• COMPATIBLE WITH AUTOMATIC PLACEMENT
EQUIPMENT
• COMPATIBLE WITH VAPOR PHASE REFLOW
SOLDER PROCESSES
• LOW PACKAGE PROFILE
• WIDE VIEWING ANGLE
• LONG LIFE - SOLID STATE RELIABILITY
• INDIVIDUAL SUBMINIATURE LAMPS ARE
SUPPLIED IN 12mm TAPE
• SUBMINIATURE ARRAYS ARE SUPPLIED IN
TUBES
Description
Device selection Guide
These subminiature solid state lamps are encapsulated in an
axial lead package of molded epoxy. They utilize a tinted,
diffused lens providing high on-off contrast and wide angle
viewing.
Option
Description
Option 011
Individual subminiature lamps in gull
wing configuration. Supplied in 12mm
tape on seven inch reels; 1500 pieces per
reel. Minimum order quantity and order
increment are 1500 pieces.
Optlon 012
Bulk
Option 013
(Arrays only)
Subminiature array in gull wing
configuration. Supplied in shipping tubes.
The leads·of this device are bent in a gull wing configuration
for surface mounting. The device can be mounted using
automatic placement equipment.
The indiVidual gull wing subminiature lamp is supplied in
12mm tape on seven inch reels per ANSI/EIA standard RS481 specifications. Gull wing subminiature arrays are
supplied in shipping tubes. The lamp can be mounted with
either batch or in line vapor phase reflow solder processes.
Subminiature lamps for surface mount applications are
available in standard red, high efficiency red, yellow, green,
integrated resistor, and low current versions.
Examples:
HLMP-6300
Option 011
High Efficiency Red
Supplied on Tape
Ordering Information
To obtain gull wing surface mount subminiature lamps,
order the basic catalog device with the appropriate option
code. Note: Option 011 is available for individual subminiature lamps only. Option 013 is available for subminiature
arrays only.
6-122
HLMP-6658
Option 013
High Efficiency Red, 8 Element Array
Supplied in Tubes
--_.--- _._-----
vapor Phase Reflow Solder Rating
Absolute Maximum Rating
Absolute Maximum Ratings
and Electrical/Optical
Characteristics
215°C fdr-S minute~
Material FC-5311
Vapor Phase Soldering
Temperature
Note: Lead soldering maximum rating is 260'C for 3 seconds.
The absolute maximum ratings and electrical/optical
specifications are identical to the basic catalog device.
except forthe vapor phase soldering rating as specified at
left.
Package Dimensions
INDIVIDUAL SUBMINIATURE
H& 10.0651
om 'Om"
ANODEo~'~J
J
3_8110_1501 MAX_
~""."
NOMINAl
NOTES,
1. ALL DIMENSIONS AliE IN MILLIMETRES
IINCHES).
CAT\19DE LEAD IS IDENTIFIED BV A
COLOR STRIPE.
121
L
SUBMINIATURE ARRAY
--j
r--- 0.51 ~ 0.020)
!I
NOTES,
1, All DJMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETRES
NOMINAL
ilNCHESI.
. Q=CATHOOE STRIPE
I-.Tfi;.-......;;:n.-J.
G~
1.6510.0651
m iG.075l DIA.
~@
I~
-
N [2_54 (Q.l00H MAX.
NOTE 2
j
6-123
2. OVERALL LENGTH .S THE NUMBER OF
ELEMENTS TIMES 2.54mrn iO.10O- io.L
3. CATHODE LEAD IS IDENTIFIED BY A
COLOR STRIPE.
12 mm TAPE AND REEL
t1,
TOP TAPE
' -_ _ _ _ FEED DIRECTION _ _ _ _ >
TOLERANCES (UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED):
.X' .1,.XX' .051.XXX '.0041
uv~
I
NOTES:
1.
EMPTY COMPONENT POCKETS SEALED WITH TOP
2.
COVER TAPE.
7 INCH REEL - 1,500 PIECES PER REEL.
3.
MINIMUM LEADER LENGTH AT EITHER END OF
THE TAPE IS500mm.
4.
THE MAXIMUM NUMBER OF CONSECUTIVE MISSING
LAMPS IS TWO.
5,
IN ACCORDANCE WITH ANSI/EtA RS-4Bl
SPECIFICATIONS, THE CATHODE IS ORIENTED
TOWARDS THE TAPE SPROCKET HOLE.
DIMENSIONS PER
ANSI/EtA STANDARD RS-4Bl*
ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN
MILLIMETRES (INCHES).
c:==U::'S:=E=:R:::D:::IR:::E::C::T:'O::N::O::,F:::F:::E:=E:=D=>
A
178.012.0(7.010.08) OIA.
o
15 +0"(0059+0 .004) DIA
. -0.0 .
-0.000
.
13.010.512) DIA. TYP.
0,
1.010.039) DIA. MIN.
0,
20.2 (0.795) CIA. MIN.
E
F
Ko
N
1.75 ± 0.1 (0.069)
5.50 (0.127 ! 0.002)
3.05 (0.120) TVP.
Po
P,
~
50.011.970) MIN.
4.010.157) TYP.
4.010.157) TYP.
2.0 (0.079! 0.002) TVP.
T
0.310.012) TYP.
18.410.72) MAX.
w
12.0:!: 0.3 (0.472:!: 0.012)
THICKNESS OF TOP COVER TAPE
0.10 (0.004) MAX.
500 mm (19.7 in.) MIN.
BOTH ENDS
LEADER LENGTH
500119.7) MIN.
"'EXCEPTION: THE EJECTOR-PIN HOLE (0,) IS 1.0 (0.039) DIA. MIN.
6-124
REEL
REEL
!
I
-
-
- r--
C
N
FliiJI
HEWLETT
.:~ PACKARD
llT
OPERATOR _ _ _ _ __
HP PART NUMBER _ _ __
OATECODE _ _ _ _ __
TAPING DATE _ _ _ _ __
ELEC. VALUE _ _ _ _ __
TOLERANCE _ _ _ _ __
QUANTITy _ _ _ _ _ __
A
CUSTOMER PART NUMBER _ _
ARRAY SHIPPING TUBE
:1.:1\:=:= : : =43; ; ; ;:'I'=7'0): : f=J -:;.:;(:-\=(~\~1:.1--·
<________
SUGGESTED TUBE FEED _ _ _ _ _---'
(~\ ,---\ (~, ,--0,\ ,~, ,~\
(1)
,L_ll-.l.L_.l.L _1l._.l.L _ l l _
Ul Jl
~
~:_'--L+'
H.-,g"
TUBE LABEL IDENTIFIES
CATHODE SIDE OF ARRAYS.
(hi.] ~!~K~J6
/
NO. OF LAMP
~ ~..ru
HLMP-
6XX3
6XX4
6XX5
6XX6
6XXB
6-125
ELEMENTS
PER ARRAY
34
65
8
QUANTITY
OF ARRAYS
PER TUBE
403253
2620
SURFACE MOUNT OPTION
FOR SUBMINIATURE LAMPS "YOKE" LEAD CONFIGURATION
Flipta HEWLETT
a!r..tI PACKARD
INDIVIDUAL SUBMINIATURE LAMP SUPPUED IN 12mm TAPE -OPTION 021
INDIVIDUAL SUBMINIATURE LAMP SUPPLIED IN BULK -OPTION 022
Features
• "YOKE" LEAD CONFIGURATION FOR
THROUGH HOLE MO.UNTING ON PC BOARD
• COMPATIBLE WITH AUTOMATIC PLACEMENT
EQUIPMENT
. • COMPATIBLE WITH VAPOR PHASE REFLOW
SOLDER PROCESSES
• LOW PACKAGE PROFILE
• WIDE VIEWING ANGLE
• LONG LIFE-SOLID STATE RELIABILITY
• SUPPLIED IN 12 mm TAPE OR BULK
Description
Ordering Information
These subminiature solid state lamps are encapsulated in
an axial lead package of molded epoxy. The lens is diffused
for even light dispersion.
To obtain surface mount subminiature lamps with the
"yoke" lead configuration, order the basic catalog device
with the appropriate option code.
The lamps are designed to be inserted through holes in the
PC board to backlight switches, membrane panels, or
appliques. Other backlighting applications are equally
suitable. As shown in Figure 1, the leads are specially
formed to give two features: mechanical strain relief and
adequate solder pads.
Device Selection Guide
Option
Automatic placement equipment may be used to mount
the LEDs on the PC board if the designer selects the 021
option. These lamps are supplied in 12mm tape on seven
inch reels per ANSI/EIA standard RS-481 specifications.
Bulk lamps are available under the 022 option code. The
lamps can be mounted using either batch or in line vapor
phase reflow solder processes.
Subminiature lamps for surface mount· applications are
available in standard red, high efficiency red, yellow, green,
.
integrated resistor, and low current versions.
DesCription
Option 021
Individual subminiature lamps in "yoke"
lead configuration. Supplied In 12 mm
tape on seven InCh reels; 1500 pieces per
reel. Minimum order quantity and order
increment is 1500 pieces.
Option 022
Individual subminiature lamps in ''yoke''
lead configuration. Supplied in bulk.
Examples:
HLMP-6300
Option 021
High Efficiency Red
Supplied on Tape
Figure 1.
6c126
HLMP-6400
Option 022
Yellow
Supplied in Bulk
vapor Phase Reflow Solder Rating
Absolute Maximum Rating
Vapor Phase
SOld~ri~g Te!'lle,erature
NOTE: Lead soldering maximum rating is 260'C for 3 seconds.
Absolute Maximum Ratings
and Electrical/Optical
Characteristics
The absolute maximum ratings and electrical/optical specifications are identical to the basic catalog device, except for
the vapor phase soldering rating as specified at left.
package Dimensions
INDIVIDUAL SUBMINIATURE LAMP
NOTES:
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETRES
(INCHES!.
2, CI\'jfItlDE LEAD IS IDENTIFIED BY A
COLOR STRIPE.
t
MG (D.0301 MAX.
9,94 !J!.!m!
1.24 (0,049)
6-127
12mm TAPE AND REEL
nil
IIII
IIII
rJJL L,
r
1 I
I I
I L
I I
I I
I
L.""j
TOP TAPE
F~.J
IIII
IIII
L!JJ
TOLERANCES IUNLESSOTHERWISE SPECIFIEDI:
:>
.X ± 0.1: .XX ± 0.05 (.XXX ± 0.004)
~______~F~E~ED~D~IR~E~C~T~IO~N~_______
NOTES:
1. EMPTY COMPONENT POCKETS SEALED WITH TOP
COVER TAPE.
2. 7 INCH REEL -1,500 PIECES PER REEL.
3. MINIMUM LEADER LENGTH AT EITHER END OF
THE TAPE IS50Dmm.
4. THE MAXIMUM NUMBER OF CONSECUTIVE MISSING
LAMPS IS TWO.
5. IN ACCORDANCE WITH ANSIIEIA RS-481
SPECIFICATIONS, THE CATHODE IS ORIENTED
TOWARDS THE TAPE SPROCKET HOLE.
~__~U~S~E~R~D~IR~E~C~TI~O~N~O~F~F~E~ED~--,:>
DIMENSIONS PER
ANSliEIA STANDARD RS-4Bl
ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN
MILLIMETRES (lNCHESI.
TAPE
A
178.0± 2.0 (7.D! 0.08) CIA.
C
13.010.5121 DIA. TYP.
o
1.55IO.o61±0.0D2IDIA.
0, 20.210.7951 DIA. MIN.
1.75± 0.110.0691
5.5010.127 ± 0.0D21
NO
COMPONENTS
KO
N
P
NO
COMPONENTS
Po
P,
---------------
t
T
500 mm 119.710.1 MIN.
BOTH ENDS
3.05 ± 0.110.1201 TYP.
50.011.9701 MIN.
4.010.1571 TYP.
4.010.1571 TYP.
2.010.079 ± 0.0021 TYP.
0.310.0121 TYP.
18.410.721 MAX.
12.o± 0.3IO.472± 0.0121
THICKNESS OF TOP COVER TAPE
0.1010.0041 MAX.
LEADER LENGTH
500119.71 MIN.
6-128
C
N
(h~
HEWLETT
PACKARD
OPERATOR BER
HPPARTNUM
... __________
OATECODE
TAPING DATE
________
ELEC. VALUE
________
TOLERANCE
QUANTITY
RT NUMBER ___
CUSTOMER.P
.A______
6-129
F/iOW
TAPE AND REEL
SUBMINIATURE LAMPS
HEWLETT
~~ PACKARD
Tape and Reel Spacing:
2.S4mm (0.100 Inch) - OPTION P01
S.OOmm (0.200 Inch) - OPTION P02
Features
• COMPATIBLE WITH AXIAL LEAD AUTOMATIC
INSERTION EQUIPMENT
• REEL PACKAGING SIMPLIFIES HANDLING AND
TESTING
Description
Subminiature lamps are available on tape and reel. The
Option lamp devices have axial leads with 2.54 mm (0.100
inch) spacing for automatic insertion into PC Boards by
radial lead insertion equipment. The Option P02 lamp
devices have axial leads with 5.00 mm (0.200 inch) spacing
packaged on tape and reel for ease of handling.
Ordering Information
To order Subminiature lamps packaged on tape and reel,
include the appropriate option code along with the device
catalog part number. Example; to order the HLMP-6300 on
tape and reel, order as follows: HLMP-6300 - P01.
Minimum order quantities vary by part number. Orders
must be placed in reel increments. Please contact your
local Hewlett-Packard sales office or franchised HewlettPackard distributor for a complete list of lamps available
on tape and reel.
Device Selection Guide
Option
pal
paz
The absolute maximum ratings, mechanical dimension
tolerances and electrical optical characteristics for lamps
packaged on tape and reel are identical to the basic
catalog device. Refer to the basic data sheet for the
specified values.
Notes:
Description
Tape and reel, 2.54 mm (0.100 inch) spaced
axial leads.
Tape and reel. 5.00 mm (0.200 inch) spaced
axial leads.
I Option
I P01
Quantity/Reel
Order Increments
5,000 or 1,000
1,000
I
Z,500 or 1,000
1,000
Paz
Absolute Maximum Ratings
and Electrical/Optical
Characteristics
1. Minimum leader length at either end of tape is 2 blank part
spaces.
2. Silver saver paper is used as the interlayer for silver plated lead
devices.
3. The maximum number of consecutive missing lamps is 2.
Drawings and option codes apply to devices with cathode tab
intact only.
6-130
------------ - - - - - - - -
OUTLINE A (TAPE AND REEL) - OPTION P01
2.54
mm
(0.100 inch) spacing
CATHOOE
I
t
14.61 (0.575)
12.07(0.475)
NOTE 1.
...... '0 MAX.
\=
0
-
I
~
6.35 (O.250)
TYP.
~.~"
1\
.750)
MAX.
L_ - -
-------
25.40 (1.000)
22.86 (O.900)
r\
~
I
I
-1-I
.-j f.-
I
I
1I.--
I--
3.05 (O.120)
2.03 (O.080)
-I- ,-,-
25.40(0.100)
MAX. ALLOWED
FOR SPLICES
----.J
LWHITE TAPE
NOTE: LED'S MUST FALL WITHIN 0.020" OF A COMMON CENTER,
OUTLINE B (TAPE AND REEL) - OPTION P02
5.08
mm
(0.200 inch) spacing
~1-'00MAX'
CATHODE
~=E
t
14.61 (0.575)
12.07 (0.475)
NOTE 1.
~
6.35 (O.250)
TYP,
I
~-"
,
1\
.750)
MA X.
L_ --
-.
----I
25.40 (1.000)
22.86 (0.900)
r\
~
I
I
t
I
I
t=
5.58 (0.220)
4.57 (O.180)
NOTE: LED'S MUST FALL WITHIN 0.020" OF A COMMON CENTER.
6-131
I
25.40 (O.100)
MAX. ALLOWED
FOR SPLICES
~-L
WHITE TAPE
Fhdl HEWLETT
TAPE AND REEL SOLID STATE LAMPS
~~ PACKARD
Leads:
Smm (0.197 Inch) Formed Leads - OPTION 001
2.54mm (0.100 inch) Straight Leads - OPTION 002
Features
• COMPATIBLE WITH RADIAL LEAD
AUTOMATIC INSERTION EQUIPMENT
• MEETS DIMENSIONAL SPECIFICATIONS OF
IEC PUBLICATION 286 AND ANSIIEIA
STANDARD RS-468 FOR TAPE AND REEL
• REEL PACKAGING SIMPLIFIES HANDLING
AND TESTING
• T-1 AND T-1 3/4 LED LAMPS AVAILABLE
PACKAGED ON TAPE AND REEL
• 5 mm (0.197 INCH) FORMED LEAD AND
2.54 mm (0.100 INCH) STRAIGHT LEAD
SPACING AVAILABLE
Device Selection Guide
Description
Option
T-1 and T-1 3/4 LED lamps are available on tape and reel
as specified by the IEC Publication 286 and ANSI/EIA
Standard RS-468. The Option 001 lamp devices have
formed leads with 5 mm (0.197 inch) spacing for automatic
insertion into PC boards by radial lead insertion equipment. The Option 002 lamp devices have straight leads
with 2.54 mm (0.100 inch) spacing, packaged on tape and
reel for ease of handling. T-1 lamps are packaged
1800/reel. T-1 3/4 lamps are packaged 1300/reel.
Ordering Information
To order LED lamps packaged on tape and reel, include
the appropriate option code along with the device catalog
part number. Example: to order the HLMP-3300 on tape
and reel with formed leads (5 mm lead spacing) order as
follows: HLMP-3300 Option 001. Minimum order quantities
vary by part number. Orders must be placed in reel increments. Please contact your local Hewlett-Packard sales
office or franchised Hewlett-Packard distributor for a
complete list of lamps available on tape and reel.
LED lamps with 0.46 mm (0.018 inch) square leads with 5
mm (0.197 inch) lead spacing are recommended for use
with automatic insertion equipment. It is suggested that
insertion machine compatibility be confirmed.
Description
001
Tape and reel, 5 mm (0.197 inch) formed leads.
'102
Tape and reel, 2.54 mm (0.100 inch) straight
leads.
Order Increments
Package
Quantity/Reel
T -1
1800
1800
T-13/4
1300
1300
Absolute Maximum Ratings
and Electrical/Optical
Characteristics
The absolute maximum ratings, mechanical dimension
tolerances and electrical/optical characteristics for lamps
packaged on tape and reel are identical to the basic
catalog device. Refer to the basic data sheet for the specified val ues.
Noles:
1. Minimum leader length at either end of tape is 3 blank part
spaces.
2. Silver saver paper is used as the interlayer for silver plated
lead devices.
3. The maximum number of consecutive missing lamps is 3.
4. In accordance with EIA and IEC specs, the anode lead
leaves the reel first.
5. Drawings apply to devices with 0.46 mm (0.Q18 inch) square
leads only. Contact Hewlett-Packard Sales Office for dimensions of 0.635 mm (0.025 inch) square lead devices.
6-132
Tape and Reel LED Configurations
CATHODE
---t--h
.rllt'l----.""'---,-.-
t
I1
t
1
t
w
k
DO
Figure 1. T-1 High Profile Lamps, Option 001
CATHODE
r
H,
Figure 2. T -1 High Profile Lamps, Option 002
---+-!-,
CATHODE
t
1
--!--\,
f
I
DO
Figure 3. T -1 Low Profile Lamps, Option 001
DO
Figure 4. T -1 Low Profile Lamps, Option 002
1',
f
H3
11
DO
Figure 5. T -1 3/4 High Profile Lamps, Option 001
Figure 6. T-1 3/4 High Profile Lamps, Option 002
Do
Figure 7. T-1 3/4 Low Profile Lamps, Option 001
Figure B. T -1 3/4 Low Profile Lamps, Option 002
6-133
Dimensional Specifications for Tape and Reel
Item
T1 High Profile
Body Height
Body Diameter
Option
Component Height
T1 Low Profile
Body Height
Body Diameter
Component Height
T1-3/4 High Profile
Body Height
Body Diameter
001
~ ~
n~
Component Height
T1-314 Low Proftle
Body Height
BOdy Diameter
Component Height
Lead wire thickness
Pitch of component
002
~
-
i
n~
Feed hole pilch
Symbol
Al
01
HI
A2
02
H2
A3
03
H3
A4
D4
H4
d
P
Po
Specification
4.70 (0.1851
4.19 (0.1651
3.18 (0.125)
2.67 (0.105)
25.7 (1.012)
Max.
3.73 (0.147)
3.23 (0.127)
3.05 (0.120>
2.79 (0.110)
24.7 (0.974)
Max.
9.19 (0.362)
8.43 (0.3321
5.08 (0.200)
4.32 (0.1701
30.2 (1.189)
Max.
6.35 (0.250)
5.33 (0.2101
5.08 (0.200)
4.32 (0.170)
27.4 (1.079)
Max.
OA5 (0.018)
13.7 (0.539)
11.7 (0.461)
12.9 (0.508)
~
Feed hole center to lead center
PI
4.55 (0.179)
3.15 (0.124)
Hole center to component center
P2
Lead to lead distance
F
7.35 (0.289)
5.35 (0.211)
SAO 10.213)
4.90 (0.193)
o± 1.0 (0.039)
18.510.728)
17.5 (0.689)
15.3 (0.602)
14.7 10.579)
9.75 (0.384)
8.50 (0.335)
0.5 (0.020)
Max.
21.0 10.827)
20.0 (0.787)
16.5 (0.650)
15.5 (0.6101
4.20 (0.165)
3.8010.150)
0.90 (0.035)
0.50 10.020>
Oomponent alignment, front-rear'
Tape width
,c,h
W
Hold down tape width
Wo
Hole position
WI
Hold down tape positJon
W2
Height of componenl from hole center
H
Lead Clinch heighl
HO
Feed hole diameter
00
Total tape thickness
I
Length of snipped lead
L
Lead langlh under hold down tape
11
Note:
1. Dimensions in millimetres (inches), maximum/minimum.
6-134
11.0 (0.433)
Max.
14.5 (0.571)
Min.
Notes
Square Leacfs
Cumulative error:
1.0 mml20 pitches.
Measure at crimp
bottom. 5.7813.68
(0.227/0.1448) for straight
leads
.
2.54 (0.100) nominal for
straight leads.
Figure 9
Paper thickness:
~::! ;~:~:: Figure 9
-r-
20.0
(0.7871
L_
Figure 9. Front to Rear Alignment
and Tape Thickness, Typical,
All Device Types
F'" 100g MIN. APPLIED
FOR 3 ± 1 SEC.
F = 70g MIN. APPLIED
F = 500g MIN. APPLIED
FOR 3 ± 1 SEC.
FOR 3, 1 SEC.
Figure 10. Device Retention Tests and Speclflcallons
F .. 5009 MAX. EXTRACTION FORCE TO
TAPE lEADER
OPERATOR _ _ _ _ _ __
HP PART NUMBERI _ _ _ __
DATE COOE _ _ _ _ _ __
TAPING DATe' _ _ _ _ __
ELEe. VALUE _ _ _ _ __
TOLERArJCE _ _ _ _ _ __
, aUANTITY _ _ _ _ _ __
CUSTOMER PT. NO.
Figure 11 ~ Reel Configuration and Labeling
6-135
UNWIND REEL.
Fli;a
SUBMINIATURE LED
RIGHT ANGLE INDICATORS
HEWLETT
~I:. PACKARD
RED
HIGH EFFICIENCY RED
YELLOW
GREEN
HLMP-6000·010
HLMP-6300-010
HLMP·61100·010
HLMp·6500-010
Features
• IDEAL FOR PC BOARD STATUS INDICA1'ION
• SIDE STACKABLE ON.2.S4 mm (0.100 in)
CENTERS
• AVAILABLE IN FOUR COLORS
• HOUSING MEETS UL 94V-O FLAMMABILITY
SPECIFICATIONS
• ADDITIONAL CATALOG LAMPS AVAILABLE AS
OPTIONS
Description
The Hewlett-Packard ·series of Subminiature Right Angle
Indicators are industry st,mdard status indicators that
incorporate tinted diffused LED lamps in black plastic
housings. The 2.54 mm (0.100 in) wide packages may be
side stacked for maximum board space savings. The silver
plated leads are in line on 2.54mm (0.100 in) centers, a
standard spacing that makes the PC board layout straightforward. These products are designed to be used as back
panel diagnostic indicators and logic status indicators on
PC boards.
Ordering Information
To order Subminiature Right Angle indicators, order the
base part number and add the option code 010. For price
and delivery on Resistor Subminiature Right Angle Indicators
and other subminiature LEOs not indicated above, please ,
contact your nearest H.P. Components representative.
Absolute Maximum Ratings
and Other Electrical/Optical
Characteristics
The absolute maximum ratings and typical device characteristics are identical to those of the Subminiature lamps.
For information about these characteristics, see the data
sheets of the equivalent Subminiatwe lamp.
package Dimensions
l
r
Fl
5'33 !O'210I
4.ea1lilllO)
2.54l0.1OO1
mllr.iili4i
~~!!~:=-
....----...............:
~!l!JW
3Af(ijM
JL..",,.1
~~
.J
V-CATHODE
t±1 0.'O.2.3!J1,'l!l9t
(ij;ljij7f
2.6410.100) NOM.
m(O.016)
NOTE: ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETRES IINCHE$l.
6-136
Flifl'l
T-1 (3mm) RIGHT ANGLE
LED INDICATORS
HEWLETT
~~ PACKARD
OPTION * 010
OPTION -101
Features
•
IDEAL FOR CARD EDGE STATUS INDICATION
PACKAGE DESIGN ALLOWS FLUSH SEATING ON A
PC BOARD
• MAY BE SIDE STACKED ON 4.57 mm (0.18 in)
CENTERS
• UP TO 8 UNITS MAY BE COUPLED FOR A
HORIZONTAL ARRAY CONFIGURATION WITH A
COMMON COUPLING BAR (SEE T-1 RIGHT ANGLE
ARRAY DATA SHEET)
• LEDs AVAILABLE IN ALL LED COLORS, WITH OR
WITHOUT INTEGRATED CURRENT LIMITING
RESISTOR IN T·1 PACKAGES
o EASY FLUX REMOVAL DESIGN
• HOUSING MATERIAL MEETS UL 94V-0 RATING
• ADDITIONAL CATALOG LAMPS AVAILABLE AS
OPTIONS
•
For example. by ordering HLMp·1302-010, you would
receive the long lead option. By ordering HLMP-1302-101.
you would receive the short lead option.
Arrays made by connecting two to eight Single Right Angle
Indicators with a Common Coupling Bar are available.
Ordering information for arrays maybe found on the T-l
Right Angle Array data sheet.
The above data sheet information is for the most commonly
ordered part numbers. Refer to other T-l base part number
specifications in this catalog for other lamp types that may
be ordered with the right angle option.
Description
Hewlett-PaCkard T-l Right Angle Indicators are industry
standard status indicators that incorporate a tinted diffused
T-l LED lamp in a black plastic housing. The indicators are
available in Standard Red, High Efficiency Red, Orange,
Yellow. and High Performance Green. with or without an
integrated current limiting resistor. These products are
designed to be used as back panel diagnostic indicators
and card edge logic status indicators.
Absolute Maximum Ratings
and Other Electrical/Optical
Characteristics
Ordering Information
To order other T-l High Dome Lamps in Right Angle
Housings in addition to the parts indicated above, select the
base part number and add the option code 010 or 101,
depending on the lead length desired (see drawing belowl.
The absolute maximum ratings and typical device characteristics are identical to those of the T-l LED lamps. For
information about these characteristics, see the data sheets
of the equivalent T-l LED lamp.
Package Dimensions
3.6810.145)
3:iS (0.125) DIA.
o
U
2'4~~~~95)l
Fr
6.4310.253)
mIO.247)
n-
I I
7.4410.293)
~[hR1ij~! ,~L
*
1 r - 1 2 7 (0050)
~
NOM~.70 (0185)
REF.
OPTION NO.
CATHODE LEAD
#010
18.03 (0.710)
MIN.
#101
3.43 (0.135)
3.43 (0.135)
MIN.
MIN.
LfNGTH
see TAOLf
NOM
MAX.
f
-'----tt-'lc
2.54 (0.100)
4.5110.160)
ANODE LEAD
LfNGTH
1.27 (O.OSO)
UNSHEARED
NOM. LONGER UNEVEN LEADS
THAN CATHODE
SHEARED
EVEN LEADS
0,4510,018)
saUARf NOM
6-137
NOTE: ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETRES IINCHfS).
T-1 (3 mm) RIGHT
Fli;'
HEWLETT
-.=~ PACKARD
ANGLE ARRAYS
OPTION:
102 104
103 105
106 108
107
Features
• IDEAL FOR PC BOARD STATUS INDICATION
• STANDARD 4 ELEMENT CONFIGURATION
• EASY HANDLING
• EASY FLUX REMOVAL
• HOUSING MEETS UL 94V-OFLAMMABILITY
SPECIFICATIONS
• OTHER CATALOG LAMPS AVAILABLE
Description
These T-1 right angle arrays incorporate standard T-1 lamps
for a good balance. 9f viewing angle and intensity. Single
units: are held together by a plastic tie bar. The leads of
each member of the array are spaced on 2.54 mm (0.100 in)
centers. Lead spacil')g between adjacent lamps in the array
is. on 2.03 mm (0.080 in) centers. These products are
designed to be. used as back panel diagnostic indicators
and logic status indicators on PC boards.
Ordering Information
Use the option code 102 through 108 in addition to the
base part number to order' these amlys. Arrays from 2 to 8
elements in length and special lamp color combinations
within an array· are available. Please contact your nearest
Hewlett-Packard Components representative for ordering
information on these special items.
package Dimensions
NOTE: ALL DIMENSIOIIIS ARE IN
MI~L'MeTRES
(INCHES).
\'!--_.-...j_ :~;
(~!~l
3.68 (o.1~51
m~
1
8.64!!)~
~r
3.43(0.136)
MIN.
g~
38.45 (1AIS}
lU7@,7!!l
UJi(f.'ffll
6-138
r~;w
a!'g
LED RIGHT ANGLE
INDICATORS T-1 3/4~m)
HEWLETT
PACKARD
OFfl'ON ~O
OPTION -191
M
Features
• IDEAL FOR CARD EDGE STATUS INDICATION
• PACKAGE DESIGN ALLOWS FLUSH SEATING
ONAPCBOARD
• MAY BE SIDE STACKED ON 6.35 mm (0.25")
CENTERS
• .LEDs AVAILABLE IN FOUR COLORS, WITH OR
WITHOUT INTEGRATED CURRENT LIMITING
RESISTOR IN T-1 3/4 TINTED DIFFUSED
PACKAGES
• ADDITIONAL CATALOG LAMPS AVAILABLE AS
OPTIONS
Description
The T-1 3/4 Option 010 and 100 series of Right Angle
Indicators are industry standard status indicators that
incorporate a tinted diffused T-1 3/4 LED lamp in a black
plastic housing. The indicators are available in standard
Red, High Efficiency Red, Yellow, or High Performance
Green with or without an integrated current limiting
resistor. These products are designed to be used as back
panel diagnostic indicators and card edge logic status
indicators.
package Dimensions
OPTION NO.
CATHODE LEAD
LENGTH
#010
4.70 (0.1851
3.68 (0.1451
#100
20.32 (0.8001
MIN.
ANODE LEAD
LENGTH
4.70 (0.1851
3.68 (0.1451
SHEARED
EVEN LEADS
1.27 (0.0501
UNSHEARED
NOM. LONGER UNEVEN LEADS
THAN CATHODE
NOTes:
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETRES (INCHES).
2. !.fAD WIDTH MAY BE 0.45 (Q.D1BI OR 0.6410.02.)
SQUARE NOMINAl. DEPENOING VPON PRODUCT
TYPE.
3. OPTION 100 IS AVAILABLE fOR LONGER LEADS.
5.ol\ {O.2QO)
WlUmlf
NOTE 2
OElIIGNATes CATHODE
I
~
I
" \ - - 2.64(0.100)
fATENT PENDING
L:i~,,~
REF.
NOM.
6-139
f
t
SEe TABLE
Ordering Information
To order T-1 3/4 high dome lamps in addition to the parts
indicated above, select the base part number and add the
option code 010 or 100. For example: HLMP-3750-010.
Absolute Maximum Ratings
and Electrical/Optical
Characteristics
All Hewlett-Packard T-1 3/4 high-dome lamps are
available in right angle housing. Contact your local
Hewlett-Packard Sales Office or authorized components
distributor for additional ordering information.
The absolute maximum ratings and device characteristics
are identical to those of the T-1 3/4 LED lamps. For information about these characteristics, see the data sheets of
the equivalent T-1 3/4 LED lamp.
6-140
FliU-
HEWLETT
~~ PACKARD
T-1 3/4 LED LAMP
RIGHT ANGLE HOUSING
Features
• FITS ANY HP HIGH DOME T-1 3/4 LED LAMP
• SNAP-IN FIT MAKES MOUNTING SIMPLE
• HIGH CONTRAST BLACK PLASTIC
Description
The HLMP-5029 is a black plastic right angle housing
which mates with any Hewlett-Packard High Dome T-1 3/4
lamp. The lamp snaps into place. The material is fully
compatible with environmental specifications of all
Hewlett-Packard T-1 3/4 lamps.
Physical Dimensions
NOTES:
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MllLlMETRES IINCHESI.
2. ALL TOLERANCES ± 0.254«0.0101 UNLESS
OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
r--9.0210.33S}
4.57 (0.1801
~
3.731O.1411-+---->oj
0.64 (0.0331
6-141
HlMP-S029
F'in-
OPTIONAL LEADFORMS
FOR HP SUBMINIATURE
LAMPS
HEWLETT
~e. PACKARD
Features
• 100 OR 200 MIL BENDS
• CATHODE TAB OR CATHODE STRIPE
• SHORT OR LONG LEAD LENGTH
CATHODE TAB REMOVED
CATHODE STRIPE
/
A_~.J.,.,
H~
Description
The Hewlett-Packard Subminiature Lamps are available in
a variety of lead forms. In addition, these lead forms are
available with or without cathode tabs.
Iii
3.94 (0.1551
2.54 ( 0 . , 0 0 I U
NOM.
Ordering Information
To obtain subminiature lamps with these lead forms, contact
your local Hewlett-Packard sales office or franchised
Hewlett-Packard Distributor for specific ordering instructions. Be sure to specify either .100" or .200" spacing, short
Or long lead length, and cathode tab or cathode stripe.
+
.
*.~~L
M=
3.94 (0.1551
'----r
I
t
2.54 (0.,001-L-J·
NOM.
Figure 1, 0.100" Lead Spacing, Short Lead Length
CATHODE TAB REMOVED
CATHODE STRIPE
CATHODE TAB INTACT
A".
.0
D
I
1_,
10.16 (0.4001
10.67 (0.4201
n~·4201
~
I
2.54 ( 0 . , 0 0 I U
~---l
2.54 (O.,OOIU
NOM.
NOM.
NOTE: ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETRES (INCHES).
Figure 2. 0.100" Lead Spacing, Long Lead Length
6-142
"
+A
"
-
A-d.,",
~ I-.J_~
---a.d,,'35)
3,,9410,,155)
3.9410.155)
'f
I
'---rI
(0.200)~
I
I 5.0B
I- NOM.
L5"OB 10,,200)J
NOM.
Figure 3. 0.200" Lead Spacing, Short Lead Length
+-¥.
.+
[]
"'"OOnM
"~."m
CATHODE STRIPE
~
~
-~
10.16 (0.400)
10.67 (0.420)
~
- ---r
.
~~
~
1--5.0B (0.200)-1
~~
\.- 5.0B 10.200'-.1
NOM.
NOM.
NOTES:
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETRES (INCHES).
2. REFER TO THE SPECIFIC DATA SHEET FOR
SUBMINIATURE LAMPS FOR THE DETAILED
DIMENSIONS OF THE LAMP.
Figure 4. 0.200" Lead Spacing, Long Lead Length
6-143
10.16 (0.400)
10.67 (0.420)
FliD'l
CLIP AND RETAINING
RING FOR PANEL
MOUNTED T1 3/4 LEOs
HEWLETT
a!~ PACKARD
OPTION 009 (HlMP-0103)
Description
The Option 009 (HLMP-0103) is a black plastic
mounting clip and retaining ring. It is designed to
panel mount Hewlett-Packard Solid State high profile T-1 3/4 size lamps. This clip and ring combination is intended for installation in instrument
panels from 1.52mm (.060") to 3.18mm (.125")
thick. For panels greater than 3.18mm (.125")
counterboring is required to the 3.18mm (.125")
thickness.
r;
N---T
1t!t7.37 (.290) DIA.
-r
; ~:)
(~~l)~ ;
"~
...
~
B.OO (.31S) OIA.
1. Drill an ASA C size 6.15mm (.242") dia.
hole in the panel. Deburr but do not
chamfer the edges of the hole.
2. Press the panel clip into the hole from
the front of the panel.
3. Press the LED into the clip from the
!;lack. Use blunt long nose pi iers to push
on the LED. Do not use force on the
LED leads. A tool such as a nut driver
may be used to press on the clip.
PLIERS
Ordering Information
T-1 3/4 High Dome LED Lamps can be purchased
to include clip and ring by adding Option Code 009
to the device catalog part number.
Example:
To order the HLMP-3300 including clip and
ring, order as follows: HLMP-3300 Option 009.
6-144
II
I. )t--
i~
6.731.265) DIA.
II
~~e
)I
--I
9.53 (.375J D t A . _
RETAINING
RING
Mounting Instructions
4, Slip a plastic retaining ring onto the back
of the clip and press tight using tools such
as two nut drivers.
2. TOLERANCES, .25 (.010).
'
CLIP
Note: Clip and retaining ring are also available for T-1
package, from a non-HP source. Please contact
Interconsal Association, 991 Commercial St., Palo
Alto, CA 94303 for additional information.
6.73
(.265)
0.641.025)
l 5'21('2051~
I-DIA.
--II
-
NOTES: 1. DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETERS (INCHES).
HerlDetie Lamps
.6-145
FhU-
HEWLETT
~~ PACKARD
JAN QUALIFIED
HERMETIC
SOLID STATE
lAMPS*
1N5765
1N6093
JAN1N5765
JAN1N6093
JANTX1N5765 JANTX1 N6093
1N6092
1N6094
JAN1N6092
JAN1N6094
JANTX1N6092 JANTX1N6094
Features
• MILITARY QUALIFIED
LISTED. ON MIL-S-19500QPL
• CHOICE OF 4 COLORS
Red
High Efficiency Red
Yellow
Green
HERMETIC T0-46 LAMP
• DESIGNED FOR HIGH-RELIABILITY
APPLICATIONS
• HERMETICALLY SEALED
• WIDE VIEWING ANGLE
• LOW POWER OPERATION
• IC COMPATIBLE
• LONG LIFE
• TWO PANEL MOUNT OPTIONS[4]
Option 001
Aluminum Black Anodized Sleeve
Option 002
Black Conductive Composite Sleeve
Both Options Have Wire Wrappable
Leads Electrically Isolated From The Sleeve
LAMP ASSEMBLY AS PANEL MOUNT
Description
The 1N5765, 1N6092, 1N6093 and 1N6094. solid state LED's
are hermetically sealed in a TO-46 package with a tinted,
diffused plastic lens over a glass window. The panel mountable versions consist of an LED unit permanently mounted
in a conductive composite or anodized aluminum sleeve.
The electrically conductive composite sleeve provides
electrical contact to the front and back panels and has RFI
shielding equivalent to the aluminum sleeve. Additionally,
the composite sleeve has excellent tensil strength and
superior scratch and wear resistance. All these devices are
designed for high reliability applications and provide excellent on-off contrast, high axial luminous intensity and a
wide viewing angle.
The 1N6092 has a high efficiency red GaAsP on GaP LED
chip with a red diffused lens over a glass window. This
device is comparable to the 1N5765 but it's efficiency
extends to higher currents and it provides greater luminous
intensity.
The 1N6093 provides a yellow GaAsP on GaP LED chip
with a yellow, diffused lens over a glass window.
The 1N6094 utilizes a green GaP LED chip with a green,
diffused lens over a glass window.
The plastic lens over glass window system is extremely
durable and has exceptional temperature cycling capa"
bilities.
The 1N5765 utilizes a GaAsP LED chip with a red diffused
lens over a glass window.
'Panel mount versions of all of ihe above are available per the selection matrix on the next page.
6-146
COLOR ..;;;. PART NUMBER ";;;LAMP AND PANEL MOUNT MATRIX
Standard
With JAN au,lilie,lIon[1]
JAN'P·lus TX Testing(2]
Description
Product
Sta ndard Red
High Elfleiency Red
Yellow
Green
rS],
lN5?;65
1N6092
lN6093
Yellow
Green
Standard Red
High Ellipeney Red
Controlling MIL,S-1.9500
Document
HLMP·0904
HLMp·0354
HLMP·0454
HLMP'0554
HLMP-0930
H'Mp;0380 IJANM19500/5l~Ol'
HLMP'0480 IJANM19500lp2P01)
HLMP·OSSO IJANM19500/52J01)
Notes:
1. Parts are marked J1 NXXXX or as indicated.
2. Parts are marked JTX1 NXXXX or as indicated.
3. Panel mountable packaging incorporates additional assembly of the
equivalent Table I TO-46 part into the panel mount enclosure. The
resulting part is then marked per Table II.
4. When ordering panel mount devices, specify either Option #001
(anodized aluminum sleeve) or Option #002 (conductive composite
sleeve).
5. JAN and JANTX parts only.
JAN PART: Samples of each lot are subjected to Group A
and B tests listed below. Every six months, samples from a
single lot of each part type are subjected to Group C
testing. All tests are to the conditions and limits specified
by the appropriate MIL-S-19500 slash sheet.
JANTX PART: These devices undergo 100% screening
tests as listed below to the conditions and limits specified
by the MIL-S-19500 slash sheet. The JANTX lot has also
been subjected to Group A, Band C tests as for the JAN
PART above.
Examination or Test
MIL-STD-7S0
Method
Examination or Test
GROUP A INSPECTION
GROUP C INSPECTION
Subgroup 1
Thermal shock (temperature cycling I
End points: (same as subgroup 2 of group BI
Subgroup 1
Visual and mechanical examination
Subgroup 2
Luminous intensity {fJ
Luminous intensity {O
Reverse current
MIL-STD-750
Method
= 0° I
= 30° 1
Forward voltage
Subgroup 3
Capacitance
2071
-
Subgroup 2
Subgroup 3
High-temperature life (nonoperating 1
End points: Luminous intensity iO = 0' 1
1031
4001
Subgroup 4
Steady-state operation life
End paints: Isame as subgroup 31
1026
Subgroup 5
Peak forward pulse current Itransientl
2066
Subgroup 2
Solderability
Thermal shock I temperature cycling 1
Thermal shock I glass strain
-
Resistance to solvents
4016
4011
GROUP B INSPECTION
Subgroup 1
Physical dimensions
I
Hermetic seal
Moisture resistance
End points: Luminous intensity (0 = 0' 1
Subgroup 3
Shock
Vibration, variable frequency
Constant acceleration
Subgroup 6
Peak forward pulse current 1 operating 1
-
-
End points: I same as subgroup 6 of group B I
-
PROCESS AND POWER CONDITION
("TX" types only)
2016
2056
2006
High temperature storage Inonoperating I
Thermal shock (temperature cyclingl
Constant acceleration
Hermetic seal
Luminous intensity (0
Forward voltage
= 0' 1
Subgroup 4
Terminal strength
End points: Hermetic seal
2036
1071
Reverse current
Subgroup 5
Salt atmosphere I corrosion 1
1041
Burn-in I Forward bias 1
End paints Iwithin 72 hours of burn-in!:
Subgroup 7
SteadY'state operation life
End paints: Isame as subgroup 61
-
End points: Isame as subgroup 6 of group BI
2026
1051
1056
1071
1021
End paints: Isame as subgroup 21
Subgroup 6
High-temperature life I nonoperating I
End paints: Luminous intensity iO = 0' I
1051
1032
1027
6-147
~
Luminous intensity
~
Forward voltage
1051
2006
1071
4011
4016
(0
= 0° I
4011
Absolute Maximum Ratings at TA=25°C
Red
HLMP-0904
Higb Eft. Red
HLMP·0354
Yellow
HLMP·0454
Green
HLMp·0554
Units
Power Dissipation
(derate linearly from 50ac at
1.6mW/oC)
100
120
120
120
mW
DC Forward Current
50[1)
35(2)
35[2]
mA
Parameter
35(2J
60
See Fig. 10
1000
See Fig. 5
Peak Forward Current
Operating and Storage
Temperature Range
60
See Fig. 15
60
See Fig. 20
mA
-65°C to 100°C
Lead Soldering Temperature
(1.6mm (0.063 in.) from body)
260°C for 7 seconds.
Notes: 1. Derate from 50' C at 0.2mA/' C
2. Derate from 50' C at O.SmA/' C
Electrical/Optical Characteristics at TA =25°C
Symbol
Description
IVl
Axial LumInous
HLMP-0904
Min.
Typ.
O.S
1.0
Max.
HLMP·0354
Min.
Typ.
3.0
8.0
Max.
HLMP-0454
Min.
Typ.
3.0
8.0
M••.
20, ,
At
Luminous
Intensity
., e e
Typ.
3.0.1 80
Int~nsity
1\12
HLMP-oS54
Min.
30'1 5 1
60
Included Angle
aetween Half
Luminous Intensity
Points
ApE!\1\
Peak Wavelength lSI
';d
Dominanl Wavelength
TS
Speed of Response
1.5
1.5
1.5
m
J
Unit.
Telt Condilloni
mcd
IF - 20mA
FigS. 3.8.13.16
mcd
ee
0.09
111
25mA
1.5
70
70
70
'F
M••.
INO
655
700
590
635
695
550
583
640
626
585
10
200
200
Capacitancel 51
200
(-)K
Thermal Re$istance'"
425
fiJ('
Thermal Re$lstance" 11
550
VF
Forward Voltage
1.6
35
300
100
35
425
2.0
525
100
Reverse Currentl S j
Revers~
Breakdown
3~'
Figures
2.0
Measurement
at Peak
570
nm
121
200
ns
600
100
'OJW
550
2.1
3.0
pF
'C/W
425
550
3.0
nm
565
35
425
550
2.0
660
3.0
V
At IF; 25mA
18
IF ~ 20 mA
6.11,16,21
0
av.
e ~ 0'
LO
1.0
4
5
5.0
1.0
1.0
5.0
5.0
V,-O; f-l MHz
131
131
'FFigures 2. 7,
~20mA
12,17
IJA
V
VR- 3V
Ik ~ 100pA
Voltage
~,
Luminous Efficacy
56
140
455
600
ImJW
141
NOTES:
1. e1/2 Is the off-axis angle at which the luminous 'intensity is half the axial luminous intensity.
2. 'The domil1ant wavelength,' Ad. is derived from the CIE chromaticity diagram and represents the single wavelength which defines the color of the device.
3. Junction to Cathode Lead with 3.18mm (0.125 inch) of leads exposed between base of flange and heat sink.
4. Radiant intensity, Ie. in watts/steradian, may be found from the equation Ie = 'v/t)v, where Iv is the luminous intensity in candelas and t)v is the luminous
efficacy in lumens/watt.
5. Limits do not apply to non JAN or JANTX parts.
'Panel mount.
""TO-46
WAVELENGTH - nm
Figure 1. Relative Intensity vs. Wavelength.
6·148
Package Dimensions
1N5765,1N6092,1N6093,1N6094
HLMP-0904, 0354, 0454, 0554
TINTED PLASTIC
OVER GLASS LENS
4.511.1801
'T
24.6 (.910)
PART
MARKING
["'~
0.61
o.
GLASS/,METAL
HERl\leT1~CAN
n
4
~~u~~
:m2_l1.1iroi.1.t_O_1_ _ _ _ _
GOLD PLATED
KOVAR
0,41 10.016)
0.4810.019)
~t~llr
NOTES,
9'.~'''21~ _~_
0.89~
1.14r;o45j
- r - - - - - - - I - - - - f
I. THE PANELMOUNT SI.EEVE IS
'G.6?lt.4201
~
EITHER A BLACK CONDUCTIVE
COMPOSITE OR BLACK
ANODizeD ALUMINUM.
~. GOI.O PLATED LEADS.
3. MOUNTING I-IARDWARE WHICH INCLUDES ONE LOCK
1.425)
WASHER AND ONE H£X-NUT )S INCLUDED WITH EACH ~
PANEL MOUNTABLE HERMETIC SOLID STATE LAMP.
4. USE OF METRIC DRILL SIZE 8.20 MILLlMEtRES OR
ENGLISH DRILL SIZE P (o.~~ INCH) IS RECOMMENDED
+
FOR PRODUCING HOLE IN THE PANEL FOR PANEL
.
MOUNTING.
4. ALL DIMENSIONS IN MILLtMETRES (INCHES).
&. PACKAGE WEIGHT INCLUDING LAMP AND
PANEL MOUNT IS 1.2 - U GRAMS. NUT AND
WASHER 1$ AN exTlIA 0.6 -1.0 aRAM.
L
G,n.80;J-I1----;
II
I
~'53 (.0")
_
OUTLINE T0-46
l
f
m~
NOteS!
1. AI,.l.. DIMENSIONS AllE IN MILUMeTRESUNCHES),
2. GO\.D·PLATED \.EAOS.
:\. PACKAGE WEIGHT OF LAMP ALONE
IS .25 -.a5 GRAMS.
t.
Family of Red 1N5765/HLMP-0904
2.
60
40
"•
I
l-
'fA ·wc
30
I
20
ili
~
::>
•
fA
>
Iii
2.0
.
Qfa
1.5
ffi<
I- •
~
u
ZN
0
i~
a:
""
Ii"
~~
1.0
~~
~
~-
I
-"
a:
1.40
T.I, 25'J
/'
~~
10
1
1.5
'~5'C
1.70
1.60
VF- FORWARD VOLTAGE - VOLTS
Figure 2. Forward Current vs.
Forward Voltage.
.5
/
00
V
1/
10
20
U
>0
u"
/
~~
1.0
~
iE!:i
...
....
~o
~~
>~
-~
~!
..
-- - -
a:~
30
40
50
°0
IF - FORWARD CURRENT - rnA
Figure 3. Relative Luminous Intensity
vs. Forward Currant.
50
100
150
200
250
300
350
IpEAK - PEAK CURRENT -mA
Figure 4. Relative Efficiency
(Luminous Intensity per Unit
Current) vs. Peak Current.
1N5765/H LMP-0904
9O'f--+--+-+--+'3
tp -
PULSE WIDTH -,us
Figure 5. Maximum Tolerable Peak Current vs. Pulse Duration.
(lDC MAX as per MAX Ratings)
Figure 6. Relative Luminous Intensity vs. Angul~r Displacement.
Family of High Efficiency Red 1 N6092/HLMP-0354·
1
I
I
.
30
•
20
~
I
1/
0
15
".0
v, -
1.50
zw
~~
2.0
3.0
2.5
v
1.25
/'
1.00
.......
....
2
0
II
8
/
V'
0.00 5
3.4
V
/
0.50
0.25
~"25'b
4
/
0.75
10
15
20
25
30
35
IF - FORWARD CURRENT":' mA
PEAK FORWARD VOLTAGE - V
Figure 7. Forward Current v••
Forward Voltage.
3.0
....~~
~9
~<
~~
/
~
1.75
,g~
II
0
~
~
~<
I
40
C
~
•
1.
2.00
50
Figure 8. Relative Luminous Intensity
vs. Forward Cu~rant.
•
· 0
V
I
10
20
30
40
50
60
' ':£At< - PEAK CURRENT - mA
Figure 9. Relative Efficiency
(Luminous·lntensity par Unit .
Currentl vs. Peak Current.
rr",nmr-.-rr
.
,
10
tp":'
1,000
10,000
PULSE DURATION ":#l$
Figure '11. Relative Luminous Intensity vs. Angular DisPlacem8~.
Figure 10. Maximum Tolerable Peak Cur·
rent vs. Pulse Durati~n. (lDC MAX
as par MAX Ratings)
Family of Yellow 1N6093/HLMP-0454
1I
~
ac
!
...
30
~
.
,
i
J:
0
~.o
.15
\If -
2D
/
I
2.5
1.50
~~
1.2
!!i:::i
1.00
V
5
/
~:!i
!
I
o
~~
~!;(
,
!
0
I
2.00
~C( 1.75
'/
Ii!
~
j
~
6
40
1.6
2.25
I
0
3.0
I
PEAK FORWARD VOLTAGE - V
. F Ig·u;e 12. Forvikrd Current vs.
. Forward Voltage.
~~ 0.75
~~
0,60
...
0.25
/
/
0
/
""
10
I
•
15
20
25
30
......
;'
/"
2
V'
0,00 5
i.....~
4
35
IF - FORWARD CURRENT - mA
Figure 13. Relative Luminous Intensity
vs. Forward Current.
·/
· 0
·FigUre.1~.
10
/
20
30
---I-f-+--+--+lc++-+-t-+....,~ .75
.50
80'
tp
-PULSE DURATION -PI
Figure 16. Relative Luminous Inte~sitY· vs. Angular Displacement.
6-150
50
60 .
mA
Relative Efficiency
(Luminous Intensity par Unit
Currentl vs. Peak Current•
.....:l>+4+++++-t-t-H'·0.
Figure 15. Maximum Tolerable Peak Cur·
.
. rent vs. Pulse Duration. (lDC MAX
as par MAX Ratings)
40
IpEA~ '- PEAK CURRENT -
Family of Green 1 N6094/HLMP-0554
1.6
2.00
0
~
0
~~
II
~~ 1.25
00
z
w 1.0 0
~~
w~
0
~ ~ 0.50
...
V
'.5
2.0
0.75
~g
if
0
2.S
3.0
3.4
VF - PEAK FORWARD VOL.TAGE - V
Figure 17. Forward Current vs.
Forward Voltage.
0.25
+•. ,.·b
4
ffi1",.50
II
0
1.75
V
0.00 5
V
10
V
15
V
20
17
/'
;;
2
0
/V
25
30
, I
. 0
35
IF - FORWARD CURRENT - mA
10
20
""
V'"
30405060
IpEAK - PEAK CURRENT - rnA
Figure 18. Relative Luminous Intensity
vs. Forward Current.
Figure 19. Relative Efficiency
(Luminous Intensity per Unit
Current) vs. Peak Current .
.50
·.~+-++-l--f-4rl--i-f-H.25
,., r.+i11t,r:-rmlH+-I-Tr,1il!-rtt-mN
'.0,L...L.I.=":,o:-'-"""JlI,oo~.JW.u,.":OOO::-'-JWJlO"'.OOO
tp - PUL.SE DURATION -lois
Figure 20. Maximum Tolerable Peak Cur·
rent vs. Pulse Duration. (lOC MAX
as per MAX Ratings)
Figure 21. Relative Luminous Intensity vs. Angular Displacement.
6-151
F/ihl
ULTRA-BRIGHT HERMETIC
SOLID STATE LAMPS*
HEWLETT
~e. PACKARD
HLMP-0363
HLMP-0391
HLMP-0392
HLMP'0463
HLMP'0491
HLMP-0492
HLMP-0563
HLMP-0591
HLMP'0592
.Features
• SUNLIGHT VIEWABLE WITH PROPER
CONTRAST ENHANCEMENT FILTER
• HERMETICALLY SEALED
•
CHOICE OF 3 COLORS
High Efficiency Red
Yellow
High Performance Green
•
LOW POWEROPERATION
•
IC COMPATIBLE
•
LONG LIFE/RELIABLE/RUGGED
•
TWO PANEL MOUNT OPTIONS[2]
Option 001
Aluminum Black Anodized Sleeve
Option 002
Black Conductive Composite Sleeve
Both Options Have Wire Wrappable Leads
Electicallylsolated From The Sleeve
Description
The HLMP-0363, HLMP-0463, and HLMP-0563 are hermetically sealed solid state lamps in a TO-i8 package with a
clear glass lens. These hermetic lamps provide improved
brightness over conventional hermetic LED lamps, excellent on-off contrast, and high axial luminous intensity.
These LED indicators are designed for use in applications
requiring readability in bright sunlight. With a proper contrast enhancement filter, these LED indicators are readable
in sunlight ambients. All of these devices are available in a
choice of two panel mountable fixtures, a conductive
composite or anodized aluminum.
COLOR Description
PART NUMfJ'ER -
The HLMP-0363 utilizes a high efficiency red GaAsP on
GaP LED chip. The HLMP-0463 uses a yellow GaAsP on
a GaP LED chip. The HLMP-0563 uses a green GaP LED
chip.
These devices are offered with JAN equivalent quality
conformance inspection (OCI) and JANTX equivalent
screenings similar to MIL-S-i9500/519/520/521.
'Panel Mount version of all of the above are available per the
selection matrix on this page.
LAMP AND PANEL MOUNT MATRIX
JAN QCI
Standard Product
JANTX Equivalent
TABLE I HERMETIC TO·18 PART NUMBER SYSTEM
High Efficiency Red
Yellow
Green
HLMP-0391
HLMP-0491
HLMP-0591
HLMP·0363
HLMP·0463
HLMP-0563
HLMP-0392
HLMP-0492
HLMP-0592
TABLE II PANEL MOUNTABLE PART NUMBER SYSTEM{1,2]
High Efficiency Red
Yellow
Green
HLMP-0364
HLMP'()464
HLMP'()564
HLMP'0365
HLMP-0465
HLMP-0565
HLMP-0366
HLMP-Q466
HLMP-0566
NOTE:
1. Panel mountable packaging incorporates additional assembly of the equivalent Table I TO-18 part into the panel mount enclosure. The
resulting part is then marked per Table II.
2. When ordering panel mount devices, specify either Option #001 (anodized aluminum sleeve) or Option #002 (conductive composite
sleeve).
6-152
JAN Equivalent: Samples of each lot are subjected to
Group A and B, listed below. Every six months samples
from a single lot of each part type are subjected to Group
C testing. All tests are to the conditions and limits specified
by the equivalent MIL-S-19500 slash sheet for the device
under test.
Examination or Test
JANTX Equivalent: These devices undergo 100% screening
tests as listed below to the conditions and limits specified
by MIL-S-19500 slash sheet. The JANTX lot has also been
subjected to Group A, Band C tests as for the JAN
Equivalent PART above.
MIL-STD-750
Method
Examination or Test
GROUP C INSPECTION
GROUP A INSPECTION
Subgroup 1
Visual and mechanical examination
2071
Subgroup 2
Luminous intensity (8; 0')
Reverse current
Forward voltage
4016
4011
Subgroup 3
Capacitance
4001
Subgroup 1
Thermal shock (temperature cycling)
End points: (same as subgroup 2 of group B)
-
Subgroup 2
Resistance to solvents
GROUP B INSPECTION
Subgroup 1
Physical dimensions
MIL-STD-750
Method
-
Subgroup 3
High-temperature life (nonoperating)
End points: Luminous intensity (8; 0')
1031
Subgroup 4
Steady-state operation life
End points: (same as subgroup 3)
1026
Subgroup 5
Peak forward pulse current (transient)
2066
1051
-
-
End points: (same as subgroup 6 of group B)
Subgroup 2
Solderability
Thermal shock (temperature cycling)
Thermal shock (glass strain)
Hermetic seal
Moisture resistance
End points: Luminous intensity (8; 0')
2026
1051
1056
1071
1021
Subgroup 3
Shock
Vibration, variable frequency
Constant acceleration
End points: (same as subgroup 2)
2016
2056
2006
Subgroup 6
Peak forward pulse current (operating)
End points: (same as subgroup 6 of group B)
-
Subgroup 4
Terminal strength
End points: Hermetic seal
2036
1071
Subgroup 5
Salt atmosphere (corrosion)
1041
Subgroup 6
High-temperature life (nonoperating)
End points: Luminous intensity (8; 0')
1032
Subgroup 7
Steady-state operation life
End points: (same as subgroup 6)
1027
-
PROCESS AND POWER CONDITION
("TX" types only)
High temperature storage (nonoperating)
Thermal shock (temperature cycling)
Constant acceleration
Hermetic seal
Luminous intensity (8 ; 0')
Forward voltage
Reverse current
Burn-in (Forward bias)
End points (within 72 hours of burn-in):
" Luminous intensity (8 ; 0')
" Forward voltage
-
6-153
1051
2006
1071
4011
4016
4011
Absolute Maximum Ratings at T-A=25° C
Parameter
Power Dissipation
(derate linearly from 50·C at
1.6mW/·C)
DC Forward Current
High Elf. Red
HLMP'0363
Yellow
HLMP'0463
Green
HLMP-Q563
Units
120
120
120
mW
35 111
35111
.60
See Fig. 10
35111
60
See Fig. 15
mA
60
Peak Forward Current
See Fig.S
Operating and Storage
Temperature Range
mA
-65°C to i00·C
Lead Soldering Temperature
11.6mm (0.063 In.) from body]
260· C lor 7 seoonds.
NOTES: 1. Derate from 50° C a\ 0.5mAlo C
Electrical/Optical Characteristics at TA=25° C
HlMP-0363
Symbol Descripllon
IVl
Axial Luminous
Intensity
28112
Included Angle
Between Half
luminous Intensity
Points
>'PEAK
Peak Wavelength
Min.
Typ.
20
50
HlMP-0463
Max.
Min.
Typ.
20
50
16
590
635
HlMP-0563
Max.,
Min.
Typ.
20
I I
563
660
Unila Test Condilions
mcd
18
deg.
[11 Figures
6,11,16
nm
Measurement
at Peak
525
565
600
,
Ad
Dominant Wavelength
T.
Speed of Response
C
CapacltancelSI
0JC
Thermal Resistance'
6JC
m
626
585
570
nm
12J
200
200
ns
pF
Vl=O; 1=1 MHz
,oC/W
[3J
V
IF = 20mA
Figures 2,7,12
35
10a
100
35
425
425
425
Thermal ReSistance"
550
550
550
VF
Forward Voltage
2.0
I"
BVA
Reverse Current
3.0
2.0
1.0
5.0
[31
3.0
25mA
=
1.0
1.0
5.0
100
2.1
3.0
At IF
Reverse Breakdown
Voltage
iF=20mA
Figs. 3,8,13
/1=0'
50
AtlF=25mA
16
695
Mall.
5.0
/.IA
V
VR"'SV
IR=JooIlA
140
455
600
Im/W
[4)
luminous Efficacy
'Iv
NOTES:
1. 9'1.. is the off-axis angle at which the luminous intensity is half the axial luminous intensity.
2. The dominant wavelength, Ad, is derived from the CIE chromaticity diagram and represents the single wavelength which defines
the color of the device.
3. Junction to Cathode Lead with 3.18mm (0.125 inch) of leads exposed between base of flange and heat sink.
4. Radiant intensity, Ie, in watts/steradian. may be found from the equation Ie = IvI'1v, where Iv is'the luminous intensity in candelas
and 'Iv is the luminous efficacy in lumens/watt.
5. Limits do not apply to non screened parts.
'Panel mount.
"TO'~18.
1,0r-------------~~~-,__--~~~~--~~~------------~------------_,
O,5r------------tr---+-~----~~~r_------~~._--------~------------~
WAVELENGTH - nm
Figure 1. Relative Intensity ¥s. Wavelength.
6-154
package Dimensions
HLMP-0363, 0463, 0563
. "-a.'ll~
cr
L-
HLMP-0364, 0464, 0564
4'6~\('1781
MH~l
4,85
r.46
__
rr.-.,,--rt
DIA.
GLASS LENS
-r:;f'
"'~
Y-- t
262 tro01
c",' -
GLASS.I.. M
...ETAl
~ HERMETI~ CAN
1:215)
_~.
W~~.
~~
0.61
to:024i
-J~~~IOIA.
0.48 10.019'
QJ!l!~
1.141.045'
-~
NOTES:
1. THE PANELMOUNT SLEEVE 1$
EtTHEFl A BLACK CONDUCTiVE'
CATHODE
COMPOSlTE OR BLACK
ANODIZ~O AI.UMINt,JM,
HA~DWAftE WHICH INCLUOES ONE lOCK
WASH!:R AND ONE HEX·Nl,." IS INCLUDED WtTH EACH
PANEL MOUNTABLE HERMETIC 801..10 STATE LAMP.
2. MOUNTING
i
I
.J
O.81~
~ 1.01(.042)
OUTLINE TO-18
3, USE OF METRIC ORILL SIZE &20 MILUMETFlESOR
NOrEg,
ENGl.ISH OfULl SIZE P (0-,323 INCHI IS flECOMMENOEO
FOR: :PRODUCING HOLE tN THE MNEl FOR PAN.El
MOUNTING.
4. All OIMf;NSIONS ARE IN MILUMETRES fiNCHES).
1, ALL DIMENStONS ARE IN MILI.,IMETRES (INCHE$).
.2. GOLD·PLATEO LEADS.
3. PACKAGE WEIGHT OF LAMP ALONE
IS .2$. ,40GAAMs'
S. PACKAGE WEIGHT INCLUDING- LAMP AND
PAN~LMOUNT IS 1.z ~ 1.8-GAAMS. NUT AND WASHER ISANEXTRA .6-1.0GRAM.
Family of High Efficiency Red HLMP-0363/HLMP-0364
1
I
.
50
I
io ..
II
o
i
~
I
~
1.75
~<
~~
gS
1.1)0
~~
1.25
~~
;~
30
).o>s'!
/
1.00
/
~~
e
~
I .6
2.00
~~
~~
I
20
~-
/
0.25
0.00 5
3.0
/
7
0
Figure 2. Forward Current vs.
Forward Voltage.
/
20
25
35
Figure 3. Relative Luminous Intensity
vs. Forward Current.
.6 0
10
20
30
~
u 1.72
o
1.000
10,000
9O.1---J---J---J----=f::o
80' 90'
,08·
tp - PULSE DURATION - /.IS
Figure 5. Maximum Tolerable Peak Curent vs. Pulse Duration. (Ioc MAX
as per MAX Ratings)
Figure 6. Relative Luminous Intensity vs. Angular Displacement.
6-155
40
50
60
Figure 4. Relative Efficiency
(Luminous Intensity per Unit
Current) vs. Peak Current.
z
~ -2.0
100
.-
IpEAK - PEAK CURRENT - rnA
3.0
10
"
I
15
IF - FORWARD CURRENT - rnA
VF - PEAK FORWARD VOLTAGE - V
/
8
./
10
"
2
/
~g 0.50
10
0
0.75
4
Family of Yellow HLMP-0463/HLMP-0464
60
1I
~
~
a
II I
I
50
~
l-
30
I
~
~
20
•
o
1.50
~!il
1.25
~
~
21
~
1.00
:;
w~
>« 0.75
1. 0
1.5
2.0
3.0
2.5
j
~
1i0
0.50
g
•
6
1.0
1//1
1
I
I
V
I
'0102030405060
3.4
VF - PEAK FORWARD VOLTAGE - V
IpEAK - PEAK CURRENT - rnA
IF - FORWARD CURRENT - rnA
Figure 7. Forward Current vs.
Forward Voltage.
.....
Q
>i
-0
~~
,~
4
Q
~~
~~
i I
v
10
;;;1=>~
U
1.75
~~
I
I
;
~ct
I
~.-:wb
2.00
~
40
o
1.6
2.25
Figure 8. Relative Luminous Intensity
vs. Forward Current.
Figure 9. Relative Efficiency
(Luminous Intensity per Unit
Current) vs. Peak Current.
I-
Z
«
«
=>
u
u 1.72
o
100
tp - PULse DURATION - 1-1$
Figure 11. Relallve Luminous Intensity vs. Angular Displacement.
Figure 10. Maximum Tolerable Peak Current vs. Pulse Duration. (Ioc MAX
as per MAX Ratings)
Family of Green HLMP-0563/HLMP-0564
1 .•
2.00
I
I
0
•
0
tt±
~
ffi~
~~
1.7
,
00
zw 1.00
~~ 0.7,
w~
>«
II
iLl
~~
0.5 0
...
0.2
'/
0.0 0
VF - PEAK fORWARD VOLTAGE - V
V
V
./
'/
./'
~ ~
~
~
W
W
0
W
::
~
~«15~
g
1.'
...""
1.2
~
..
/
1.'
//
..
I
10
15
20
25
30
35
IF - FORWARD CURRENT - rnA
Figure 12. Forward Current vs.
Forward Voltage.
g
ffi 1
>
1.50
~< 1.2
J. -..·h
,
Figure 13. Relative Luminous Intensity
vs. Forward Current.
'·0
10
20
30
l
~i
.;ll
-+--+-j-j-H.60
1.3
1.2
1.1
1.0
1
10
100
1.000
10,000
tp - PULSE DURATION - 1-11
Figure 15. Maximum Tolerable Peak Current vs. Pulse Duration. (Ioc MAX
as per MAX Ratings)
80'1--+---+---+---1
Figure 16. Relative Luminous Intensity vs. Angular Displacement.
6-156
50
Figure 14. Relative Efficiency
(Luminous Intensity per Unit
Current) vs. Peak Current.
-+--+--+-j"'--H·75
I
40
IpEAK - PEAK CURRENT - rnA
60
Contrast Enhancement
The objective of contrast enhancement is to optimize
display readability. Adequate contrast enhancement can be
achieved in indoor applications through luminous contrast
techniques. Luminous contrast is the observed brightness
of the illuminated indicator compared to the brightness of
the surround. Appropriate wavelength filters maximize
luminous contrast by reducing the amount of light reflected
from the area around the indicator while transmitting most
of the light emitted by the indicator. These filters are
described further in Application Note 1015.
6-157
.
"
l~
•
Solid State Displays
•
•
•
•
•
•
Smart Alphanumeric Displays
Alphanumeric Displays
AIGaAs Seven Segment Displays
Seven Segment Displays
Hexadecimal and Dot Matrix Displays
Hermetic Displays
Solid State Displays
Hewlett-Packard's line of Solid State Displays answers
all the needs of the designer. From smart alphanumeric
displays to low cost numeric displays in sizes from 3
mm (0.15 in.) to 20 mm (0.8 in.) and colors of red, high
efficiency red, yellow, and high performance green, the
selection is complete.
Hewlett-Packard's 5 x 7 dot matrix alphanumeric
display line comes in 3 character sizes: 3.8 mm (0.15
in.), 5 mm (0.2 in.), and 6.9 mm (0.27 in.). In addition,
there are now 4 colors available for each size: standard
red, yellow, high efficiency red, and green. This wide
selection of package sizes and colors makes these
products ideal for a variety of applications in avionics,
industrial control, and instrumentation.
The newest addition to HP's alphanumeric display line,
the intelligent eight character, 5.0 mm (0.2 in.)
alphanumeric display in the very flexible 5 x 7 dot
matrix font. Product features include, a low power onboard CMOS IC, ASCII decoder, the complete 128
ASCII character set, and the LED drivers. In addition,
an on-board RAM offers the designer the ability to
store up to 16 user-definable characters, such as foreign
characters, special symbols and logos. These features
make it ideal for avionics, medical, telecommunications,
analytical equipment, computer products, office and
industrial equipment applications.
Another addition to HP's alphanumeric display line is
the large (0.68 inch and 1.04 inch) 5 x 7 dot matrix
alphanumeric display family. This family is offered in
standard red (both sizes), high efficiency red (1.04 inch
only) and high performance green (both sizes). These
displays have excellent viewability; the 1.04 inch
character font can be read at up to 18 meters (12 meters
for the 0.68 inch display). Applicationis for these large 5
x 7 displays include industrial machinery and process
controllers, weighing scales, computer tape drive
systems and transportation.
Hewlett-Packard's line of numeric seven segment
displays is one of the broadest. From low cost, standard
red displays to high light ambient displays producing
7.5 mcd/segment, HP's 0.3 in., 0.43 in., 0.56 in., and
0.8 in. characters can provide a solution to every display
need. HP's product offering include 0.56 in. dual digit
displays and a line fo small package, bright 0.3 in.
displays - the 0.3 in. Microbright. HP's borad line of
numeric seven segment displays are ideal for electronic
instrumentation, industrial, weighing scales, point-ofsale terminals and appliance applications. The newest
addition to HP's line of numeric seven segment displays
is the Double Heterojunction AlGaAs red low current
display family. This family is offered in the 0.3 min.
Mini, 0.43 in., 0.56 in., and 0.8 in. package sizes. These
AlGaAs numeric displays are very bright at low drive
currents - typical intensity of 650 mcd/segment at I
rnA/segment drive. These displays are ideal for battery
operated and other low power applications.
7-2
High Reliability Displays
In addition to Hewlett-Packard commercial solid state
displays, Hewlett-Packard offers a complete line of
hermetic packages for high reliability military and
aerospace applications. These package consists of
numeric and hexadecimal displays, 5 x 7 dot matrix
alphanumeric displays with extended temperature
ranges, and fully intelligent monolithic 16 segment
displays with extended temperature ranges and on
board CMOS IC's. Similar to the commercial display
product selection, the high reliability display products
are available in a variety of character sizes and all four
colors: standard red, high efficiency red, yellow, and
high performance green.
Integrated numeric and hexadecimal displays (with onboard IC's) solve the designer's decoding/driving
problems. They are available in plastic packages for
. general purpose usage, ceramic/glass packages for
industrial applications, and hermetic packages for high
reliability applications. This family of displays has been
designed for ease of use in a wide range of
environments.
Hewlett-Packard offers three different testing programs
for the high reliability conscious display customer.
These programs include DESG Qualification on the
MIL-D-87157 for the hermetically sealed 4N51-4N54
hexadecimal and numeric displays; and two levels of inhouse high reliability testing programs that conform or
a modification to MIL-D-87157 Quality Level A Test
Tables for all other high reliability display products.
Please refer to the individual data sheets for a complete
description of each display's testing program.
7-3
Alphanumeric LED Displays
Page
Device
l
~
i-+-1
L ___ .J
~_=_J
,, ,
,
'
,
PIN
Description
HDSP-2111 5.0 mm (0.2 in.)
5 x 7 Eight Character
HDSP-2112 Intelligent Display
Operating Temperature
Range: -20°C to +70°C
Yellow
HPDL-1414 2.85 mm (.112")
Four Character
Monolithic Smart
Alphanumeric Display
Operating Temperature
Range: -40°C to +85°C
HPDL-2416 4.1 mm (.16") Four
Character Monolithic
Smart Alphanumeric
Display
Operating Temperature
Range: -40°C to +85°C
HDSP-2000 3.8 mm (.15") 5 x 7 Four
Character Alphanumeric
HDSP-2001 12 Pin Ceramic 7.62 mm
(.3") DIP with untinted
HDSP-2002 glass lens.
Operating Temperature
HDSP-2003 Range: -20°C to +85°C
HDSP-2300 5.0 mm (.20") 5 x 7
Character Alphanumeric
HDSP-2301 12 Pin Ceramic 6.35 mm
(.25") DIP with untinted
HDSP-2302 glass lens
Operating Temperature
HDSP-2303 Range: -20"C to +85°C
Application
Color
No.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Avionics
Medical
Telecommunications
Analytical Equipment
Computer Products
Office Equipment
Industrial Equipment
7-19
Red
•
•
•
•
Portable Data Entry Devices
Industrial Instrumentation
Computer Peripherals
Telecommunication
Equipment
7-30
Red
•
•
•
•
•
Portable Data Entry Devices
Medical Equipment
Industrial Instrumentation
Computer Peripherals
Telecommunication
Equipment
7-38
Red
• Computer Terminals
• Business Machines
• Portable, Hand-held or
mobile.data entry, readout or communications
High Efficiency Red
Yellow
High Efficiency Red
High Performance
Green
Red
Yellow
High Efficiency Red
High Performance Green
7-46
For further information see
Application Note 1016.
• Avionics
• Grounds Support, Cockpit,
Shipboard' Systems
• Medical Equipment
• Industrial and Process
control
• Computer Peripherals
and Terminals
7-50
For further information see
Application Note 1016.
HDSP-2490 6.9 mm (.27") 5 x 7 Four
Character Alphanumeric
HDSP-2491 28Pin Ceramic 15.24 mm
(.6") DIP with untinted
HDSP-2492 glass lens
D~
Red
Yellow
High Efficiency Red
HDSP-2493 Operating Temperature
Range: -20°C to +85°C
High Performance Green
5082-7100
Red Untinted Glass Lens
5082-7101
5082-7102
6.9 mm (.27") 5 x 7 Three
Character Alphanumeric
22 Pin Ceramic 15.2 mm
(.6") DIP
6.9 mm (.27") 5 x 7 Four
Character Alphanumeric
28 Pin Ceramic 15.2 mm
(.6") DIP
6.9 mm (.27") 5 x 7 Five
Character Alphnumeric
36 Pin Ceramic
15.2 mm (.6") DIP
7-4
• High Brightness Ambient
Systems
• Industrial and Process Control
• Computer Peripherals
• Ground Support Systems
7-56
For further information see
Application Note 1016.
General Purpose Market
• Business Machines
• Calculators
• Solid State CRT
• Industrial Equipment
7-80
Alphanumeric LED Displays (cont.)
Device
Description
HDSP-6504 3.8 mm (.15") Sixteen
Segment Four Character
Alphanumeric 22 Pin
15.2 mm (.6") DIP
HDSP-6508 3.8 mm (.15") Sixteen
Segment Eight Character
Alphanumeric 26 Pin
15.2 mm (.6") DIP
HDSP-6300 3.56 mm (.14") Sixteen'
Segment Eight Character
Alphanumeric 26 Pin
15.2 mm (.6") DIP
Color
Red
•
•
•
•
m-
n
,
,,,
,
g
g
g
g
g
g
·· ··•
Application
Computer Terminals
Hand Held Instruments
In-Plant Control Equipment
Diagnostic Equipment
• Computer Peripherals and
Terminals
• Computer Base Emergency
Mobile Units
. • Automotive Instrument
Panels
• Desk Top Calculators
• Hand-Held Instruments·
'---
A
Page
No.
7-84
7-90
For further information ask for
Application Note 931.
Alphanumeric Display Systems
Device
PIN
rI
~I
f
~
ug
".
$"
oi:,
[]j;
[]lj
r1
[]l':
ljil
DO
o
0
fh.lj)<:>~
,
0"
..
Description
Color
HDSP-6621 Single Line 16
Character Display
Board Utilizing
the HPDL-1414
114.30 mm (4.50") Lx
30.48 mm (1.20") H x
8.12 mm (0.32") D
HDSP-6624 Single Line 32
Character Display
Board Utilizing
the HPDL-2416
223.52 mm (8.80") L x
58.42 mm (2.30") H x
15.92 mm (0.62") D
HDSP-2416 Single-Line 16 Character
Display Panel Utilizing
the HDSP-2000
HDSP-2424 Single-Line 24 Character
Display Panel Utilizing
the HDSP-2000
HDSP-2432 Single-Line 32 Character
Display Panel Utilizing
the HDSP-2000
HDSP-2440 Single-Line 40 Character
Display Panel Utilizing
the HDSP-2000 Display
HDSP-2470 HDSP-2000 Display Interface Incorporating a 64
Character ASCII Decoder
HDSP-2471 HDSP-2000 Display Interface Incorporating a 128
Character ASCII Decoder
HDSP-2472 HDSP-2000 Display Interface without ASCII Decoder. Instead, a 24 Pin
Socket is Provid ed to
Accept a Custom 128
Character Set from a
User Programmed 1K x
8 PROM
162.56 mm (6.4") Lx
58.42 mm (2.3") H x
7.11 mm (0.28") D
m.80 mm (7.0") L x
58.42 mm (2.3") H x
7.11 mm (.28") D
171.22 mm (6.74") Lx
58.42 mm (2.3") H x
16.51 mm (.65") D
7-5
Appllcallon
•
•
•
•
Computer Peripherals
Telecommunications
Industrial Equipment
Instruments
• Data Entry Terminals
• Instrumentation
Page
No.
7-60
7-68
Large Alphanumeric Displays
PIN
Device
HDSP-4701 Red. Common Row Anode
I(5"6'Qc5O
00000
00000
00000
00000
00000
.QQQQQ
I
Page
No.
17.3 mm (0.6S")
Dual-in-Line
0.70" H x 0.50"W
x 0.26" D
770 !lcd/dot
(100 mA Peak. 1/5
Duty Factor)
7-95
26.5 mm (1.04")
Dual-in-Line
1.10" H x 0.79"W
x 0.25" D
S60 !lcd/dot
(100 mA Peak, 1/5
Duty Factor)
HDSP-4703 Red, Common Row
Cathode
HDSP-4401 Red, Common Row Anode
00000
00000
00000
00000
00000
00000
00000
Typical Iv @ 50 mA
Peak. 1/5 Duty Factor
Package
Description
HDSP-4403 Red, Common Row
Cathode
HDSP-4501 High Efficiency Red,
Common Row Anode
3500 !lcd / dot
HDSP-4503 High Efficiency Red,
Common Row Cathode
7-6
Double Heterojunction AIGaAs Red Low Current Seven Segment LED Displays
Package
Device
.:B:. §]
~
Description
Typical Iv @ 1 rnA DC
Page
No.
7-103
HDSP-A101
HDSP-A103
HDSP-A107
HDSP-A10S
AIGaAs
AIGaAs
AIGaAs
AIGaAs
Red,
Red,
Red,
Red,
Common Anode, RHDP
Common Cathode, RHDP
Overflow ±1 Common Anode
Overflow ±1 Common Cathode
600 !'cd/seg.
HDSP-E100
HDSP-E101
HDSP-E103
HDSP-E106
AIGaAs
AlGaAs
AIGaAs
AIGaAs
Red,
Red,
Red,
Red,
Common Anode, LHDP
Common Anode, RHDP
Common Cathode, RHDP
Universal Overflow ±1
650 !,cd / seg.
HDSP-H101
HDSP-H103
HDSP-H107
HDSP-H10S
AlGaAs
AIGaAs
AIGaAs
AIGaAs
Red,
Red,
Red,
Red,
Common Anode, RHDP
Common Cathode, RHDP
Overflow ±1 Common Anode
Overflow ±1 Common Cathode
700 !,cd/seg.
HDSP-N100
HDSP-N101
HDSP-N103
HDSP-N105
HDSP-N106
AlGaAs
AIGaAs
AIGaAs
AIGaAs
AIGaAs
Red,
Red,
Red,
Red,
Red,
Common Anode, LHDP
Common Anode, RHDP
Common Cathode, RHDP
Common Cathode, LHDP
Universal Overflow ±1
590 !'cd/seg.
:=0 :
,
"
Z62 mm (0.3")
Mini Dual-in-Line
0.5"H x 0.3"W x 0.24"D
.
. =ff.
: 0=: :ao:
:U=O:?
,
B
•
~
0
0
10.92 mm (0.43")
Dual-in-line
0.75"H x 0.5"W x 0.25"D
=0
bQ9 ~
1BJ
++.?
14.2 mm (0.56")
Dual-in-Line (Single Digit)
0.6TH x 0.49"W x 0.31 "D
~ilu~
=.
lLD~
o
+
0
+
+
+
O~
! D !
FOil!
+
+
,+
o~
20 mm (O.S")
Dual-in-Line
1.09"H x 0.7S"W x 0.33"D
7-7
High Efficiency Red Low Current Seven Segment LED Displays
Device,
Package
:.~
.:8.:. .:=0 .:
§J
Description
HDSP-7511
HDSP-7513
HDSP-7517
HDSP-7518
High Efficiency Red,
High Efficiency Red,
High Efficiency Red,
High Efficiency Red,
Common Anode, RHDP
Common Cathode, RHDP .'
Overflow ±1 Common Anode
Overflow ±1 Common Cathode
HDSP-3350
HDSP-3351
HDSP-3353
HDSP-3356
High Efficiency Red, Common Anode, LHDP
High Efficiency Red, Common Anode, RHDP
High Efficiency Red, Common Cathode, RHDP
High Efficiency Red, Universal Polarity and
Overflow Indicator, RHDP
Typical Iv @ 2 mA DC
Page
No.
270 /lcd / seg.
7-109
0
7.62 mm (0.3")
Microbright
Dual-in-Line
0.5"H x 0.3"W x 0.24"0
, 'B
.• U.=d·
'.
O'.
:U=O~ :~ O~.
~
D
}OO /lcdl seg.
,
~.
10.92 mm (0.43")
Dual-in-line
0.75"H x 0.5"W x 0.25"0
lS ~
[J._ =0
••• ?
HDSP-5551
HDSp:5553
HDSP-5557
HDSP-5558
High Efficiency Red,
High Efficiency Red,
High Efficiency Red,
High Efficiency Red,
Commoh Anode, RHDP
Common Cathode, RHDP
Overflow ±1 Common Anode
Overflow ±fCommon Cathode
14.2 mm (0.56")
Dual-in-Line (Single Digit)
0.67"H x 0.49"W x 0.31"0
7-8
370/lcd/seg.
Red, High Efficiency Red, Yellow, and High Performance Green Seven
Segment LED Displays
Package
. .
r--
-
,
;=0, :
.:8:
"
+
'---
,C{?O'
,
+
-
~
,
0'
•
+
7.62 mm (.3")
Microbright
Dual-in-Line
.5" H x .3" W x .24" D
.-,
-:---:,
: 0:::0;
/,0=° 0
:cr 0:
,
'----
,a
,
-
Description
Device
o
0'
~
,
7.62 mm (.3")
Dual-in-line
.75" H x .4" W x .1B" D
Typical Iv @ 20 rnA DC
HDSP-7301
HDSP-7302
HDSP-7303
HDSP-7304
HDSP-7307
HDSP-730B
HDSP-7311
HDSP-7313
HDSP-7317
HDSP-731B
Red, Common Anode, RHDP
Red, Common Anode, RHDP, Colon
Red, Common Cathode, RHDP
Red, Common Cathode, RHDP, Colon
Red, Overflow, ±1, Common Anode, RHDP
Red, Overflow, ±1, Common Cathode, RHDP
Bright Red, Common Anode, RHDP
Bright Red, Common Cathode, RHDP
Bright Red, Overflow, ±1, Common Anode
Bright Red, Overflow, ±1, Common Cathode
1100/lcd/seg
HDSP-7401
HDSP-7402
HDSP-7403
HDSP-7404
HDSP-7407
HDSP-740B
Yellow,
Yellow,
Yellow,
Yellow,
Yellow,
Yellow,
2750/lcd/seg
HDSP-7501
HDSP-7502
HDSP-7503
HDSP-7504
HDSP-7507
HDSP-750B
High
High
High
High
High
High
Efficiency
Efficiency
Efficiency
Efficiency
Efficiency
Efficiency
HDSP-7B01
HDSP-7B02
HDSP-7B03
HDSP-7B04
HDSP-7B07
HDSP-7BOB
High
High
High
High
High
High
Performance Green,
Performance Green,
Performance Green,
Performance Green,
Performance Green,
Performance Green,
50B2-7730
50B2-7731
50B2-7736
50B2-7740
Red,
Red,
Red,
Red,
Common Anode, LHDP
Common Anode, RHDP
Universal Polarity and Overflow Indicator, RHDP
Common Cathode, RHDP
50B2-7610
50B2-7611
50B2-7613
50B2-7616
High Efficiency
High Efficiency
High Efficiency
High Efficiency
RHDP
50B2-7620
50B2-7621
50B2-7623
50B2-7626
Yellow,
Yellow,
Yellow,
Yellow,
HDSP-3600
HDSP-3601
HDSP-3603
HDSP-3606
High
High
High
High
Common Anode, RHDP
Common Anode, RHDP, Colon
Common Cathode, RHDP
Common Cathode, RHDP, Colon
Overflow, ±1, Common Anode
Overflow, ±1, Common Cathode
Red,
Red,
Red,
Red,
Red,
Red,
Red,
Red,
Red,
Red,
Common Anode, RHDP
Common Anode, RHDP, Colon
Common Cathode, RHDP
Common Cathode, RHDP, Colon
Overflow, ±1, Common Anode
Overflow, ±1, Common Cathode
Common Anode, RHDP
Common Anode, RHDP, Colon
Common Cathode, RHDP
Common Cathode, RHDP, Colon
Overflow, ±1, Common Anode
Overflow, ±1, .Common Cathode
Common Anode, LHDP
Common Anode, RHDP
Common Cathode, RHDP
Universal Polarity Overflow Indicator,
Common Anode, LHDP
Common Anode, RHDP
Common Cathode, RHDP
Universal Polarity and Overflow Indicator, RHDP
Performance Green, Common Anode, LHDP
Performance Green, Common Anode, RHDP
Performance Green, Common Cathode, RHDP
Performance Green, Universal Overflow Indicator, RHDP
7-9
Page
No.
7-115
1355 /lcd/seg
5400 /lcd / seg
3700 /lcd /seg
770/lcd/seg
4400 /lcd /seg
3400 /lcd /seg
3950/lcd/seg
7-121
Red, High Efficiency Red, Yellow, and High Performance Green Seven
Segment LED Displays (continued)
Package
+
+
,
,
: a u:
:O=~ '=0'
:0=0: a ,
+
to,O
~
~
10.92 mm (.43")
Dual·in·line
.75" H x .5" W x .25" 0
+gj
f];qQ
1"-1'+++
90
=0
+"","+0
14.2 mm (.56")
Dual·in·Line (Single Digit)
.67" H x .49" W x .31" D
Device
5082·7750
5082·7751
5082·7756
5082·7760
5082·7650
5082·7651
5082·7653
5082·7656
High Efficiency Red,
High Efficiency Red,
High Efficiency Red,
High Efficiency Red,
Indicator, RHDP
5082·7660
5082·7661
5082·7663
5082·7666
Yellow,
Yellow,
Yellow,
Yellow,
HDSp·4600
HDSp·4601
HDSp·4603
HDSP·4606
HDSp·5301
HDSp·5303
HDSp·5307
HDSp·5308
HDSp·5321
HDSp·5323
High Performance Green, Common Anode, LHDP
High Performance Green, Common Anode, RHDP
High Performance Green, Common Cathode, RHDP
High Performance' Green, Universal Overflow Indicator, RHDP
Red, Common Anode, RHDP
Red, Common Cathode, RHDP
Red ±1, Common Anode, RHDP
Red ±1, Common Cathode, RHDP
Red, Common Anode, Dual Digit, RHDP
Red, Common Cathode, Dual Digit, RHDP
HDSp·5501
HDSP·5503
HDSp·5507
HDSp·5508
HDSp·5521
HDSp·5523
High
High
High
High
High
High
HDSp·5601
HDSp·5603
HDSp·5607
High Performance Green, Common
High Performance Green, Common
High Performance Green, Common
Indicator, RHDP
High Performance Green, Common
Indicator, RHDP
High Performance Green, Common
High Performance Green, Common
RHDP
HDSp·5608
'SIj
~20;;0o
14.2 mm (.56")
Dual-in'Line (Dual Digit)
.67" H x 1.0" W x .31" 0
Red,
Red,
Red,
Red,
Description
Common Anode, LHDP
Common Anode, RHDP
Universal Polarity and Overflow Indicator, RHDP
Common Cathode, RHDP
HDSp·5621
HDSp·5623
HDSp·5701
HDSP·5703
HDSP·5707
HDSp·5708
HDSp·5721
HDSP·5723
Common Anode, LHDP
Common Anode, RHDP
Common Cathode, RHDP
Universal Polarity and Overflow
Common Anode,LHDP
Common Anode, RHDP
Common Cathode, RHDP
Universal Polarity and Overflow Indicator, RHDP
Efficiency Red, Common Anode, RHDP
Efficiency Red, Common Cathode, RHDP
Efficiency Red ±1, Common Anode, RHDP
Efficiency Red ±1, Common Cathode, RHDP
Efficiency Red, Common Anode, Dual Digit, RHDP
Efficiency Red, Common Cathode, Dual Digit, RHDP
Anode, RHDP
Cathode, RHDP
Anode Overflow
Page
No.
7·121
6100 !lcd/seg
4600 !lcd/seg
3850 !lcd /seg
1300 !lcd /seg
6300 !lcd/seg
5600 /.Lcd / seg
Cathode Overflow
Anode, Dual Digit, RHDP
Cathode, Dual Digit,
Yellow, Common Anode, RHDP
Yellow, Common Cathode, RHDP
Yellow ±1, Common Anode, RHDP
Yellow ±1, Common Cathode, RHDP
Yellow, Common Anode, Dual Digit, RHDP
Yellow, Common Cathode, Dual Digit, RHDP
7-10
Typical Iv @ 2D rnA DC
1100 !lcd /seg
4200 /.Lcd / seg
7·130
Red, High Efficiency Red, Yellow, and High Performance Green Seven
Segment LED Displays (continued)
Package
1B1D"
+
,
+
+0
0+
+
1-
Device
HDSP·3400
HDSp·3401
HDSp·3403
HDSp·3405
HDSP·3406
HDSP·3900
HDSp·3901
HDSp·3903
HDSp·3905
HDSp·3906
Descrlpllon
Red, Common Anode, LHDP
Red, Common Anode, RHDP
Red, Common Cathode, RHDP
Red, Common Cathode, LHDP
Red, Universal Polarity Overflow Indicator, RHDP
High Efficiency Red, Common Anode, LHDP
High Efficiency Red, Common Anode, RHDP
High Efficiency Red, Common Cathode, RHDP
High Efficiency Red, Common Cathode, LHDP
High Efficiency Red, Universal Polarity Overflow
Indicator, RHDP
HDSp·4200
HDSp·4201
HDSp·4203
HDSp·4205
HDSp·4206
Yellow,
Yellow,
Yellow,
Yellow,
Yellow,
HDSp·8600
HDSp·8601
HDSp·8603
HDSp·8605
HDSp·8606
High
High
High
High
High
1-
t Dm
.+
-+c==:=I
!+
D
il!
o·
20 mm (.8")
Dual·in·Line
1.09" H x .78" W x .33" D
Common Anode, LHDP
Common Anode, RHDP
Common Cathode, RHDP
Common Cathode, LHDP
Universal Polarity Overflow Indicator, RHDP
Performance
Performance
Performance
Performance
Performance
Green, Common Anode, LHDP
Green, Common Anode, RHDP
Green, Common Cathode,.RHDP
Green, Common Cathode, LHDP
Green, Universal Overflow Indicator, RHDP
Typical Iv @ 20 rnA DC
1200 !lcd/seg
Page
No.
7·138
4800 !lcd / seg
3400 !lcd/seg
3600 !lcd / seg
High Ambient Light, High Efficiency Red, Yellow, and High Performance
Green Seven Segment Displays
Package
Device
Descrlpllon
HDSp·3530
High Efficiency Red, Common Anode, LHDP
. . r:---:
· .
:0=0: :0 0:O'
.,,°=° · .
-----
HDSp·3531
High Efficiency Red, Common Anode, RHDP
HDSp·3533
High Efficiency Red, Common Cathode, RHDP
HDSP·3536
High Efficiency Red, Universal Polarity Overflow Indicator,
RHDP
HDSp·4030
Yellow, Common Anode, LHDP
7.62 mm (.3")
Dual·in·Line
.75" H x .4" W x .18" D
HDSp·4031
Yellow, Common Anode, RHDP
HDSp·4033
Yellow, Common Cathode, RHDP
HDSP·4036
Yellow, Universal Polarity Overflow Indicator, RHDP
HDSp·3600
High Performance Green, Common Anode, LHDP
HDSP·3601
High Performance Green, Common Anode, RHDP
HDSp·3603
High Performance Green, Common Cathode, RHDP
HDSp·3606
High Performance Green, Universal Overflow Indicator, RHDP
-
•a
0
+
o
~
7-11
Typical Iv @ 100 rnA Peak
1/5 Duty Factor
Page
No.
7100 !lcd/seg
7·145
4500!lcd/seg
7000 !lcd/seg
(90 mA Peak
1/3 Duty Factor)
7·121
High Ambient Light, High Efficiency Hed, Yellow, and High Performance
Green Seven Segment Displays (continued) '.
Package
+
+
: O:=d.
:0=0:·f
~
.. Device
,
+
: a
+c:::::I
+
D
+
0IF
0
+
+
10,92 mm (.43")
Dual-in-Line
.75" H x .5" W x .25" D
[Q 90
+"t'+++-
~qo'
14.2.mm (.56")
Dual-in-Line
.67" H x .49" W x .31" D
'8'
a-
+
+
+
+.
+
+'
+ ..
+
,,+
+
+
+
'b
..
d
a at!
: a ll:
+
+
+
!
-+=+
+
+
HDSP-3730
HDSP-3731
HDSP-3733
HDSP-3736
High Efficiency Red,
High Efficiency Red,
High Efficiency Red,
High Efficiency Red,
Common Anode, LHDP
Common Anoae, RHDP
Common Cathode, RHDP
Universal Poliuity Overflow Indicator, RHDP
HDSP-4130
HDSP-4131
HDSP-4133
HDSP-4136
Yellow, Common Anode, LHDP
Yellow, Common Anode, RHDP
Yellow, Common Cathode, RHDP
Yellow, Universal Polarity ,Ove.~low Ind.icalo(;' RHDP
HDSP-4600
HDSP-4601
HDSP-4603
HDSP-4606
High
High
High
High
HDSP-5531
HDSP-5533
HDSP-5537
HDSP-5538
Typical Iv @ 100 mA Peak
115 Duty Factor
Page
No•
10000/lcd/seg
7-145
0
+
+
. DescripUon
+
0+
20 mm (.8")
Dual-in-Line
1.09" H x .78" W x ,33" D
5000 /lcd / seg
Performance Green, Common Anode, LHDP
Performance Green, Common Anode, RHDP'
Performance Green, Common Cathode,.RHDP
Performance Green, Universal Overflow Indicator, RHDP
6800/lcd/seg
(90 rnA Peak
1/3 Duty Factor)
7-121
High Efficiency Red, Common Anode, RHDP
High Efficiency Red, Common Cathode; RHDP
High Efficiency Red ±1, Common Anode
High Efficiency Red±l, Common Cathode
6000 /lcd/s~g
7-145
HDSP-5731
HDSP-5733
HDSP-5737
HDSP-5738
Yellow~:Common Anode, RHDP .
Yellow, Common Cathode, RHDP
Yellow, ±l,Common Anode
Yellow, ±1; Common Cathode
5500 /lcd/seg
HDSP-5601
HDSP-5603
HDSP-5607
HDSP-5608
HDSP-3900
HDSP-3901
HDSP-3903
HDSP-3005
HDSP-3006
High Performance Green, Common
High Performance Green, Common
High Performance Greell, Common
High Performance Green, Common
HDSP-4200
HDSP-4201
HDSP-4203
HDSp·4205
HDSP-4206
Yellow, Common Anode, LHDP
Yellow, Common Anode, RHDP
Yellow, Common Cathode, RHDP
"
Yellow, Common Cathode, LHDP
Yellow, Universal Polarity Overflow Indicator, RHDP
HDSP'-s600
HDSP~8601
HDSP-8603
HDSP-8605
HDSP-8606
High Performance Green, Common Anode, LHDP
High Performance Green, Cqmmon Aryode, RHDP
High Performance Green, Common Cathode, RHDP
High Performance Green, Common Cathode, LHDP
High Performance Green, Universal Overflow Indicator, RHDP
.'
Anode, RHDP
Cathode, RHDP
Anode Overflow Indicator
Cathode Overflow Indicator
High EffitiencyRed, Common Anode, LHDP
High Efficiency Red, Common Anode, RHDP
High Efficiency Red, Common Cathode, RHDP
High Efficiency Red, Common Cathode, LHDP
High Efficiency Red, Universal Overflow Indicator, RHDP
9400/lcd/seg
(90 rnA Peak
1/3 Duty Factor)
7-130
'. 7000 /lcd j seg
7-145
7000 /lcd/seg
5800 /lcd / seg
(90 rnA Peak
1/3 Duty Factor)
Solid State Display Intensity and Color Selections
:
:
Option
Option SOl
Option S02.
Option S20
DlI8cripUon
Intensity and Color Selected Displays.
7-12
Page
No.
7-153
Hexadecimal and Dot Matrix Displays
Description
Device
rc,,-,,-rc
·...·
···...
·· .
II I.
L.JL.JL.JL.J
rlrlrlrl
·...···
··...
. ·
I
•••
L.JL.JL.JL.J
(B)
rLJ"""lJ""1.J""
LJ
·....
··
,
..:,.. ,,,
·.
I-JL.JI-JL.J
(C)
(D)
. 7.4 mm (.29")
4 x 7 Single
Digit
1m
r.,
·...
···...··· ·.·, ...···
.,
· ..· , ·...·
r1rlr1"
,-, r l r l
I I ••
.,
L.JL.JL.JL.J
L.JL.JL.JL.J
(A)
(B)
rlrLI"Lf""l
rLJ"""lJ""1.J""
··, ...···
.1
· ••·
II
II
Numeric RHDP
Built-in Decoder/Driver/Memory
5082-7302
(B)
Numeric LHDP
Built-in Decoder /Driver /Memory
5082-7340
(C)
Hexadecimal
Built-in Decoder /Driver /Memory
5082-7304
Over Range ±1
8 Pin Epoxy
15.2 mm (.6") DIP
'
(A)
·,·....
5082-7300
(A)
Package
,
, ,
:
,
.. .. ··
· ··.
L.JL.JLJLJ
~~~~
(C)
(0)
1m
7.4 mm (.29")
4 x 7 Single Digit
Package:
8 Pin Glass Ceramic
15.2 mm (.6") DIP
Apptication
•
•
General Purpose Market
Test Equipment
.
Business Machines
Computer Peripherals
Avionics
Page
No.
7-154
·
·
(D)
5082-7356
(A)
Numeric RHDP
Buill-in Decoder /Driver /Memory
5082-7357
(B)
Numeric LHDP
Built-in Decoder /Driver /Memory
5082-7359
(C)
Hexadecimal
Built-in Decoder/Driver/Memory
5082-7358
Over Range ±1
8 Pin Glass Ceramic
15.2 mm (.6") DIP
·•
•
•
•
Medical Equipment
7-158
Industrial and Process
Control Equipment
Computers
Where Ceramic Package
IC's are required
High Reliability
Applications
(D)
HDSP-0760
(A)
Numeric RHDP
Built in Decoder/Driver/Memory'
HDSP-0761
(B)
Numeric LHDP
Built in Decoder !Driver /Memory
HDSP-0762
(C)
Hexadecimal
Built in Decoder /Driver /Memory
HDSP-0763
Over Range ± 1
High Efficiency Red
Low Power
•
·
·•
Military Equipment
Grou·nd Support
Equipment
Avionics
High Reliability
Applications
•
•
•
High Brightness
Ambient Systems
Cockpit, Shipboard
Equipment
High Reliability
Applications
•
•
•
Business Machines
Fire Control Systems
Military Equipment
High Reliability
Applications
(D)
HDSP-0770
(A)
Numeric RHDP
Built in Decoder /Driver /Memory
HDSP-0771
(B)
Numeric LHDP
Built in Decoder/Driver IMemory
High Efficiency Red
High Brightness
HDSP-0772 Hexadecimal
(C)
. Built in Decoder IDriver IMemory
HDSP-0763
Over Range ± 1
(D)
HDSP-0860
(A)
Numeric RHDP
Built in Decoder IDriver IMemory
HDSP-0861
(B)
Numeric LHDP
Built in Decoder IDriver IMemory
HDSP-0862
(C)
Hexadecimal
Built in Decoder IDriver IMemory
HDSP-0863
Over Range ± 1
·
Yellow
(D)
7-13
._._------_.. _ - - - -
7-163
Hexadecimal and Dot Matrix Displays (continued)
Description
Device and Package
(See previous page)
Color
HDSP-0960
(A)
Numeric RHDP
Builtin Decoder /Driver /Memory
HDSP-0961
(B)
Numeric LHDP
Built in Decoder /Driver /Memory
HDSP-0962
(C)
Hexadecimal
Built in Decoder/Driver /Memory
HDSP-0963
(D)
Over Range ± 1
Application
•
High Performance
Green
··
·
Business Machines
Fire Control Systems
Military Equipment
High Reliability
Applications
Page
No.
7-163
Monolithic Numeric Displays
w:m
~
A
ceo
II
I'
o
CXXDXXXD
Ql]2QQQ:i2QQ:QQQQQQQQ
.
~
~iU'!!lMl:2neef2~f!~m!e!l
I I~
I~
I~I ~
2.79 mm (.11") Red. 4 Digits
Centered D.P.
12 Pin Epoxy.
7.62 mm (.3") DIP
5082-7405
2.79 mm (.11") Red. 5 Digits.
Centered D.P.
14 Pin Epoxy.
7.62 mm (.3") DIP
5082·7414
2.79 mm (.11") Red. 4 Digits.
RHDP
12 Pin Epoxy.
7.62 mm (.3") DIP
5082-7415
2.79 mm (.11") Red. 5 Digits.
RHDP
14 Pin Epoxy.
7.62 mm (.3") DIP
5082-7432
2.79 mm (.11") Red. 2 Digits.
Right. RHDP
12 Pin Epoxy.
7.62 mm (.3") DIP
5082-7433
2.79 mm (.11") Red. 3 Digits.
RHDP
5082-7404
Page
No.
Application
Package
Description
Device
Small Display Market
Portable/Battery
Power Instruments
Portable Calculators
• Digital Counters
Digital Thermometers
• Digital Micrometers
Stopwatches
Cameras
Copiers
7-169
•
·
·
···
·
··
Digital Telephone
Peripherals
Data Entry Terminals
Taxi Meters
For further information ask for
Application Note 937.
5082-7441
2.67 mm (.105") Red. 9 Digits.
Mounted on P.C. Board
50.8 mm (2") PC Bd .•
17 Term. Edge Con.
5082-7446
2.92 mm (,115") Red. 16 Digits.
Mounted on P.C. Board
69.85 mm (2.750")
PC Bd .• 24 Term.
Edge Con.
5082-7295
4.45 mm (.175") Red. 15 Digits.
Mounted on P.C. Board. RHDP
91.2 mm (3.59") PC Bd ..
23 Term. Edge Con.
~m:l2!:m92
7-14
7-174
Hermetic Hexadecimal and Numeric Dot Matrix Displays
Device
[J
[J
..
(A)
..
J1.J1
(B)
[U~iJ
.'
.
JL
(e)
EJ
·· ..
·.
I •• '
•
(0)
\111
Description
4N51
Numeric RHDP
4N51TXV
Decoder /Driver / Memory
M87157/00101ACXll] TXV - Hi Rei Screened
(4N51TXVB)
(A)
8 Pin Hermetic Built-in
15.2 mm (.6") DIP
with gold plated
leads
Application
0
0
0
4N52
Numeric LHDP Built-in
4N52TXV
Decoder /Driver / Memory
M87157/00102ACXll] TXV - Hi Rei Screened
(4N52TXVB)
(B)
Military High Reliability
Applications
Avionics/Space Flight
Systems
Fire Control Systems
Page
No.
7-182
0
Ground Support.
Shipboard Equipment
0
Ground, Airborne, Shipboard 7-190
Equipment
Fire Contlol Systems
Space Flight Systems
Other High Reliability
Uses
4N54
Hexadecimal Built-in
4N54TXV
Decoder /Driver / Memory
M87157/00103ACX[I] TXV - Hi Rei Screened
(4N54TXVB)
(C)
4N53
4N53TXV
104ACX[I]
(4N53TXVB)
(D)
HDSP-0781
(A)
HDSP-0781
TXV
Character Plus/Minus Sign
TXV - Hi Rei Screened
Numeric RHDP. Built-in
Decoder / Driver Memory
TXV Hi Rei Scre~ned
TXVB Hi Rei Screened
to Level A MIL-D-87157
High Efficiency Red.
Low Power
0
0
0
HDSP-0781
TXVB
HDSP-0782
(B)
HDSP-0782
TXV
HDSP-0782
TXVB
HDSP-0783
(DI
74 mm (29")
4 x 7 Single Digit
Package
HDSP-0783
TXV
Package
8 Pin Glass Ceramic
15.2mm (6") DIP
HDSP-0783
TXVB
Tru)y Hermetic
HDSP-0784
(CI
HDSP-0784
TXV
Numeric LHDP, Built-in
Decoder/Driver Memory
TXV Hi Rei Screened
TXVB Hi Rei Screened
to Level A MIL-D-87157
Overrange _c 1
TXV Hi Rei Screened
TXVB Hi Rei Screened
to Level A MIL-D-87157
Hexadecimal, Built-in
Decoder /Driver Memo ry
TXV HI Rei Screened
TXVB Hi Rei Screened
to Level A MIL-D-87157
HDSP-0784
TXVB
HDSP-0791
(AI
HDSP-0791
TXV
Numeric RHDP, Built-in
Decoder !Driver Memory
TXV Hi Rei Screened
TXVB HI Rei Screened
to Level A MIL-D-87157
High Efficiency Red.
High Brightness
0
0
0
HDSP-0791
TXVB
HDSP-0792
(BI
HDSP-0792
TXV
0
Numeric LHDP, Built-in
Decoder IDriver Memory
TXV HI Rei Screened
TXVB HI Rei Screened
to Level A MIL-D-87157
HDSP-0792
TXVB
[1] Military Approved and Qualified for High Reliability ApplicatIOns,
7-15
Ground, Airborne. Shipboard
Equipment
Fire Control Systems
Spate Flight Systems
Other High Reliability
Uses
Hermetic Hexadecimal and Numeric Dot Matrix Displays (continued)
Device
Color
Descriplion
HDSP-0783
. (01
HDSP-0783
TXV
(See previous pagel
Overrange ± 1
TXV Hi Rei Screened
TXVB Hi Rei Screened
to Level A MIL-D-87l57
High Elficiency Red.
High
Brightness
Applicalion
0
0
0
0
HDSP-0783
TXVB
HDSP-0794
(CI
HDSP-0794
TXV
HDSP-0794
TXVB
HDSP-088l
(A)
HDSP-OBBl
TXV
HDSP-OB8l
TXVB
HDSP-OB82
(B)
.
HDSP-0882
TXV
HDSP-0882
TXVB
HDSP-0883
(D)
HDSP-0883
TXV
Hexadecimal. Built-in
Decoder IDriver Memory
TXV Hi Rei Screened
TXVB Hi Rei Screened
to Level A MIL-D-87l57
Numeric RHDP. Built-In
Decoder IDriver Memory
TXV Hi Rei Screened
TXVB Hi Rei Screened
to Level A MIL-D-87157
Yellow
Numeric LHDP. Built-in
Decoder IDriver Memory
TXV Hi Rei Screened
TXVB Hi Rei Screened
to Level A MIL-D-87l57
Overrange .: 1
TXV Hi Rei Screened
TXVB Hi Rei Screened
to Level A MIL-D-87l57
HDSP-0883
TXVB
HDSP-0884
(C)
HDSP-0884
TXV
HDSP-0884
TXVB
(See previous page)
HDSP-098l
(A)
HDSP-0981
TXV
Hexadecimal. Built-in
Decoder IDriver Memo ry
TXV Hi Rei Screened
TXVB Hi Rei Screened
to Level A MIL-D-87l57
Numeric RHDP, Built-in
Decoder IDriver Memory
TXV Hi Rei Screened
TXVB Hi Rei Screened
to Level A MIL-D-87157
High
Performance
Green
HDSP-0981
TXVB
HDSP-0982
(B)
HDSP-0982
TXV
Numeric LHDP, Built-in
Decoder IDriver Memory
TXV Hi Rei Screened
TXVB Hi Rei Screened
to Level A MIL-D-87157
HDSP-0982
TXVB
HDSP-0983
(C)
HDSP-0983
TXV
Overrange ±l
TXV Hi Rei Screened
TXVB Hi Rei Screened
to Level A MIL-D-87l57
HDSP-0983
TXVB
7-16
Page
No.
Ground. Airborne. Shipboard 7-190
Equipment
Fire Control Systems
Space Flight Systems
Other High Reliability
Uses
-----------------
-----------
----------- -
Hermetic Hexadecimal and Numeric Dot Matrix Displays (continued)
Color
Description
Device
HDSP-0984
(D)
(See previous pagel
HDSP-0984
TXV
Hexadecimal, Built-in
DecoderlDriver Memory
TXV Hi Rei Screened
TXVB Hi Rei Screened
to Level A MIL-D-87157
Application
·
··
·
High
Performance
Green
HDSP-D984
TXVB
Page
No_
Ground, Airborne, Shipboard 7-190
Equipment
Fire Control Systems
Space Flight Systems
OthlH High Reliability
Uses
Hermetic Alphanumeric Displays
Description
Device
m~
~
a" ___ ;~
;f~ ~~];
a:-·--"'l~
9.:" ___ Jo
~
J
Color
HMDL-2416 4.1 mm (0.16") Four
Character Monolithic
HMDL-2416 Smart Alphanumeric
Display
TXV
HMDL-2416 Operating Temperature
TXVB
Range: -55°C to lDDoC '
Red
HDSP-2351
Yeliow
HDSP-2351
TXV
HDSP-2351
TXVB
4.87 mm (0.19") 5 x 7 Four
Character Alphanumeric
Sunlight Viewable
Display
Operating Temperature Range:
-55°C to 100°C
Application
•
•
·
Military Equipment
High Reliability Applications
Military Telecommunications
Page
No_
7-204
• Military Avionics
• Military Cockpit
• Military Ground Support
Systems
7-214
Extended temperature
applications requiring
high reliability,
110 Terminals
Avionics
7-198
High Efficiency Red
HDSP-2352
HDSP-2352
TXV
HDSP-2352
TXVB
HDSP-2353
High Performance
Green
HDSP-2353
TXV
HDSP-2353
T~VB
D~
.. - - -
HDSP-2Dl0
~
I.
. •
i.
,
,k
~--:.....,
HDSP-2010
TXV
HDSP-2010
TXVB
3.7 mm (.15") 5 x 7 Four
Character Alphanumeric
Operating Temperature
Range: -40°C to +85°C
TXV Hi Rei Screened
TXVB Hi Rei Screened to
Level A MIL-D-87157
7-17
Red, Red Glass
Contrast Filter
~;
·•
For further information see
Application Note 1016.
-----
Hermetic Alphanumeric Displays (continued)
Description
Device
HDSP-2310
~L... J
to_Ai
:" ___ J
[~~J
HDSP-2310
TXV
Application
Color
5,0 mm (.20") 5 x 7 Four
Character Alphanumeric
HDSP-2310
TXVB
12 Pin Ceramic 6.35 mm
(.25") DIP with untinted
glass lens
HDSP-2311
Operating Temperature
Range: -55' Cto +85' C
HDSP-2311
TXV
True Hermetic Seal'
HDSP-2311
TXVB
TXVB - Hi Rei Screened
to Level A MIL-D-87157
··•
Standard Red
Military Equipment
Avionics
High Rei Industrial
Equipment
Page
No,
7-228
Yellow
TXV - Hi Rei Screened
HDSP-2312
High Eff. Red
HDSP-2312
TXV
HDSP-2312
TXVB
High Performance
Green
HDSP-2313
HDSP-2313
TXV
HDSP-2313
TXVB
HDSP-2450
r
.
c
I
I
?'
.
"; I
,
I
~
=
'?
"
I
I
~
~
-
i~
J! --,.,
HDSP-2450
TXV
HDSP-2450
TXVB
Operating Temperature
Range: -55'C to +85'C
6.9 mm (.27") 5 x 7 Four
Character Alphanumeric
28 Pin Ceramic 15.24 mm
(.6") DIP
Red
0
•
•
True Hermetic Seal
HDSP-2451
HDSP-2451
TXV
Yellow
TXV - Hi Rei Screened
TXVB - Hi Rei Screened
to Level A MIL-D-87157
HDSP-2451
TXVB
HDSP-2452
High Efficiency Red
HDSP-2452
TXV
HDSP-2452
TXVB
High Performance
Green
HDSP-2453
HDSP-2453
TXV
HDSP:2453
TXVB
7-18
·
Military Equipment
High Reliability
Applications
Avionics
Ground Support, Cockpit. Shipboard Systems
7-235
r/iO'l
a!1!II
EIGHT CHARACTER 5.0 mm (0.2 INCH)
SMART 5 X 7 ALPHANUMERIC DISPLAYS
HEWLETT
PACKARO
YELLOW
HIGH EFFICIENCY RED
HDSP-2111
HDSP-2112
Features
• SMART ALPHANUMERIC DISPLAY
On-Board CMOS IC
Built-in RAM
ASCII Decoder
LED Drive Circuitry
• 128 ASCII CHARACTER SET
• 16 USER DEFINABLE CHARACTERS
• PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES
Individual Flashing Character
Full Display Blinking
Multi-Level Dimming and Blanking
Self Test
Clear Function
• READ/WRITE CAPABILITY
Typical Applications
• FULL TTL COMPATIBILITY
• COMPUTER PERIPHERALS
o
AVIONICS
• INDUSTRIAL INSTRUMENTATION
• SINGLE 5 VOLT SUPPLY
• MEDICAL EQUIPMENT
• EXCELLENT ESD PROTECTION
• PORTABLE DATA ENTRY DEVICES
• TELECOMMUNICATIONS
• WAVE SOLDERABLE
• TEST EQUIPMENT
• END STACKABLE
Absolute Maximum Ratings
Description
The HDSP-2111 (yellow) and HDSP-2112 (high efficiency
red) are eight-digit, 5 x 7 dot matrix, alphanumeric displays.
The 5.0 mm (0.2 inch) high characters are packaged in a
standard 15.24 mm (0.6 inch) 28 pin DIP. The on-board
CMOS IC has the ability to decode 128 ASCII characters,
which are permanently stored in ROM. In addition, 16
programmable symbols may be stored in on-board RAM.
Seven brightness levels provide versatility in adjusting the
display intensity and power consumption. The HDSP-211X
is designed for standard microprocessor interface techniques. The display and special features are accessed
through a bidirectional eight-bit data bus. These features
make the HDSP-211X ideally suited for applications where
a low cost, low power alphanumeric display is required.
Supply Voltage, Vcc to Ground!1] .....•.... -0.3 to 7.0 V
Operating Voltage, Vcc to Ground!2] ............• 5.5 V
Input Voltage, Any Pin to Ground .... -0.3 to Vcc + 0.3 V
Free Air Operating Temperature
Range, TA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -20° C to +70° C
Relative Humidity (non-condensing) ...•.•••.••..• 85%
Storage Temperature, Ts ............. -40°C to +85°C
Maximum Solder Temperature 1.59 mm (0.063 in.)
below Seating Plane, t < 5 sec ....•.....•...• 260°C
7-19
._-_.... _ . _ - - - -
... -- . . - ..
--~
..
--~
..
-~--.-
....
Notes:
1. Maximum Voltage is with no LEDs illuminated.
2. 20 dots on in all locations at full brightness.
ESD WARNING: STANDARD CMOS HANDLING PRECAUTIONS SHOULD BE OBSERVED WITH THE
HDSP- 2111 AND HDSP-2112.
package Dimensions
4.81
10.1891
......
:::::
gi~~
0
nIl! HI~~
2
......
....
.....
......
.....
:in: .....
:::::
---r
9.8
10.3861
l-
PIN 1 IDENTIFIER
*
r
19.58
"r
2.88 10.1131 SYM
IMAGE PLANE
IFOR REFERENCE ONLYI
2.010.081
COLOR
BIN 131
5.31
10.2091
PIN
NO.
1
~
3
'
L
-II--DIA. 0.5 10.0201
79
1,o.0051
l~i89ISYM
I
--I
I
L2.S410.,001 TYP
(± 0.005) NON·ACCUM.
NOTES:
1. UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED, THE TOLERANCE ON ALL DIMENSIONS IS 0.254 mm (0.010 IN).
2. DIMENSIONS IN rnm (INCHES).
3. FOR YELLOW ONLY,
Character Set
07
o.------------~--~~
7-20
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
"
~UNCTION
PIN
NO.
RS'f
Fr
M
15
16
17
Al
A2
A3
SUBSTR. BIAS
SUBSTR.8IAS
SUBSTR. BIAS
A4
CLS
CLK
Wi'i
vee
18
19
FUNCTION
GNO (SUPPLY)
GNO(I.OGIC)
~
211
00
01
21
22
NO PIN
NO PIN
23
2'
25
26
27
28
02
OJ
Do
05
06
07
Recommended Operating Conditions
Parameter
Supply Voltage
Symbol
Units
Vee
v
Electrical Characteristics Over Operating Temperature Range
4.5 < Vcc < 5.5 V (unless otherwise specified)
Parameter
Min.
Symbol
Input leakage (Input
without pullup)
Ii
Input Current (input
with pullup)
lip
25°C
Typ.(1)
25°C
Max.tl]
18
11
Max.
Units
±1.0
pA
Test Conditions
Vin " 0 to Vcc pins ClK.
0tl-D7' Ao-A4
30
pA
Vin" 0 to '!.s,s; pins RST,
ClS, WR, RD, CEo Fl
Icc (BlK)
0.5
1.0
1.5
mA
Vin" 5.0V
Icc 8 digits
12 dots!character{2J
Icc{Vl
200
255
330
mA
"V" on in all 8 locations
Icc 8 digits
20 do!s/characterl21
Icc (#)
300
370
430
mA
"#" on in all 8 locations
Icc Blank
Input Voltage High
Vih
2.0
Vcc
+0.3 V
V
Vce "5,5 V
Input Voltage Low
Vii
GND
-0.3 V
0,8
V
Vee" 4.5 V
Output Voltage High
Voh
2.4
V
Vce " 4.5 V, loh " -40 p,A
Output Voltage Low
00-0 7
Vol
0.4
V
Vec "4.5 V, lot =
1.6mA
V
Vcc " 4.5 V. 10 1" 40 p,A
Output Voltage Low CLK
Thermal Resistance
IC Junction-Io-Case
0.4
°C/W
15
0j-c
Noles:
1. Vcc" 5.0 V
2. Average Icc measured at full brightness. See Table 2 in Control Word section for Icc at lower brightness levels. Peak Icc = 28/15 x
Average Icc (#).
optical Characteristics at 25 0 C[31
Vee
= 5.0 V, at Full Brightness
High Efficiency Red HDSP-2112
Description
luminous Intensity
Character average (#)
Peak Wavelength
Dominant Wavelength
Symbol
Min.
Iv
2.5
Typical
Max.
Units
7.5
mcd
"(peak}
635
nm
"(dl
626
nm
Yellow HDSP-2111
Description
luminous Intensity
Character average (#)
Peak Wavelength
Dominant Wavelength
Symbol
Min.
Iv
2.5
Typical
7.5
Max.
Units
mcd
"(peak)
583
nm
A{d)
585
nm
Note:
3. Refers to the initial case temperature of the device immediately prior to the light measurement.
7-21
AC Timing Characteristics Over Temperature Range
Vee = 4.5 V
Reference number
1
Symb()1
tacc
Descrlptl()n
Display Access Time
Write
Read
2
tacs
Address Setup Time to Chip Enable
$
tce
Chip Enable Active Time
Write
Read
Min.
UnIts
210
230
10
ns
4
tach
Address Hold Time to Chip Enable
5
tcer
Chip Enable Recovery Time
140
160
20
60
6
Ices
Chip Enable Active Prior to Rising Edge of
Write
Read
140
160
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
7
lceh
8
9
10
tw
Write Actlve Time
twd
Data Valid Prior to Rising Edge of Write Signal
tdh
Ir
Data Write Hold Time
0
100
50
20
Chip Enable Active Prior to Valid Data
160
ns
Ird
Read Active Prior to Valid Data
tdf
Read Data Float Delay
ns
Ire
Reset Active Time
75
10
300
11
12
13
Chip Enable Hold Time to Rising Edge of ReadlWrite
Signal
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
Vee = 4.5 to 5.5 V
. Description
Units
Oscillator Frequency
25° C lYpical
57
70°C Min.
Fosc
Fri[l]
28
.kHz
Display Refresh Rate
256
128
Hz
Ffl[2]
Character Flash Rate
2
1
Hz
Ist lS ]
Self Test Cycle Time
4.6
9.2
Sec
Symbol
Noles:
1. Frj = Fosc/224
2. Fjl = Fosc/28,672
3. lSI = 262,144/F osc
Write Cycle Timing Diagram
CD
®
®
INPUT PULSE LEVELS - 0.6 V TO 2.4 V
7-22
Read cycle Timing Diagram
INPUT PULSE LEVELS: 0.6 V TO 2.4 V
OUTPUT REFERENCE LEVELS: 0.6 V TO 2.2 V
OUTPUT LOADING = 1 TTL LOAD AND 100pFd
Relative Luminous Intensity
VS. Temperature
Enlarged Character Font
L_~ .~~"~l"=l
r-••••.
5. 0
4. 5
4. 0
0.76 10.030) TYP
3.5
R2
0.25410.01l~
•
••
• • R3
•
•
•
•
•
•••••
3. 0
rJiDSP.ZI12
2.
R4
5,
2. 0
4.8110.189)
~R
1.5 '
il
:-<.
1 ~I::=..
1.0
~
•
••
• • R6
o.5
o
• • • • • R7
I
---l
I
-20 -10
0
10
20
r-- -.
30
40
50
60
70
TA - AMBIENT TEMPERATURE -'C
1-0.6510.026) TYP
7-23
- - _...._._---_._---
HDSP·2111
---_._._... ...
_
80
Electrical Description
PIN FUNCTION
RESET
(RST, pin 1)
Reset initializes the display.
FLASH
FL low indicates an access to the Flash RAM and is unaffected by the
state of address lines Aa-A4.
ADDRESS INPUTS
(Ao-A4, pins 3-6, 10)
Each location In memory has a distinct address. Address inputs (Ao-A2J
select a specific location in the Character RAM, the Flash RAM or a
particular row in the UDC (User-Defined Character) RAM. A~4 are
used to select which section of memory is accessed. Table 1 shows the
logic levels needs to access each section of memory.
{FL, pin 2)
TABLE 1. LOGIC LEVELS TO ACCESS MEMORY
Ft
A4
A3
Section of Memory
A2
0
X
X
Flash RAM
Char. Address
0
0
0
UDC Address Register
Don't Care
1
UDCRAM
Row Address
0
Control Word Register
Don't Care
Character RAM
Char. Address
A1
Ao
CLOCK SELECT
(ClS, pin 11)
This input Is used to select either an internal or external Clock source.
CLOCK INPUVOUTPUT
(ClK, pin 12)
Outputs the master clock (ClS '" 1) or Inputs a clock (ClS '" 0) for slave
displays.
WRITE
(WR, pin 13)
Data is written into the display when the
input is low.
CHIP ENABLE
(CE, pin 17)
This input must be at a logic low to read or write data to the display and
must go high between each read and write cycle.
READ
(RD, pin 18)
Data is read from the display when the RD input Is low and the CE input
is low.
DATA Bus
(00-07' pins 19, 20, 23-28)
The Data bus is used to read from or write to the display.
GND(SUPPLY)
(pin 15)
This Is the analog ground for the lED drivers.
GND(LOGICl
(pin 16}
This is the digital ground for internal foglc.
VCC(POWER)
{pin 14)
This is the positive power supply input.
VCC{SUBSTRATE)
These pins are used to bias the IC substrate and must be connected to
V cc These pins cannot be used to supply power to the display.
(pins 7-9)
WR
Input is low and the
CE
DISPLAY INTERNAL BLOCK DIAGRAM
Figure 1 shows the internal block diagram of the HDSP211 X display. The CMOS IC consists of an a. byte Character
RAM, an 8 bit Flash RAM, a 128 character ASCII decoder, a
16 character ASCII decoder, a 16 character UDC RAM, a
UDC Address Register, a Control Word Register and the
refresh circuitry necessary to synchronize the decoding
and driving of eight 5 x 7 dot matrix characters. The major
user accessible portions of the display are listed below:
Character RAM
This RAM stores either ASCII character data or a UDC RAM address.
Flash RAM
This Is a 1 x 8 RAM which stores Flash data
User-Defined Character RAM (UDC RAM)
This RAM stores the dot pattern for custom characters.
User-defined Character Address
Register (UDC Address Register)
This register is used to provide the address to the UDC RAM when the
user is writing or reading a custom character.
Control Word Register
This registar allows the user to adjust the display brightness. flash
Individual characters, blink, self test or clear the display.
7-24
..
A,
~
IT
UDC AODR
EN
REGISTER
eE
Ro
WR
DQ-O,
upe
APPR
-
elR
PRE SET
A;
~1'
uoe
RAM
eE::I--'
EN
nO
WR
DOT
0,
DATA
A,-A,
UOCAOOR
ROW SET
Do
A,
A,
-
,-.-
l
FlW
eE
8.8
RD
WR
00-0 1
Ao-A2
-..J
I
I\)
t11
A,
A,
.---
Fi: _
Fi:
CE
j=TIL)
L
EN CHARACTER
RD
RAM 01) ... 0 6
WR
0 0 -0,
0,
Ao-A:;!
RESET
eHARAODR
'tN
FLASH
DATA
RD
WR
0,
A,
iPL
FL
~
RST
CONTROL
WORD
REGISTER
RD
WR
0.0 ...0 1
il
T
elK
eLS
;.
B
RESULT
TEST
ASctl
EN
DECOOER
L - - D-o-D~
-
ROW
·'SEl
oor
DOT
DATA
DOT
DRIVERS
rl TIMING
S 5)( 1
-
lED
CHARACTERS
rl
DATA
SELF
TEST
RAM
RESET
CHAR
ADOR
~
2
b
[SELF
TEST
IN
INTENSITY
fJ.
3~
4
~RESET
SELF
-
0 0 -03
rfEN
FLASH
Ao,-A2
RESET
-
6
ROW DRIVERS
SELF
TEST
LTiMING
1
VISUAL
TEST
ROM
TEST
SELf
'TEST
eLA
START
BLINK
SELF
TEST
7~
TEST
OK
~
FLASH
CLR1
TEST OK
CLR2
l ::O-l f--
INTENSITV
fLASH
BLINK
RESET
CLOCK
CHAR
TIMING
AND
CONTROL
ADDR
Rowser
TIMING
-
Figure 1. HDSP-211X Internal Block Diagram
SOLIO STATE
OISPLAYS
iiiii'SEWiiiiii
RST
CE
ViA
I ' I I ~ I: I
·I
0
WRITE TO DISPLAY
....I._...L
• ....;......1.-.....;;..... READ FRDM DISPLAY
1..._ _
WRITE TO DISPLAY
READ FROM DISPLAY
o
CONTROL SIGNALS
CONTROL SIGNALS
I I I I
CHARACTER
I
000· LEFT MOST
L._'-....I_'...L_'_L.-_A_D_DR_E_SS_---I 111 = RIGHT MOST
UDC ADDRESS REGISTER ADDRESS
CHARACTER RAM ADDRESS
o
I
.28 ASCII CODE
X
X
X
I
X
X
X
I
X
UDC CODE
UDC ADDRESS REGISTER DATA FORMAT
UDCCODE
iiiTiiEWiiiiii
I.I I I I
CHARACTER RAM DATA FORMAT
o.
0
'0
WRITE TO DISPLAY
_....I._...L
. ....;......1.-.....;;..... READ FROM DISPLAY
1...
OlGa
0lG1
0lG2 DIG3 0lG4 DIGs 0lG6
0lG7
CONTROL SIGNALS
0000011010101'1100110'1"01'"
FL
SYMBOL IS ACCESSED IN LOCATION
SPECIFIED BY THE CHARACTER ADDRESS ABOVE
•
I
DISPLAY
LOGIC 0;,' • L,O,GIC '; X • DO NOT CARE
o•
Ao
'" I • I
I
A,
A.
iI
A,
ROW SELECT
I'OO.ROW.
'10, ROW7
UDC RAM ADDRESS
Figure 2. Logic Levels to Access the Character RAM
D7
I
CHARACTER RAM
X
D.
D,
X
X
UDCRAM
DATA FORMAT
Figure 2 shows the logic levels' needed to access the
HDSP~211X Character RAM. Address lines Ao-A2 are used
to select the location in the Character RAM. Two types of
data can be stored in each Character RAM location: an
ASCII code or a UDC RAM address. Data bit D7 is used to
dlfierentiate between an ASCII character and a UDC RAM
address. D7 ,; 0 enables the ASCII decoder and D7 = 1
enables the UDC RAM. Do-D6 are used to input ASCII data
and Do-D3 are used to input a UDC address.
D.
D,
I
D.
D,
D,
I
DOT DATA
C
C
0
0
L
L
•
5
o• LOGIC 0; •• LOGIC '; X • DD NOT CARE
Figure 3. Logic Levels to Access a UDC Character
UDC RAM AND UDC ADDRESS REGISTER
Figure 3 shows the logiC levels needed to access the UDC
RAM ,and the UDC Address Register. The UDC Address
Register is eight bits wide. The lower four bits (Do-D3) are
used to select one of the 1,6 UDC locations" The upper four
bits (D4-D7) are not used. Once the UDC address has been
stored in the UDC Address Register, the UDC RAM can be
accessed.
c c
C
c
C
0
0
0
0
0
L
L
L
L
L
4
5
• ,
2
•• •0 •0 •0 •0
•• 0• 0• 0• , 00
•• , 00 00 00 00
•0 0 0 0
To completely specify a 5 x 7 character requires eight write
cycles. One cycle is used to store the UDC RAM address in
the uric Address Register, Seven cycles are used to store
dot data in the UDC RAM. Data Is entered by rows, One
cycle is needed to access each row. Figure 4 shows the
organization of a UDC character assuming the symbol to
be stored is an "F", ArrA2 are used to select the row to be
accessed and DrrD4 are used to transmit the row dot data.
The upper three bits (D5-D7) are ignored, Do (least significant bit) corresponds to the right most column of the 5 x 7
matrix and D4 (most significant bit) corresponds to the left
most column of the 5 x 7 matrix.
..
UDC
CHARACTER
D4 03 D2 01 Do
ROW.
ROW2
ROW,
ROW.
ROWS,
ROWS
ROW 7
..
HEX
CODE
,F
10
,0
lD
10
10
10
IGNORED
0= LOGIC 0; 1 = LOGIC 1: • = ILLUMINATED LED.
Figure 4. Data to Load "F" Into the UDC RAM
7-26
RsTCEWRRD
I : I : I ~ I : I::!~EF~~~I~~~:~y
iiii
1
CONTROL SIGNALS
I
WRITE TO DISPLAY
• READ FROM DISPLAY
CONTROL SIGNALS
I : IA: I ~' I ~2~~~;;~~E:O I000
L.._
...._
AO
= LEFT MOST
.....L...-........_ _ _ _- - ' 111 - RIGHT MOST
FLASH RAM ADDRESS
I
0,
De
Ds
D4
D3
DZ
D1
X
X
==
CONTROL WORD ADDRESS
3L REMOVE FLASH AT
L.__ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _·....L.Q::J...;I;...1
0,·
SPECIFIED DIGIT LOCATION
~~~~~iELt~~G~~ LOCATION
0,
0,
0,
0,
02
0,
Do
I I I I I I I I I
C
FLASH RAM DATA FORMAT
S
S
BL
F
B
B
o • LOGIC 0; 1 • LOGIC 1; X • DO NOT CARE
B
T'
1
80%
1
40%
27'"
20'"
130/0
0
o
o
1
o
Figure 5. Logic Leve.ls to Access the Flash RAM
1
DISABLE FLASH
ENABLE FLASH
FLASH RAM
X NORMAL OPERATION; X IS IGNORED
X START SELF TEST; RESULT GIVEN IN X
X =0 FAILED X =1 PASSeD
NORMAL OPERATION
CLEAR FLASH AND CHARACTER RAMS
CONTROL WORD DATA FORMAT
o • LOGIC 0; 1 • LOGIC 1; X • DO NOT CARE
Figure 6. Logic Levels to Access the Control Word Register
TABLE 2. CURRENT REQUIREMENTS AT DIFFERENT
BRIGHTNESS LEVELS
%
Symbol
Control Word Register
tec(V)
Figure 6 shows how to access the Control Word Register.
This is an eight bit register which performs five functions.
They are Brightness coritrol, Flash RAM control, Blinking,
Self Test and Clear. Each function is independent of the
others. However, all bits are updated during each Control
Word write cycle.
BRIGHTNESS (BITS 0-2)
Bits 0-2 of the Control Word adjust the brightnes.s of the
display. Bits 0-2 are interpreted as a three bit binary code
with code (000) corresponding to maximum brightness and
code (111) corresponding to a blanked display. In addition
to varying the display brightness, bits 0-2 also vary the
average value of Icc.. Icc can be calculated at any brightness
level by multiplying the percent brightness level by the
value of Icc at the 100% brightness level. These values of
Icc are shown in Table 2.
FLASH FUNCTION (BIT 3)
Bit 3 determines whether the flashing character attribute is
on or off. When bit 3 is a "1 ", the output of the Flash RAM is
BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL
LEVELS
DISABLE BLINKING
ENABLE BLINKING
Fi9ure 5 shows the logic levels needed to access the Flash
RAM. The Flash RAM has one bit associated with each
locatiOn of the Character RAM. The Flash input is used to
select the Flash RAM. Address lines A3-A4 are ignored.
Address lines Ao-A2 are used to select the location in the
Flash RAM to store the attribute. Do is used to store or
remove the flash attribute. Do = "1" stores the attribute and
Do ="0" removes the attribute.
When the attribute is enabled through bit 3 of the Control
Word and a "1" is stored in the Flash RAM, the corresponding character will flash at approximately 2 Hz. The actual
rate is dependent on the clock frequency. For an external
clock the flash rate can be calculated by dividing the clock
frequency by 28,672.
53%
Da 01 Do Brightness 25 Q CTyp.
Units
100
80
53
40
27
20
13
mA
mA
rnA
mA
mA
mA
mA
000
o0 1
010
011
100
101
110
200
160
106
80
54
40
26
checked. If the content of a location in the Flash RAM is a
"1", the associated digit will flash at approximately 2 Hz. For
an external clock, the blink rate can be calculated by diving
the clock frequency by 28,672. If the flash enable bit of the
Control Word is a "0", the content of the Flash RAM is
ignored. To use this function with multiple display systems
see the Reset section.
BLINK FUNCTION (BIT 4)
Bit 4 of the Control Word .is used to synchronize blinking of
all eight digits of the display. When this bit is a "1" all eight
digits of the display will blink at approximately 2 Hz. The
actual rate is dependent on the clock frequency. For an
external clock, the blink rate can be calculated by dividing
7-27
the clock frequency by 28,672. This function will overrride
the Flash function when it is active. To use this function
with multiple display systems see the Reset section.
SELF TEST FUNCTION (BITS 5,6)
Bit 6 of the Control Word Register is used to initiate the self
test function. Results of the internal self test are stored in
bit 5 of the Control Word. Bit 5 is a read only bit where bit 5
="1" indicates a passed selnest and' bit 5 ="0" indicates a
failed self test.
Setting bit 6 to a logic 1 will start the self test function. The
built-in self test function of the IC consists of two internal
routines which exercises major portions of the IC and
illuminates all of the LEDs. The first routine' cycles the
ASCII decoder ROM through all states and performs a
checksum on the output. If the checksum agrees with the
correct value, bit 5 is set to "1". The second routine
provides a visual test of the LEDs using the drive cicuitry.
This is accomplished by writing checkered and inverse
checkered patterns to the display. Each pattern is displayed
for approximately 2 seconds.
During the self test function the display must not be
accessed. The time needeclto execute the self test function
is calculated by multiplying the clock period by 262,144.
For example: assume a clock frequency of 58 KHz, then the
time to execute the self test function frequency is equal to
(262,144/58,000) =4.5 second duration.
At the end of the self test function, the Character RAM is
loaded with blanks, the Control Word Register "is set to
zeros except for bit 5, and the Flash RAM is cleared and
the UDC Address Register is set to all ones,
CLEAR FUNCTION (BIT 7)
Bit 7 of the Control Word will clear the Character RAM and
Flash RAM. The ASCII character code for a space will be
loaded into the Character RAM to blank the display. The
UDC RAM, UDC Address Register and the remainder of
'the Control Word are unaffected.
Display Reset
Figure 7 shows the logic levels needed to Reset the
'display. Thedispiay should be Reset on power-up. The
external Reset clears the Character RAM, Flash RAM,
Control Word Register and resets the internal counters. All
displays which operate with the same clock source must be
simultaneously reset to synchronize the Flashing and Blinking functions.,
RST
FE
WR
AD
Fi:
A4·AO DrDo
lolll x lxlxlxlxl
Mechanical and Electrical
Considerations
The HDSP-211X is a 28 pin dual-in-line package with 26
external pins, which can be stacked horizontally and
vertically to create arrays of any size. The HDSP-211X is
designed to operate continuously from -20°C to +70o,C
with a maximum of 20 dots on per character. Illuminating
all thirty-five dots at full brightness is not recommended.
The HDSP-211X is assembled by die attaching and wire
bonding 280 LED chips and a CMOS IC to a thermally
conductive printed circuit board. A polycarbonate lens is
placed over the PC board creating an air gap civerthe LED
wire bonds. A protective cap creates an air gap over the
CMOS IC, Backfill epoxy environmentally seals the display
package. This package construction makes the display
highly tolerant to temperature cycling and alloWs wave
soldering.
The inputs to the IC are protected against static discharge
and input current latchup. Howeve~ for best results standard
CMOS handling precautions should be used. Prior to use,
the HDSP-211X should be stored in antistatic tubes or in
conductive material. During assembly, a grounded conductive work area should be used, and assembly personnel
should' wear conductive wrist straps. Lab coats made,of
synthetic material should be avoided since they are prone
to static build-up, Input current latchup is caused when the
CMOS inputs are subjected to either a voltage below
ground (Vin < ground) or to a VOltage higher than Vcc (Vin >
Vccl,and when a high current is forced intqthe input. To
prevent input current latchup and ESD damage, unused
inputs should be connected either to ground or to Vcc ,
Voltages should not be applied to the inputs until Vcc has
been applied to the display,
'
.,
Thermal Considerations
The H DSP-211 X has been designed to provide a low thermal
resistance path for the CMOS IC to the 26 package pins.
This heat is then typically conducted through the traces of
the printed circuit board to free air. For most applications
no additional heatsinking is required.
Measurements were made on,a 32 character display string
to determine the thermal resistance of the display assembly.
Several display boards were constructed using 62 mil printed
circuit material, and 1 ounce copper 20 mil traces. Some ~f
the device pins were connected to a heatsink formed by
etching a copper area on the printed circuit board surrounding the display. A maximum metalized printed circuit
board was also evaluated.' The junction temperature was
measured,for displays soldered directly.to these PC boards,
displays installed in sockets, and finally displays installed in
sockets with a filter over the display to restrict airflow. The
results of these thermal resistance measurements, Elja, are
shown in Table 3 and include the affects of Eljc.
o =LOGIC 0; 1 '" LOGIC 1; X '" DO NOT CARE
NOTE:
IF RST, CE AND VIR ARE LOW, UNkNOWN
DATA MAY BE WRITTEN·INTO THE DISPLAY.
Figure l Logic Levels to Reset the Display
7-28
------
------~
to 3 seconds for optimum soldering. The preheat temperature should not exceed 105°C (221°F) as measured on the
solder side of the PC board.
TABLE 3. THERMAL RESISTANCE, 0]a, USING VARIOUS
AMOUNTS OF HEATSINKING MATERIAL.
He~lslnkil'lg ',:W/Sockets W/OSockets W/Sockets units
Metal
per device
sq.!n.
."
0
1
3
Max. Metal
4 board
avg.
W/O Filter
(avg.)
W/OFliter
(avg.)
W/Fllter
(avg.)
31
31
30
29
30
30
28
26
25
27
35
33
33
32
33
Post solder cleaning may be performed with a solvent or
aqueous process. For solvent cleaning, Allied Chemical's
Genesolv DES, Baron Blakeslee's Blaco-Tron TES or DuPont's
Freon TE may be used. These solvents are azeotropes of
trichlorotrifluoroethane FC-113 with low concentrations of
ethanol (5%). The maximum exposure time in the solvent
vapors at bOiling temperature should not exceed 2 minutes.
Solvents containing high concentrations of alcohols such
as methanol, ketones such as acetone, or chlorinated solvents
should not be used as they will chemically attack the
polycarbonate lens. Solvents containing trichloroethylene
FC-111 or FC-112 and trichloroethylene (TCE) are also not
recommended.
:~~
°C/W
°C/W
·CIW
Ground Connections
An aqueous cleaning process may be used. A saponifier,
such as Kesterbio-kleen Formula 5799 or its equivalent,
may be added to the wash cycle of an aqueous process to
remove rosin flux residues. Organic acid flux residues must
be thoroughly removed by an aqueous cleaning process to
prevent corrosion of the leads and solder connections. The
optimum water temperature is 60° C (140° F). The maximum
cumulative exposure of the HDSP-211X to wash and rinse
cycles should not exceed 15 minutes. For additional information on soldering and post solder cleaning, see Application Note 1027.
Two ground pins are provided to keep the internal IC logic
ground clean. The designer can, when necessary. route the
analog ground for the LED drivers separately from the
logic ground until an appropriate ground plane is available.
On long interconnects between the display and the host
system, the designer can keep voltage drops on the analog
ground from affecting the display logic levels by isolating
the two grounds.
The logic ground should be connected to the same ground
potential as the logic interface circuitry. The analog ground
and the logic ground should be connected at a common
ground which can withstand the current introduced by the
switching LED drivers. When separate ground connections
are used, the analog ground can vary from -0.3 V to +0.3 V
with respect to the logic ground. Voltage below -0.3 V can
cause all dots to be on. Voltage above +0.3 V can cause
dimming and dot mismatch.
Contrast Enhancement
The objective of contrast enhancement is to provide good
readability in the end user's ambient lighting conditions.
The concept is to employ both luminance and chrominance
contrast techniques. These enhance readability by having
the OFF-dots blend into the display background and the
ON-dots vividly stand out against the same background.
Contrast enhancement may be achieved by using one of
the following suggested filters:
Soldering and Post Solder
Cleaning Instructions for the
HDSP-211X
The HDSP-211X may be hand soldered or wave soldered
with SN63 solder. When hand soldering it is recommended
that an electronically temperature controlled and securely
grounded soldering iron be used. For best results, the iron
tip temperature should be set at 315° C (600° F). For wave
soldering, a rosin-based RMA flux can be used. The solder
wave temperature should be set at 245° C ±5° C (473° F
±9° F), and the dwell in the wave should be set between 1V,
HDSP-2112
Panel graphic SCARLET RED 65 or GRAY 10
SGL Homalite H100-1670 RED or -1265 GRAY
3M Louvered Filter R6310 RED or N0210GRAY
HDSP-2111
Panelgraphic AMBER 23 or GRAY 10
SGL Homalite H100-1720 AMBER or -1265 GRAY
3M Louvered Filter N0210 GRAY
For additional information on contrast enhancement see
Application Note 1015.
7-29
F/iP'l
HEWLETT
~~ PACKARD
FOUR CHARACTER
2.8Smm (0.112 inJ
SMART
ALPHANUMERIC DISPLAY
HPDL-1414
Features
• SMART ALPHANUMERIC DISPLAY
Built-in RAM, ASCII Decoder and
LED Drive Circuitry
• WIDE OPERATING TEMPERATURE RANGE
-40° C to +85° C
• FAST ACCESS TIME
160 ns
• EXCELLENT ESD PROTECTION
Built-in Input Protection Diodes
• CMOS IC FOR LOW POWER CONSUMPTION
• FULL TTL COMPATIBILITY OVER OPERATING
TEMPERATURE RANGE
V1L = 0.8 V
VIH=2.0V
• WAVE SOLDERABLE
• RUGGED PACKAGE CONSTRUCTION
• END-STACKABLE
• WIDE VIEWING ANGLE
Typical Applications
• PORTABLE DATA ENTRY DEVICES
• MEDICAL EQUIPMENT
• PROCESS CONTROL EQUIPMENT
• TEST EQUIPMENT
• INDUSTRIAL INSTRUMENTATION
Description
• COMPUTER PERIPHERALS
The HPDL-1414 is a smart 2.85 mm (0.112") four character,
sixteen-segment, red GaAsP display. The on-board CMOS
IC contains memory, ASCII decoder, multiplexing circuitry
and drivers. The monolithic LED characters are magnified by
an immersion lens which increases both character size and
luminous intensity. The encapsulated dual-in-line package
provides a rugged, environmentally sealed unit.
• TELECOMMUNICATION INSTRUMENTATION
The HPDL-1414 incorporates many improvements over
competitive products. It has a wide operating temperature
range, very fast IC access time and improved ESD
protection. The display is also fully TTL compatible, wave
solderable and highly reliable. This display is ideally suited
for industrial and commercial applications where a goodlooking, easy-to-use alphanumeric display is required.
Absolute Maximum Ratings
Supply Voltage, Vee to Ground ........... -0.5 V to 7.0 V
Input Voltage, Any Pin to Ground .... -0.5 V to Vee+0.5 V
Free Air Operating
Temperature Range, TA .............. -40°C to +85°C
Relative Humidity (non-condenSing) at 65°C ......... 90%
Storage Temperature, Ts .............. -40°C to +85°C
Maximum Solder Temperature, 1.59 mm (0.063 in.)
below Seating Plane, t<5 sec ................... 260°C
7-30
package Dimensions
PIN
NO.
1
2
3
4
5
6
4.10
(0.1601
FUNCTION
05 DATA INPUT
~DATAINPUT
WRITE
A, ADDRESS INPUTS
Ao
ADDRESS INPUTS
Vee
PIN
NO.
7
B
9
10
11
12
FUNCTION
GND
Do OATA INPUT
01 DATA INPUT
02 DATA INPUT
03 DATA INPUT
06 DATA INPUT
PIN 1
NOTES,
1. UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED THE TOLERANCE
ro~~~: ~:~51 TYP.
ON All DIMENSIONS IS 0.25 mOl (0.010 in.,.
2. DIMENSIONS IN mm (inch(l!Ot.
Recommended operating Conditions
Symbol
Parameter
=
Supply Voltage
Input Voltage High
Input Voltage Low
Min.
Nom.
Max.
Vee
4.5
5.0
5.5
VIH
2.0
Units
V
V
V,L
0.8
V
DC Electrical Characteristics Over operating Temperature Range
TYPICAL VALUES
Parameter
Symbol
Units
-40'C
-20·C
2S'C
SS'C
Icc
mA
90
SS
70
60
Vee =5.0 V
IcclBU
mA
1.8
1.5
1.2
1.1
Vce=5.0V
BL = 0.8 V
hl
pA
23
20
17
12
Vcc=5.0V
VIN = 0.8 V
Icc 4 digits on (10 seg/digit)il.21
Icc Blank
Input Current, Max.
Test Condition
GUARANTEED MAXIMUM VALUES
Symbol
Units
25·C
Vee 5.0 V
=
Maximum Over
Operating Temperature
Range
Vee =5.5 V
Icc
rnA
90
130
lec(BU
rnA
2.3
4.0
Input Current, Max.
lil.
p.A
30
50
Power Dissipation l31
Po
rnW
450
715
Parameter
Icc 4 digits on (10 segJdigit)11.21
icc Blank
Noles:
1. "%" illuminated in all four characters.
2. Measured at five seconds.
3. Power dissipation = Vee' Icc (10 seg.!.
7-31
AC Timing Characteristics Over Operating Temperature
Range at Vce = 4.5 V
-20°C
25¢C
10·C
Symbol
IMIN
IMIN
IM.N
Units
Address Setup Time
lAS
90
115
150
ns
Write Delay Time
twD
10
15
20
ns
Write Time
80
100
130
ns
Data Setup Time
tw
IDS
40
60
80
ns
Data Hold Time
tOH
40
45
50
ns
Address Hold Time
IAH
40
45
50
ns
Access Time
130
160
200
ns
Refresh Rate
420·790
310-630
270-550
Hz
Parameter
Optical Characteristics
Min.
Typ.
Unlls
0.4
1.0
mod
Apeak
655
nm
Ad
640
nm
Off Axis Viewing Angle
±40
degrees
Digit Size
2.85
mm
Parameter
Symbol
Test Condition
Peak Luminous Intensity per digit,
segments on (character average)
Iv Peak
Vcc"'5.0V
H;(" illuminated in
8114 digits,
a
Peak Wavelength
Dominant Wavelength
Timing Diagram
~
-'X
,
-.
tAS
2 0V
.
0.8 V
_tAH_
2.0 V
./
\
tw
_-two_I·
!
~:
Do-D6
O.B V
K2.0V
!---tos_ I--toH-1
7-32.
0,8 V
~---~-.----.--~------~
Magnified Character Font
Description
Relative Luminous Intensity
vs. Temperature
3.0
~
....~
."
:1"
~
2.0
...\ \;\
'\.
z
w
>
~
ula:
5" REF.
%Tl~
,,%C,
"- I\.
0
""-
'.0
~o
-20
20
'"
40
60
80
100
TA - AMBIENT TEMPERATURE - ("CI
Electrical Description
Figure 1 shows the intermil block diagram of the HPDL-1414.
It consists of two parts: the display LEOs and the CMOS IC.
The CMOS IC consists of a four-word ASCII memory, a 64word character generator, 17 segment drivers, four digit
drivers, and the scanning' circuitry necessary to multiplex the
four monolithic LED characters. In normal operation, the
divide-by-four counter sequentially accesses each of the four
RAM locations and simultaneously enables the appropriate
display digit driver. The output of the RAM is decoded by the
character generator which, in turn, enables the appropriate
display segment drivers. Seven-bit ASCII data is stored in
RAM. Since the display uses a 64-character decoder, half of
the possible 128 input combinations are invalid. For each
display location where 05=06 in the ASCII RAM, the display
character is blanked.
Data is loaded into the display through the DATA inputs
(D6-Do), ADDRE~S inputs (Al-Ao), and WRITE (WR). After a
character has been written to memory, the IC decodes the
ASCII data, drives the display and refreshes it without any
external hardware or software.
o ATA INPUTS (00.001
Do-D.
Os
2
WRITE
1
WRITE (Will
DATA INPUTS
Seven bit ASCII data is entered into
(00-06, pins 1, 2, 8-12) memory via the DATA inputs.
ADDRESS INPUTS
(Al-Ao, pins 4 and 5)
Each location in memory has a
distinct address. ADDRESS inputs
enable the designer to select a
specific location in memory to store
data. Address 00 accesses the far
right display location. Address 11
accesses the far left location.
WRITE (WR, pin 3)
Data is written into the display when
the WR input is low.
Vec and GND
(pins 6 and 7)
These pins supply power to the.
display.
~
6
ADD RESS INPUTS (A,-Aol
The HPDL-1414 uses 12 pins to control the CMOS IC.
Figure 1 shows the effect these inputs have on the display.
Os
---+s-
-
64.17
CllAAACTER
DECODER
r-m-
SEGMENT
OR IVERS
r-m--
$LANK
I
.II
,-
3r-- 3
3
2r--~
10f4
OECODER 1
r-'or--
+4
INTERNAL
OSC.
r-
COUNTER
Figure 1. HPDL-1414 Inlernal Block Diagram
7-33
2
DIGIT
1 DRIVERS 1
Q
0
~~~~
WR AJ Ao
a
a
0,
a
b
b
b
b
b
c
c
c
c
c
d
d
d
d
d
NC NC :B NC
NC c:: NC NC
11 NC NC NC
X
X
X
X
X
Previously Written
06
Os
a
04
a
H
a
b
b
L
c
c
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
H
H
H
d
d
H
X
X
X
X
0 3 02
00 0lG3DIG2DIG10lGO
a NC NC NC FI
Data
"a" = ASCII CODE CORRESPONDING TO SYMBOL" R"
NC = NO CHANGE
L = LOGIC LOW INPUT
H = LOGIC HIGH INPUT
X= DON'T CARE
Figure 2. Write Truth Table
using the HPDL-1414 with
Microprocessors
ADDRESS inputs (A, and Ao) are connected to microprocessor addresses A, and Ao. A 74LS138 may be used to
generate individual display WRITE signals. Higher order
microprocessor address lines are connected to the 74LS138.
The microprocessor write line must be wired to one of the
active low enable. inputs of the 74LS138. Both figures are
formatted with address 0 being the far right display character.
Figures 3 and 4 show how to connect the HPDL-1414 to a
Motorola 6800 or an Intel 8085. The major differences
between the two circuits are:
1. The 6800 requires two latches to store the ADDRESS
and ASCII DATA information to increase the address
and data input hold times.
2. The 6800 requires a flip-flop to delay the display
WRITE signal to increase the address input setup time.
74lS313
r"
l.i
1~1)s.
~ 004
1-.!!
MICROPROCESSOR
a.
D
a-
0,
-'- 0,
0,
DATA BUS
7
I~D,
2
•
5
2
a. ,.
a. ,.
12
9
•
•
a,
2
ao
••
..
.,.1] •
Of
74LS20
,.....
t
.1
~ 74kS74
D
2
~'LS04
3
.
_
.
tP
Q
I
'+b
.{
17
741.$373
D,
13 D4
8 0,
A
7 D,
,
A
A0
5
.,
4 •
9 10 11
2 12
8
~
WAA
14Ii
i
8
1 2 12
,.
,.
13
.
~
USED FOR HIGHER ORDER ADDRESS DECODING
Figure 3: Memory Mapped Interface for the 6800
7-34
1
R A, AD
3 •
3 4 •
3~
i
0
9 10 11
9 10 11
1 2 12
'~
~~
J
Oe
1.
1
8888
8EJ88
GJ941~
,~.
3~
'""";:i;4 ~
00
O.
c..!:!e
~
3
8
14LS13B
a.r-< £,
0,
2 12
~
.xXXF
WR III Ao:
'1'414
Q'~ ""
• 0,
3
16
1
888~
a.~ l,
o.~A2
a3~Al
'4 D.
A3
,
.
8 9 10 l'
~6
5
#
3 4
5
0,
05
DATA LINES
FROM
MICROPROCESSOR
OJ
0,
0,
Do
8 9 10'1
4
WR.......!'...c
2 12
8
9 10 11
1 2 12
8
9 10 11
1
2 12
B 9 10 11
1 2 12
74lS13S
6,
.{-~e,
-----L e,
A,
1
----L A,
3j:>-"...
2 _ _ _~
2j:>-""'3_ _ _ _ _
+-+_______----'
_________+_+---------J
AJ--1- A,
lj:>-"~4_ _ _ _~+-+
A,--1- Ao
at:>-"~5----~~--------_t_t---------~~------~
Al------------~~--------+-+_-------~~~-------~
Ao--------------~----
_____
_4---------_~------~--~
·USE FOR HIGHER ORDER ADDRESS DECODING.
Figure 4. Memory Mapped Interface lor the 8085
7-35
- - - - - - - - ------------------------
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
HEX
0,
1
(space)
D3
D2
D,
DO
BITS
D6 05 04
o
1
0
2
a
1. 1
3
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
% [1
/
< > *- + 0 I 2 j Y 5 5 1 B 9 - / L - ~ ?
OJ R B [ ]J E F [; H I J I-< L M N 0
P Q R 5 T U V hi X Y Z [ \ J A I
1/
:±J
~
/
I
.,--
'"
1
0
0
4
1
0
1
5
Figure 5. HPDL-1414 ASCII Character Set
Mechanical and Electrical
Considerations
The HPDL-1414 is a 12 pin dual-in-line package which can
be stacked horizontally and vertically to create arrays of any
size. The HPDL-1414 is designed to operate continuously
from -40° C to +85 0 C for all possible input conditions.
Soldering and Post Solder
Cleaning Instructions for the
HPDl-1414
The HPDL-1414 is assembled by die attaching and wire
bonding the four GaAsP/GaAs monolithic LED chips and
the CMOS IC to a high temperature printed circuit board. An
immersion lens is formed by placing the PC board assembly
into a nylon lens filled with epoxy. A plastic cap creates an
air gap to protect the CMOS IC. Backfill epoxy environmentally seals the display package. This package construction
gives the display a high tolerance to temperature cycling.
The HPDL-1414 may be hand soldered or wave soldered
with SN63 solder. Hand soldering may be safely performed
. only with an electronically temperature-controlled and
securely grounded soldering iron. For best results, the iron
tip temperature should be set at 315°C (600° Fl. For wave
soldering, a rosin-based RMA flux or a water soluble organic
acid (OAI flux can be used. The solder wave t€!mperature
should be 245°C ±5°C (473°F ±9°FI, and the dwell in the
wave should be set at 1 1/2 to 3 seconds for optimum soldering. Preheat temperature should not exceed 93° C (200° FI as
measured on the solder side of the PC, board.
'
The inputs to the CMOS IC are protected against static discharge and input current latchup. However, for best results,
standard CMOS handling precautions should be used. Prior
to use, the HPDL-1414 should be stored in anti-static tubes
or conductive material. A grounded conductive assembly
area should be used, and assembly personnel should wear
conductive wrist straps. Lab coats made of synthetic materials should be avoided since they may collect a static charge.
Input current latchup is caused when the CMOS inputs are
subjected either to a voltage below ground (VIN < groundl or
to a voltage higher than Vee (VIN > Veel, and when a high
current is forced into the input.
Post solder cleaning may be performed with a solvent or
aqueous process. For solvent cleaning, Allied Chemical
Genesolv DES, Baron Blakeslee Blaco-Tron TES or DuPont
Freon TE can only be used. These solvents are azeotropes of
trichlorotrifluoroethane FC-113 with low concentrations of
ethanol (5%1. The' maximum exposure time in the solvent
vapors at boiling temperature should not exceed 2 minutes.
Solvents containing high concentrations of alcohols, pure
alcohols, isopropanol or acetone should not be used as they
will chemically attack the nylon lens. Solvents containing
trichloroethane FC-111 or FC-112 and trichloroethylene
(TCEI are not recommended.
An aqueous cleaning process is highly recommended. A
saponifier, such as Kester Bio-kleen Formula 5799 or equivalent, may be added to the wash cycle of an aqueous
process to remove rosin flux residues. Organic acid flux
residues must be thoroughly removed by an aqueous cleaning process to prevent corrosion of the leads and solder
connections. The optimum water temperature is 60° C
(140°FI. The maximum cumulative exposure of the HPDL1414 to wash and rinse cycles should not exceed 15 minutes.
7-36
optical Considerations/
Contrast Enhancement
The HPDL-1414 display uses a precision aspheric immersion
lens to provide excellent readability and low off-axis distortion. The aspheric lens produces a magnified character
height of 2.85 mm (0.112 in.! and a viewing angle of ±40
degrees. These features provide excellent readability at distances of up to 1.5 meters (4 feet).
Each HPDL-1414 display is tested for luminous intensity and
marked with an intensity category on the side of the display
package. To ensure intensity matching for multiple package
applications, mixing intensity categories for a given panel is
not recommended.
The HPDL-1414 display is designed to provide maximum
contrast when placed behind an appropriate contrast
enhancement filter. Some suggested filters are Panelgraphic
Ruby Red 60, Panel graphic Dark Red 63, SGL Homalite
Hl00-1650, Rohm and Haas 2423, Chequers Engraving 118,
and' 3M R6510. For further information on contrast
enhancement, see Hewlett-Packard Application Note 1015.
7-37
- - - - .._..... __._---_.__._._.. ------_. _......-
r/idl
HEWLETT
~e. PACKARD
FOUR CHARACTER
4.1 mm (0.16 inJ
SMART
ALPHANUMERIC DISPLAY
HPDL-2416
Features
• SMART ALPHANUMERIC DISPLAY
Built-in RAM, ASCII Decoder, and LED Drive
Circuitry
• WIDE OPERATING TEMPERATURE RANGE
-40 0 C to +85 0 C
• VERY FAST ACCESS TIME
160 ns
• EXCELLENT ESD PROTECTION
Built-in Input Protection Diodes
• CMOS IC FOR LOW POWER CONSUMPTION
• FULL TTL COMPATIBILITY OVER OPERATING
TEMPERATURE RANGE
Typical Applications
VIL =0.8 V
VIH =2.0 V
• PORTABLE DATA ENTRY DEVICES
• WAVESOLDERABLE
• MEDICAL EQUIPMENT
• RUGGED PACKAGE CONSTRUCTION
• PROCESS CONTROL EQUIPMENT
• END-STACKABLE
• TEST EQUIPMENT
• WIDE VIEWING ANGLE
• INDUSTRIAL INSTRUMENTATION
• COMPUTER PERIPHERALS
Description
The HPDL-2416 has been designed to incorporate several
improvements over competitive products. It has a wide
operating temperature range, fast IC access time and
improved ESD protection. The HPDL-2416 is fully TTL
compatible, wave solderable, and highly reliable. This display
is ideally suited for industrial and commercial applications
where a good looking, easy-to-use alphanumeric display is
required.
The HPDL-2416 is a smart 4.1 mm (0.16 in) four character,
sixteen-segment red GaAsP display. The on-board CMOS
IC contains memory, ASCII decoder, multiplexing circuitry,
and drivers. The monolithic LED characters are magnified
by an immersion lens which increases both character size
and luminous intensity. The encapsulated dual-in-Iine
package construction provides a rugged, environmentally
sealed unit.
7-38
• TELECOMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT
Absolute Maximum Ratings
Supply Voltage, VCC to Ground .......... -{l.5 V to 7.0 V
Input Voltage, Any Pin to Ground ... -0.5 V to Vee +0.5 V
Free Air Operating, No Cursors On[1J
Temperature Range, T A .............. -40° C to +85° C
Relative Humidity (non-condensing) at 65° C ........ 90%
Storage Temperature, Ts .............. -40° C to +85° C
Maximum Solder Temperature, 1.59 mm (0.063 in.!
below Seating Plane, t < 5 sec. ................. 260° C
Nole:
1. Free air operating temperature range:
T A> 75° C No Cursors On
TA';; 60° C 3 Cursors On
T A';; 75' C 1 Cursor On
TA';; 55° C 4 Cursors On
T A';; 68' C 2 Cursors On
-------- - - - - -
package Dimensions
Ir ::1
25.2010.990)
r'
-
6.3510.250) TYP.
.~
fiv~~
L
I
2007
10.790)~
3.
~0~0005)
~'~""
f'
2
.1
0
15.03
10.600)
1
F=-~
REF.
~
10.160)
PIN
NO.
1
2
3
4
PART NUMBER
LUMINOUS INTENSITY CATEGORY
AND/\CODE
......-- r
',,,'"
6.6
10;61
HPDl 2416
L
... ",'"
""..
4,10
..,
REF
tlI0.160)
.
y~WWI
0.51 ± .013 TVP
10.020 ±0.005)
.
5
6
7
~~~~~tl
PIN 1 IDENTIFIER
TIe .
e
9
PIN
FUNCTION
NO.
ti, CHIP ENASlE
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
~W:A'WABLE
cull CURSOR ENABLE
CiJ CURSOR SELECT
Wll WRITE
ADOA ess INPUT Al
ADDRESS INPUT Ao
Vee
FUNCTION
GND
Do OATA INPUT
D, DATA INPUT
D, DATA INPUT
D, DATA INPUT
0, OATA I~PUT
D. DATA·INPUT
Oil OAT~ INpUT
If[ DISPLAY BLANK
NOTES:
1. UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED, THE TOLERANCE ON ALL DIMENSIONS IS 0.254 mm (0.010 IN.l
2. DIMENSIONS IN mm (INCHES).
2.5410.1001 TYP.
ReCOmmended Operating Conditions
Parameter
Symbol
Min.
N6m.
Max.
Supply Voltage
Vee
4.5
5.0
5.5
Input Voltage High
VIH
2.0
Input Voltage Low
VIL
Units
V
V
0.8
V
DC Electrical Characteristics Over Operating Temperature Range
TYPICAL VALUES
Parameter
Symbol
Units
-40°C
-20°C
2S"C
70°C
85°C
Test Condition
ICC
100
95
85
75
72
VCC=5.0V
147
140
125
110
105
VCC=S.OV
1.85
1.5
1.15
Vec =5.0V
BL=O.S V
20
17
14
ICC Cusor ,2 .J
ICC'CU,
ICC Blank
ICC1BLI
mA
mA
mA
IlL
J.1A
Icc 4 digits on! 10 seg/digit,
1.21
Input Current, Max.
Vcc=50V
VIN =0.8 V
GUARANTEED VALUES
Parameter
2S"C
Vee = 5.0 V
Maximum Over
Operating Temperature
Range
Vee "" S.S V
Symbol
Units
Icc
115
170
165
232
3.5
SO
Icc IBU
rnA
mA
mA
Input Current. Max.
IlL
p.A
30
40
Power Dissipation. 4
PD
mW
575
910
Icc 4 digits on (10 seg/digitl
1.2
Icc Cursor 2.3
1 ......
lce leU)
Icc Blank
I
Notes:
1. "%" illuminated in all four characters.
4. Power dissipation
2. Measured at five seconds.
3. Cursor character is sixteen segments and DP on.
7-39
= Vee'
lee lID seg.l.
AC Timing Characteristics Over Operating Temperature
Range at Vee = 4.5 V
-20o e
25°e
70c e
Symbol
tMIN
tMIN
tMIN
Units
Address Setup Time
lAs
90
115
150
ns
Write Delay Time
10
15
20
80
100
130
Data Setup Time
two
tw
tos
40
60
80
Data Hold Time
tOH
40
45
50
Address Hold Time
tAH
40
45
50
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
Parameter
Write Time
Chip Enable Hold Time
teEH
40
45
50
Chip Enable Setup Time
teEs
90
115
150
ns
Clear Time
telA
2.4
3.5
4.0
ms
Access Time
130
Refresh Rate
420-790
=~
160
200
ns
310-630
270-550
Hz
Optical Characteristics
Parameter
Symbol
Test Condition
Min,
Typ.
Units
Peak Luminous Intensity per digit,
8 segments on (character average)
Iv Peak
Vcc=5,QV
"%" illuminated in
al14 dIgits.
0.5
1.25
mcd
Petak Wavelength
Apeak
655
nm
Ad
640
nm
Off Axis Viewing Angle
±5Q
degrees
Digit Size
4,1
mm
Dominant Wavelength
Timing Diagram
f2.0V
--,
I
0.8V
teES
I
--'..- 2.0 V
I
~O.8V
I
-'e'H--'~(OV
~.
,
'AS
-two
0.8 V
"'-',H __
i
I
'- 2.0 V
0.8 V
tw
I
~r
00-0 6
-'DS"-- I--'OH--
7-40
~2.0V
O.8V
Magnified Character
Font Description
Relative Luminous Intensity
vs. Temperature
3.0
1 -(~:~~~)-1
a,
I
32
fl\111
0
'IVI~l
£12
~
1,\
0
1'\
I""I'--
0
d,
-40
-20
20
40
f'..
60
60
TA - AMBIENT TEMPERATURE _ (CO)
Electrical Description
Data Entry
Display Internal Block Diagram
Figure 2 shows a truth table for the HPDL-2416 display. Setting the chip enables (CE" CE2) to their low state and the
cursor select (CU) to its high state will enable data loading.
The desired data inputs (06-00) and address inputs (A"
Ao) as well as the chip enables (CE" CE2) and cursor
select (CU) must be held stable during the write cycle to
ensure that the correct data is stored into the display. Valid
ASCII data codes are shown in Figure 3. The display
accepts standard seven-bit ASCII data. Note that 06 = 05
for the codes shown in Figure 2. If 06 = 05 during the write
cycle, then a blank will be stored in the display. Data can
be loaded into the display in any order. Note that when A,
= Ao = 0, data is stored in the furthest right-hand display
location.
Figure 1 shows the internal block diagram for the
HPDL-2416' display. The CMOS IC consists of a four-word
ASCII memory, a four-word cursor memory, a 64-word
character generator, 17 segment drivers, four digit drivers,
and the scanning circuitry necessary to multiplex the four
monolithic LED characters. In normal operation, the divideby-four counter sequentially accesses each of the four RAM
locations and simultaneously enables the appropriate display digit driver. The output of the RAM is decoded by the
character generator which, in turn, enables the appropriate
display segment drivers. For each display location, the cursor enable (CUE) selects whether the data from the ASCII
RAM (CUE = Q) or the stored cursor (CUE = 1) is to be
displayed. The cursor character is denoted by all sixteen
segments and the DP ON. Seven-bit ASCII data is stored in
RAM. Since the display utilizes a 64-character decoder, half
of the possible 128 input combinations are invalid. For each
display location where Os = 06 in the ASCII RAM, the display character is blanked. The entire display is blanked
when BL=O.
Cursor Entry
As shown in Figure 2, setting the chip enables (CE" CE2) to
their low state and the cursor select (CU) to its low state will
enable cursor loading. The cursor character is indicated by
the display symbol having all16 segments and the DP ON.
The least significant data input (Do). the address inputs
(A" Ao). the chip enables (CE" CE2). and the cursor select
(CU) must be held stable during the write cycle to ensure
that the correct data is stored in the display. If Do is in a
low state during the write cycle, then a cursor character
will be removed at the indicated location. If Do is in a high
state euring the write cycle, then a cursor character will be
stored at the indicated location. The presence or absence
of a cursor character does not affect the ASCII data stored
at that location. Again, when A, = Ao = 0, the cursor
character is stored in the furthest right-hand display
location.
Data is loaded into the display through the data inputs (06Do). address inputs (A" Ao)~hip enables (CE" CE2).
cursor select (CU), and write (WR). The cursor select (CU)
determines whether data is stored in the ASCII RAM (CU =
1) or cursor memory (CU = 0). When CE, = CE2 = WR = 0
and CU = 1, the information on the data inputs is stored in
the ASCII RAM at the location specified by the address
inputs (A" Ao). When CE, = CE2 = WR = 0 and CU = 0,
information on the data input, Do, is stored in the cursor at
the location specified by the address inputs (A" AO)' If Do
= 1, a cursor character is stored in the cursor memory. If
DO = 0, a previously stored cursor character will be removed
from the cursor memory.
All stored cursor characters are displayed if the cursor enable (CUE) is high. Similarly, the stored ASCII data words are
displayed, regardless of the cursor characters, if the cursor
enable (CUE) is low. The cursor enable (CUE) has no effect
on the storage or removal of the cursor characters within
the display. A flashing cursor is displayed by pulsing the
cursor enable (CUE). For applications not requiring a cursor, the cursor enable (CUE) can be connected to ground
and the cursor select (CU) can be connected to Vee. This
inhibits the cursor function and allows only ASCII data to
be loaded into the display.
If the clear input (CLR) equals zero for one internal display
cycle (4 ms minimum), the data in the ASCII RAM will be
rewritten with zeroes and the display will be blanked. Note
that the blanking input (BU must be equal to logical one
during this time.
7-41
DATA INPUTS (D6-D,
1
6
4x7
DATA INPUT (DO 1
ADDRESS INPUTS (A,-A 01
64x 17
ASCII
MEMORY
2
OOrrt-"
O.
WRITE CLEAR READ
2
~
4xl
CURSOR MEMORY
l¥- t-- WRITE
READ
.... ..,
(CE,
SEGMENT
DRIVER
SLAN!\
D,
~
;::D-
2
~
CE2 1
WRITE (WA 1
CURSOR SELECT
Pf.
CURSOR
~D
t-
CHIP ENABLES
CftARACTER
GENERATOR
(CO' 1
CURSOR ENABLE (CUE 1
CLEAR IClR 1
.~)
BLANK IliL 1
B '.
$
COUNTER
f¥o-
'OF4
DECODER
f*.
DI
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
I
0
I
0
0
1
1
1
Q
0
1
1
1
5
8
7
(>
,
Q
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
8
9
A
1
Q
I
1
Q
1
, ,
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
B
C
D
E
1
1
1
I
1
F
/
:±J gj % &
< >
+
0 I 2 3 y 5 5 1 B 9 -- /- L
~ ?
N 0
IOJ IR B [ D E F G H I J K
P Q R 5 T U V WX YZ [ \ J A (space)
1
u
/
*
I
=
LiM
Figure 3. HPDL-2416 ASCII Character Set
Mechanical and Electrical
Considerations
either to a voltage below ground (VIN < ground) or to a
voltage higher than Vee (VIN > Vee) and when a high current is forced into the input. To prevent input current
latchup and ESD damage, unused inputs should be connected either to ground or to Vee. Voltages should not be
applied to the inputs until Vee has been applied to the display. Transient input voltages should be eliminated.
The HPDL-2416 is an 18 pin dual-in-line package that can
be stacked horizontally and vertically to create arrays of
any size. This display is designed to operate continuously
between -40° C to +85° C with a maximum of 10segments
on per digit.
During continuous operation of all four Cursors the operating temperature should be limited to -40° C to +55° C.
At temperatures above +55° C, the maximum number of
Cursors illuminated continuously should be reduced as
follows: No Cursors illuminated at operating temperatures
above 75° C. One Cursor can be illuminated continuously
at operating temperatures below 75° C. Two Cursors can
be illuminated continuously at operating temperatures below
68° C. Three Cursors can be illuminated continuously at
operating temperatures below 60° C.
The HPDL-2416 is assembled by die attaching and wire
bonding the four GaAsP/GaAs monolithic LED chips and
the CMOS IC to a high temperature printed circuit board.
An immersion lens is formed by plaCing the PC board
assembly into a nylon lens filled with epoxy. A plastic cap
creates an air gap to protect the CMOS IC. Backfill epoxy
environmentally seals the display package. This package
construction provides the display with a high tolerance to
temperature cycling.
The inputs to the CMOS IC are protected against static
discharge and input current latchup. However, for best
results standard CMOS handling precautions should be
used. Prior to use, the HPDL-2416 should be stored in antistatic tubes or conductive material. During assembly a
grounded conductive work area should be used, and
assembly personnel should wear conductive wrist straps.
Lab coats made of synthetic material should be avoided
since they are prone to static charge build-up. Input current latchup is caused when the CMOS inputs are subjected
Soldering and Post Solder
Cleaning Instructions for the
HPDL-2416
The HPDL-2416 may be hand soldered or wave soldered
with SN63 solder. Hand soldering may be safely performed
only with an electronically temperature-controlled and
securely grounded soldering iron. For best results, the iron
tip temperature should be set at 315°C (600°F). For wave
soldering, a rosin-based RMA flux can be used. The solder
wave temperature should be 245°C ±5°C (473°F ±9°F),
and the dwell in the wave should be set at 1V, to 3 seconds
for optimum soldering. Preheat temperature should not
exceed 93°C (200°F) as measured on the solder side of the
PC board.
Post solder cleaning may be performed with a solvent or
aqueous process. For solvent cleaning, Allied Chemical
Genesolv DES, Baron Blakeslee Blaco-Tron TES or DuPont
Freon TE can only be used. These solvents are azeotropes
of trichlorotrifluoroethane FC-113 with low concentrations
of ethanol (5%). The maximum exposure time in the solvent
vapors at boiling temperature should not exceed 2 minutes.
Solvents containing high concentrations of alcohols, pure
alcohols, isopropanol or acetone should not be used as
they will chemically attack the nylons lens. Solvents containing trichloroethane FC-111 or FC-112 and trichloroethylene (TCE) are not recommended.
7-44
An aqueous cleaning process is highly recommended. A
saponifier, such as Kester-Bio-kleen Formula 5799 or equivalent, may be added to the wash cycle of an aqueous
process to remove rosin flux residues. Organic acid flux
residues must be thoroughly removed by an aqueous cleaning process to prevent corrosion of the leads and solder
connections. The optimum water temperature is 60°C
(140°F). The maximum cumulative exposure of the HPDL2416 to wash and rinse cycles should not exceed 15 minutes.
optical Considerations/
Contrast Enhancement
The HPDL-2416 display uses a precision aspheric immersion lens to provide excellent readability and low off-axis
distortion. The aspheric lens produces a magnified character height of 4.1 mm (0.160 in.! and a viewing angle of ±50°.
These features provide excellent readability at distances up
to 2 metres (6 feet).
Each HPDL-2416 display is tested for luminous intensity
and marked with an intensity category on the side of the
display package. To ensure intensity matching for multiple
package applications, mixing intensity categories for a
given panel is not recommended.
The HPDL-2416 display is designed to provide maximum
contrast when placed behind an appropriate contrast
enhancement filter. Some suggested filters are Panelgraphic
Ruby Red 60, Panelgraphic Dark Red 63, SGL Homalite
H100-1650, Rohm and Haas 2423, Chequers Engraving 118,
and 3M R6510. For further information on contrast
enhancement, see Hewlett-Packard Application Note 1015.
7-45
Flidl
FOUR CHARACTER 3.8 mm (0.15 INCH)
5x7 ALPHANUMERIC DISPLAYS
HEWLETT
STANDARD REO
YEllOW
HIGH EFFICIENCY REO
HIGH PERFORMANCE GREEN
.:~ PACKARD
HDSP-2000
HDSP-2001
HDSP-2002
HDSP'2003
Features
• FOUR COLORS
Standard Red
Yellow
High Efficiency Red
High Performance Green
• INTEGRATED SHIFT REGISTERS WITH
CONSTANT CURRENT DRIVERS
• COMPACT CERAMIC PACKAGE
• WIDE VIEWING ANGLE
• END STACKABLE FOUR CHARACTER
PACKAGE
•
•
•
•
TTL COMPATIBLE
5 x 7 LED MATRIX DISPLAYS FULL ASCII SET
CATEGORIZED FOR LUMINOUS INTENSITY
HDSP-2001/2003 CATEGORIZED FOR COLOR
Description
The HDSP-2000/-2001/-2002/-2003 series of displays are 3.B
mm (0.15 inch) 5 x 7 LED arrays for display of alphanumeric
information. These devices are available in standard red,
yellow, high efficiency red, and high performance green.
Package Dimensions
. _ _ _ 1.6991
17.7SMAX•••••
I
I--.....l
I_see
Typical Applications
•
"
•
•
INDUSTRIAL PROCESS CONTROL EQUIPMENT
BUSINESS MACHINES
PROGRAMMABLE LEGEND SWITCHES
MEDICAL INSTRUMENTS
o MILITARY GROUND SUPPORT EQUIPMENT
o COMPUTER PERIPHERALS
Each four character cluster is contained in a 12 pin dual-inline package. An on-board SIPO (SeriaHn-Paraliel-Out)
7-bit shift register associated wiih each digit controls constant current LED row drivers. Full character display is
achieved by external column strobing.
""'' l
NOTE 4
I COLUMN
FU~~TIO.N1 ~PI.N7 FUNCTI~~_
DATA OUT
t~--.· ~6ill~~·r ~ __ :~ -~~.
-;J
fp'N
J
1
I
4
5
_ 6
3.71 REf. He
1.290'
{.146)
1
/ " "'4'.13 __
PIN 1 MARKED BY
1.1-15 ' .0051
COLUMN 4
COLUMN 5
-
t INt _C~NN'ECP ~
10
11
-12
CLOCK
GROUND"
I~
I?ATA
"DONO"!' CONNECT OR USE
I
DOT ON SACK OF
PACKMe.
NOTES;
1. DIMENSiON$IN nun {mchtsl.
2. UNl£SS OTHERWISE: SF>SCfFleO TIU!
TOLERANCE ONAf..f..DIM£NSIONS
1$ ~,:t8mm
1~.{)1&"}
3, LEAD MATERIAL IS
COPPJ::R: AU.OY,
4, CHARACTER$ ARE CE:NTEREO
w,TH RESPeCT TO lMo$ W*THtN:
,.,3mlTll·.005"l.
1,21 __
(,050)
7-46
Absolute Maximum Ratings (HDSP-2000/-2001 /·2002/-2003)
Supply Voltage Vee to Ground .......... -0.5V to 6.0V
Inputs, Data Out and VB •. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. -0.5V to Vee
Column Input Voltage, VeOl ............ -0.5V to +6.0V
Free Air Operating
Temperature Range, TA[1.2] ......... -20°C to +85°C
Storage Temperature Range, Ts ..... -55°C to +100°C
Maximum Allowable Power Dissipation
at TA = 25° C[1,2,3] ..•..........•..•.•.... 1.24 Watts
Maximum Solder Temperature 1.59 mm 10.063 in)
Below Seating Plane t < 5 sec ................ 260° C
Recommended operating Conditions
(HDSP-2000/-2001/-2002/-2003)
Parameter
Supply Vol1age
Data Out CUHent, Low State
Data Out Current. High State
Column Input Voltage,'oolumn On HOSP-2000
Column Input Voltage, Column On, HDSP-2001/-2002f-2003
Setup Time
Hold Time
Width of Clock
Clock Frequency
Clock Transition Time
Free Air Operating Temperature Rangep,21
SYmbol
Vee
IOl
IOH
VeOl
VeOl
Min.
Nom.
4.i5
5.0
fclock
tTHl
TA
-20
thold
tw(Clock)
V
mA
mA
V
V
ns
ns
ns
MHz
ns
°C
3.5
3.5
2.4
275
70
30
75
0
tsel up
Units
Max.
5.25
1.6
-0.5
45
0
3
200
85
Fig.
4
4
1
1
1
1
1
2
Electrical Characteristics Over Operating Temperature Range
(Unless otherwise specified I
,;'Descrlption
. Supply Current
Symbol
lec
Column Current at any Column Input
Column Current at any Column Input
Vs, Clock Or Data Input ThreshOld High
oNs, Clock Or Data Input Threshold Low
input Current Logical 1
Vs, Clock
Data In
Input Current Logical 0
Va, Clock
Data In
Data Out Voltage
Power DiSSipation Per Package"
Thermal Resistance IC
Junclion·to·Case
ICOl
ICOL
VIM
Vil
hH
hH
hL
hl
VOH
VOL
PD
Test Conditions
Vec = S.25V
VClOCK - VOATA 2.4V
All SR Stages =
Logical 1
Vcc=5.25 V
VeOl =3,5V
All SR Stages ~ logical 1
=
Vee
~
VeOl
~
mA
Vs= 2.4V
73
95
mA
Vs = OAV
Va = 2.4V
~
335
500
I"A
410
rnA
V
V
2.0
0,8
20
2.4V
10
Vec=4.75V, IOH --a.SmA, leOl = 0 mA
Vee - 4.7SV, IOl = 1.6 mA, leal = rnA
Vee - S.OV, VCOl - 3.5V, 17.5% OF
15 LEOs on per character, Va 2.4V
°
=
R&J-c
2.4
80
40
-500
·250
3.4
-800
0.2
004
-400
Fig:
4
J1A
iJA
I"A
I1A
V
V
0,72
W
2
25
°CIW!
Device
2
"Power dissipation per package with four characters illuminated.
7-47
._-_......__._.__......
Uillts
60
Vec = 5,25V, Vil = OAV
Notes:
1. Operation above 85°C ambient is possible provided the
following conditions are met. The junction should not
exceed 125°C TJ and the case temperature las measured
at pin 1 ·or the back of the display I should not exceed
100°CTc.
.---.-.-~
Max.
45
Min•
4.7SV
Vee = 5,25V, Viti
'All typical values specified at Vee = 5.0V and TA = 25°C unless
otherwise noted.
----~
Typ"
Vs =0.4V
2. The device should be derated linearly above 50°C at 16.7
mW/oC. This derating is based on a device mounted in a
socket having a thermal resistance from case to ambient at
35°C/W per device. See Figure 2 for powerderatings based on
a lower thermal resistance.
3. Maximum allowable dissipation is derived from Vce - 5.2SV,
Vs = 2.4V, VeOL = 3.5V 20 LEOs on per character, 20% OF.
optical Characteristics
STANDARD RED HDSP-2000
Description
Peak Luminous Intensity per LEDI4.SI
!Character Average)
Peak Wavelength
Dominant Wavelength[7J
Symbol
I,Peak
Test Conditions
Vee'"' 5.0V, VeOL - 3.5V
Ti '" 25° CI6J , VB == 2.4V
Min.
Typ.'
Units
Fig.
105
200
,",cd
3
655
639
nm
nm
APEAK
Ad
Max.
YELLOW HDSP-2001
Description
Peak Luminous Intensity per LE014.81
(Character Average)
Peak Wavelength
Dominant Wavelengthl S,7j
Symbol
IYPeak
Test Coridltlons
Vee - 5.0V, VeOL - 3.5V
TI = 25° CI6J, VB"" 2.4V
Min.
Typ:
Units
Fig.
400
750
,",cd
3
583
585
nm
nm
• APEAK
Ad
Max.
HIGH EFFICIENCY RED HDSP-2002
Description
Peak Luminous IntenSity per LED14.61
(Character Average)
Peak Wavelength
Dominant Wavelength[7J
I Symbol
I
I
J
IvPeak
Test Coridllii:ms
Vee == 5.0V, VeOl - 3.5V
Ti = 25·C[61, VB'" 2.4V
Min.
Typ.'
Units
Fig.
400
1430
,",cd
3
635
626
nm
nm
APEAK
Ad
Max.
HIGH PERFORMANCE GREEN
HDSP-2003
-Description
Peak Luminous Intensity per LED!4.81
(Character Average)
Peak Wavelength
Dominant Wavelengthl5.7J
Symbol
IvPeak
Test Conditions
Vee'" 5.0V, VeOl - 3.5V
Ti '" 25° CI6J, Va = 2.4 V
APEAK
Ad
Typ:
Units
Fig.
850
1550
/lcd
3
568
nm
nm
Max.
574
'All typical values specified at Vce == 5.0V and TA == 25'C unless
otherwise noted.
Notes:
4. The characters are categorized for luminous intensity with the
intensity category designated by a letter code on the bottom of
the package.
5. The HDSP-2001/-2003 are categorized for color with the color
category designated by a number code on the bottom of the
package.
6. Ti refers to the initial case temperature of the device immediately prior to the light measurement.
Min.
"Power dissipation per package with four characters illuminated.
Dominant wavelength Ad. is derived from the CIE chromaticity
diagram. and represents the single wavelength which defines
the color of the device.
S. The luminous sterance of the LED may be calculated using the
following relationships:
Lv (cd/m2) == Iv (Candela)/A (Metre)2
Lv IFootlamberts) == rrlv ICandela)/A IFoot)2
A == 5.3 X 10.8 M2 == 5.S X 10-7 I Footl2
7.
Electrical Description
column 1 input is now enabled for an appropri'ate period of
time, T. A similar process is repeated for columns 2, 3, 4
and 5. If the time necessary to decode and load data into
the shift register is t, then with 5 columns, each column of
the display is operating at a duty factor of:
The HDSP-200X series of four character alphanumeric displays have been designed to allow the user maximum
flexibility in interface electronics design. Each four character display module features DATA IN and DATA OUT
terminals arrayed for easy PC board interconnection.
DATA OUT represents the output of the 7th bit of digit
number 4 shift register. Shift register clocking occurs on
the high to low transition of the clock input. The like
columns of each character in a display cluster are tied to a
single pin. Figure 5 is the block diagram for the displays.
High true data in the shift register enables the output
current mirror driver stage associated with each row of
LEDs in the 5 x 7 diode array.
T
D.F.= 5 (t + T)
Thetime frame, t + T, alloted toeach column of the display is
generally chosen to provide the maximum duty factor consistent with the minimum refresh rate necessary to achieve a
flicker free display. For most strobed display systems, each
column of the display should be refreshed (turned on I at a
minimum rate of 100 times per second.
With columns to be addressed. this refresh rate then gives a
value for the time t + T of:
The TTL compatible VB input may either be tied to Vee for
maximum display intensity or pulse width modulated to
achieve intensity control and reduction in power consumption.
1/[5 x (100)1 = 2 msec
If the device is operated at 3.0 MHzclock rate maximum, it is
possibleto maintain t« T. Forshort display strings, the duty
factor will then approach 20%.
In the normal mode of operation, input data for digit 4
column 1 is loaded into the 7 on-board shift register locations 1 through 7. Column 1 data for digits 3, 2 and 1 is
similarly shifted into the display shift register locations. The
Forfurther applications information, refer to HP Application
Note 1016.
7-48
CLOCK
SERIAL
DECODED
DATA
INPUT
CLOCK
SERIAL
DECODED
DATA
OUTPUT
DATA IN
BLANKING
CONTROL
DATA OUT
htll,t"JIt
PrOp1;IgatiQO
Ct
delay CLOCK
to OArAoUT
=
15pF
RI.=2.4KU
125
n'S
Figure 1. Switching Characteristics HDSP-2000/-2001/-2002l-2003
ITA = _20· C to +85· C)
5
COLUMN DRIVE INPUTS
Mechanical and
Thermal Considerations
Figure 5. Block Diagram 01 HDSP-2000/-2001/-2002l-2003
The HDSP-2000/-2001/-2002/-2003 are available in standard
ceramic dual-in-line packages. They are designed for
plugging into sockets or soldering into PC boards. The
packages may be horizontally or vertically stacked for
character arrays of any desired size. Full power operation
(Vee = S.2SV, VB = 2.4V, VeOl = 3.SV) with worst case
thermal resistance from IC junction to ambient of 60· C/watVdevice is possible up to ambient temperature of SO° C. For
operation above SO°C, the maximum device dissipation
should be derated linearly at 16.7 mW/oC (see Figure 2).
With an improved thermal design, operation at higher
ambient temperatures without derating is possible.
Power derating for this family of displays can be achieved
in several ways. The power supply voltage can be lowered
to a minimum of 4.7SV. Column Input Voltage, VCOL, can
be decreased to the recommended minimum values of 2.4V
for the HDSP-2000 and 2.7SV for the HDSP-2001/-2002/2003. Also, the average drive current can be decreased
through pulse width modulation of VB' Please refer to HP
Application Note 1016 for further information.
The HDSP-2000/-2001/-2002/-2003 displays have glass
windows. A front panel contrast enhancement filter is
desirable in most actual display applications. Some
suggested filter materials are provided in Figure 6.
Additional information on filtering and constrast
enhancement can be found in HP Application Note 101S.
~s
~;:
0
1
~z
~Q
Polaroid
HNCP10-Glass
Marks Polarized
(HP Greenj
MPC·010'·5-12
Note: 1. Optically coated circular polarized filters, such as
Polaroid HNCP10.
Figure 6. Contrast Enhancement Filters
500
in
-
I.'
-
.......
~
1.2
"'i;;
::I~
0.8
"'0:
D•• I--
APJA' 50'C/W
I
,
J
',/
RtJJA" 4O"C/W
D••
11.1.1
r--
!
til/
00
f/-
ill
10
20
30
40
50
I
ill0:
~
0:
::I
~
~
V
u
,.
z
t
:E
~
I
100
"~
0:
70
eo
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
TJ - JUNCTION TE~PERATURE _·c
TA -AMBIENT TEMPERATURE _·c
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - _.. _----_..-----
0
Figure 3. Relative Luminous Intensity
vs. Temperature
7-49
.. -- ....
00
rt
....
-
'I
,I HDSP-2QOIf-2OW-2003
]
~
90 100
Figure 2. Maximum Allowable Power
Dissipation vs. Temperature
bUi
HOSNOOO
3
8
200
w
3
>
>=
60
300
z
0
J~~
~o
I-
3.0
I-
1
0.2
~
0:
100
TA -AMBIENT TEMPERATURE _
°c
FIgure 5. MaxImum Allowable Power
DIssIpatIon vs. Temperature
400
0:
0:
1.0
""z
HDSP._
~ ~ HD~
" I
"
-20
1IDSP·2303
20
40
60
80
'~"
r-r-
I
]
100
TJ - JUNCTION TEMPERATURE _
120
140
°c
FIgure 6. RelatIve LumInous IntensIty
vs. Temperature
7-53
8
~"
VeOL -COLUMN VOLTAGE -VOLTS
FIgure 7. Peak Column Current vs.
Column Voltage
Electrical Description
CLOCK
The HDSP-230X series of four character alphanumeric displays have been designed to allow the user maximum
flexibility in interface electonics design. Each four character display module features DATA IN and DATA OUT
terminals arrayed for easy PC board interconnection. DATA
OUT represents the output of the 7th bit of digit number 4
shift register. Shift register clocking occurs on the high to
low transition of the Clock input. The like columns of each
character in a display cluster are tied to a single pin. Figure
5 is the block diagram for the displays. High true data in
the shift register enables the output current mirror driver
stage associated with each row of LEOs in the 5 x 7 diode
array.
SERIAL
SERIAL
DECODED
DATA
OUTPUT
DECODED
DATA
INPUT
BLANKING
CONTROL
The TTL compatible VB input may either be tied to Vee for
maximum display intensity or pulse width modulated to
achieve intensity control and reduction in power
consumption.
In the normal mode of operation, input data for digit 4
column 1 is loaded into the 7 on-board shift register locations 1 through 7. Column data for digits 3, 2, and 1 is
similiarly shifted into the display shift register locations.
The column 1 input is now enabled for an appropriate
period of time, T. A similar process is repeated for columns
2,3,4 and 5. If the time necessary to decode the load data
into the shift register is t, then with 5 columns, each
column of the display is operating at a duty. factor of:
COLUMN DRIVE INPUTS
Figure 8. Block Diagram 01 HDSP-2300/-2301/-2302/-2303
T
D.F. = 5 (1+ T)
The time frame, t + T, alloted to each column of the display is
generally chosen to provide the maximum duty factor consistent with the minimum refresh rate necessary to achieve a
flicker free display. For most strobed display systems, each
column of the display should be refreshed (turned on) at a
minimum rate of 100 times per second.
HOSP·2001
(Yellow)
(HER)
With columns to be addressed, this refresh rate then gives a
value for the time t + T of:
HOSP-2003
(HP Green)
1/[5 x (100)) = 2 msec
Panelgra-phlc
Chequers Grey
Ruby Red 60
105
Chequers Red 112
Panelg1aph,<
Green 48
Chequers Green
107
POlaroid
HNCP10~Glass
Marks Pofatized
MPC·OZ01·2·22
Polaroid
HNCP10,G,."
Marks Polarized
MPC·OlO,·5·12
Note: 1. Optically coated circular pOlarized lilters, such as
Polaroid HNCP10.
If the device is operated at 3.0 MHz clock rate maximum, it is
possible to maintain t« T. For short display strings, the duty
factor will then approach 20%.
Figure 9. Contrast Enhancement Fillers
Forfurther applications information, refer to HP Application
Note 1016.
Mechanical and Thermal Considerations
The HDSP-2300/-2301/-2302/-2303 are available in standard
ceramic dual-in-line packages. They are designed for plugging into sockets or soldering into PC boards. The packages
may be horizontally or vertically stacked for character arrays
of any desired size. The HDSP-2301/-2302/-2303 utilize a
high output current IC to provide excellent readability in
bright ambient lighting. Full power operation (Vee = 5.25V,
VB = 2.4V, VeOL = 3.5V) with worst case thermal resistance
from IC junction to ambient of 60° C/waU/device is possible
up to ambient temperature of .37° C. For operation above
37° C, the maximum device dissipation should be derated
linearly at 16.7 mWrC (see Figure 5). With an improved
thermal design, operation at higher ambient temperatures
without derating is possible. Please refer to HP Application Note 1016 for further information.
The HDSP-2300 uses a lower power IC, yet achieves excellent readabilty in indoor ambient lighting. Full power
operation up to TA = 50° C (Vee = 5.25V, VB = 2.4V, VeOL =
3.5V) is possible byproviding a total thermal resistance from
IC junction to ambient of 60° C/wattldevice maximum. For
operation above 50° C, the maximum device dissipation
should be derated at 16.7 mW/o C/device (see Figure 2).
7-54
------------.-.----_.-
Power derating for this family of displays can be achieved in
several ways. The power supply voltage can be lowered to a
minimum of 4.75V. Column Input Voltage, VeOl, can be
decreased to the recommended minimum values of 2.6V for
the HDSP-2300 and 2.75V for the HDSP-2301/-2302/-2303.
Also, the average drive current can be decreased through
pulse width modulation of VB.
The HDSP-2300/-2301/-2302/-2303 displays have glass
windows. A front panel contrast enhancement filter is desirable in most actual display applications. Some suggested
filter materials are provided In Figure 9. Additional information on filtering and constrast enhancement can be found in
HP Application Note 1015.
Post solder cleaning may be accomplished using water or
Freon/alcohol mixtures formulated for vapor cleaning processing or Freon/alcohol mixtures formulated for room
temperature cleaning. Freon/alcohol vapor cleaning processing for up to 2 minutes in vapors at boiling is
permissible. Suggested solvents include Freon TF, Freon
TE, Genesolv DI-15, Genesolv DE-15, and water.
NOTE:
The HDSP-2301/-2302/-2303 are available in high intensity categories suitable for some applications where direct sunlight
viewing is required. For information on displays and filters for
sunlight viewable applications, contact your field salesman.
7-55
rlidl
FOUR CHARACTER 6.9 mm (0.27 INCH)
5X7 ALPHANUMERIC DISPLAYS
HEWLETT
STANDARD RED
YEllOW
HIGH EFFICIENCY RED
HIGH PERFORMANCE GREEN
~t:. PACKARD
HDSp·2490
HDSP-2491
HDSP-2492
HDSP-2493
Features
• FOUR COLORS
Standard Red
Yellow
High Efficiency Red
High Performance Green
• INTEGRATED SHIFT REGISTERS WITH
CONSTANT CURRENT DRIVERS
• COMPACT CERAMIC PACKAGE
• WIDE VIEWING ANGLE
• END STACKABLE FOUR CHARACTER
PACKAGE
•
•
•
•
Typical Applications
TTL COMPATIBLE
5 x 7 LED MATRIX DISPLAYS FULL ASCII SET
CATEGORIZED FOR LUMINOUS INTENSITY
HDSP-2491/2493 ALSO CATEGORIZED FOR
COLOR
•
•
•
•
•
•
Description
The HDSP-2490/-2491/-2492/-2493 series of displays are 6.9
mm (0.27 inch) 5 x 7 LED arrays for display of alphanumeric
information. These devices are available in standard red,
yellow, high efficiency red, and high performance green.
Each four character cluster is contained in a 28 pin dual-inline package. An on-board SIPO (Serial-ln-Parallel-Out)
7-bit shift register associated with each digit controls constant current LED row drivers. Full character display is
achieved by external column strobing.
package Dimensions
35~.
~-4jjl.'$)
I
~-t-~
I
1
PIN1
MAAKED
&YIlOT
OHeAd(
OF
PACkA~E,
I
L_
.....(~:)-
I
I
I
_J
I
I
I
L_
I
-,
I
r- -1
r-
I
I
I
2-+----+-3
I
_J
I
I
L_
I
I
I
_J
I
-T
I
4-j-
I
L_
1
2
COLUMN 1
,.
FUNCTION
NO CONNECT
DATA OUT
3
COLUMN 1
17
DATA OUT
PIN
_L
[I
11
-
.voI
•••
•
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
!ii-ru
US)
2.54
(1.400) MAX.
I
r-
INSTRUMENTS
BUSINESS MACHINES
INDUSTRIAL PROCESS CONTROL EQUIPMENT
MEDICAL INSTRUMENTS
COMPUTER PERIPHERALS
MILITARY GROUND SUPPORT EQUIPMENT
31.2
(1.23)
aao 1.1
(~~-----------------------------------;
7-56
FUNCTIONI 11
NO CONNECT
COLUMN 2
PIN
15
,.
19
COLUMN 3
20
COLUMN 3
21
COLUMN 4
22
COLUMN 4
23
COLUMN 5
2'
COLUMNS
25
INT. CONNECTIZ I 2.
INT. CONNECTIZI 27
NO CONNECT
2'
COLUMN 2
V,
V,
V"
V"
CLOCK
CLOCK
GROUND
GROUND
DATA IN
DATA IN
NOCONNECT
--_._--_.. _-_ .. _.. _ - - - - - - - - - - - -
-----
Absolute Maximum Ratings (HDSP-2490/-2491/-2492/-2493)
Supply VOlt~e Vee to Ground .......... -0.5V to 6.0V
Inputs, Data ut and Vs •.............. " -0.5V to Vee
Column Input 1I0itage, VeOl ............ -0.5V to +6.0V
Free Air Opera ,ng
Temperature Range, TA[1,21 ........ ·-20°C to +85°C
Storage Temperature Range, T5 ..... -55°C to +100°C
Maximum Allowable Power Dissipation
at TA = 25°C 1,2.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.46 Watis
Maximum Solder Temperature 1.59 mm (0.063 in.)
Below Seating Plane t < 5 sec ................ 260° C
Recommended operating Conditions
(HDSP-2490/-2491/-2492/-2493)
Electrical Characteristics Over operating Temperature Range
(Unless otherwise specified)
Description
Supply Current
Symbol
Icc
Column Current at any Column Input
leoL
Column Current at any Column Input
VB, Clock or Data Input Threshold HiQh
Vs, Clock or Data I nput Threshold Low
Input Current Logical 1
Va, Clock
Data In
Input Current Logical 0
Va, Clock
Data In
leol
VIH
VIL
Data Out Voltage
Power Dissipation Per Package"
Thermal Resistance IC
Junction-to-Case
hH
hH
ilL
hL
VOH
VOL
PD
Test Conditions
Vee-5.25V
VClOCK = VOATA = 2.4V
All SR Stages =
Logical 1
Vee=5.25V
VCOl =3.5V
All SR Stages = Logical 1
Typ.-
Max.
UnUs
VB"'0.4V
45
6()
mA
VB =2.4V
73
95
rnA
Min.
VB =O.4V
380
Va=2AV
Vce = Veol = 4.75V
2.4
~
-250
-400
3.4
0.2
0.4
0_78
20
V
V
W
-oCIWI
Device
4
2
2
"Power c;lisslpation per package with four characters Illuminated.
'All typical values specified at Vce = 5.0V and TA = 25° C unless
otherwise noted. .
Notes:
1. Operation above 85° C ambient is possible provided the
following conditions are met. The junction should not
exceed 125°C TJ and the case temperature (as measured
at pin 1 or the back of the display I should not exceed
100°CTe.
7-57
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - _.._---_._ .. __ . _ .__ ... -
rnA
V
V
0.8
Vee = 5.25V, Vil =_ ~.4V
R8J-c
/lOA
520
2.0
Vee = S.25V, VIIi = 2.4V
Vee - 4.75V, 10H '" -0.5 rnA, leoL - 0 rnA
Vee -4.75V.loL = 1.6 rnA, leol - a rnA
Vee - S.OV, VeOl - 3.5V, 17.5% OF
15 LEOs on per character, Ve = 2.4V
500
Fig.
2. The device should be derated linearly above 60° C at
22.2 mW/oC. This derating is based on a device mounted In a
socket having a thermal resistance from case to ambient at
25° C/W per device. See Figure 2 for powerderatings based on
a lower thermal resistance.
3. Maximum allowable dissipation Is derived from Vee = 5.25V, Ve
= 2.4V, VeOl = 3.5V20 LEOs on per character, 20% OF:
.
------
optical Characteristics
STANDARD RED HDSP-2490
Description
Peak Luminous Intensity per LED14,81
(Character Average)
Peak Wavelength
Dominant Wavelength[7]
Symbol
IvPeak
Test Conditions
Vee = 5.0V, VeOl = 3.5V
TI '" 25°CI61, VB'" 2.4V
Min,
Typ,'
220
APEAK
Ad
Max,
Units
Fig.
370
licd
3
655
639
nm
nm
YELLOW HDSP-2491
Description
Peak Luminous Intensity per LED14,81
(Character Average)
Peak Wavelength
Dominant Wavelengthl5 , 7}
Symbol
IvPeak
TesfC:ondjtlons
Vee'" 5.0V, VeOl = 3.5V
TI '" 250 Clel, Vs '" 2.4V
Unlls 1 Fig.
Min.
Typ.-
S50
1400
}LCd
I
563
585
nm
nm
I
I
APEAK
Ad
Max.
I
31
I
I
HIGH EFFICIENCY RED HDSP-2492
Description
Peak Luminous Intensity per LED14.81
(Character Average)
Peak Wavelength
Dominant Wavelength!?!
SymbOl
I.Peak
APEAK
Ad
Test Conditions
Vee'" 5.0V, VeOL '" 3.5V
TI = 25~CI61, Va = 2.4V
Min.
Typ,*
Units
Fig,
850
1530
}Lcd
3
635
626
nm
nm
,
Max.
HIGH PERFORMANCE GREEN HDSP-2493
Description
Peak Luminous Intensity per LED14.81
(Character Average)
Peak Wavelength
Dominant Wavelength [5,71
'All typical values specified at Vcc
otherwise noted.
~
5.0V and TA
Symbol
Ivp~ak
Test Conditions
Vee = 5.0V, VeOl "" 3.5V
T1 = 25" Cl61, VB = 2.4 V
Typo"
2410
Max.
568
574
APEAK
Ad
~
Min.
1280
25°C unless
I
Units
~
Fig.
3
nm
"Power dissipation per package with four characters illuminated.
Nol.s:
4. The characters are categorized for luminous intensity with the
intenSity category designated by a letter code on the bottom of
the package.
5. The HDSP-2491/-2493 are categorized for color with the color
category deSignated by a number code on the bottom of the
package.
6. T; refers to the initial case temperature of the device immediately prior to the light measurement.
7. Dominant wavelength Ad, is derived from the CIE chromaticity
diagram, and represents the single wavelength which defines
the color of the device.
8. The luminous sterance of the LED may be calculated using the
following relationships:
Lv (cd/m21 ~ Iv (Candelal/A (Metre)2
Lv (Footlambertsl ~ 7rlv (Candelal/A (Foot)2
A ~ 5.3 X 10.8 M2 ~ 5.8 x 10-7 (Footl2
Electrical Description
column 1 input is now enabled for an appropriate period of
time, T. A similar process is repeated for columns 2, 3, 4
and 5. If the time necessary to decode and load data into
the shift. register is t, then with 5 columns, each column of
. the display is operating at a duty factor of:
The HDSP-249X series of four character alphanumeric
displays have been designed to allow the user maximum
flexibility in interface electronics design. Each four character display module features DATA IN and DATA OUT
terminals arrayed for easy PC board interconnection. DATA
OUT represents the output of the 7th bit of digit number 4
shift register. Shift register clocking occurs on the high to
low transition of the clock input. The like columns of each
character ina display cluster are tied to a single pin.
Figure 5 is the block diagram for the displays. High true
data in the shift register enables the output current mirror
driver stage associated with each row of LEDs in the 5 x 7
diode array.
OF =_T_
., 5 (t +T)
The time frame, t + T, alloted to each column of the display is
generally chosen to provide the maximum duty factor consistent with the minimum refresh rate necessary to achieve a
flicker free display. For most strobed display systems, each
column of the display should be refreshed (turned on) at a
minimum rate of 100 times per second.
With columns to be addressed, this refresh rate then gives a
value for the time t + T of:
The TTL compatible VB input may either be tied to Vee for
maximum display intensity or pulse width modulated to
achieve intensity control and reduction in power consumption,
1/[5 x (100)J = 2 msec
In the normal mode of operation, input data for digit 4
column 1 is loaded into the 7 on-board shift register locations 1 through 7. Column 1 data for digits 3, 2 and 1 is
similarly shifted into the display shift register locations. The
7-58
If the device is operated at 3,0 MHz clock rate maximum, it is
possible to maintain t« T. For short display strings, the duty
factor will then approach 20%,
Forfurther applications information, refer to HP Application
Note 1016.
CLOCK
2.4V
SERIAL
DECODED
DATA
INPUT
CLOCK
0.4V
SERIAL
DECODED
DATA
OUTPUT
2.4V
DATA IN
O.4V
~
2.4V
DATA OUT
0.4V·-----+.J
P'''.meler
~
klOCk
CLOCK Aajc
tnit
Propagation
delay CLOCK
r-'PHL
-I
Condillon Min. Typ. MaJ[,
BLANKING
CONTROL
Units
3
MHz
125
ns
trill.
CI "" 15pr
Rl",,24KH
to DATA OUT
Figure 1. Switching Characteristics HDSP-2490/-2491/-2492/-2493
(TA = _20 0 C to +85 0 C)
S
COLUMN DRIVE INPUTS
Mechanical and
Thermal Considerations
Figure 5. Block Diagram of HDSP-2490/-2491/-2492/-2493
filter materials are provided in Figure 6. Additional information on filtering and contrast enhancement can be found in
HP Application Note 1015.
The HDSP-2490/-2491/-2492/-2493 are available in standard
ceramic dual-in-line packages. They are designed for plugging into sockets or soldering into PC boards. The packages
may be horizontally or vertically stacked for character arrays
of any desired size. The HDSP-2490/-2491/-2492/-2493 utilize a high output current IC to provide excellent readability
in bright ambient lighting. Full power operation (Vee =
5.25V, VB = 2.4V, VeOL = 3.5V) with worst case thermal
resistance from IC junction to ambient of 45 0 C/wattidevice
is possible up to ambient temperature of 60 0 C. For operation
above 60 0 C, the maximum device dissipation should be
derated linearly at 22.2 mW/ o C (see Figure 2). With an
improved thermal design, operation at higher ambient
temperatures without derating is possible. Please refer to
Application Note 1016 for further information.
Post solder cleaning may be accomplished using water or
Freon/alcohol mixtures formulated for vapor cleaning processing or Freon/alcohol mixtures formulated for room
temperature cleaning. Freon/alcohol vapor cleaning processing for up to 2 minutes in vapors at boiling is
permissible. Suggested solvents include Freon TF, Freon
TE. Genesolv DI-15, Genesolv DE-15, and water.
Power derating for this family of displays can be achieved in
several ways. The power supply voltage can be lowered to a
minimum of 4.75V. Column Input Voltage, VeOL, can be
decreased to the recommended minimum values of 2.4V for
the HDSP-2490 and 2.75V for the HDSP-2491/-2492/-2493.
Also, the average drive current can be decreased through
pulse width modulation of VB.
HDSP"2Q02
(HER)
Chequers
HDSP';2003
(HPGreeni
Panelgraphlc
Green 48
t07
Note: 1. Optically coated circular polarized filters. such as
Polaroid HNCP10.
Figure 6. Contrast Enhancement Filters
soo
4.0
1.8
~
S
~~
1,4
~~
1,2
~~
R'''i..I5{iW
+±
:i:
o. 6
Ef~
0.4
IW
I
3.0
1.0
~ ~ o.
""c:
~
1,6
~ "~~
I1JA "36 CIW
a
10
.:s,
HPSP·249·2491/·!49U·24$3
60
80
100
120
140
Figure 3. Relative Luminous Intensity
vs. Temperature
7-59
I
.
100
0
20
TJ -JUNCTION TEMPERATURE _ °C
J
HOSP·2400
z
,... Hosp·24a2
O. 2
0
400
ffi
"
2.0
POlarOid
HNCP10·(;lass
Marl..s polarized
MPC-0201-2-22
Polaroid
HNCP11)·Gla$!iMarks PolariZed
MPC·0101-5--12
112
CheQuers Gre-en
The HDSP-2490/-2491/-2492/-2493 displays have glass
windows. A front panel contrast enhancement filter is desirable in most actual display applications. Some suggested
2.0
Chequer$ Grey
105
Panefgr"phlC
AubyRed
"""
1.0
2.0
3.0
4.0
VCOL - COLUMN VOLTAGE - VOLTS
Figure 4. Peak Column Current vs.
Column Voltage
S.O
SMART DISPLAY
BOARD FAMILY
F/idl HEWLETT
II.!~ PACKARD
16 AND 32 CHARACTER
2.85 mm (0.112) AND 4.1 mm (0.16)
HDSP~6621
HDSP-6624
Features
• FULLY ASSEMBLED
• FUNCTIONALLY TESTED
• INCLUDE ON-BOARD CHARACTER
GENERATOR, MEMORY, DRIVER, DECODER,
MULTIPLEX, AND BUFFER CIRCUITRY
• 64 ASCII CHARACTER SET
• ALL DIGITS ALIGNED AND MATCHED
FOR INTENSITY
• 2.85 mm (0.112) or 4.1 mm (0.16)
CHARACTER HEIGHT
• VIEWING ANGLE GREATER THAN ±40o
• SINGLE 5 V POWER SUPPLY
• FULL TTL COMPATIBILITY
Description
The HDSP-6621 and HDSP-6624 smart display systems are
board assemblies based on the HPDL-1414 and HPDL-2416
displays. The HDSP-6621 consists of four HPDL-1414
displays (16 characters) plus a decoder and interface buffer
on a single printed circuit board. The HDSP-6624 consists
of eight HPDL-2416 displays (32 characters) plus a decoder
and interface buffers on a single printed circuit board. Each
display provides its own character memory, 64 character
ASCII decoder ROM, and refresh circuitry necessary to
synchronize the decoding and driving of four 17 segment
red LEDs. The HDSP-6624 has the additional features of a
cursor (all dots on) or a blanking (flashing) function. The
characters in each system are aligned and matched for
intensity.
The HDSP-662X family can be configured in custom string
lengths, and the HDSP-6621 is available without a connector. Contact your local Hewlett-Packard field sales
representative with your requirements.
Typical Applications
• COMPUTER PERIPHERALS
• TELECOMMUNICATIONS
• INDUSTRIAL EQUIPMENT
• INSTRUMENTS
Absolute Maximum Ratings
Supply Voltage, Vee to Ground .............. -0.3 to 7.0 V
Input Voltage, Any Pin to Ground ............. -0.3 to Vee
Free Air Operating Temperature Range ....... DOC to 7DoC
Storage Temperature ..................... -4DoC to 85°C
7-60
Package Dimensions
l
°L
HDSP-6621
......... 7.1110.281
PIN
FUNCTION
1
2
3
Ao DIGIT SElECT
Al DrGIT SElECT
04 DATA INPUT
3.175
t
92.08 (3.625}
~t;
o
J13
0
0
0
0
0
o
o
0
0
IL ~~
;--
<==)
I
ffi-r==-
--e:::::J-
12.k5
J
~- ~5}30.4
~
'"
;#
11,20
...
L---II
..-l
'K
'-fo.~}--l
10.82}
3.0 10.11B) DIA 4
PLC~
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Do DATA INPUT (LSB)
OJ DATA INPUT
02 DATA INPUT
GND
A3 DIGIT SELECT
WRWRITE
A2 DIGIT SELECT
De DATA INPUT (MSB)
01 DATA INPUT
05 DATA INPUT
Vee
I.
NOTES,
1. TOLE RANCES; HOLES, 0.254 (0.011
ALL OTHERS, 0.50810.021
2. DIME NSIONS IN MILLIMETRES {INCHES}
56.3912.22)
package Dimensions
•
HDSP-6624
1---------------223.5218.80)--------------0.1
r<----------------215.80 (8.50)---------------1
1-------114,30 (4.501-------1
3.91 10.1541 DIA. 8 PLACES
00 NOT USE FOR MOUNTING
6,80 (0.261
L
II
A
CONNECTOR
I
CONNECTOR Jl
MONNECTOR
PIN 1~
CONNECTOR J2
Jl
I
V-PIN 2
"
CONNECTOR
Jl
"J
J
ll
BERG
3M
66900-026
3399-6000
J2
POWER
MOLEX
09-50-7041 HOUSING
08-50-0105 TERMINAL
PIN
1
2
3
"'-PIN 26
NOTES
1, TO !.fRANCES to.508 (D.02) t 0.264 (0,010)
2. SHU NT BAR PROVIDED WITH THE UNIT IS AMP PiN 531220-3
J2
3. DIM ENSIONS IN MII.LIMETRES (INCHES)
7-61
RECOMMENDED
MATING CONNECTOR
FUNCTION
CONTROL DATA
•
:~
PIN 25
I
J1
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
1
2
FUNCTION
A2 ADDRESS LINE
DE4 DISPLAY ENABLE
~DDRESSLINE
DE3 DISPLAY ENABLE
A4 ADDRESS LINE
DE, DISPLAY ENABLE
NO CONNECTION
DE2 DISPLAY ENABLE
DO DATA LINE
NO CONNECTION
D1DATALlNE
NO CONNECTION
02 DATA LINE
G'ND
Vee
PIN
I.
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
2.
25
26
3
•
FUNCTION
NO CONNECTION
06 DATA LINE
NO CONNECTION
04 DATA LINE
CUE CURSOR ENABLE
Os DATA LINE
CURSOR SElECT
Ao ADDRESS LINE
co
erR
CLEAR
A, ADDRESS LINE
WRWRITE
03 DATA LINE
BLBLANKING
Vee
GND
Recommended operating Conditions
Symbol
Min.
Nom.
Supply Voltage
Vee
4.75
5.0
5.25
V
Input Voltage High
V'H
VIL
2.0
Vee + 0.3
V
GND - 0.3
0.8
V
Parameter
Input Voltage Low
Electrical Characteristics
Parameter
Max,
Units
Over Operating Temperature Range
HDSP-6621
Max,
1}tp.
HDSP-6624
Typ.
Max,
315
720
Icc AU digits on (10 seg/digit)l1)
480
1200
1040
Icc Cursorl2. 3J (HDSP-6624 only)
1600
40
Icc Blank
30
Units
Test Conditions
mA
Vee ~ 5.0V
mA
Vee=5.25V
mA
Vee" 5.0V
mA
Vee = 5.25 V
mA
Vee" 5.0V
75
80
mA
Vee'" 5.25V
'IH with pullup
NA
-2.85
mA
Vee" 5.25 V, VIH ~ 2.4 V
IlL with pullup
NA
-4.85
mA
Vee" 5.25 V, V'L =0.4 V
IIH with pulldown
NA
2.4
mA
Vee" 5.25 V, VIH " 2.4 V
IlL with pulldown
NA
0.4
mA
Vee ~ 5.25 V, VIL " 0.4 V
IIH without resistor
40
40
J1.A
Vee" 5.25 V, VIH " 2.4 V
IlL without resistor
-1.6
-1.6
mA
Vee ~ 5.25 V, VIL '" 0.4 V
Notes:
1. "%" illuminated in all locations.
2. Cursor character is sixteen segments and DP on.
3. Cursor operates continuously over operating temperature range.
optical Characteristics
Symbol
Parameter
Peak Luminous Intensity per digit.
8 segments on (character average)
HDSP-6624
HDSP-6621
Peak Wavelength
Dominant Wavelength
011 Axis Viewing Angle
Digit Size
IvPeak
Min.
Typ.
0.5
1.25
0.4
1.0
Units
Test Condition
mcd
Vee'" 5.0 V
in all digits
APeak
655
nm
Ad
640
nm
HDSP-6624
±50
HDSP-6621
±40
HDSP-6624
2.85
HDSP-6621
4.1
deg.
mm
7-62
"*"
illuminated
_ .. _ - - - - - -
._--_._._-
-----_ .. -
AC Timing Characteristics
--------
Over Operating Temperature Range
HDSP.6621
Reference
Number
Parameter
HDSP·6624
Symbol
25"C
Min.
70·C
Min.
25"C
Min.
70"C
Min.
Units
IACC
180
220
350
480
ns
lAS
115
150
285
410
ns
65
70
65
70
ns
1
Access Time
2
Address Setup1!j'llFile
3
Address Hold Time
tAH
4
Write Delay Time
two
15
20
115
180
5
Write Time
tw
100
130
170
230
6
Data Setup Time
......... tos
80
100
160
220
ns
7
Data Hold Time
tDH
65
70
65
70
ns
8
Display Enable Hold Time
toes
N/A
N/A
65
70
ns
9
Display Enable Setup Time
IDEH
N/A
N/A
285
410
ns
Clear Time
teLR
3.5
4.0
3.5
4.0
ms
310
270
310
270
Hz
Refresh Rate
I
ns
ns
TIMING DIAGRAM FOR THE HDSP-6621 DISPLAY SYSTEM
-!.,
r--~
9
DE, -DE4
V
\
2.av
a.BV
i--®-------
6
~
K
~
2.av
a.BV
5
\
2.av
a.BV
..,v
I-®~
-0----
~
DO -06
K
2.av
a.BV
TIMING DIAGRAM FOR THE HDSP-6624 DISPLAY SYSTEM
1
r------
14LSI39
---!:c ill
.---2.
In
wR
IV2
3 IA
AJ - IB
WI
IYO
A2
7
6
5
4
Figure 1. Circuli Diagram for Ihe HDSP·6621
Display Interface
HDSP-6621
Figure 1 shows the circuit diagram for the HDSP-662l
Information is transferred to the display on a 4 pin connector. The following lines are available to the user to pass
data to the display.
For a detailed explanation of the function of the pins see
the HPDL-1414 data sheet. The HDSP-6621 has 2 Address
lines which are not on the HPDL-1414.
Data lines (0 0-06)
(pins 3-6, 11-13)
ASCII data is entered into the display on the Data lines.
Address lines (Ao-A3)
(pins 1-3, 8)
Each location In memory has a distinct address, Address inputs enable the designer
to select a specific location in memory to store data. Address 0000 accesses the far
right location and address 1111 accesses the far left location.
Write line (WR)
(pin9)
Data is written into the display when the display write line is low and the display has
been selected.
7-64
J2
9 ....... 10
26
U2
3 ..... 2
15
.....U2
1~'2
.....U2
7 ...... 6
'9
H
..... U2
9 ....... 10
.....U3
25
13
7..J'o.". 6
......U3
n
5 ..... 4
U3
3 ....... 2
-voo
HPDl~416~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Jio }.1}."}.!!.1
ltd
II I
."
.c
c:
iil
!"
0
a§:
c
-.J
1
ffi
iii"
';
3
g
.
_ _......_..:.'4'1~
21
Vu3
1~12
23
:;:
24
:I:
-20
C
......U3
~8
1:
""""'Ul
+5V
"""-UT
14~15
CU
..... U2
In
l'
'"'"
1R
I CUE
....
'"
22
I
CLR
DEI
DE2
4
I DE3
5 ..... 4
~
+5V
......U2
' .....
13",
2
12
~. II
....Ul
II
II
II
II
II
I:
DE4~
74L$42
H
A,
-b
-
15 ..
14 B
A3
13 C
A,
ALL RESISTORS'" 1 KU
Ul '" 74lS14
L.....E
0
U2, U3 '" Me 14050
SOLIO STATE
DISPLAYS
Display Interface
HDSP-6624
Figure 2 shows the circuit diagram for the HDSP-6624.
Information is transferred to the display on a 26 pin connector. The following lines are available to the user to pass
data to the display.
For a detailed explanation of the function of the pins see
the HPDl-2416 Data Sheet. The HDSP-6624 has four
display enable inputs and 3 address lines which are not on
the HPDl-2416.
Data lines (Do-D6)
(J2 pins 11, 13, 15, 17, 19, 25)
ASCII data or cursor data is entered into the display on the data lines.
Address lines (Ao-A4)
(J2 pins 1, 3, 5, 21, 23)
Each location in memory has a distinct address. Address inputs enable the designer
to select a specific location in memory to store data. Address 00000 accesses the far
right location. Address 11111 accesses the far left location.
Display Enables (DE,-DE4)
(J2 pins 2, 4, 6, 8)
The user can connect anyone of the four Display Enable inputs to all of the CE2
inputs of the HPDl-2416 displays. All that is required is to short the appropriate pins
on the display board with the shorting plug. This allows the user to display the same
character data on two or more systems or to display different data on up to four
display boards.
DE,
DE2
DE3
DE4
=shorting A and B
=shorting Band C
=shorting D and E
=shorting E and F or F and G
Shorting G and H will bypass DE,-DE 4 and enable the device.
Write line (WR)
(J2 pin 24)
Data is written into the display when the Write line is low and the display ha.s been
selected.
Cursor Select line (CU)
(J2 pin 20)
This. input is used to de.termine whether data is stored in ASCII memory or Cursor
memory. (1 =ASCII, a =Cursor)
Cursor Enable line (CUE)
(J2 pin 18)
This input is used to determine whether. Cursor data is displayed. (1
a ~ ASCII)
Blanking input (Bl)
(J2 pin 26)
The Blanking input can be used to create a flashing display or to blank the display
without clearing the ASCII memory. This input inhibits the IC segment drivers and
the display Clear function.
Clear input (ClR)
(J2 pin 22)
ASCII data will be removed from the ASCII Memory after the Clear input has been
held at a logic low for 4 ms. The Cursor data is unaffected by the Clear input.
= Cursor,
using. the Display Interface
Hewlett-Packard's Smart Display Systems can be treated
as a block of RAM locations, whose purpose is to store and
display 64 character .ASCII data using a sixteen-segment
character font as shown in Figure 3. To load data into the
display system, the host .system has. to supply the ASCII
1
0
1
0
o ..
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
: 0
1
1
. 1
3
4
5
6
7
D3
D2
Dl
Do
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
HEX
0
1
2
0
2
(space)
o 1. 1
3
1 0
0
4
1 0
1
5
BITS
D6 DS 04
o
1
data" the address and the proper control signals and the
. character will be stored in the location selected. See the
timing diagram for the necessary timing and signal
sequence.
,
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
o·
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
% & / < ) *- + I
0 I 2 j Y 5 5 1 8 g -- -/ L
OJ R B [ lJ E F G H I J K L
P Q R 5 T U V WX Y Z [ \
I
"
:H
gj
Figure 3. HDSP-6621/6624 ASCII Character Set
7-66
-
/
-- ~ ?
MN 0
J
/\
-
Design Considerations
Solvents containing alcohols, ketones and halogenated
hydrocarbons will attack the nylon lens of the displays and
should be avoided.
These display systems use CMOS components that may be
damaged by electrostatic discharge. These display systems
can be safely handled by the PC board edges. To avoid
static damage use standard CMOS handling procedures.
For additional information on handling and cleaning please
refer to the HPDL-1414 and HPDL-2416 data sheets and
Application Note 1026.
Cleaning may be performed with a solvent or aqueous
process. The following solvents may be used without
causing damage to the system:
Allied Chemical Genesolv DES
Baron Blakeslee Blaco-tron TES
DuPont Freon TE
7-67
rli~ HEWLETT
a=~ PACKARD
5 x 7 DOT MATRIX
ALPHANUMERIC
DISPLAY SYSTEM
HDSP-2416
HQSP-2424
HOSP- 2432
HDSP-2440
HOSP-2410
HQSP-2471
HllSp-2472
Features
• COMPLETE ALPHANUMERIC DISPLAY SYSTEM
UTILIZING THE HDSP-2000 DISPLAY
• CHOICE OF 64, 128, OR USER DEFINED ASCII
CHARACTER SET
• CHOICE OF 16, 24, 32, or 40 ELEMENT
DISPLAY PANEL
• MULTIPLE DATA ENTRY FORMATSLeft, Right, RAM, or Block Entry
• EDITING FEATURES THAT INCLUDE CURSOR,
BACKSPACE, FORWARDSPACE, INSERT,
DELETE, AND CLEAR
• DATA OUTPUT CAPABILITY
• SINGLE 5.0 VOLT POWER SUPPLY
Typical Applications
• TTL COMPATIBLE
CI
• EASILY INTERFACED TO A KEYBOARD OR
A MICROPROCESSOR
o
CI
CI
Description
The HDSP-24XX series of alphanumeric display systems
provides the user with a completely supported 5 x 7 dot
matrix display panel. These products free the user's
system from display maintenance and minimize the
interaction normally required for alphanumeric displays.
Each alphanumeric display system is composed of two
component parts:
DATA ENTRY TERMINALS
INSTRUMENTATION
BUSINESS EQUIPMENT
COMPUTER PERIPHERALS
PART NUMBER
1. An alphanumeric display controller which consists of a
preprogrammed microprocessor plus associated logic,
which provides decode, memory, and drive signals
necessary to properly interface a user's system to an
HDSP-2000 display. In addition to these basic display
support operations, the controller accepts data in any
of four data entry formats and incorporates several
powerful editing routines.
2. A display panel which consists of HDSP-2000 displays
matched for luminous intensity and mounted on a P.C.
board designed to have low thermal resistance.
These alphanumeric display systems are also available in
high efficiency red, yellow, and green. In addition, they are
available using the HDSP-2300 or HDSP-2490 series displays to form display systems with larger characters (5.0
mm and 6.9 mm, respectively). Contact your local HP sales
office for more information.
7-68
DESCRIPTION
Display Boards
HDSP-2416
Single-llne 16 character display panel
utifizing the HDSP-2000 display
HDSP-2424
Single-line 24 character display panel
utilizing the HDSP-2000 display
HDSP-2432
Single-line 32 character display panel
utilizing the HDSP-2000 display
HDSP-2440
Single-llne 40 character display panel
utilizing the HDSP-2000 display
Controller Boards
HDSP·2470
HDSP·2000 display interface Incorporating
a 64 character ASOtl decoder
HDSP-2471
HDSP-2000 display interface Incorporating
a 128 character ASCn decoder
HDSP-2472
HDSP-2000 dIsplay Interface without
ASCII decoder. Instead. a 24 pin socket
Is provided to accept a custom 128 character set from a user programmed 1 K x 8
PROM.
When ordering, specify one each of the Controlier Board and the
Display Board for each complete system.
"~-----.-----------------
HDSP-2470/-2471/-2472
Recommended
Operating Conditions
Absolute Maximum Ratings
Vee •.....................•............ -0.5V to 6.0V
Parameter
Operating Temperature Range,
Ambient (TA) ....................... O·C to 70·C
Supply Voltage
Storage Temperature Range (Ts) .... -55·C to 100·C
Data Out
Voltage Applied to any Input or Output .. -0.5V to 6.0V
Ready, Data Valid,
Column On, Display
Data
IsoUReE Continuous for any Column
Driver .......... 5.0 Amps (60 sec. max. duration)
Clock
Column1-5
Symbol
Min.
Max.
Vee
4.75
5.25
V
IOL
0.4
mA
IOH
-20
p.A
IOL
1.6
mA
IOH
-40
p.A
Units
IOL
10.0
mA
IOH
-1.0
mA
ISOUReE
-5.0
A
Electrical Characteristics Over operating Temperature Range
(Unless otherwise specified)
Symbol
Parameter
Supply Currentl1 ]
Min.
Typ.
Input Threshold High (except Reset)
Max.
400
Icc
Units
Conditions
mA Vee = 5.25V Column On and All
Outputs Open
± .25V
VIH
2.0
V
Vee;' 5.0V
VIH
3.0
V
Vee = 5.0V ± .25V
V
Vee = 5.0V
V
IOH =·-20p.A
Vee = 4.75V
V
IOL- O.4mA
Vee = 4.75V
V
IOH = -1000p.A
Vee = 4.75V
0.5
V
IOL= 10.0mA
Vee =4.75V
V
IOH - -40p.A
Vee = 4.75V
VOL
0.5
V
IOL= 1.6mA
Vee =4.75V
Input Current,(31 All Inputs Except
Reset, Chip Select, 01
ItH
-0.3
IlL
-0.6
mA VIL - O.SV
Vee =5.25V
Reset Input Current
hH
-0.3
mA VIH=3.0V
Vee == 5.25V
-0.6
mA
VIL - O.SV
Vee=5.25V
+10
p.A
0< VI < Vee
V
lOUT = -S.OA
Input Threshold High -
Reset l2 ]
Input Threshold Low -
All Inputs
Data Out Voltage
0.8
VIL
VOHData
2.4
VOLData
Clock Output Voltage
Ready, Display Data, Data Valid,
Column on Output Voltage
VOHClk
0.5
2.4
VOLClk
VOH
2.4
IlL
Chip Select, 01 Input Current
Column Output Voltage
II
-10
VOLCOL
2.6
3.2
± .25V
mA VIH = 2.4V
Vee == 5.25V
Vee -S.OOV
NOTES:
1. See Figure 11 for total system supply current.
2. External reset may be initiated by grounding Reset with either a switch or open collector TTL gate for a minimum timeef
50ms. For Power On Reset to function properly, Vee power supply'should turn on at a rate> 100V/s.
3. Momentary peak surge currents may exist on these lines. However, these momentary currents will not interfere with
proper operation of the HDSP-2470/1!2.
7-69
HDSP-2416/-2424/-2432/-2440
Recommended
operating Conditions
Absolute Maximum Ratings
Supply Voltage Vee to Ground ..•...... -0.5V to 6.0V
Parameter
Inputs, Data Out and VB
Supply Voltage
Vee
4.75
Column Input
Voltage, Column On
VeoL
2.6
Setup Time
tSETUP
70
45
Hold Time
tHoLD
30
0
............... -0.5V to Vee
Column Input Voltage, VeOL
.........
-0.5V to +6.0V
Free Air Operating Temperature
Range, TAlll ....................... O°C to +55°C
Storage Temperature Range, Ts •... -55°C to +100°C
Symbol Min. Norm. Max. Units
5.0
5.25
V
ns
ns
ns
tW(eLOeK) 75
Width of Clock
Clock Frequency
feLoeK
Clock Transition
Time
tTHL
Free Air Operating(1)
Temperature Range
0
0
TA
V
3
MHz
200
ns
55
·C
Electrical Characteristics Over operating Temperature Range
(Unless otherwise specified)
Parameter
Symbol
Min.
Supply Current
Typ."
Max.
45n
60n1 2)
73n
95n
Icc
1.5n
leOL
Column Current at any Column Input
335n
leOL
Peak Luminous Intensity per LED
(Character Average)
Iv PEAK
105
2.0
410n
VB,Clock or Data Input Threshold High
VIH
VIL
0.8
Input Current Logical 1
mA Vee = VeOL = 5.25V VB = OAV
All SR Stages =
Logical 1
VB = 2.4V
mA
V
V
ilH
80
}.lA
Data In
ItH
40
}.lA
Va, Clock
ilL
-500
-800
}.lA
ilL
-250
-400
}.lA
Po
0.66n
VB, Clock
Data In
Power Dissipation Per Board l41
'All typical values specified at Vec = 5.0V and TA
=
Conditions
mA Vee"" 5.25V
Va'" OAV
VeLoeK=VoATA'=2.4V
mA All SR Stages =
VB = 2.4V
Logical 1
Vee = 5.0V. VeOL = 3.5V
}.lCd T 1= 25°C1 3 1, VB = 2.4V
200
VB,Clock or Data Input Threshold Low
Input Current Logical 0
Units
W
Vee
= VeOL = 4.75V
Vee = 5.25V, VIH = 2.4V
Vee = 5.25V, VIL = O.4V
=
Vee 5.0V, VCOL = 2.6V
15 LED's on per Character,
VB = 2.4V
25°C unless otherwise noted.
NOTES:
1. Operation above 55° C (70° C MAX) may be. aC.hieved by the use of forced air (150 fpm normal to component side of
HDSP-247X controller board at sea level). Operation down to _20° C is possible in applications that do not require the
use of HDSP-2470/-2471/-2472 controller boards.
2. n = number of HDSP-2000 packages
HDSP-2416 n = 4
HDSP-2424 n = 6
HDSP-2432 n = 8
HDSP-2440 n = 10
3. Tj refers to initial case temperature immediately prior to the light measurement.
4. Power dissipation with all characters illuminated.
7-70
System Overview
The HDSP-2470/-2471/-2472 Alphanumeric Display
Controllers provide the interface between any ASCII
based Alphanumeric System and the HDSP-2000
Alphanumeric Display. ASCII data is loaded into the
system by means of anyone of four data entry modes Left, Right, RAM or Block Entry. This ASCII data is stored
in the internal RAM memory of the system. The1system
refreshes HDSP-2000 displays from 4 to 48 characters
with the decoded data.
The user interfaces to any of the systems through eight
DATA IN inputs, five ADDRESS inputs (RAM mode), a
CHIP SELECT input, RESET input, seven DATA OUT
outputs, a READY output, DATA VALID output, and a
COLUMN ON output. A low level on the RESET input
clears the display and initializes the system. A low level on
the CHIP SELECT input causes the system to load data
from the DATA IN and ADDRESS inputs into the system.
The controller outputs a status word, cursor address and
32 ASCII data characters through the DATA OUT outputs
and DATA VALID output during the time the system is
waiting to refresh the next column of the display. The
COLUMN ON output can be used to synchronize the
DATA OUT function. A block diagram for the HDSP2470/-2471/-2472 systems is shown in Figure 1.
DATA OUT
DATA VALID
COLUMN ON
VB, DISPLAY
BLANKING
f---
r-
-c
3
RAM ADDRESS
~
DATA IN
---+-
CHIP SELECT
-C
READY
r~:t ;..,
7
DISPLAY
CONTROLLER
1110
DECODER
+
+
DRIVE
TRANS
COLUMN 1-5
I
I
I
L __ _...J
I
I
I
-
7
-
PISD
DISPLAY DATA
CLOCK
-CHARACTER GENERATOR FOR HDSp·2471.
SOCKET FOR lK X8 PROM FOR HDSP·2472.
Figure 1. Block Diagram for the HDSP-2470/-2471/-2472 Alphanumeric Display Controller.
The system interfaces to the HDSP-2000 display through
five COLUMN outputs, a CLOCK output, DISPLAY DATA
output, and the COLUMN ON output. The user should
connect DISPLAY DATA to DATA IN of the leftmost
HDSP-2000 cluster and cascade DATA OUT to DATA IN
of all HDSP-2000 clusters. COLUMN outputs from the
system are connected to the COLUMN inputs of all HDSP2000 clusters. The HDSP-24XX Series display boards are
deSigned to interconnect directly with the HDSP-247X
Series display controllers. The COLUMN outputs can
source enough current to drive up to 48 characters of the
HDSP-2000 display. Pulse width modulation of display
luminous intenSity can be provided by connecting
COLUMN ON to the input of a monostable multivibrator
and the output of the monostable multivibrator to the VB
inputs of the HDSP-2000 displays. The system is designed
to refresh the display at a fixed refresh rate of 100 Hz.
COLUMN ON time is optimized for each display length in
order to maximize light output as shown in Figure 2.
20
I"l:::
18
w
::;;
;::
z
z::;;
'"
16
~
~
,HDSP.2471/.2472
" N'.
0
14
HDSP-2470"",
:::l
....
0
,."
"-
12
" i"-"'"
10
o
o
4
6
12 16 20 24 26 32 36 40 44 46
DISPLAY LENGTH
Figure 2. Column on Time vs. Display Length for the
HDSP-2470/-2471/-2472 Alphanumeric Display Controller.
7-71
Control Mode/Data Entry
User Interface to the HDSP-247X Series controller is via an
8 bit word which provides to the controller either a control
w'ordorstandardASCII data input. In addition tothis user
provided 8 bit word, two additional control lines, CHIP
SELECT and READV, allow easily generated "handshake"
Signals for iriterface pLirposes.
CONTROL
WORD: D7D6DSD4D3D2D1DO
111x xl-Iv v v vi
A logic low applied to the CHIP SELECT input (minimum
six microseconds) causes the controller to read the 8
DATA IN lines and determine whether a control word or
ASCII. data word
present, as determined by the logic
state of the 11)0st significant bit (07). If the controller
detects a logic high at 07, the state of 06-00 will define the
data entry mode and the number of alphanumeric
characters to be displayed.
The 8 bit control data word format is outlined in Figure 3.
For the control word (07 high), bits 06 and 05 define the
selected data entry mode (Left entry, Rightentry, etc.) and
bits 03 to Do define display length. Bit 04 is ignored.
CLEAR. OFFSCREEN CURSOR
DISPLAV LENGTH:
4 DIGITS
8
12
16
20
24
0 0
0 1
001 0
001 1
o1 0 0
o1 0 1
o1 1 0
011 1
1 000
100 1
101 0
1 0 1 1
is
Control word inputs are first checked to verify that the
control word is valid. The system ignores display lengths
greater than 1011 for left block or right, or 0111 for RAM. If
the word is valid, the present state-next state table shown
in Figure 4 is utilized to determine whether or not to clear
the display. For display lengths of up to 32 characters,
RAM entry can be used as a powerful editing tool, or can
be used to preload the cursor. With other transitions, the
internal data memory is cleared.
VVVV
o0
o0
28
32"
36
40
"
44
48
"maximum for RAM data entry mode
xX
o0
o1
1 0
1 1
DATA ENTRV MODES
RAM DATA ENTRV
LEFT DATA ENTRV
RIGHT DATA ENTRV
BLOCK DATA ENTRV
Figure 3. Control Word Format for the HDSP-2470/-2471/-2472
Alphanumeric Display Controller.
= 30,,,
(1)
RAM ENTRY MODE IS VALID FOR DISPLAYS OF
32 CHARACTERS OR LESS IN LENGTH.
(2)
FOLLOWING A TRANSITION FROM RAM TO
BLOCK. WHEN THE CURSOR ADDRESS IS 48
(30,.) DURING THE TRANSITION. THE FIRST
VALID ASCII CHARACTER WILL BE IGNORED
AND THE SECOND VALID ASCII CHARACTER
WILL BE LOADED IN THE LEFT· MOST DISPLAY
LOCATION.
WHERE BEGIN IS DEFINED AS FOLLOWS:
DISPLAY
~
4
8
12
16
20
24
28
32
36
40
44
4B
CLEAR.
BLINKING
CURSOR = BEGIN
CLEAR, INVISIBLE
CURSOR' BEGIN
CURSOR ADDRESS
OF BEGIN
2C, •• 44,0
28, •• 4010
24, •• 3610
20, •• 32,0
1C, •• 28,0
18, •• 24,0
14, •• 2010
10,.,16,0
OC, •• 12,0
08 16 • 8 10
0416 • 410
00,.
Figure 4. Present.State-Next State Diagram for the HDSP-2470/-2471/-2472 Alphanumeric Display Controller.
7-72
(space) to 5F16 Wl and ignores all ASCII characters
outside this subset with the exception of those characters
defined as display commands. These display commands
are shown in Figure 5. Displayed character sets for the
HDSP-2470/-2471 systems are shown in Figure 6.
If 07 is a logic low when the DATA IN lines are read, the
controller will interpret 06-00 as standard ASCII data to be
stored, decoded and displayed. The system accepts seven
bit ASCII for all three versions. However, the HDSP-2470
system displays only the 64 character subset [2016
DATA WORD:
ASCII ASSIGNMENT
LF
BS
HT
US
DEL
07
10
I
06 05 04
A
A
A
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
0 3 O2 0 1 DO
A
A
A
AI
DISPLAY COMMAND
I~';"," 1
CLEAR
Right Entry
BACKSPACE CURSOR
Mode
FORWARDSPACE CURSOR
INSERT CHARACTER
DELETE CHARACTER
Valid in
Left Entry
Modo
Figure 5. Display Commands lor the HDSP-2470/-2471/-2472 Alphanumeric Display Controller.
128 CHARACTER ASCII SET
(HDSP'2471 )
64 CHARACTER ASCII SUBSET
(H DSP·2470)
'00'
DOlO
0011
0100
0101
0110
0111
'00'
'00'
1010
1011
1100
1101
11'0
"11
-DISPLAV COMMANDS WHEN USED IN LEFT ENTRY
+DISPLAV COMMANDS WHEN USED IN RIGHT ENTRY
Figure 6. Display Font lor the HDSP-2470 (64 Character ASCII Subset), and HDSP-2471 (128 Character ASCII Set) Alphanumeric
Display Controller.
7-73
Regardless of whether a control word or ASCII data word
is presented by the user, a READY signal is generated by
the controller after the input word is processed. this
READY signal .goes low for 251's and upon a positive
transition, a new CHIP SELECT may be accepted by the
controller. Data Entry Timing is shown in Figure 7.
DATA ENTRY TIMING
II
RAM ADDRESS
ADDRESS HOLD TIME
.,
1--10", MAX.
E
="M'l _________________________...
CHIPSELECT
DATA HOLD TIME--------=t
lL~I
___
--~I._~
6"_"_MI_N'__
~
___ _
DATA ENTRY TIME
---------.j.11--2.5"'.
II
READY
CELECT=O
I AFTER THIS TIME.
CONTROLLER WILL
ENTER NEXT CHARACTER.
j.-25",--l
MAXIMUM DATA ENTRY TIMES OVER OPERATING TEMPERATURE RANGE
FUNCTION
DATA ENTRY MODE
HDSP·
DATA HOLD TIME"
DATA
ENTRY
BACK
SPACE
CLEAR
FORWARD
SPACE
DELETE
INSERT
205!,s
225!,s
725!,s
745!,s
725!,s
735!,s
LEFT (2471/2)
LEFT (2470)
135!,s
150!,s
235!,s
245!,s
1951's
215!,s
505!,s
530!,s
RIGHT (2471/2)
RIGHT (2470)
85!,s
1051's
480!,s
490!,s
470!,s
490!,s
465!,s
485!"
120!'s' ,
130!'s'"
RAM (2471/2)
RAM (2470)
55!,s
551's
BLOCK (2471/2)
BLOCK (2470)
55!,s
55!,s
120!,s
130!,s
LOAD CONTROL (2471/2)
LOAD CONTROL (2470)
50!,s
50!,s
505!,s
505!,s
190!,s
200!,s
(155!,s FOR RIGHTMOST CHARACTER)
(165!,s FOR RIGHTMOST CHARACTER)
"Minimum time that data inputs must remain valid after Chip Select goes low.
"'Minimum time that RAM address inputs must remain valid after Chip Select goes low.
Figure 7. Data Entry Timing and Data Entry Times for the HDSP-2470/-2471/-2472 Alphanumeric Display Controller.
7-74
Left Entry Mode
With Left entry, characters are entered in typewriter
fashion, i.e., to the right of all previous characters. Left
entry uses a blinking cursor to indicate the location where
the next character is to be entered. CLEAR loads the
display with spaces and resets the cursor to the leftmost
display location. BACKSPACE and FORWARDSPACE
move the cursor without changing the character string.
Thus, the user can backspace to the character" to be
edited, enter a character and then forward space the
cursor. The DELETE function deletes the displayed
character at the cursor location and then shifts the
character string following the cursor one location to the
left to fill the void of the deleted character. The INSERT
CHARACTER sets a flag inside the system that causes
subsequent ASCII characters to be inserted to the left of
the character at the cursor location. As new characters are
entered, the cursor, the character at the cursor, and all
characters to the right of the cursor are shifted one
location to the right. The INSERT function is terminated
by a second INSERT CHARACTER, or by BACKSPACE,
FORWARDSPACE, CLEAR or DELETE. In Left entry
mode, after the display is filled, the system ignores all
characters except BACKSPACE and CLEAR. The system
allows the cursor to be positioned "only in the region
between the leftmost display character and immediately
to the right (offscreen) of the rightmost display character.
Right Entry Mode
In Right entry mode, characters are entered at the right
hand side of the display and shifted to the left as new
characters are entered. In this mode,the system stores 48
ASCII characters,although only the last characters
entered are displayed. CLEAR loads the display with
spaces. BACKSPACE shifts the display one location to the
right, deleting the last character entered and displaying
the next character in the 48 character buffer. Right entry
mode is a simple means to implement the walking or
"Times-Square" display. FORWARDSPACE, INSERT,
and DELETE have character assignments in this mode
since they are not treated as editing characters. In this
mode, the cursor is located immediately to the right
(offscreen) of the rightmost displayed character.
Block Entry Mode
Block entry allows the fastest data entry rate of all four
modes. In this mode, characters are loaded from left to
right as with Left entry. However, with Block entry, after
the display is completely loaded, the next ASCII character
is loaded in the leftmost display location, replacing the
previous displayed character. While Block entry has a
nonvisible cursor, the cursor is always loaded with the
address of the next character to be entered. I n this entry
mode, the system can" display the complete 128 character
ASCII set. The display can be cleared and the cursor reset
to the leftmost display location by loading in a new
BLOCK control word.
RAM Entry Mode,
In RAM entry, ASCII characters are loaded at the address
specified by the five bit RAM address. Dueto the limitation
of only five address lines, RAM data entry is allowed only
7-75
for displays less than or equal to 32 characters.
Regardless of display length, address 00 is the leftmost
display character. Out of range RAM addresses are
ignored. While RAM entry has a non-visible cursor, the
cursor is always preloaded with the address to the right of
the last character entered. This allows the cursor to be
preloaded with an address prior to gOing into any other
entry mode. In RAM entry, the system can display the
complete 128 character ASCII set because it does not
interpret any of the characters as control functions. The
display can be cleared by loading in a new RAM control
word.
Data Out
For display lengths of 32 characters or less, the data
stored in the internal RAM is available to the user during
the time between display refresh cycles. The system
outputs a STATUS WORD, CURSOR ADDRESS, and 32
ASCII data characters. The STATUS WORD specifies the
data entry mode and the display length of the system. The
STATUS WORD output differs slightly from the CONTROL WORD input. This difference is depicted in Figure 8.
Regardless of display length, the CURSOR ADDRESS of
the rightmost character location is address 47 (2Fle) and
the offscreen address of the cursor is address 48 (301e).
The CURSOR ADDRESS of the leftmost location is
defined as address 48 minus the display length. A general
formula for CURSOR ADDRESS is:
CURSOR ADDRESS =
(47 - Display Length)
+ Number of Characters from
Left.
For example, suppose the alphanumeric display is 16
characters long and the cursor was blinking at the third
digit from the left. Then the CURSOR ADDRESS would be
47 -16 + 3 or34 (221e) and the 18th ASCII data word would
correspond to the ASCII character at the location of the
display cursor. In Left and Block entry, the CURSOR
ADDRESS specifies the location where the next ASCII
data character is to be entered. In RAM entry, the
CURSOR ADDRESS specifies the location to the right of
the last character entered. In Right entry, the CURSOR
ADDRESS is always 48 (301e). The negative edge of the
DATA VALID output can be used to load the 34 DATA
OUT words into the user's system. The DATA OUTtiming
for the HDSP-247X systems are summarized in Figure 8.
For displays longer than 32 characters, the system only
outputs the STATUS WORD between refresh cycles.
Master/Power On Reset
When power is first applied to the system, the system
clears the display and tests the state of the DATA INPUT,
D7. If D7 > 2.0V, the systems loads the control word on the
DATA INPUTS into the system. If D7 S .8V or the system
sees an invalid control word, the system initializes as Left
entry for a 32 character display with a flashing cursor in
the leftmost location. For POWER ON RESET to function
prp'perly, the power supply mustturn on ata rate> 100 Vis.
In" addition, the system can be reset by pulling the RESET
input low for a minimum of 50 milliseconds. POWER
ON/MASTER RESET timing is shown in Figure 9.
2000~s -------------------------------------------.,.1
I·
·~
ON
25ns
COLU~M~
2470
HDSP·
40n5
HDSP· COLUMN
2471/.2472
ON1~s
.~:...
DATA VALID
ASCII DATA
HDSP2470
X, COLUMN OFF TIME
(HDSp·2470)
(HDSP-2471/·2472)
HDSP·
2470
=
=
+ 20,1..15 X Display Length
17.5,us + 17.5ps X Display Length
30.5.us
Y, DATA VALID TO COLUMN OFF TIME
(Display Length .,;;;32 Characten)
(HDSp·2470)
= 813.5115 - 20,1..15 X Display Length
(HDSp·2471/·24721 ., 826.2~s - 17.5~s X Display Length
STATUS WORD FORMAT (WORD AI
HDSP2471/·2472
----1
HDSP2471/2472
L....._---J
I-l.2~s
L-_....Jn
35~s --:-l- 35~s
ASCII
DATA
l
..
500ns MIN
n!-___
----I
06
Os
04
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
03
0, 0,
Do
Y
Y
Y
RAM ENTRY
Y
BLOCK ENTRY
LEFT ENTRY
RIGHT ENTRY
YYYY = DISPLAY LENGTH
CURSOR ADDRESS FORMAT (WORD BI
CU RSOR ADDRESS = ( 47 - Display Lengthl + No. of
Characters from Left
I
STAT1S CU.RSOR +-DATA
DATA
WORD
ADDRESS
WORD~WORDS
jill
(BI
. (01
(1 - 31)
I ..
~
I
DATA WORD FORMAT (WORDS 0-311
STANDARD ASCII DATA Where Word (31) is Rightmost
Displayed ASCII Character
f----soons MIN
Figure 8,. Data Out Timing and Format lor the H'DSP-2470/-2471/-2472 Alphanumeric Display Controller.
-----,~•.-----------------50msMIN----------------~·1
l~ 330~s
L-__________________________________________________________
READY
;-~
l.-2.5,us*
I'IFCHIPSELECT=O
AFTER THIS TIME,
CONTROLLER WILL
r~__.....;E;;;.N;.;TER A CHARACTER.
READS IN CONTROL WORD
DATA INPUT, 0,
__~~~~~~~~~~~-L~~~~~
INITIALIZES AS LEFT ENTRY
MODE, 32 CHARACTER DISPLAY
LENGTH
Figure 9. Power-On/Master Reset Timing lor the HDSP-2470/-2471/-2472 Alphanumeric Display Controller.
7-76
Custom Character Sets
The HDSP-2472 system has been specifically designed to
permit the user to insert a custom 128 ASCII character set.
This system features a 24 pin socket that is designed to
accept a custom programmed 1K X 8 PROM, EPROM, or
ROM. The read only memory should have an access time:5
500ns, IIL:5 1-.4mA I and ItH :5 40!-,A. A list of pin compatible
read only memories is shown in Figure 10. Jumper
locations are provided on the HDSP-2472 P.C. board
which allow the use of ROM's requiring chip enables tied
either to 0 or 5V. For further information on ROM
programming, please contact the factory.
6
-
PEAK Icc. ALL SYSTE~
4
1/
/
/
./ -,,'
1
.5
V
/
/
AVG.l cc •
./
3
Power Supply Requirements
The HDSP-247X Alphanumeric Display System is
designed to operate from a single 5 volt supply. Total Icc
requirements for the HDSP-247X Alphanumeric Display
Controller and HDSP-24XX Display Panel are shown in
Figure 11. Peak Icc is the instantaneous current required
for the system. Maximum Peak Icc occurs for Vec =5.25V
with 7 dots ON in the same Column in all display
characters. This current must be supplied by a
combination of the power supply and supply filter
capacitor. MQl
!:
~
~
!g
~
40
DUTY
FACTOR;;:: 1/7
V
1.0
,..,....-- ~
ij
//
.8
l SO //
l/J#V
~V
,
20
1<
w
10
.4
/,~ V;
.6
.8 1,0
/
./
/.
/
.6
20
8 10
AVERAGE CURRENT PER LED - rnA
Figure 3.
°c
Relative Luminous Intensity vs. Case
Temperature at Fixed Current Level.
1/20 . , /
w·
,.;:
TC - CASE TEMPERATURE -
Figure 2.
I V
":3
~
2.0
Forward Current-Voltage Characteristic.
80
60
1.6
FORWARD VOLTAGE - V
100
~
ffi
1.2
40
60
80
100
PE".K CURRENT PER LED - mA
Figure 4.
Typical Time Average Luminous
Intensity per LED vs. Average
Current per LED.
7-81
Typical Relative Luminous Efficiency vs.
Peak Current per LED.
package Dimensions and Pin Configurations
'.271.0501
GLA$S
t.'
4.4S 1.57011
MAX.
, 651 Q6Sf
....._--'-_-_
flEF
2.64
1.
30~~~201
I~~
···VVWV
T
I I --l f...
..
0.43 1.0111 .
......-2,54 (,1001 ryp,
TV'.
5082·7101
111 f 2-80)
OAIENT ArlON MARK MET AI,. TAB
r"iICK1~':'~ATe"
13,46
1.530)
22.36
J
:"EF.··..' ~-l
1 __'-'::1-+-=:"=':=-'---
4.57
3
'6
(.180)
4
25
, lrem
36
35
34
33
32
24
32.00
31~4
I
23
(1,230)
!
22 35.6E;(1,4oo)
I
I
21
MAX.
20
I
,.
31
(~wo:'l:=·~eo) :
30
29
~10~~~~~~C--
1$
~a
27 45.7~l~eOOI
11
26
12
25
T7
13,-++---""'-'1"""-'-_
24
16
'5
14
23
22
"
20
Notes.:
19
1, OlrrMotion$ ilr(l-:ln mlUirnetru and (iochet),
2. Unten otherwbe ~Pftclflad, the tolerance on 411 dimen;lons 1$ 'to.3Smm {::.015 ioJ.
3, Char.a(:ter Site 6.9 x4.9mm t27 x +19 In.}.
Device Pin Description
5082·7100
5082·7101
5082·7102
Pin
Function
Pin
Function
Pin
Function
Pin
Function
Pin
Function
Pin
Function
1
2
3
4
AnodeG
12
13
14
Anode
a
1
N/C
Ie
16
Anode G
2b
2d
Anode 0
Anode E
3<:
15
16
17
Anode C
4c
4.
Anode B
1
2
3
4
19
20
Sa
5
3b
3a
6
N/C
1e
Ie
Anode F
2b
2d
28
Anode E
5e
5c
5a
Anode 0
48
40
N/C
Anode C
3d
3b
3a
Anode B
5
6
7
S
9
10
11
Ie
ld
Anode F
Anoda E
2b
2d
Anode C
3a
3c
3e
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
3d
2
3b
Anode A
28
2<:
2a
Anod.O
1e
lb
3
10
3d
la
11
Anode F
4b
4
5
6
7
8
9
12
13
14
1a 1b 1c
A
4d
4&
ld 1e 2a 2b 2c 2d 2e
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
2.
2<:
2.
Anode A
ld
lb
Ie
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
3c
3a
AnodeG
4a
4b
4d
NIC
5b
5d
N/C
3a 3b 3c 3d 3e 4a 4b 4c 4d 4e 5a 5b 5c 5d 5e
JtlJI' .~JtI.~
Jtlj< '.;tt"JII'.;tt'
,¥'.'Ji' 'J/' 'JI'J/'
,,''If' '1' ',,1'1'
5082·7100/7101/7102
Schematic Wiring Diagram
""
JtlJI'
'" ',I' ~
~.ytI'~
/.~ r~ 'ytI'~
G !-CHARACTER 1_!-CHARACTER 2-i+cHARACTER 3+CHARACTER 4+CHARACTER 5-1
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
20
28
Anode A
1d
lb
1a
-----
..
_---_ ... - - -
operating Considerations
ELECTRICAL
The 5 x 7 matrix of LED's, which make up each character, are X-V addressable. This allows for a
simple addressing, decoding and driving scheme between the display module and customer furnished
logic.
There are three main advantages to the use of this type of X-V addressable array:
1. It is an elementary addressing scheme and provides the least number of interconnection pins for the
number of diodes addressed. Thus, it offers maximum flexibility toward integrating the display into
particular applications.
2. This method of addressing offers the advantage of sharing the Read-Only-Memory character generator
among several display elements. One character generating ROM can be shared over 25 or more 5 x 7
dot matrix characters with substantial cost savings.
3. In many cases equipment will already have a portion of the required decoder/driver (timing and clock
circuitry plus buffer storage) logic circuitry available for the display.
To form alphanumeric characters a method called "scanning" or "strobing" is used. Information is
addressed to the display by selecting one row of diodes at a time, energizing the appropriate diodes in
that row and then proceeding to the next row. After all rows have been excited one at a time, the
process is repeated. By scanning through all rows at least 100 times a second, a flicker free character
can be produced. When information moves sequentially from row to row of the display (top to bottom)
this is row scanning, as illustrated in Figure 5. Information can also be moved from column to column
(left to right across the display) in a column scanning mode. For most applications (5 or more characters to share the same ROM) it is more economical to use row scanning.
MECHANICAL/THERMAL MOUNTING
The solid state display typically operates with 200 mW power dissipation per character. However, if the
operating conditions are such that the power dissipation exceeds the derated maximum allowable value,
the device should be heat sunk. The usual mounting technique combines mechanical support and thermal
heat sinking in a common structure. A metal strap or bar can be mounted behind the display using
silicone grease to insure good thermal control. A well-designed heat sink can limit the case temperature
to within 1oDe of ambient.
READ ONLY
MEMORY
ROW
DRIVERS
Figure 5.
Row Scanning Block Diagram.
7-83
Fli;'
HEWLETT
~~ PACKARD
16SEOMENT
SOLID STATE
ALPHANUMERIC
DISPLAY
HDSP-6504
HDSP-6508
Features
• ALPHANUMERIC
Displays 64 Character ASCII Set and
Special Characters
• 16 SEGMENT FONT PLUS CENTERED D.P.
AND COLON
•
3.~1mm (O.1S0") CHARACTER. HEIGHT
• APPLICATION. FLEXIBILITY WITH
PACKAGE DESIGN
4 and 8 Character Dual-In-Line Packages
End Stackable-On Both Ends for 8 Character and
On One End for 4 Character
Sturdy Gold-Plated Leads on 2.S4mm (O.100")
Centers
Environmentally Rugged Package
Common Cathode Configuration
• LOW POWER
As Low as 1.0-1.SmA Average
Per Segment Depending on Peak
Current Levels
• EXCELLENT CHARACTER APPEARANCE
Continuous Segment Font
High On/Off Contrast
6.3Smm (O.2S0") Character Spacing
Excellent Character Alignment
Excellent Readability at 2 Metres
• SECONDARY BARREL MAGNIFIER AVAILABLE
Increases Character Height to 4.45 mm (0.175")
• SUPPORT ELECTRONICS
Can Be Driven With ROM Decoders and Drivers
Easy Interfacing With Microprocessors and
LSI Circuitry
• CATEGORIZED FOR LUMINOUS INTENSITY
Description
The HDSP-6504 and HDSP-650B are 3.B1mm (0.150")
sixteen segment GaAsP red alphanumeric displays
mounted in 4 character and B character dual-in-line
package configurations that permit mounting on PC
boards or in standard IC sockets. The monolithic light
emitting diode character is magnified by the integral lens
which increases both character size and luminous
intensity, thereby making low power consumption
possible. The rugged package construction, enhanced by
the backfill design, offers extended environmental capabilities compared to the standard PC board/lens type of display
package. Its good temperature cycling capability is the
result of the air gap which exists between the semiconductor chip/wire bond assembly and the lens. In addition to
the sixteen segments, a centered D.P. and colon are in~
eluded. Character spacing yields 4 characters per inch.
Applications
These alphanumeric displays are attractive for applications such as computer peripherals and terminals,
computer base emergency mobile units, automotive
instrument panels, desk top calculators, in-plant control
equipment, hand-held instruments and other products
requiring low power, display compactness and alphanumeric display capability.
7-84
------------------------------------
Device Selection Guide
Characters
Per
Display
Device
Part No.
flDSP-
Package
4
(Figure 6)
""6504
8
(Figure 7)
6508
Absolute Maximum Ratings
Symbol
Min.
~.
IpEAK
Parameter
Peak Forward Current Per Segment
or DP (q,yration::;; 3121's)
lAva
Average'Current Per Segment or
DP[l)
PD
Average Power Dissipation Per
Characted' .2)
TA
Operating Temperature. Ambient
-4(iu",":1§
Ts
Storage Temperature
-40
200
mA
7
mA
138
wmW
85
>tOO
°C
·C
5
V
260
'c
Reverse Voltage
VR
Solder Temperature at 1.59mm
(1/16 inch) below seating plane.
t::;; 3 Seconds
Unitll
NOTES:
1. Maximum allowed drive conditions for strobed operation are derived from Figures 1 and 2. See electrical section of operational
considerations.
2. Derate linearly above TA = SO·C at 2.17mW/·C. Po Max. ITA = 8S·C) = 62mW.
Electrical/Optical Characteristics at TA =25°C
Symbol
11
Parameter
Test Condition
MI'ri.-
Typ.
0.40
1.65
Max.
Units
h~EAK
Iv
Luminous Intensity, Time
Average. Character Total with
16 Segments Illuminated (3,4)
VF
Forward Voltage Per
Segment or DP
APeAK
Peak Wavelength
655
nm
Dominant Wavelength [S]
640
nm
Ad
lR
=
AVF/AoC
ROJ-PIN
= 30m A
1/16 Duty Factor
IF- 30mA
(One Se~Biient On)
Reverse Current Per
Segment or DP
w
1.6
mcd
1.9
':<-'
V
10
p.A
Temperature Coefficient of
Forward Voltage
-2
mVioC
Thermal Resistance LED Junction-to-Pin
232
VR=5V
'C/WI
Seg
NOTES:
3. The luminous intensity ratio between segments within a digit is designed so that each segment will have the same luminous
sterance. Thus each segment will appear with equal- brightness to the eye.
4. Each character of the display is matched for luminous intensity at the test conditions shown. Operation of the display at lower peak
currents may cause intensity mismatch within the display. Operation at peak currents less than 7 rnA will cause objectionable
display segment matching.
S. The dominant wavelength, Ad, is derived from the C.I.E. chromaticity diagram and represents that single wavelength which defines
the color of the device, standard red.
--------
7-85
--------,,------------------
1.0
I'
0.9
1
II:
.."~
1
....
Z
w
II:
II:
"
2
8
~II:
"~
W
C
..
I
1
~
~
i
0.8
.......
"-
r-..
0.7
0.6
0.3
H=t
0.2
O. 1
50
tp -
"- .......
RU,wIN -340' iWiCIIAR.
0.5
0.45
0.4
60
70
80 85
TA - AMBIENT TEMPERATURE _ DC
PULSE DURATION -loll
Figure 1. Maximum A lIowed Peak Current vs. Pulse Duration. Derate derived
operating conditions above TA c 50°C using Figure 2.
Figure 2. Temperature Derating Factor
For Peak Current per Segment vs.
Ambient Temperature. TJMAX 'c Ilo"C
1.5
200
1.·1
>
"E
;:;
iiiII:
1
....
"iii
II:
~w
:>
~
II:
1
~
~
100
~
80
"
~
60
1
"'
140
120
II:
~
160
"c
II:
>
;:
I
180
40
1
I
-
~
1
20
o :1
1.0
j
1.2
1.4
1.6
I .•
2.0
VF - PEAK FORWARD Y-OLTAGE - V
lPEAK - PEAK SEGMENT CURRENT - rnA
Figure 3. Relative Luminous Efficiency
(Luminous Intensity Per Unit Current)
vs. Peak Segment Current.
Figure 4. Peak Forward Sagment .
Current vs. Peak Forward Voltage.
For a Detailed Explanation on the Use of Data Sheet Information and Recommended
Soldering Procedures, See Application Note 1005.
o
o
0
o
o
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
.9
A
B
C
o
E
F
[9RBCIlEFGHIJ"kLMND
PQR5TUVWXYZ [ \
/I
±g]%JJ
<> *+/
o 2 3 Y 5 [] 18 9 / L
Figure 5.
Typical 64 Character ASCII Set.
o
Additional Character Font
7-86
J~
t
/
~?
package Dimensions
r
l~~i~~1
MAX'1}
3.18
1.1251
22
i
12
t
10.67
10.4201
21.34'.4
1.840 .0201
r
L
PIN 1
INOTE 31
=
II
(~lra) TYP. -I
,
I---
I'*'
---r
3.81 ± .25
(.150 ± .010)
3.81 ± .25
1.150 , .0101
NOTES:
1, ALL DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETRES AND (INCHES).
2. ALL UNTOLERANCED DIMENSIONS ARE FOR REFERENCE ONLY.
3. PIN llDENTIFIED BY INK DOT ADJACENT TO LEAD.
Figure 6. HDSP·6504
Magnified Character
Font Description
Figure 7. HDSp·650S
Device Piln Description
Function
Pin
No.
DEVICES
HDSP·6504
HDSP·6508
2.77
1
2
3
4
5
REF'~
(0.109)
6
/ :
,~~"'~v~l
U~u "U! ,.,,"
'~~~~~:J'
Figure S.
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
7-87
HDSP-6S04
Anod0
Anode
Cathode
Anode
Anode
Cathode
Anode
Anode
Anode
Cathode
Anode
Anode
Anode
Anode
Anode
Anode
Cathode
Anode
Anode
Anode
Anode
Anode
Segment 91
Segment DP
Digit 1
Segment d2
Segment I
Digit 3
Segment e
Segment m
Segment k
Digit 4
Segment d,
SegmentJ
Segment Co
Segment g2
Segment a2
Segment i
Digit 2
Segment b
Segment a,
Segment c
Segment h
Segment f
HDSP-6S08
Anode
Anode
Cathode
Anode
Anode
Cathode
Anode
Anode
Anode
Cathode
Anode
CathOde
Cathode
Cathode
Cathode
Anode
Anode
Anode
Anode
Anode
Cathode
Anode
Anode
Anode
Anode
Anode
Segment g1
Segment DP
Digit 1
Segment d2
Segment I
Digit 3
Segment e
Segment m
Segment k
Digit 4
Segment d,
Dig~t 6
Digit 8
Digit 7
Digit 5
SegmentJ
Segment Co
Segment g2;
Segment aa
Segment I
Digit 2
Segment b
Segment a,
Segment c
Segment h
Segment f
operational Considerations
ELECTRICAL
The HDSP-6504 and -6508 devices utilize large monolithic
16 segment GaAsP LED chips with centered decimal point
and colon. Like segments of each digit are electrically
interconnected to form an 18 by N array, where N is the
quantity of characters in the display. In the driving scheme
the decimal point or colon is treated as a separate
character with its own time frame.
These displays are designed specifically for strobed (multiplexed) operation. Under normal operating situations the
maximum number of illuminated segments needed to
represent a given character is 10. Therefore, except
where noted, the information presented in this data sheet
is for a maximum of 10 segments illuminated per
character:
The typical forward voltage values, scaled from Figure 4,
should be used for calculating the current limiting resistor
values and typical power dissipation. Expected maximum
VF values for the purpose of driver circuit design may be
calculated using the following VF model:
VF = 1.85V + IPEAK (1.80)
For: 30mA ::; IPEAK ::; 200mA
VF = 1.58V + IPEAK (10.70)
For: 10mA ::; IPEAK ::; 30mA
OPTICAL AND CONTRAST
ENHANCEMENT
Each large monolithic chip is positioned under a separate '
element of a plastic aspheric magnifying lens, producing a
magnified' character height 6f 3.81 mm (.150 inch). The
aspheric lens provides wide included viewing angles of typically 75 'degrees horizontal and 75 degrees vertical with
low off-axis distortion. These two features,coupled with
the very' high segment luminous sterance, provide to the
user a display with excellent readability in bright ambient
light for viewing distances in the range of 2 meters. Effective contrast enhancement can be obtained by employing
any of the following optical filter products: Panelgraphic:
Ruby Red 60, Dark Red 63 or Purple 90; SGL Homalite:
H100-1605 Red or Hl00~1804 Purple, Plexiglas 2423.For
very bright ambients, such as indirect sunlight, the 3M
Light Control Film is recommended: Red 655, Violet, Purple
or Neutral Density.
For those applications requiring only 4 or 8 characters, a
secondary barrel magnifier, HP pari number HDSP-6505
(four character) and -6509 (eight character), may be
inserted into support grooves on the primary magnifier.
This secondary magnifier increases the character ,height
to 4.45mm <'175 inch) without loss of horizontal viewing
angle.
'
MECHANICAL
These devices are co~structed by LED die attaching and
wire bonding to a high temperature PC board substrate. A
precision molded plastic lens is attached to the PC board
and the resulting assembly is backfilled with a sealing
epoxy to form an envi'ronmentally sealed unit.
The four character and eight character devices can be end
stacked to form a character string which is a multiple of a
basic four character grouping. As an example, one -6504
and two -6508 devices will form a 20 character string.
These devices may be soldered onto a printed ,circuit
board or inserted into 24 and 28 pin DIP L$I, sockets. The
socket spaCing must allow for device end stacking.
Suitable conditions for wave soldering depend upon the
specific kind of equipment and procedure used. For more
information, consult the local HP Sales Office or HewlettPackage Components, Palo Alto, California.
·More than 10 segments may be Illuminated in a given character,
provided the maximum allowed character power dissipation.
temperature derated, is not exceeded.
'
7-88
~~---
..
~----
OPTIONAL
4 DIGIT MAGNIFIER
HDSP-6505
OPTIONAL
8 DIGIT MAGNIFIER
HDSP-6509
END VIEW
(BOTH)
C
31.SSMAX'J
11.2551
C
53.67MAX'-j
.,'" =1
11.
kl
rut
11\JU-
9.25MAX·11
,-,
2
L
2S.SMAX.J
11.1351
MOUNTED ON HOsp·6504
L
50.67 MAX.
11.9951
----II
MOUNTED ON HDSP·650B
Figure 9. Design Data for Optional Barrel Magnifier in Single Display Applications.
7-89
NOTES:
1. ALL DIMENSIONS IN
MILLIMETRES AND (lNCHESI.
2. THIS SECONDARY MAGNIFIER
INCREASES THE CHARACTER
HEIGHT TO 4.45mm (.175 in.)
Fli;' HEWLETT
':1:.
PACKARD
16SEOMENT
SOLID STATE
ALPHANUMERIC
DISPLAY
HDSP-63DD
Features
• ALPHANUMERIC
Displays 64 Character ASCII Set and
Special Characters
• 16 SEGMENT FONT PLUS CENTERED D.P.
AND COLON
• 3.S6mm (0.140") CHARACTER HEIGHT
• APPLICATION FLEXIBILITY WITH
PACKAGE DESIGN
S Character Dual-ln-L,lne Package
End Stackable
..
Sturdy Leads on 2.S4mm (0.100") Centers
Common Cathode Configuration
• LOW POWER
As Low as 1.0-1.SmA Average
Per Segment Depending on Peak
Current Levels
• EXCELLENT CHARACTER APPEARANCE
Continuous Segment Font
High On/Off Contrast
S.OSmm (0.200") Character Spacing
Excellent Character Alignment
Excellent Readability at 1.5 Metres
• SUPPORT ELECTRONICS
Can Be Driven With ROM Decoders and Drivers
Easy Interfacing With Microprocessors and
LSI Circuitry
• CATEGORIZED FOR LUMINOUS INTENSITY
Description
The HDSP-6300 is a sixteen segment GaAsP red
alphanumeric display mounted in an 8 character dual-inline package configuration that permits mounting on PC
boards or in standard IC sockets. The monolithic light
emitting diode character is magnified by the integral lens
which increases both character size and luminous
intensity. thereby making iow power consumption
possible. The sixteen elements consist of sixteen segments for alphanumeric and special characters plus
centered decimal point and colon for good visual
aesthetics. Character spaCing yields 5 characters per
inch.
Applications
These alphanumeric displays are attractive for applications such as computer peripherals and mobile terminals.
desk top calculators. in-plant control equipment. handheld instruments and other products requiring low power.
display compactness and alphanumeric display capability.
7-90
Absolute Maximum Ratings
Symbol
:::'.;:;-
'i
Parameter
Min.
IPEAK
Peak Forward Current Per Segment
or DP ([Juration::::; 417 ,us)
IAVG
Ave(age';Current Per Segment or
DP(1j'./'
Po
Average Power Dissipation Per
CharI'\Pier [1.2j
TA
Ts
Operating Templlf~t~re. Ambient
Storage T ~i1lperatUre "
VR
Reverse Voltage
.,
Max.
Units
150
mA
6.25
mA
133
mW
-40
85
°C
-40
100
5
°C
V
2(30
°C
Solder Temp'erj'lture at1.59mm
(1/16 inch) belOw seating plane,
t :S 5 Seconds
NOTES:
1. Maximum allowed drive .conditions for strobed operation are derived from Figures 1 and 2. See electrical section of operational
considerations.
2. Derate linearly above TA = 50'C at 2.47 mW/'C. Po Max. ITA = 85'C) = 47 mW.
Electrical/Optical Characteristics at TA =25°C
Symbol
Iv
Parameter
Luminous Intensity. Time
Average, Character Total with
16 Segments Illuminated (3,4)
VF
Forward Voltage Per
Segment or DP
APEAK
Peak Wavelength
Dominant Wavelength (5]
Ad
Test Condition
Min.
Typ.
400
1200
IF'" 24mA
(One Segment On)
IR
Reverse Current Per
Segment or DP
R8J-PIN
Thermal Resistance LED
Junction-to-Pin per Character
Max.
Units
IPEAK =24mA
1/16 Duty Factor
,ucd
1.9
1.6
V
655
om
640
nm
10
VR "" 5V
,uA
°C/W/
Char.
250
NOTES:
3. The luminous intensity ratio between segments within a digit is designed so that each segment will have the same luminous
sterance. Thus each segment will appear with equal brightness to the eye.
4. Each character of the display is matched for luminous intensity at the test conditions shown. Operation of the display at lower peak
currents may cause intensity mismatch within the display. Operation at peak currents less than 7 mA will cause objectionable
display segment matching.
5. The dominant wavelength, Ad. is derived from the C.I.E. chromaticity diagram and represents that single wavelength which defines
the color of the device, standard red.
1.0
~
I
200
ffi
150
~
10 0
II:
'-
§
'-
il
"~
o?~'"
0
"
I
~
~
,'-
0.9
'\
20
0
7
~"',r.
~1.
"
10
'l;.
~
100
tp
7""
'(.
1000
~
0.7
~
0.6
~
0.5
ex:
r--
ReJ~IN •
'" ' '
390'C/WICHAA.
"
0.4
I 0.3 5
. ~ O. 3
0.2
O. 1
_DC
10000
PULSE DURATION -IJ.S
50
60
70
80
TA - AMBIENT TEMPERATURE _
Figure 1. Maximum Allowed Peak Current vs. Pulse Duration. Derate derived
operating conditions above T A = 50~ C using Figure 2.
7-91
..
"I
~
,,-~'"
1\II ~ '" rt, I ~~
I III
'"
o,a
8
°c
Figure 2. Temperature Derating Factor
For Peak Current per Segment v•.
Ambient Temperature. T JMAX ='110'C
>
!;!.
w
c:;
1.5
1.4
1.3
1.2
'1.1
1.0
0.9
'0.8
!Ew
w
2:
....
:l'
w
a:
.
I
i!
"
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
VF - PEAK FORWARD VOLTAGE - V
IPEAK. - PEAK SEGMENT CURRENT - mA
Figure 3. Relative Luminous Efficiency
(Luminous Intensity Per Unit Current)
vs. Peak Segment Current.
Figure 4. Peak Forward Segment
Current vs. Peak Forward Voltage.
For a Detai.led Explanation on the Use of Data Sheet Information and Recommended
Soldering Procedures, See Application Note 1005.
A3 A2 A, Ao
1
A4
0
0
0
~
A5
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
B
A
0
E
F
R B C ]J E F G H I J f-< L M N·D
PQR5TUVWXYZ[
0
C
/I
0
:Eg]%1J
<>
0 I 2 3 Y5 5 1 B 9
j:igure 5.
*+
/
J?
\
~
/
/
L
~
?
Typical 64 Character ASCII Set.
fZJ
o
Additional Character Font
U5
(.25111
18.30 ••38
1.720 ••1115}
f
1
NOns;
I. ALL OIMENSlOI\I$ IN MILLIMI!TRES AND fiNCH E$},
2. All IJlI/TOLERANCED DlMENSIONSARE FOR REFERENC! ONLY.
3.l'IN 1 IDENTIFIED BY DOT ADJACENT TO LeAD.
7-92
Magnified Character
Font Description
Device Pin Description
Pin
No.
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Figure 7.
24
25
26
Function
Anode
Anode
Anode
Cathode
Cathode
Cathode
Cathode
Anode
Anode
Anode
Anode
Anode
Anode
Anode
Anode
Anode
Cathode
Cathode
Cathode
Cathode
Anode
Anode
Anode
Anode
Anode
Anqde
Segment K
Segment 01
Segment C
Digit 1
Digit 2
Digit 3
Digit 4
Segment L
Segment Gz
Selfment E
Segment M
Segment D2
Segment DP
Segment Az
Segment'
Segment J
Digit 8
Digit 7
Digit 6
Digit 5
Segment Co
Segment G1
Segment B
Segment F
Segment H
Segment Al
operational Considerations
ELECTRICAL
The HDSP-6300 device utilizes large monolithic 16 segment plus centered decimal point and colon GaAsP LED
chips. Like segments of each digit are electrically interconnected to form an 18 by N array, where N is the
quantity of characters in the display. In the driving scheme
the decimal point or colon is treated as a separate character with its own time frame.
This display is designed specifically for strobed (multiplexed) operation. Under normal operating situations the
maximum number of illuminated segments needed to
represent a given character is 10. Therefore, except where
noted, the information presented in this data sheet is for a
maximum of 10 segments illuminated per character:
7-93
The typical forward voltage values, scaled from Figure 4,
should be used for calculating the current limiting resistor
values and typical power dissipation. Expected maximum
VF values for the purpose of driver circuit design may be
calculated using the following VF model:
VF = 1.85V + IpEAK (1.8lll
For 30mA ~ IPEAK ~ 150mA
VF = 1.58V + IpEAK (10.7lll
For 10mA ~ IPEAK ~ 30mA
'More than 10 segments may be illuminated in a given character.
provided the maximum allowed character power dissipation,
temperature derated, is not exceeded.
OPTICAL AND CONTRAST
ENHANCEMENT
Each large monolithic chip is positioned under a separate
element of a plastic aspheric magnifying lens producing a
magnified character height of 3.56mm (0.140 inch). The
aspheric lens provides wide included viewing angles of 60
degrees horizontal and 55 degrees vertical with low off
axis distortion. These two features, coupled with the very
high segment luminous sterance, provide to the user a
display with excellent readability in bright ambient light
for viewing distances in the range of 1.5 metres. Effective
contrast enhancement can be obtained by employing an
optical filter product such as Panelgraphic Ruby Red 60,
Dark Red 63 or Purple 90; SGL Homalite H100-1605 Red or
H100-1804 Purple; or Plexiglas 2423. For very bright
ambients, such as indirect sunlight, the 3M Red 655 or
Neutral Density Light Control Film is recommended.
MECHANICAL
This device is constructed by LED die attaching and wire
bonding to a high temperature PC board substrate. A
precision molded plastic lens is attached to the PC board.
The HDSP-6300 can be end stacked to form a character
string which is a multiple of a basic eight character
grouping. These devices may be soldered onto a printed
circuit board or inserted into 28 pin DIP LSI sockets. The
socket spacing must allow for device end stacking.
Suitable conditions for wave soldering depend upon the
specific kind of equipment and procedure used. It is recommended that a non-activated rosin core wire solder or a low
temperature deactivating flux and solid wire solder be used
in soldering operations. For more information, consult the
local HP Sales Office or Hewlett-Packard Components, Palo
Alto, California.
7-94
FliOW
a!e..
LARGE 5 x 7 DOT MATRIX
ALPHANUMERIC DISPLAYS
HEWLETT
PACKARD
17.3 mm (0.68 inJ STANDARD RED HDSP-4701/4703
26.5 mm (1.04 inJ STANDARD ReD HOSP-4401/4403
26.5 mm (1.04 in.J HIGH EFFiCiENCY RED HDSP-4501/4503
Features
• LARGE CHARACTER HEIGHTS
• 5 x 7 DOT MATRIX FONT
• VIEWABLE UP TO 18 METERS (1.04 in. DISPLAY)
• X-Y STACKABLE
• IDEAL FOR GRAPHICS PANELS
• AVAILABLE IN COMMON ROW ANODE AND
COMMON ROW CATHODE CONFIGURATIONS
• CATEGORIZED FOR INTENSITY
• MECHANICALLY RUGGED
• AVAILABLE IN CUSTOM DISPLAY BOARDS
Description
The large 5 x 7 dot matrix alphanumeric display family is
comprised of 26.5 mm (1.04 inch) character height packages (HDSP-440X Standard Red, and HDSP-450X High
Efficiency Red) and 17.3 mm (0.68 inch) packages (HDSP470X Standard Red). These devices have excellent viewability; the 1.04 inch character font can be read at up to
18 metres (12 metres for the 0.68 inch device).
has an industry standard 7.6 mm (0.3 inch) DIP configuration.
Applications include electronic instrumentation, computer
peripherals, point of sale terminals, weighing scales, and
industrial electronics.
These devices utilize a 10.2 mm (0.4 inch) dual-in-line (DIP)
configuration for the 1.04 inch font, while the 0.68 inch font
Devices
Pari
Number
Color
Description
HDSP-4701
HDSP-4703
Standard
Red
17.3 mm Common Row Anode
17.3 mm Common Row Cathode
HDSP-4401
HDSP-4403
Standard
Red
26.5 mm Common Row Anode
26.5 mm Common Row Cathode
HDSP-4501
HDSP-4503
High Efficiency
Red
26.5 mm Common Row Anode
26.5 mm Common Row Cathode
7-95
Package Dimensions (HDSP-470X Series)
DATE
cooe
2.54
(O.IOl
L.
u;4
(0.1<»
i
r-
COLOR 81N
NOTE ••
LUMINOUS
INTENSITV
CATEGORY
NOTES,
1. ALL DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETRES UNCHES).
2. ALL UNTOLERANCED DIMENSIONS ARE FOR
REFERENeE ONLY.
3. A NOTCH ON SCRAMBLeR SIDE DENOTES
PIN t.
4. FOR GREEN ONLY.
LEFT SIDE VIEW
FUNCTION
PIN
HDSP·4701
HDSP·4703
1
COLUMN 'I CATHODE
ROW 1 CATHODE
2
ROW 3 ANODE
ROW 2 CATHODE
3 COLUMN 2 CATHODE
COLUMN 2 ANODE
4
ROW 5 ANODE
COLUMN 1 ANODE
5
ROW 6 ANODE
ROW 6 CATHODE
6
ROW7 ANODE
'ROW 7 CATHODE
7 COLUMN 4 CATHODE
COLUMN 3 ANODE
8 COLUMN 5 CATHODE
ROW 5 CATHODE
9
ROW 4 ANODE
COLUMN 4 ANODE
10 COLUMN 3' CATHODE
ROW 4 CATHODE
n
ROW 2 ANODE
ROW 3 CATHODE
12
ROW 1 ANODE
COLUMN 5 ANODE
fRONT VIEW
&.GO
(O.260) MAJ(.
END VIEW
Package Dimensions (HDSP-440X/-450X/Series)
PIN 1 ReFERENCE
:1.25
(0.131
DATE ODDe
t
13
12
11
10
COLOR 81N
NOTE 4.
LUMINOUS
INTENSITV
CATEGORY
LEFT SIDE VIEW
f!==L j:JL-':
-bj'
I
,
NOTES:
6.35
1. ALl'DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETIlES (lNCHESI. (O.25ll1 MAX.
2. ALL UNTOLERANCED DIMENSIONS ARE fOR
REF£RENCE ONLV.
3. A BLACK OCT ON SCRAM8LER $IDE
INDICATES I'IN #t.
.. FOR GREEN ONLY.
FUNCTION
PIN
1 COLUMN 1 CATHODE
ROW 1 CATHODE
NO PIN
NO PIN
2
3
ROW 3 ANODE
COLUMN 3 ANODE
COLUMN 2 CATHODE
ROW 3 CATHODE
4
NO PIN
NO PIN
5
6
ROW 5 ANODE
COLUMN 1 ANODE
7
NO PIN
NO PIN
1.0
S
ROW 6 ANODE
COLUMN 2 ANODE
Cc)'041
9
ROW 7 ANODE
ROW 7 CATHODE
10 COLUMN 3 CATHODE
ROW S CATHODE'
11, COLUMN 5 CATHODE
COLUMN 4 ANODE
12
NO PIN
NO PIN,
'
I
13
ROW 4 ANODE
ROW 5 CATHODE
4.76
14
NO PIN
' N O PIN
(O.19) 15 COLUMN 4 CATHODE
ROW 4 CATHODE
16
ROW 2 ANODE
, ROW2CATHODE
17
NO PIN
NO PIN
......IS--'__R_0_W_l_A_N_0_D_E_ _"-C_0_L_U_M_N_5_A_N_0_D_E.......
f
4.0&
""'11--""'111""
II
U
I;
to.161 (to2~ISO.
MIN.
II
U
to.16
to.4Ol
END VIEW
,7-96
Internal Circuit Diagrams
HDSP-4401/4501/
HDSP-4403/4503/
HDSP-4701/
COMMON
ANODE ROW
COMMON
CATHODE ROW
COMMON
ANODE ROW
COLUMN
x = ROW OR COLUMN NUMBER,
COLUMN
0·
HDSP-4703/
COMMON
CATHODE ROW
COLUMN
COLUMN
x • ROW OR COLUMN NUMBER,
PIN NUMBER
0=
PIN NUMBER
Absolute Maximum Ratings at 25°C
HDSP·440X Series
HDSP-470X Series
HDSP-450X Series
Average Power per Dot (TA" 25·C)j1]
75mW
75mW
Peak Forward Current per Dot (TA = 25·C)12]
90mA
125mA
Average Forward Current per Dot (TA = 25·C)!3]
15mA
25mA
Operating Temperature Range
-40· C to +850 C
Storage Temperature Range
-40·C to +85·C
Reverse Voltage per Dot
3.0 V
Lead Solder Temperature
(1.59 mm [1/16 inch] below seating plane)
260 C for 3 sec.
0
Notes:
1. Average power is based on 20 dots 'on' per character. Total package power dissipation should not exceed 1.S W.
2. Do not exceed maximum average current per dot.
3. For the HDSP-440X series and HDSP-470X series displays, derate maximum average current above SO°C at 0.4 mA/oC. For the
HDSP-4S0X series displays, derate maximum average current above 3SoC at 0.2 mA/oC. This derating is based on a device mounted
in a socket having a thermal resistance from junction to ambient of 1000°C/W per dot.
Electrical/Optical Characteristics at TA =25°C
STANDARD RED HDSP-470X SERIES
Description
Luminous Intensity/Dot!4!
(Digit Average)
Peak Wavelength
Dominant Wavelengtht5]
Symbol
Test Conditions
Min.
Typ.
Iv
100 mA PI<: 1 of 5
Duty Factor (20 mA Avg.)
360
770
Max.
Units
}lcd
APEAK
655
nm
AD
640
om
Forward Voltage/Dot
VF
IF= 100mA
1,8
Reverse Voltage/Dot or DPI61
VR
IR = 100}lA
12
V
2,2
V
Temperature Coefficient of VF/Dot
J:.VFJOC
-2.0
mWoC
Thermal Resistance LED Junctlon-to-Pin
per Dol
RcflJ-PIN
420
°C/W/
Dot
7-97
STANDARD RED HDSP-440X SERIES
Description
Luminous Intensity/Dotl4 1
(Digit Average)
Symbol
Test Conditions
Min.
Typ.
Iv
100 mA Pk: 1 of 5
Duty Factor (20 mA Avg.)
400
860
"cd
nm
'\PEAK
655
Dominant Wavelengthl 5j
'\D
640
Forward Voltage/Dot
VF
IF = 100 mA
Reverse Voltage/Dot or DP[6}
VA
I R " 100 J.tA
Peak Wavelength
1.8
3.0
Max.
Units
nm
2.2
V
12
V
Temperature Coefficient of VF/Dot
t;,.VF/"C
-2.0
mVl·C
Thermal Resistance LED Junction-to-Pln
per Dot
RJ-PIN
380
·C/W/
Dot
HIGH EFFICIENCY RED HDSP-450X SERIES
Description
Luminous Intensity/Dot[4]
(Digit Average)
Peak Wavelength
Dominant Wavelength[5]
Symbol
Test Conditions
Min.
Typ.
Iv
50 mA Pk: 1 of 5
Duty Factor (10 mA Avg.)
1400
3500
Max.
Units
"cd
APEAK
635
nm
"-0
626
nm
Forward Voltage/Dot
VF
IF= 50 mA
Reverse Voltage/Dot or DPI6]
VA
IA = 100 "A
2.6
3.0
:'k5
V
25.0
V
Temperature Coefficienl of VF/Dot
/:,VF/"C
-2.0
mVl"C
Thermal Resistance LED Junction-to-Pin
per Dot
RJ-PIN
380
·C/W/
Dot
Notes:
4. The displays are categorized for luminous intensity with the intensity category designated by a letter on the left hand side of the
package. The luminous intensity minimum and categories are determined by computing the numerical average of the individual
segment intensities.
5. The dominant wavelength is derived from the C.I.E. Chromaticity diagram and is that single wavelength which defines the color of the
device.
6. Typical specification for reference only. Do not exceed absolute maximum ratings.
7. The displays are categorized as to dominant wavelength with the category designated by a number adjacent to the intensity category
letter.
7-98
------------- - - - -
0
160
~
5
I
0
§
....~
I
5
: 'TfaJj.\;OX/440X
I
I"
5~
...... I'!-.
0
5
o
10
20
30
40
50
a:
r--.... "
J
E>JA • 1000'eM/DOT
0
a:
ac
)
60
70
SO
TA - AMBIENT TEMPERATURE -
I90
f.-
100
15a:
0
He P.450X
14 0
120
1/
0
0
I
0
I
II-
~
o
o
100
Figure 1. Maximum Allowable Average Current Per Dot
as a Function of Ambient Temperature
IpEAK
"""HDSP-460X
./)
v, -
~c
I
I
0
~
f-HOSP.41QXI440X
FORWARD VOLTAGE - V
Figure 2. -Forward Current vs. Forward Voltage
HDSP-440X/470X, HDSP-450X
-
PEAK DOT CURRENT - rnA
Figure 3. Relative Efficiency (Luminous Intensity Per Unit Dot)
vs. -Peak Current per Dot
operational Considerations ELECTRICAL
Circuit Design
These display devices are composed of light emitting diodes,
with the light from each LED optically stretched to form
individual dots.
These display devices are well suited for strobed operation.
The typical forward voltage values, scaled from Figure 2,
should be used for calculating the current limiting resistor
value and typical power dissipation. Expected maximum VF
values, for the purpose of driver circuit design and maximum power disSipation, may be calculated using the following VF MAX models:
+ IpEAK (6.5 0)
For 5 mA::; IpEAK::; 125 mA
HDSP-440X/-470X Series:
VF = 1.55 V
HDSP-450X Series:
VF
MAX = 1.75 V + I PEAK (35 0)
For IpEAK ~ 5 mA
The Coded Data Controller circuit, shown in Figure 4, is
designed to display eight characters of ASCII text. ASCII
coded data is stored in a local 128 x 8 RAM. After the
7-99
microprocessor has loaded the RAM, local scanning circuitry controls the decoding of the ASCII, the display data
loading and the display row select function. With minor
modifications the circuit can be utilized for up to 128
display characters. The RAM used in this circuit is an
MCM6810P with the address and data inputs isolated with
tristate buffers. This allows the RAM to be accessed either
by the microprocessor or by the local scanning electronics.
The protocol is arranged such that the microprocessor
always takes precedence over the local scanning electronics.
The Motorola 6810 RAM stores 8 bytes of ASCII data which
is continuously read, decoded and displayed. The ASCII
data from the RAM is decoded by the Motorola 6674 128